A
SURE GUIDE 
OR,
The BEST and NEAREST Way
TO 
Physick and Chirurgery: 
That is to say, 
The Arts of Healing by Medicine, and Manual Operation. 
Being 
An Anatomical Description of the whole Body of Man, 
and its Parts, with their Respective Diseases, demonstrated from 
the Fabrick and use of the said Parts, In Six Books. 
VIZ.
1 Describing all, and every of the Bones of Mans 
Body, according to the Ancient Method. 
2. Describing the Belly, and all its Parts and Bowels 
with their respective Diseases. 
3. Describing the Chest, and all its Parts and Con- 
tents, with their respective Diseases. 
4.  Describing the Head, and Face, with all their 
Parts Containing and Contained, and their 
respective Diseases. 
5. Describing the Limbs of the Body, with the many 
Regiments of Muscles, and their Diseases. 
6. Containing a new Description of the Bones, by a 
Method first invented by our Author, handling 
all the Diseases & Symptoms of the said Bones. 
At the end of the Six Books are added twenty four Tables, cut in Brass, containing one hundred eighty four figures 
with an Explanation of them; which are referred to in above a thousand places in the Books, for the help of yong Artist. 
Written in Latin, by Johannes Riolanus, Junior, Doctor of Physick, Physitian 
in ordinary to the Queen Mother of France many years together, and the last she had; And also the 
Kings Professor of Anatomy and Herbarism, in the University of Paris.  
Englished by Nich. Culpeper, Gent, and William Rand Doctor 
of the Liberal Arts, and of Physick. 
The Physitians Library 
Contains all the Works in English of these most Famous 
Physitian following. Viz. 
Sennertus Practice of 
Physick, &c. 
Riverius Practice and 
Observations, 
Platerus Practice and 
Observations, 
Bartholinus Anatomy.
Riolanus Anatomy.
Veslingus Anatomy. 
Lusitanus his wonder- 
ful Practice. 
Johnston’s Idea. 
Nich Culpeper.
Mart. Ruland. 
Will. Rand. 
Joh. Fernelius & 
Abdiah Cole. 
Doctors of 
Physick. 
All which are of most excellent Use for all Rational Persons; especially for all 
Chirurgions at Sea in his most Royal Majesties Ships: and all others that are on 
Trading Voyages for the Advancement of the wealth and Honor of his Kingdoms. 
London: Printed by Peter Cole Printer and Book-seller, at the Sign of the 
Printing-press in Cornhil near the Royal Exchange. 1669. 

Physick Books Printed by Peter Cole at the Exchange London. Viz.
1 A GOLDEN Practice  
of Physick; plainly disco- 
ring the KINDS with the 
several CAUSES of every 
disease, and their most proper 
CURES, in respect to the 
Causes from whence they 
come; after a new, easie and 
plain Method of Knowing, 
Foretelling, Preventing, and 
Curing all Diseases incident 
to the Body of Man. Full of 
proper Observations and Re- 
medies both of Ancient and 
Modern Physitians. Being 
the Fruit of One and Thirty 
years Travel, and fifty years 
Practice of Physick. By Dr. 
Plater, Dr. Cole, and Nich. 
Culpeper. 
2 Sennertus Practical Phy- 
sick; the first Book in three 
Parts. 1 Of the Head. 2 Of 
the Hurt of the internal Sen- 
ses. 3 Of the external Senses, 
in five Sections. 
3 Sennertus Practical Phy- 
sick; the second Book in 
four Parts 1 Of the Jaws 
and Mouth. 2 Of the Breast, 
3 Of the Lungs. 4 Of the 
Heart. 
4 Sennertus third Book of 
Practical Physick in four 
teen Parts, treating, 1 Of 
the Stomach and Gullet. 2 
Of the Guts, 3 Of the Me- 
sentery, Sweetbread and Omen- 
ium, 4 Of the Spleens, 5 Of 
the Sides, 6 Of the Scurvey, 
7 and 8 Of the Liver, 9 Of 
the Ureters 10 Of the Kid- 
nies, 11 and 12 Of the 
Bladder, 13 and 14 Of the 
Privities and Generation in 
Men. 
5 Sennertus fourth Book 
of Practical Physick in three 
Parts, Part I Of the Dis- 
eases in the Privities of Wo- 
men. The first Section, Of 
Diseases of the privy Part, 
and the Neck of the Womb. 
The second Section, Of the 
Diseases of the Womb, Part 
2, Of the Symptoms in the 
Womb and from the Womb. 
The second Section, Of the 
Symptoms in the Terms and 
other Fluxes of the Womb. 
The third Section. Of the 
Symptoms that befal all Vir- 
gins and Women in their 
Wombs, after they are ripe 
of Age. The fourth Section, 
Of the Symptoms which are 
in Conception. The fifth 
Section, Of the Government 
of Women with Child, and 
preternatural Distempers in 
Women with Child. The 
sixth Section, Of Symptoms 
that happen in Childbearing. 
The seventh Section, Of the 
Government of Women in 
Child-bed, and of the Dis- 
eases that come after Travel. 
The first Section, Of Dis- 
eases of the Breasts. The se- 
cond Section, Of the Sym- 
ptoms of the Breasts. 
To which is added a Tra- 
ctate of the Cure of Infants, 
Part 1, Of the Diet and 
Government of Infants. The 
second Section, Of Diseases 
and Symptoms in Children. 
6 Sennertus fifth Book of 
Practical Physick, Or the 
Art of Chyrurgery in six 
Parts. 1, Of Tumors. 2, Of 
Ulcers. 3, Of the Skin, Hair 
and Nails. 4, Of Wounds, 
with an excellent Treatise of 
the Weapon Salve. 5, Of 
Fractures. 6, Of Luxations. 
7 Sennertus sixth and last 
Book of Practical Physick in 
nine Parts, I, Of Diseases 
from occult Qualities in ge- 
neral. 2, Of occult, ma- 
lignant, and venemous Dis- 
eases arising from the inter- 
nal fault of the humors. 3, Of 
occult Diseases from Water, 
Air, and Infections, and of 
infectious Diseases. 4, Of 
the Venereal Pox. 5, Of out- 
ward Poysons in General. 
6, Of Poysons from Mine- 
rals and Metals. 7, Of Poy- 
sons from Plants. 8, Of Poy- 
sons that come from Living 
Creatures. 9, Of Diseases 
by Witchcraft, Incantation, 
and Charms. 
8 Sennertus Treatise of 
Chymistry, shewing the A- 
greement and Disagreement 
of Chymists and Galenists. 
9 Sennertus two Treatises 
1, Of the Pox.2 Of the Gout. 
10 Sennertus thirteen Books 
of Natural Philosophy: or 
the Nature of all things in 
the world. 
11 Twenty four Books of 
the Practice of Physick, being 
the Works of that Learned 
and Renowned Doctor La-
zarus Riverius, Physitian and 
Counsellor to the late King, 
&c. 
12 Idea of Practical Phy- 
sick in twelve Books. 
13 Bartholinus Anatomy, 
with very many larger Brass 
Figures, than any other A 
natomy in English. 
14 Veslingus Anatomy of 
the Body of Man. 
15 Riolanus Anatomy. 
16 A Translation of the 
new Dispensatory, made by 
the Colledg of Physitians of 
London, in Folio and in O- 
ctavo: whereunto is added 
the Key of Galens Method of 
Physick.  
17 A Directory for Mid- 
wives, or a guide for women, 
the first and second Part. 
18 Galens Art of Pny- 
sick. 
19 A new Method both 
of studying and practising 
Physick. 
20 A Treatise of the Ric- 
kets. 
21 Medicaments for the 
Poor: or, Physick for the 
common people. 
22 Health for the Rich 
and Poor, by Diet without 
Physick. 
23 One thousand New, 
Famous and Rare Cures, in 
Folio and Octavo. 
24 A Treatise of Pulses 
and Urins. 
25 A Treatise of Blood- 
letting, and Cures perform- 
ed thereby. 
26 A Treatise of Scarifi- 
cation, and Cures performed 
thereby. 
27 The English Physitian 
enlarged. 
The London Dispensatory 
in Folio, of a great Chara- 
cter in Latin! 
28 The London Dispensa-
tory in Latin, a small Book  
in Twelves. 
29 Chymistry made easie 
and useful: Or, the Agree- 
ment and Disagreement of 
Chymists and Galenists: 
Dr. Cole, &c. 
30 A New Art of Physick 
by Weight, or five hundred 
Aphorismes of Insensible 
Transpiration, Breathing or 
Vapor coming forth of the 
Body; By Dr. Cole. 
Physick Books 
Newly Printed.
Zacutus Lusitanus his won-
deful Practice, or admira-
ble CASES and CURES in
Physick.
Platerus Observations with
Histories of his Famous
CURES according to the
Method of his Golden Pra-
now also printed.
Sennertus his Practice of
Physick in six Books: all
which may be bound in two
Books in Octavo.
One thousand famons and
rare Cures by M. Ruland. 
Divinity Books Printed by Peter Cole, &c. 
Eighteen Several Books of 
Mr. Burroughs, viz. on 
Matth. II. 
1 Christs call to all those 
that are weary and heavy la- 
den, to come to him for rest. 
2 Christ the great Teacher 
of Souls that come to him. 
3 Christ the humble Tea- 
cher of those that come to  
him. 
4 The only easie way to 
Heaven. 
5 The Excellency of holy 
Courage in evil times. 
6 Gospel Reconciliation. 
7 The Rare Jewel of 
Christian Contentment. 
8 Gospel Worship. 
10 A Treatise of Earthly 
Mindedneß, and of Heavenly 
Mindedneß, and Walking 
with God. 
11 An Exposition of the 
Prophesie of Hoseah. 
12 The Evil of Evils, or 
the exceeding sinfulness of 
Sin. 
15 Of precious Faith.
14 Of Hope. 
15 Of walking by Faith, 
and not by Sight. 
16 The Christians living 
to Christ upon 2 Cor. 5.15. 
17 A Catechism. 
18 Moses Choice, &c. 
Dr. Hills WORKS. 
Mr. Stephen Marshals New 
WORKS. Viz. 
1 Ot Christs Intercession, 
or of sins of Infirmity. 
2 The high Prlviledg of 
Believers, that they are the 
Sons of God. 
3 Faith the means to feed 
on Christ. 
4 Of Self-denial. 
5 The Saints Duty to  
keep their Hearts, &c.  
6 The Mystery of Spiri- 
tual Life. 
Twenty one several Books of 
Mr. William Bridge col- 
lected into two Volumes. 
VIZ. 
1 Scripture Light the most 
sure Light. 
2 Christ in Travel. 
3 A lifting up for the cast 
down. 
4 Of the Sin against the 
Holy Ghost. 
5 Of Sins of Infirmity. 
6 The false Apostle tried 
and discovered. 
7 The good and means 
of Establishment.


To the Right Honorable, 
HENRY LAWRENCE, Esquire; 
Lord President of the Councel to his 
Highneß, the Lord Protector. 
Right Honorable, 
IT being my hap some years since to find in 
the Stationers shop at Amsterdam, your 
Lordships Elegant Treatise of Baptisme, 
and being upon Enquiry, informed tou- 
ching the quality of the Author; I wondred 
what Gentleman it was, that having a stock 
of Honor & Repute in the world, had with- 
al so much Christian Courage, as to venture it in that kind. 
For I judged (and I suppose rightly) that for a Gentleman of 
name and note, at that time to dare to vindicate the true 
Christian Baptisme, contemning the clamorous censures of 
the weake Multitude of Pretenders to Religion and Learning, 
was an Act of more true and high Courage than to storm a 
Town. And I humbly conceive, Experience has evidenced 
the Truth hereof, since hundreds (not to say thousands) that 
have adventured their Lives to gain Honor and Riches in the 
Field, have in their hearts found it too hard an Adventure 
(however otherwise convinc't in their understandings) to 
own and acknowledg the true Christian Baptisme, and sub- 
ject themselves to the scorned practice thereof, with the 
evident hazard of much of their acquired Honor, and of their 
future Repute, and the advacement depending there upon. 
That this action, nevertheless, of yours (my Lord) has 
not been attended, with al that Ignominy and Prejudice, 
which was only to be expected from Men; is the singular pro- 
vidence of God, giving Courage and Ingenuity, to many o- 
thers of note, soon after (much animated doubtless by so 
and generous a Leader as your Lordship) to acknow- 
ledg and submit to the Divine verity, and beautiful,and most
B lovely


The Epistle Dedicatory. 
lovely Rationality of that solemn Institution of our Mr. 
Christ; and his eminent blessing that part of the soldiery, 
Characterised thereby. Much affected therefore with your 
Lordships Christian Vertue in this kind, and desirous to 
commend the same to Posterity; It has not been since that 
time in my power to do it more effectually, than by prefix- 
ing your truly honorable Name in the Front of this excellent 
Anatomical Treatise, and best Foundation of the Art of Hea- 
ling, commonly though corruptly called Physick. The 
fitness of which Dedication, I shal with your Honors gentle 
Patience, thus demonstrate 
1 Cor.13.
15, 16. 17.
18.30.31
32.
Colo. 2.12.
Seeing this book is nothing (for the most part) but a Decla- 
ration and Exposition of the stupendiously admirable wis- 
dom of the Eternal our Maker, shining forth in the most cu- 
rious Fabrick of Mans body; to confirm and seal the beleefe of 
the Resurrection whereof (which is the very Foundation of 
Christianity) baptisme seems (by the Scripture) to have been 
cheifly ordained, by our great Mr. Christ; that as we had 
one solemn Ceremony to represent his sufferings and death, 
we might not want another to set forth and solemnize his 
burial and Resurrection (without which his own death and 
his Disciples Faith had been in vain) and to take possession in 
and by a Figure of our own Resurrection to come (For, we 
are, saith Paul, Buryed with Christ, in our Baptisme, and therein 
also risen with him; That is, in a figure, being through a solemn 
Ceremonious possession of our future Ressurrection from the 
grave, instated into eternal life.) This being so (my Lord) to 
whom should this excellent Description of the body of Man 
in general, with al its parts, and their Respective Diseases, be 
dedicated, rather than to him that has vindicated to the 
Christian world, that excellent pledge of the Resurrection 
thereof; to wit, the Baptisme of Christ rightly solemnized: 
whereby al true beleevers are mightily assured, that though 
this curiously built House of our Earthly Tabernacle, be so- 
wen in the dust, yet it shal not there abide for ever, as the 
beasts that perish. Accept therefore (Generous Sir) from 
your most humble servant this Testimony of your Christian
Courage 


The Epistle Dedicatory. 
Courage and sincerity, and suffer this excellent Treatise to 
shelter it self under your honorable Patronage. And though 
this testimony of your vertue so publickly given, may (I 
fear) afford some disgust to your Modesty, yet I beseech your 
Lordship to let it pass, for the glory of our great Mr. Christ, 
and the Edification of Christendom. And I have much rea- 
son to hope, it may be a Monument of your honorable Me- 
mory, when probably the royal and Magnificent tombes at 
Westminster, shal pledge the Fate of them in Pauls, and be 
overwhelmed with Dust and Ruins. Such is the desire and 
Hopes (my Lord) of him that craves leave to subscribe him- 
self, 
From my House neer 
Cripple-gate in London. 
December, 22. 1656. 
Your Honors, 
Most humble Servant, and true 
Admirer of your Christian Inge- 
nuity, Sincerity, and Courage, 
William Rand.
B 2 


Mris. Culpepers Information, Vindication, and 
Testimony, concerning her Husbands Books to 
be Published after his Death. 
SO great are the Afflictions 
wherewith our Heavenly 
Father hath been pleased to 
exercise me his poor Hand- 
maid, that I have not only 
lived to see my dear Hus-
band, (the Stay and Solace 
of my life) taken from me:
but it hath been my hard hap 
also to see his Reputation, and Memory (which wil 
be dear to al Posterity, for the works he hath written 
for the Common Good of this Nation) blemished, and 
Eclipsed, by the covetous and unjust Forgeries of 
one, who, though he calls himself Nathaniel, is far 
from being an Israelite in whom there is no guile; 
who was not content to publish a Hodgpodg of un- 
digested Collections, and Observations of my deer 
Husband deceased, under the Title of Culpeper’s last 
Legacy; but to make the Deceit more taking, he 
steeled his Forehead so far, and brased it so hard, 
as not to be ashamed to forge two Epistles, one in 
mine, and the other in my Husbands Name; of the 
penning of which, he nor I, never so much as drea- 
med: And yet be impudently affirmeth in my Name, 
that my Husband Laid a severe Injunction on me to 
publish them for the general good, after his decease; 
and that they are his last Experiences in Physick and 
Chyrurgery. And in the Title of his Book, he said, 
They are the choycest, and most profitable secrets, 
resolved never to be published til after his Death. Al 
which Expressions in the Title and Epistles, are as 
fals as the Father of Lyes; and every word in them, 
forged and feigned. And he knew wel enough, that 
no discreet, honest man, that was a friend to my 
Husband, or me, would ever have agreed to such 
infamous and dishonest practices; and therefore I 
desire all Courteous Readers of the Writings of my 
Husband, to take notice of this Deceit, and to assure 
themselves that it never entred into his head, to 
publish such an undigested Gallimoffery, under the 
promsing and solemn Name of his Last Legacy, and 
that whereby he gained bis Reputation in the 
World, as the Imposter makes him speak in his 
forged Epistle. And I desire any in different Reader, 
that hath observed my Husbands lofty, and Mascu- 
line manner of expressing himself in his Prefaces, and 
Epistles Dedicatory, whether in case he had been 
minded or disposed to take so solemn a farewel of 
the world, as the Forger makes him to do; whether, 
I say, he would have done it in such a whining 
fashion, and so in the Stile of a Balade-maker, as to 
say, And now, if it please Heaven to put a period 
to my Life, and Studies, that I must bid al things 
under the Sun farewel: Farewel to my dear Wife
and Child, farewel Arts and Sciences, farewel al 
Worldly Glories, adiew Readers. Certainly my Hus- 
band would have been far more serious, and materi- 
al, in such a case, as any discreet man wil Judg. 
Neither can it be thought, that in such a solemn 
Valediction, he could possibly forget his wonted re- 
spects to the Colledg of Doctors, to whom he did so 
frequently addreß himself, in divers of his writings. 
Courteous Reader, I shal say no more touching the 
abuse of the Book-seller, only to prevent (as much 
as concerns me) thy being abused for the future, 
know, That my Husband left seventy-nine Books of 
his own making, or Translating, in my hand, and I 
have deposited them into the hands of his, and my 
much honored Friend, Mr. Peter Cole, Book-seller,  
at the Printing-Press, neer the Royal Exchange 
(for the good of my Child ) from whom thou mayest 
expect to receive in print, such of them as shal be 
thought fit to serve thee in due season, without any 
Disguises or Forgeries, unto which I do hereby give 
my attestation. Also my Husband left seventeen Books 
compleatly perfected, in the hands of the said Mr.  
Cole, for which he paid my Husband in his life-time: 
And Mr. Cole is ready and willing (on any good oc- 
casion) to shew any of the said seventy-nine Books, 
or the seventeen, to such as doubt thereof. 
And if any Person shal question the Truth of any 
part of this Vindication, or Epistle; if they wil 
take pains to come to me, I wil face to face, justifie the 
truth of every word thereof, as I have subscribed my 
Hand thereunto in the presence of many witnesses. 
I profeß in the presence of the great God, the sear-
cher of al hearts, before whom Mr. Brooks and I 
must one day give an account of al our Actions: 
That I have not published this Epistle or Vindicati- 
on, out of any dis-respect to Mr. Brooks (for I much 
respect the man, and would be glad to serve him to 
my power) but only to cleer my Husband from the 
folly and weakneß cast upon him by the means above 
expressed. And out of tenderneß to Mr. Brooks, 
I first tried other means of keeping, and afterwards 
of repairing my Husbands Credit, and then stayed 
long to see if he would repair (in any measure) the 
wrong done to my Husband, and my self. I desire to be. 
From my House, next door to the 
Red Lyon in Spittle-fields, 
October, 18. 1655  
Your Servant ( in, 
and for the Truth ) 
Alice Culpeper. 
Mris. Culpeper did the 18. of October, subscribe this Epistle in Vindication of her Hus- 
band’s Reputation, before Ten Witnesses, as she had done another Epistle on the 
ninth of October, almost in the same words with this, except neer the Conclusion. 


The
CONTENTS 
OF 
The First Book. 
Of Osteology, or the History of the Bones. 
Page 
CHAP. 1. The Intent of the Au- 
thor is declared. 1 
Chap. 2. Why we begin our A- 
natomy with the Treatise of
Bones
Chap. 3. The Division of Osteology, or
the History of Bones. 4
Chap. 4. Of the Composition, and Defin-
tion of a Bone. ibid.
Chap. 5. Of the Qualities, or Natural
Disposition of the Bones. 5
Chap. 6. Of the Conjunction of Bones. 6
Chap. 7. The Division of a Sceleton. 7
Chap. 8. Of the Head, being the first Part
of the Sceleton. ibid.
Chap. 9. Of the upper Jaw. 11
Chap. 10. Of the Orbitary Bone 12
Chap. 11. Of the inferior Jaw ibid.
Chap. 12. Of the Os Hyois ibid.
Chap. 13. Of the Teeth 13
Chap. 14. Of the Trunk, being the second
Part of the Sceleton. ibid.
Chap. 15. Of the Chest. 14
Chap. 16. Of the Limbs, being the third
Part of the Sceleton: and first of the
Scapula. 15
Chap. 17. Of the Shoulder. ibid.
Chap. 18. Of the Cubitus, and Radius. 16
Chap. 19. Of the Hand. ibid.
Chap. 20. Of the Bones of the Ilium 17
Chap. 21. Of the Bone of the Thigh. ibid.
Chap. 22. Of the Leg. ibid.
Chap. 23. Of the Foot 18
Page 
Chap. 24. In what Particulars the Bones 
of Men differ from those of Women. ib. 
Chap. 25. Of the number of the Bones in a 
Mans Body. 19 
Chap. 26. The History of an Infants 
Bones, till the Age of seven years. ibid. 
Chap. 27. Of the Head 21  
Chap. 28. Of the Back and Breast-bones. 
23 
Chap. 29. Of the upper Limbs 24 
Chap. 30. Of the Inferior Limbs ibid. 
Chap. 31. Of the Numbers of Bones. 25
The Second Book. 
CHAP. 1. General Precepts, which 
be that would be an Anatomist, 
must be first acquainted with 26  
Chap. 2. Of the Natural and Legitimate 
Conformation of the Body. 29 
Chap. 3. The Division of Mans Body. 31 
The Medicinal Consideration ibid. 
Chap. 4. Of the lower Ventricle. 32  
The Scituation of the parts of the Belly. 
ibid. 
The Medicinal Consideration 33  
The Medicinal Consideration 34  
Chap 5. Of the Scarf Skin 34 
The Medicinal Consideration ibid. 
C Chap. 6 


THE CONTENTS. 
Page
Chap. 6. Of the Skin 35
The medicinal Consideration. 36 
Chap. 7. Of the Fatty Membrane ibid. 
Chap. 8. Of the Fleshy membrane 37   
The medicinal Consideration ibid. 
Chap. 9. Of the common membrane of the
muscles 38 
Chap. 10. Of a muscle in the general ibid. 
Chap. 11. Of a Tendon 40 
Chap. 12. Of the muscles of the Belly. ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 42 
Chap. 13. Of the Peritoneum ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 43 
Chap. 14. The Division of the Parts of 
the Belly 44 
Chap. 15. Of the Navel ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 45  
Chap. 16. Of the Omentum, or Call ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration ibid. 
Chap. 17. Of the Guts  46  
The medicinal Consideration 48  
Chap. 18. Of the Mesenterium ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 49  
Chap. 19. Of the Sweet-bread, or Pan- 
creas. 50 
Chap. 20. Of the Vena Porta ibid. 
Chap. 21. What is to be considered in the 
Vena Porta 51 
Chap. 22. Of the Celiacal Artery 52  
Chap. 23 Of the Stomach ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 54
Chap. 24. Of the Liver. 57 
The medicinal Consideration 58  
Chap. 25. Of the Bladder of Gall 59
The medicinal Consideration 60 
Chap. 26. Of the Spleen 61  
The medicinal Consideration 63 
Chap. 27. Of the Vena Cava, and Aorta, 
within the lower Belly 64 
The medicinal Consideration 65 
Of the Aorta descending 67 
Of the Nerve of the lower Belly ibid. 
Chap. 28. Of the Kidneys ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 68 
Chap. 29. Of the Ureters 70  
Chap. 30. Of the Piß-Bladder ibid. 
The medicinal Consideration 71 
Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; 
and first of the Yard 73 
The Medicinal Consideration 74  
Chap, 32. Of the Groyns 76 
Chap. 33. Of the Fundament. ibid. 
The Medicinal Consideration 77 
Chap. 34. Of the Cod, and Stones. ibid. 
The Medicinal Consideration 78
Page 
Chap. 35. Of the Vessels which carry the
True Seed, of the Seed-Bladders, and
The Prostratæ or Auxiliaries. 79
The Medicinal Consideration. 80
Chap. 36. Of the Genital Parts of a Wo-
man, and first of the External. ibid.
The medicinal Consideration 82
Chap. 37. Of the internal Parts of a Wo-
man which serve Generation 83
The medicinal Consideration 85
Chap. 37. Of the Pains of the Loyns. 90
The Third Book.
Chap. 1. Of the Chest. 94
Chap. 2. Of the Dugs of Woman.
95
The medicinal Consideration. ibid.
Chap. 3. Of the external Parts of the
Chest. 97
Chap. 4. Of the Pleura, Mediastinum,
and Pericardium ibid.
The medicinal consideration 98
Chap. 5 Of the Midrif, or Diaphragma.
101
The Medicinal Consideration 102
Chap. 6. Of the Lungs or Lights ibid.
The medicinal consideration 103 
Chap. 7. Of Respiration, or fetching of
Breath.
Chap. 8. Of the Heart. 107
The medicinal consideration 110
Chap. 9. Of the Vessels, viz. Veins, Ar-
teries, and Nerves contained within
the Chest. 113
The Fourth Book.
Chap. 1. Of the Head. 118
The medicinal consideration. 119
Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 121
Chap. 3. Of the Eyes 136
The medicinal consideration 138
Eye-Lids Diseases. 139
Tear-Kernels


THE CONTENTS.
Page 
Tear-Kernels Diseases. 140 
Diseases of the Tunica Conjunctiva. ib. 
Diseases of the Cornea Tunica. 141 
Diseases of the Uvea Tunica ibid. 
Diseases of the Pupilla ibid. 
Diseases of the Chrystalline and Glassie 
Humor 142 
Diseases of the Optick Nerve ibid.
Diseases and Symtomes of the Sight.
ibid.
Chap. 4. Of the Ear 191
The medicinal consideration 192
Chap. 5. Of the Face, and outside of the
Mouth. 194
The Medicinal Consideration 195
Chap. 6. Of the Nose 197 
The Medicinal Consideration 198 
Chap. 7. Of the Neck 199
The Medicinal Consideration 201 
Chap. 8. Of the Teeth and Gums. 202
The Medicinal Consideration ibid. 
Chap. 9. Of the Gums. 204
Chap. 10. Of the Pallate ibid. 
Chap. 11. Of the Uvula and Isthmus. ib.
The Medicinal Consideration 205
Of the Isthmus ibid. 
Chap. 12. Of the Tongue ibid.
The Medicinal Consideration 206
Chap. 13. Of the Larynx, or Head of  
Wind-pipe 207
The Medicinal Consideration 208
Chap. 14. Of the Aspera Arteria, or
Wind-Pipe ibid.
The Medicinal Consideration 209  
Chap. 15. Of the Oesophagus, or Gullet. 
ibid.
The Fift Book. 
CHAP. 1 Of the Limbs 210  
The Medicinal Consideration  211
Chap. 2, Of the Superior Limbs. ib.
Of the Shoulder-blade, and the Arm 
from the the Shoulder to the Elbow. ib.
Of the Cubit, or part of the Arm from
the Elbow to the Hand 212
Of the Hand ibid.
Of the Nails ibid.
Chap. 3. Of the Inferior Limbs. 213
Chap. 4. In what places Issues are com-
monly made 214
Page
Chap. 5. Of Veins usually opened 215
Chap. 6. Of the Arteries which are ope-
ned. 217
Chap. 7. Of the Muscles, and first of the
Forehead Muscles. 218
Chap. 8. Muscles of the hinder part of the
Head. ibid.
Chap. 9. Muscles of the Eye-lids ibid.
Chap. 10. Muscles of the Eyes 219
Chap. 11. Muscles of the external Ear. ibid.
Chap. 12. Muscles of the Nose 220
Chap. 13. Muscles of the Lips ibid.
Chap. 14. Muscles Of The lower Jaw 221
CHAP. 15. Muscles of the Os Hyoi-
des ibid. 
Chap. 16. Muscles of the Tongue 222 
Chap. 17. Muscles of the Larynx ibid. 
Chap. 18. Muscles of the Pharynx ibid. 
Chap. 19. Muscles of the Gargareon, U- 
vula, or Mouth Pallate. 223 
Chap. 20. Muscle of the Head ibid.
Chap. 21, Muscle of the Neck 224
Chap. 22. Muscles of the Shoulder-blades
ibid.
Chap. 23. Muscles of the Arm 225
Chap. 24. Muscles of the Cubit. ibid.
Chap. 25. Muscles of the Radius 226
Chap. 26. Muscles of the Wrist. 227
Chap. 27. Muscles of the Palm of the 
Hand ibid.
Chap. 28. Muscles of the Fingers 228
Chap. 29. Muscles of the Thumb. 229
Chap. 30. Muscles of the Chest 230
Chap. 31. Of the Midris. 231
Chap. 32. Muscles of the Back and Loyns,
wherewith the Back-bone is moved. ib.
Chap. 33. Muscles of the Belly 232
Chap. 34. Of the motion of the Ilium
Bones and Os Sacrum joyned together.
ibid.
Chap. 35. Muscles of the Testicles ibid.
Chap. 36. The Bladders Muscle ibid.
Chap. 37, Muscles of the Yard 233
Chap. 38. Muscles of the Clytoris ibid.
Chap. 39. Muscle of the Fundament ib.
Chap. 40. Muscles of the Thigh ibid.
Chap. 41. Muscles of the Leg. 235
Chap. 42. Muscles of the Feet 236
Chap. 43, Muscles of the Toes 238
Chap. 44. Muscles of the great Toe 239
Chap. 45. An Introduction to the Art of
Muscular Dissection, shewing an accu-
rate Method to cut up the Muscles of the
whol Body. ibid.
C 2 The


THE CONTENTS. 
Page
The Frontal Muscle 228
The Orbicular muscle of the Eye-lids.
ibid.
Muscles of the Lips ibid.
Muscles of the Nose ibid.
The Temporal Musles 241
The Masseter Muscle ibid.
The Parotick Kernels ibid.
The muscles of the Ears ibid.
The muscles of the Eye  ibid.
Muscles seated in the Neck. 242
Muscles of the Larynx, Pharynx, and
Gargareon 243
The muscles of the hinder part of the
Head and Neck 244
Muscles of the Arm 245
Next thereunto, is the Rotundus minor 
ibid.
Muscles scituate upon the Back and
Loyns ibid.
Muscles of the Breast 246
Muscles of the Cubit ibid.
Muscles of the Radius, the Wrists, the
Fingers and the Thumb 247
Muscles of the Abdomen, or Belly 248
Muscles of the Yard 250
Muscles of the Fundament ibid.
The Bladder muscle 251
Muscles of the Clytoris ibid.
Muscles of the Thigh ibid.
Muscles of the Leg 253
Muscles of the Tarsus 254
Chap. 46.  Of the Veins, Arteries and
Nerves, belonging to the Limbs ibid.
The Medicinal Consideration 258
The Sixt Book.
A New Osteologia, or History
of the Bones. 
Wherin he treats of the Bones, Liga-
ments and Gristles of the Whol Body,
page
by which the Frame of the Body is 
compacted together, the Muscles being 
removed; handling all the Diseases 
and Symptomes which happen unto 
the Bones. 260
CHAP. 1. 260
Chap. 2. Of the great profit of this
new Osteology, or Doctrine of
the Bones 261
Chap. 3. What is to be observed in the 
bones of a dead Body not boyled 262
Chap. 4. Of the Nourishment, Sence, and
and Marrow of the Bones 263
Chap. 5. Of  Articulations, or joyntings
of the Bones ibid.
The Medicinal Consideration 265
Chap. 6. Of the bones of the Skull 267
The Medicinal Consideration 270
Chap. 7. Of the inferior Jaw-bone ibid.
Chap. 8. Of the Teeth ibid.
Chap. 9. Of the Bone Hyoides, and of the
Ligaments 271
Chap. 10. Of the Heads motion, and Li-
gaments 272
Chap. 11. Of the inside of the Ear ibid.
Chap. 12. Of the Clavicula 273
Chap. 13. Of the Breast-bone. ibid.
Chap. 15. Of the Ribs 275
Chap. 16. Of the Back-one ibid.
The Medicinal Consideration 277
Chap. 16. Of the Scapula 278
Chap. 17. Of the Humerus, Cubitus, and
Radius. 280
Chap. 18. Of the Wrist. 281
Chap. 19. Of the Metacarpium, Fingers,
and Sesamoidean Bones ibid.
Chap. 20. Of the Os Ilium, and Thigh-
bone 282
Chap. 21. Of the Patella 284
Chap. 22. Of the Tibia, and Fibula 285
Chap. 23. Of the Foot ibid.
Chap. 24. The number of bones for a
Sceleton ibid.
Chap. 25. Of breaking the bones ibid.
Chap. 26. The Collection, and ordering of
Bones for Sceleton 287
The


1
THE 
FIRST BOOK 
OF
ANATOMY 
AND
PHYSICK. 
OF 
John Riolanus. 
Chap. 1. The Intent of the Author is declared.
The Consider-
ation of Ana-
tomy is.
Philosphical.
(* Viz. God)
Physical,
Both which
are necessary. 
ANATOMY, is considered and handled two waies, Phi- 
losophically, and Physically, Galen, Lib. 1. Anat.  
The Philosopher searcheth out the structure of the 
Parts, the action, and use, that he may know him- 
self, & that the * Work-master may be admired in his 
work; and therefore the knowledg of the Parts alone 
does content him. But the Physitian, besides the 
knowledg of this, brings al into a Practical way, and 
searcheth after the Natural dispositions of every 
Part, that so by veiwing the Anatomy of the Car- 
kases of sound and sick men, he may more easily know the accidents against 
Nature; which happen to those Parts, in such as are alive. 
By Dispositions against Nature, is to be understood Diseases, whose gene- 
ration and end, whether it wil be good or bad, the way and manner of Curing, 
he that would know exactly, must be skilled both in Philosophical, and Phy- 
sical Anatomy; and I dare boldly affirm, that he wil be an abler, and more 
skilful Phisitian that is wel skiled in this Anatomy, than he that contents 
himself, with the bare knowledg of the Parts. 
This manner of shewing, and teaching Anatomy is new, but gives great light, 
& is wonderful necessary for a Phisitian, and I wil lay it down intermixed with 
the order of Anatomy in al the Parts, and shew particularly in every Part, 
what profit wil thereby redound unto a Phisitian, in his Practice. And
D seeing 

2 Physick and Anatomy. Book I. 
seeing the Natural Constitution of every Part which Hippocrates cals 
Euphuian, and is commonly called Health, is three-fold, Simular, Organical, 
and common, The Preternatural Constitution of the Parts, called Sickness, 
must likewise be three-fold and make three kinds of Diseases, Viz. A Dis- 
ease of the Similar, a Disease of the Organical Parts, and a Disease common 
to both. The Similar Constitution, according to Nature, consists in Sub- 
stance, and Temper; The Organical Constitution, which pertains to the 
construction of the Organ, is placed, in number, Magnitude, Scituation, 
and shape or Conformation; which Conformation is again divided into Figure, 
Passage, Cavity, Roughness, and smoothneß; The common Constitution of 
Similar, and Orgamcai Parts, consists in Union and Connexion. This 
three-fold Natural Constitution, I wil declare in al the Parts; afterwards I 
wil lay down in a few words, what may be gathered from this Sound Consti- 
tution, for the Knowledg, foreknowledge, and Cure of a Diseased Consti- 
tution; And Anatomy handled in this Method, wil be the beginning, Middle, 
and end of the whol Art of Physick. This is a short, easie, and clear Method, 
Quickly, and rightly to learn the Act of Curing; which propounds the same, 
visible to the Eyes of such as are wel verst in my Fathers writings, or in the Insti- 
tutions of Sennertus. for by this Method, I shal unlock, & display the creatures in 
Anatomy of Physick: But perhaps some Fool, that is unskilled, wil reprove our 
Disigne, & Object, that we confound the whol Art of Medicine, seing Anatomy 
is a Part of Physiology, distinct fron the rest, and therefore ought to be taught 
apart, seeing Galen himself, in the beginning of his dissection of Muscles, 
reproves the Anatomical Book of Lycus; because in his Treatise of Muscles 
he inferred the Diseases of the Parts. If any prattle such things against us, 
they wil quickly hold their peace, if they read Gal. Lib. 2 admin. Anatom. 
Relateing, That Antient Physitians regarded Anatomy so much, that in al 
their Books of the Cure of Diseases, they inferred Anatomy; and this we see 
Hippocrates did in al his Books. Many are the Sorts of the Figures, both 
within, and Without the Body, (saith Hippocrates, in Lib. de vet.. Med.) 
Which have much different qualifications in the Sick, and the Sound; all 
which you must perfectly distinguish one from another, that you may rightly 
know, and observe the causes of every one of them.
And Profitable
in Medicine. 
According to Aristotle, Health, and Sickneß, are the Fundamental 
Parts of Medicine: Both of them arc contained in the Parts; and Sickness 
compared with Health is the better discerned. Ad to this. That Aristotle 
Writes, that he that would Cure the Eyes, must first know the Structure of the 
Eye. Again, Hippocrates held, that Diseases were distinguished according 
to the Parts they were inherent in; and the principal Curative indications, 
were taken from the Affect, and the Part affected; and Remedies both Medi- 
cinal, and Chyrurgical were Prescribed and administred diversly, according to 
the Parts Afflicted. Therefore Galen wrote his Therapeuticks of the com- 
position of Medicines, according to the Parts afflicted: and Avicenna did 
wisely, when pecceving that the Seats of Diseases could not be known with- 
out skil in Anatomy, Before the Diseases. of the particular Parts he let down 
their Anatomy. And if we beleeve Galen in Lib. de Part med. The first 
Matter or Subject of Medicine, in the Body, as it is the Subject of Health 
and Sickneß.
The Intent of the Author. 
Our intent then is by a short and easie Method, To deliver in writing, and 
demonstrate in dead Bodies, of the seats of al Diseases, and Symptomes, both 
Internal, and External; and the particular way of Cure accor- 
ding to the order of Anatomy, which is publickly observed. A notable 
peice of Workmanship to learn Physick by, by which 'tis easie to manifest, and 
bring to light the Errours, in the Cures of Diseases and to instruct and inform 
such as are Studious in Physick, by that time they have been hearers and be- 
holders two yeares, of two Anatomies in a year, with diligent reading of
Books, 


Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 3. 
Books, and excercize of the knowing of Planes, and other Drugs, and visiting 
of the Sick with him that is their teacher. Excellently said Johannes Ferne- 
lius in the beginning of his Pathology, I shal never think any man wel skilled 
in the kpowledg of Diseases, unless he have been an Eye witness of the seats 
of them, in the Body of man, and know how they are affected against Nature, 
neither can he come to this unleß he be skiful and exquisite in Anatomy, and 
whatsoever he reads or hears, let him seriously contemplate it in the Body of 
man, and settle the cheif knowledg of things in his mind. 
Chap. 2. Why we begin our Anatomy with the Treatise 
of Bones. 
The Method of
teaching dou-
ble.
THat kind of stile is two-fold, which is used in the explication of any 
thing, Gal Com. ad Part. q. Lib. I. de fract. et Cap. I. Lib. 
Synops. de Puls. The first is called Synopticus, when the Matter is briefly laid 
down; The other Diexodicus, when it is Copiously unfolded, nothing being 
passed by which is profitable to be declared; The former helps the memory the 
latter cleers the matter to the understanding. For which Cause Galen divided 
his Books into Isagogical, and perfect; the first being fitted to young begin- 
ners, the other to proficients, as himself testifies; Lib. de libris Propriis. 
This is also confirmed by the authority of Hippocrates ; Lib. de vet. Med. 
Where he adviseth Physitians to teach easie things to young students, and such 
as may be quickly learned; ad hereunto; That al men desire to learn apace, 
according to Aristot. Lib. 2 de Rhetor. Chap. 10. And the Method of 
breife teaching, is alwaies grateful, both to young students, and to perfect 
Masters; for it teacheth the former what things must be learned;  and in the 
latter cals back to their memory what they have learned before, and almost 
forgotten, Gal. Lib. 4. de diff. puls. 
Wisely, and Elegantly, did the Emperor Justinian judg, That a compen- 
dium of the Lawes was first to be propounded, to invite Novices to know- 
ledg. Then are al things delivered most commodiously when they are first 
delivered by a plain and simple way, and then by an exact and diligent in- 
terpretation; for if we burden weak, though studious minds at beginning,  
with variety and Multiplicity of things, we either make them desert their 
studies, or else put young Men to great labor and distrust, and bring them by a 
longer way to what might be learned with more speed, less labor, and no distrust.
Why the Au-
thor wrote a
Synopsis. 
Therefore following the precepts of Galen, and Hippocrates, I wil describe 
a breife, and cleer Manual of Anatomy, following the counsel of Galen, who 
had rather write a Synopsis of his Books of Pulses himself, then to leave the 
business to another, who by not understanding his mind, and sense, should
pervert or confound his meaning. 
Why he begins
with the Bones.
I begin with the Bones, because they are the foundation of al the Parts of 
the whol Body, which is substained, Included, Preserved, and moved by the 
Bones; which, according to Hippocrates, give stability, and form to the 
Body.
The necessary
of writting of
the Bones. 
Therefore he that is studious in Physick, ought to be instructed in the per- 
fect knowledg of the Bones, before he come to behold the Anatomy of the 
whole Body: otherwise he wil be ignorant in designing the original, and in- 
sertion of the Muscles, and the sticking of other Parts to certain Concep- 
tacles of the Bones, unless he be skilled in the History of Bones; at which 
Anatomy is to begin, as Hippocrates taught, and after him, Galen.
D 2 Chap.


4 Physick and Annatomy. Book 1. 
Chap. 3. The Division of Osteology., or the History 
of the Bones.
The Parts of Osteology. 
THe History of the Bones is called. Ostelogy, of which are two Parts. 
Practice, and Theory. I cal that the Theory, which is conversant in 
the knowledg of their conformation and use. The Practice is the manual 
operation which comprehends both Ossilegium; and Ossifragium; Ossilegium, 
is the manner of preparing Bones to make a Sceleton; Ossifragium is that which 
searches out the joining, and knitting together of the Bones, and Joynts, by Liga- 
ments, and Cartilages, and by breaking, and deviding them; searches out 
their internal, and hiden Parts. 
See Chap. 26. and 27. Lib. 6. Of this Book. 
Chap. 4. Of the Composition, and Definition of a 
Bone. 
Four Consi- 
derations. 
THat the Nature of a Bone may be perfectly understood, there are four 
things to be considered in it; The Matter, Efficient, Form, and 
End. 
1.
Matter, Pro-
per.
The Matter of the Bone is Proper, or Diverse.
Proper is considered Generally, or Specially. 
Generation.
Proper Matter, taken Generally, is double; the one for Generation, the 
other for Nourishment; the Bones are made of the Seed by content of al Phy- 
sitians. The Seed consists of Humor, and Spirit: The Humors are of two 
Parts; the one thinner, of which the noble Parts are formed; the other 
thicker, of which the Bones are ingendred. 
Nourishment.
The matter of Nourishment is also two fold; Remote, and Neer; Remote, 
is Blood, by which al the Parts of our Body are nourished: Neer, is the Mar- 
row contained in the Cavity of the Bones, or a Marrowy Juyce shut up in the 
Spongious Bones. 
Constitution.
The Proper Matter considered specially, regards the Bone already made, 
which is various in respect of substance, and quallity ; and so the substance of 
one Bone is diverse, by reason of the Epiphysis, which is Softer then the rest 
of the Bone; or the Apophysis, which is harder then the rest of the Bone: also 
the whol Bone, if it be Solid, is harder without, then it is within. If it be 
hollow, the Internal Superficies is hardest. 
As for what belongs to Quallity, and Namely Color; the Bone, the more 
Sollid it is, the more White it is; that which is hollow, is pale or red- 
dish.
Matter di-
verse 
By the diverse Matter of the Bone, understand that which compasseth it 
about; and it is a Membrane, and a Cartilage. The Membrane which com- 
passeth about the Bone, is called Periostion, and sticks firmly to it. By be- 
nefit of which, it Obscurely feels. The extremities of the Bones are covered 
with a Cartilage, which Facilitates the Motion of the Bone, and hinders its 
wearing. 
2.
Efficient cause. 
The Efficient Cause of the Bone, is the Implanted Generative Spirit, or 
rather heat, which torrefies and dryes the Matter of the Bone. Gal Lib. I. 
de facul. natural. acknowledged the faculty which forms the Bones; to 
which Heat and Spirit, do administer.
3.
Form,
essential. 
The form of a Bone is double;  Essential, and accidental: That is called 
Essential, which makes is to be a Bone, Namely, the Vegetable 
Soul. The 



Book I.  Physic and Anatomy. 5
The Face, saith Aristotle Lib. 2. de Generat. animal, is no Face, if it 
want the Soul; and so is the Flesh and Bone, But with Physicians, the form 
of Similar Parts, is nothing else then their temper. The temper of the Bone, 
is cold and dry; therefore Coldness and Driness constitute the form of the 
Accidental.
Bone. The accidental form, is the Figure of them, which is Proper, and pe- 
culiar to every Bone, and is most commonly round in al Bones, both in 
Longitude, and Latitude.
4.
End,
General.
Special. 
The end of the Bones, is their Use; and this is general, and particular; 
That is called General, which serves for the whol Body; and that is three fold, 
1. To establish, and make firm the soft Parts. 2. To give shape, and Figure 
to the Parts. 3. To help the Motion, and Progress of the Body. The 
Particular end, or use, is that which is Proper to every several Bone.
Definition. 
From what hath been written, this Definition of a Bone, may be gathered; 
It is a Similar part, most cold and dry, Formed by heat of the thick and Fat 
substance of the Seed; for the form and settlement of the whole Body.  
Chap. 5. Of the Qualities, or Natural Disposition of the 
Bones.
Doctrine of
Bones Double,
Of Infants
and men grown 
up.
THe Doctrine of Bones, ought to be double one which treats of the 
Bones of infants, which from their Birth til seven years of Age, differ in  
many things from such as are grown up: the other of men of perfect Age, which 
We now handle. 
And seeing al Doctrin of Bones, is referred to Physical use, we must know 
the Condieions, and affections of Bones, wel and Naturally affected, which 
are either common to al, or Proper to some.
Affection of
the Bomes are.
common. 
The common are nine which shal be Described, and Demonstrated, in our 
new Osteology, at the latter end of this Manual. In dry Bone wel Prepared, 
are five things shewed, 1. Hardness and solidity. 2. They have holes out- 
wardly, Especially toward the Exstremities, by which is ingress given to the 
little Veines, and arteries, for Nourishment and life. 3. A cartilaginous 
Crust at the Extremities, and the Periostion, which compasseth about the 
whol Bone, the Cartilaginous extremities excepted. 4. Continuity, and 
Equallity in its whol substance; wherefore the callous, by which broken 
Bones are united, is not Natural. 5. A fit and Convenient joyning of One 
Bone with another.
Proper,
2.
of
Bones seper-
ated. 
The affections Proper to the several Bones, are twofold; either such as re- 
gard every Bone severally; or such as regard more Bones then one, joyned 
together. 
1. The affections of the first sort, are four; Hollowness, Prominence, 
Roughness, and Smoothness; which affections are considered in the extreme 
superficies of the Bone, in as much as Bones are referred to mutual conjunction  
because they cannot subsist alone by themselves. The Head of the a Omoplata 
is hollow; the b Shoulder Bone sticks out; the c Ischium, or Huckle-bone, 
is hollow, the d Bone of the Thigh sticks out; the Skul is rough behind for 
the e insertion of Muscles, in other places ’tis smooth, and Polished: Al which 
affections, if they are such as Nature made them, they are according to Na- 
ture; if otherwise, they are beside Nature. 
Also a Cavity is deep, or superficiary; that which is deep, is called f Cotyle; 
the superficiary g Glene. A Prominency, or Parts sticking out, is called 
Apophysis or Epiphysis: Both of them are round, or long, or hollow: 
If it be round, it is called a Head; if it be large and long, it is absolutely Nam- 
ed a h Head; but if it be short, and depressed, it is called i Condylus. The 
Heads  or Condyli of smal Bones, are not Epipysis, but  Apiphysis; as in 
nether Jaw, and in the Ribs, and the Bones of the Fingers, and Toes, 
A long 


6 Physick and Anatomy. Book I.
A long Apophysis, is either with a poynt, and called Corone; or simply long, 
and that according to the Figure of it, hath diverse Names; or k Styloides 
l Coracoides, m Odontcides; or else tis terminated in a Head, and then is 
called n Cervix or a Neck.
Whether Apo-
physes have
hollownesses. 
It is not absurd, that some Apophysis should be hollow, Seeing al Cavities 
are, as it were, ingraved in the Apophysis; or else are made of two or three 
Apophyses, as in the Cavity of the Ischium, or Huckle-bone: and although 
somtimes a Cavity make the Body of the Bone, yet it is formed by a bony 
Circumference; which Seeing it sticks out obliquely and orbicularly, without 
the plain superficies, it is worthily accounted an Apophysis; GaL Lib. de 
Ossibus acknowledgeth the Omoplata to be an Apophysis, which is a Cervix, 
the extremity of which, ends in the Glene; therefore Cavities ought to be 
referred to Apophysis; and a Cavity if it be round and large, may be called 
a Head, for the Neck is alwaies subjected to the Head Gal. Proem. Lib. de 
Ossih. 
The Body
and
Extremities,
which are
Apophysis,
and
Epithysis.
In every Bone, which being joyned to another makes a Joynt, I observe 
the Body and the extremities, which are Adnata, or Enata; The body is 
the principal Part, formed of Nature, that it may be the foundation of the 
extream Parts; for Nature ever-more begins the formation of the Bones in the 
middle, and produceth them towards the extremities. The extremities of 
the bones called Enata, are p Apophyses; Adnata are q Epiphyses: the 
Treatise of the Epiphyses pertains to the Osteology of Infants, therefore we 
wil not speak of it here. 
Yet this you may know, that Epiphyses belong to the extremity of the 
Joynts of the bones; and that their Nature is to be sought out in Children; 
for in men grown up, they degenerate into Apophyses, no Foot-steps of the 
antient Division remaining; and yet inwardly they keep the condition of 
their Proper Nature, which ought to be like a pumice, and bloody; but the 
Apophyses are alwais harder.
2.
The Joynting
of Bones. 
The second sort of Affections are, the Articulations of bones, one with an- 
other, which in diverse bones, are different; which now we come to speak 
of, in General. 
2, T. 21. f. C. b, f. 1. a c, f. 4. B. d, f. 1. D. c, T. 15. f4. C. f, T.
21. f. 4. B. g, f. 4. F. f. 2. Fc. h, f. 1. dd. f 4. a. i, f. 2. Ii. k, T. 15. f. 
b. D. 1, T. 21. f. 2. d. m, T. 13. f. 21. a. n, T. 21. f. 2. c. o, ibid P, T. 
2. f. 1. aa. f. 2. bcd. T. 15. f. 3 MNd. q, T. 21. f. 1. 2. q. T. 13. f. 21. a. T. 
15. f. 6. D. 
Chap. 6. Of the Conjunction of Bones. 
Why there are 
many Bones in 
man. 
SEeing  it is not safe, nor comly for man, that Divine Creature, to creep 
along like Worms, and Serpents; Nature hath set his body bolt upright, 
with firm, and sollid bones; not only three, or four in number, but very 
many various, and distinct, whereby he may bow, and move himself every 
way; And that this Workmanship might be the more Elegant, the Bones are 
so joyned together, that the extremity of one, enters into the Cavity of the 
other. 
This structure is called a Joynt, the Nature of which, is much con- 
troverted amongst Anatomists; some contending that the touching 
of two bones one with another, makes a Joynt; others, besides touching, 
ad motion. So that it is the movable touching of two bones, which makes a 
Joynt. 
If Motion be removed from the Definition of a Joynt, Galens Doctrine 
may easily be defended. He constitutes two kinds of Articulation; Diartbrosis,
with 

Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 7
Conjunction
of Bones is
either by 
Articulation 
the Differences 
of which are 
Diarthrosis & 
Synarthrosis.  
with mainfest Motion Synarthrosis, with Obscure, or no Motion: and he 
assigns the differences of Synarthrosis, which are altogether immovable, to be 
Sutura, Harmonia, and Gomphosis, with those which take away Motion 
in the Definition of Articulation, refer to the third speeies of Articulation, 
which they cal Neutral, or mean, between Diarthrosis and Synarthrosis. 
Some give it a new Name, Amphiarthrosis, to wit, when the structure is so 
Obscure, and the Motion so hidden, that you know not whether it appertain 
to Diarthrosis, or Synarthrosis. But that place of Galen being il understood, 
deceives many Anatomists. This Doctrine of Galen seems more probable, 
thus. 
The Common
Species of
which are.
I.
Enarthrosis.
The bones are knit together by Articulations, and Symphyses: Articula- 
tion, is the knittings, or touching of two bones; the differences of which are 
Diarthrosis, and Synarthrosis; the one hath evident Motion, the other 
Obscure, or none at al; and therefore the differences of each, are equal: but 
the one, for example sake, is called Enarthrosis Diarthrodes, with a mani- 
fest Motion; the other Enarthrosis Synarthrodes, with an Obscure Motion; 
Judg the like of the other differences.  
Enarthrosis, is when a large, and long Head, goes into a deep Cavity; 
which seeing it is common both to Diarthrosis, and Synarthrosis, we wil 
give an example of them Both. The Motion of Enarthrosis Diar- 
throsis, is manifest in the Joynt of the Ischium: the Motion of Enar- 
throsis Synarthrodes, is Obscure in the Articulation of the Ancle with the 
Scaphois. 
2.
Arthrodia. 
When a depressed, and plain Head, is received by a shallow and superficial 
Cavity; this Joynting is called Arthrodia, an exemple of Arthrodia 
Diarthrodes, is in the conjunction of the Shoulder with the Omoplata. An 
example of Arthrodia Synarthrodes, is in the Bones of the Wrist, with the 
Metacarpus. 
3. 
Ginglymus.
Which is
simple
or
compouund
Ginglymos, is a mutual ingress of the bones, such as you shal usually see in 
the hinges of Doors and Windows in which that Part of the Hinge which 
bears and that which circles about, have a Mutual ingress one into another. 
The Motion of Ginglymus Diarthrodes, is manifest in the Elbow; the Moti- 
on of Ginglymus Synarthrodes, is Obscure in the joyning of the Ancle to the 
Heel. Modern writers add a fourth to those three, which they cal Trochois, 
in which the Motion of conversion is apparent: such is the joyning of the first 
Vertebra with the second, but it is to be referred to Arthrodia; As for what 
belongs to Ginglimus, and its various differences, we wil thus Methodically 
handle them: Ginglimus is an Articulation of bones, by mutual reception; 
and is simple, or compound: that is called simple, which is made of two 
bones, by one only and simple Articulation in the same Part, as in the juncture 
off the Elbow and Arm. Compound Ginglymus consits of a double Articul- 
ation, which is performed either in the same extremities, or in places distant, 
of two or three Bones, which by a double Articulation end in the same extre- 
mities. It is seen in the Vertebræ of the Neck. A compound Ginglymos by a 
double Articulation in places distant is seen in the Cubitus and Radius, in 
distant places of three bones is seen in al the Vertebræ of the Back and
Loynes. 
Proper species
of Synarthrosis
I.
Harmonia.
Besides Synarthrosis, containes under it, Harmonia, Sutura, and Gom- 
phosis, which are without Motion. a Harmonia, is a Conjunction of bones, 
by simple touching without mutual ingress; and is distinguished by a Line, 
either right, or oblique, or manyfold. b Sutura, is the joyning of bones: as 
though the Teeth of two Jawes, or two Combs were thrust one within the 
other, and is altogether of one and the same form. Gomphosis, is when 
one bone sticks fast, and immovably in another, like a Naile in a Post.
3. Gomphosis.
Or by Sym-   
Opposite to Articulation; is Symphysis, which is an immovable conjun- 
ction of bones, as though they were united, which Nature brings forth at first 
divided, 

8 Physick and Anatomy. Bkoo I.
physis whose
differences are 
three. 
divided, yet afterward in process of time, they grow together. Some are 
united without any discernable Medium, others with a Medium interposed. 
And therefore, the simple differences of Symphysis are three; Syssarcosis 
Syneurosis, Synchondrosis. A mixed or compound Symphysis; is only one. 
viz. By a Nerve and Cartilage, which at Galen cals Neurochondrodis. d Of 
these you may see more in. Com. at Gal. Lib. de Ossibus. 
Galens Doct-
rine of Joynts.
According to Galen, I thus expound the Doctrine of Joynts, Methodically. 
The Conjunction of al Joynts is made by the touching of their extremities: 
This touching is either Articulus or Symphysis: Articulus is a Natural 
joyning of Bones; which are divided amongst themselves, to the same use, for 
which they were formed; this use is either for Motion, or perspiration, 
or passage of some substance, or distinguishing of parts, or to secure them 
from hurting, as apeares by the Articulations, Harmonia, Sutura, and 
Gomphosis. Symphysis is a Natural Union of bones which were at first divid- 
ed, which grow together either with, or without an apparent Medium, because 
it is Obliterated, as in the Sternum, Os-Sacrum, or Ischium, and the bony 
portions of the inferiour Jaw: and therefore the Conjunction of bones is 
divided into Articulus, and Symphysis, as it were into two species. Other- 
wise if Symphysis, be taken according to the mind of Modern Anatomists, and
not according to the mind of Galen, wheresoever Articulation is, there must 
Symphysis needs be; for the Collection of bones, and Galen had ridiculously 
opposed Symphysis, to Articulation. 
a, T. 15. f. 3. R. &C b, f. 4. a. b. c, f. b. m. n. o.  d, See ch. 5. Lib. 6. 
of this Book. 
Chap. 7. The Division of a Sceleton. 
THe whole Fabrick of the bones sticking together, is by Galen, called  
SCELETOS, It is vulgarly divided into the Head, the trunk and the 
limbs. Hippocrates, in his Book of the Nature of bones, constitutes six 
parts of the Sceleton; The Head, Neck, Breast, Back-bone, Hands, and 
Feet, Galen, into five, the Head, Back-bone, Breast, Hands, and Feet, 
as may easily be gathered from the series of his discourse. We follow the com- 
mon division, and according to the example of Galen, begin at the Head, 
which is the first bone formed by Nature; and as it were the foundation of al 
the rest: which are framed in respect of largness, according to the proportion 
of the Head. 
Chap. 8. Of the Head, being the first Part of the 
Sceleton. 
what the 
Head is. 
It's Division  
THe Head is defined by Galen, to be that whole substance which is above 
the Neck, and the swelling place of the Brain. 
It is divided into the Skul, and the Face, which latter comprehends both 
the Jaws.
What the Skul is.
Its Natural
Figure. 
The Skul, is a globous, and round body; hollow within, but this roundness 
is not exactly, spœhircal, by Reason of those Eminencies, which stick out be- 
fore, and behind, which make the Skul somwhat longish, and compressed on 
the sides towards the Temples. If the Skul be not somwhat longish, it is 
depraved and this depravation is four-fold, 1. When it sticks not out before, 
2. When it sticks not out behind. 3. When both Prominencies, are depar- 
ved, and then it is exactly round, 4. When its Longitude is turned into 
Latitude, which is inconsistent with life, because the Struture of the Brain, 
is perverted. Not 
 

Book 1. Physic and Anatomy. 9
The number
of the Bones of
the Skul.
Not only one Bone, but many make the structure of the Skul, the number 
of which is various in Authors, Galen Attributes seven thereto, and 
Sylvius follows him: others hold 14. As Baubinus by adding the six 
bones, of each eare, which are Parts of the rocky bone, and included in the 
Cavities of the Eare, and add nothing at al to make the globe of the Scul. But 
more rightly Paræus ads fourteen bones to the Skul, but distinguisheth them, 
into containing, and contained, the containing are eight, the contained are 
the six smal bones, of the Eares. Hippocrates, Lib. de Oss. Constitutes 
the Skul of eight bones, and yet he seems to comprehend some bones of the 
Face, this number the most excellent Anatomists follow; as Vesalius, Colum- 
bus, Fallopius, from whom we wil not dissent, because this number our Eyes 
can witness in Dissections.
Sutura what. 
The intervals, or connections of those bones, are called Suturæ, which 
knit and unite the Bones together.
How many-
fold.
Proper are.
Three true
ones.
1.
Coronalis.
2.
Lamdoides
3.
Sagittalis.
Two false
ones.
Common are
three.
1.
Frontals.
2.
Sphenoidea.
3.
Ethmoidea. 
Of Sutura's, some are Proper, others common: They are Proper, which 
distinguish the bones of the Skul one from another: they are common, which, 
distinguish the bones of the Skul from those of the uper Jaw. The Proper are 
divided into true, and false: the true, are the Saw-like Conjunctions of the 
bones intertexed, like the Teeth of a Comb. They are held by Anatomists, 
to be in number three. 1. a Coronalis is on the forepart of the Skul, which 
passeth transversly from one temple to the other. 2. opposite to this is, 
b Lambdoides, placed in the hinder part of the Head. 3. c Sagittalis knits 
both these together, passing from the top of the Lambdois, by the longitude 
of the Skul, and somtimes comes even to the top of the Nose. The conccurse 
of the sagittal and coronal suture, the Greeks cal Bregma; commonly ’tis 
called Fontanella, to which we apply causticks. Above the Ears, are two 
Sutures not like others, and therefore they are called false, or Bastard; they 
are called d Squamosæ, from their scaly likeness, and joyn the bones of the 
Temples, to the bones of the top of the Head. Modern Anatomists hold the 
common sutures to be three: The first is called c Frontalis, beginning at the 
outward Angle of the Eye, and passing by the middle of the Orbita, even to 
the Eye-brow, and keeps the same way by the other Eye. The second is cal- 
led f Sphenoidea, which Circumscribes the Os-sphenois, beginning at the hin- 
der part of the Head, and ending at the furthermost Tooth of the upper Jaw. 
The third is called g Ethmoidea, and compasseth about the Os Ethmois, on 
every side; it seems rather to be Proper than Common, and belongs rather to 
Harmonia than Sutura. 
The Sutures being wel known, ’tis an easie matter to distinguish the bones 
of the Skul; which are eight in number, and somtimes nine when the Sagittal 
Suture passeth to the Nostrels, and passeth through the middle of the Frontal 
bone; which is often seen in the Skuls of such as are grown up: al of them are 
Proper, none common, unless the Sphenois, according to Galen.
Os Frontis 
1. The Bone of the h Forehead distinguishied by the first. Common, and co- 
ronal Suture which somtime is Cut into two parts by the Sagittal Suture is 
that Eminent seat of the Eye-brows; it includes two Cavities derived into the
Nostrels.
Os Simipitis
The Second and third are called the bones of the i fore part of the Head, and 
are seperated from one another by the sagittal Suture is below, by the Scaly 
Suture; before by the coronal: behind by the Lambdois.
The Bones of the Temple. 
Under these are the bones of the k Temples, which on the uper part are at- 
tenuated like a Scale, but the inferior Part is hard, and rough, and 
called rocky; therefore it is commonly divided into the Scaly, and Rocky
Parts.
Its Apophyses 
In the Rocky Part are four Apophyses; I Mastoides m Styloides and n Lygo- 
matica; and the fourth is placed in the basis of the Skul, and may be called 
o Auricularis; in little Children it is an Epiphysis, and may easily be pulled 
off from the Rocky Bones. E In


10 Physic and Anatomy. Book I. 
The Cavities 
of the Eare. 
1. 
passage of hea- 
ring. 
2. 
Concha. 
3. 
Labyrinthus. 
4. 
Coclea.  
In this last Apophysis, are the three Cavities of the Eare contained: The 
first is external, and called the p Passage of hearing. The second is called 
q Concha, and containes the internal Aire, and the three smal bones called 
r Malleolus Incus and Stapes, as also a hole passing into the Cavity of the 
Mastois. The extremity of this Cavity is directly opposite to the Timpa- 
num and hath two small holes; of which the greater is called the s oval window 
and is the ingress into the third Cavity, which is called ther Labirinth, by reason 
of its various Circulations and turnings; the other hole is narrower, and is the 
Passage to the fourth v Cavity which is called x Cochlea, from its rough and 
wreathed Figure.
Os Occiptale. 
The sixt bone of the Skul is called y Lambdoides and Occipitale, and is 
compassed about with the Suture Lambdois, the Extremities of which, are 
called Horns by the Antients; but by Galen, Aditions to the Lambdois. To 
these are Causticks somtimes applyed.
Is Sphenoides.
Its Apophyses
The seventh Bone is z Sphenoides; in which we must consider the external, 
and internal table: In the internal table, are three Apophyses, which are cal- 
led a Clinoides; between these is a Cavity interjected, which is b called Sella 
Sphenoidis. The external Table hath four Apophyses; of which, two re- 
sembling the hollowness of a ship, are called c Naviculares,  by Galen they 
are called Pterigoides: the other pass under the Zygomata, to the Temples, 
and are called Temporalls. Between the two Tables, or Places, is an empty 
d Cavity passable to the Nose by a double hole, and severed within by a Bridg in 
the midst; this is aiwaies wanting when the bone of the Forehead is 
sollid.
Os Ethmoides.
Tabula cri-
brosa.
Erista galli.
Septum Nast.
Two Spongy
Bones.  
The eight bone is called Ethmoides, or according to Galen Spongides; it 
consists of seven different portions, The first is pierced through like a c Sieve: 
from which, within the Skul, ariseth an Apophysis, which is the second porti- 
on of the bone, and is like a f Cocks Comb; without the Nostrells, from the 
same Sieve-like Table, depends that bony substance, which makes the g Bridg 
between the Nostrels; and this is accounted the third portion of the bone: To 
this Bridg of the Nose, stick two Spongy bones, which make the fourth; and 
fift part of the Ethmoides: The sixt, and seventh portions of the Ethmoides, 
are thin Scales, plain, and smooth, as broad as a mans Thumb; which make 
the internal side of each Orbita, beside the great Canthus, and underneath 
they cover three, and somtimes four cells, disposed from the great Canthus, 
even to the lower-most Orbita. 
In the basis of the Skul, both internally and externally, certain Cavities are 
observed; of which some are called Sinus, others holes, others Fossa or pits; 
of which, see Sylvius, who was the first that handled them Methodically: we 
give them here Names according to their places, and Natures.
Eight Sinus. 
The Sinus are eight; two Maxillares in the uper Jaw, as many Frontal 
in the bone of the Forehead, so many Sphenoides in the bone Sphenois and no 
fewer Maistoides in the Apophyses of the Mastois. 
Holes Internal.
27.
External holes 10.
Holes are internal, or extrnal; Internal are twenty five commonly, somtimes 
twenty seven; twelve or thirteen on each side, and one without a fellow; 
which gives Egrese to the Marrow of the Back. The first, is h Ethmoides; the 
the second, i Sphenoideus; the third, k Opticus; the fourth, i Scissura Orbi- 
tails; the fift, m Temporal, from the nerve of the third conjugation which 
passeth to the temporal muscle; the sixt, n Gustativus; the seventh, Gusta- 
tivus Secundus; the eight, ° Cervical; the ninth, Caroticus; the tenth, 
p Ariditorium, the Eleventh, q Jugulare; the twelfth, r Motivum Linguæ, 
or Lingnosum; the thirteenth, and last, s lmpar, or Occipitale. The exter- 
nal holes are ten on each side, according to Silvius; to which I ad an eleventh, 
to wit, the external hole of the Eare; besides, at the Root of the Stilois, in 
the extremity of the auricular Apophysis, on the external part, is a hole di- 
vided into two within, divided with a very thin Scale. Of the external holes
the, 

Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 11 
the first is called, Superciliare: the second Lacrimale, the third, Orbitarium 
externum; the fourth, Orbitarium Ethmoideum; the fift, above the palat; 
the sixt in the extremity of the Pallat; the seventh, the cleft under the Zygoma; 
the eight, and ninth, Supra Pterigoides; the tenth Mastodes; the eleventh, 
the external hole of the Eare.
Pits internal.
External.
The pits are internal, and external; six are in the internal basis of the Skul; 
two frontals, two temporal, and two occipicals. The external are seven on 
each side, to which I add an eight, to wit, the Cavity of the Nose: The first, 
Orbitaria; the second, Nasalia; the third, Zygomatica, the fourth, above 
the Pallat; the fift, under the Pallat; the sixt, Pterigoidea, the seventh, 
in the joynting of the inner jaw; the eight, in the hole of the sixt Conjugati- 
on. 
a T. 15. f. 3. aaa. b f4. bb. c f3. bb. f4. aa. a f 15. f. 3. cc. e T. 15. f. 3.
Supra K. f T. 15. f. 5. aa. f. 6.00. g f4. AB. h f. 3. D. i f. 6.
cc. f3. d. k f. 6. DD l l. f 6. EE. f3. F. m T. 15. f. 5.ff, n T.
20. f. 6. A. f 3. B. o f. 6. B. C. P f. 7. ABC. q f.6. B. r f. 9.
BB. s f. 6. C. t f. 9. AA. v T. 15. f 4. C. x f. 5. B. f. 6. F y f.
5, Supra inferius B. z f. 5. aa. f. 6. G. H. a T. 15 f. 6. G. H. b T.
15. f. 5. B. c T. 15. f. 5. CC. d ibid. e T. 15. f. 6. I f T. 15. f. 5.
CC. g f. 5. aa, h f. 5. bb. k f. 5. cc. l f. 5. dd. m f.
5. ee. n f. 5. tt o f. 5. hh. P. f. 5. ibid. q T. 15. oo. r f. 16.
BB. 
Chap. 9. Of the uper Jaw.
The Face what 
The other Parts of the Head, is called the Face; it comprehends both Jaws, 
and is separated from the Skul, by the first common Suture.
How many
Bones in the
uper Jaw. 
The uper Jaw consists of many bones, about the number of 
which is some controversie amongst Anatomists; but passing by the vain and 
foolish opinions of modern Authors, I admit only of Eleven, passing by those 
portions of the Ethmoides, which-some Anatomists reckon for several Bones: 
for those bones only belong to the Jaw which are separated from the Bones 
of the Skul; neither are portions of them, but some of those bones contained 
within the Orbita, and form the Orbita of the Jaw; with other bones are por- 
tions of the bones of the head, as the productions of che Sphenois, the broad 
portion of the Ethmois; and therefore they are Childishly referred to the 
Jaw. 
If any object, That they do belong to the Jaw, because they are beneath 
the common Suture that divides the Skul from the Jaw wherefore seeing they 
are placed Beneath the said Suture, they may be attributed to the Jaw. But 
if the Apophyses of the bones of the Skul, which stick out beyond the round- 
ness of it, be referred to the Face; by the same rule the Apophyses, called 
Pterigodes, which stick out without the Globe, and rotundity of the Skul, 
are placed in the Same plain with the Vomer, and the Angles which sustain 
the Jaw, are to be reduced to the Jaw it self. And when Galen reckons the 
Os Sphenois amongst the bones of the Jaw, he reckons it as a Supernumerary. 
And therefore we must reckon but Eleven bones of the Jaw.
The first B  
of the Jaw.
The 2. 
Five bones are placed on each side, and one without a fellow, which sustains 
the midst of the Pallar. The first, Galen Lib, de Off. Cals a Melon: It  
may be called Zygomaticus, because it constitutes the greatest part of the 
Zygoma, and a great part of the Orbita, and Angles of the Eye: now Zygoma, 
is nothing else than a bony Semicircle made of two Apophyses, by the oblique 
Suture; of which the one passeth from the rocky bone; the other from the 
bone of the Cheek. The Second is called b Os unguis, or Ossiculum Lacri-
E 2 male 


12 Physick and Anatomy. Book 1. 
3. male. The third is called the c greatest bone, and containes the middle part 
of the Teeth; and finisheth the inferior part of the Orbita, and the internal 
4. part of the Nose. The fourth bone forms the d Nose, and so the Nose is form- 
ed of four bones, two are Proper, which we mentioned last; and two common. 
Modern Anatomists ad the bone called c Vomer, which is placed under the 
Sphenois, and Palat, which was not unknown to Hippocraces. It is like a 
Plow-share, and holds up the bridg of the Nose, to which it is Joyned by Su- 
tura, or Harmoma. 
a T. 15. f3. E. b f. 3. G. c f3. I. d f. 3. K. c f. 6. j.
Chap. 10. Of the Orbitary Bone.
The Orbitary
Bones of the
Eye bow many.
The error of
Picolominus,
touching their
number. 
THe orbitary bones, which Hippocrates Lib. de Ossibus cals Hypopia by 
which the Eye holes are made, were first of al by Picolominus pro- 
pounded to be five; but he ignorantly pretermitted a portion of the maxillar 
bone, which joyned to the rest makes six, of which the hole of the Eye is 
made; but these bones are not Proper, excepting the ungular, or Lacrymal 
bone, but partly portions of the bones of the Skul, partly portions of the bones 
of the uper Jaw. The first is the a Frontal bone, which makes the fornace of 
this vault. The second is a portion of the Sphenois, situated in the deep exter- 
nal side of the Eye hole, even to the lesser corner. The third is b Lygomati- 
cum, which makes the lesser corner, and the middle pavement of the Orbita, 
or Eye hole. The fourth is c Maxillare. The fift d Lacrimale. The sixt the 
Scaly table, of the os Ethmois which make the other side of the Orbita, and 
the greater Corner: these bones are to be discerned within the Orbita, with 
their Proper and common Sutures, 
a T. 15. f. 3. A. b T. 15. f. 3. E. c T. 15. f. 3. j. d T. 15. f. 3. G.
Chap. 11. Of the inferior Jaw. 
Its Parts. 
Basis. 
Apophyses. 
THe inferior Jaw in such as are grown up, is but one bone; in which is to 
be noted, its basis, and its extremities. Its basis is the middle part of it, 
hollow within sticking out outwardly and is called the a Chin. The extre- 
mities are Angles, each extremity sends out two Apophyses, of which one is 
Sharp called b Corone, and receive the tendon of the temporal Muscle; the 
other is a c Condyle, and may be called Articulatoria, because it serves for 
Articulation of the Jaw. Below these Apophyses is a Singular d hole by which 
Veins, Arteries, and Nerves pass to the Teeth; one portion of which passeth 
back again, neer the c Chin , and is dispersed to the Muscles of the Lips. 
a T. 15. f. 3. L. b T. 15. f. 3. M. c f. 3. N. d f. 3. Infra M. c f. 3. Li
Chap, 12. Of the Os Hyois: 
Its parts.
Basis.
THe Os Hyois may oe refered to the bones of the Head, because it is fastned 
by Nervous bones to the Apophyses of the Stylois. It is Compounded of 
five smal bones, of which that which is greatest and hollow is called the a basis, 
they which ad a sixt and a seventh bone understand the Ligaments wherewith 
this bone is tyed which as they are usually Nervous, so in some they are observ- 
ed to be Cartilaginous. From the extream parts of the greater and Funda- 
mental

Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 13
Horn.
mental bone, one Cartilaginous b Horn, which is seldom bony, springs on the top, 
on each side it is fastned to the Cartilage Tyrois, which two Horns are usually num- 
bred for the eight and ninth bones.
Error of Ana-
tomists.
The Os Hyois is the foundation of the Larinx and Tongue and by the Judgment  
of al Anatomists receives the Tongue in its Cavity, but if a man may beleeve his own 
Eyes, they wil shew him that the Epiglottis only is received in its Cavity, and that 
the Tongue resteth on the uper side of its Basis.   
a T 13. f. 11. 12. AA. b T. 13. f. 11. 12. BB. 
Chap. 13. Of the Teeth.
Their Nature
Parts, 
Basis and
Root. 
THe Teeth, are the instruments of Chewing the Meat, and forming the voyce. 
They are bones although they differ in Nature from other bones. 
They consist of two parts, one of which sticks out without the Gum, and is cal- 
led the Basis. The other is hid within the Gum, and called the Root, the Root is 
not sollid but hollow, and so hollow, that it receives a smal Vein, a smal artery, and 
a smal Nerve.
The number 
of the Roots of 
of Teeth. 
The Roots of the Teeth are various in number and disverse in figure. The Root 
of the Cutters is alwaies simple and right, distinguished only with a smal cleft for 
their firmer sticking. Also the Roots of the Dog-teeth are simple. The superior 
grinders have a threefold Root and Crooked, because they hang downwards, in the 
Inferior grinders they are double and sometimes treble. 
The number
of the Teeth.
The number of the Teeth is various in regard of Age. In Children from the 
seventh Month even til they are two years Old and upwards; twenty of them usually 
come out by degrees one after another, and before they are wel towards four years 
of Age, they have no more, afterwards eight, or twelve others come out: So that 
they have twenty eight, or thirty two in Jawes.
Their Orders. 
This number is distinguished into three orders by reason of their Situation and 
bigness the first four Teeth are called a Cutters. Those two which are next these 
one on each side are called b Dog-teeth. The rest being eight, or ten, are called 
c Grinders, they are placed in the Cavities of each Jaw, which Cavities are not 
continual but divided into Cells, and their conjunction, or Articulation is called 
Gomphosis.
a T. 15. f. 6. M. b T. 15. f. 6. n. c T. 15. f. 6.oo.
Chap. 14. Of the Trunk, being the Second Part of the 
Sceleton.
Of what it 
consists.  
The Trunk comprehends the Back-bone and such bones as are fastened there-
unto.
It is compounded of the Back-bone and the Chest.
The Back-
bone what. 
The Back-bone is a bony Channel which gives passage to the Marrow of the Back, 
and stretched even from the Head, to the Os Coccyx. It consists of very many      
bones for its security and that it may not easily be hurt, as also that a man may bow 
himself for neccssity of action. these bones the Greeks cal Spondils, and the latins
Vertebræ.
Two parts of 
a Vertebræ.
Difference of
the Apophyses.
Tn every Vertebra you may observe two parts of which the one is internal, thick and 
round, and is called the body: the other external with various Apophyses and hath 
no Name, the difference of the Apophyses are three, right, Oblique, and transverse,
the hindmost is sharp and is Properly called a Spina that which is b Lateral, and
transverse is double, the c Oblique fourfold by which they are joyned together by
Ginglymos in which three bones are required.
In 


14 Physick and Anatomy. Book 1. 
The Vertebræ
of the Neck
In the Oblique Apophyses two are above, and as many below, and therefore in 
al the Vertebræ, are seven Apophyses found. The whol Rachis or Back-bone, is 
divided into four Parts. The NecK, Back, Loyns and Os Sacrum: The Neck 
hath seven Vertebæ, the Back twelve, the Loyns five, the Os Sacrum is either one, 
or three-fold in such as are grown up; in Chilldren it is divided into five or six 
Parts: Wherefore the Back-bone in such as are grown up, is composed of twenty 
four Vertebræ; to which, if you add the Os Sacrum, which is a great Vertebra, it 
makes twenty five or twenty seven. The crooked-streight Figure of the Back-bone, 
which is admirably described by Hippocrates in Lib. 3. de Articulis, from verse 33. 
to 35. Cannot be noted in a Sceleton, though never so exactly made; but in a 
Carkafs the Flesh of the Back being taken away it may; in the Vertebræ of the Neck, 
this peculiar thing is to be noted, That al the transverse d Apophyses are peirced 
through, that so they may give passage to the cervical Veins and Arteries; they have 
Cavities in the extremities, through which the Nerve being yet soft, is deduced: The 
e hindermost Apophyses, are double, for the rise and insertion of Nerves; but the 
two superiors have another structure and conformation, by reason of the motion of 
the Head, for the first wants a f Spina, and hath a thick round Body; the second 
sends out a g Tooth like Apophysis. Al the Vertebræ of the Neck are stricktly joyned 
and implicated lest they should slip asunder in the vehement Motions of the 
Neck. 
The Vertebræ 
of the Back.
The twelve h Vertebræ of the Back, are altogether one like the other: their Apo- 
physes are sollid, and continual, without any hole or division. The twelfth, or 
eleventh Vertebra, hath a different Articulation from the rest; al the rest are joyn- 
ed by Ginglymos, the eleventh, or twelfth, only by Arthrodia. And therefore 
the whol Motion of the Back-bone, bowing, extending, and Obliquation, is per- 
formed by that Vertebra.
The Vertebræ 
of the Loyns. 
The five Vertebræ of the Loyns, differ in Apophyses from those of the Back for 
the hinder Apophyses, or i Spinæ, do not descend as they do in the Back, but are f 
straight, and broad: the k transverse Apophyses are longer, and stand instead o 
Ribs.
Os Sacrum.
Under the Loyns is the i Os Sacrum, which though it Seem one simple bone at the 
first view, yet being boyled a long time in Oyl, it is divided into five parts, and 
sometimes into six.
Coccyx 
To the extremity of the Os Sacrum, is another cartilaginous bone joyned, which 
is divided into three, seldom into four Parts and is called m Coccyx, the Crupper-
bone. 
a T. 2. f. 2. d. b  f. 2. bb. c f. 2. cccc. d T. 13. f. 20. bb. e f. 21. b.
I f f. 20. g f. 21. a h T. 10. f. 3. i T. 2. f. 2. d. k T. 2. f. I. aa.
1 T. 2. f. 5. 6. m t. 2. f. 5. bb. c.
Chap. 15. Of the Cheft. 
The Breast 
what. 
THe Chest, together with the Back-bone, make up the trunk, of the 
Sceleton. 
It is four-fold. 
The Chest is a bony Circumference, which holds the vital Parts, and is consti- 
tuted of a four-fold kind of bones; the Sternum before the Ribs on each side, the 
Clavculæ at top, and the Back-bone behind, to which the Ribs stick. 
The Sternum.
The cartilage
called Sword-
like. 
The a Sternum or Brest-bone, in such as are grown up, is one only continued 
bone, distinguished by three or four transverse lines, which are but the footsteps of 
the Antient divisions; and these lines are more conspicuous on the inside, than on 
the out.
On the extremity of this bone, depends the Cartilage or Gristles called 
b Xyphoides, or the sword-like Cartilage; it represents a Shield in bruites.
The Ribs.
The Ribs are twenty four, twelve on each side of which, the seven uper most 
are called c True, because they are committed to the Sternum; the other five in- 
ferior

An Alphabetical Table. 
A Page
ABdomen, Its Medicinal conside-
ration, the swelling thereof,
and its constitution what it
should be. 33
Abdomen, The diseases thereof 34
Its Muscles 248
Absurd Longings, whence they proceed,
55
Accelerator, What Muscle so termed. 250
Amaurosis, What we are to understand
thereby 142
Anastomosis, Of the Veins and Arteries
what it is, 255
Anatomy, The consideration thereof two-
fold, towit, Phylosophical and Physi-
cal, both which necessary 1
Anatomy, How far forth useful and pro-
fitable in Physick 2
The Authors intent and method in trea-
ting thereof, ibid &c.
The Method of teaching it twofold 3
Anatomist, General Precepts for him to be
first acquainted with 26
Anchylosis, What to be understood there-
by 266
Aneurisma, What it is 259
Angina, or Squinsy, What kind of tumor
201
The wounds thereof 214
Annular Ligament of the Toes, what it is
238
Animal Spirits, The place where they are
made, according to our Author, 128
Hofmans arguments to the contrary,
answered 129, 130
How they are carried through the Ner-
ves 277
Anxiety, Whence it proceeds 55
Aorta Vein, Descending, its distribution,
its great Artery called Lienalis, its Use,
Thickneß of its Membrane, and its
Vessels 67
Aphthæ Ulcers of the Gums, their ma-
lignancy 204
Page
Appetite, Want thereof whence it pro-
ceeds, and likewise Dog-appetite 55
Apophysis, What it is 279
Apophysis Coracoides, Its Use ibid
Apoplexy, What,and whence it proceeds
133
Apoplexy, And such like diseases, their
cure ibid
Arm, The nine Muscles thereof, 225
Arteria aspera. Or Wind-pipe, its Use
&c. And whether the wounds thereof
are curable 208 209
Artery, Its definition 27
Arteries, What they are, whence they
have their original, a large discourse
hereof by the Author, 115 116
Arteries, Whether they may and which of
them may be opened 217
Arteries, Of the Head before they be open-
ed a profitable experiment of Alxander
Benedictus to be put in practise 218
How the motion of their Pulse can be
stopped while the Heart moves 259
Ateries Crural. The Pulse is last felt in
them 259
Arteries Carotides, Or sleepy Arteries,
whether or no the obstruction of them
do cause deep sleep,Communion of them
and the spinal Marrow 115 116
Articulation Of the bones, what con-
curs thereto 263 &c.
Asthma, What it is, its kinds 103
Atrophy, What it is, and whence it pro-
ceds 59
Auditory Passages of the ear 193
Axillary Kernells, their diseases 211
B
Back and Breastbones, Their Vertebræ,
Fallopius his observation touching
them 23
Back, Properly is not moved 231
How it is bowed by the Quadratus ibid
Its various Muscles, 231 232
Back-bone, Its shape gristles, Mem-
AAA branes,


Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 15 
ferior, are called d Bastard, because they are never joyned to the Breast-bone, but 
are joyned in a Cartilage, that they may the better give way to the swellings of the 
Liver and Spleen, and yeild to the Motions of the Diaphragma.
Claviculæ. 
The c Claviculæ are two, one on each side; whose Figure represents an Italica 
S. They retain the Scapula in its Proper seat that it fal not upon the Breast.  
a T. 10. f. 2. AA. d f.2. B. c f. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. d f. 2. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
c f. I. f. T. 21. f. 2. A.  
Chap. 16. Of the Limbs, being the Third Part of the 
Sceleton: and first, of the Scapula. 
SEeing the Scapula Omoplata, or shoulder-blade, belongs nothing at al to the 
constitution of the Breast, I seperate it from the Trunk, and set it at the begin- 
ning of the hands.
Its Parts. 
In the Omoplata many Parts come to be noted for the original 
and Insertion of Muscles.
Basis.
Angles.
A very Necessary Part of the Omoplata being stretched 
to the Longitude of the Back, is called the 2 Basis, the extremities of which are 
called Angles; one is b Superior, the other c Inferior.
Ribs.
The Basis is the sides of 
the Ribs; of which, the one is shorter and thinner, which is called the d Superior 
Rib; the other longer, and thicker which is called the c Inferior Rib. The whol 
Latitude of the Scapula is called the table; The external Part of which, is Gibbous; 
the internal hollow, that so it may receive the Muscle.
Proceß.
The famous process or
Apophysis ascending upwards from the basis called f Spina, the broad extremity of 
which, is called Acromium; which according to Galen and Hippocrates, is a 
distinct bone, and Cartilaginous in Children; but hard, and bony, in such as are 
grown up. Which after the twentieth year, and somthing sooner is turned into 
an Apophysis of the Spina. 
Pits.
The pits on each side of the Spina are called Interscapuli- 
um; one pit is above it, the other below it, but the middle prominence of the Spina 
which is bowed, is commonly called Pterygium or the crist. The other extremity 
of the Scapula, which is great, subject to the Acrominum, and opposite to the Basis, 
is called the g Neck; in it you shal note, that Apophyses called h Coracoides, which 
was made for the security, and firmness of the Joynt of the Shoulder, the Cavity of 
the Neck, is called Glenoides. 
a T. 21. f. 2. bb. h f. 2. f. c f. 2. g. d f. 2. ad. d. e f. 2. ag. ad. c.
f f. 2. e. g f. 2. c. h f. 2. d. 
Chap. 17. Of the Shoulder.
The three 
Parts of the
Hand. 
THe Arm hangs upon the Omoplata or Scapula, which is divided into three 
Parts; the Shoulder, the Cubit and the Hand.
The Head of 
the Bones of
the Shoulder.
The Neck.
In the Shoulder are two 
extremities for the insertion of Muscles; the upermost is called the Head, which a 
membranous Ligament, bred from the Cavity of the Glenois, compasseth about, 
besides the four Muscles which it involves: a little below this, the Orbicular nar- 
row place, is called the Neck: In the Head is a long Chink, by which the Nervous 
Head of the Muscle Biceps ariseth.
Troclea.
Cavities.
Apophyses
In the other extremity of the Arm, you may 
observe the Trochlea, about which the Cubit is turned: About the Trochlea are 
two a Cavities, of which the external, is wider than the internal; in these are the 
Coronal Apophyses of the Cubit received: with the Trochlea are two Apophyses, 
which are called Condili the one inferior, and interior; the other superior, and 
exterior. 
a f.2.f.
CHAP.


16 Physick and Anatomy Book I. 
Chap. 18 Of the Cubitus, and Radius.
Radius
Cubitus
Why there are
two bones.
THe second Part of the hand is called Cubitus, & consists of two bones; of which 
the one which is superior and shorter, is called a Radius; the other, which is 
inferior, and subject to the former, is called by the Name of the whol b Cubitus, 
and by some Ulna. Two bones are necessary in this Part of the Arm by reason 
of their double and contrary Motions, which could not be performed by one bone 
united by Ginglymus; for Ginglymus suffers only bowing and extending, and in 
no wise invertion; which the Radius being joyned by Arthrodia performs. The 
Obliquation of the Radius cannot perfectly be discerned unless in a new carcass, all 
the Muscles being taken away; for with great admiration you shal see the Radius 
turned about, upward and downward, upon the Cubit, being unmoved and also 
moved together with the Cubitus, when it is bowed and extended. 
Cavity.
Apophyses.
There is something worthy the noting in the, extremity of the Cubitus: For in the 
uper extremity, is the Cavity, called Sygmoides, which embraceth the Trochlea of 
the Arm; about this, are two Apophyses, called Corone; the lowermost is called 
c Olecranum: In the inferior Part the Cubitus, is an Apophysis, which is called 
d Styloides; the extremities of these bones alone, are joyned together by that 
Ginglymus, which consisteth of two Bones, passing into one another, in diverse, 
and distant places.   
a f. 2. E. b f. 2. D. c T.21.f.2.g. d f.2.e. regione 
Chap. 19. Of the Hand.  
Division
THe Hand is divided into three Parts Carpus, Metacarpus, and the Fin- 
gers. 
Carpus.
a Carpus consists of eight bones, distributed into two orders, which are joyned 
amongst themselves by Symphysis, by a kind of Harmonia because the bones of 
the Carpus are moved the one from the other, either obscurely, or not at al: the 
first order makes Arthrodia Diarthrodis, with the inferior Cubit; the same order 
is joyned with the second order of the bones of the Wrist, or Carpus, by Arthro- 
dia; which second order is joyned with the Metacarpus, by Arthrodia Synar- 
throdis: So that this Motion, is either none at al, or insensible; but the first order 
with the second is moved obscurely.
Metacarpus. 
The b Metacarpus, succeeds the Carpus, and is framed of five bones, if we add 
the first bone of the Thumb, which some reject, because it is Obliquely added to 
the  Metacarpus, and endewed with manifest Motion and contrary to the Nature 
of other bones of the Metacarpus, which make Arthrodia with the Wrist, and 
Enarthrosis with the Fingers; and yet the fourth bone of the Metacarpus, which 
sustains the Ring Finger, hath manifest Motion.
Fingers. 
From the several bones of the Metacarpus, are several c Fingers stretched; only 
the Thumb excepted, the Fingers consist of three bones which are joyned to one 
another by Ginglymos, and therefore they admit only of bowing, and extending; 
the Oblique Motion of them depends upon the Enarthrosis of the first bone with 
the Metacarpus. 
a f.I.FF.f. 2. F. b T. 21.f.I.GG.f.2.G. c F.8.f.12.CDE.
CHAP.


Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 17
Chap. 20. Of the Bones of the Ilium. 
THe greatest and largest bones of the body, which being joyned with the Os 
Sacrum, sustain and erect the whol Trunk, are by the greatest Part called 
Ossa Ilium:
Its Parts.
In such as are grown up, they are one bone; but in Children divided 
into a three Parts; which yet hold their antient appellations, though the very Foot- 
steps of them be obliterated by Age.
Ilium.
Pubis.
Ischium.
The broader Part of the bone which frames 
the latitude of it, and is stretched out to the middle of the funnel, is called b Ilium; 
the other halfe, and superior Part, is called c Pubis; the other inferior Part 
d lschium: Of these three portions, is made that great hole called the 
c the Funnel. 
Back.
Rib.
Lips.
In these bones some particular things are to be noted; for Antomists call the ex- 
ternal Face of the Os Ilium, the Back; superior internal Cavity, they cal the 
Belly; the extremity of which, is called the Rib; the brims of which, both exter- 
nal, and internal, are called Lips, or Brows, so as one is external, the other inter- 
nal.
Spines.
The extremity of the Rib, which sticks out, and is joyned to the Os Sacrum, 
is called the hinder Spine. And the other extremity of the Rib towards the Fun- 
nel, is called the foremost, upermost Spine. There is under this, another called the 
former and nether Spine. 
In the Of Pubis, a Spine is observed neer the Spmphysis, by its top: In the 
Ischium, a Spine, and a Bunch is noted; which Bunch is called Condylus.  
a T.8.f.12.cDE. b T.2.f.3.A. c f.3.C. d f.3.BB. e T.21.f.4.B. f T2.f.4.aa.
Chap. 21. Of the Bone of the Thigh. 
THe Feet, as wel as the Hands, are divided into three Parts; the Thigh, Leg, and 
Foot.
The Thigh
Bone.
Head.
Neck.
Apophyses.
Knee.
Ham.
Knee-Pan. 
The Bone of the Thigh is but one, and the greatest in al the Body, in the supe- 
rior extremity, the a Head is round, to which a slender part is added, called the 
Neck: from the Neck are two Apophyses produced, to which, the Muscles called 
Rotatores, are fastned; and therefore they are called Trochanters; the foremost 
is called the lesser b Trochanter; the upermost, on the side, the greater c Trochanter. 
The other extremity of the Thigh, hath two d Condyli: a c Cavity being left be- 
tween, which admits the f middle, and eminents Apaphysis of the Leg; and in 
like manner the Condyli are received by the g Cavities of the Leg; by a loose h Gin- 
glymus, the fore Part of which, is called the Knee, the hinder Part the Ham: this 
Articulation is strenghtned before, with a smal bone, called the i Knee-pan, which 
is Articulated to no bone.  
a T.21.f.I.dd.f4.a. b f.I.gg.f4.c. c f.I.ff.f.4.b d f.I.hh.f.4.ee.
c f.4.d. f f4.f. g f.I.hh.f4.ee. h f.8.cc. i f.I.LL.f.8.d. 
Chap. 22. Of the Leg.
Two Bones of
the Leg- 
Tibia.
Fibula.
THe Leg is composed of two bones; of which, the greater, and internal, 
called a Tibia; The lesser, and external, b Fibula. The Fibia is Articul-  
ated by Ginglymos to the Thigh; the Fibula sticks to the Tibia, and toucheth not 
the Thigh. The inferior, and bunchy Parts of them both, are called Ancles; of  
which, the Fibia makes the c internal, and the Fibula, the d external.  
a f.I.M.f.4.D. b f.i.M.f4.D. c f.I.ii.f4.gg. d f.I.KK.f4.h.
F  CHAP.

18 Physick and Anatomy. Book 1. 
Chap. 23. Of the Foot. 
Division. 
Tarsus. 
THe Foot is divided into the Tarsus, Metatarsus, and Toes. The Tarsus 
consists of seven Bones, which Ruffius Ephesius cals Ostracodea, by reason 
of their hardness: The first Bone Articulated with the Tibia, is called Astragalus, 
or a Talus: The Bone under this, Pterna or b Calcaneum: The third joyned to the 
Astragalus, Schaphoides: The fourth c Naviculare; to which is joyned the 
inner, and foremost portion of the Heel, which is called d Cuboides; the other three 
have no Names, or Else are called c Calcoidea.
Metatarsus.
The f Metatarus follows the
Tarsus, and is formed of five Bones, and answers to the Metacarpus of the 
Hand.
Toes. 
The Toes succeed the Metatarsus, constituted of g three Bones a piece, except the 
great Toe, which hath only two Bones: smal Bones fil up and strengthen the inter- 
nodes of the Fingers and Toes in such as are grown up, which are uncertain in 
number, and called h Sesamoidea, 
In the second Articulation of the great Toe, are two smal Bones worth the noting, 
and indifferent big, which are alwaies found in al Carcasses, and two at the origi- 
nal of the two Muscles of the Feet, mentioned by Vessalius which are but seldom 
found, and are to be numbred with the Sesamoidea.  
a f.5.A. b f.s.B. c f.5.C. d f.s.D. e f.s.eee. f f.4.g. g f.4. h T.21.f.6. 
Chap. 24. In what Particulars the Bones of Men differ 
from those of Women.  
Those which 
differ are. 
THe Bones of Men and Women, differ in some parts, which Platerus first noted, 
and Bauhinus follows him;  but by their leaves, they noted many differences 
which are not found, and omitted some that are: we shall speak of them both sever- 
ally.
In Substance.
of the Bone. 
It is true, al the bones of Women, are less then those in Men, both in weight, and 
thickness, as also in length. Galen adds they are not so hard but saith, that in al 
living Creatures, the Bones of the Females, are softer then those of the Males; and 
Aristotle held so before him.
The Bones of 
the Head. 
The bones of the Head, are altogether alik, having neither more, nor fewer Su- 
tures; although Aristotle thought otherwise; Namely, that Males had more Su- 
tures then Females, Ch. 7. Lib. 1. de hist. animal and 7. Lib. 3. ejusd. operis, 
and Chap. 7. Lib. 3. depart animal. Yet the a Sagittal Suture, more often in 
Woman, passeth to the Nase, dividing the b Bone of the Fore-head in the middle.
Teeth. 
It is false that Aristotle held, Viz. That Males have more c Teeth, then Females,
as is cleer in Men, Sheep, Hogs, and Goats.
Larynx. 
The d Larinx (if it may be numbred amongst the Bones) is less in Women, and 
the Cartilage e Thyroides, sticks out less.
Breast. 
The f Brest in Women is depressed in the fore part, and sticks not out as it doth 
in Men, for the more accomodation of the Dugs.
Claviculæ. 
The g Claviculæ in Women are not so crooked, for the more comliness of their 
Neck and Breast.
Sternum.
The inferior Part of the h Sternum, is broader then in men and many times hath 
a manifest hole in it; and the lower Bone upon which the i Sword-like Cartilage 
depends, is cleft like a crescent Moon and makes a large hole for the Egress of the 
Mammaria Interna.
Cartilages of
the Ribs. 
It is false that the k Cartilages, which in men become bony about the forty or 
fifty yearts of their Age, become bony in Women so soon as their Breasts grow; 
Though it be true in Women when they are Old.  
In Women with great Breasts, Thorax is narrow, and almost poynted, by rea- 
son of the weight of their Breasts. That 


Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 19 
Back.
That Part of the Back above the Loyns, is no more bowed Backwards in Women, 
then it is in Men.
Os Sacrum.  
The l Os Sacrum is shorter, broader, and more bowed outwards in Women, 
then it is in Men.
Coccix. 
The Os m Coccyx, or Crupper Bone, is more movable, and not so strongly knit, 
and more bowed Backwards in Women; not according to the opinion of Galen, but
of Later writers. Galen: Lib. 1. de Semine. 
Buttocks. 
The Buttocks of Women are broader and according to Aristotle, Lib. 4. de hist 
animal.
Os Ilium.
Women are stronger in their lower Parts, and therefore the Os n Ilium 
most commonly is larger, but that largness bends more outward; by which means 
the Ossa Ilium are more hollowed outwardly.
Os Pubis. 
Upon this largness of the Bones, the Womb when it is great with Child leans as it 
were, upon Pillows, and fits as it were in a Saddle. Elegantly said Galen Lib, 14. 
deusu Partium, when he called the concourse of these Bones with the Os Sacrum,  
THE GREAT BONY VAULT or Arch. The oval hole is Smaller in 
Women that the portion of the Os Pubis, neer the Symphysis, may be larger; but 
the Spina of the Os Pubis is turned outwards.
Os Ischisum. 
The inferior, or tuberous Parts, of the o Os Ischium, it fitted with a double 
Cartilage, thicker softer; and this commissure is perfected by a short line, that in 
the travail, it being softned and loosed, the Bones of the Pubis may part. 
The space between the Os Sacrum, Ilium, and p Pubis, where they are joyned 
together, is larger in Women then in Men, least: the narrowness of the Passage 
should hinder the comming out of the Child. The rest of the structure of Bones in 
Women, is like those in Men.  
a T.15.f.3.bb. b f.3.A. c f.6.mno. d T.13.adf.10 e f.8.A. f T.
10. g T.21.f.1.R h T.10.f.2.AA. i f.2.B. k f.2.CC. l T.2
f.5. and 6. m f.5. and 6.b.c. n f.3. and 4.A o f.3.4.b. p f.3.4.C.
Chap. 25. Of the number of the Bones in a Mans Body. 
THe number of the Bones of mans Body amongst Anatomists is uncertain 
Vesalius held 307. Galen 242. But in the Sceleton of a perfect man, there 
are two hundred and fifty six necessary Bones for the structure of it; which are thus 
numbred. Of the Skul, eighty of the upper Jaw, eleven; of the nether Jaw, 
one, of the Os Hyois, three; Teeth, thirty two; Back-bone, twenty four; 
Os Sacrum, three; Coccyx, three; Claviculæ, two; Ribs, twenty four; of the 
Sternum, three; of each Hand, divided into four Parts, sixty two; Omoplata, 
two; Armes, two; Cubits, four; both Wrists, sixteen; both Metacarpus, 
eight; of al the Fingers, thirty; of each Foot, divided into four parts, sixty 
two; Namely the Bones of the Ilium, two; Thigh, two; Legs, four; Knee- 
pans, two; Tarsus, fourteen; Metatarsus, ten; Toes, twenty eight. 
Besides these Bones, whereof the Sceleton is made, there are eighteen other 
manifest smal Bones, In each great Toe four, Sesamoida; in the Head of the 
Muscles, called Gemeli, on each side, four. The rest of the Sesamoida are so smal 
that they consum or vanish away in boyling the Bones to make a Sceleton. 
There is in each Eare three smal Bones, which ought to be kept apart with the 
Sesamoida; neither come they into the structure of the Sceleton. So that if you 
add the first number to the second, you shall find two hundred and fifty six Bones. 
Chap. 26. The History of an Infants Bones, till the Age of 
seven years. 
SEeing the Bones oF Infants from their Birth til seven years of Age, differ much 
from the Bones of such as are grown up, both in number, and figure, and
F 2 especially

20 Physick and Anatomy. Book I. 
especially in the Multitude of Epiphyses, and defect of Apophyses, therefore I 
thought it wel worth the while, to ad the Bones of Infants, to the Bones of men 
grown up, that the difference between them may apear more evidently, for this 
comparison makes much to take away the differences amongst Anatomists; and to 
unty the difficult knots, you shal find in Galens Doctrine of the Bones.
Is Ancient. 
That this Osteology, was known to Galen, is manifest by various places in him; 
in which he declares the Bones of Infants, in his Book of the formation of the Child 
in the Womb, he describes the Head of the Infant, in the first book De Semine, he 
treats of the Teeth of Infants, but before Galen, Hippocrates, was a diligent 
studier and observer of this Osteology; as his divine monuments of the Nature of 
Children, and of their breeding Teeth witness.
And profitable. 
And the profit of this Doctrine is very great: not only in the education of Chil- 
dren, which are marred, by the unskilfulness either of the Midwife, or Nurse. 
We see diverse Children at this day Borne, with great Heads, Bunches, Bow-Legs, 
great Ancles, Vnseemly knees, and at last are Lame when they begin to go, which 
deformities in the beginning of their Age, whilst their Bones are soft, may be 
amended, and how can a man amend them rightly, unless he know the Bones at that 
time exactly? 
Excellently said Galen, in Lib. de causis Morborum Chap. 7. When he de- 
scribeth the deformities of Bones, which are in Children. The Natural figure, 
(saith he) of the members, and of the whol Body, is changed either in the Womb, 
or at the Birth, or after the Birth; It is depraved in the Womb when the formati-
on is vitiated, by reason of abounding, or unfit matter, his depraved in the Birth, 
when the Midwife takes it not rigbly, or binds it not up rightly, being born, after 
the birth the Nurse, in taking of it up laying it down, or carrying of it, or washing 
Of it, or binding it up; in al these the Nature of every member is easily turned out 
of its course, and corrupted. These also happen in unfit Motions, whilst it is set 
to stand or walk, before its time, or exposed to vehement Motions. For unsea- 
sonable, and vehement motions weaken the Limbs, and the Legs, are turned in- 
wards or outwards by the waight of the Body; and those Limbs which should be 
straight are made crooked, the Parts of the breast are usually inverted by Nurses, 
by binding them too bard, in their first education; this we see almost continually 
in Virgins, whilst Nurses study to encrease those parts, which are about the Hips 
and Bowels that, they may exceed the bigness of the Breast, they bind the Parts 
about the Breast so vehement heard, that tbe breast becomes sharp, and they look as 
though they were broken backt; and somtimes are crook Shouldred. 
You see by Galen, what miseries and deformities little Children are subject too; 
by reason of ill forming the Bones, which may be corrected whilst they are Young, 
and Flexible, and brought into what form you will. 
Hippocrates Lib. de Septimestri Partu, gives the reason, why Children are 
Born Blind, Lame, or other wise ill formed The Women that go with such 
Children are ill, or like to miscarry, in the eight month, for the maimed Embrion 
was greavous Sick, in the eight month; and the Disease, Caused, Impostumation, 
at it doth in men, but when  the Embrion is main sick at any other time it rather 
dies then suffers Apostumation: Hitherto Hippocrates, and Aristotle writes Sect.
10. Probl. 40. That Children may be hurt in the Womb because their Legs are 
so tender.
The Marrow
of the Bones
Bloody.
The great her Bones of Infants are hollow, and the Marrow Bloody. After six 
Months, the Marrow waxeth white, they have a Periostion, and a Cartilage at the 
ends, the extremities of the Bones, ar Epiphyses, some few Apophyses they have, 
but a great number of Epiphyses, that according to Ingrassios  they amount to, 
three hundred twenty one. But I think tis no such matter, neither indeed, have 
I yet been very sollicitus about, the counting of the number. 
Their Epiphy-
ses.
How they
wax hard.
I never observed any Bone, of any bignes or length; which ended not in an 
Epiphyses; now al the Epiphyses of Infants are Cartilaginous, and grow hard and 
are turned into Bones by degrees: Their hardness begins not at the Bone, to which
they 


Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 21 
they are joyned, but they take their bony substance first at the Centre beginning 
at the internal part and encreasing by degrees to the external. Or from the Centre 
to the circumference, outwardly they grow dry and hard by heat which is stirred 
up by Motion and rubbing the Joynts one against another in walking. 
The Sutures
Chap. 27. Of the Head. 
THe Sutures of the Head seem to be rather Harmoniœ, distinguished by a 
Line, and not joyned together like Teeth of a Saw by mutual ingress. The 
joynings of the Skul are loose, so loose that they suffer the Dura Mater to pass 
out for the forming of the Pericranium.
Sagittal.
The Sagittal Suture alwaies passeth to 
the extremities of the Nostrils, but very seldom descends by the hinder part of the 
Head to the hole of the Marrow of the Back. The coronal Suture hath a mem- 
branous gaping at which place the pulsation of the Brain may be both seen and felt, 
this place is vulgarly called a Fontanella
Caronal.
Fontænella.  
The temperal Bone seeing it is framed of two parts scaly and rocky, the parts of 
it are distinguished by Harmonia, which is not disanulled above the hole of the 
Eare, but beyond it, about the Apophysis Mastois.
Bones of the
Skul.
Their thickneẞ.  
The Bones of the Skul are very thin, neither shal you find the two tables or plates 
in them, before one year be Elapsed, between the Bones is some disparity because 
the Bones of the hinder Part of the Head are the thinnest, contrary to what they are 
in such as are grown up, at the concourse of the sagittal and coronal Suture is a 
cleft called Rhomboides, which a thick and hard membrane shuts and grows bony 
in process of time.
Of the Fore-
head  
The c Frontal bone is alwaies two without any sinuous Cavity, the bone of the 
hinder Part of the Head in Children new born, most commonly consists of four 
bones even til they are a year Old. The first is the whol and superiour breadth of 
the bone which compasseth and embraceth the Cerebellum, this is rarely divided, and 
yet there is a certain cleft in the top, caused by the sagittal Suture produced thither. 
The Second and third portion make the sides of the hole of the Marrow of the Back, 
and the middle part of the Circle. The fourth bone is placed in the extremity of 
this, and makes a portion of the great hole, this as yet I never observed. A trans- 
verse Line intersects the circle as though it were two. The Bones of c Bregma, at 
the concourses of the sagittal and coronal Suture, are imperfect by reason of the 
Fontanella. 
Bregma. 
Bones of the
Temples.
The Bones of the Temples are manifestly seperated into two Parts, scaly and 
rocky, neither the Epiphysis called Stylois not the Apophysis called Mastois ap- 
pear in it, only the Zygomatica is seen, but that part of the rocky Bone subject to 
the hole of the Eare, makes the basis of the Skul, it is called next to the Sphenois 
and next to the Lithois by some, but may be called Auricularis, because it com- 
prehends the whol structure of the Eare, in Children it is an Epiphysis which easily 
is severed, and this is often observed in the Sculs of bruit Beasts chat are grown up, 
in which not with standing it is other wise framed.
Passage of the
Eare. 
In this auricular Epiphyses many things come to view, the passage of hearing is 
altogether Cartilaginous, about the fift or sixt month it begins to be bony, and yet 
it may be seperated even to the seventh month, but in the basis it is hollowest, even 
to the third year and longer. 
Bony Circle.
But proceeding inwards to the extremity of this passage their is bony d circle to
which the Timpanum is fastned, this also is easily severed, but when the passag of 
hearing grows hard, the bony circle is so strongly knit to it, that it is inteperable. 
The c Cavities are very straight, neither can the admirable structure of the Laby- 
rinth be perceived in Boies, and yet that which is wonderful the three little Bones of 
the Eare f Malleolus g Jncus and h Stapes, are of the same substance, bigness and 
form, even from the birth to extrame Old Age. 
Os Sphenois. 
The Os Sphenois is divided into four Parts according to Fallopius of which the 
process

22 Physick and Anatomy. Book 1. 
process called Pterigoides, constitute two; these at which receives the Glandula 
Pituitaria, a third; The fourth part is subservient to the optick Nerves, which 
portions grow together, not long after the Nativity: but Fallopius very ill decrib- 
ed these portions of the Sphenois; for the third comprehends the seat, of Saddle, 
and also is subservient to the optick Nerves: The fourth is streched out below the 
Saddle, even to the Corone of the hinder part of the Head, and that division re- 
mains Conspicuous, even til three or four years be passed. In this Bone, are no 
winding Cavities; and the Os Ethmois is totally Cartilaginous;  the bridg of the 
Nose is bony at first, but grows hard along time after the other parts.
The Bones of
the Eye Holes. 
In the Eye-hole of such as are grown up, are six bones noted, Zygomaticum, 
Sphenoides, Frontal, Ethmoidesy, Lacrymal, and Maxillare: The portion of 
which makes the: pavement in Children, and is severed with a kind of Suture, which 
remains even till three or four years of Age.
Upper Jaw. 
The Lines, or Harmoniæ of the upper Jaw, are like those, in  such as are grown 
up, a certain cleft only apears in the brim of the Inferior Orbita. In the beginning 
of the Pallat is a transverse line espied, which is stretched from one of the Teeth, 
called Cutters, to the other; and comprehends the four Cutters. As for the bones 
they are like the bones of such as are grown up, both in figure, number, and Si- 
tuation. The Jaw-bone is not hollow, and the cels of the Teeth are covered, and 
as it were stopped up with a membrane.
Inferior Jaw 
The Inferior Jaw in the midst, where the Chin is, is divided by Harmonia, and 
so consists of two parts, so continuing til two years be past.
Teeth. 
The Teeth are ingendred in the Womb, when the rest of the parts are in- 
gendred; but within the holes of the Jaws: they are in number twenty, ten in each 
Jaw; of which, are four Cutters, two Dog Teeth, and six Grinders, they al want
Roots. 
They begin to pass out of the Gums about the seventh Month, somtimes sooner 
if the Nurses Milk be very hot. Some few have Teeth when they are borne as, 
Cneus Papyrius Carbo and M. Curtius. 
At what time
they apear.
They do not break out altogether, but by degrees, in two years space; and the 
upper Teeth usually, come out sooner then the lower: first of al the Cutters, af- 
terwards two Grinders, then the Dog Teeth; the breeding of which, is most pain- 
ful to Children. 
When Children have twenty Teeth, then they usually say, they have al their 
Teeth; neither indeed have they more, before they are three or four years of 
Age.
Where the hin-
der Teeth ly.
But when Anatomists say, that there is only twenty Teeth contained in the 
Gums, They do not tel you where the other Eight or twelve reside; neither doth 
it seem like a truth, that new Teeth should be bred after the other are formed, and 
lie hid in the Gums. In the upper Jaw I have observed the other four, or six, hid 
under the Zygoma; but those of the lower Jaw under the extremity of the same, 
where they lie hid like points. Under the coronal Apophyses, because the space of 
each, seems at at the Narrowest, to comprehend twenty eight, or thirty two 
Teeth. 
When they
break out.
Neither do these eight or twelve Teeth break out before the Jaws are made lar- 
ger, which hapen about the fourth year of the Age; but contrary to the Nature 
of other Teeth, they continue as long as life continues: neither do they 
come out, as the other twenty teeth do; neither being plucked out, do they grow 
again.
The genera-
tion.
Their generation is twofold; one in the Womb, the other without the Womb; 
for in the Womb the Teeth are formed with the other parts, but are imperfect. 
Within each hole, is contained a Mucous, and hardish substance, concluded in a 
little white Membrane, which grows dry, and take a bony Nature by degrees, and 
to get out pierceth the Gum with its top; the Membrane compasseth the hole round, 
and like Glue retains the Tooth: The other portion, namely, the Root of the 
Tooth, remaines stil within the hole, being soft and Mucous, as the Feathers of
Birds 


Book 1. Physick and Anatomy. 23 
Birds are but it grows hard by degrees, and is parted in the middle, into three or, 
four Rots. 
Under these Teeth, in every hole, is subjected the Seminal matter of another 
Tooth, a Membrane passing betwen them; which whilst it is fermented by the 
formative faculty, and growing up, it expels the former. This second matter thus 
included with a membrane, hath deceived many Anatomists, which thought the 
Teeth consisted of two Parts; and that other Part of the Tooth, was an Epiphysis 
of the Root: therefore Vesalius, and Columbus, held the Teeth in Children, ought 
not to be pulled out by the Roots, but transversly to be broken off, as thinking that 
anew Tooth grew up from the same Root, which could never be, if the former 
were pulled up by the Root. But Celsus in my Judgment wrote more truly, that 
there was a new Tooth in Children, which did expel the former, and sometimes grew 
out besides it, either above, or below it.  
The middle part of the Hyois, being the basis of the whol bone, is Cartilaginous, 
but soon becomes bony; and yet the sides remain Cartilaginous a good time. 
a T. 15. f. 4. C. b T. 8. f.4. C. c T. 8. f. 4. AA. d f. 4.BB. e T. 8. f.
5. f f. 7. and 8. g f. 6. A. h f.6. A. i f. 6. C. k T. 8. f. 4. D.
Chap. 28. Of the Back and Breast-bones.
The Vertebra. 
THe Back-bone consists of twenty four Vertebræ, the Os Sacrum excepted: al 
of them for one years space, are divided into a three parts, the two first of the 
Neck excepted: the first part constitutes the Body; the other two make the sides 
of the hole, neither do they send out any process.
Fallopius his
Observation.
Fallopius hath seen the first 
Vertebra of Children constituted of five parts; but the rest, of three only. The  
first part was where it was; joyned with the Tooth of the second Vertebra, called 
Pyrenois;  the second, and third parts, were on the sides, in Which both the su- 
perior, and inferior Cavities of the Joynts were; the fourth, and fifth parts per- 
fected the reft of the hole. The second Vertebra of the Neck, besides the three 
parts common with the rest, hath a fourth eminent Epiphysis called pyrenois or 
the Tooth.  
ln al the Vertebræ, the hinder part is b Acute, and altogether Cartilaginous, and 
then grows bony, and like an Appendix is joyned to the other parts. The trans- 
verse processes, are also Cartilaginous, but soon acquire a bony Nature.
Os Sacrum 
The Os Sacrum consists of c five Vertebræ, with Cartilages between: So as they 
may easily be discerned the one from the other: the hinder sharpness is totally 
Cartilaginous. 
Os Coccix.
Al the Vertebræ consist of three parts, as al the Spines of the Vertebræ The 
Of Coccix is altogether Cartilaginous, and undivided;  Age divides it into three 
or four parts, which remain Cartilaginous al seven years be expired.
Ribs
Sternum. 
The extremities of the Ribs chat are d joyned to the Back, are altogether Carti- 
laginous, yet they soon grow hard: the Sternum of Infants, is at first Cartilagi- 
nous, and yet divided by no line, and yet the Superior are Sooner bony, then the 
nous, and yet divided by no line, and yet the Superior are Sooner bony, then the 
inferior, and the middle parts of them before the extremities, whence it comes to 
pass that the bony pare is compased about with a Cartiage one each side, and re- 
sembles so many bony Knots in a board. 
So soon as the Child is born, the inferrior part of the Sternum is Cartilaginous 
and hath no division; then it grows bony, as I shewed you before; at last it is 
out into six particulars, by a transverse line drawn from the Cartilages of the Ribs, 
to which you must: number that which is by the Sword-like Cartilage.
Falopious his
Observations.  
Fallopius in his Observations, notes eight bones in the Sternum of Children; which 
aftewards are brought to seven, the two last being reduced into one: afterwards 
they are brought to fewer, six only apearing by that time the Child is seven years of 
Age; and though Fallopius think six alwaies remain, yet I have alwaies observed 
fewer Fallopius 

24 Physick and Anatomy. Book I. 
Fallopius describes the Union of the bones. After seven years the bones of 
the Sternum are joyned together and become fewer by degrees, so that six only 
apear, one bone being made of the fourth and fifth and another of the sixt and se- 
venth. Besides this Union increasing, there are only four found, the third 
fourth fifth sixth and seventh growing together. Of the Sternum of Infants Read 
Sylvius, com. ad cb.2. Lib. Gal. de Ossibus. 
a T. 8. f. 9. ABC. b f. 11. 12. B. d f. 10. 11. A.
Chap. 29. Of the upper Limbs.
Scupula.  
IN the Omoplata both Apophyses, and Epiphyses, are Cartilaginous, also 
the Neck with the Cartilage Glenois are of the same Nature. The eminence 
called Cpracoides is an Epiphysis, yet the bone Acromium doth not seem seperated 
but it is an Apophysis incrusted and terminated with much Cartilage,which is dryed 
after three or four years, and changed into a bony Epiphyses. called Acromium, 
as it is, described by Hypocrætes and Galen, at last that Epiphysis is turned into 
an Apophysis.
Wrist. 
a The appendices of the shoulders in each extremity are Cartilaginous, and grow 
hard by degrees. Also the Trochlea is Cartilaginous, but is sooner turned into 
b one then the superior parts: the superior part of the Cubit called Olecramen, is 
an Epiphysis and after one years time grows hard and is joyned to the bone.
Wrist. 
The b bones of the Wrist when the Child is born : are composed of one Cartilage, 
afterward they grow bony and are distinguished from one another. But first they are 
Spongy as the rest of the bones are, which from Cartilages become bones. The 
eight bone of the Wrist, turns bony last of al.
Metacarpus
and Fingers.
The extremities of the c bones of the Metacarpus and Wrist are Cartilaginous, 
which are hardned within less then a year.  
a T. 8. f. 13. ab. b T. 8. f. 13. d. 
Chap. 30. Of the Inferior Limbs, 
Ilium* 
THe Ilium in Children is composed, of three bones even til they are seven years 
of Age, to which the Ancients gave proper Names.
Pubis.
Ischium.
a The first bone comprehends 
that widness which passeth to the midst of the Funnel, the other part is equally 
divided into two parts, a line being drawn by that Cleft of the Funnel Cros the 
Oval hole, and makes the Symphysis of the Os Pubis, the superior Part of this 
division is called b Os Pubis, the inferior c Os Ischium, the Lips of which are 
Cartilaginous.
Thigh.  
d The Thigh on the superior part fends out three appendices; a Head, and two 
Trochanters which remain Cartilaginous Epiphyses, a good time, the inferior part 
of the Thigh hath two knobs, the appendix is Cartilaginous.
Patella. 
The Knee-pan at first is totally Cartilaginous ; and is a long time ere it grow 
bony.
Tibia.
Fibula.
The bones of the Tibia and Fibula, differ nothing from those that are grown up 
save only in their appendices, both above and below,which are Cartilaginous, then 
grow hard, and remain seperated even to the tenth year and upwards.
Tarsus. 
In the Foot al the bones of the c Tarsus are Cartilaginous for some months, the 
bone of the Heel excepted which is Bony within, though covered with Cartilages, 
without.
Sesamoides. 
The Sesamoides remain Cartilaginous almost to confident Age, two only ex- 
cepted, which are in the first Joynt of the great Toe, for these grow bony presently 
after the Birth,  
a T. 8. f. 12. CC. b T. 8. f. 12. DD. c f. 12. EE. d f. 14. a. b. e f. 14. c.
CHAP.

Book I. Physick and Anatomy. 25
Chap. 31. Of the Number of Bones.
Number. 
I Nqrassias, Propounds a fourfold number of the bones of Infants, the first con- 
tains two hundied thirty seven. The second three hundred fourty five. The 
third two hundred fifty nine. The fourth one hundred ninety two. But this last 
Number I doubt is devised, or else I do not understand what Ingrassias 
means. 
These Numbers he thus composeth. 
In such Children as are grown up are found three hundred five bones, in the Head 
seventy, to wit, eight in the Skul twelve of the upper Jaw, one of the lower Jaw, 
six of the Ears, thirty two Teeth, eleven Imal bones of the Os Hyois, which al 
joyned together make seventy. The Trunk comprehends sixty seven, Vertebræ 
twenty four, Scapulæ two, Ingulæ two, Sternum three. Ilium two. These 
joyned together make sixty seven. But if the Os Sacrum consist of five and the 
Coccyx of three, (as often it doth) then there wil be only sixty six. In both hands, 
eighty four, (adding the twenty four Sesamoides) in both Feet eighty four, the 
twenty four Sesamoides being also added, the total Number of bones wil be three 
hundred and five; form this Number if you take away thirty two Teeth which doth 
not appear in Infants, the result is two hundred seventy three, although the Teeth be- 
ing formed lie hid. in the Gums, yet because there is no use of them, they are not 
reckoned amongst the bones.  
In reckoning the second Number he proceeds thus, the Vertebræ of the Back-bone 
and Os Sacrum in Infants are divided into three Parts, the second excepted which 
is divided into four by reason of the Teeth, the Ilium is divided into three bones the 
Sternum into eight, the inferior Jaw of two,and the Frontal bone is double. 
These diligently considered you should find amount to seventy two, which ad- 
ded to two hundred seventy three make three hundred fourty five, from which if you 
take away the bones which deserve rather the Names of Cartilages than bones, as 
the bones of the Wrist sixteen, of the Instep eight, of the Coccyx four, Sesamoides 
fourty eight, each Knee-pan and Hyois eight (the three smal bones remaining) which 
are in number eighty six, there remains two hundred fifty nine. In these Numbers 
the three hundred fifty one Appendices are not Numbred which if you ad to three 
hunded fourty five, the Body of the Infant wil be composed of six hundred seventy 
Bones.  
The End of the First Book: 
G THE

26 
THE 
SECOND BOOK
OF 
ANATOMY 
PHYSICK,
OF 
John Riolanus. 
Chap. 1. General Precepts,  which he that would be an 
Antomist must be first Acquainted with. 
SEeing that according to Aristotle Chap. 1. Lib. 1. post. Analyt. 
Every Doctrine and discipline which consists in reason and 
intelligence, is perfected by fore-knowledg, and Tullius  
Lib. 1. de nat. Deorum, saith that without fore-knowledg, 
neither any thing can be understood nor studyed, nor disput- 
ed. Before I set about my Anatomical work I thought good to 
premise certain general Precepts, which are the foundations of 
Anatomy, and wil give great light to our proceeding.
How Anato-
mists Consider
the Body of
Man.
Its Parts. 
The Body of man is considered by Anatomists as composed of many 
Parts, which they examine Limb by Limb, and by a diligent Dissection, 
they divide the whol Body, into its smallest Parts. They divide it first into three 
grand Parts, Containing, Contained, and Impelling; that is into the Parts, hu- 
mors, and Spirits. 
But in the Anatomical dissection of a dead Body, the Humors 
and Spirits, are not conidered, the Speculation of which belongs to Phy- 
siology, only the Sollid Parts are regarded, which are either such as make, or such 
as contain Humors and Spirits or the instruments of Motion, which is the Chief  
Action of a living Creature, for which it was made.
The sollid Parts are similar 
or dissimilar. They are called similar Parts because they are most simple, from 
which, as from a principle, the dissimilar Parts are composed. The similar Parts 
according to Anatomists are Bones, Cartilages, Ligaments, Membranes, Fibres 
Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Flesh, Fat. These are found almost in al Compound 
anci dissimilar Parts,and the Corpulency of the Parts is formed of them The Hairs, 
and Nails are excrements of the external Parts: Therefore an Anatomist ought to
be  


Book II. The Physcal Consideration, and Anatomy. 27 
be wel instcructed what these Similar Parts are, that when he searcheth out the 
structure of the organical parts. Limb by Limb, he may know the Fundamentals 
of this structure. 
1. A Bone.
1. A bone is a part of the Body, most cold and dry, Terrestial; and therefore 
hardest, that so it may prop up the other parts of the body.
A Cartilage. 
2. A Cartilage, or Gristle, is not so hard as a bone, Which in Old Men somtimes 2. 
degenerates into a bone: The Cartilages are placed about the extremities of the bone, 
to ease them in their Motion; some are found separated from the bones, as the 
Cartilages of the inferior Jaw, in the Articulation of the Claviculæ, in the Sternum, 
in the Articulation of the Tibia to the Thigh; besides the Cartilages of the Larinx, 
Wind-pipe, and such as are placed to prop up other soft Parts, as the Nostrels, and 
Ears. 
3. Ligament. 
3. A Ligament, or bond, is a part which binds the bones together, being of a 
middle substance, between a Cartilage, and a Membrane; softer than a Cartilage, 
harder than a Membrane.
4. Membrane. 
4. A Membrane, Skin, or Coat, is very soft, and subject to dilation. It is the 
covering of other parts, or the Receptacle of somthing; as the Stomach, Bladder of 
Gal: It being a hollow body, it receiving somthing, it may be called Tunica, a 
Coat; It it Embrace and cover a sollid body, it is propperly called Mem- 
brana. 
5. Fibra. 
5. A Fibre is like a threed stretched over a Membrane, or Interwoven there- 
with, to strengthen it: and because of its various Scituation, it is called Right, 
Oblique, and Transverse, not only to help the Membrane, but also to strenghten 
it. Every sort of Fibres, is thought to perform a several action; as the Right, 
to draw to; the Transverse, to retain; and the Oblique, to expel. Which Mo- 
tions notwithstanding, absolutely depend upon the inbred faculty of the Part; 
as it hath a violent dilation, so hath it a willing, and Natural contraction, 
and is helped in these by the Fibres.
6. A Vein. 
6. A vine, is a Membranous Vessel, round and hollow, allotted to contain 
Blood, and distribute it for the Nourishment of the whol Body. 
7. An Artery is a Membranous Channel of the same Nature, but somthing 
harder, and thicker; ordained for the containing and Distributing of the Arterious 
blood: The original of both which, Aristotle thought was from the heart; but 
wiser Physitians, hold the beginning of the Veins to be in the liver; but of the 
Arteries in the heart.
Nerve. 
8. A Nerve is a Channel made to carry animal Spirit; and because this spirit is 
most subtil, therefore the Cavity is so smal, that it is not discernable.
9. Flesh. 
9. The Flesh is the foundation of organical, and dissimilary Parts; where bone 
is wanting, and makes up the chief Part of our bulk. The flesh is in substance, 
soft and thick; made of blood alone, compacted together, and wel concocted, if 
it be red; but of blood, and Seed, if it be white. 
A four-fold soft of flesh is observed in the Parts; Viscerous, and Musculous, 
both of them very red; Membranous, and Glandulous, both of them white. For 
every substance of the bowels is called Flesh, or Parenchyma. The thicker sub- 
stance of certain Membranes, which are the containers of somthing; which by 
dilating and contracting their bodies, they attract, retain, and expel, are also called 
Flesh, or a Flesh-like substance. The thick, and spongy substane of the 
Glandulæ is called Flesh; but especially the subtance of the Muscles deserves the
Name of Flesh.
10. Fat. 
10. The Fat although it appear not til the whol body be formed, and when the 
Child is big, and grows; to the Parts; yet because in the composition of organical 
Parts, it often concurs to make up the bulk, it is Numbered amongst the similar 
Parts, Fat is the thinnest substance of blood, Fat, and Oyly, sweating out 
through the tender Coats of the Veins, and hardning between the Membranes: It 
is two-fold, according to Aristotle; Soft, and external; Hard and internal. The 
one is Grease The other Suet.
G 2 These 


28 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book II. 
These three simiiar Parts; Bones, Cartilages, and Ligaments, shal betrea- 
ted of, as they are shewed in a Carcass, from top to Toe, after we have shewed the 
Muscles; because they are so joyned together, that one cannot be shewed without 
another. 
But I desire al such as are studious in Physick, first to be wel acquainted in the 
Osteology or History of the dry bones in the Skeleton of a Man, before they come to 
the inspection of a Carcass; for so they wil the better understand the whol anatomi- 
cal discourse of the dissection, and find out the reason of my other Osteology in the 
bones of Carcasses. 
The rest of the simiiar Parts shal be shewed severally in the explication of the 
dissimilar Parts, seeing of the similary Parts aforesaid, viz. Bones, Cartilages, 
Ligaments, Membranes, Fibres, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Flesh and Fat, 
the Bulk, or Material substance of the dissimilar Parts, is made up, and therefore 
you shal hear similary Parts often mentioned, in the explication of them; howbeit, 
in some places they exist apart, no waies joined, or united unto others, to con- 
stitute an Organ; but are considered with reference to their Particular uses.
Organical
Parts, what? 
But they concur together, and are united one with another, in organical Parts, 
that they may perform their various Offices: for the effect of which, they are divi- 
ded into four orders: For in every Organ there is the principal Part by which the 
Action is performed: Another, without which the Action cannot be done: A 
third, by which the action is preserved. But in every Organ, the principal Part 
ought to be similar and proper to it, such as is not found in another Organ. But 
this similar Part cannot perform its action alone, unless it be helped by others; and 
therefore the concourse and Union of similary Parts is necessary. Wherefore, e- 
very Movable action, belongs truly, and poperly to an Organical Part; and none 
Unless it be alteration, belongs to a similiar Part; which out of the composition of 
the Organical, hath only use, which notwithstanding, it contributes to perfect the 
action of the Organical.  
[ How many. 
More over, organical Parts according to the dignity of their action, are divided 
into Principal, and Administring. They are called principal, which supply 
the whol body with matter and faculty: Physicians hold them to be three; the 
Liver, Heart, and Brain: Aristotle held but one principal Part of the body, viz. 
The Heart, which is King and Ruler of al others. The rest of the Parts Minister, 
and are subservient to the principal. According to the various composition of the 
Organical they are divided into compound, more compound, and most compound: 
For the Finger is compound; the Hand, or Foot, more compound; the Limbs, 
are most compound. 
What is to be 
observed in 
each Part. 
But that we may seek out the structure of eath Part exactly; we must observe 
the Name Substance, Temperature, Original, Scituation, Quantity, Number, 
Figure, Color, Connexion, Communion, Action and Use. Connection differs 
from communion; for Connexion is the sticking of one Part to anther, of one or 
more Parts by which they depend; it is somtimes taken for the Original of the part it 
self, and yet the Original of some Parts is distinguished from Connexion: But 
communion is either universal, with Parts remote and neer, which is done by Veins, 
Arteries, and Nerves, by intervening of which, al the Parts have community with 
one another; or Particular, when some Particular Part communicates its self to 
some neer, or remote Parts, and so the Gal communicates it self by the Biliar pas- 
sages to the Liver, and the Gut Duodenum: The Reins, and Bladder have commu- 
nion by the Ureters. In this Method you may comprehend whatsoever may be 
spoken, or demanded of any Part: But in the History of Parts we must begin first 
of al with those things that are common to the whol Organ, then with those things. 
which are Proper to the same Organ: but in describing the Fabrick of the body of 
Man, we wil follow the common order of Dissection. 
Chap.

Book II. The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. 29 
Chap. 2.  Of the Natural and Legitimate Conformation of 
the Body.
The Necessari-
ness of it. 
SEeing my design and intent of handling Anatomy, doth not consist: in a bear and 
simple comtemplation of the Parts of the Body, but is also referred to the use 
of Medicine; before we come to the dissection of the body of man, we wil describe 
in a few words the Legitimate and natural conformation of the Body of Man when 
it is alive, which is the basis whereby we judg of the Sicknesses and imperfections 
of Men or Women: this was necessary of Old in buying of Servants, in joyning 
Men and Women in Marriage that they might have Children, and in chusing select 
Men for Soldiers. And this knowledg is necessary even to this day; for in some 
Monasteries such as desire to lead a Religious life, the Physitian views them Naked 
from the Crown of the Head, to the Sole of the foot; and notes their respiration, and 
pulse, and voice in singing. This is done in buying Slaves in divers Countries, and 
also in buying Horses and also Nurses are exactly viewed by Physitians for the 
education of Children, I mean the Children of Princes. 
Considerations
in a Man well
formed. 
Therefore in Man-kind, you may consider the difference of Sex: Substance of 
Body, Temperature, Greatness, Color, form, or Figure; as they are convenient 
in a perfect and wel formed body, that so by this, the difference of a body not wel 
formed may be known.
1. Sex. 
As for that which belongs to Sex, Man-kind is twofold: Male and Female. The Latin 
word Homo comprehends both: and a Women has been called Vira, therefore a 
stout Women is called Virago: the differences of both I have Accurately expoud- 
ed in my Anthopographiæ. Lib. 2.
2. Substance. 
The substance of the Boby in Man ought to be fleshy not Fat; firm and sollid, not 
soft: the Limbs meanly hairy, for smoothness in Men, such as is in Women, argues 
effeminate conditions.
3. Temper 
A healthful temper ought to be hot and moist, because life consists in, and is 
preserved by such a temper, yet is there a peculiar temper in every person, which by 
Physicians is called Idiosyncrasia; which if Galen could exactly have known, he 
would have thought himself equal with Æsculapius: but we must reduce this to the 
General. But by what signs this may be known, Galen hath declared in his little 
book of Art of Physick and other Authors.
4. Magnitude. 
The Magnitude of the body is threefold, according to the threefold Dimension of 
the body. We shal consider cheifly the Longitude and Latitude: The natural 
and decent Longitude of the body ought to be four Cubits, the Latitude one Cubit 
as Goropius Becanus teacheth: this also is confirmed by Vitruvius who defined the 
Gust Longitude of the body of man to be six Roman Feet. And Agellius Lib. 3. ex 
Varrone, Noted that the highest pitch of a Mans height was seven Foot; but more 
are shorter, than taller than this. Vegetius Writes that Soldiers ought to be 
choson six Foot high, yet: by Reason of difference of sex, Region, Diseases, 
Men are either taller or shorter, for each soyl hath its Particular Nature: so the peo- 
ple of Asia are taller than those of Europe, and in Europe those of the North parts, 
as Denmark, the Low-Countries and those of upper Germany are tal-
lest. 
The various Mensuration of bodies Hippocrates hath described Leb. de aer. aq. 
et loc Commonly men are taller then Women; whereas in some other living creatures, 
Fœmales are greatest. 
The Latitude or thickness in a wel Proportioned body ought to be, almost half 
the Longitude, so that if the Longitude be six Foot, the Latitude ought to be al 
most three: slenderness of body is subject to Consumptions, neither can the body 
be strong and fit for labor unless it be thick.  
In the bigness of the body is Magnanimity and beauty, quoth Aristotle, Ethic.
Lib. 4. For a man of a little and smal body cannot be fair; yet if you regard. 
understanding, 


30 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book.II 
understanding, there is little Wit commonly in those Tal bodies. 
Elegantly said Celsus, Lib. 2. Ch. 1. The best diputed body is wel fer, neither 
slender nor Fat, a tal stature is comely in youth but not so in Age, a slender body is 
weak, a Fat body dul.
5. Color
Tne Color of the body is diligently to be marked, for such a Color as flourish- 
eth in the Skin and countenance, the same is predominant in the Humors, and there- 
fore sanguine people are Red, Chollerick Yellow, Mellancholly Black or brown 
and dusky, Flegmatick are pale: a brown and ruddy Color are preferred before 
pale, which argues softness of body. 
There is some difference in Anchors about the Color to be Chosen in a Nurse, 
Aristotle perfers brown, others a Mingled Color of Red and white.
6. Form 
of the Head.
Now the Natural and Legitimate form of the Head,Brest, Belly, and Limbs,is to 
be considered. The Head ought to be round, and not Copped, unless the Neck 
be very thick: a great Head is preferred before a little one: from the Head ought 
the Nature of the Nerves, Veins, Flesh, and Humors to be collected. 
A great Head requires a great Neck, which gives indication of a great breast, by 
reason of the Parts contained in the Neck: a great breast makes a large belly, and, 
therefore the proportion of the rest of the Cavities depends upon the Head.
Breast. 
The Chest ought to be large, of an Oval Figure,and the Back-bone straight, the 
breast ought to be somwhat convex, not sharp, nor flat, nor depressed. 
The Papps of Men, ought to be depressed, but in Women swelling round and 
Glandulous, rather than Fatty, or Fleshy, because they are the Emunctories of 
the breast: if the Woman give not Suck. If the Duggs be fmal the Women are 
sickly, and if the Nipples look pale the Womb is Diseased, according to 'Hip- 
pocrates.
What Breasts
are to be chosen 
in Nurses.
Whether are large breasts to be chosen in Nurses, or such as are mean in bigness? 
Great breads please not Moschio, bccauie they are Fat, neither have they plenty 
of Milk; and therefore Fat Nurses are not to be preferred before such as are Lean, 
and Juicy; neither such as are tal, before such as are of a mean Stature: Aristotle 
Lib. 3. de hist. animal.
White colored Women, because they are Flegmatick, have but bad Milk. 
Belly.
From the breast, we pass to the belly, which ought to be round and sticking out: 
Women that have such bellies, the Poets praise, and say Venus had such a one. 
Hipp. Lib. de vet Med. Notes that long and round bellies, ought to be conside- 
red of Physicians, because by looking upon them, 'tis easie to know which are fit for 
strong Purgations; for such whose Parts in the Abdomen are strong, and wel dis- 
puted, may easily Purge; but such as are slender, take strong Medicines with 
danger. 
Very Fat Women are hard to conceive with Child, Hippoc. Aph. 4 
Lib. 5.
Privities.
As for what belongs to the Privities; Heliogabalus chose such for Soldiers as 
had large Privities, because he thought they were lusty, stout Men. A very long 
yard is not sic or Venery, either because the strength of the Seed passeth out by 
reason of the length of the Yard, if you will beleeve Galen or because the Muscles 
are tyred, by erecting a great, and long Yard. A mean Yard is most fruitful, and 
gives most & longest pleasure in the act of Copulation. A long Yard, though indeed 
it fil the Neck of the Womb, yet it makes it not so fruitful; and is hurtful to such 
Women as are subject to the fits of the Mother, by strething the Genitals: Neither 
are the Testicles when they are great and Pendulous, to be commended.
Limbs. 
We pass to the Limbs, viz. The Hands and Feet, which ought to be equal in 
proportion to the rest of the Body: The longitude of the Foot, from the Os Pu- 
bis, to the extremity of the Heel, ought to be equal to that of the Hand, from the 
Asia, to the top of the middle Finger. If the whol body be six Foot long, the 
Foot is three: both Hands and Feet, are somwhat fleshy in strong bodies; for 
although slenderness of Legs be commended in Horses, ’tis not so in Men. 
An example of a perfect and absolute body wel formed is to be Read in Sidoninus
Apollinaris, 

Book II. The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. 31 
Apllinaris, Lib. I. Epist. 2. de Theodorico ree is one remarkable fault 
to be amended, not Noted by interpreters, for Excrementa read Extrema. Inter 
'Extrema Costarum Spina discriminat.
Chap. 3. The Division of Mans Body. 
BEfore we expose the whol Body of Man, to Anatomical dissection, it ought 
to be divided into its Parts, or principal regions, that the Number and order 
of the regions, and where they begin, may be known.
Division of
the Body. 
A mongst the various divisions of che Body of Man, this in my mind seems the 
best, and to be preferred before the rest. 
The body is divided into the Trunk, and the Limbs. 
The Trunk is divided into three Principal Regions; the Head, Breast, and 
Belly. 
The Head obtains the Superior place; The Breast, the middle: and the Belly, 
the lowermost. 
The Members or Limbs are four branches sticking out from the Body, two Arms, 
and two Legs. 
What are the bands of these Regions, I shal shew, when I come to speak of each 
Region apart. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
I wil not stand here in rehearsing & designing the external Parts of the whol body, 
which are expounded in every Region of the same; but only consider the corpora- 
ture, or fleshy habit, which is covered with the Skin, like a Garment; which 
though it look for the most part beautifully without, it looks ill favoredly within. 
This habit of the whol body, makes the third Region of the body, to which the 
Humors come from the deepest Parts; the ill effects of which, are cleerly seen in 
the Diseases, and Symptomes which appear outwardly. The juyce which is seen 
in the leaf and branch comes from the Root. 
I shal reckon up the cheife Diseases which use to infest the outward ha- 
bit of the body. Immoderate Fatness, or Leanness, Defluxions, Gouts, 
Dropsy, Cachexia, the whores Pocks, Plenty, or defect of Sweat, by reason of 
the openness, or closeness of the pores, Palsie, Convulsion, Unquietness, and weariness 
and al kind of swellings.  
The Flesh of man, because its Nourished by purer Blood, is delicater than the 
flesh of other Creatures, and prefered before it by Canibals, or Man-Eaters. 
The Flesh, seeing it is Porous and Musculous, it hath empty spaces, which in men in 
health are filled with spirit and blood, but in such as are sick, with Water and 
wind, thence come Defluxions over the whol body, and other Diseases of the
Skin. 
The Habit of the wholbody, is Purged and empty ed by sweating, by Cupping- 
Glasses, Scarrification, and Rubbing, according to the Doctrine of Galen, Lib. 
de Sanitate; by Bathings, Whippings, and Beatings, and blistering, and Rubisy- 
ing, or Pimple-raising Applications. 
Therefore seeing the smal Pocks and Measles, are but the scum of the whol habit 
of body, that is, of the Fiesh, and sollid parts, their coming out is to be furthered 
either at the beginning, or at any other time, with Sweating Medicamants, and such 
things as draw to the external Parts. Neither need you let blood so often, though 
the Patient be strong, twice if need be, is enough, because it hinders the Motion of 
Nature in expelling, unless either a dead sleep, or strangling with a Feaver, or 
bloody Flux, which 1s for the most part deadly, draw us to that remedy; not neglect- 
ing young Pidgeons Cut alive through the middle, laid to the Hands and Feet, and 
somtimes to the Heart, and smal Cupping-Glasses fastned al about the body,
with

32 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book II. 
with light Scarification. And somtimes bathing the Body in Luke warm Water 
profits, if the season of the year be convenient, to make the Measles and smal 
Packs come out the better. 
Chap. 4. Of the lower Ventricle. 
Why the Dise-
ction begins at
the lower Ven-
tricle. 
THe Dissection and Anatomical demonstration, must be begun at the belly be- 
cause it is the sink and Kitchin of the body: and therefore soonnest Purrties 
and stinks. 
It is called in Greek Coilia because it is coile that is hollow; in latin Venler in 
English the Belly.
Its Substance. 
Its substance is fleshy composed of various similar parts, which we shal propound 
in order hereafter.
Temperature. 
The belly seeing it is a most compound part its own temperature is none, at al, but 
it follows the temperament of the parts contained in it, and especially of the 
Liver.
Original. 
It hath its Original from the first comformation with the rest of the Parts.
Scituatism. 
It is Scituated in the inferior part of the Trunk of the Body.
Quanity. 
Its Quantity or widness is from the bastard Ribs, or Diaphragma to the Os 
Pubis or share Bone; and with these bounds it is Circumscribed above and below. 
The whol widness of the belly is distiguished into three Regions; the supenor 
called a Stomachal, the middle called b Umbiliar, and the lower called c Hypo- 
gastrica. 
Again in every part, both the lateral and middle parts ought to be observed, the 
lateral parts of the stomachal Region are called d Hypochondria, of the middle Re- 
gion c Ilia The middle is called the f Navil which is the centre both of the belly 
and of the whol body.  
The lateral parts of the Hypogastrick Region are called g Groyns, the middle 
h Pubis, the share which after the fourteenth year both in men and Women is 
adorned with Hair, as a natural covering for those parts, which the common Law of 
bashfulness commands us to conceal.  
In respect of number, the belly is but one; yet by the Peritonæum it is divided 
into to Cavities; The greater holds the parts which prepare for nourishment. The 
lesser holds the bladder, and Genitals in men; and the Womb also in Women 
which never bear Children.
Parts contai-
ning.
Common. 
It is divided ihto parts containing, and contained. Parts containing, are pro- 
per, common, and diverse: common are five; i Cuticula, or scarf Skin; k the 
Skin, l the Fatty Membrane, m the Fleshy Membrane, and the Common Mem- 
brane of the Muscles.
Proper
Diverse. 
Proper are, the Muscles of the n Abdomen, and the o Peritoneum. 
Diverse are, partly Fieshy, partly bony: bony are the P Vertebræ and q Pelvis, 
which are parts of the Os Sacrum, and Ilium. Fleshy are, the Mulcles r Psoas, 
s Sacrolumbus  t Latissimus, v Sacer x Semispinatus, y Quadratus. scal them di- 
verse, because those bones and Muscles, being Scituated in the hinder part of the 
belly, do make somthing toward the constituting of thc belly, though they are re- 
ferred to another part, and pertain to another use.
Contained
Parts. 
The parts contained, are manifold; which are divided into such as nourish, and 
such as engender; such as nourish are such as make Chyle, and such as make blood 
The Genitals are of men, and of Women.
Figure.
The Figure of the belly, is Oval, by 
reason of the parts contained; which if removed, it is hollow, that it may be the 
seat of the Vessels dedicated to nourishment, and Generation; and therefore the 
latinscal it Abdomen, and the Greeks Epigastrion.  
Color.
The color of the superficies of the belly, is like the color of the rest of the body;
in men of ripe Age it is Hairy from the Pubis, up to che Navil. Connexion.
It is outwardly knit to the breast, and inferior limbs by the Skin; inwardly by 
It
the peritoneum.

Chap. 4. Of the lower Ventricle. 33 
It communicats with the principal parts, by Veins Arteries, and
Nerves.
Use. 
The use of the Belly is, to comprehend, and involve the parts of nourishment, 
and generation; take it individually, it consists of Musculous Flesh.
Action. 
It hath action to compress the parts contained within its self, for the expultion 
of excrements, upwards and downwards; and to force the Child out of the 
Womb.  
a T. I. f. I. A. B. b f. T. CC. c f. I. EE. d T. I. f. I. AB. c f. I.
DD. f infra. CC. g  f. I. FF. h f. I. g. f2. DD. i f. 2. BB. k f. 2.
CC. I f. 2. DD. m T. 2. f. 8. 9. n t. 2. f. 3. and 4. o T. 10. f.10. OO.
p T. 23. f. I. A. q T. 14 f. 2. LL. f. 3. BB. r T. 14. f. I. CC. DD. s f.
4. BB. t f. 3. DD. f. 4. AA. v f. 2. OO. x f. 4. CC. y T. 10. f. I. NN. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
From this discourse, a Physiclan collects many things, in his Practice, useful. 
I. That the Belly is the Sink of the Body, in which the vices of our intemperance 
reside; the Mother of all mischeifs, and the Nurse of Physicians; in which condition 
tis called Collatibus Venter, an Aldermans Belly. 
He whose Belly grows to a great bigness, is called Ventrosus, Fat Guts. Some 
We read of, whose Bellies grew to a monstrous bigness, as Nichomachus Smyrnæus, 
in Galen; in Athenæus, Lib. 12. Deipnosophist, we read of a King that was chok- 
ed with fatness. But famous is that History in Michael Neander, in Erot. Hebr. 
ex. Talmud, in Jona. Rabbi. Ismael, and Rabbi Eliazer, had such great Bel- 
lies, that when they stood with their Faces together and their Bellies touched, two 
great Oxen might pass between them, and touch neither of them.
Swelling in
the Abdomen.
By reason of the Fleshy, and fatty substance of the Belly, it is subject to diverse 
swellings, Especially Aposthemes, either from the liver by the Vmbilicar Vein; 
or else the matter is sent from the Suppuration of the Reins which being shut up 
in the Doublings of the Peritonæum, may send their impurities into the external 
parts of the Belly.
Its Constitu- 
tion what it
should be.
This fleshy and fatty substance, ought to be mean; if it be greater, ’tis a discom- 
dity to life, if lesser it shews an ill Disposition of the Bowels: Therefore Hippo- 
crates wrote, that in every Disease, the parts belonging to the Belly, had better be 
somwhat gross, then to slender; for if they conlume, tis very evil: therefore Phy- 
sicians were wont to handle the whol belly, especially the Hypochondria, which 
ought to be soft, equal, and fleshy.  
The Scituation of the Parts in the Belly.
The Scituati-
on of the Parts
in the lower
Ventricle. 
The largeness of the Belly is considered, according to longitude and depth, that 
so the Physician may know in pains and wounds in the belly, which part is 
afflicted, or wounded.  
According to depth, the parts are divided into upper, and lower; and therefore 
according to Hippocrates the pains in the upper part, are more light; those in the 
lower, more strong and dangerous.
Viz. 
According to Longitude by the division of the places, you may understand by the 
looking upon them, or feeling them with the hand, what parts are afflicted, 
pained or wounded. In the right Hypochondria is the liver, which passeth even 
to the Cartilage Xyphois; It passeth a fingers breadth beyond the bastard Ribs, on 
sides forewards, two fingers.
Liver Stomach.
In the middle region, is the Stomach placed, 
which incliness more to the left Hypoehondrium, and descends four fingers breadth 
below the bastard Ribs.
Spleen.
In the left Hypochondria, lies the Spleen, which Naturally hangs under the 
bastard Ribs, the breadth of a mans Thumb.
Colon. 
The umbilicar Region, the Navel possesseth, above which, is the Gut called 
Colon, transversly seated; and in the whol compass of that Region, is the Gut 
called Jejunum, disposed: Toward the Backbone, are the Kidneies. 
Jejunum
The beginning of the Colon being bowed back from the right Kidney, under the Liver and
H Stomach. 

34 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book II. 
Kidneies. 
Stomach, to the Spleen afterwards passeth obliquely to the left Kidney: and 
therefore the pains of the Colick, must diligently be distinguished from those of 
the stone.
Ilium.
Bladder.
Right Gut. 
In the middle, and side-Region of the Hypogastrick, in the Gut called Ilium con- 
contained; In the bottom of the belly, the bladder, under which lies the right 
Gut.
Womb. 
In Women, the Womb lies bet wen the bladder, and the right Gut: under the 
Guts, lies the Mesenterium, as the Sweat-bread doth under the Stomach. A little 
below the Navel, the Omentum is stretched about al the Guts, and divides all the 
internal parts with the Peritonæum, from the external those that lie deep, from 
those that lie at top.  
The Medicinal Consideration, 
Dlseases of 
the abdomen.  
In the Belly, are frequently al for sorts of Tumors, Impostumes, Rumblings of the 
Guts, and Croaking;  which proceed either from Tumors of the Parts conteined, 
or from wind, or collection of Water. 
It is Cut on the sides towards the Hypogastrium, in the Cæsarian dissection, to 
draw out the Child in a difficult labor. It is pricked neer the Os Pubis, to draw 
out Vrine, when a Catheter cannot be put in. It is pierced in the bottom of the 
Hypogastrium, neer the Navel, to draw out Water in the Dropsie Ascites, which 
Operation is called Paracentesis. 
Chap. 5. Of the Scarfe Skin. 
AMongst the parts which make the Abdomen, the first that comes to view, the 
Greeks cal Epidermis, the Latins Cuticula and we the Scarf-Skin.
Substance. 
Although, by its substance it seems to be Spermatical yet It differs much 
from it.
Original. 
It’s Temperature is none at al, and therefore no more words about it, but for its 
original, it is framed of the Excrementitious and Viscous Vapors of the Skin, which 
Sweating, out grow dry by the coldness of the Air, and like a thin Skin, compasseth 
the Skin round, and therefore it sticks to the Skin firmly and universally, and hath 
no other bounds then the Skin hath. 
And although to the fight its substance appeares simple, yet Fabricius ab Aqua 
pendentæ wil have it double, one which is inseperably fixed to the pores of the 
Skin, the other seperable, without any offence to the Skin it self, but the thickness 
of the Cuticula, be it more or less, doth not encrease it’s number, for though in some 
places it may be divided into many smal Skins, yet in no place can one be pulled off 
without another.
Figure. 
It hath no Proper figure besides what it borrows from the Skin it self, from which 
it differs in this, that it is no way porous.
Color. 
It is thought to partake alwaies of the lame color with the Skin, and yet in Black 
Mores this being pulled of, the Skin it self is white.
Connexion. 
It sticks firmely to the true Skin, and is an Excrementitious part as the Hairs are
are, and hath no communion with the principal parts, by Veins, Arteries, nor 
Nerves, because it wants them, and is insensible, as you may find, if you please to 
scrape it off from your hands, or any parts, or thrust a Pin or Needle under it.
Use. 
It hath no action, only use, which is to shut the pores of the Skin, to make it 
smooth, and bewtiful, polished and even.  
The Medicinal Consideration. 
By these things thus considered, a Physician may see that the scarse Skin hath also 
its Diseases, though Hippocrates thought them to be only deformities, He makes 
a distinction

Chap. 6. Of the Skin. 35 
a distinction whether they may be called Impostumes or diseases, at the end of 
Lib. 2. Prorrheticorum, because such as belong to the Scarfe-skin, per- 
tain most of al to the dignotion and Cure of Affects. 
It is infected with divers Spots, both natural, and sickly; natural, are those 
many deformities of the Skin; Sickly, are the Meazles, smal Pocks, purple spots in 
Feavers, or any Spots of other Colors somtimes without a Feavers when, Nature 
sends any Wheyish substance of another Color into the Scarf-Skin. 
Diseased spots of the Scarf-Skin may, and ought to be cured: but such as are 
Original from the bath, are very difficultly taken away, because they stick firmely 
to the Skin, as wel as to the Scarf Skin. 
It may be
Beautified.
This Scarf-Skin may be beautified; which Galen denies to be done, by an honest, 
and honorable Physicitian; but allowes it to be done, by Court Physicitians, and 
Bauds, and Chamber-Maids that wait upon their Ladies. In Women, the Curicula 
is thick, smooth, and many time stops the pores of the Skin, and hinders free per- 
spiration. In men it’s usually ful of pores, that so the Hairs may pass out. 
Lastly, as the Scarf-Skin of the Body, being wel looked after, and adorned, 
procures beauty and and comliness to the Body; to being made rough with Spots, or 
burnt by the Sun, it unhandioms a man. It is ridiculous to draw it off with blisters, 
that so it may come again the cleerer, you loose your labor as much as though you 
washed a Black-more. 
The Scarf-Skin peels off in divers persons whilst it is dried or burnt, and the Skin it 
self in Leprosies, and diverse that have the french pocks; The Skin it self comes off 
bY steakes in such as are Leprous, and in some that are troubled with the Whore- 
masters Pox.  
Chap. 6. Of the Skin.
Its Names.
Substance. 
AFter the Scarf-Skin, follower the Skin called in Greek Derma; it 
hath a substance diverse from other Membranes, the like of which you shal 
hever find in the whole Body, because it consists of Seed and Blood mixed together;
yet so as that portion of Seed is predominant, which may be bowed, and distended: 
from which the Skin is accounted Spermatical.
Temperature. 
Its temperature is cold and dry, or more properly, exquisitly temperate, yet so 
it may be the Judg of feeling. 
It is extended over the whol body, and on wraps it like a garment and therefore 
its dimention is as the dimention of the Body is.
Number. 
Although it seem but one, both to fight and touching, yet some hold it to consist 
of two Skins; but I could never find them to be seperable, only it may be cut into 
many parts by reason of its thickness.
Figure. 
It hath the same Figure which the body hath, that it cloatheth. Its textur 
is Slight and very ful of smal holes, for insensible transpiration, and the passing 
out of extrements and in diverse places, it hath visible great holes; as in the eares, 
Eyes Nose, mouth, fundament, and privities of Men and Women. 
It takes its Color from the predominant humor for of what color the Humor 
Preadominant in the Body is, of that color is the Skin, unless it be such from their 
birth, as in Ethiopia.
Connexion. 
It is straightly knit to the Parts under it, and therefore immovable, excepting the 
Skin of the Forehead. 
Communion.
It hath communion with the principal Parts, by innumerable veins. Arteries, 
and Nerves; the extremities of which, it takes on every side for it hath neither of
them all three peculiar to it self.
Action.
Whether by reason of its feeling, it perform action, a man may make a doubt;  
for otherwise the membranes) which are the instruments of inward feeling, perform 
aftion also but what Author ever said that the Membranes performed
action?
H 2 We 

36 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II.
Use. 
We grant that it hath an excellent, and particular use, to defend and adorn the 
body, to receive the excrements of the third concoction to clense the Body of filth 
fuliginous Vapors, and Sweat. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
A Efects in 
Substance.  
Let us now reduce this same conformation of the Skin, to a Physical use. Its 
substance against Nature, consists in its over thickness.
Temper. 
Its temperature is changed in diverse diseases.
Number. 
Its number is viciated, when the Cuticula is viciated, or gnawn through; or the 
Skin it self lost.
Figure. 
Often times its smoothness, is turned into roughness: or it is disfigured by 
pustles. 
Somtimes its passages are stopped, or more open then they should be. 
Connexio.
Its connexion, is marred in wounds, and Ulcers.
Use. 
Somtimes it’s use is hurt, when it is insensible or when it receives not only the 
extrements of the third concoction, but also of the whol Body. 
Therefore the Skin, seeing it is the breathing place of the whol body, is subject 
to an infinite number of Diseases; and if the pores be shut, the Body suffers great 
discommodities, by reason transpiration is hindered; for the Body ought to ease 
it self that way, according to Hippocrates, Lib. de Alimento: The motion of the 
Body, to perspiration, the wider it is, the healthfuller are men the less perspirati- 
on men have, the more sickly are they, they which have quick perspiration, are 
weaker, though better in health, and soonest recover when they are sick: Such whose 
perspiration is bad, are strongest before they are sick, but when they are sick their 
Cure is most difficult. 
Diseases proceeding from disorder of the Skin, are more dangerous in winter; 
and in malignant Feavers, by reason of the interception of die transpiration, 
the Native heat is choaked. Breathing a Vein is a remedy for such. 
From the substance, and Color of the Skin, Hippocrates propounded two 
prognosticks: Lib. 5 Aph. 71. and Lib prœgn. Part. 7. and 8. 
Of the spots of the Skin, read Soranus, Chap. 38. 
The Skin is like in Color, to the predominate humors, in the Body Hippoc. de 
humoribus. 
Of divination by the Moles of the Skin, wrote Polemon, a Greek Author; and 
and amongst modern writers, Ludovicus Septalius, Mediolanensis, Wrote most 
accurately. 
Aristotle concluded the subtilty of a persons wit, from the subtilty and thinness 
of the Skin, rather than of the blood. 
The thiness of the Skin, is the cause why man alone is troubled with the Le- 
prosie, according to Aristotle Prol. 5. Sect. 10.
It is certain that contagious Diseases, may be drawn in through the pores of the
Skin.
Whether Skin
lost, can be re-
gained. 
The Skin grows hard and dry, through burning Feavers, and somtimes it be- 
comes as thick as an Elephants Hide: especially about the Back, Limbs, and 
Thighs, as I have seen it in many, like a tand Hide. The Skin lost, grows not again, 
but degenerates into a Scarce: Forit is made By the first intention of Nature, but 
repaired by the second.  
Chap. 7. Of the Fatty Membrane. 
Its Names. 
THe Greeks cal it Stear, and Pimele; it makes a common membrane, by rea- 
son of its consistence: in Bruits it is calLed Aruina; and why not so then in 
men?
Substance. 
Its substance, although it be somthing sollid, yet is it soft, and Oyly, as you may 
perceive 

Chap. 8. Of the Fleshy Membrane. 37 
perceive if you handle it with your Fingers, or lay it by the Fire.
Original. 
It ariseth from the thinner portion of the Blood, distilling through the Veins 
like dew, and congealing about the Flesh: this is the certain matter of the Fat; of 
the efficient cause only is the question made, Namely, Whether it obtains its 
consistence by heat, or cold. Al acknowledg a moderate heat about the membranes, 
compelling, and applying this same fatty, and Oyly Liquor.
Temper.
Scituation. 
The Temperature then of the Fat, is moderately hot and moist. 
It is contained under the Skin, universally over the whol body; the Forehead, 
Cods, and yard, (where there is no Fat) excepted. 
Therefore the Fatty membrane, is large, as the Skin is.
Number. 
In Number it is only one, unless you connex the Fleshy membrane, internexed 
with it, as Sylvius doth. 
Figure.
It hath no Proper Figure.
Color. 
In Color it is white; if at any time it be red, it is because blood, by reason of 
some Laceration, is mixed with it. 
It sticks firmly to the Skin, neither can it be divided from it without scraping; 
and so it doth to the Fleshy Membrane. 
The Fat cannot communicate with the principal Parts, because it is not truly 
nourished; nor yet lives, unless by apposition as stones do; neither yet is it sensi- 
ble; therefore it wants both Veins, Arteries, and Nerves; and yet al three of them 
pass through the Fat, that so they may come at the Skin. 
Use.
As for the use of it; it warms the body in Winter like a Garment, and cools it 
In Summer, by hindring the penetrating of the heat: It is like a Cushion for men 
to sit on, and in long fasting, it is turned to Nourishment of the Fleshy Parts neer 
to it, which Suck out its juyce.  
Chap. 8. Of the Fleshy Membrane. 
Substance.
THe Fleshy Membrane lies under the Fat, and sticks to it, and is conspicuous 
in young Children newly born, where it is not hid with Fat. It is more ob- 
scure in such as are grown up, and yet it retains it Fleshy substance, as is evident 
about the Loynes, Cods, Forehead, and Neck.
Temperature. 
Its temperature, is like the rest of the Flesh, hot and moist; and it hath its 
original from the Blood.
Scituation. 
It is scituated under the Fat, and stretched out over the whol body universally, 
and is the fourth covering of the body. In bruits it is next to the Skin, which often 
moves by the intervening of this Membrane.
Number. 
It is one single Membrane.
Figure.  
It hath no proper Figure, unless the Figure of the body which it covers.
Color. 
It hath various colors in Disverse places; for it is more red in the Neck, Fore- 
head, and Cods, than else where.
Connexion. 
It is joyned to the Fat inseperably in some places; so that the Fleshy, and 
Fatty Membrane, seem to make but one: in other places it may be seperated.
Communion. 
It communicates with the principal parts, by the extremities of the Veins, At- 
eries, and Nerves.
Actions. 
And that it is very Sensible, the rigor, and trembling of the body, which depends 
upon this Membrane, witnesseth: besides it hath a peculiar Motion in the Neck, 
Forehead, and Cods, where it is Musculous, and endued with Nervous
Fibres
Use. 
Its use is to give foundation to the collecting and generating the Fat, to Cloath 
the Body, and cherish the internal heat, and defend it from external injuries.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Although, Cutaneous Diseases seem to belong to the Skin; yet if they continue
long 

38 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
long they have their foundation in the fleshy and fatty Membrane; shivering, 
shaking and trembling, belong especially to the Fleshy Membrane. 
Chap. 9. Of the Common Membrane of the Muscles. 
THe Fleshy Membrane being taken away, the common Membrane of the Muscles 
of the Abdomen follows next, being the fift common covering of the body, 
which comprehends al the Muscles in the body, (besides the proper Membrane of 
every Muscle) least in their Motion, they should pass out of their places.
Substance. 
Its Substance is very strong, yet thin and Nervous.
Temper. 
It is spermatical, cold and dry, in temperature.
Original. 
It hath its original, from the first formation.
Scituation. 
It immediatly covers, and straitly binds in the Muscles, over which it is stretched.
Quantity. 
Its wideness is thought to equal the dimension of the whol body; but in the Face, 
Neck, and superior Limbs, it is not easily found; and in the Legs, the Fascia 
Lata performes its Office.
Number. 
Seeing it is admirable thin, it cannot be divided into two Membranes.
Figure. 
It acquires its Figure, from the Parts it contains. 
Colors.
In Color, it is whitish.
Connnexion. 
It sticks stoutly to the Muscles, which it compasseth, neither can it be pulled off, 
but by a Skilful Dissector. 
It hath no peculiar Nerves, Veins, nor Arteries
Communion. 
It is nourished, and is sensible, like the other common parts,
Use. 
It is of admirable use, for it compasseth the Muscles like a girdle, and together 
with the Fleshy Membrane, is the foundation of the Fat; therefore, where it or 
somthing like it, which performs its Office, is wanting, there the Fat also is wan- 
ting; as in the Forehead, Head, Face, and Cods, where the Fleshy Mem- 
brane immediatly touched the Skin, without any Fat; between them. 
Chap. 10. Of a Muscle in the general. 
BEfore I treat of the Muscles of the Belly, I wil premise the general Doctrine of 
the Muscles.
Definition. 
A Muscle is an instrument of voluntary motion, which depends upon our own 
wil, and because it governs the actions. 
Substance.
It is a dissimilar part, compounded of ma- 
ny similar ones; but of those Parts, Fleshy: is predominante. So that the substance 
of the Muscle, is judged to be Fleshy: Yea and the Muscles are to be understood 
by the word Flesh in ancient Authors; as Hippocrates, and Aristotle. 
Besides, the Flesh, a Vein, an Artery, a Nerve, Fibres, a Membrane, a 
Ligament, or tendon, help to make up the composition of a Muscle.
Temperature. 
Seeing then they are Fleshy, their Temperature it hot and moist.
Original. 
and
Insertion.
The true original of a Muscle, is from blood in the conformation of the first. 
Parts; but by reason of its Connexion, in two extremes, It is said to arise from a 
stable Part, and to be inserted into a movable part, because it is ordained for moti- 
on, and al motion is caused by that which moves not.  
This original and insertion, is known by the ducture and feries of the Fibres, by 
which you may Judg of the Scituation of the Muscle, whether right, Oblique, or 
transverse; for in these positions al the Muscles in the body of man, both internal, 
and external, lie.
Quantity 
Their quantity and magnitude, is various, according to the variety of places 
and parts to be moved, which require either greater, or smaller Muscles.
Number. 
There are aboundance of them in number, which according to my Observation 
and computation, are four hundred thirty one:  but because our body is double 
the Muscles also are double; few their are without fellows, such as are the Sphin-
cters; 


Chap. 10. Of a Muscle in the general. 39 
cters; and the Diaphragma, or Midris.
Figure. 
Their Figure is various, a Square, b Triangular, c round, d Long, c Trapezia, 
Lozing sashond, f Deltois, like the Greek Delta Δ g Scalena: usually they are 
round, whether you regard their Circumference, or bulk in long and thick Muscles: 
Therefore Hippocrates in Lib. de art. Defines a Muscle to be Flesh Circumducted 
in an orb: but the greatest Parts of the Muscles have a longish figure.
Belly.
Head.
Tendon. 
For the most parts, you shal observe the middle Part swelled, the extremities 
narrow. The middle part is called the Belly; in the immovable extremity; the 
Head, the moveable extremity, the Tendon, or Aponeurosis, which is the end, or 
insertion of the Muscle into the Part to be moved. Each extremity of the Muscle 
for the most Part, is Nervous; but the Tendon is Nervous in almost al the long 
Muscles: the Belly is fleshy, and Seldom Nervous.
Color. 
The Color of a Muscle, for the most Part, is red; of a leaden Color in some 
few, by reason of their impure Scituation; in some filthy place.
Connexion. 
The Connexion of the Muscles is two fold; in the two extremities, and in diverse 
Parts; the one of which stands stil, the other moves: also the Muscles move the 
Parts to which they stick, though they were not appointed for that use.
Communion. 
All the Muscles have communion with the Parts, by Veins, Arteries, and Nerves; 
which they admit above the Belly, or middle part of their Body, by which they 
obtain their motive power. 
Action 
The Action of the Muscles, is either universal, or particular. Universal action, 
is that which agrees to al of them, Viz. Motion: particular action, is the motion 
of some one certain Part; this motion is performed by contraction of the Muscle, 
whilst it is drawn back, towards its beginning, made shorter, and swels outwardly; 
and this agrees withal the Muscles, those of the Abdomen excepted, which being 
drawn back, swel within, because they have no opposite bone to with-hold them. 
Therefore the true action of a Muscle, is contraction, or conservation of what is 
drawn; which motion is called Tonicus, in one Muscle remaining long in on figure; 
or in more Muscles extended, and acting together, as when the whol hand is long 
held elevated, and extended. 
The motion of others Muscles, as extention and relaxation, are only by accident; 
from these motions depend the motions of the parts, which are not only disting- 
uished by difference of place before, behind, upwards, downwards; but also by 
figure. 
Diversity. 
Their Scituation is either larger, and that right, and is called Extensio; or Ob- 
lique, and chat is either lateral, as the Abductor, and Adduct or of the fingers; or 
With inversion, as the Pronatio, and Supinatio in the hand and Radius. 
Also the Muscles by reason of their like motion, are called fellows, Or pairs; fel-  
low are somtimes in diverse 8c opposite places, &c yet perform the same action as; the 
Muscles which bow the Arms: such Muscles as perform a contrary motion are called 
Antagonists, and so such as bow the Arm, are antagonists to those that extend it. 
Such as are fellows are alike, for the most Part, in Magnitude, Number, and 
strength; such as are antagonists differ according to the waight of the Part moved. 
or vehemence of the action.
How it is
known 
The ducture of the Fibres, shews the manner of action in every Muscle; and by 
them you may easily distinguish a right Muscle from a transverse, and Oblique 
The ducture of the Fibres is various also in the same Muscle, according to the 
diversity of its rises or insertions; and therefore one Muscle performs diverse acti- 
ons as the Tranpezium; for by the extremities of the Fibres, you may know the 
Head and Tendon. 
The Tendon is directly opposite to the Head. 
If the Muscle act but one action, or many; according to the variety of its origi- 
nals it obtains various Connexions, to wit, Heads and Tendons. 
a T. 10. f. I. NN. T. 14. f. 2. OO. b T. 10. f. I. c T. 22. f. I. CD. d T.
14. f. 2. MM. T. 15. f. 18. AA. c T. 14. f. I AA. f T. 22. f. I. A. g T. 13.
f. 18. B B. 
CHAP.


40 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book II. 
Chap. 11. Of a Tendon. 
A Tendon is the least Part of a Muscle, by which we bend and move the bones. 
It is thought to consist of a Nerve, and a Ligament mixed together; so as that 
a Tendon is not found, unless it be in that Part of the Muscle where it is affixed to 
the Parts moved.
Orignal. 
But a mans Eyes (if he wil beleeve them) tels him, that they are from the first for- 
mation, and that they are the cheifest Part of the Muscle, and take their beginning 
where the Muscle begins, and are disseminated through its whol Body, if it be a 
Nervous Tendon in the beginning, such it is in the end; if it be like smal strings at 
beginning, they are united to forme the Tendon afterwards. Such Tendons those 
Muscles have which perform strong actions, in bowing and extending, and tonical 
motion; as in the superior and inferior Limbs, and in the back to uphold the Trunk 
of the body. The rest of the Muscles, as they are fibrous at the beginning, so they 
are at the end. 
The hard and stiff Tendons have much Fat about them to soften them, that they 
may the easier be moved; and therefore those fibres dispersed amongst the Flesh, 
are nothing else but the Tendon divided, and the Tendon nothing else but the 
Fibres united; and therefore a Tendon is either compact and solid, or else divid- 
ed into Fibres. 
Also Tendons are sollid or plain, or Membranous or round, or short or long. 
If they are Nervous at the beginning of the Muscle, so they are at the end. Som- 
times they are Nervous at the end of the Muscle, though the Head of it be
Fleshy. 
The hardness of a Sollid, long and Membranous Tendon, its thickness and Silver 
color is excellent: So that Fallopius affirmed, nothing was more beautiful in the 
Body of man, than a Tendon, and the Chrystalline Humor of the Eye, 
Wherefore a Tendon, seeing it is a Similary Part, is bred of Seed, and is of a 
peculiar substance, no where to be found out of a Muscle. It wel deserves to be cal- 
led the cheifest part of the Muscle, upon which the action of the Muscle depends; 
the other Parts work together with the Tendon in the same action. 
Chap. 12. Of the Muscles of the Belly. 
THe Flesh extended over the Belly, is Musculous, which being joyned together, 
do make the Fleshy covering, which is Proper to it.
Numbers. 
They are divided into twelve Muscles, six on each side, which have names partly 
from their Scituation and rise, and partly from their Figure; of which Sort are 
Obliquus Descendens, Obliquus Ascendens, Rectus Transversus, pyramidalis, 
and Cremaster.  
Of these ten are ordained to compel the internal Parts, and some to move the 
Os Sacrum, and Ilium; the two Cremasters hold up the stones.
Figure. 
Every one of them hath his proper Figure; the Oblique ones, in regard of their 
Scituation action and Fibres, are divided into ascending and descending; the as- 
cending and Transverse, carry a plain Figure like a Membrane.
Largeness. 
Their largeness is as great as the Latitude and bigness of half the Belly, and yet 
the descending Oblique Muscle is larger then the Ascending, and the Ascending then 
the transverse: the lenght of the right Muscle, reacheth from the sword-like Carti- 
lage to the Os Pubis.
Original
The white line. 
Although their Original be different, yet they al joyn so at the white line, that 
they seem to be but one Muscle. The White Line passeth from the Sword-like 
Cartilage by the Navels to the Os Pubis, and makes a difference between the Mus- 
cles, 
Although

Chap. 12. Of the Muscles of the Belly. 
Connexion.
Although the Muscles of the Belly stick to diverse parts, from which they are said 
to arise, yet are they al inserted at the white line of the Belly; and at the Os Pubis, 
each them receives peculiar Veins, Arteries, and Nervs.
Action.
Common.
Particular. 
The action of the Belly, is common, or particular. That is common which al 
of them equally act. Namely, to compress the Belly on every Part; neither can 
they act asunder in this. The particular action is, when Muscles that are parts 
act apart, viz. Ascending or descending Muscles; those compress the breast, these 
move the Os Pubis, Ilium, and Sacrum, being joyned together, without any the 
least compression of the Abdomen, but these bones remain unmoved whilst the Ab- 
domen is compressed.
Use. 
The use of the Muscles of the Abdomen, is whilst they lie stil, to cover the inter- 
nal parts, and defend them from external injuries, to cherish and conserve the in- 
ternal heat.
Pass we now to a particular description of the Muscles of the Abdomen, then of 
the Muscles that move the Os Pubis, and Sacrum.
Particular
Description.
Oblique des-
cending.  
The a Oblique descending being scituate Obliquely, by reason of its Fibres, Ob- 
lique descending ariseth from the b seven or eight inferior Ribs, by certain fleshy in- 
tersections or Fibres intertexed with the Fleshy Fibres of the Serratus Major, 
and sticking to the Os Ilium, and Pubis, it ends in abroad c Tendon in the white 
line, and together with its fellow, makes one individual Tendon.
Oblique as-
cending. 
The Oblique d Ascending, ariseth from the c Os Pubis, and Ilium, and being 
knit to the brims of al the bastard and true Ribs, even to the sword-like Cartilage, 
it ends in the f white line dy a broad Tendon. In this Muscle the late Anatomists 
observe a double Tendon embracing the right Muscle like a sheath but the duplici- 
ty of the Tendon appears only above the Navel, for below, it is altogether inseper-
able. 
Right.
The right Muscle remains f fleshy from the Sternum, neer the g Sword-like Car- 
tilage, and being extended along the longitude of the Belly, it is inserted with a 
Nervous end into the Os Pubis. 
In it you may observe three Nervous h Intersections which strengthen it, and 
Veins which run a long the longitude of it; and the i Mammary descending, and 
the k Epigastrick ascending, meet about the 1 middle of this Muscle. 
By this Anastomosis, Galen thought the consent of the Womb with the Dugs, 
was caused, and many modern Anatomists after him, which indeed is true.
Pyramidales. 
Upon the extremities of the right Musces, ly two smal Muscles, called m Pyrami- 
dales, which sometimes are wanting, especial lie the right; but flesh makes up the 
defect. Their office is to compress the Bladder, and therefore they send their Ten- 
dons between the right Muscles, into that Part of the Peritoneum which includes the 
Bladder. And in the Child in the Womb, the n Urachus is a production of the 
Pyramidal Tendons, which in Men of Age, makes but one string affixed to the bot- 
tom of the Bladder, and passing to the hole of the Navel, and remains stil in such as 
are grown up.
Transverse. 
The o transverse Muscle, arising from the P transverse Apophyses of the Vertebræ of 
the loyns, and being fixed to the Os Ilium, and the bastard Ribs, ends under the 
right Muscle, by a broad q Tendon in the white line, and is stricktly united with
his fellow.
Cremaster. 
Besides the Muscles which compress the Belly, neer the Pubis, by the transversal 
Longitude of the groin, is the Muscle r Cremaster, prepared for the holding up of 
the stones. It is distinguished from the flesh of the Oblique ascending Muscle, be- 
cause it hath red flesh, is ths inner, and disjoyned from it a fingers breadth; it is invol- 
ved with the Peritoneum, even til it come to the Testicle, and makes the Tunicle 
called Erithrois. 
You shal perceive in the groin, the perforation of the Tendons of the Muscles 
of the Abdomen, that they may give passage to the Peritoneum, and the Crema-
sters. 
I Seeing.

42 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
How the mo- 
tion of the Os 
Ilium and Sa-
crum is per- 
formed. 
Seeing some of the Muscles of the Abdomen, conduce to the motion of the Os 
Ilium, and Sacrum, I shal faithfully descibe the motion of them, and the Muscles 
appoynted for that motion. These bones are closely joyned by Symphysis, and 
lie above the Thigh-bones, and under the bones of the loyns, for the procreation of 
man in the act of Copulation; in which action, the Thighs, and 
Back-Bone re-
maining immovable, only these bones move forewards, and backwards the right 
and Oblique descending Muscles move them forewards, the breast resting, or very 
lightly moving, and that by longer intervals the Muscles, t Sacer, and v Semispinalus, 
move them Backwards. 
And therefore sacred Scripture, constitutes the Seat of lust to be in the Loyns, 
because by the motion of the Loyns, the Reins wax hot, which provokes the Geni- 
talls to Eiaculation of Seed: Gen. 36. It is written, Kings shal come out of thy 
Loynes and Psal. 73. The Kingly Prophet complains, His loynes were filled 
with delusions, that is, with lustful Concupiscence, as St. Jerom interprets it; 
and in Luke, Let your Loyns begirded, that is, preserve your Chastity. 
a T. 1. f. 2. G G. HH. II. b T. 2. f. 2. G. HH. f. 8. aa. c T. 1. f. 2. IIII. 
T. 2. f. 8. BB. d T. 2. f. 8. B. c T. 2. f. 8. cccc. f T. 2. f. 8. dd. g T. 2. 
f. 8. ee. f. 9. B. h Y. 2. f. 9. c. i f. 9. e. k f. 9. dddd.1 1. 2. f. 9. d. m. T.2.
f. 9. f. n T. 2. f. 9. e. o T. 2. f. 9. D D. p T. 8. f. 2. C. q f. 9. A. r f. 9. 
aaa. s f. 9. b. b. t b. f. 2. DD. v T. 14. t. f. BB. f. 3. DD. f. 4. AA.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
In the Muscles of the Belly, are often Inflamations, Imposthumes, and pains 
arising of wind; for according to Hippocrates, the pores of the flesh, and space 
between the Muscles, are filled with Blood and Spirit in such as are healthy; but 
with Wheyish substance, and wind in such as are Sick; and therefore Cramps 
happen in these Muscles, as is described by Sennertus Lib. 3. Part. 10. Chap. 8. 
Med Pract. And therefore these Muscles are somtimes troubled with a windy 
Spirit, arising from the Hypochondriacal Parts, being filled with Melancholly. 
Chap. 13. Of the Peritoneum. 
THe Muscles of the Belly being taken away, the Peritoneum comes to view,
which is a a Membrane stretched out over al the Parts of the Bowels, or Guts; 
from which extension, it hath it’s Greek Name,
Temperature.
Substance. 
Seeing it is spermatical, Its temperature can be no other than cold and dry. 
Its Substance is not simple, and uniform; but double, and unequal in thickness 
for it is a double Membrane, joyned in fome places, and disjoyned in other Some,  
to give passage to the Navel Vessels; and in the Hypogastrium, it is so doubled 
that it contains the Bladder and the Genitals, the Reins and Vreter, the Vena
Cava, and the great Artery, and the Seminal Vessels in its duobling.  
The inequallity of the substance of it is observed in Women, to be thickest from 
the Navel to the Pubis, that in the conception it may be stretched as the Womb is. 
But in men it is thickest from the Navel to the Sword-like Cartilage, that in Glut- 
tons it may stretch when their paunch is ful.
Original. 
It takes its original from the first formation, unless, as some think, it take its original 
from the Dura Mater, which as they produce the Pleura, so the Pleura should 
the Peritoneum; and so their should be a continuation of these Membranes through- 
out the Body, as their is of the Skin.
Scituation. 
Its Scituation is immediatly after the Muscles, and compasseth about all the Bo- 
wels of the Abdomen.
Quanity. 
It is the largest Membrane in the whol Body, and most capacious, and answers to 
the inferior Ventricle both in Longitude and Latitude, 
It


Chap. 13. Of the Peritoneum. 43 
It is double every where, because it consists of two Membranes; of which, the 
internal is the shortest; not so much because it bestows a Membrane upon every 
Part of the Belly and produceth the Mesenterium; but because it doth not 
accompany the external to the Testicles, but ends in the Cavities of the Ab- 
domen. 
The external passeth even to the Cods, and wraps the Testicles round, and makes 
that tunicle called Erythrois, and in its progress makes a smal Channel by which the 
Spermatick Vessels pass. 
The same production of the external tunicle, is observed in the groin of Women, 
and is diduced even to the c Clitoris and the round and lower Ligament of the 
d Womb. 
Figure.
The Figure of the Peritoneum is Oval, and longish, by reason of the Belly, for 
of it self it hath no Figure at al. 
Its continuity is not pierced, it being an admirable piece of workmanship; for 
although Vessels pass into it, and out from it, yet al this is performed through the 
doubling of it, so that the internal Tunicle remains unpierced, which comprehends 
the Parts of the first Region, as the external doth the Parts of the second Region, 
which are placed within the Belly.
Color.
The Color of the Peritoneum is white, as the Color of other Membranes is.
Connexion.  
It is firmely knit to the Vertebræ of the loyns, I mean the external Membrane,  
the internal hath no Connexion with them, but is disjoyned to receive the Reins, 
redoubled to make the Mesenterium; also it gives a covering to the Diaphrag- 
ma, and the Liver, and produceth the Ligament which holds it, and depends upon 
the Sword-like Cartilage. 
Besides the general communion it hath with the principal Parts, by Veins, 
Arteries, and Nerves; It hath a particular communion with al the Parts contained, 
to which it gives Membranes, either thick or thin; and therefore it may be called the 
Mother of al the Membranes in the Belly. 
Use.
It performs no action; but its use is great through out the Belly.   
a T.2.f.9.gg. b T.6.f.2.CC.EE c T.7.f.4.II.K.f.5.A. d T.7.
f.2.SS.f.4.FF.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Let us now bring this contemplation of the Peritoneum, to a Physical use. By 
reason of its doubling, you shall perceive Serosus and sharp Cholerick Humors to 
to get into those spaces, which make a bastard Collick, but have no foundation at 
al within the Guts, as a true Collick hath, but between the Peritoneum and the 
Guts; whence the Disease is bitter, and usually lasting: of which see Fernelius 
in his Pathology.
Collick. 
Somtimes other Humors flowing from the Liver, or from the Reins, get within 
this Duplication, towards the Navel, or groyn, or Os Sacrum, and there impo- 
stumate, unless they were turned into Quittor before they fel into this Part. 
Such Collical pains lie usually on the top of the Belly, and not deep; neither 
wil they suffer the Belly to be handled never so gently. Somtimes they come up 
even to the Diaphragma, by reason of the continuation of the Peritoneum, and 
then the danger is the greater.
Ruptures. 
Somtimes, by reason of those Productions of the Peritoneum which reach the 
Stones, Serosus Humors pass down to the Cods, and make a watry Rupture. 
You must diligently observe the production of the Peritoneum by the groyn; 
which being dilated (for it is seldom broken) receiveth the Gut Ilium, or the Call,  
whence is bred that swelling in the Groine, called Entero-Cele, or that called 
Epiplo-Cele; or when both the Gut and the Call do fal down, that other called
Entero-Epiplo-Cele. 
I 2 CHAP.

44 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book II. 
Cha. 14. The Division of the Parts of the Belly. 
Parts first.
THe Parts of the Paunch included within the Peritoneum, I thus divide. They 
al pertain to the first Region, which are nourished by the branches of the 
Vena Porta; therefore the a Omentum, the Hollow b Part of the Liver, the c Gal, 
d Stomach, e Spleen, f Sweet-bread, g Bowels, h Mesenterium, and i Vena Porta, 
and the k Cœliacal Artery, make the First Region of the Body, contained within 
the Abdomen.
Second. 
The other Parts which are included within the doubling of the 
Peritoneum, are referred to the Second Region, which comprehends the i Reins, 
m Vreters, n Bladder, o Genitals in Men; and the P Womb, with the Parts annex- 
ed, in Women. 
It is extended even to the upper Part of the Breast, and q comprehends the Dia- 
phragma, r Mediastinum, s the Heart, and t Pertcardium, v Lungs, x Trachea 
Arteria, y Oesophagus, z Tongue, a Larinx, with the Trunks of the Vena Cava, 
and great Artery, even from the Throat to the groyn, according to Fernelius:
but I extend it farther, even to the Limbs;  whither so ever the greater Channels of 
the Aorta or Cava, the  B Axillars and v Crurals pass.  
a T. 2. f. 10. E. b T. 4. f. I. A. c f. I. C. d T. 2. f 10 C. e T. 4. f. D. 
f f. I. EE. g T. 3. f. I and 4. h f. I. AA. i T. 4. f. I. FF. f. 6. AA.
K F. 5. K. l T. 5 f. I. BC. m f. I. FF. GG. n f. I. K. o T. 6. tota.
p t. 7. tota. q. T. 7. f. I. II. f. 6. AA. FF. r f. 4. AA. s t. II. f. 2. B.
f. 5. T. t f. I. A. f. 2. A. v f. BB. f. 2. KK. f. 7. FF. x f. 7. E. f. 8.
ABC. T. I. 13. f. 10. 9. y T. 3. f. 2. EE. z T. 13. f. 14. A. a T. 13. f. 9. 10.
B T. 12. f. I. 4. BB. y f. I. 4. DD.
Chap. 15. Of the Navel. 
What it is.
THe Navel from the birth, even to extream Age, is a knotty a Coition of the 
four Navel b Vessel; by which the Child is nourished in the Womb. That 
they should stick out on the out-side of the Belly, is improfitable; therefore they 
are Cut off the c Child being born. 
The continuation of the Vessels within the Abdomen remains, which grows dry 
by degrees, being deprived of its ancient Office; and therefore it is to be considered 
under another Notion, in one that is grown up. 
We shal treat of the Umbilicar Vessels, as they are found in the Carcass of a man 
grown up; they are like Ligaments, included in the doubling of the Peritoneum; 
that which outwardly appears is the middle both of the Belly, and Body. 
The d Umbilicar Vein passeth to the c cleft of the Liver, The Umbilicar f Arteties 
are g two, 
and descend to the Iliack h Arteries, Somtimes creeping along the sides of 
the Bladder to the i Hypogastricks, between the Arteries lies the k Vrachus fixed 
to the sides of the Bladder, and this is the original and insertion of the Umbilicar 
Vessels. The Vrachos is like a long and round Ligament and its use is to hold up 
the Bladder. 
The Umbilicar Vein puls the Liver foreward, left by its waight it should depress 
the Parts under it, The Umbilicar Artery upholds the l Bladder that it fal not 
down, although it be included in the doubling of the Peritonium.
a T. 8. f. 2. DD. b T. 8. f. 2. ABBC. c T. 9. f. 2. P. d T. 2. f. 8. G.
T. 4. f. I. a f. 6 aa. T. 8. f. 2. A. e T. 4. f. 5. C. f f. T. 8. f. 2. B B.f.4.εε
g T.2. 10. h f.4.88. i f. 4. ♀♀ vel ζ ζ.k T. 8.f.2.C. T. 9. f. 2: O.
t. 2. f. 10. H. I.
The

Chap. 16. Of the Omentum, or Call. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
To reduce that is said to Medicinal use, this shews that the Cutting of the Navel 
Vein is dangerous, that the place of the Navel is very perspirable because it pene- 
trates the containing Parts, Neither is there any thing, either within or without, that 
stops that passage, and therefore purging Medicines applyed to the Navel Purge,and 
sweet things applyed to the Navel of Women penetrate to the Womb: The Water 
in Dropsies many times breakes out at the Navel, and the affects thereof are 
grievous, not so much by reason of the sensibility of the Part, but the suddain hur- 
ting of those Parts whose Office it is to nourish the whol Body. 
Therefore consider whether the Navel be the centre of the Belly or not, for other- 
wise, if the Parts below the Navel be longer than those above it, A multitude of Dis-
eases are bred in the lower Part, because the Umbilicar Vein being shorter doth not 
sufficiently, pul back the Liver, which,by its waight, compresseth the Stomach and 
Parts Under it. 
Chap. 16. Of the Omentum or Call. 
BEfore you proceed to the Omentum or cal you must view how it covers al the 
Parts of the Belly, then their Scituation, which is of no smal moment to the 
art of Physick. 
Number.
The a Omentum, or Epiploon, or Cal, is a thin Membrane endewed with much 
Fat, neither is it single but double,and so disjoyned in some places, that you may 
thrust your hand between, this you may see in that Part which is stretched out 
above the Guts, but about the Stomach and Spleen neer the Diaphragma, the 
is not To evident, but it hath certain hiding places as the Poet Lucan saith, 
which not appearing was a bad Omen. 
It was held to be an ill Omen also amongst: the sooth saiers if it were not extended 
Over the Guts.
Scituation. 
The portion of it which is subject to view, is Naturally stretched out even to the 
Navel, somtimes to the groyn and Cods in Women between the Neck of the Womb 
and the Bladder, the greater portion is hidden in the left Hypocondrium. 
Original.
It may be divided into four Parts, the first is called b Intestinal which is stretched 
out over the Guts; the Second c Hepatical, which ariseth from the Cavity of the 
Liver, including the smal Lobe of the Liver, and turns down to the deep Cavities 
thereof the third is called d Lienal, because it lies upon the Spleen, the-fourth 
c Mesenterical, being a production of the Mesenterium to the external Parts, and 
from it i 8 its original to be fetched. 
a T. 2. f. 10. E. bcd. T. 3 f. I. DD. b t. 2. f. 10. dd. f. 10. b. d f. 10. c
c T. 3. f. I. T. 4. f. I.   
The Medicinal Consideration.
Disease.
Similar. 
The Omentum hath its Diseases, both Similar, Organical, and Common, for 
somtime it is distempered and inflamed, and yet but seldome, it is oftner troubled 
of Imposthumes or Aposthemes which you wil, because it receives the filth of 
the Liver and Spleen. Somtimes its mightily encreased with Flegm gathered to- 
gether,and grows to a huge bigness; neither is this swelling easily allayed either by 
or external Medicines. If it be soft, Suppuration is to be fought, which 
seldom succeeds as it should do, although you open the Part with a Caustic. 
Somtimes a dropsical Water is concluded in the Cavities of the Omentum: ac- 
cording to the Judgment of Hyppocrates, and this is worse. then if it were within the 
Abdomen because it is easier drunck up by the Meseraick Veins; or by the Spunginess 
of the spleen the Passages first opened, and those Parts stirred up to it by some 
convenient Medcine. The 

46 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II.
Common. 
The Omentum Fals down into the groine or Cods: and causeth those Swellings 
which are commonly called Ruptures: the Belly being wounded, the Omentum 
breaks forth: and then a great portion of it may be tyed with a string neer the Belly 
and so cut of, because it soon purifies, neither is it fate to put it back again. 
The first Concoction is made never the weaker by cuttings off Part of the 
Omentum, (though Galen thought otherwise; For the Concoction is made in the 
Stomach; and the Omentum doth not cover the Stomach, But is only knit to the 
bottom of it. 

Chap. 17. Of the Guts. 
Use. 
THe Guts follow next according to the order of dissection, which are organical 
Parts, hollow, appointed to carry the Chyle and to receive the Extrements.
The thin Guts are appointed for the Chyle, the thick for the Excrements. 
Substance.
Fleshy.
Their substance is Membranous and ful of strings, which may be divided into two 
proper Membranes, of which,the 2 inner is Fleshy, the b outward Nervous. But 
the Inner is rugged, and as it were founded that it may stay the Chyle in its wrinkles. 
that so the Melaraick Veins may draw it the better, which like Horse-leeches draw 
the thinner Part of the Chyle from the Guts.
Nervous. 
Besides the wrinkles, the Inside of the Guts is bedewed, And as it were de- 
sended with a certaine Flegmatick Slime, least the Membrane should be hurt by the 
passage of Choler.
Slimy. 
Besides these two proper Membranes there is a c common one, added from the Peri- 
toneum, which it bestowes upon al the Parts it containes.
Scituation. 
The Guts are placed in the Abdomen and fil its whol Cavity without any confu- 
sion; the Hypochondria excepted; and are disposed in various turnings by reason 
of the Connexion they have with the d Mesenterium.
Longitude.
General Di-
vision. 
They are seven times as long as the Body, and somthing longer. 
This Longitude is divided intoe c thin, and f thick, not according to Scituation but in 
respect of the Membranes: The thin which is taken from the inferiore Orifice of the 
Stomach, is the first &c supreme in order,it consists of thin Membranes, the thick, is the 
Inferior in order, But the superior and shorter in Scituation, and more Capacious 
and hath thicker Membranes. 
Special. 
Again, the thin is distinguihhed into three Parts, or three Guts; of which the first 
is called g Duodemum, the second h Jejunum, the third i Ilium. The thick Gut is 
also divided into so many Parts or Guts: The first k Cacum: The second i Colon. 
The third m Rectum. 
Cavity.
Al the Guts are hollow, that they may give passag to Chyle and Excrements. They 
are n wrinckled round about within, al along their Longitude, even from the Stomach 
to the Fundament, that so they may stay the Chyle and Excrements of the first 
Concotion; but for expelling the Excrements, they have a kind of motion which 
presses downward by degrees. And thus much to what is common to al the Guts: 
It remains that we speak of them al severally. 
1. Duodenum.
The first Gut is called o Duodenum, because in length it is twelve Fingers 
breadth. 
Biliar Pore.
The finding of this Gut is hard, for towards the back bone it must be sought for 
under the Sweet-bread with the beginning of the jejunum; this position and 
Intertexture is diligently to be noted, because oftentimes the cause of obstructions &c 
vomitings is without any failing of the Pylorus: but the choler flowing by the P Bili 
ar Pore is kindred in his passage, and returning back into the Stomach causeth vo- 
miting.  
In the very confines of the Duodenum and Jejunum; the passage of Choler 
pierceth the Gut, and creeps downward a little way between the Membranes before 
it peirceth the Inner Membrane, neer which the q Channel of the Sweet-bread 
is observed by Virfungus.
Where 


Chap. 17. Of the Guts. 47 
2. Jejunum.
Where the Guts begin to be turned toward the left side, their the r Jejunum begins, 
is thought to be emptier than the Ilium, by reason of his neerness to the Li- 
Ver, and its Multitude of Mesaraick Veins: It lies altogeather in the umbilical Re- 
gion, and is in length about a Cubit and an half.
3. Ilium. 
The Ilium follows, which is more slender, but in length surpasses al the rest 
of the Guts. It occupies the ilium, and Hypogastrium, and compasseth about the 
Jejunum it self with its inferior Part. In this Gut is that Disease which is called the 
twisting of the Guts, and the Iliack passion.
Thick Guts.
1. Cacum. 
The fourth Gut in order, and the first of the thick Guts, is called t Cacum by 
Ancient Anatomists, and does retaine this Name, although it is altogether unlike 
to the Ancient description of it. It is not large like a Sack, neither doth it perform 
the Office or a second Stomach to Concoct: the Chyle, which was not perfected be- 
fore: the Ingress and Egress, are by one hole. Now in its place, a Membranous 
Appendix is Shewed, which is larger in a Child new born, than in a man grown up: 
and thence Sylvius took occasion to write, That many things were changed in our 
bodies, both m regard of growth and of the Guts, Duodenum and Cacum. 
The Gut v Colon succeeds this; in which ate many things worth our Considera- 
tion, to wit, is Largness, Scituation, Use, Shutters, two Ligaments, Its fringes 
of Fat, and its Connexion. 
Largeness.
Of al the Guts, none more large, and Capacious, then this. It begins at 
right Kidney neer the x Appendix; and being turned upwards, it lies under 
the Liver and Stomach, and passeth to the left Hypochondnum; where it is wrea- 
thed, and made narrower.
Scituation. 
In its Obliquation descending, it touches the left Kidney; and a little below, be- 
ing bowed like a Roman S. it ends in the top of the Os Sacrum.
Use. 
In it, the Dunge and filth of the Guts, is kept: as also the wind of the first Re- 
gion.
Ligaments. 
Least it should be dilated too much by Multitude of Dung, and Violence of wind, 
Nature hath strengthened this Gut with two strong Ligaments; which being 
Wretched along its Longitude, they make greater foldings, and wrinckles in this Gut, 
then in any other.
Fat.
Insomuch that they seem like Cels to retain the Dung: 
and because it wants the bond of the Mesenterium, and consequently that Humor 
Which proceeds from che Fat of it Nature hath placed abouc it, here and there, 
certain fringes of Fat to Moisten it.
Shutters. 
That Y Volve, or Shutter which Authors quarrel so much about, is not to be 
passed by, being fastned to the beginning of the Colon, like a Membranous Circle, 
which hinders the flowing back of the Dunge into the Ilium, and the ascending of a 
Glister to the same place. Therefore it opens towards the Interior Parts, that it 
may let the Dung pass out, and hinder it from flowing back.
Connexion. 
It is knit to the Membrane of the peritoneum, by a Membranous tye, whatso- 
ever Laurembergus wrote accusing Riolanus of Ignorance, or dul-sighted- 
ness.
3. Right Guts.
The last of the Guts is called z right, because it passes straight from the top of the 
Os Scrum, to the Fundament. This Gut, contrary to the Nature of others, 
besides the Internal fleshy Membrane, hath also an external a fleshy Musculous 
covering, like a sheath;  that so it may the more forceably expel the Dung, which 
useth to clod in the extremity of the Colon, and right Gut. Therefore besides the 
compression of the Muscles of the Abdomen, and the Natural motion of the Colon, 
this same fleshy Sheath, crusheth the Dung, as it were with ones hand, that so it 
may pass out.
a T. 2. f. b. R. b f. 5. 2. c T. 3. f. 5. PP. d f. I. AA. e f. 4. from B.
to I. f f. 4. from I. to O. g f. 4. F. h f. 4. GG. i f. 4. HH.k T. 2. f. 4. H
 H. I f.4. K m f.4. M. nf.6.R nT.3.f.4. F. oT.4.f.5.HH.pf.3.D
 D. qf..3.C.f.5.HH. T.3.f.4.GG s f .3.E. tf.3.BB. v t.3.
 f.4.HH.x f.4.I. y f.4.KK.z f.I.CC.a f.4.I.
The


48 The Thy Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
General Dis- 
eases of the 
Guts. 
I pass now to the Diseases and Symptomes of the Guts. They suffer Diseases 
both Similar Organical and Common. For they are distempered by heat and cold, 
either with or without Humor. They are inflamed, wounded, Ulcerated, dryed, 
bound, loosened, made smooth the wrinckles being taken away, as in fluxes and 
bloody fluxes. Somtimes they are so stopped that the Excrements are Vomited 
up.
Peculiar Dis-
eases. 
Besides these the common Diseases, the Guts severally considerd, have their peculi- 
ar Diseases. 
Of the Duode-
num.
The Duodenum may be stopped by compression of the Sweet-bread, and then the 
food is Vomited up again two or three houres after it is eaten; because the passage 
is stopped.
Ilium. 
The Ilium is subject to the Iliack passion, which is an Inflamation and not a 
twisting of that Gut; Somtime it fals down into the groyn, and somtimes into the 
Cods, which causeth Ruptures in Those places. 
Jejunum.
Somtimes the Peritoneum being loosed or broken neer the Navel, the Disease cal- 
led Omphalocele commeth, in which the Jejunum flipps down. 
The Colon is subject to the Collick, which ariseth either through sharp Humors, 
or wind, or extream cold Air. In it wormes are bred, which somtimes creep up into 
the Stomach and are Vomited out; This Gut alone is subject to Ulcerations, which 
causeth Putrefaction: which many think, comes from the Mesenterium, and most 
unfortunately use purging Medicines and Glysters which increase the evil and no 
way help it: Because the extremity of the Colon which is joyned to the right Gut 
is more fleshy, painful Impostums are bred there, which suppurate and are sooner 
cured then they would be, if they came from the Mesentery. 
Somtimes Melancholy hard swellings are bred there which cause difficulty in go- 
ing to the stool and hasten death.
Right Gut. 
The right Gut hath its peculiar Diseases, Tenasmus, Inflamation, lmpostumes, 
which end in Ulcers and sistulas, which are difficult to be cured and require, the help 
of the Chirurgion. 
The Peristalcick motion of the Guts is Somtimes so perverted, that the Dung 
flowes upward, and Glysters are cast up at the Mouth. And so are suppositaries 
also, if you wil believe some Practitioners, but then the shutter of the Colon must
needs be broken.
Symptomes. 
Al the Symptomes of the Guts are to be referred to the Excrements when they are 
excessive, as in Fluxes, or deficient, as when men go not to stool unless they be provok- 
ed by Medicine, both which Symptomes impair the health. 
Fluxes are called Diarrhea, which is either Chylous or humoral:  humoral is 
either Cæliacal, or Mesenterical, or Intestinal. When it comes with Ulceration, 
Paine and Blood, it is called a Bloody Flux. If it come without pain and be like 
the Water in which raw flesh has bin washt, it comes from the Liver, and is called 
Hepatica. If it come through smoothness of the Guts, It is called Lienteria: if 
it come with Quitter it is called Mesenterical. The causes of al these Diseases yea 
may find in al Practtioners, and therefore we will make no longer stay upon  
them. 
The internal Tunicle of the Guts Somtimes is severed &c lost, which is thought to be 
turned into a long worm of two or three Cubits long, caled Tania, of which you 
may read in Spigelius Lib. de Lumbrico lato.  
Chap. 18. Of the Mesenterium:
What it is. 
THe 2 Mesenterium is the bond of the Guts, which keeps them in there places, 
that they pass not into confusion and be thereby deprived of there action and 
use. It

Chap. 18. Of the Mesenterium. 49
It is a double Membrane, between which, is Fat, and many b Glandulæ, or 
Kernels,and a four-fold kind of c Vessels. 
Its Structure. 
This is the struture of it. 
It is feared in the midst of the Belly, because it sticks to the transverse processes 
of the Vertebræ by Lygamencs: thence is its original.
Scituation.
Vessels. 
It sticks so firmely to the d Guts, that no division at al appears: between its two 
Membraines, innumerable e Veins pass, which are called meseraick or Mesenterick. 
Also an infinite number of f Arteries from the Cæliacal Artery. Also it hath f Ner- 
ves from she Lumbals, or Nerves of the Loines.
Vena Lactea. 
The fourth kind or Vessels, are called g Vena Lactea, by Aselbus, the first finder 
of them out; of which we need not doubt, seeing it is now a common received 
truth. 
This one thing troubles many. Namely, the diversity of their distrtbution: For 
in a beast ful fed, that is opened alive, these milky Veins are noted scattered about 
the Mesenterium; but some pals to the Sweet-bread, others to the Liver, others to the 
Trunck of the Vena Cava none of them to the Spleen; neither like other, veins are 
they gathered into one Head; they seem rather to have their Root, and Founda- 
tion in the Sweet-bread, and from thence to be distributed this way, and that 
Way.
Use. 
These Milky Veins being granted, al difficulties which were formerly about the 
distribution of Chyle and blood by the same Channel, cease. For the Milky 
Veins carry the Chyle to the Liver, and the Meseraick Veins carry back the Blood 
to the Nourishing of the Guts. Therefore both these Channels may be stopped 
Severally; which is to be noted of a Physician, in curing of the Diseases of the Bo-
wels. 
The Mesenterium, seeing it communicates With the Liver by the h Vena porta; 
with the Spleen by the i Cæliacal Arteries; and the Splenical k Vein; with the 
by their Connexions, and hath a fatty Glandulous substance fit to receive 
Humors, and to retain al the impurities of the first Region; Physitians well cal it 
Nurse of Diseases, for from that, as from a Fountain, do al the Diseases of the 
Bowels proceed: and al Physitians in prescrbing Purges, and Remedies, have a 
special eye to that.  
a T. 3. f. I. A. A. T. 4. f. I. HH. b T. 3 f. I. aaaa. c f. I. BB. d T. 9
f. I. MM. c T.4 f. I. aaa T. 9. f. I. ccc. f f. I. bbbb. g f. 8. nn. h t. 9.
f. I. aaa. bbb. f T. 4. f. I. FF. f. b. AAA. k f. 5. K. &c. II.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Disease of
the Mesenteri-
um
The Mesenterium labours under Diseases, both Simple, and Compound; it is 
inflamed, and oftentimes  suffers impostumes. It is Ulcerated, and by reason of, 
its Vessel, often obstructed. 
By reason or his fatty and Glandulous substance, it often swels to a great hard 
swelling, and is the Foundation of al Kings evil Swellings, which seldom come in 
great number, but the Foundation is here.  
It is subject to bastard Collicks, which proceed of sharp Choler, and degenerate 
into Palsies in the interior Limbs, and somtimes in the superior; and hence comes 
the Morbus Ructmosus mentioned by Hippocrates and Morbus Siccatorius. Of 
the Disease of the Mesenterium, you may  read Daniel Sennertus, and Matthews 
Martinius, who treats expressly of the Diseases thereof. Although the Mesar- 
aick, and Milky Vein, which carry Chyle, are fastned to the Guts like Horse- 
Leeches, yet the matter is diversly drawn by those Channels, For the Liver draws 
Chyle by the Milky Veins from the Guts, but sends Blood by the Mesaraick Veins 
to the Guts; therefore both of them may be diversly obstructed.
How the Milky
Veins are affe-
cted. 
For the milky Veins may be obstructed either al along through the thickness of 
Chyle; or else in their Roots within the Liver. 
If the obstruction be in the whol passage al along, then there ariseth a Chylous 
K Flux,


50 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
Flux, either white, or tauny in Color. If in their Roots, either within, or neer 
the Liver, the Chyle hath a light Tincture of Blood.
How the Me-
seraick. 
If the Mesarick Veins be stopped within the Liver, the Liver cannot disburden it 
self of his Excrements, but they remaine either in the Liver, or in the Mesaraick 
Veins, and make most terrible obstructions, by reason of the multitude of the Veins, 
both within, and without the Liver. 
The Milky Veins have no Trunck, but are seperated when they enter the hollow 
Part of the Liver; and therefore they are not so easily obstructed. And therefore 
al Humoral Fluxes of the Belly flow from the Liver or from distempers of the 
Mesaraick Veins. Thick Fluxes proceed from the Milky Veins, by reason of cor- 
rupted Chyle.
Cure. 
The Cure of both sort of Fluxes is the same, Namely, by such Medicines as cur, 
and purge out thick Humors: but in Liquid Fluxes or the Mesaraick Veins, you 
must somtimes use strengthening Medicines, And somtimes bleeding and Vomi- 
ting is more proper for these Fluxes, than for those of the Milky Veins. 
Chap. 19. Of the Sweet-bread, or Pancreas. 
Substance. 
THe a Sweet-bread is a body neither truly b fleshy, nor truly Glandulous, but 
in a middle betwen both; Yet it is very Syongy, that so it may receive the 
Excrements of the Spleen and Liver.
Scituation. 
It lies under the Stomach like a soft Cushion, and is stretched from the c Liver to 
the d Spleen; and if it have its Natural conformation, it is as broad as the Palm of 
the Hand.
Vessel. 
It receives the c Trunck of the Vena Porta; the Milky Veins, and the f Splenical 
Vein, passeth to the g Spleen through its Cavity.
A New Channel
Besides, Virfungus Discovered a new h Channel in the Sweet-bread, passing a 
long the length of it; which is inserted into the i Jejunum, neer the k passage of 
Choler: but for what end this was framed is yet uncertaine, whether it be to cleanse 
the Excrements of the Sweet-bread; or rather of the spleen, which are carried thi- 
ther. 
Its Use.
So Fallopius found the Channels in the Sweet-bread, no way to communicate 
with the Veins, but that being filled with Choler, they empty themselves into the 
Bowels: or whether rather, they carry a portion of Chyle to the Spleen, for a par- 
ticular making of Blood: but if this Channel do not touch the Spleen, then this 
Office is void, and it must be to cleanse the Sweet-bread of the Excrements it re- 
ceives, either from the Liver or Spleen; or to carry away the filth of the Chyle, 
which happily may remain there. 
It is observed, that this Part increaseth, when the Spleen decreaseth; so that it 
may wel be called the Spleens deputy. There is the Seat of Hypochondriacal Me- 
lancholy, &c it is the entertainer of many Diseases, as wel as the Mesenterium: both of 
them breed Sicknesses to the Body, if they be filled with evil, and filthy Humors.  
a T. 4. f. I. EE. b f. 2. AA. f.3. AA. c f. I. A. d f. I. D. e t. 4.
f. I. FF. f T. 9. f. I. aaa. bbb. g f. I. D. f. 3. BB.
k f. 3. DD. 
Chap. 20. Of the Vena Porta.
Two Veins.
Porta.
and
cava. 
Within the Belly, are two notable Veins contained; both of them take 
their original from the Liver: The one is called a Porta, which is sub- 
servient to the Places dedicated to nourishment, nether passeth it further. The 
other is called b Cava, which nourisheth the whol Body, from the Crown of the 
Head to the sole of the Foot, and passeth out of the Peritoneum, and creeps along
the 


Chap. 21. Of what is to be considered in the Vena Porta. 51 
the Back and Loines, with the great c Artery: Some think it is produced from the 
Heart, and not from the Liver. The Vena Porta ariseth from the hollow Part of 
the Liver, which it filleth, and is called the Gate of the Liver, or the Vein which is 
seated at the Gates of the Liver. 
Branches of 
the Vena Por-
ta.
Superior.
The Trunk of the Vena Porta descending into the Belly, sends out a branch cal- 
led Gastro Epiploon which is distributed to the Stomach, and Omentum. The 
second d branch is called Intestinal, which is carried to the Duodenum: after that, 
it sends c two branches to the Gal, and the last f branch it sends to the right side of 
the Stomach. 
These branches thus produced, the Trunck is divided into two famous branches; 
the g Splenical and h Mesenterical.
Inferior.
This again, is divided into sower branches, of 
which, the greatest keeps the name Mesenterical: The second is called i Hœmor-  
rhoida, and passeth to the right Gut: The third is called Cæcalis and passeth to 
the Gut Cacumn, or else to the beginning of the Colon: and the fourth passeth to, 
and nourisheth the remainder of the Colon. 
The splenical branch, when it hath passed through the Sweet-bread, produceth 
four opposite Veins, above and below. The first is called k Gastrica Major, 
which ascends to the left side of the Stomack. Opposite to this is the right l Epi-
ploica, which is distributed to the Omentum. The Coronaria succeeds this, and is 
distributed to the Stomach, and the left Epiploica, to the Omentum.
a T. 4. f. I. FF. b T. 5. f. 2. F. T. 12. f. I. C. c T. 5. f. 2. G. T. 12. f. 2. C.
d T. 4. f. 6. m. c f. 6. dd. f f. 6. B. g f. 6. CD. i f. 6.1 L
K T. 4. f. 6. ee l f. 6. e. 
Chap. 21. What is to be considered in the Vena Porta. 
MAny things come to be considered in the Vena Porta. 
1. It makes the first Region of the Body, with those Parts which it nourish- 
eth, and passeth with its Blood.
Place.
Blood. 
2. It contains a peculiar sort of blood, which is not circled, as the Blood of the 
Vena Cava is; and yet it may with the branches of the Cæliacal Artery, have a 
have transflux, and transvasation.
Office. 
3. That it carries only Blood, and not Chyle, which is done by the Milky Veins, 
is also the impurities of the Liver and Spleen, to the Mesenterium, Sweet-bread, 
and Guts.
Communion. 
4. That within the Liver, it hath either very smal, or no Communion at al by its 
Roots, with the Roots of the Vena Cava, and therefore each Vein carries its 
peculiar Blood. The blood of the Vena Porta is thick, and nourisheth the parts 
of the first Region. The blood of the Vena Cava, is subtile, fit for circulation, 
Which nourisheth the parts of the second, and third Region.
Largeness. 
5. That the branches of the Vena Porta within the Liver, are larger than those 
or the Vena Cava, if that do arise from thence. 
6. That in a Diseased body, it is usually filled with Caco-Chymia; which, 
whether it ought to be emptied by breathing a Vein, a man may wel make a scruple, 
left the Circulation of blood infect the whol Mass.
Evacuation. 
7. Whether the Vena Porta, after two or three Evacuations by the Arm, may 
not better be purged by the Hemorrhoids, or opening a Vein in one of the 
Feet?   
8. That al impurities of the Belly, are contained in this Vein, from whence come 
terrible obstructions of the Spleen, and Mesenterium.
Obstructions.
9• That there are no Shutters found in this Vein, as there are in the branches of 
the Vena Cava. 
10. That the Vena-Porta hath waies, thereby it disburdens it self, as the Veins
K 2 of 

52 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
of the Hemorrhoids: its reflux into the great Artery by the Cæliacal, and Vomi- 
ting of Blood against Nature, in Plethorick Bodies. 
Chap. 22. Of the Cæliacal Artery. 
Original.
Motion.
This is a branch of the great Artery descending, and accompanies the branches 
of the Vena Porta: for look how many branches the Vena Porta is divided 
into, so many also, is the a Cæliacal Artery divided; which notwithstanding, 
hath Pulse from the heart, and follows the motion thereof, as other Arteries do: 
but seeing his blood injoyes not the benifit of circulation, as other Arteries do, so 
that it seems like a seperated Artery, Somtimes his motion is hindered, when these 
is an Inflamation in the Abdomen; the rest of the Arteries gently mooving, as is 
often observed in Hypocondriack Melancholy, and other inflamations of the Hy- 
pocbondrium. 
Anastomosis.
Notwithstanding it hath Communion with the Vena Porta by mutual conjun- 
ction of their mouths; by which means there is a conflux of blood between them, 
whereby the vital Spirit of the Abdomen, is preserved. 
This Pulsation, or Palpitation, was known to Hippocrates, in Lib, 7. Epid. 
In that History of his, about the pulsation of the belly, neer the Navel; and in his 
Prognosticks he makes mention of the same; if the Veins about the
Midrife bear, 
they forshew either trouble of mind, or Madness. 
The Cæliacal Artery in Hippocrates Book of the Diseases of Women, is called, 
the breathing place of the inferior Belly: See Duretus in Coacis. Page, 183. 
Doctrine of
the Splenical
Artery.
The b Splenical Artery, is notable; which is not brought by the Sweet-bread, 
but creeps along the Longitude of the Diaphragma, neer the back bone: it is as 
big as the Splenical Vein, but Ambiguous in his progress, and gives no branches to 
the Parts neer it.
1 It is inferred into the Spleen by a double branch, as the Splenical Vein is; and 
therefore when the Cæliacal Artery is taken away, it is in vain to look for the 
Splenical; for there remains none, but two or three smal Arteries, which pass to 
the Stomach. 
From the Splenical Artery, neer the Spleen, pass two smal Arteries to the Sto- 
mach. From this faithful and true relation, you may easily know how malignant 
Vapours are carried from the Spleen and Mesenterium, to the Heart; whence in 
Plautus, he complained, that he had a Splenitick Heart, it  leaped, and beat his 
Brest. 
a T. 12. f. 2. P. q. r. b f. 2. t.
Chap. 23. Of the Stomach.
Membranes of 
the Stomach. 
THe Stomach is the Kitchin of the first Concoction ; it consists of proper Mem- 
branes, and one a common, one which it receives from the Peritoneum. The 
b internal is rugged, and hairy, like a peice of Silk: The c External is fleshy, that 
it may receive the heat of the Bowels which lie upon it, to wit, of the Liver and 
Spleen which heat it.
 And that it may the more easily compress, and hold together 
the internal, it hath a threefold sort of strings, which strengthen it to that end; and 
also when it is slackened with store of Meat, they do contract it again, so soon as 
the digested Aliment is forced out of the Stomach.  
a T. 12. f. 2. t. b t. 3. f. 4. CC. c T. 3. f. 4. E. 
Its Scituation.
Its size.
It is b Scituate between the Liver, and the Spleen, as it were between two fires, 
residing a little towards the left Hypochondrium, if the Spleen hold its natural 
bigness; otherwise, when the Spleen is bigger than ordinary, it thrusts the Stomach 
into the middle.  
b T. 2. f. 10. C.
The 


Chap. 23. Of the Stomach. 53
The greatness of the Stomach cannot be exactly defined, because being empty, 
and exhaust, it strong, it is so contracted, that it is no bigger than a mans Fist. 
Being stretched and widened with store of Belly Chear, it wil containe six pints 
of Drink, with a Pound or two of Meat, as is daily seen in Gluttons, and Toss- 
Pots.
Number. 
There is but one Stomach in Mankind, which is somtimes divided according to 
the Longitude into two Cavities; which have their Ingress and Egress, like the 
Stomachus, and Pylorus. And such persons do vomit with great difficulty; and 
When they do, they cast up Excrementitious Humors without that broth which 
they took the same moment. Shal we say the separating faculty can work so quick, 
or rather that the broath is slipt down into the Lower division of the Stomach 
from whence it cannot easily returne, because of the narrowness of the upper 
Orifice.
Figure. 
If the Stomach be single and rightly shaped, it is of a longish Spherical Figure, 
aud is compared to the Belly of a Bag-Pipe, setting aside the Oesophagus and 
Guts.
Two Orifices. 
The Egress of the Stomach is equal in height unto its Ingress; that is to say, the 
two Orifices thereof, are equal in height, least the Meat and Drink should flip 
through, before they be digested; and then being digested by the strength of the 
Stomach Contracting it seif, the Pylorus is opened, and the Chylus sent into the 
Gut.
The Upper. 
the Ingress or upper a Orifice of the Stomach, is in a special manner termed 
Stomachus, being the Seat of Hunger and Thirst, because it is crowned with two 
Nerves, called b Stomachici Nervi; and is consequently of an Exquisite sense.
The Lower 
The lower Orifice, is called c Pylorus; in which you shal observe a Valve,  
round in shape, and as visible and remarkable as the Valve in the Gut Colon. This Va- 
lve is to hinder the Chyle from returning back again into the 
Stomach.
It's bottom
Besides these two Orifices in the Stomach, there is observable its d Bottom or
Inferior Part, more fleshy than the rest; because therein the Meat is boyled or 
digested.
Inner Surface 
The internal c surface of the Stomach is wrinckled, and stored with fibres, that 
it may thereby retain what is taken in for nourishment.  
a T. 3. f. 2. H. f. 2. H. f. 4. A.
b f. 2. FG. c f.2. K. f. 4. B. d f. 2. III. c f. 4. E.
Action.
Digestion how
caused. 
The Action of the Stomach is the Coction of Aliments;  which though they be 
many, and of divers kinds; yet the Stomach, by a propriety, or inbred faculty 
which it has, does dissolve, and as it were melt them, and turne them into a sub- 
stance like Creme; which is called chylus. How that it done, I have already 
examined in my Anthropographia; and in my Answer to Wallæus, a very learned 
Physitian of Leyden.
Communion
with other
Parts. 
The Stomach has Communion, by reason of neighbour hood, with the Liver, 
the Gal, the Spleen, the Sweet-bread, the uppermost Guts, upper Part of 
the Mesentery; and also by the veynes which it has from the Trunk of Vena Porta, 
and the Splenical Branch. It Communicates also with the Heart and Lungs by 
the Stomachical Nerves; of which some Part is Communicated to the Heart and 
Lungs: it Communicates also with the Brain, by the Stomachical Nerves, 
Which proceed from the fixt Conjugation.
Great sympa-
thy with the
Kidnies 
It does cheifly Sympathise with the Kidneis when they are misaffected, either 
by want of Appetite, or by frequent Vomiting, by reason of g a complication of the 
Castal and Stomachical Nerves, disposed between the two Kidneis. From
whence are derived Nerves, that are dispersed into al Parts of the Belly.
Communion
with the whol
Body. 
By reason of its Nervous substance, it has Communion with the whol Body;
Whence it is the in the Disease Cholera, the Ancles are contracted; &c there is anxiety, 
and Unquietness of the whol Body, when the Stomach is disordered. 
The

The Physical Consideration and Anatomy  Book II. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Stomachs 
Distemper. 
THe Stomach is afflicted with diverse Diseases, Similar, Organick and Com- 
mon. For it is troubled with a Simple, or Compound destemper, while it 
is over cooled, over heated, over-dried, or over-moistned: of which, Galen dis- 
courses accurately, in the seventh of his Method.
Inflamtion. 
Apostumation.
Ulcer.
Incision of its
Bottom.
Also, it is Inflamed, Impostumated, and Ulcerated; and these three happen 
cheifly in the upper, or lower Orifices, because of their fleshyness: somtimes they 
may happen in the bottom, which is wounded, and healed, yea, and can bear inci- 
sion, that any Iron, or other hard thing which hurts the Stomach may be taken out, 
when it cannot otherwise be voided, either upward or down ward: as we read in 
that story of a Prusian, who had swallowed a Knife. 
Burning.
Hippocrates observed a burning Heat about the Stomach, in his Aphorismes: 
which is dangerous, by reason of Choler shed between the Coates of the Stomach 
or by reason of the neighbouring Parts burning, and Inflamed.
Bred by the
Gall. 
Somtimes the Gall touches those Parts of the Stomach which are next it, and 
scorches the same, as if it were burnt with a Fire brand red hot. 
It is alfo troubled with Diseases of Magnitude, Increased or Diminished; Dis- 
eases in Scituation, in Cavity, in Figure, and in Smoothness.
Distended. 
The Magnitude of the Stomach, Augmented, and Widened, as in Gluttons, 
does over much stretch the Stomach, and loosen its Fibres. So that afterwards, it 
cannot be sufficiently contracted to imbrace the Meat in such sort, as to turn the 
same into good Chylus: which is the Cause of crudity, and weakness in the Sto- 
mach. 
Strained.
And when the Substance thereof is so streitghned, through dryness or Swelling of 
the Membranes, that it cannot sufficiently widen it self to contain the Meat; then 
is it pained after Eating, though but a little Meat be taken. 
Widened and
and slackned.
But the Stomach is more frequently Diseased by Dilatation, and Exolution, 
or Flaggyness, and Slapness, both in persons otherwise in health, and such as are 
sick; while with Breaths and plenty of cold drink the Tone or contractive vigor of 
the Stomach, is so dissolved, that a loosness of the Belly is thereby caused: which 
is attributed to the Corruption of the Meat through an hot distemper of the Sto- 
mach; or to the Obstruction of the Veins: which Symptome, notwith- 
standing, is often Caused by the over great Laxity of the Stomach, which Fer- 
nslius calls Morbum Materiæ a Disease in the matter; and it must be Cured with 
strengthning and astringent things. This has been observed in the opening of 
dead Bodies, where the Stomach is found so extended, and so widened, that it 
would contain the Head of an Infant. And therefore it is very necessary for a 
Practitioner to observe the Diseases of the Matter, which are Cured with drying 
and astringent things, both given in, and applied outwardly. This was the Do- 
ctrine that sect of Antient Physitians, which were termed Metbodici, who made 
Laxity, and Astriction, the Cheife things observable in ai Diseases.
Change Po-
sture. 
Somtime the Stomach changes its natural Scituation, and is drawn back towards 
the Midrise, which Causes shortness of Breath after Meales. Somtimes it hangs 
down as low as the Navel, as has been observed in Bodies dissected, which makes a 
bad life, and a bad Concoction.
Obstructed. 
It is obstructed when its upper, or lower Orifice, is troubled with some swelling, 
which hinders the coming in of Nutriment into the stomach, and its going out after 
digestion.
Made Smooth. 
It is also Diseased with Smoothness, when the Inner Surface, which naturally 
should be wrinkled, is become smooth, which Causes that symptome which is 
termed Lienteria, which is, when there is such loosness of the Belly, that the Meat 
comes away unchanged, just as-it was Eaten. 
f T. 3. f. 2. FG. f. 8. III. g T. 3. f. 8.
Divers


Chap. 23. Of the Stomach. 55
Action Hurt. 
Divers Symptomes infest the Stomach in respect of its action being hurt, and in 
regard the disorder of such things as are Evacuated therefrom. The Action of 
the Stomach is, Appetite, Concoctiion and Chylification. 
Want of Ap-
petite.
The Appetite is hurt, 
When it is Abolished, Diminished, or Depraved. It is Abolished, when there is 
no Stomach or Appetite, or when Meat is loathed, especially flesh, which is the 
worst. Appetite is often Diminished in Diseases, which is not so bad. But the 
Depravation of Appetite is worse.
Dog appetite.
Absurd long-
ings. 
Now it is depraved, when there is a Dog-like Appetite which cannot be satisfied; 
or when evil things are desired; which kind of depraved Appetite, Pliny termes 
Malacia; and Galen, cally it Citta in Latin Pica, the Mag-pie.
Undigestion.
Slow digestion.
Ill digestion. 
Chylificatision Abolished; or Diminished, is called, Apepsia, Inconcoction; and 
by vulgar Physitians, Corruptio Chyli, a corruption of the Chyle. When the Meat is
long in digestion, tis called Bradupepsia, flow Digestion. When the meat is  
corrupted, its called Dyspepsia, ill digestion. 
To Action hurt, belong the Feeling, Motion, and Pain of the Stomach. There 
is feling in the whol Stomach, but ic is exquisite in the upper Orifice, by reason of 
certain Nerves of the Six Pare, which are there interwoven with admirable work- 
manship.
Refusing Meat.
Feeling, is Abolished, and Diminished, when there is need of hungring and 
thirsting, and yet the Stomach perceives it not, but refuses both Meat and drink. 
This proceeds from a great distemper of Heat, or Cold; which causes Mortificati- 
on, unless the Patient be distracted. 
Heart-Burning.
The sence of feeling is depraved in the Pain of the whol Stomach, or Of the upper' 
Orifice thereof, which drawes the Heart and noble Parts to Sympathise therewith: 
Wherefore this pain of the Stomach,is called Cardiogmos, Cardialgia and the aking 
of the Heart, or Heart-burning; and causes that kind of swouning, which is called 
Syncope Stomachica, the Stomach swouning; and comes through the Hearts Sympa- 
thising with the Stomach. 
And to this Pain of the Stomach, belongs Anxiety, and Unquiet tumblings and 
tossings; which the Greekes terme Riptasmos, or Asse; from whence the Feaver 
Assodes, has its Name; in which the Sick are ful of unquietness,
Want of Con-
traction upon
the Meat. 
The motion of the Stomach, is Relaxation, Coarctation; By the 
latter, it shuts it self upon the Meat to digest the same, and when that motion failes, 
there is nothing but fluctuations, and risings, both when a man is ful and fasting. 
Hiccuping.
Belching.
The motion of the Stomach is depraved in Hiccupings, and Belchings. Hic- 
cuping is more trouble some then Belching, and is an il sign in feavers, whether it come 
by fault of the Stomach it self, or by its Sympachising with' some other Part, 
especially the Liver. Hippocrates mentions a Disease called Morbus Rucduosus, 
the Belching Disease.
Symptomes in
excrection are. 
Disorders in point of Excretion are frequent in the Stomach; either upwards, in 
Vomitings, and Spawlings or downward, in the Lienteria, Diarrhæa, and 
coehaca Affeftio. 
Vomiting. 
Vomiting happens, either by reason of obstruction of the upper, or of the lower 
Orifice; if the upper be obstructed, the Meat is stopped in the upper Orifice a while, 
and presently after Vomited: if the fault be in the lower, the Meat is retained a 
longer time, and at last Vomited up.
Of Choler.  
A daily Vomiting up of Choler, without further trouble, is no Disease, nor ill 
Symptome; because it happens by reason that a branch of the Choler carrying Ves- 
sel is carryed into the Stomach; as Galen observes and proves by examples.
Of Blood. 
Vomiting of blood is an evil Symptome, whether the Blood flow from the Liver, 
by the Veins which are branched from the porta, into the Stomach; or from the 
SPleen by the h Vas Breve. Somtime the Patients life is Vomited up this waies, 
according to that expression of a Poet. 
Out of his Mouth, be spewes his Purple Soul. 
h Tab. 4. Fig. 8. let.h

56 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book II. 
Of Wind.
The frequent breaking up of wind with Belching, may be reduced to this Symp- 
tome of Vomiting; and this may be that which is termed Cholera Sicca, known to 
Hippocrates, and declared with its signs, by Ludovicus Duretus in his Com- 
ment upon the Coick Prædictions of Hippocrates.
Of Choler up
and down. 
But there is a Malignant Symptome, called Cholera humida,
which is a violent, and plentyful voiding of Choler upwards and downwards 
which kills within four daies; becauses very much Evacuation suddenly caused, is 
dangerous. Hip. 1. Book of Aphorismes; and al excels is an Enemy to Nature, 
according to the same Hippocrates. It proceeds from an Inflamation of the Sto- 
mach, which is allayed by cooling aun astringent Remedies, inwardly taken, and 
outwardly applied, but especially by the drinking of the spaw Waters, and other 
Medicinal springs of the like Nature; and by Laudanum discreetly given. We 
must avoid the use of cordial, and Stomach Pouders of an hot Nature, because 
they vex and fret the Stomach. The Physitians of Paris do let Blood, in a smal 
Quantity, though the pulse be very weak, least the Stomach Heat being suffocated, 
a Gangræne should arise.
2. Spawling. 
Spawling, or Salivation, unless it be caused by anointing the Body with Quick- 
silver (which they cal Fluxing) comes either from the Brain, or else (and that of- 
tentimes) from the Spleen, whose superfluous serosity is received into the Stomach 
and voided at the Mouth by spitting and spawling.
Morbus Car-
diacus. 
The Cardiacus Morbus belongs to the Diseases of the Stomach; of which, read 
Trallianus Lib. 3. Chap. 5. 25. And Mercurialis in Varjis Lectionibus. Twas 
knowingly said of Seneca in his 15 Epistle; Libere et sudare Vita Cardiaci est; drin- 
king and sweating, is the Lite of a Cardiacal Person. Pliny, in his 23. Book, Cap. 1. 
of his Natural History, saies, that al Hope of Curing this Disease consists in the 
use of wine. Which he borrows from Varro, out of the 14. Chap. of the 13. Book. 
This Morbus Cardiacus, is an extreme Faintness of the Stomach, joyned with 
much sweating: it proceeds from an hot Distemper thereof.
Rumination. 
Among Diseases of the Stomach Rumination ought to be reckoned, which is an 
inversion or turning of the Stomach, as it were Inside out, which in some Living 
Creatures is no trouble, as in those that chew the Cud. Of this Disease see what 
Horstius saies in his Epistles. 
Vomits wa-
rily to be used.
Out of this Anatomical and Pathological Dicourse may be collected, what parts 
are purged through the Stomach by way of Vomit: whether it be safe to exagitate 
this Part by Violent Vomits: whether it be good to use a mans self to this kind of 
Evacuation; seeing no good Huswife makes a Close-stool of her Pottage-Pot. The 
best way is, diligently to preserve the Stomach, and to Roborate its Tone or con- 
tractive Vigor, rather than to dissolue and slacken the same by Vomiting, unless 
Nature desire to disburthen her self that way, and the patient be easie to vomit, and 
such preparatives be premised as the Antients were wont to use.
Vomits not 
to be given to
persons very
weak. 
Wherefore they deal unskilfully, not to say wickedly, who after many other 
Medicines tried, do give vomits to such as are at Deaths door, as the last help, which 
suffocate that little life which remaines, and bring a speedy death. But some wil 
say that Empericks and Mountebancks, do this with good success. I answer, if you 
should reckon up those patients who have taken them to their cost, you would find 
an hundred dead, for two robustions persons saved; who scaped by their good for- 
tune, not by help of the vomiting Medicament: it is better to use vomits rather at  
the beginnings of Diseases, while Choler works and ferments in places neer the Sto- 
mach, than when the Pangs of Death have seized upon the Patient. ’Tis Man 
slaughter, to wrong People in their health. The discreeter sort of Empericks, when 
they are called to such Patients, are wont to find fault with what other Physitians 
have acted, and to declare the Patient dangerously sick, and thereupon, warily to 
give their Aurum Potabile or som such other Medicine as a cordial and restorer of
strength, until Nature being freed from al disturbance of Physick, begins to gather 
strength: and then they take opportunity to give a gentle Vomit which Purges
serous 


Chap. 24. Of the Liver. 57 
serous, or such like Excrements, up and down. In very many Diseases, Hippocra- 
tes saies, ’tis better to be quiet, than to do any thing; that is, 'tis better to leave the 
work to Nature, than to give any Medicament. And if the Physitian knew that he 
is the Servant and Assistant of Nature, he would cure more Patients than he does. 
See Valesius upon the 19. Text of Sect. 2. of the 6. Book of Hippocrates Epide- 
micks.  
Sluggishness of the Belly, and impurity of the Vessels, brings al into confusion. 
Hippocrates. 
Chap. 24. Of the Liver. 
Substance of
the Liver.
Its Color.
THe Liver, which is the Instrument of making Blood, consists of a Substance 
proper to it self, fitted, and ordained to that end; for it is like congealed 
blood, and therefore red, and the same color it imprints upon the blood; howbeit 
the Liver of some Fishes, is of another Color, viz. green, black, yellow as Saf- 
fron; in which Creatures, the blood receives its red color, by passing through the 
substance of the Heart. 
Blood, where,
and how made.
But in Men, and other living Creatures, which have the two Veins distinct, called 
Porta and Cava, the whol Mass of blood is wrought in the Liver; but one part 
thereof, less perfect than the rest, is by the Vena Porta distributed among those 
Parts which serve to nourish the Body; another part being conveighed by the Vena 
Cava, is perfected in the Heart, of which is made the Arterial blood, which is di- 
stributed to al the parts, and afterwards is transmitted into the Veins, that so in a 
Circular motion, it may pass again into the Heart, that by its flux, it may main- 
tain the perpetual motion of the Heart; as the Wheels of a Mil, are continually 
turned about by force of the Wind, or Water-fal. 
Such blood is furnished to those parts, which having sence and motion, depend 
upon the Brain or Heart.
Scituation of
the Liver.
Bigneẞ. 
The Liver is a scituate in the right Hypochondrium, under the bastard, or short 
Ribs, and fils with its bulk, al that Cavity to the Sword-like Cartilage. Somtimes 
it is so enlarged, as to exceed those Natural Bounds, and then it rests upon the Sto- 
mach, reaching as far as the Spleen, and descends three or four fingers breadth below 
the bastard, or short Ribs: which happens, partly through relaxation of the bands 
wherewith it is bound to the Midrif, and short Ribs, partly through swelling of the 
Liver it self, over loaded with Nutriment. 
Number.
Lobes, or laps.
In Man-kind, there is one single Liver, which is not divided into Lobes, or Fin- 
gers, as in bruit Beasts; yet there is a certain b Cleft to be seen, where the Umbilical 
c Vein creeps into the Liver; and many times two little Lobes, or Laps, are d seated 
under the greater ones: somtmes there is only c one, which being hollowed, re- 
ceives the Trunk of Vena, f Porta, which is included in a Duplication of the Omen- 
tum, or Call, that the Excrements of the Liver might be derived thither.
Two Regions
of the Liver. 
Althoug the Liver be one continued Substance, yet Anatomists divide the same 
into two Regions; the one superior, and exterior; the other inferior, and internal. 
The superior or upper, is called the g Gibbous, or bunching part of the Liver: the 
inferior is called the h hollow part of the Liver.
Its Vessels.
Into the upper Region, the Vena 
i Cava sprinkles its Roots: into the nether Region, the Vena k Porta sows abroad
its Suckers. 
Besides these Roots there are observable, certain Branches of the Channel of Cho- 
ler dispersed among the Roots of Vena Porta; and certain little twigs of the Milky 
Veins, which neer the Trunk of Porta, do enter into the Cavity of the Liver.
a t. 2. f. 10. I. D. T. 4. f. I. AB. b T. 4. f. 5. C. c f. I. a. f. 5. E. T. 2. f.
10. G. d T. 4. f. 4. AA. e f. 5 . B. f f. 5. I g f. I. B. f. 4. AA. h f. I. A.
f. AA. i f. 4 DD. k f. 5. I. &c. I f. 15. H. m T. 9. f. I. aaaa. 
L It is


58 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
Diversity of 
the Regions, to 
be observed in 
practice. 
It is the mind of Physitians, that both these Regions ought diligently to be ob- 
served, because in either of these Regions, the morbifick matter may be contained, 
which is diversly to be purged, according as it possesses the one or other Region: 
for as much as the bunching part of the Liver, is purged by the Kidneys, through the 
Vena Cava, the hollow part is purged by the Guts, by means of the Branches of 
Porta, which are terminated in the Guts, conveighing blood, and the evil humors 
of the Liver. I have seen Impostumes in the bunching part, when the hollow part 
has not been at al tainted: and on the other side, I have seen the hollow part impo- 
stumated, without any detriment to the bunching part. 
Howbeit, inasmuch as I cannot see those two Regions separated so much as by a 
Membrane; I cannot beleeve that one part can be sick, and the other sound, unless 
the morbifick humor be contained within the Pipes of the little Veins.
Whether the 
Roots of Cava
and Porta, are
united in the
liver.
Many Anatomists do affirm, that the Roots of Vena Cava, and Vena Porta, do 
meet together, and are united one unto another by many Anastomoles : others 
deny that there is any such Conjunction; among which, I willingly acknowledg 
my self for one, and give my voyce on their side: my Reasons I have els-where laid 
down, and Nature would have it so, that natural, and vicious Humors might not 
be confusedly jumbled together in the Liver.
How blood is
distributed
from the Liver 
A double Cir-
culation of the
blood.
You shal observe, how the Vein which is taken for Cava, takes its rise out of 
the upper part of the Liver, and is inserted into the Trunk of Cava, neer the 
midrif, that the Cava may forthwith powr out the blood which it hath received 
from the Liver, or rather transmit the same into the neighboring Heart, scituate on- 
ly two or three fingers breadths off, and inclosed in the Pericardium, which clea- 
veth circularly to the Nervous Centre of the Diaphragma: whereby thou maiest 
perceive, that the greater part of the blood, goes into the right Ventricle of the Heart, 
that it may become Arterial, by a double Circulation, Particular, and General. 
I cal that the particular Circulation, which is made from the right Ventricle of the 
Heart through the midst of the Lungs, so as that the blood comes again into the left 
Ventricle of the Heart. The general Circulation, is that which is made through 
the Channels, or large Pipes of the Cava, and the Aorta, after that manner which 
is described in my Treatise of the Circulation of the Blood.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Diseases of the 
liver in respect 
of 
Temper.
Substance.
Scituation. 
The Liver being affected contrary to Nature, is subject to any distemper, either 
with, or without matter; and instead of good blood, it breeds that which is Chole- 
rick, Flegmatick, or Melanchollick. It is altered, and corrupted in its substance, 
whiles it loses its Tone, and becomes flaggy, and faint. 
It changes its Scituation, when it is placed in the left side, and die Spleen on the 
right, which seldom happens: or when upon the slackning of those Ligaments 
wherewith it is fastened to the Midrif, and Sword-like Cartilage, it sinks below the 
short Ribs, as far as to the Navel. 
Magnitude.
Its Magnitude is changed, when it is so over-charged with Humors that it swels 
again.
Shape. 
It’s Figure, or Shape, is also changed, if we feel it to be round. Oftentimes its 
passages are stopt, namely, the roots of the Cava, and Porta or the Roots of 
the Gall-Bladder are stopt, though the other be open. 
Communion
with other
parts:
It has communion in regard of Neighborhood, with many parts which it touches, 
but especially with the Stomach, which it often harms, being inflamed, or impostu- 
mated: and somtimes it exulcerates the same, and makes an hole therein, to empty 
its self that way of its Quittor. With its hollow part, it touches the Guts, which 
are offended in Diseases of the Liver; and also the Peritoneum it self, by reason of 
the Coate which it imparts, and the Midris, by reason of the firm Connexion they 
have with the Liver, are drawn to sympathize in its Diseases.
Action. 
The Action of the Liver, which is Sanguification, or Blood-making, is hurt by 
the fore-recited Diseases: whereupon divers Diseases, and divers Pains do arise. 
Wherefore


Chap. 25. Of the Bladder of Gall. 59 
Its Similar
Diseases. 
Wherefore the Similary Diseases of the Liver are al Distempers, and the Laxity 
thereof, from which some are termed Hepatici, who having a looseness do void Ex- 
crementitious Blood, like the Water in which Raw flesh has been washt, or Excre- 
mentitious Humors of bad and diverse Colors.
Its Organick,
Common and
Compound Dis-
eases. 
Its Organick Disease is obstruction. Its Disease common to the Similar and 
Organick Parts, is an Ulcer and a wound. Its Componnd Disease is al sort of Tu- 
mors, whence comes the Term of Inflamation of the Liver, also a Scirrhus and a 
purulent Impostum, which is frequent enough.
Its Symptoms. 
Its Symptomes are, Action hurt, and that manyfold: and first of all, its attra- 
ction of Chyle being abolished, breeds a looseness of the Belly, in which Chyle is 
voided. Its Retention abolished, breeds the Liver looseness called Diarrhoæa 
Hepatica. But the Principal Action of the Liver, viz. Sanguification or Blood- 
boiling is abolished in the Dropsie, is diminished in Atrophia, and is depraved in 
Cachexia. 
Dropsie. 
The Dropsie is defined to be, a frustration of Sanguification in the Liver, when 
in stead of blood or natural spirit, it produces nothing but Water and Wind, which 
are emptied forth into the Belly, whence come the Ascites and Tympanites, that is 
the Bottle-bellied, and che Drum-bellyed Dropsie;  or else they are conveighed 
into the Habit of the body, whence comes the Dropsie Anasarca and Empneuma- 
tosis, viz. The Bloat-sac’d, Puf-Cheek'd Dropsie. Somtimes a Dropsie is caused 
through fault of the Spleen and other Parts, but not without the Liver be hurt, and 
likewise the heart, by means of the Circulation of the blood.
Atrophy. 
Atrophia (or falling away of flesh) is an hindrance of the bodies nourishment, 
by reason of the badness of the blood which the Liver Makes.
Cachexy. 
Cachexia is a depraved kind of Nourishment, by reason of bad Sanguification. 
Before these, is wont to match a simple accident, viz. Badness of Color in the 
Skin either blewish white, or Yellow, by reason of Serosity or Choler shed into 
the Habit of the whol Body, even as far as the face, by which we discerne the evil 
dispositions of the Liver. 
Chap. 25. Of the Bladder of Gall.
Its Name.
NOw follows the Folliclus Fellis, or Cystia Billiara, the Bladder which 
is ordained to containe that Excrementitious Choler which flowes from the 
Liver. 
Substance.
Scituation.
Its substance is Membranous, being distinguished into two Coates. 
It is placed under a the Liver, &c affixed to the greater Lobe or lap thereof; and as it 
were, overwhelmed therein.
Bottom.
Neck.
Sinus.  
The bottom of the Gal Bladder respects the inferior Parts, Its Neck, the superi- 
or parts, and a pipe derived from the Gall-Bladder called Canalis Cysticus, is car- 
ried obliquely til it meet the Canalis Hepaticus. There is a Sinus, or bending 
neer the Orifice of the Bladder, 
Bigneß. 
Number. 
Its Magnitude varies according to the plenty or Scarsity of Choler, It is only one. 
It has been found somtime double, but that was contrary to the intention of nature.  
Its divided into the bottom, which is the lower Part, and into the Neck which is the 
upper Part.
Shape.  
It has an oblong shape resembling a large Pear, broad at the bottom and straitter 
towards the Neck. 
Passages of
Choler.
It is hollow that it may receive Choler, and retaine it til a convenient time of 
emptying the same; is has certaine pipes or Channels to carry Choler: the one 
b broader and longer drawn out from the Liver to the beginnigng of the c Intestinum 
Jejunum, that is the Hungry Gut, or Gut termed Jejunum, by which the thicker 
Choler passes directly away, the other Pipe is d smaller and shorter, which is 
drawn Cross-waies, from che Neck of the bladder, to the foresaid passage.
Meatus He-
paticus 
The 
former I cal  Meatum Hepaticus, the Liver Channel; the latter I cal Cysticum
L 2 Meatuum

60 The Physical Conjideration, and Anatomy Book. II. 
Meatus Cysti- 
cus. 
Meatum, the Bladder pasage, by reason of its Rise and Orifice. For the Meatus 
Cysticus carries the thinner Choler into the Meatus Hepaticus, which a porous 
Membrane, ful of little holes, rooted in the Liver had suckt therefrom.
Two sorts of
Chloer in the
Liver. 
And therefore we must observe, that there are two sorts of Choler in the Liver, 
and two Channels to Purge them away at divers times; which is a Consideration of 
great moment in the Cure of Diseases. 
Communion. 
The Gall Bladder communicates with the Stomach by touching the same, which 
it heates so, as somtimes to burn the same, when the Gall Is inflamed in its Bladder. 
Somtimes it sticks to the Gut Colon which passes along hard by, which it often 
Colers Yellow, and provokes it to expell the Excrements. 
This expurgation of Choler, being liable to be stopt, does vex the body with 
many Inconveniences. 
There is seldom observed a third channel of Choler, which goes into the Stomach, 
unless some Part creep from the Meatus Hepaticus unto the Pylorus.
Its Vessels 
It has manifest Veins from the Porta called Venæ Cysticæ. Its Arteries and 
Nerves are not so visible.  
a T. 4. f. I. C. f. 5. F. b f. 5. HH. f. 3. c c f. 3. D. 2 T. 4. f. 8. b.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Diseases of the 
Gall-Bladder. 
THe Gall-Bladder is subject to few Diseases. The most common are, when its 
Cavity or its Channels are obstructed. When its Cavity is ful of little stones, 
or filled with one great one, by reason of thick Choler changed into a stony sub- 
stance. Its passages are stopped in the Liver, or in the Gut. Also it is broken, 
through violent motion in Vomiting; and somtime it is so distended with Choler, 
when the passages are stopped that should Evacuate the same, that it has been seen 
as big as both a Mans Fists. 
Somtimes, when it is empty of choler, it dries up so that nothing therefore remaines 
saving the ductus Hepaticus. If we beleive Fernelius, there could be no other Cause 
found of the death of some persons, than that their Gall-Bladder had no Choler in 
it: if so, the evil and venemous Quality of the suppressed Choler was so great, as 
to infect the heart, or to weaken and corrupt some noble part. 
Its Symptomes.
The Symptomes of this Part are more manifest; which do consist in its action 
hurt, or in the undue proportion or quantity of the Excrementitious Choler. The 
Action of the Gall-bladder is attraction of Choler, which is either diminished, or 
abolished. The undue proportions or quanity of the Choler is, when either too 
little or too much is voided forth.
Their Signs. 
Which Symptomes cheifly appear in those Parts which Sympathise with the Gall- 
bladder, as in the Stomach, when Choler is vomited up in the whol body, when 
Choler is shed abroad through the Veins into the habit of the Body, and deformes 
the Skin; or when it takes its Course into the Guts and causes a dysentery, or a 
Cholerick looseness.
The Original. 
But the original of these Symptomes is to be charged upon the Liver, being il dis 
posed. 
And Democritus had good Reason to search diligently into the seat and Nature 
of Choler, when he made dissection of divers living Creatures, that he might be 
more able rightly to cure the Diseases of Body and mind.
Diversity of 
Choler proved.
By the differ-
ent sorts of
Jaundice.
When I see in an extream Yellow Jaundice, the whol Skin infected with Choler, & 
that the Urins die cloaths Yellow, the stooles being in the mean time whitish; And 
when I see in another sort of Jaundice, both the Urins and stooles Yellow; This 
confirmes to me, that there are two sorts of Choler, and several waies for the expur- 
gation of each of them. In the Yellowest sort of Jaundice, in which the stooles are 
whiteish, the Meatus Hepaticus or Liver passage of Choler is stopped in the Ca- 
vity of the Liver. In the other sort of Jaundice when the stools are Yellow, it 
shews that a quantity of Choler passes away by the Urins and Guts, and the ob-
struction 

Chap. 26. Of the Spleen. 61 
struction is not so great nor so stubborn, as in the Yellowist sort of Jaundice, and 
therefore it is to be hoped the Cure will be more speedy.
Chap. 26. Of the Spleen.
The Spleen described.  
THe Spleen is a Bowel placed right against the Liver, as its Lieutenant, and a 
kind of Bastard-Liver, that when the Liver is Diseased, it may assist the same 
in Sanguification or Blood making.
Its Substance. 
It is of a Substance spongy, soft, sprinkled al over with very many Vessels like 
Fibres or threds; yet it is altogether unlike the substance of the Liver. It is in- 
folded in a Membrane b proper to it self, seeing it receives none from the Perito- 
neum.
Color.
Greatneß.  
Its Color is Black and Blew and obscurely Reddish. 
Its greatness is uncertaine and not determinable, because it grows greater or less, 
according to the abundance, or defect of Humors which flow thither, & are collected 
therein. So that there is none of the Bowels which does so easily grow bigger and les- 
ser, as the Spleen. 
Number. 
In respect of Number, it is wont to Be single; Somtimes it has been observed to 
be double and threefold.
Parts. 
Consider in the Spleen its upper Part, which is termed the Head, and its nether 
Part which is called the Taile.
Scituation. 
Tis a placed in the left Hypochondrium, under the short Ribbs, opposed as it 
were to weigh against the Liver, that the Body might remaine equally bal- 
anced.
Temper. 
When it keeps its Natural Constitution its Temper is hot and moist enclining to 
dryness.
Shape. 
It is of an oblong shape, like a Tongue, in Brutes; but in Mankind, it is more 
like the Sole of a Mans Foot. In the sore Part towards the Stomach, it is b hollowed, 
that it might receive the c splenical Veins and Arteries, on the back part towards the 
Ribbs its d bunching. 
Connexion.
Its knit into the Stomach by two or three Veines remarkable enough, which do 
make that so famous c Vas Breve, so called by reason of the shortness of the way. 
Through those Veins it disburthens it self into the Stomach; by the Veins and 
Atteries Splenical, it Purges it self into the Guts and Kidnies. 
Ii’s fastened to the bastard Ribs by Membranous Fibres sufficiencly strong: 
somtimes it’s fastened to the Stomach, and is knit at its point to the Midrif or 
Diaphragma. 
It Communicates with the Heart, by a remarkable peculiar and admirable Ar- 
tery which it hath, which by a short way carries thither, the Vapours or il Juyces 
thereof. 
Action con-
troverted, di-
vers Opinions
thereof.
The Action of the Spleen is much doubled and controverted among Physitians 
Anatomists: so Many Men, so Many Minds; Hippocrates did beleeve that it 
drew superfluous serosity out of the Stomach: which Opinion Aristotle followed, 
though others draw it to an attraction of Chyle, either out of the Pancreas and Me- 
sentery or out of the Stomach. 
Galen will have it emploied in Purging away Melancholy, which it draws from 
tne Liver. 
Others are of Opinion that it prepares Blood for the Heart that it may become 
Arterial, whether it be of the thicker parts of the Chyle, or of the dregs of the Blood 
Carried thither. 
Others say it prepares a superfluous wheyish matter, being the excrement of its 
digestion, which it sends back again into the Stomach, to ferment the Meats 
when they are turned into Chyle. 
The Arabian Physitians acknowledg such an Humor, but they assigne its office to 
be the provoking Appetite. Galen thought that it did help to strengthen the  
Stomach. In

Chap. 62. 
The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book II. 
In So great dissent of Authors what shal were solve upon? every one brings probable 
reasons for his Opinion, Hofmannus conceives he has so sufficiently established his 
Opinion, that no wise man can contradict him. Shal I venter my Opinion among so 
many learned Champions?
The Authors
Opinion 
I conceive that the Spleen does attract slimy Blood to nourish it self, and that 
it sheds a special kind of fermentative Serosity through the Splenick Arteries into 
the Stomach; and because its Parenchyma or substance is of a Spongy and soaking 
Nature, it does by the Veins attract and suck out the superfluous humidity of the 
Stomach, that the Coction may be the better. 
Howbeit, I deny not but that it may by Accident supply the Office of the Liver, 
when the same hath lost its faculty of Sanguification; but Blood cannot be made 
so good and perfect in the Spleen as in the Liver, seeing it is but a bastard 
Liver, and consequently makes but bastard Blood and impure, because not Clari- 
fied.
Hofmans Opi-
nion of the
Spleen Sanqui-
fication exami-
ed. 
Hofman makes himself Ridiculous, while he eagerly contends in a little Book 
which he has put forth, and up and down in his other writings, that the muddy part 
of the Chylus, is carried by the Mesaraick Arteries unto the Spleen; where it is 
turned into Blood, with which, the neighbouring Parts are nourished: and that the 
Excrements of this Blood are voided by Urins, Stool, and Sweat. That good Old 
Man is to learn, that the thicker Parts of the Chyle are not sucked out, but separa- 
ted and sent away into the greater Guts; and that the Mesaraick Arteries cannot do 
as he saies, because they containe Arterial Blood, neither do they reach any of 
them to the Spleen, because it has a peculiar Artery, which Arantus first described, 
and which I my self have often shown. 
Again he ought to have rejected the Milky Veins of Asellius, which he allowes of; 
seeing none of them reach unto the Spleen. 
Furthermore, that same bastard and impure Blood, bred of muddy Blood by a 
bastard Liver, wil be unfit to nourish the neighbouring Parts which serve for Cocti- 
on, though they appear filthy, for they need to be nourished with pure Blood for 
their preservation. 
The Cholerick, Melancholick and Wheyish Excrements of the said Blood, can- 
not be Purged away but by Veins and Arteries the Arteries are allready taken up 
with carrying the muddy Parts of the Chyle. They must therefore of necessity be 
carried by the Splenick Vein into the liver, that they may be voided through the 
Guts or by the Kidnies, which would breed very great confusion in the 
Liver. 
If Hofman had considered, that the substance of the Spleen is unlike sub- 
stance of the Liver, its bigness different, its number uncertain. Color divers, Sci- 
tuation variable, because somtimes it sinkes down to the Hypogastrium, more often 
ascends towards the Midrif, somtimes descends upon the left Kidney, the Ligaments 
being slackened: and lastly, its shape, quite contrary to that of the Liver, and som- 
times there is no Spleen at all: also that the structure of the Vessels of the 
Spleen, is altogether unlike that of the Vessels of the Liver; he would never have 
so stifly affirmed, that that the Spleen made a peculiar kind of Blood out of the 
Chylus. 
Nature does in none of the Bowels more sport her self, than in her shaping of the 
Spleen so variously and unconstantly. But the Structure of those Bowels which are 
necessary to the maintenance of life, is allwaies, one and the same and uniform. 
Furthermore you may know that the substance of die Liver &c Spleen are unlike; 
by boyling the one and the other: for the substance of the Liver is firme, sollid and 
Reddish; that of the Spleen is Spungy, soft, and black and blue in Color: The 
substance of the Liver of Animals boiled, as of an Ox, a Sheep, a Goat, is eaten 
with content: the substance of the Spleen is not Mans meat, neither will other 
Creatures eat it, unless they be very hungry. But if the Office of the Spleen and 
Liver were the same in Bruts as wd as in Men, they should have both alike sub- 
stance, and breed the same blood.
Where 


Chap. 26. Of the Spleen. 63
Where will you find a place to clense away Choler in the Spleen as their is in the 
Liver? If the Spleen draw the more thick Part of the Chyle, it ought to have larger 
Veins, but they are exceeding smal, like unto threds. Wherefore Hofman does, 
foolishly to enquire the Dioti or Cause why it is so, before he knows the Hoti, 
that it is so, which ought to go before, and be diligently enquired into, when the 
natural Action of Parts is sought after, because the natural is Com- 
pounded and accommodated thereunto. What cannot an ingenious Wit imagine? 
But al such speculations are ridiculous and void, unless they are approved by the 
Eye, and confirmed by diligent Section and Inspection of Bodies. See Aristotle in 
the third book of his Politicks, at the beginning of the 8. Chapter, who wil there in- 
struct thee. 
If Hofman had known out of Aristotle, that such living Creatures as drink, have 
a Spleen, Reins and Bladder, he had more truly expounded that passage of Aristotle 
out of Hippocrates, of the true sence whereof he glories. The Spleen drawes 
of the Belly superfluous humidities, it self being constituted of blood. 
a T. 4. f. 7. C. b f. 7. BB. a T. 4. f. I. V. b T. 4 f. 8. AAA. c T. 4.
f. I. I. f. 8. B. and C. d T. 4. f. 7. A. e T. 4. f. 6. b. 
The Medicinal Consideration.
Disease of the
Spleen in Sub-
stance. 
The Substance of the Spleen is liable to al kinds of Distemper, and to divers 
Swellings, especially that kind of hard swelling which is termed Scirrhus. Som- 
times it is inflamed, and then the substance thereof is perceived to pant, by reason of 
the Multitude of Arteries, of winch it is ful. It seldom impostumates. Its Coat 
does oftentimes grow thick and becomes Cartilaginous.
Magnitude. 
It often grows great by abundance of Humors, and grows smal again, somtime 
of it self, and somtime by use of Medicines. It is better that the Spleen be smal,
than great.
Number. 
A double or triple Spleen is not good, because it is a fault in the Conforma- 
tion. 
scituation
The Scituation of the Spleen is somtimes changed, when its Ligaments being 
slackened, its weight bears it downwards, or they being broke, it fals into the 
Hypogastrium or Parts beneath the Navel; and then it deceiveth unskilful and heed- 
less Physitians, who in Women take it for a Mole, or for a Scirrhus Tumor of the 
Womb, and in Men for a sort of Glandulous Tumor which lies hid in the Mesencery. 
In four patients it has been my hap to see the Spleen on this manner fallen down 
into the Belly.
Difference of  
the Spleen and
Kidney when
fallen. 
Somtimes one or other of the Kidnies is seen to fal down in the same manner: 
but it is easie to know the one from the other. When the Kidney is fallen, the 
swelling is round: when the Spleen is fallen the Tumor is oblong and an emptiness 
is Perceived on the left side under the short Ribbs. And if the Tumor be movable, 
as it is at first the Spleen or Kidney is easily reduced unto its Natural place: 
otherwise after the space of six months, it sticks so fast to the Peritoneum before, 
to the bottom of the Bladder, to the Guts, and in Women to the Womb, that it 
must of necessity putrifie in that place; which it wil the sooner do, if either you give 
the patient Emollient Medicines inwardly or apply them outwardly. If you would 
prolong the patients life, you must often let blood, and beare up the Tumor with a 
Truss or Swathe band.
The Cure of
both. 
What if the Spleen fal from its natural place, shal we fear and burn it with a red 
hot Iron? when it slips into the Belly shal we take that Course with it? It is a tick- 
lish and dangerous peice of work, notwithstanding Old Farriers or Horse Doctors 
have written, that the Spleen has been by that means consumed in Horses; and in 
some poor slaves on whom they durst Experiment so cruel a Remedy. 
Much more dangerous it is by opening the left Hypochondrium to take away the 
Spleen neither can its thick superfluous Humors be safely disolved by beating the
same. 

64 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
same. I should by such a practice fear a contusion, after which an incurable sup- 
puration of the whol substance would undoubtedly follow. 
Figures.
There is none of the Bowels which in Diseases does more change its shape. Som- 
time its long, somtime foursquare, somtimes round, according as it finds room to 
dilate it self in.
Communion. 
when it rests upon the Stomach, it does much hurt and disturbe the action there- 
of; and if it be fasten to the Midrif, is oppresses the tame, or if it reach thither 
in its Bulk, it hinders the free Motions thereof.
Obstructed, 
what Diseases
it causes.
Upon the Spleen obstructed depend the Black Jaundice, Hypochondriacal Me- 
lancholy, the ill Colors of Virgins and other Women, The Scurvy, or Hippocrates 
his great Spleens, out of which flowes a Malignant Wheyish Humor, which being 
spread into divers Parts of the Body, does in the Mouth cause Stomacace or Oscedo a 
sorenes with loosness of the Teeth &c. In the Thighs Scelotyrbe a soreness with 
spots, and wandring pains through the whol body, which are either fixed and a- 
biding in certain Parts, which we cal Rheumatismes, and the Germans refer them 
to the scurvy, as may be seen in such German Authors as have written of the Scurvy, 
especially in the Treatise of Engalenus. And therefore after universal Remedies, they 
use other appropriate Scorbuticks, which are destined to the Cure of that Disease.  
Chap. 27. Of the Vena Cava and Aorta within the Lower 
Belly. 
Liver is not 
the Original of 
Vena Cava. 
THe Trunk of the a Vena Cava is commonly reported to arise out of the Liver, 
and to be divided into the superior and inferior Trunk, as if they were separa- 
ted, as it is in the stock of the b Aorta springing out of the Heart: but Ocular In- 
spection does demonstrate, that the Trunk of Vena Cava is separated from the Li- 
ver, which creepes beneath, and that near the top of the Liver by the Midrif it re- 
ceives a branch which grows out of thee Substance of the Liver, which carries blood 
into the Trunk of the Cava, that it may be carryed unto the Heart with other blood 
which ascends by Circulation. 
Wherefore that same Trunk of the Vena Cava, is extended al along without 
Interruption from the d Jugulum or Neck even to the e Of Sacrum- There 
I make account is the Cistern of Blood, because a great part of the Blood is contained 
therein. 
Vena Cava
divided into
Trunks.
The Trunk of Vena Cava, in regard of the Liver, which by a branch supplies it 
with Blood, may be divided into the f upper and lower Trunk. The inferior 
produces the Vena h Adeposa, which is dispersed into the fatty Membrane of the 
Kidney; and then the i emulgent, which is distributed into the Kidney; after that 
the k Spermatick Vein, whose right-side branch springs from the Trunk of Cava, 
and its left from the Emulgent, finally, it sends three or four branches called l Lum 
bares into the Loins, which are spred abroad unto the Marrow of the Back.
Distribution
of the inferior
Trunk. 
When the Trunk is come to the top of Os Sacrum, it is divided into two Chan- 
nels or Pipes, which from their Scituation are termed m Canales Iliaci, the Illiack 
Pipes. From these on either hand are produced other Veins, especially the a Sacra, 
b Hypogastrica, Amplissma c Epigastrica, and d Pudenda. In Women, the 
Hypogastrica, is longer than in Men, and Nourishes more Parts, and holds the Men- 
strual blood, till the time come that it must be voided. Wherefore blood is con- 
tained in greater plenty about the Genitals of Women, than of Men. 
The Epigastrica is observed to be two-fould in Women the one ascends 
into the Musculus Rectus the other opposite thereunto, descends as low as the 
Womb. 
Seat of Fea-
vers Continual
and Intermit-
tent.
In this Trunk of Vena Cava, Fernelius after Galen, placed the seat of continual 
Feavers, supposing the Blood rested quietly therein; but seeing the blood is in 
perpetual motion, I make the seat of continual feavers to be in the Trunk of the 
Vena Cava, and in those great Pipes carryed along through the Limbs; as the
Seminary 


Chap. 27. Of the Vena Cava and Aorta, &c. 65 
seminary of intermittent Feavers or Ague, is in the Vena porta, or in the Bo- 
well, which are nourished thereby. 
Why Cava has
a thick coat.
Seeing the Veins are the Vessels and Cisterrs to contain the blood, they have 
a thin coat, saving that the Trunk of Vena Cava has a thicker and stronger coat 
than ordinary, to avoid breaking, in case the blood should work or boyl therein, 
which by means of the tenderness of the Coat, can sweat and breath thorough.
Whether Veins
have Fibres. 
Tis a Question, whether the Veins have Fibres or no? some say yea, and some 
no. But seeing the Blood is thrust forward by the spirits and Heat, it has a natural 
ascent unto the Heart, and therefore it needs no Fibres to draw it, and if any were 
necessary, the right ones would suffice, but the circular ones are interposed 
for strength and  some threds are observed in the Coat of a Vein, not to draw, but 
to strengthen the Coat. Wherefore the Contentions about the Fibres of Veins 
are but Vain Janglings neither are we in Blood-letting so carefully and Scrupu- 
lously to observe the rectitude of the fibres, as the Scituation of the Part 
affected.
Why the Veins
are called the
bodies Wind-
Doors 
Hippocrates in his Book de Morbo Sacro, does Elegantly call the Veins Spira- 
cula Corporis, the Wind-doors or Breathing places of the Body; because when 
they are opened, a Fuliginous or sooty Spine lssues out with the Blood, and the 
Air is likewise by them received in, to Cool the Body. 
In Antient times, and the daies or Yore, it was a Part of Sooth saying, to view the 
blood which flowed from their sacrifices, which it ic appeared pure and laudable, it 
was a token of happy and joyful success; if bad and corrupted, it was an ill sign, 
According to Lucan. 
Nec Cruor emicuit solitus; sed Vulnere Largo 
Effluxit nig um rutilo pro sanguine Virus. 
That is, 
No usual Blood did spring from the large Wound, 
But black and Venemous, for Red and found. 
The Medicinal Consideration.
The Conditions
of good Blood. 
Seeing the Veins are the Cisterns of blood, it comes here to be considered how 
the blood ought to be qualified in sound bodies, that so we may be able to judg of 
that which is corrupt. Now in bodies that are healthy the blood is Red, Fibrous, 
and has a smal quantity of Wheyish Water mingled with it.
How the Fi- 
bres in the are bred.
Whether the Fibres are made of an earthy and flegmatick matter which is drawn 
out into threds within the Channels or greater Veins, and is made smaller in the less- 
ser Veins, many doubt, supposing the four Humors to be conteined in the Mass 
of blood. Some admit of blood, but severed from the other Humors, which in 
first Region are Separated from the blood. Others distinguish the Alimentary 
Humors from the Excrementitious: the former are confused and mingled with the 
blood the latter are to be seen collected in several Parts, as Choler in the Gall- 
bladder; Melancholy in the Spleen; and Flegm is diffused through al the Parts of 
the Region of the belly, notwithstanding Hippocrates acknowledged two fountains 
of Flegm Head and the Stomach. 
the Natural 
Temper of the
Blood.
Quantity of
the Blood.
Now the Quality or temper of blood is hot and moist. Its Quantity cannot be 
define. The Arabian Physitians, especially Avicenna, do write, that in a Sanguine 
bodie wel constituted there are twenty four pounds of blood, so that a Man may 
bleed twenty pounds and live: but if he bleed more, Death follows inevitably. 
That which preserves our life, is likewise the occasion of Death: for as good 
Blood in a moderate are quantity preserves our life, so the same being vitiated, or too 
munch quantity, is the Cause of Sickness and Death it self.
Cacochymia & 
Plethora, what
they are. 
When blood offends in quality, it is termed Cacochymia, when in quantity, 
its called Plethora. Somtime the blood is corrupted and not the Serum or Whey- 
ish water, Somtime the serum is corrupt and the blood remaines sound. Now 
the serum or Wheyish Water being corrupted, is the worst Humor in the body,
M grievously 

66 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book II. 
grievously infecting, weakening, and destroying such parts as are therewith diseased. 
Corruption of
The Serum.
Some Practitioners do make it a Question, Whether in the Veins, every 
Humor has its own proper Serum or not. I beleeve that there is bur one kind 
of Serum, which according to the several degrees of its Corruption and Tin- 
cture, appears somtimes yellow and Cholerick, somtimes green and li- 
vid, or black and blue; somtimes Melancholick, and somtimes Milky. Aristotle 
counts the Blood corrupted, when it is changed into Serum Sometimes the Putre- 
faction of Blood is so great, that the whol Mass is turned into a rotten putrefied Se- 
rum. When the Corruption of blood, is yet greater, somtimes Worms are bred 
therein, wh'ch I have seen come away in the opening of a Vein. Such a Worm be-
ing bred the Veins, may somtimes flow into the right Ear of the Heart, and grow 
great, and at length gnaw, and eat upon the Heart, as has been often observed in the 
Dissection of dead Bodies. 
Worms Breed
in the blood.
Heart eaten
by worms bred
in the blood.
Retensive fa-
cuty of the
veins be-
ing lost, what
follows. 
The Veins have in them, a Retentive Faculty, whereby they hold fast the Blood 
within themselves: which Faculty being perished, they suffer the blood to leak 
out through al the parts of the Body, yea, even to sweat out, as I have seen in some 
Patients. But more often it flows out immediately by the Nostrils, Mouth, 
Lungs, Guts, Bladder, by the Womb, and by vomiting.
Blood Con-
gealed. 
I have divers times seen in malignant burning Feavers, that the blood has been 
congealed within the Veins, like unto the pith of an Elder stick; which has been no- 
ted by Fernelius in his Physiologia.
Vena Cava inflamed. 
Aretæus writes, That the Vena Cava is somtimes inflamed, and thereupon 
comes to break, which I have leen my self to happen. The Trunk of Vena Cava 
cannot be dilated, so long as the blood circulates freely. Neither is it subject to 
swellings, termed Varices, which are wont to happen only in the Veins of the 
Thighs and Legs. 
Cure of the
disease of Ve-
na Cava and 
the blood, two-
fold.
Of the Diseases of this Vein, and of the Blood contained therein, there is a two- 
fold Cure-, Purgation, and Blood-letting: but blood-letting is more necessary 
of the two in a Plethora, either ad vasa, or ad vires; or in a Plethorick Caco- 
chymia, or in a very great and putrid Cacochymia, that a portion of the extreamly 
corrupted blood may be taken away. 
Purgation.
Blood-letting. 
Blood-letting takes away such Obstructions as are caused by blood, but not those 
that are caused by Humors congested in some part of the Body: and therefore that 
same Euroia so often mentioned, that freeness of passage caused by blood-letting, 
must be understood of the motion, and free passage of the blood through the Veins, 
and not of the removal of an Humor that is gathered together, and wedged fast into 
any part of the body.
If blood may
be lessened by
other waise
beside blood-
letting. 
If blood-letting cannot be put in practice, the Question is, Whether Purgation 
alone, may suppiy its place, according to Galens Opinion, in his Book, de Sanitate 
tuenda; or spare eating, exercising the body, frictions, sweating? I  suppose, 
where there is no Feaver, the blood may be diminished by the means aforesaid, 
and also by such Medicaments as draw the Serum out of the Veins; for so the Veins 
being emptied, the rest of the body may be extenuated: and this is observed and 
put in practice in such Nations where the People are afraid of blood-letting How- 
beit, to open a Vein twice or thrice, is a more speedy, and safe Remedy.
A Valve in
Veins Cava. 
Forasmuch as Sylvius Carolus Stephamus, have written, that there is a Valve 
within the Liver, by the Trunk of the Vena Cava, which hinders the blood from 
returning back; Conringius saies, that it is to be found in Oxen. This favors that 
Opinion of the bloods being carried from the Liver unto the Heart. It seems to me, 
that Nature has placed that Valve, that the filth of the mals of blood should not 
flow back into the Liver, and obstruct the same: which filth, either she carries by 
some way out of the Cava into the Porta; of else she sends it forth into the habit 
of the Body. 
Its use.
 
a T. 12. f. I. ABC. b T. 12. f. 4. A c f. I. rr. d f. I. B. e T. 12. f. I.
D. f f. I. B. g T. 12. f. I. CD. h T. 5. f. 2. g. i T. 12. f. I. xx. k. f. I. 
ζ ζ. 1 f. aaa. m f. i .DD
Of

Chap. 28. Of the Kidneys. 67 
Of the Aorta descending.
Distribution of
the Aorta des-
cendent.
Ateria Lie-
nalis. 
The descending a Trunk of the Aorta, sends, forth so many branches, as the inferi- 
or trunk of the Vena Cava produces; but it sends withal, a remarkable Artery, cal- 
led Lienalis Arteria, undivided, by an indirect Course unto the Spleen.
Its Use. 
That same Artery, as large, and wide as a Goose Quil, does furnish the Spleen 
with Arterial blood, that thereby the thick, and slimy blood, might be attenuated 
and made fit to nourish the stomach and its neighboring bowels, and that it might 
aftord a fermenting juyce to the Stomach, to help its Chylifaction, by that same 
Permixion of both sorts of blood. Peradventure likewise, when the Liver is vitia- 
ted, and extreamly obstructed, Arterial blood may be brought unto it, by 
the Splenick Vein, as it were a Natural Tartarum Vitriolatum, to open its Ob- 
structions.  
then it produces the b Cæliacal Branch, which is divided into as many twigs as 
the Vena Porta is, and has communion therewith, by a mutual Anastomosis of the 
Vessels, that is to say, by a mutual conjunction of their mouths. 
. This same Arterial blood, is not circulated, yet may it have a reflux into the 
Trunk of the Aorta, to disburden the parts of superfluous blood i which returning 
back into the Aorta, may conveniently be evacuated, by opening a Vein in the 
Foot.
thickness of
the Membrane
of the Aorta.
The Trunk of che Aorta is made of a Membrane, six times thicker than a Vein; 
and therefore it is not subject to that kind of Tumor, called Aneurisma, which the 
other smaller Arteries are subject unto, by reafon of dilatation of their Coat, or its 
Rupture, or apertion, when in che Arm, an Artery is opened instead of a Vein.
The Circula-
tory Vessels. 
The Aorta, and Vena Cava, do constitute that Region, in which the matter of 
Continual Feavers is contained; but the blood does not remain quiet in that place, 
it is perpetually moved round by Circulation: wherefore these two Vessels, 
the Vena Cava, and Aorta, are ordained both to contain, and circulate the blood, 
ind may be termed the Circulatory Vessels. 
 a T. 12. f. 4. C. b T. 12. f. 4. P.
Of the Nerves of the Lower Belly.
Contexture of
the mensenterie
Nerves 
Between the two Kidneys, at the Base of the Mesentery, we must search diligent- 
ly for that same a Interrexture of Nerves observed by Fallopius, which is woven the
together of the b Stomachick and c Costal Nerves, concurring on both sides to form 
this Contexture; from whence are derived at the d Nerves, which are distributed 
unto the parts of the lower belly.
What disease
arise therefrom 
When this Contexture of Nerves is ful of evil Humors, Convulsions happen with 
the Colick pains, both in men and women, though the brain be no waies misaffected.
Chap. 28. Of the Kidneys.
substance of the kidneys.
They have a very thin c Membrane, or skinny Coat, which sticks close to their 
flesh; but they have another Coat which is loose, covered with Fat, which is called 
Membrana f adiposa,and infolds the kidneys,and is produced from the perotoneum,
Their temper.
Their Temper is hot and dry, that they may be the better disposed to attract the 
serous Humidities. 
scituation
They are a scituate in the Loyns, between a duplication of the Peritoneum, 
which is no other than rhe Membrana Adiposa, and they seem to be placed with- 
out Cavity of the Belly. The Reins are said to begin at the last bastard Rib.
M 2 They 


68 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
Greatness.  
They have in length, the breadth of four or five Fingers; their thickness is two 
fingers, and they are much about three fingers broad.
Numbers. 
They are two in Number: somtimes, though rarely, there is but one, and then 
it is commonly as big as two, and lies upon the back, the Channels of the Aorta 
and Cava being a little removed to afford a place for the single Kidney.
Shape. 
They are shaped like thole Beans we cal Kidney-beans.
Color. 
Their Color is reddish.
Vessels. 
You shal observe in their hollow side, the Emulgent Vessels, and the Ureter 
springing forth of that hollowed side. Their Vessels are the Emulgent c Veins and 
d Arteries, proceeding from the Trunk of the c Cava, and f Aorta. 
Kidneys, bow
shaped in chil-
dren.
And this is the outward Conformation of the Kidneys in a grown man or wo- 
man: in Children kis otherwise til they are a yeer old, because the external face of 
the Uva being like a thick bunch of Grapes, does neatly resemble the Kidneys of a 
Calf: and upon the Kidneys, is placed the Glandula h Renalis, which is shaped 
like the Kidney, and in Children, dries up by little and little, til it become flat, be- 
ing separate from the Kidneys by a portion of the Membrana adiposa, though it be 
found not far off in either side.
Its Internal 
structure ad-
mirable.
The Basin.
The Teats.
The internal Structure of the Kidney, is admirable; which that you may con- 
veniently view, and search into, you must cut it artificially on the hollowed side; 
and then there wil present it self to your view, the enwidened a substance of the U- 
reter, which forms the Pelvis, or Basin; into which, from the upper part, as it 
were from an House-top, the wheyish Humor rains down drop after drop,through 
nine little fleshy Teats, called Caruncula b Papllares, which are acuminated 
without, and are encluded, and thrust into c nine Pipes, made of the substance of the 
Ureter dilated. Therefore that covering, through which the wheyish Excrement 
drops, may be called the Cribrum Renum, or Kidney-sieve. 
The Sieve.
In those papillary Caruncles, or fleshy Teats aforesaid, the Serum, or wheyish 
Excrement, is separated from the blood; which blood spends it self to nourish the 
Kidneys, or flows back again into the Emulgent Veins.  
a T. 3. f. 8. Δ. b f. 8. iii. c f. 8. BB. Q r. d T. 3. f. 8. lmn. c T. 5. f. 2.
E.f f. 2. AA.
a T. 5. f. I. BC. b f. I. FG. f. 2. KK c f. 2 HII. f. 5. B. d f. 2. aa
bb. f. 5. C. e f. 2. F. f f. 2. G. g T. 9. f. 2. BD. h f. 2. A &C. T.5. f.I.
AA. f. 2. BB. f. 3. & 4. AA.
a T. 5. AA. b T. 5. f. 6. EE c T. 5. f. 6. DD.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Infirmities of 
the Kidneys 
are 
Distempers 
The Similar Constitution of the Kidneys, contrary to Nature, consifs in the De- 
pravation of theirt Temper, and of their Substance. A distemper either single, or 
with matter, causes a Laxity or loosness in the substance of the Kidneys, whence 
springs Atonia, or want of their wonted vigor to act by. By means of an hot di- 
stemper, they come to be inflamed, whence follows an Imposthume, and at last an 
Ulcer, as wel in the internal, as external parts: for oftentimes a moibifick matter, is 
collected within the Membrana adiposa, which breeds Impostumes which com- 
press the Kidneys.
Impostume,
Ulcer.
Laxity, bow
caused.
diabetes.
Ischurie 
Laxity proceeds from a cold and moist distemper, or from an exceeding hot one, 
which corrupts the Natural temper of the part; whence comes Atonia, or an impo' 
tency to contract it self and from thence comes Diabetes, which is the Pissing 
sickness; or Ischuria, which is a total supprestion of Urine, not only in one Kid- 
ney, but in both, by reason of Fraternity, and Co-partnership, by reason of an af 
flux of a malignant air from one to the other; or by reason of a reflux of corrupt 
and filthy blood. Somtimes want of Appetite to meat, is a fore-runner of this dis- 
ease, by reason the Stomachs sympathizing with the Kidneys, Qbserve diligently
when


Chap.28. Of the Kidneys. 69 
when the Stomach is ill, if there be no Disease in the Kidney; for if there be, that’s 
the cause of the Stomachs disorder. 
The Number of the Kidneys is seldom changed, and if there be but one, it cannot 
be known that there is more; neither can that one perform as much as two: and 
therefore those that have but one Kidney, enjoy not their health so wel as they that 
have both. 
Falling down
of the Kidneys.
Although the Kidneys seem fast fixed unto the loyns by the fat, as it were with 
glue; yet do'they somtimes fal out of their place, and I can forward, somtime they 
slip into the belly, not without detriment to the Patients life and health: this is a 
truth not to be questioned. Which comes to pals chiefly, not only by melting the 
fat in which they are wrapped up, but also by their weight, when they are grown 
great, by reason of some tumor or stone contained in their Cavities, that they can 
no longer be kept in their place by such such saies as were wont to hold them. Be- 
ing fallen into the belly, they stay there a while, and at last they purrisie, and impo- 
stumate.
Swelling. 
being in their natural Scituation, if they prove greater, or more weighty than or- 
dinary, they cause kind of numbness in the the thigh, by compressing the Muscle 
Psoa, and the Nerves, which descend into the Thighs, which are conveighed through the 
fleshy parts of the Muscle Psoa.
Stoppage. 
It the inner Passage of the Kidneys be stopped moderately, either by an Humor, 
by a stone, then the parties Urines are thin; or if the Obstruction be total, the 
Urine is wholly supprest.
Ulcer. 
If the inner Substance of the Kidney be exulcerated, the Patient makes urine with 
Matter, or Quittor in it.
Vein opened;
or broke  
If a Vein be opened, or broken, bloody urines are made: and because the Kid- 
neys communicate with the Stomach by the Stomachical Nerves, the Stomach does 
sympathize with them, being sick, and enclined to vomiting.
Action Hurt. 
The Action of the Kidney, is to attract Ser«m, and to separate, and expel the 
same: these things it cannot do, unless it be found and perfect;  and therefore all 
me Diseases aforesaid, may pervert the same Action. The flesh of the Kidneys is 
dul of seeling, but the inward Membrane is very sensible.
Stones bred in
the Kidneys.
Stones are often bred in the Cavity of the Kidneys, either in the pipes, where they 
grow like Coral, or the Basin, where a round stone is formed. If the stone en-
Crease so much as to cause a suppuration in the Kidney, towards the Loyns by a 
deep issue made in this part, the Quittor may be purged forth, and the stone extra- 
cted  otherwise, unless Nature do go before us, and shew us the way, it were a wic- 
ked thing to attempt an Incision of the Kidney, by reason of the thickness, and pro- 
sundity of the the flesh in those parts.
When curable
by incision. 
If the Stone en- 
Consumption
of the Kidneys. 
The Kidneys do somtimes consume away, and cause an universal Consumption 
of the wbol body; which comes either from putrefaction of the Kidneys, or 
through overmuch ejection of Seed or Sperm.
Who most sub-
ject thereunto. 
In new married Couples, and in such as are more wantonly disposed than ordina- 
ry, this Consumption of the Kidneys happens; which would make some man af- 
firm that the matter of Seed, comes from the Kidneys, and that they carry a great 
stroak in the matter of Carnal Imbracements. 
Dropsie from
the Kidneys
weakness.
How to be cured.
Observe, that oftentimes through weakness of the Kidneys, which cannot attract 
the Wheyish Excrement, a dropsie is caused without any fault of the Liver. Nei- 
ther can the most effectual Diurericks open those passages. And therefore our 
chief Care must be to purge those, and the neighboring parts, and by Fomentations, 
lost Faculty of the Kidneys. 
whether or no, may we force in a sharp pointed Iron, to one of the Kidneys, that 
a passage may be made for the Serum, which is dammed up within the greater 
veins in case we cannot purge the same away with Hydragogues, or Water-Pur-
gers? 
Chap.

70 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
Chap. 29. Of the Ureters. 
Their Des- 
cription. 
Substance. 
THe Ureters ate Channels or Conduit Pipes ordained to conveigh the Urine to 
the bladder. 
They consist of a single Membranous substance, which being enclosed in a du- 
plication of the Peritoneum, therefore Anatomists have said, that they borrow 
another Coate of the Peritoneum.
Length.
Scituation. 
They are as long as the Space between the Kidnies and the bladder. 
Resting upon the a Muscle b Psoa, they are obliquely carryed towards the Ossa 
Ilium, and rising up unto the bladder in the bottom thereof, they flip in between 
the two c Coates almost as far as the d Orifice, where they peirce the c bladder. 
They have no Valves placed in their Extremities, to hinder the going back of 
the Urine: but two Membranes meeting together, do exactly shut the Pas- 
sage. 
Wideness.
Naturally they are as thick as Goos-quils, but in such as have the Stone and use 
to void little ones from the Kidney, the hollowness of the Ureters is so 
widened, that they have been seen as thick as a Mans Finger in the diffection of 
dead bodies.
Original. 
The Original of the Ureters is rather from the bladder than from the Kidnies, be- 
cause they are of a Membranous substance. Within the Cavity of the kidnies they are 
divided into nine Pipes, which are fitted to the little fleshy Teates called Caruncule 
Papillares, that they may distil the Serum into the Basin or large Cavity of the 
Ureters, within the Kidnies.
Nerves. 
They are thought to have Nerves whereby they feel; but being of a Membranous 
Nature, their extream pain in the passage of a Stone, proceeds from the strecching 
of the Membrane.
Obstruction. 
Seeing therefore they are ordained to pass the Urine uno the Bladder, they are 
offended with such things as pass through them, whether it be sharp Urine, or pu- 
rulent matter, or a little Stone, or a thick and clammy Humor, by which they are 
obstructed. So chat the most usual Disease of the Ureters is Obstruction.
Stone. 
And if within the duplicature of the Bladder either of them be obstructed, there is 
bred a Stone, which grows by little and little, which is not movable, but remains 
fastned to the Bladder, which when those that Cut out the Stone endeavour to pul 
away, they tear the Bladder. Neither do I think there was any other difference of 
the Bladder in these, in whom a double Cavity was observed, and a Stone lying close 
in the one of them. 
a T. 5. f.I. FF. GG. b T. 10. f. 100 c f. 7. FF, d T. 10. F. 7. D. e T.6
F. 6. cc.
Chap. 30. Of the Piss Bladder. 
Its Substance. 
Coates. 
THe Piss-Bladder, is the Receptacle of Urine; being framed of a Membranous 
substance confiding of two a Coates, The b third which they attribute there- 
unto, is a Duplication of the Peritoneum, within which it lies hid,hanging like a 
Bottel with its bottom upwards, and with this Partition it is severed from the Guts 
and other Parts, only in mankind, least with the weight of the Guts bearing there- 
upon, it should be forced out of its place.
Magnitude. 
Its natural lize is smal when empty, because it is widened and contrcted accor- 
ding to the quantity of the Urine, The efficient Cause of its Contraction, is the
second and external Membrane, which is altogether fleshly, which Fabricius ab A- 
qua Pendente took to be Musculous, and after him Spigeliw, who cals it Muscu- 
lum Detruforem Vesicæ. He might better have called it Expulforem, the Expur 
five Muscle of the Bladder. 
its

Chap. 30. Of the Piss Bladder. 7l
Shape. 
Its shape represents a bottle with the bottom upward, whole bottom is in the 
lower Part of the Hypogastrium, and its Neck lies hid beneath, under the Bones of 
the Pubis.
Number.
The Pils- bladder is but one in Number, yet severed somtimes into two Cavities, 
after c he manner before expressed.
Holes. 
It is perforated with three holes near the Neck. The first and greatest, is that 
out of which the Urine passes; the other two being those by which the Urine comes 
into the Bladder, ace the Ends of the Ureters. 
Its Orifice is shut by the Muscle Sphincter, which is formed of the substance of 
the bladder contracted. There is another Muscle called Externus Spleniatus, as 
broad as two Fingers, which is placed about the Neck of the bladder and the Glan- 
dules or Kerness resting thereupon, ermed a Prostatæ. The power of shutting and 
opening the bladder depends upon this Muscle.
Vessel. 
The Piss-bladder has Veins and Arteries from the b Hypogastrical Vessels; it 
has Nerves in its Neck, from the Os c Sacrum, and in its body from a Nerve of the 
4 fix Pair Which is diligently to be considered in Diseases of the bladder causing 
stoppage of Urine, which proceed from a fall caught upon the Loins or Os 
Sacrum  
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Disease of 
the Bladder.
THe Piss-bladder is subject to an infinite number of Diseases. In its substance 
it is subject to al kind of Distempers, especially hot and cold: it suffers In- 
Inflammation, Tumors, Ulcers, and Passie both in the Neck and whol Body thereof. 
Of which we shall Discourse particularly.
In its Temper. 
Its temper is perverted, when the bladder naturally cold and dry, comes to wax 
hot, and fals into an inflammation.
Scituation.  
Its Scituation is changed, when that Part of the Peritoneum in which it is in- 
cluded is relaxed, whereby it slips a little downe; which causes a difficulty in pissing, 
unless the lower Part of the Belly be lifted up with the Hand. Somtimes by the 
Weight of many little Stones it comes to have an hollow nook, by the side of the 
streight Gut near its Neck, and then the Stones do nestle in that corner, so that they 
cannot be perceived by putting in a Catheter: but the best way to feel them, is by 
putting ones Finger into the Fundament.
Wideness. 
Its greatness or widness cannot certainly be defined unless it were empty; how- 
beit it is enlarged and widened according to the quantity of Urine. But if it be so 
much enlarged as to exceed the natural measure, then the Fibres of the Coates be- 
ing broken or too much flatned, the party cannot make Water, because the fleshy 
Membrane is deprived of that motion, by which the Urine ought to be expelled. 
And in this Case the Water cannot be voided otherwise than by putting in of a Ca- 
theter, which somtimes for a Month or two, must be done twice a day, until the 
Membrane have recovered its ancient tone or contractive Vigour. 
Somtimes the bladder is so contracted and straitned, by reason of a painful exul- 
ceration in its inner Part, and then grows thicker and as it were Cartilaginous; 
which hinders its distention: and in this Case, the Patient must often make Water 
With pain.
Diseases of
the Neck of
the Bladder.
Neck of the bladder comprehending its Orifice or the Channel of Urine, has 
also its Diseases. It is frequently inflamed, swelled Ulcerated, obstructed, and 
is weakned by the Passie, when it can neither be contracted nor relaxed, seeing it 
is thicker and more fleshy than the bottom of the bladder. It is easily inflamed, 
and Fernelius was of Opinion that no other Part of the bladder is subject to inflam- 
mation: from whence proceeds an Ulcer, which is not so hard to Cure, as that 
which happens within the body of the bladder, because injections and convenient 
Candles may be conveighed thereunto. 
How Obstru-
cted.
It is frequently obstructed by the Stone lying hid in the bladder, or by a
fungous 


72 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
fungous body which grows therein. Yea and somtimes beyond the Neck, 
within the bladder, fungous or Spungy carnofities do arise, which do much trouble 
the bladder and fil the same. They arise often from a flux of blood, or a swelling 
Vein, which being opened causes an incurable Issue of blood, which soon causes a 
Gangrene by reason of Clotters of Blood remaining there. 
Spungy Carnosities do grow without the Neck within the Ureter, which are termed 
Hypersarcoses, which are easily Eaten away with Medicinal Wax Candles, made 
and fitted for that purpose. 
Oftentimes they happen in the Passage of the Urine after a Venemous Gonorrhea 
not wel Cured 
Also the Neck of the bladder is obstructed by another external Cause, Namely by 
swelling of the Kernels termed prostatæ, which rest upon the bladder. But the 
Urine is often stopped by a Passie in the Neck of the bladder, so that the Sphincter 
Muscles cannot concract nor dilate themselves. 
The Key of
the Bladder, as
Instrument so
called.  
To open the Bladder and to search out the Diseases which are bred within or 
without the same, a wonderful new Instrument has been invented, which I cal the 
Key of the bladder; its commonly termed a Catherer, and is used by such as Cut 
Men for the Stone, being different from the Antient common Catherer. So long 
as this Instrument can easily be put in, so long there is great Hopes in Diseases of 
the Bladder: but when it will not Penetrate, all Hope is gone.
Bladder per-
foræted.
Peritoneum.
Urine let out
with a Knife. 
In such a Case, either the bladder is perforated in the bottom of the belly by the 
Os Pubis, to let out the Urine, or the Perinæum is opened. But when a Cathe- 
ter with grates in it, upon which the Section is wont to be made, cannot be thrust 
in, to depress the Neck of the bladder which lies hid under th Os Pubis, a smal 
Knife is thrust deep in as far as the bladder sidewaies, until the Urine comes away: 
for so I have often freed many from imminent Peril.
Ease for old
Men that have
the Stone. 
In persons far in years, who are greivously troubled to make Water by reason 
of a great Stone, which cannot be taken out without manifest danger of Death to 
give them some releife in their misery the Perinæum is cut in the same manner as is
used to take out the stone, and the hole is kept open with a little Pipe. So long as the 
Patient can be kept alive, the little Pipe is stopped with a Tent, and a Spunge is 
applied to receive the droppings of the Urine, if any be, until such time as the patient 
must needs make Water, and then the stopple is taken out, and afterwards 
put in again, and thus the cruel pain and continual provocation to piss, is Mitigated in 
such as have the stone.
Ulcer of the 
Bladder clens-ed. 
Also by this means Ulcers of the bladder may be clensed and dried, if there be no 
Stone, to fret upon the Ulcer.
Zecchius his
Vain Brag. 
Zecchius brags in his Counsel, that he invented this way of giving ease to Aged 
persons vexed with the Stone; ? but the Physicians of Paris did use this Pallia- 
tive Cure long before Zecchius was born, it having been practiced this hundred 
years.
The Stone
Suckt out. 
If a Stone in the bladder be little, and stick to the Neck of the bladder or in the 
beginning of the Ureter, it may be drawn forth by a strong and continual sucking of 
the yard, or it may be drawn out by an incision made in the Ureter.
Cut out of the
Bladder. 
If the Stone be great it cannot be taken out but by cutting of the bladder, the 
Infection being made upon the Perineæum, as our Stone-Cutters are wont to do: 
for the way used by the Antients as it is described by Celsus is difficult and danger- 
ous.
The Ægyp-
tion Operation
naught.
And I beleive that kind of operation used in Egypt, when they would take out the 
Stone, is as difficult, which is by blowing up the bladder with a Pare of Bellows. 
For this operation described by Prosper Alpinus, is so absurd, that I doubt the 
truth of the story, because it is exceeding cruel and painful by reason of the ex- 
tream stretching of the bladder, which cannot indure distention, neither in its Neck, 
nor in the Ureter. 
And that of
Hildnus is
naught.
That way which Fabricius Hildamus goes to take out the Stone, is also absurd 
and dangerous. The way used by the Operators of Paris and by some Italians of
the 



Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; &c.
The French
& Italian Way
the best to take
out the Stone. 
the Nursion Family, is the only safe and easie way, by reason of the Instruments 
and of the Industrious Dexterity of the Artists; wherefore I wish other nations 
had such Operators. 
a T. 5. f. I. FF. GG. b T. 10. f. I. OO. c f. 7. FF. d T. 10. f. 7. D.
e T. 6. f. 6. cc.
a T. 5. f. 7. B. and C. b f. 7. AA. c f. 7 BB. d f. 7. B. e f. EE.
f f. 7. D. g T. 6. f. 6. cc.
a T. 6. f. 5. FF. b T. 12.f. I and 4.   c T. 3. 8. o T. 18. f. 50. d t. 8.
f.8.AB
Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; and first of the 
Yard.
genital of 
A Mans Yard
I Proceed to the Genital of a Man, among which, the Yard, which is associated 
with the Piss-bladder because it casts out Urine through the Pipe of the Ure- 
ter, ought in the first place to be explained.
Its Parts 
It is made up only of Skin for thinnes sake, of two hollow Ligaments, of the 
Uretbræ, the Glans or Nut, certain Muscles, Membranous bands, Nerves, Arteries 
and Veins. 
Skin
The Skin is by it self, has no Scarf-skin, and is terminated at the Root of the Nut.
Fore-Skin 
Being loose, it is there doubled in manner of an Head-stal, that it may infold 
the Nut or Head of the Yard and make the Fore-skin, which the Jews and Maho- 
metans do cut off, out of a Religious Ceremony. Such Circumcised Persons can- 
not give that delight to Women in their carnal Embraces, as those can who have the 
Fore-Skin entire. And therefore their Women are better pleased with the carnal 
society of Christians.
Bridle. 
The Fore Skin is tied to the Nut by a little band which is termed Frænulum, 
the bridle: it is extended in the nether Part unto the Orifice of the Nut, in young 
Men that have not had to do with a Narrow-board Virgin.
The Membrane 
The skin being removed, there appeares a Membrane which closly girds in the 
Ligaments of the Yard, which may be a production of the panniculis 
Carnosus.
The Vessels. 
This being taken away, the Vessels are seen which run along the Back of the Yard 
viz Nerves, Veins and Arteries. The Nerves come from the Os Sacrum, the 
Veins and Arteries are portions of those termed Pudenda, which are spred out into 
the external Parts.
The Musles. 
Then follow the Muscles of the Yard, two of which are erectors, and two are 
Ejaculators. The Erectors do arise from the Tuberous Part of the Huckle-bone 
and are sidelong fastened to the Ligaments of the Yard; the Ejaculators springing 
out of the Transverse: Ligament placed between the Huckle-bones, and from a por- 
tion of the Sphincter Muscle, are spread along the Urethra, to prefs the Drops of 
Water or Seed which happen to rest there towards the Orifice of the Blader. 
These Muscles being taken away, three Bodies come to view which form the 
Yard, Viz. Two Ligaments and the Urethra.
The hollow
Ligaments. 
The a hollow Ligaments being disjoined beneath in the perineum, do arise 
from the Protuberancies of the Huckle-bone, and have in their progress, the b Ure- 
thra interjected neer the Os Pubis, being joyned together they make 
a Pendulous Body terminated with the Nut, which is called c Penis, the 
Yard.
Their Internal
Substance. 
In those ligaments we must observe the internal substance which is like the Pith 
of Elder, being Spungy, blackish and bedewed with black Blood, that it may 
encrease and decrease in the Carnal Conjunction, for the erection of the Yard de-
pends upon these Ligaments.
The Urethra
or Piss-Pipe. 
The Urethra or Piss-Pipe, is a Channel of Spongy substance, that it may swel 
and tal with the foresaid Ligaments in the Carnal Conjunction; and therefore it is 
N no 

74 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book. II. 
no continuation of the neck of the bladder, but is only fastened thereunto.
Its Oblisqua-
tion in the Pe-
rineum. 
Observe diligently, the Obliquation, or Reflection of the 
Urethra in the Perinæ- 
um, and how the scituation of the Orifice of the bladder lies hid under the bones of 
the Pubes. 
Impostumated
hard to cure.
In the Perinæum, divers Tumors are raised: but such as adhere to the Urethra, 
and impostumate, are dangerous, often degenerating into Fistulaes, because the 
Urethra wil very hardly heal, and grow together. If it be eaten by a venemous 
and pocky Ulcer, it is not easily cured, and restored, unless by an exact Sudorisick 
Diet, or by fluxing with Mercurial Medicaments. 
The Nut of 
the Yard.
Balanus, f the Nut of the Yard, is an hollowed Kernel, wider in the middle, than 
the largeness of the external Orifice comes to. 
a T. 6. f. 5. M. b f. I. d. f. 5 . L. d f -- I. e f. 5. M. f f. 7.
A. g T. 13. f. 8. oo. T. 18. f. 5.o. h T.12. f. I --- OO. i T. 6. f. I. aa.
f. 5. HH. k f. 5. KK. l bb. f. ll.
a TT. 6. f. 5. KK. b f, 5. GG. c  f. i. c B. c f. 5. GG. f f. 5
M. f. 7. C. g f. 5. infra. M.
The Medicinal Consideration
DiSeases of the 
Whol Yard are, 
Priapisus, 
The Action of the whol Yard, viz. voluntary erection, and stifness, being or- 
dained for carnal Conjunction, if it be unvoluntary, and painful, it is a Disease 
which is called Priapismus.
It is caused by an inflamed disposition of the Ligaments of the Yard, and also of 
the Urethra, or Piss-pipe, which is affected by reason of vicinity, and communi" 
cation in the same Action.
Want of Ere-
ction.  
Weakness, and defect of Erection, is an imbecillity of the whol Yard without 
pain: It arises from a weakness, or a paralytick disposition of the Muscles, of 
Nerves of the Yard.
Crookedness 
Somtimes the whol Yard is bowed, and crooked to one side or another; or ben- 
ded upwards or downwards; which proceeds from a Convulsion of one of the Mus- 
cles, or from a repletion, and induration of the Nervous Ligaments of the Yard. 
Somtimes the Tumor called Ganglion, in the hollow Ligaments, is a cause of this 
Contersion, or crookedness of the Yard: of which Infirmity, Hollerius in his Com- 
ment upon the 63. Aphorism, of Book 5. and Cæjar Arantius in Chap. 50. of his 
Book of Tumors, have treated.
Inflammation
Tumors, and
ulcers 
Furthermore, The whol Yard is subject to Inflamations, Tumors, and ul- 
cers. 
The Yard is but one in Number, for two bad been needless: if we find two, it is 
Monstrous, and they are both usess; or one is but the rudin ent of a Yard, or some 
fleshy Excrescence. 
Too long,
The just, and fitting length of the Yard, ought to be six or eight fingers breadth; 
if it be longer, ’tis inconvenient, and hurts the woman in Carnal Conjunction, and 
must be shortened by a ring of wool put about it. 
If we beleeve Galen, the extraordinary length ofthe Yard hinders Generation, 
because the Seed loseth its vertue in so long a passage; which I do not beleeve.
Too Short  
If the Yard be too short, it causes little, or no titillation, and is unfruitful. 
Fallopius in his Bookde Decoratione, teaches us hew to make the Yard longer.
Martial mentions one that had so large a Yard, that when it stood erected be
could smel to it with his Nose. 
Of the Fore-
skin. 
The Fore-skin has its Diseases somtimes it is too short, and somtimes too
long, and is incommodious. The Jews have it cut off, for which cause they are 
termed Apellæ, that is, skm-less.It it cover the Nut ot the Yard so close that it 
cannot be put back, the Disease is termed Phymosis: If it be depressed to the root
of the Nut, and cannot be drawn upwards, ’tis termed Paraphymosis.
Phymosis
Paraphymosis,

Both 

Chap. 31. Of the Genitals of a Man; &c. 75 
Both these Diseases, if they proceed from servency of Carnal Conjunction, 
whereby the Nut of the Yard remains swelled, if it be for a long time together, so- 
mented with extream cold Water, its swelling wil abate, and then the Fore-skin 
may freely be drawn up or down. An admirable Secret.
Exulcerated, 
It is exulcerated with pocky Pustles; which being cured, if they leave any hard- 
ness behind them, it is a suspicious Argument that the Venom of the Whores Pox, 
does yet lie lurking in the Body. Seeing the Fore-skin is double, when it is cut, 
both the internal, and external Membrane, must be equally cut.
Thickness of
Frænulum. 
The band of the Fore-skin termed Frænulum, if it be more thick than ordinary, 
and goes unto the hole of the Nut, and makes the same crooked, it makes men such 
as Galen cals Hypospadicos; so that they cannot ingender, because they do not cast
their Seed directly into the Womb, liulefs it be cut.
Ulcers of the 
Nut. 
The Nut is subject: to divers Tumors, and Ulcers, both internal and external. In 
its middle, where ’tis hollowed, it is often exulcerated, by reason of a sharp matter 
abiding there, and often putrefying. But in the Whore-masters Pox, it is ful of 
Warts, and deformed; which wares may be eaten off, and eradicated with ponder 
of Savin , but they grow again, if the internal Cause be not removed, by Medicines 
accommodated to cure the Pox. 
The Urethra obstructed. inflamed.
The Urethra, or Piss-pipe, which lies along under the two Ligaments of the 
Yard, has its Diseases. It is obstructed by the stone, which is taken out by Incisi- 
on thereof. It is inflamed, by reason of its Spungy, and blackish substance, like 
the hollow Ligament of the Yard. It oftentimes burns, and is pained by reason of 
the acrimony of the Urine; it is inflamed by the sharpness of a putrid Humor, 
which passes through the same, as in the virulent Gonorrhæa, and then it swels, and 
makes the Yard crooked, and stretches it with the Tentigo like a Rope;  which dis- 
ease they term Gonorrhæa Chordata, the Corded, or Rope-stretched running of 
the Reins.
Ulcerated. 
It is ulcerated by the Acrimony of Quittor, and purulent Matter; and somtimes 
the Ulcer being not well cured, there grows up a spungy superfluous flesh, which 
is termer Carnositas which must be diminished, or eaten away, with Corrosive 
Candles, otherwise it swels so as to shut up that passage, and stop the Urine, not 
Without pain to the Patient.
Hermaphro-
dities. 
To the Urethra, and Cods, belongs that disposition which makes men termed 
Hermaphrodites, when the Testicles are hidden within the Septum of the Perito- 
neum, and the Cod is empty, or open in its middle part, by reason of the Urethra 
being there perforated, seeing the sides of the Cod are like the Lips of the Womb, 
and the Yard is very smal. These things have deceived unskilful Midwives, and 
them judg Children so born to be Females. 
Somtime the Urethra is perforated above the Cod, or neer the Nut of the Yard, 
which is then shut up, and solid, which hinders the right ejaculation of the Seed, 
unless the Urethra be opened, and a little pipe be put in, to make a passage. But 
when the Parties grow into yeers, the heat of the body being augmented, also by vi- 
olent exercise and by plucking the same oftentimes, the Yard comes to be aug- 
mented, and the Stones which lay hid in the Groins, do fal into the Cod, unless it 
be perforated as aforesaid; or the Stones remain in the Groyhs, and often deceive 
Physitians making them to think the Persons are bursten.
A woman is 
never changed
into a man. 
Such Persons having been accounted Women, do at last become Men. Howbeit, 
there never was any Woman turned into a Man, unless she abused her Clytoris, be- 
ing prolonged, or some superfluous Flesh have grown out of her Womb, which 
may have the form and stifness of a Mans Yard, but is no way compounded as a true 
Yard. And therfoie Women are rather delighted with the mutual rubbing of their
bodies one against another, and by the lying of the one upon the other than by the 
titilation, and unprofitable intrusion of those Parts. 
N 2 Chap.

76 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
Chap. 32. Of the Groyns. 
Things to be 
observed. 
Crural Vessels. 
Process of Pe- 
ritonæum. 
BEfore we proceed unto the Stones, we are to take notice of the Groyns; in 
which are to be seen, the Crural a Vein, and b Artery, with the c Nerves des- 
cending into the Thigh, whereupon does rest the Production of the d Peritoneum, 
drawn through the holes of the oblique Tendons, and transverse Muscles.
Muscle Cre-
master. 
Over this is spread the Muscle e Cremaster, being carried athwart through the 
Groyn into the Cod, and so unto the Testicle, which it encloles with two Coats; 
the one whereof is called f Erythrois, and the other g Elythrosis. 
Kernels.
Above the bending of the Groyn, you may see those Glandules, or Kernels, which 
lie clole to the process of the Peritoneum: below the Groyn, neer the Vessels, you 
may see other Glandules, or Kernels, bordering upon the Vessels. 
Supermatick
Vessels.
Within the Process are contained, Vas h Spermaticum, the Spermatick Vessel, 
which carries matter to make Seed of, unto the Testicle and another i Speamtick 
Vessel returning from above, and carrying the Seed from the T esticle, to the Seed- 
k bladders.
Descent of the 
Gut Ileum. 
In the Groyn, within the Process of the Peritoneum, descends the Gut 
l lleon, the inward Coat of the Peritoneum being relaxed.
If it descend into the Cod, the said coat is broken, and the descent of the Gut is 
to be observed through the holes of the Tendons, which are interchangably disposed, 
left in reducing the Gut by Chyrurigcal Operation, it come to be placed among the 
Combinations of Nerves for the hole of the last Tendon ought to be cut in sun- 
der, that the Gut may be reduced into the Cavity of the Belly in which work, ma- 
ny of the very skilfullest Ghyrurgeons have erred, to the loss of their Patients 
Lives. 
Buboes.
Note that among the Kernels above the Groyn, do arise the Whore-pock buboes 
or Swellings: among the Glandules, or Kernels, below the Groyn, pestilential swel- 
lings do arise; ordinary swellings do arise a little higher. 
Here you shal consider whether it be safe to use that prick, or Thread of Gold of 
Lead about the Production of the Peritoneum, that the process which in the Rup- 
ture called Oscheocele, is broken, may be drawn together: or a Caustick to produce 
an Eschar, may be applied above the Groyn, to produce a Callous, or hard substance, 
which may stop the passage of the falling Gut. But care must be taken that the 
Caustick pierce not to the Vessels which lie beneath, Viz. The Veins and Arteries, 
which being touched, the Patient dies for it.
Insensible
gelding. 
The Seminal Vessels may be feared, and so a man become invisibly gelded, be- 
cause the Stones wanting their nourishment, do consume, and lose their Vigor* 
But I see on every side, great difficulties in thele kijnd of Operations, which I ;judg 
to be dangerous and therefore I conceive the belt way is, to let them alone. 
a T. 24. f. 4. AA. b f. 5. AA. c T. 18. f. 5. KLMN. d T. 2. f. 9. EE
e T. 6. f. 2. DD. f f. T. 6. f. 2. g f. 2. CC EE.h T. 6. f.I. A. f. 3. and
4. AA. i f. I. V V. f. 3. CCE f. 3. CCD. f. 5. CC. k f. 5. and 6. EE.
i T. 3. f. 4. HH. 
Chap. 33. Of the Fundament. 
Order of Se- 
ction. 
AT the same time, when the Cod is diffected, in the Order of Anatomy, by rea- 
son of Neighbor-hood, the Fundament is to be diffected, and demonstra- 
ted.  
Its Name.
The Fundament therefore, called .Anus,and Podex, is the outermost end of the 
a Intestinum rectum, or streight Gut, which is shut, and pursed together by a 
b round Muscle, called Sphincter.
It is two-fold; the one is skinny, and narrow, the other is broader, and more 
fleshy, which adheres to a transvere Ligament, which is placed between the Pro-
tuberances 

Chap. 34. Of the Cod, and Stones. 
tuberances of the Huckle-bone, and tire extremity of the Coccyx, or Crupper- 
bone.
Muscles.  
The Fundament has four Muscles, called Levatores; two of which are broad, 
and two narrow; The broad do arise from the c Os Sacrum, and Os Ilium, and 
are inserted into the larger Sphincter: As for the other two, the former arises from 
the transverse Ligament, the hindermost from the Crupper-bone, whereinto they are 
terminated.
Their Use. 
These four Muscles do relieve, and raise up the Fundament when it pouches 
forwards, and is ready to fal out in the expelling of Excrements which are more 
hard and sollid than ordinary. The Circular Muscles do shut, and contract the 
Fundament, left our Excrements should come away against our wils: for by means 
of these Muscles, we may cake our own time, and regulate this kind of Evacution 
according to our own pleasures.
a T. 3. f. 7. M. b T. 3. f. 7. O. c T. 3. f. 7. NN.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Its diseases. 
The Fundament is liable to very many Diseases. 
Tenesmus.
It is sommtimes possessed with 
an hot distemper, with a troublesom, and almost intollerable itching, which cau- 
ses a continual desire of going to stool, which is called Tenesmus.
Falling Out. 
In the Expulsion of the Dung, somtimes the Fundament fals out, which is redu- 
ced into its place with extream trouble and difficulty.
Palsie.
Somtimes it is palsied, and the Excrements come away whether the Patient wil or 
no: and somtimes it is so straitened, that a man can hardly void his Excrements.
Hemorhoids. 
Within, and without it swels, the mouths of the Veins being swollen and knob- 
bed which are called Hæimorrhoides, both internal, and external.
Inflamation. 
Somtime ’tis inflamed, but it is more often impostumated, from whence pro- 
Ceeds an hollow Ulcer, termed Fistula Ani.
Warts. 
It is made rough with Warts, which are called, Condylomata, or Mariscæ. 
Clifts
It 
is exulcerated with smal Clifts, which are called Rhagades. It may safely be cut, 
according to Hippocrates, after any fashion, without hurting the Sphincter. Fi- 
nally, ’tis troubled with al kinds of Diseases.
Scirrhous 
tumor.
Somtime it has a Scirrhous Tumor, which shuts up the passage of the Excrements, 
and causes a difficulty in pissing, by reason of the neer neighborhood of the Arse- 
Gut, and the Neck of the Bladder; which Parts do communicate their Infirmities 
one to the other.
Closed up. 
It is somtimes found closed up in new-born Infants, and it is cut open: but if 
the Gut be found sollid, having no Cavity, there is no way but death.
The Cods,
their coats.   
Chap. 34. Of the Cod 1; and Stones. 
WE are now come unto the a Cod, which is the Case of the Stones. It con- 
sists of two Skins, the outermost being b  Cuticular, and grown with hair in 
such as are ripe  yeers; it has the Epidermis, or Scarf-skin upon it. Under the 
hairy Skin, there is a fleshy Membrane which called Dartos; it is a Continuation 
of the Membrana. Carnosa of the Belly, stretched down unto the Cod; by help 
whereof the Cod is widened, or contracted into wrinkles. 
Cavities.
For the Stones sake, it 
is by a Membranous Portion divided into two Cavities, which receive the two 
stones.
Vessels.
The Cod has Veins and Arteries from the Privy Parts, and Nerves from the Os 
Sacrum.
The Stones,
their codes
A stone, or Testicle, is a Glandulous, or Kernellish Body, ordained to make 
Seed. It is Compounded of many parts, of which, the first are three proper Mem- 
branes, for each stone has two common ones, viz. the Cutis, and Dartos. The 
The first of the three proper Membranes, is called Erythroides, which has its Original 
from

78 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
from an expansion, or widening of the Muscle Cremaster, which holds up the 
Stone. 
The Second is the f Production of the Peritoneum, which infolds the Testicle. 
The Third immediately infolds the substance of the Testicle, and is called g Ner- 
vea, the Nervous Membrane.
Substance.
Epididymis.
Sperm Carrier.
Ejaculator 
The Membranes being taken away, the Substance of the Testicle comes in sight, 
which is h glandulous, white, pretty firm; and upon the same, overthwart, is pla- 
ced a smal body like a Silk-worm, which is called a Epididymis to the one end 
whereof, there cleaves Vas Spermaticunm b deferens, the carrying Spermatick Ves- 
sel, which enters into the substance of the Testicle, and empties the Seminal matter 
thereinto: From the ocher end of the Epididymis, arises the Vas c Ejaculatorium, 
the Ejaculatory Vessel, which in its beginning, is d ful of turnings and windings, as is 
the Body of the Epididymis, and firmly cleaves unto the Testicle by its ends, being 
loose, and separate in its middle.
Scituation.
Figure.
Action. 
The Testicles are excluded from the Cavity of the Belly, being placed in the 
Cods. They are about the bigness of a Pigeons, or yong Pullets Egg. They are 
of an Oval shape, and their work, is to elaborate the Seed. 
Medicinal Consideration. 
Diseases of 
the Cods. 
The Natural Constitution of the Cod, and Stones, being explained, let us now
examine the Preternatural disorder thereof The Cod is apt to be swelled with 
divers fluxions, which flow either immediately into it, or into the Stones.
Oscheocele. 
If the Gut fal into the Cod, or into the Cal, it makes that kind of Rupture which 
is called Oscheocele.
Hydrocele. 
If water or wind flow from the Cavity of the belly, into the Cod, they make 
those Ruptures which are termed Hydrocele, and Pneumatocele.
Cirsocele 
If in the Spermatick Vessels, both Deferent, and Jaculatory, where they are ful 
of turnings and windings neer the Stones, thick blood be intercepted, it breeds a tu- 
mor, which is called Circocele.
Sarcocele. 
If Spongy flesh breed, and grow to the Membrane called Dartos, it is termed
Sarcocele. 
If the Testicle adhere to the said spongy flesh, it has the same name. 
If the Stone swel, and exceed its natural bulk, it causes a swelling in the Cod.
Pneumatocele. 
If wind or water insinuate themselves into the Membranes of the Testices, they 
produce those Tumors which are called Hydrocele, and Pneumatocele Testiculo- 
rum, which are familiar to Children.
Inflamation.
Moreover, The Cod is inflamed, overrmuch widened, or conrtacted; both 
which dispositions, are inconvenient, and hindersom to life and Generation.
Rhagosis 
The Laxity thereof, is termed Rhagosis Howbeit, it is naturally more lax on 
the left side, whether by reason of the weight of the left Testicle, or by reason of
the weakness, and coldness of the left side. 
Diseases of
the Stones in
Scituation. 
The Stones are faulty in point of Scituation, while they lie out of sight in the bel- 
ly, or when they are in the Groyns. By reason of the former Scituation, in que- 
stions of Divorce, men are pronounced impotent, though strong otherwise, because
the Stones are hot in their Natural place. 
Number
By reason of il Conformation in the Womb, they are faulty in point of number, 
When there is but one, or when there are three, as in those who are called Triorches,
who are by some thought to be very lecherous; which fault goes in some Families 
from Father to Son, and therefore it is a Disease.
Figure. 
They are faulty in shape, when they are uneven, by reason of the swelling, re- 
laxation, or divulsion of the Epididymis.
Color. 
Greatneß
If there be a fault in the Color, there is a fault in the Substance, which ought to 
be pretty soliid; when it is over-flaggy, and soft, it is faulty. If the Stones exceed 
the greatness of an Hens Egg, they are never the better, because they are liable to 
fluxions: and being swollen, Or altered in their temper, they cannot rightly per-
form 


Chap. 35. Of the Vessels which carry the true Seed, &c. 79
form their Office: if they are smal as Hazel Nuts, they have no power to en- 
gender.
Their Action 
Now the Aftion of the Testicles is to elaborate the Seed by their inbred virtue 
implanted in them to that end: wherefore they receive the feminal matter, and when 
it is sufficiently prepared, that is to say when it is impregnated with the Generative 
Spirit, they transmit the same into the Jaculatory Vesels, and the Jaculatory Ves- 
sels carry it into the Seminary Bladders. 
a T. 6. f. I. xx. b f. 2. AA. c f. 2. BB. d f. 3. D. e f. 2. DD. f f. 2
CC. EE. g f. 2. FF. h f. 2. G.
a T. 6. f. 2. II. f. 3. and 4. BB. b f. I. TT. f. 3. and 4. AA. c f. I. V V.
f. 3. E. f. 4. DD. d f. I. cc. f. 3. and 4. ccc.
Chap. 35. Of the Vessels which carry the true Seed to the 
Seed=Bladders and the Prostatæ or Auriliaries. 
IT remaines now that we Speak of the Vessels which carry the Seed to the Blad- 
der, and of the a Prostatæ or Assistants. 
Ejaculatory vessels.
That same b carrying Vessel which is 
called Ejaculatorium, and takes its original from the Epididymis, is in its Rise 
very ful of windings and wrinckled.
Why Wrinkled 
Those Wrinkles being smoothed out do make the Vessel twice as long as before.
How the Seed
is voided. 
Those Wrinkles are made to retain the most subtile Spine of Generation, which 
breakes forth violently in the act of Generation with a thin subtile and spirituous 
Matter, which is mixed with that same other Excrementicious Seminal matter, 
which is concerned in the little d Seed-Bladders, so that they flow both together 
into the c Urethra or Piss-Pipe.
And as in the Act of Generation that same most thin and pure Spirit leaps forcibly 
with the matter out of the Testicles: so by help of the f Muscles of the Yard, the 
Seminal matter which is conteined in the littlie bladders is also cast forth.
Matter of the
seed threefold.
For I make account that their is a three-fold Seminal matter, one most pure, 
which is made and kept in the Stone;  the other is Superfluous and Excrementici-  
ous, yet of use for the forming of the Conception, Which is thrust away by the 
Stones and sldes leasurly into the little Seed-bladders: for it is not probable that the 
most pure Seminal matter and the Spirit which is the Auther of Generation, should 
be conteined amids the Nastyness of the Dung and Urine. 
The third Seminal matter, is an Oyly Substance, which leasurely dropping out, 
does moisten the a Urethra or Piss-Pipe in Men and the b Sheath or the Womb in
Women; it also it comes away by it self when the Yard is distended through lust, and in 
strong imaginations of the matters tending to Generation and somtimes at the night 
of a beautyful Woman. 
It is a Question whether this Only substance do flow out of the little Seed- 
Bladders or from the c Glandules of the Prostatæ, which contein in them a 
Seminal matter, which is sent forth through smal pores beneath the Knob of the
Urethra. 
The Matter which is conteined in the little Bladders, is forcibly cast out by 
way of Ejaculation or Squirting, through the holes which are near the foresaid 
Knobby wart or the Urethra.
Whence the
Texture of
Veins among
the Seed-Bla-
ders- 
Before the little Bladders be removed, you shal observe, how they are covered 
round about and hidden under a Multitude of little Veins scattered round about 
them. Wether they be Veins or Arteries, what they serve for is not yet certainly  
known Whether to supply matter to those Parts viz. The Seed-bladders, that it may  
be thence transmitted to those Protastæ to be further Elaborated?  
Touching this wonderful Intertexture of Vessels, we can as yet determine no- 
thing.
The seat of a
Virulent Go-
norrhea.
In the Prostatæ and in the Seed-Bladders, is the seat of the venemous Gonorrea: 
which it be unseasonably stopped, the venom is communicated to the whol body,
or


80 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
or flowes back into the stones and causes a Tumor in them: or if it extend so far as 
the Perineum, unless it be naturly repelled, it causes an Impostum and cares  in- 
to the Urethra or Piss-Pipe. 
what vein to be opened on the cure thereof.
You shal do wel to consider whether it be safe in a virulent Gonorrhea, to open 
a Vein in the Arm, if the arder in these places be light and without a Feaver? In my 
opinion it is better to take blood from the Foot, because the Saphena takes 
its rise near the Groin, and bestowes two branches upon those Parts, and 
therefore large bleeding in the Foot, when the Buboes break out, does powerfully 
revel. 
Few or none except Julianus a Palmarius Physitian of Par is and Fallopius 
an Italian, are for Blood-letting in the Arm in such Cases, for it is held unsafe, for 
fear of the Whores-Pocks, by reflux of the venemous Humor into the bowels 
and habit of the Body.  
a T. 6.f. 5. FF. f. 6. GG. b T. 6. f. I. V V. f. 3. E. f. 4. D. c f. 3. and 4.
cc. f. 5. C. d T. 6. f. 5. and 6. EE. e f.5. KK. f f. I. aa. bb. j. 5. HH. II.
a T. 6. f. 5. KK.b T.7. f. 2. y. c T. 6. f. 6. j. 5. FF. f. 6. GG. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Diseases of 
these Parts are, 
Distempers. 
The Diseases of those Seed-Vessels, Seed-Bladders and of the Auniliary Glan- 
dules or Proftatæ, are, an hot or cold Distemper, which cause a corruption of the 
Seminal matter, either from an internal or an external Cause.
Laxite whence 
Gonorrhea 
Also the Laxity of those Parts causes an involentary shedding of the Seed, which 
is called a Simple or single Gonorrhea: or when it is with pain and instant action, be- 
ing caused by infection of a Pocky Whore it is called Gonorrhea Virulenta, the 
venemous Gonorrhea. 
The flux of Seed which happens to some in their sleep is called Oxynorrigmos, 
it comes from the aboundance of hot and Spirituous Seed.
The oyly Sub-
stance how
needful.
The Oyly subdance is exceeding needful, for in Men through want of the said Hu- 
mor, either the sharpness of Urine hurts the Urethra or Piss-Pipe, or it cannot 
freely pass, neither can the Seed be forcibly cast out, as Galen hints and I have 
known in many, who were cured with a liberal moistening Diet, a Bath to fit in, 
and Oyl of sweet Almonds, Squirted into the urethra with a Syringe. With the 
same Humor the Womans sheath is moistened in such asare lustful, and it drops 
away by it self without the Ejaculation of Seed. 
Action hurt whence barren-ness
The Action of the Yard, is not to transmit the Urine, but to Ejaculte or Squirt 
the Seed into the Womb of the Woman. If it cannot perform that Office it causes 
Barrenness, which depends either upon the Yard, by reason of the Ligaments which 
cannot be blown up so as to raise the Yard; or because of the weakness or Palsie 
of the Muscles of the Yard: or upon the Ssones being colder  then they ought to be, 
or being too Flaggy, or less or greater then is usual: or upon the ill shapeing of the 
Spermatick Vessels, as in case the Arteries be wanting; or upon the defect or faul- 
tines of the matter. If the Man be Sickly or the Women have not her health, 
Cause of Barrenness is attribted to an evil disposition or the whol Body: 
makes that fitting and convenient matter to make Seed of, Cannot be from thence
supplied to the genital Parts. 
Neither is fruitfulness and Conception to be expected, unless the Man and Wo- 
man be restored to perfect health, and unless the fault of the Genitals (if there be 
any) be amended,  
Chap. 36. Of the genital Parts of a Woman and first of the External. 
External Ge-
nital Parts. 
,mtal Pam. 
THe Genital parts of a Woman are divided into the external and internal.
The 
internal prepar Seed, or somwhat like seed, and aford place for the Conception.
The 

Chap. 36. Of the Genital Parts of a Woman, &c. 81
The External Parts are visible and must be viewed before we come to Section. Let 
Us therefore stay a whii in the porch, before we pass into that sacred Cave or Closet 
of the Womb. 
Pubis.
Cumnus
I conceive the
Term Cunnus
Derive from
the Greek Con-
nos a beard,
does properly
signifie the Hair
about the Fe-
male Privity &
not the Orifice
it self, but only
by a Metommy
of the Adjunct
for the subject.
Caruncule
Myrtiformes.
That outward Part which is adorned with Hair is called Pubis the Share: that 
Passage which is shut with two Valves or folding Doors (whence the name Vulva) 
is called in Latin Cunnm, in English the Cunny, or Water-Gate. The Valves 
are termed Labra Cunni, che b Lips of the Cunny, or the Doors of the Watergate. 
These Lips being drawn aside, the c Nymphæ come in fight, which are pretty firm 
Membranous excrescences, broader towards the top. At the top of the Nytmphes 
we meet with a little fleshy Knob, covered with a thin Skin, which is called d Clitoris. 
The Nymphæ being drawn asunder, the Carunculæ c Myrtiformes [that is smal 
portions of flesh like Myrtle-berries] come to be seen, whereof two are lateral, 
seated on each side, the third lies beneath toward the Fundament, and the fourth is 
alwaies placed at che extremity of the Urethra or piss-pipe. 
In Virgins, the Lips are, strairer then in other Females, and when their Thighs 
are opened wide,they appear stretched or bent. The inferior Membrane of che Nym- 
phes is also in Virgins bent and stretched out; but in their defloration 
and by frequent carnal conjunction, it is depressed: those Connexions are wholly 
Obliterated in Women which have brougth forth Children. 
Neck of the
Womb. 
And these Parts may be seen in those which are living. And if you shal thrust 
your Finger into a Womans a sheach or Scabberd [that is the Neck of her Womb]  
Vpu wil feel it b Wrinkled, and if you carry your Finger higher, you wil find the 
c inmost Orifice of the Womb, for so far a long Finger is able to reach. All that 
space is called Collumd Uteri, the Neck of the Womb or the Sheath of the Mans 
Yard, because it receives the Yard like a sheach or Scabbard, in the Act of Genera- 
tion. 
Hymen 
In Virgins, after the Nymphes we meet with a Membrane or thin Skin drawn be- 
fore the Orifice, peirced through with a very little hole. This Membrane is called 
c Hymen. It'this be found, we find no Carunculæ Myrtiformes, if this be not 
found, those Myrtle formed final portions of flesh, are so swelled, that they fil the 
whol Orifice or passage into the Womb, so that you can Scarse put in your little 
Finger, without paining the party: so great is the narrowness of this passage, by 
reason of the foresaid Caruncles or Myrtle-Shap’d fleshy Excrescences, being united 
together by certain Membranes 
It is to be observed, that those Myrtle-shap'd little bitts of flesh, are wholly 
obliterated in Child-birth and not to be seen, until the external Orifice of the Womb 
begin to contract it self again and to grow strair; which argues that they are nothing 
but plaites or Fouldings-in of this Orifice; which are unfolded and stretched or 
smoothed in the time of Travail, that the Child may more freely come forth; even 
as the Neck of the Womb is very thick, that it may be the more easily widened in 
the Birth. Hence I conjecture and conclude, that these Caruncuæ may more fit- 
ly be termed Carnositates and Plicaturos Orificii externi, certain fleshynesses and 
foldings of the external Orifice of the Womb.
Lips of the
Womb. 
These things being thus observed, we must proceed to dissection, that the structure 
of these Parts may be discovered. The f Lips of the Womb are made up of the Cu- 
ticula or Scarf-Skin and the Skin on which the Haires grow, and they have under- 
neath Fat and a fleshy Membrane which seemes to be of the Nature of a Muscle. It 
seems to be spred in that place, that it may serve to draw the Lips together; but in- 
asmuch as lt reaches into the Clitoris, it does in some sort resemble the Muscles of a 
Mans Yard. Yet those in the Clitoris are different from the other. 
Those who have their Privity plumpe and Pappy, and the Lips thereof thick, the 
motion of their Muscles is very smal and hard to be discerned.
The Nympha 
The Nympha a in young Women is soft, but as they grow in Years and by fre- 
quent Copulation, it is hardened and becomes almost like a Gristle. It is a pro- 
duction of the skin of the Lips, or by Nature so made and there placed, to direct 
the stream of the Urine.
O b Clitoris

82 The Phsical Consideration and AnatomyBook II. 
The Clitoris. 
B Clitoris being the seat of Lasciviousness and Lust in Women that delight in 
mutual constrictions, is termed Tentigo, or the Womans Yard. It is made up of 
two Nervous Ligaments, not at al hollow as thole of the Mans Yard; they proceed 
from the Tuberous or bunching Part of the Huckle-bone, and when they are come 
so far as where the bones of the Pubes are joyned together, they receive another 
body placed between them, which is white, and being joyned together they make 
up the Clitoris, which imitates a Mans Yard, as the Brests of Men have a resem- 
blance to Womens Dugs. 
The Ligaments of the Clitoris have Muscles fastned unto them, as in Men pro- 
ceeding from the same place as those in Men, and the are covered with Skin, and 
that Skin in the extremity or end thereof is folded back, like a Mans Fore-Skin 
Not without cause therefore is this Part called the Womans Yard or Prick. 
The Wombs 
Ligaments.
The round c Ligaments of the Womb do reach unto this Part: whence it comes to 
pass that the Clitoris being rubbed with the hand, the ends of those Ligaments are 
iikewise chafed and heated, and the Tickling is extended as far as the Womb and 
Testicles, whence they arise and through which they have passage. 
Those Ligaments of the Womb are somwhat hollow, as far as to the Groines, 
whence it comes to passe that a virulent matter being from the Genitals expelled hi- 
ther, does breed Pockie Buboes or Swellings, and other Tumors which are not at al 
Malignant. 
The Sheath is Compounded or made up of two Coates: the one is internal and 
Membranous, the other is external and altogether fleshly, like a Muscle, that it may 
open and contract it selfe, and in the Act of Generation Squeeze and Milk the mans 
Yard. But the inner Coat is wrinkled, like the Roote of an Oxes Mouth. 
a T. 7. f. 5. FF. b f. 5. BB. c f. 5. CC. d f. 4. II. Kf.5. A. e f. 5.
D. EE.
a T. 7. f. 2. Y. b T. 7. f. 3. EE c T. 7. f. 3. D. d T. 7. f. 2. Y. f. 3.
EE. e T. 7. f. 7. A. f. T. 7. f. 5. BB.
a T. 7. f. 5. CC b T. 7. f. 4. II. K. f. 5. A c T. 7. f. 2. SS. f. 3. and 4.
FF.
a T. 7. f. 2. Y. f. 3. EE. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Common Dis- 
ease of these 
Parts. 
Closure 
Having diligently surveyed these Parts, you shal now consider the Disease 
which are wont to happen upon them. And in the first place the external Orifice 
or passage into the Womb, is somtimes naturally shut up, the Lips being closed to-
gether. This often happness in Girles newly borne, but this closure is more 
frequently found to be in the Nymphes; or instead of the Myrtle-shap'd Carnofities,
we meet with the fleshy and unboared. Somtime after hard labour 
Child-birth these Parts being some do grow to one another This natural grow- 
ing together of those Parts Children must be separated, and so it must in Women 
when it comes by accident. 
I have seen some women conceive notwithstanding this growing together, there 
being a little hole left for the Seed to enter at, being eagerly attracted by the hungry
womb. When the time ot theirdelivery was come, by reason of much moisture flow- 
ing unto thole Parts, this closure did of it self open. Maides and women that are thus 
closed up, are termed in Greek Atretæ imperforated persons, such as are unboared 
or unbroached.
Laxity. 
Somtimes the wideness and openness of these Parts is so great that it proves 
loathsome and hurtful to Women. Namely such as have undergone hard Labor in
Child-Birth; so that it is needful to straiten the same with Medicaments. 
Somtimes in Women that have never had Children, by Reason of 
carnal Conjunctions, these Parts are so opened and widened, that they seek to 
Physitians, that they may recover their former straitness, and so bring their Hogs  
to

Chap. 37. Of the Internal Parts of a Woman &c. 83 
to a better Market. Howbeit, Virginity lost cannot be repaired, it may be couter- 
feited by Art, but it is not the Part of an honest Physitian to teach those Arts: it 
belongs only to Adulterers and Bawds, or such as get their living by prostitution of 
the Bodies of yong Women.
Peculiar Dis-
eases of the
Lips 
Furthermore, the Lips have their peculiar Diseases, they are Inflamed, Swelled, 
Ulcerated from a common or extraordinary Cause viz. The Whores-Pocks. 
Also they are subject on their inner side to Warts, Pushes termed Thymi, resem- 
bling the Color of Flowers of Time, and certain smal Tumors called Condylo- 
mata resembling the Joynts of a Mans Fingers.
Of the Nymphs  
The Nymphoe in some Women, yea and in some nations do grow to such a 
filthy greatness, that they hang without the Lips, and then they must be cut. 
They are made ruff with pustles or pushes, but more often defiled and made ugly 
with the foresaid Thymi, Warts and Ulcers springing from the Whoremasters 
Pocks.
Of the Clitoris 
The Clitoris is somtimes exceeding long, resembling a Mans Yard: it is then 
termed Cercosis, Caudatio, the Long-Taile Disease; so that some Women do 
abuse that Part one with another when it is longer and thicker than ordinary. Such 
ate those which are termed Hermaphrodites or Rubsters: for it was never known, 
neither is it posible, that a Woman should be turned or transformed into a Man. 
But a Man being at his Birth reputed for a Woman, as aforesaid, by the coming 
forth of his Genital Parts, may be turned into a Man, that is to say, be acknowledg- 
ed for such. 
Of the Sheath.
Somtimes within the Sheath there hangs a fleshy Excrescence which rea-  
sons as far as the Lips and farther, very deformed and troublesome, and somwhat 
like a Mans Yard. It is rooted near the inner Orifice of the Womb, or it rises from 
the sides of the sheath, far within. It must be cut up by the Roots, or else it wil 
grow again, being a great trouble to marryed Women, because it hinders the en- 
hance of a Mans Yard, in the carnal Embracement.
Of the Car-
uncles.  
Near the Carucles or Carnofities before mentioned, there appeares within, a 
vein, two or three, which are pretty ful, and drop Blood out like the Hæmorrhoides, 
and are somtimes exulcerated, and may degenerate into Malignant Ulcers, unless 
they be wel looked to.
An Ulcer. 
Within the Sheath, in the upper Part, in the very Orifice of the Womb, a Ma- 
lignant Scirrhous Tumor is bred, which at last degenerates into a Cancerous Ulcer. 
A sad and miserable Disease, if it arise through fault of the Womb and other Parts of 
the Body. If the said Ulcer proceed from the Whoremasters-Pocks, as oftentimes 
it fals out| it is curable, provided the foresaid Orifice be not wholly eaten up, and 
that the Ulcer have not crept into the inner Parts of the Womb. That may be per- 
ceived not only by the Instument called speculum Matricis, with which we look 
into the Womb, but also by putting up of a bodies Finger. 
Of the Sheath. 
Of the car- 
uncles. 
An Ulcer. 
Chap. 37. Of the internal Parts of a Woman which serve 
for generation. 
The way of
Shewing these
Parts. 
THe external Parts being diligently viewed and accurately dissected, the Parts 
of the Fundament come next to be cut up: and then the Symphysis or grow-  
ing together of the bones of the pubis being discovered, the Gristle placed between 
the bones, must be cut asunder with a very sharp Pen-Knife, that the Thighs may 
be more easily displayed, and that their may be room enough made to handle the 
internalParts.
Internal Parts 
The internal Parts may be divided into those which make up or belong unto the 
Body of the Womb and those which prepare the Seminal matter. We must begin
with latter. 
Vasa Deferentia.
The Vasa Spermatica deferentia, that is, the a carrying Spermatick Ves- 
sels are made up, like those in Men, Of the Spermatick b Veine and the Spermatick
O 2   c Arterie. 


84 The Physical Consideration, and Amtomy Book II. 
c Artery, They have the same Rise in Women as in Men. Herein only they dif- 
fer, that they are not so straitly united, nor with so many turnings, as to make a 
broad d Parastrata, which is not in Women, 
They are divided into three Parts, whereof one is carryed into the Stones; the 
other to the Bottom of the Womb: and the third Creeps along to the beginning of 
the Sheath. 
a T. 7. f. I. ab. b T. 7. f. 2. IM. c t.7. f. 2. KL. d T. 6. f. 3. and 4. AA. T. 7. f. 2. cc. 
Testicles, 
The Testicles in a Women are otherwise framed than in Men: they have no 
Epididymis have but one Coat; their substance is soft, made up of little Bladders, 
wherein is contained a Wheyish substance, which is wont to spitt out upon the face 
of the diffector, if he take not heed. 
Such a structure of the Testicles in women and such a conformation of their Sper- 
matick Vessels, made Aristotle to doubt and others of his followers, whether the 
Female Sex were Prolifick and afforded Seed to the making of the infant, as well as 
the Male, as Galen after Hippocrates, maintaines they do. 
Horns of the
Womb.
From the Body of the Testicle the same Spermatick b Vessels preparatory are 
carryed to the bottom of the c womb and to the d Hornes or Trumpets of the 
womb, which Vessels are far different from those in Men.
Its Ligaments. 
These things thus observed, let us take a View of the Body of the womb with the 
external Parts thereof. Out of it there arises in its upper Part, the Hornes and 
four Ligaments, two broad and c Membranous, which are productions of the 
Peritonæum They are stretched out in Virgins and women that have not bore 
Children, resembling the displaid wings of Bats or Flitter-Mice. They hold the 
Womb that it fal not down. 
The other two Ligaments are round 8c somwhat f longish, which arise from the bot- 
tome of the womb near the Hornes. In their Rise they are hollow, and in their 
progress as far as the Ossa Pubis we find them hollowed. 
When they are come as far as the Clitoris, they are cloven and spred forth in 
the shape of a Goose-foot through al the fore part of the Thigh. I was the first 
that made discovery of that same Cavity and of the formerly unknown use of these 
Ligaments. According to the Opinion of the Ancient and latter Anatomists, they 
keep the womb from ascending upwards: but without these Ligaments, the wonb 
cannot ascend, unlefs it should pluck away the Sheath and the Privities, which are 
continuations of the body of the womb. 
a T. 7. f. 2. oo. f. 4. AC. b f. 2. dd. f. 4. bb. c f. 2. R. f. 2. 4. E. f. 3. A. d. f. 2.
QQ. f. 4. DD. e f. 2. PP. f f. 2. SS. f. 3. and 4. FF.   
The Horn a of the womb being sistulous or hollowish, is observed in the lower 
Part thereof to be torne and jagged, as if the Rats had gnaw’d it: it conteins within 
it, a certain hard and round texture, which resembles the substance of the Jacula- 
tory Vessels in Men, and White Seed is there preserved and found. 
The Wombs.
Substance.
Coat.
Having observed these things, you shal proceed to the body of the 
the Substance whereof is fleshy and Syungy, and as thick as a mans Finger. It is  
Cloathed with a Membranous Coat, whether it be proper or received from the 
peritonæum.
Temper
Scituation. 
The womb is of an hot and moist Complexion: it is Scituated in the lower b Part  
of the Belly, beneath the Navel, just in the middle betwen the c Intestinum 
Rectum or Arse-Gut and the d Piss-Bladder.
Greatness.  
In Virgins until they have their Courses it is little and hard, after they have had 
their Courses, it grows softer; in women which have had Children it is greater and 
thicker.
Shape.
It is shaped like a smal Gourd, a Pear or a Cupping-Glass. 
Number.
It is one in number and no more, yet somtimes divided into two Cavities by a 
Partition in the middle, which is the Cause that some women bring forth two 
three Children at a Birth. 
The


Chap. 27. Of the Internal Parts of a Woman, &c 85 
Cavity.
The Cavity of the c Womb in Virgins and in those which have never conceived, 
is so smal as to contain only a pease or a very little bean; In such as have born 
Children, it is larger.
Action.
The Action of the womb is conception, or attracting the Seed, and reducing the 
same into Act, by causing the same to ferment and proceed to formation. And al- 
though this be that for which the Womb was ordained, yet it is by accident the 
Sluce or Outlet of Superfluous Humors in the Body, which do either continually 
flow unco this place, as in the Whites, or at certain seasons, as the Menstruous 
Blood, which being more dan the woman needs for her Nourishment, is ordained 
to nourish the Child in the womb, and when it is born, it drops out of the Dugs in 
the form of Milk. 
a T.'7. f. 2. QQ. f. 4. DD. b T. 7. f. I. e d T. 7. f. I. e 
c T. 7. f, 3. BB.  
The Medicinal Consideration.
Disorders of the.
By out knowledg of the Natural Constitution of the Genital Parts of women 
we come more certainly to understand their departure from the said natural Con- 
stitution by several sorts of Infirmities. 
Spermatick
Vessels.
The Spermatick Vessels are liable to obstructions whereby the usual Flux of 
Humors is stopped, which is very hurtful to women. 
Stones.
They swel together with the Stones, and become as big as a mans Fist, by a col- 
lection of Humors resembling Tallow or suet. 
This is known by a swelling in the bottom of the Belly at the sides.
Trumpets 
The Trumpet or Horn of the Womb is widened and moved by Seed,which be- 
ing there corrupted, seekes its passage out. But wonderful it is that the mans Seed 
should come thither, and that as Histories report,a Child should be conceived there. 
'Tis very strang that a Child should be formed Out of the Cavity of the womb; and 
it favours the Opinion of Paracelsus and Amatus Lusitanus, that a Child may be 
in a Giass of a Mans Seed and menstrual blood, placed in Horses Dung, un- 
ess both ot them, the one being an Athiest the other a Jew, Were known to be 
Impostors.
Womb it self.
The womb is the Root, Seed plot and foundation of very near al womens Dis- 
eases, being either bred in the womb, or occasioned thereby.
Distemper. 
It it be troubled with an hot distemper and inflamed, it causes intollerable bur- 
nings, the Feaver Synochos and the burning Feaver, very troublesome Itchings? 
and finally it brings exulcerations, the Cancer and Gangræna. 
If it be stung with fervent Lust, it becomes enraged, causes Uterine fury and 
Madness wil not let the Patients rest, but invites them to shake and agitate their 
Loins, that they may be disburthened of their Seed; and at last, they become 
shameles and ask men to lie with them.
Motion de
praved. 
Somtime it is drawn out of its place towards the sides, and is Carryed this way and 
that way it as far as the Ligaments and Connexions of the Womb it wil give leave; and 
it wil rise directly to the Liver, Stomach and Midris, that it may be moistened and 
fanned; it Causes Choaking and Stranglings, and raises terrible and violent motions 
and Convulsions in the Body. 
In a Word, the Womb is a furious Live-wight in a Live-wight, punnishing Poor 
women with many Sorrows. 
Although Hippocrates hath written and Fernelius confirmd the same, that the 
womb like a Globe does rowle it self in the Cavity of the Belly yet are they rather 
the Horns of the womb, which are receptacles of Seed Spirituous and hot or putri- 
feid which being swelled do move themselves this way & that way, tii they have shed 
their Seed into the Cavity of the Belly: which Seed being dispersed, brings very 
cruel pains and stretches the Belly, the force of the Spirits be Evaporated: 
hence comes that same swelhng of the Belly and stifling about the Midrif. 
Sometimes

86 The Physical  Consideraiion, and Anatomy Book II. 
Suffocation 
Somtimes malignant Vapors ascending from the Womb by the Veins a and Arte- 
ries, unto the Lungs and Kernels of the Throat, may cause choaking and stifling: 
and the malignant vapor of the Seed being so pernicious, is violently darted into the 
Brain, and al parts of the Body, from the Womb, as from a Beast that spits poy- 
son.
Cancerous
Scirrhus. 
The Womb is but little when empty; but when it is filled with evil Humors, it 
swels above measure and it has been seen to equal the Head of a new-born Child 
which is an incurable Infirmity, because it is a Cancerous Scirrhus, which is the 
worse for being tampered with by Medicines. 
a T. 7. f. 2. VVXX.
Dropsie
Somtimes the Orifice of the Womb being closed, and firmly sealed up, Water 
flows out of the Belly into the Cavity thereof, and coming to a quantity, it brings 
the Dropsie of the Womb. Somtimes evil Humors are collected there, and by the 
force of Nature, do afterwards break forth. This often happens to Virgins, and o- 
thers, from the luppression of their Courses, the internal Orifice being slopped, as I 
said before.
Whether seed
suppressed hur-
teth woman? 
The Womb is watered with a two-fold Humor, Seed, and Menstrual Blood; the 
suppression of both which, does many waies afflict Woman-kind, and the evacuari- 
on thereof, does them much good in many respects. Howbeit, we do not read in 
Hippocrates any where, that the retention of their Seed, is hurtful unto Women: 
he writes indeed, that the Womb being dry, does ascend to the superior parts to re- 
ceive moisture (which Galen laughs at) and that it desires to receive the Mans 
Seed to moisten itself; and that therefore marriagable Virgins that are troubled 
with fits of the Mother, should be married, and have the carnal society of Men. And 
therefore he makes the retention, or over-great flux of the Courses, the only general 
cause of Womens Diseases, and faies that Women cannot be in Health, unless they 
play the Women, that is, void their Menstrual Blood. In case therefore, that a 
Woman, or a Virgin have her Courses stopt, whether or no may we hope by blood- 
letting, three or four times repeated from the Arm or Foot, to draw the blood unto 
the Womb? I remember the Story of a Woman in a Consumption, because of 
the stoppage of her Courses, from whom Galen drew blood in a large quantity.
What must be
observed in
letting blood to
move the cour-
ses?
1 The Suffici-
ency of matter.
That we may know to resolve this Question, three things are to be noted; The
Matter, the Place, and the Expulsive. Faculty. The Matter is Blood, which re- 
mains over, and above what was necessary to nourish a woman for a months time 
which was ordained to conceive Child, and to nourish it being born: wherefore we 
must consider, whether the woman abound with blood, so that she has what to spare, 
and void forth; for if she want blood, by reason of some fore-going disease, or be- 
cause she eats little, we not to expect that she should have her Courses. 
2 Fitness of the
place
The place through which it ought to flow, is the womb, with the Hypogastrick, 
and Spermatick Veins: for these Vessels do contain the superfluous blood, 
the due time appointed for this Purgation, and they send it forth either by the Ca-
vity of the womb, or by the Spermatick Vessels, into neck thereof. But if so 
be the Womb shal be dry, or hard, and the Spermatick Vessels and Veins obstru- 
cted, we cannot hope to procure the Courses to flow, by often blood-letting. And
the expulsive faculty is not seated in the genital parts, which receive this blood,
but depends upon the general strength of nature, which thrusts this superflous
blood out of doors.
Strength of
the faculty
And 
Medicaments,
& other means
to accomplish
the Cure  
These three things ought therefore to concur, that a woman may have her Cour-
ses, Matter, Place, and the Expulsive Faculty; and Medicaments ought to have a 
respect thereunto. A Vein is to be opened in the Foot, rather than in the Arm;
Cupping-glasses must be applied without Scarrification to the inner part of the 
Thighs, above the Vessels: Convenient Purges must be given, with Apozemes that
move Urine, attenuate, and open the mouths of the Veins. Pils of Steel, Mirrh, 
and Aloes, must somtimes be given, and Baths made to fit in: or a Vaporary must be
used somtimes of blood-warm Water alone, and somtimes boy led with Hysterical
and

Chap. 37. Of the Internal Parts of a Woman, &c. 87
and opening Herbs, the steam whereof, the Patient must receive into her Womb. 
Also Fomentations must be applied to the Os Sacrum, and the lower part of the 
Belly, and good Diet appointed, not heating, but attenuating and opening.
Systoms in
the Action
bust.
Sterilitie 
The Action of the Womb, is Conception if it be abolished, the Patient is bar- 
ren: Which barrenness, depends either upon the distemper of the womb, or upon 
the il shape thereof, or the hardness of the inner Orifice, or the distortion thereof,or 
from fault of the Stones, and-Spermatick Vessels, in which somwhat is wanting, ei- 
ther in point of struture, or of matter: and lf a woman be sickly, she cannot make 
good Seed fiting to cause a Conception, til she recover the soundness of her health, 
and til the faults of her womb (if not incurable ) shal be amended. 
Suppression of
blood or seed.
But forasmuch as the Womb is ordained, not only for Conception, bur to eva- 
cuate the Superfluity of Natural Humors in the Body, such as are, superfluous 
Seed, and Neutrual blood: if they be totally, or in part suppressed, the woman 
cannot be in Health, not if they flow too much. 
Over great
flux thereof.
Hence comes the Gonorrhæa 
simplex [simple running of the Reins or the Feminine Flux, either of blood, or 
Humoral, when only Humors come away: which last, i it be malignant, and the 
Humor be sharp, exulcerating, and of evil color,it is dangerous, and comes somtimes 
from an outward, venemous, and contagious cause; and therfore women ought dis- 
creetly to be questioned touching that matter, that they may be brought to acknow- 
ledg their Disease, and not deceive the Physitian under a pretence that they have the 
ordinary whites, to their own hurt, unless they acknowledg themselves faulty, or 
lay upon their Husbands whom it is better to accuse, if they be in any measure 
suspected than to cal the womans Chastity in question. 
Because we are treating of the Action of the Womb, which is Conception, I will 
speak a little touching the same, and shew. How a woman is disposed during Con- 
ception: What is the fruit, or work of Conception, viz. how the Infant comes out 
*pr the womb, and how the woman is constituted in the timed  of her Travel, and what 
happens unto her after her Travel, until she be wel, and upon her Legs again. 
Touching other Diseases, whereunto she is subject, I wil speak nothing, because 
they differ not from such of the same kind as she is troubled with, when she is not 
with Child.
Moles-Abor-
tion, &c 
Wherefore, as the Abolition. Or taking away of the Action of the womb, is Bar- 
renness; so the Action thereof being depraved, brings forth a Mole, or a fal. e Con- 
ception or an Efflux of the Seed, after eight daies, or Abortion. 
The Childs
Conception
Right Shaping.
If the Conception be true, and legitimate, a Child is thereby begotten; for the 
Mans Seed being squirted into the a Sheath, is sucked, and retained by the b womb; 
and then the c internal Orifice being shut by its heat, and inbred vertue, it stirs up 
tbe forming Faculty of the Seed, and sets it on working: Whereupon, of both 
Seeds mingled, the Child is framed, which is begun by a certain point, or little 
speck; which upon the third day is perceived to pant, in Egs that a Hen fits upon.
The placenta
or womb-liver.
Afterward, certain skins are formed, within which, the foundations, or first threds 
of the Vessels, and al parts, are drawn out of the Seed, and the wool, or super-stru- 
cture, is produced out of the Menstrual blood, which comes upon it: and then the 
Placenta is made, being a mass, or Lump of Flesh termed also the d Womb-Liver, 
which being glued to the sides of the Womb, interposes it self between the c Na- 
vel strings of the Child, and the Vessels of the Mothers womb, which before were 
joyned together. 
Now the Conformation of the Infant, is different in the parts thereof; but the 
said difference? does more manifestly appear in the Vessels of the f Heart, which are 
united by a double Anastmosis, or Union of the mouths of the said Vessels, as I 
e described them, in my History of the Child in the Womb.
 Why some chil-
ding women
are sickly, others
not
Some sickly VVomen, while they go with Child, have their health better than 
ordinary but the Child fares the worse for it, because it sucks up the impurities of 
the mother blood. Others are worse at that time, because the impurity of the mass 
or blood is carried into divers parts; and if it stick in the Stomach, it causes either 
strange longings, or frequent vomiting in some, al the while they are big, in o-
thers 


88 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
thers, to the middle of the time of their Belly-bearing. 
If a Woman, during the whol time of her Conception, can make the Child par- 
take of her passions, it wil partake both of her Health and Sickness. 
a T. 7. f. 2. Y. b f. 2. K. f. 3. AA. c f. 3. D. d T. 8. f. 3. AA. e f. 2. 
ABCDG. f T. 9. f. 4. D 
Whether a big- 
bellied woman 
may be let 
blood? Affir. 
Whether or no, may we let blood, or purge a sick woman that is with Child? 
Blood may be taken away at any time, especially in the first months, in which the 
Child being smal, needs little blood to nourish it but in other months also, blood 
is taken away, if the greatness of the Disease require it, to save both Mother and 
Child. 
And if any ill happen after blood-letting in such a Case, it must be attributed 
rather to the violence of the Disease, than to the blood-letting, or any other Remedy 
applied.
Whether in the
disease cholera
she may bleed?
Neg. 
But if a Woman with Child, be taken with the disease Cholera [a violent pur- 
ging upwards and downwards of corrupt Humors] when she is in her seventh 
or eighth month; whether in such a case, is it safe to let her blood ? If it be suspe- 
cted as hurtful in such women as are not with Child, left their strength being by 
much Evacuation weakened, should be more perished, and decayed, much less is it 
to be allowed in fuch as are big-bellied, who have suffered plentiful, and immode- 
rate Evacuation out of their Veins; because it inclines the Patient to miscarry, 
while it defrauds the Child of its nutriment, and impoverishes the mother so to 
go about to Cure a Woman with Child, is a dangerous, and unheard of Practice. 
For if al Practioners dis-allow the same in Men, and Women not with Child.  
both Greeks, Arabians, and Latines, both Antient and Modern; much more is it to 
be dis-liked in a woman seven or eight months gone with Child. If it be done in a 
smal quantity, it is to no purpose: what can the taking away of one little Porren- 
ger of blood do, to resist the furious agitation of Humors, and to extinguish a Fea- 
ver, feeing the blood is wont to come very slowly away, drop by drop, and the best 
first. 
I say no more, left I should seem with affectation to handle this Question, which 
shal be more accurately discussed in another place. He that desires to be acquain- 
ted with the Cure of Womens Diseases, let him read Hippocrates his fift Book 
of that Subject.
Whether in big-
bellied women,
the womb
grows thinner?
Neg. 
It is worthy Observation, That the greater the Child grows in the Womb, the 
more does the Womb, and the placenta, or Womb-Cake, or Womb-Liver 
encrease; so that neer the time of Travel, it is as thick as a mans Thumb, contrary to 
the Nature of other Bodies, which by how much the more they are distended, by 
so much die thinner they grow. If the thickness of the Womb be less, either those 
Women are lean, or have little blood, or had a flux of blood a little before their 
Child-birth; and such do void little or no blood by way of the Child-bed Pur-
gations.
The possture, &
accomodation
of the child in
the womb. 
Now the Child in the Womb, lies round like a Foot-ball, floats in Water be- 
ing compassed with two a Membranes, the one called b the other c chori- 
on, has the d Placenta, or Womb-Liver fastened to the sides of che Womb, as a 
Mactress, or Bed to rest upon, in which the Mothers womb is purified, and in Which
the Unbilical, or Navel-Vessels are rooted, viz. c a Vein and two f Arteries, which 
carry blood to the Liver and Heart.  
The Vena Porta has blood proper thereunto; and the Cava has also blood of its 
its own, which must go unto the Heart to be circulated. 
The Child in the womb, is nourished by the g Navel; it breaths a little, its Heart, 
h moves, and exercifes its vital Faculty, it feels, and is moved, and has been heard 
also to cry. 
The Natural
Birth.
At last, when it finds it self perfect, whether in the seventh, or in the ninth 
month, which is the ordinary time for a Child to be born, being impatient to be any 
longer there imprisoned, it breaks its bands, and prison doors, and seeking to come 
out,

Chap. 37. Of the internal Parts of a Woman, &c. 89
out, makes its own way, with die Head i foremost; and such an Egress is termed 
a Natural, and right fashion’d Birth.
What preceeds
the same. 
Before that Nature begins to work, she moistens the waies before the Birth, with a 
Clammy, and gluish Humor. The internal Orifice of the womb, and the whol 
Sheath, which in the last months, do by little and little grow thick, are moistened 
with the same clammy, glutinous Humor, that they may easily be enlarged to such 
a widness as shal be necessary for the going out of the Infant.  
a T. 8. f. I. CCCC. b f. 2. EE. c f. 2. FE. f. 3 AA. c
f. 2. A. f f. 2. BB. g f. 2. DD. h T. 9. f. 3. B. T. II. f. 4. i T. 8.
f. I. D. 
That the Child be rightly born, it oughe to come out with its Head first, and its 
Face towards the Mothers Breech, the Membranes being first broken, and the water 
runout: After the Child, the Secondine, or After-birth, must come forth, viz.
the Placenta Carnea, or Womb-Liver, whol, and untorn. When the Child is 
come forth, the Navel is tied a Thumbs breadth from the Skin, and after it is tied, 
it is cut of, leaving only another Thumbs breadth.  
What follows
a T. 9. f. 2. P. 
Helps to fur-
ther hard labor.
The Infant being wiped and clensed, with its Head gently pressed together, and 
closed, is delivered unto the Nurse. The Midwife takes care of the Mother, who is 
careful of her privy parts, being pained, and to recover her languishing strength. 
If the Birth prove hard and painful, a Feaver is raised, and the privy Parts are 
swelled, by laboring, and endeavoring in vain to bring forth the Child. Somtimes 
her strength fails her, and other whiles Convulsions do arise. Then is blood drawn 
from the Arm, and the Foot, and the Genital Parts ate fomented with Emollient, 
and laxative Fomentations, and are anointed within with opening Oyls, and fresh 
Butter. The Patient is put into a bath of luke-warm water, and sharp Clysters 
re given, to provoke the womb to excretion: and the inferior parts are provoked 
by aperitive, and provoking Potions to open themselves.
Drawing the
infant out by
an hook. 
Finally: when all wil not do, and the woman has passed over two of three daies 
in these Torments, if she appear like to die, and ready to faint away, if tokens of a 
gangrene in the Privities do appear, although we are not sure that the Infant is dead, 
it is drawn out with an Hook, that the Mothers life may be saved; it is better that 
one die, chan two, and the life of the Mother is to be preferred before the life of the 
Child. The Mother ought not to die to have the Child, and therefore the Cæsarean 
Section [ ripping the Child ouf of the Mothers Belly ] ought not to be practi- 
sed.  
'T was elegantly said by Tertullian in his Book de Anima, cap. 25. Necessa- 
ria crudelitate trucidatur Infants matricidani moriturus; that is, It is a necessa- 
ry kind of Cruelty, to kill that Child, which otherwise would kill its own Mo- 
ther.
When the Infant has broke prison, and escaped, if the Placenta, or Afterbirth 
do not follow, the Midwife must thrust her hand into the Cavity of the womb, and 
pul it away gently, left the bottom of the womb be drawn down. 
If in a woman is dead  presently after her Delivery, you view the privy Parts, you 
shal observe  the Caruncles obliterated and defaced, the Nymphes much diminished, 
so that only some Rudiments of them, are to be seen, and the inmost Orifice so wide, 
that it wil receive a mans four fingers bended together.
Admirable
power of Na-
ture. 
The widening of those Parts to let out the infant, and the straitening of them a- 
gain a while after, is an admirable work of Nature.
Child-bed
Purgations
what they are 
The wideness and thickness of the womb, are diminished by little and little, by the 
coming away ofche Loches, or Child-bed Purgations, Which is nothing but that 
blood squeezeed out, which had been shut up between the Spongy sides of the womb. 
But the largeness of the womb be not diminished, nor the blood evacuated, it pu-
P trefies

90 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book II. 
tresies, and causes an Inflamation, and the womb continues stretched, and hard, as 
it the Child were-yet within it, and at length a Gangrene arises; which brings un- 
avoidable death after it. 
But if the whol Placenta be not drawn forth, it is no necessary cause of Death; 
and the place from whence it was pulled by force, for a while appears rough and 
uneven, til the whol womb be dried, and reduced unto its natural Figure: al which 
ought diligently to be observed, especially in Child-bed women that are sick.
Child bed
Purgations re-
tained, how to
be evacuated 
The largeness and hardness of the Body of the womb continuing with a Feaver, is 
a very dangerous, and doubtful Disease; and a great Question it is towards the 
Cure, whether we should open a Vein in the Arm, or in the Foot. Fernelius 
confidently lets blood in the Arm: Pereda a Spaniard, tels us, That we should not 
regard from whence the blood comes, but into what part it is collected, and bids 
us open the Vein which is next that part. 
Cortesius in his Miscellanies, has lifted this Question, and favors the Opinion-of 
Fernelius: howbeit, more profitable it is, and more secure, to take blood Out of 
the Foot liberally, respect being had to the Patients strength, not neglecting coo- 
ling Clysters; Epithems, Fomentations, and Pessaries, made to provoke the womb 
to cast forth that putrified, and death-causing blood; and the rather to avoid the 
Calumny; and prating of il-tongu’d Gossips, by whom Remedies are defamed, 
which have been the means to save many peoples lives. 
Diseases Pro-
per to Infants
The Infant has no Diseases proper to it self, saving Teeth-breeding, Smal Pox, 
and Meazles. Hippocrates under the name of Tooth-breeding, comprehends al 
Childrens Diseases, because chiefly when they breed their Teeth, Infants are so sick 
that many times  hey are taken away by death.
Teeth Sickness 
Many Diseases are raised by the pain of the Childrens Tooth-breeding. There 
are two times in which the Tooth-sickness does vex, and endanger the lives of Chil- 
dren, viz. When the Teeth first sprout, and When they break out of the Gums.
Meazles.
Smal Pox. 
The Meazles, and smal Pox, are new Diseases, unknown to the Antient Physici- 
ans, which are thought to be contracted, and Bred in the Mothers womb, by the Mo- 
thers corrupt and Menstrual blood; the fault whereof, Nature Is wont to purge out 
and scum away by those Eruptions. I say no more, left I should seem to go beyond 
the bounds of an Anatomical Discourse. Neither is it my Design to deliver an 
exact Pathology, or Description of Diseases; but only to hint at such Diseases as 
are known by knowing the Natural Constitution of the parts of the whol Body.  
Chap. 37. Of the Pains of the Loyns. 
tHere is nothing which we more frequently meet with in Hippocrates, and in 
the Practice of Physick, than Pains of the Loyns, whether they be primary 
Or secondary; that is to say. Attendants of other Diseases which are oftentimes 
neglected by Physitians as Symptomatical, unless they be very stubborn, and soli- 
tary without a Feaver. The Causes of which pains, are not accurately enough de- 
clared, neither is their Cure sufficiently explained by al Practitioners. 
This knot I shal endeavor to unty, and illustrate. The parts therefore of the
lower belly, being demonstrated, and the Guts taken away, we shal see the loyns 
2 covered with Muscles, both within and without, and fleshy b portions of the Mid- 
rif reaching down to the Os Sacrum, and the Trunk of the Vena c Cava descendent, 
also the d Aorta. and the two c Kidneys. And if you shal cal two mind the cleaving 
of the Mesentery to the Loyns, and shal observe the Lumbary, or Loyn Veins, 
produced from the Trunk of the Vena Cava, and the Arteries proceeding from the 
g Aoria, both conveighed into the holes of the Vertebra's as far as the marrow of
the Back. Al these things being, diligently viewed, and considered, wil give great 
light to our consultation. 
Galen complains in his Commentary upon Text 7 of the Second Book Of Pro- 
theticks; and upon Text 8. of the Third Book of the same Work, of the Obscurity 
of the pains of the Loyns, because of the Ignorance of those Parts which compound
and 


Chap. 38. Of the Pains of the Loins. 91 
and work Upon the Loines; yet some causes he assignes of those pains, and Ludo- 
vicus Daretus that same sublime Interpreter of Hippocrates has added others, but 
they have not assigned all. I wil therefore do my endeavour to clear this point.
The Name
with its Ety-
mology
And in the first place; it is fit to take notice, that this pain is by the Greeks called 
in one word Osphulalgid: the Latines term it Lumbago, and he that is made weak 
by pain in his Loins, is called Elumbis vel Elumbatus, distoined or unloined. In 
the French ’tis termed Erne as it were a Rene from the Kidney, which lies in the 
Loines; and when die pain arises trom a Convulsion of the Fibres, the common 
people say their Kidneys are torn in sunder.  
If this pain of the Loins be eased with Clysters, the Humors being emptied which 
Were shut up in the Guts or Mesentery, the Common People say, that their Reins 
or Kidneys are wel dis-burthened.  
a T. 10. f. I. T. 14. all the Tabl.  b T. 10. f. 7. HH.  c T. 12. f. I. c.
 d T. 12. f. 4. C. e T. 5. f. 5. BC.  f T. 12. f. I. aa.  g T. 12. f. 4. C.
 e T. 5. f. 5. BC. f T.12. f. I. aa. g T. 12. f. 4. aa.  
The Authors
Method.
Now that our enquiry touching pains of the Loins may be clear and Methodical, 
it is necessary in the first place to distinguish the Parts constituting the Loins, 
which are pained, and the bordering Parts which as efficient Causes do give occasi- 
on to those pains, not neglecting the more remote Parts. Then we shal enquire into 
the common internal and external Causes of those pains, and to sum up al in a word, 
we shall consider the Parts which send the Humor, and the Parts which receive the 
same.
Parts which
Constitute the
Loins 
The Parts therefore which make up the Loines and are the subject of the pains, 
are these. The a Skin with the b fleshy Membrane, the c Muscles which are spread 
upon the five d Vertebrates, both without and within with the c Os Sacrum.
Within the f Cavities of the Vertebrates, the Marrow of the back with its Membranes, 
and a numerous company of g branches of Nerves, and the Membranous Ligaments, 
which knit the Vertebra’s one unto another. Also we must observe how the 
h Marrow of the back is in the Loins parted into an innumerable company of 
i threads, like an Horse-Tail, and that the whol Back-bone is moved in the Loines, 
Van Articulation of the first Vertebra of the Loines, With the last Vertebra of the
Back. 
a T. I. f. 2. BB. b f. 2. DD.  c T. 10. and 14. &c.  d T. 2. f. I.  e f. 5.
and 6  f f. 2. a. g T. 18. f. 5. 11. 14.  h f. 5. A.  i f. 5. o.   
They are deceived who think that by the word Loins Hippocrates understands 
only the Parts included viz. The k Nerves, the a Muscles of the Loins, the Spinal 
b Marrow with its Membranes, and the c Kidneys:  for besides al these Hippocrates 
Comprehends under the term Loins, the d great Vein and c Artery, and the f Sper- 
k matick Vessled, and the g. Vessels of the Kidneys the h Bladder, the i Womb, the 
k Hemorrhoides and the thick l Guts. But I would sain see the places which seve- 
rally demonstrate those Parts. 
K T. 18. f. 5. II. o. T. 3 f. 8. o.. p. &c. a T. 10. f. 2. T. 14.  b T.18. f. 5. A.
 c T. 5. f. I. BC. f. 2. CD.  d f. I. D. f. 2. F.  e f. I. E. f. 2. G.  f f. I HI.
f. 2.LL. NN.  g f. 2. HI. aa. bb. &c.  h f. 7. FF. T. 12. f. I. and 4. ζζ 
&c.  f T. &. f. I. XXVV.  K T. 4. f. 6. II.  l T.3. f. 4. I. KM. 
Parts border-
ing upon the
Loins
which are
the special
causes of their
Pains.
Now the neighboring Parts, which are able to hurt the Loins, by reason of their 
nearness, or heavyness, or by disburthening their Humors into them, are the Mesen- 
tery m which Knit unto the Loins, the lower Part of the n Gut Colon, the two  
b Kidneys which touch upon and cleave unco the Loins, by their p fatty Membrane, 
the Trunks of q Ven 1 Cava and r Aorta which are spread along in the Loines, and 
the Vessele springing out of them, which are propagated into the Muscles of the 
Loins and the Back-bone. Of which sort are the Veins and Arteries of the s Loins, 
P 2 also


92 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book. II 
also the Hemorrhoid t Veins, which pass down al a long the Loins into the Funda- 
ment; as also the u Spermatick Vessels which swel with Spermatick Humor, winch 
in their progress do send branches unto the Loines. In Women, the x Womb with 
its y Ligaments and z Testicles may hurt the Loins, but epecialy in a Woman with 
Child, by reason of the weight of the Womb and Child. The Veins and Arteries 
of the Iliac a branches, which are spread abroad through the Os Sacrum, may vex 
the Loines. 
m f. LAA. &c.  n f. 4. K.  o T. 5. f. I. BC. f. 2. CD.  P f. 2. AA.
 q f. I. D. f. 2. F.  r f. I. E. f. 2. G. s T. 12. f. I. and 4. aaa.  t T. 4. f. 6. II.
 u T. 6. f. 12. .&c. x T. 7. f. I. df. 2. RT&c.  y f. 2. QQ. SS.  z f. 2.
oo. f. 4. AA.  a T. 12. f. I and 4. DD.   
Remote Parts 
The remote Parts which hurt the Loines, are, the a Liver by the Vena b Porta, 
and  c Mesentery and the d Head whils it disburthens it self of its Superfluities into 
the c Marrow of the Back according to Hippocrates in his Book de GLandulis. 
The Humor descends through the Cavity of the Spinal Marrow, as far as the Loines, 
and it cannot easily go farther, by reason that the Marrow of the Back is their di- 
vided into a f Million of Threds. 
a T. 4. f. I. AB. b f. I. FFf. 6. The whol c f. I. GH. d T. 17. and 18.
 c T. 18. f. 5. A  f f. 5. o.
Common 
Causes of 
Pains. 
We must also observe the common Causes of the Pains, which are frequently 
found in Pains of the Loines, as internal Rheumatisines or Fluxes of Humors, and 
external by the Veins, or an Humor between the Skin, whith flowes from the Head 
betwixt the Muscles and Fleshy Membane, 
Oftimes the branches of the Vena Cava and Aorta do carry a Parte of boiling 
and Superfluous Blood, out of the greater Channels into the Loines, which they 
Disease either in the Muscly Parcs, or in the Membranous Parts, or in the marrow 
of the Back; which is the Cause that a Palsie follows the Colick, or an Arthritis 
degenerates into the Colick and the Colick is changed into the Sciatica. Also, out ward 
Impostumes of the Kidneys, and passions of the Gut Colon being either distended 
or exulceiated, are Communicated to the Loines. within and without in the Loine 
may arise Tumors, Impostunes, and Ulcers, yea, and the Loins are distoted by  
flux of Rheum, or some swelling. Their Fibres are distended by the Cramp.
External
Causes. 
Many times pains of the Loines are stirred up by external Causes, as 
a fall on the Back, or a Blow with a thick Stick, or some other 
massie
thing.
Certain places
in Hippocrates
expounded. 
These things being premised and wel understood, it is easie to explain very obscure
places in Hippocrates, touching pains of the Loines, which you shal find in the 
Commentaries of Duretus upon the Coick Prognosticks of Hippocrates, and others 
collected together in the Commentaries of Marinellus upon Hippocrates, in the 
word Lumbi. 
There are two kinds of Loine Symptomes: for some are in the Loines and 
others spring from the Loines: both of them are by Hippocrates judged to be very 
stubborn and hard to deal with, 
In his Coicks he hath pronounced absolutly and without exception. Such as have 
pains in their Loines ace in a very bad condition. And in the same Book, Diseases
which arise from pain of the Back, are harden cure. And how wil you under- 
stand those places, unles by a clear knowledg of the the Parts sending and Parts re-
ceiving, as I declared before.  
Certain it if, if in the beginning of Diseases their be pain in the Loines,  
heavyness and a Feaver, Blood very hot or in great plenty is contained within the 
greater Vessels, which being more inflamed, if not timely prevented, may be Car- 
ried into the Head or into the Lungs, from whence greivous Diseases may 
follow. In other places he does particularly explain the Causes of Lung
Pains. If  


Chap. 38. Of the Pains of the Loins. 93 
If I should recite those places. I should fil twenty Leaves and upwards, Where cre 
take in my Sailes and dispatch al in a word.
Danger of 
these pains in
Feavers.
Pains of the Loines in acute Malig- 
nant Feavers or other Feavers in the beginning are dangerous for they signifies a great 
Tumult in the blood, and irritation of Humor within the greater Vessels, which is 
much to be; feared if a speedy course be not taken to prevent what may follow, by a 
plentyful blood letting, especially in the Feet to hinder the recourse of the blood 
the upper Parts of the Chest or Head, where it is wont to produce divers terri- 
ble and deadly Symptomes. 
We ought therefore to be very fearful of pains in the Loines which persevere in 
Feavers, although blood have been often let, because in the Region of the Belly, 
Humor lie extreme deep, which may take their course suddenly to some or the 
nobler Parts, if they be not diligently Purged forth.
Their Cure. 
And therefore to cure such like pains of the Loins, Hippocrates was went to 
open the Veins oF the Ham or Foot which is confirmed by him, in his Coicks: 
the pains or the Loins proceed from aboundance of blood there, and blood lettings 
that are caused by pains of the Loins are large and plentyful. These things declare 
the necessity of blood-letting, when the Loins are pained with a Feaver. 
Purging must not be omitted that the Vault of the lower Belly being loaded with 
Excrements may be emptied and clened; out of Aphor. 20. book 4. Though 
Hippocrates has written that such as complain of pains in their Loins, are looser 
bellved than ordinary; that saying does not take away the necessity of Purging in 
these cases.  
bleeding at the Hemorrhoid Veins is good both for the Kidneis and for pains of 
the Loins; and therefore the Hemorrhoids are to be provoked. 
A lasting pain of the Loins without Heat or any Inflammatory disposition, unless 
it can be discussed with Fomentations, after purging & blood letting often repeated, 
the Humor must be drawn out with Cupping Glasses and Scarificaion, and by 
Application or Vesicatories, or making Issues on each side of the back bone; also 
with a bath of fresh water qualified with Herbs, or by sitting in natural baths, or 
or having their water Pumped trom on high upon the Parts affected. For the pains 
of the Loins are more vehement and stubborn if the serous matter be conteined with- 
in the Muscles as far as the Vertebras: and they are yet Worse and harder to be cur- 
ed if they come to the Marrow of the Back. 
But those Symptomes which are thought to arise from the Loins, 
do not arise from the Parts which constitute or make up the Loins, 
but from the neighbouring Parts which being spread upon the Loins, do cause 
Pain, and transfer their Humors into other Parts, by a quick or slow motion, 
by the Veins and Arteries, such as are Vena Cava and Aorta, tne Hæsmorrhoid 
Veins and the Mesaraicks. Out of Galen. 
The End of the Second Book:
THE 

94
THE 
THIRD BOOK 
OF THE 
ANATOMY 
AND 
PATHOLOGY 
OF
John Riolanus,
THE 
KINGS PROFESSOR 
OF 
PHYSICK 
Chap. 1. Of the Chest 
Its Bounds 
LET us proceed unto the Parts of the Chest. 
is the Mansion House of the Vital Parts. It is bounded, and 
circumscribed below, by the 2 bastard Ribs, a b midrif; a- 
bove by the c Claviculæ, and the whol Circumference, and 
bulk thereof is made up of al the d Ribs the Vertebra's of 
the c Back and the f Breast-bone. And because the Neck 
comprehends the beginnings of certain Parts which belong 
unto the Chest, it is referred thereunto, rather than to the 
the Head, though it be the prop and Pillar thereof. 
a T. 10.f.2.11,12,&c. b f. I ll.f.6,7,&c. c f. I. f. T. 12. f. I. BB.
d t. 10.f.1,2,3,&c. c f.3. f f.2.AA.
That the Chest may be welshaped, it ought to be of an Oval Figure, and not
flat before, which is termed Pectus Tabellatum, a Table-shap’d Breast, and is a to- 
ken that the Party so Breasted, wil fal into a Consumption.
The 
Shape* 7 

Chap. 2. Of the Dugs of Women. 95 
Parts
The Chest is Compounded of divers Parts, which ate divided into external and 
internal, that is to say into Parts conteining, and Parts contained. The conteining 
Parts are common and proper. The Common are five. The Scarf-Skin, the 
Skin, the fatty Membrane, the fleshy Membrane, and the Membrane common 
to the Muscles, which were explained ih our Anatomy of the lower Belly. 
The Membrane of Fat and the fleshy Membrane have one thing proper and pecu- 
liar in the Chest, that they receive the Paps in Men and Women. In Men there are 
Only the marks of Paps or Dugs, in Women they are Parts made not only for a fe- 
minine ornament, but to nourish the Infant, of which we are now to treat before 
we Pass any further
Chap. 2. Of the Dugs of Women.
Their Substance 
THe Dugs are made up of a Company of Kernels very like the Kernels of Prune- 
Stones, clustered together, and disposed confusedly in heapes upon a Mem- 
brane proper to themselves, in the middest of Which there lies one Kernel greater 
than the rest, under the Teat.
Scituation, 
4 The Dugs are placed upon the Brest, not to defend the Heart not to adorne and 
beautifie the Woman, but that the Infant may be more conveniently nourished, 
while the Mother embracing it in her Arms laies it to the Dug, and the Child Tic- 
kling her Nipple with its sucking provoks her the more to love it, and to express her 
Love by frequent Kisses. 
Magnitude.
The largeness of the Dugs is different, according as the Woman is of a more or less 
fleshy and lalcivious constitution of Body: for the lustful heat of the Womb does 
puss Up and fwel a Womans Dugs. In a Marriagable Virgin they become more 
large if she enjoy carnal Embracements with more than ordinary pleasure and con-
tent, 
Number.
Nature, our bountyful Mother, has given a Woman two Dugs, that she may nurse 
two children; or if one brest be sore, the other may serve the turn for a time. And 
for this Cause they communicate Vessels one with another.
Shape. 
The shape of the Dugs is not flat but bunching out, that they might Contein the 
greater Quantity of Milk. At the end of the Dugs, are the Teats. out of which drops 
the milk which the Infant sucks. 
The Teats.
The Teat or Nipple is made of the Skin drawn together and boared with little 
holes. lt is wrinkled oh the out-side that the Infant may more easily lay hold up- 
on it, and keep it in its Mouth.
The Circle
about the
Teats. 
Round about the Teat there goes a Ring of Circle of different Colors in Women, 
respect of their Age and of their being with Child or not with Child &cc. In 
Virgins it is red, in such as are devirginated it is Black and Blew. In Women with 
child it is larger than ordinary, and if they go with a Boy it is Black and Blew or 
red;  if they go with a Girle, it is of a whiteish Color. 
The Medicinal  Consideration.
Mis-Shapen
Chest. 
The largerness of the Chest is commended as found and healthful; but a narrow 
Chest is blamed because it occasions shortness of Breath, because the Lungs are ill  
housed  wanting Room to display themselves. The Shape of the Chest ought dili- 
gently to be considered by a Physician when he sees any troubled with shortness of 
Breath. In healthy Persons that the Chest may be perfectly shaped, it is requisite 
that it be round in the forepart and not sharp, and that it be streight before and be- 
hind; if it prove crooked, there is a fault in the Back-bone, of which we shal speak 
In our Doctrin of bones.
Terence blames the affected Care of Mothers who straitned the Chests of their 
young Daughters that, they might become Slender and smal in the wast, [Such are 
rightly termed Wasp-wasted wenches, because they seem divided in the middle, 
like a Waspe or Bee]  A misshapen

96 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III; 
By Crooked-
ness of the 
Back-bone. 
A mis-shapen Chest by reason of the Crookedness of the Back-b one is more fre- 
quently seen in Women than in Men, because they are the weaker Vessels. These 
Crookednesses we endeavour to correct with a firm Pair of Bodies, made either of 
hard Leather, or of strong Linnen with Whale-bones sowed between, or of very 
thin Plates of Iron. Also the Back-bone is daily by contrary motions bowed the 
other way. 
Some are born chus Mis-shapen, and they are incurable, let the Rectifiers of 
Crookedness do what they can. 
Many times Rhewmes fal upon the Muscles of the Backbone, which 
draw the Vertebraes awry, whence proceeds a mis-shapen Brest-bone and con- 
sequently a Crooked Chest, because their shape depends upon the shape of the 
Back-bone.
By falling of
the Brest 
To the evil shaping of the Chest appertains the falling down of the Brest, or the 
bowing in of the Sword-like Gristle, which hurts the Stomach and provokes vomi- 
ting,and also shortness of Breath by hurting the Midris; therefore this Gristle ought 
speedily to be lifted up and reftored to its place. Baptista Codronchus and Ludo- 
vicus Septalius have treated of this Disease. 
Empyema.
Dropsie.
The Diseases of the Cavity of the Chest are Empyema, or a collection of quittor 
within the said Cavity, and the Dropsie of the Brest: all which Diseases require 
a perforation to be made between the fourth and fift Rib of the Chest on that side in 
which the Humor is conteined. 
Somtimes winds do so violently distend the Lungs, that the Patient is in danger 
of Choaking, unless the Chest be opened by the Perforation afore said, which is 
often practised at Paris to the great benefit of the Patients and easing of the Chest;  
although no warty Humors come forth, but only wind, which lssues violently, 
with a noise. Those whole Chests are distended with wind, are by Hippocrates 
termed Pneumatiai.
Condition of
the Dugs.
The Dugs are to be considered at divers seasons, in a Virgin Marriagable, in a 
Married Woman, in a woman with Child,and in one that lies in Child-bed and gives 
Suck: because in these several times they are subject to several Diseases. In ripe 
Virgins fully Marrigable, the Dugs are firm and sold. They become more soft and 
swelling, when they are transported with a burning desire of carnal Embracements: 
and by how much the higher they i wel without pain, and the fuller Or be that they 
make, strowting and Kissing one another, the greater is their desire after bodily 
Plealure, and it may be guessed that they have tasted the Sweetness of Mans- 
Flesh.
In a marriag-
able Virgin.
In a Married
woman. 
If when the Dugs are pressed, Milk drop forth,it is a sign of the Parties being with
Child, though Hippocrates accounts it but an uncertain Sign. The Dugs of a Mar- 
ryed woman which were raised with the Ardency of fleshly lust, do sink and fal by 
little and little. Women that have large strouting Dugs are termed in Latine Mam- 
mosæ Mulieres, and they are of an hot Complexion, lustful and lovers of Wine and 
good Liquor. If they happen to be of a cold Complexion, the swelling of their Dugs, 
comes from an Wheyish Humor which they suck in like Spunges. So saies Hip- 
pocrates. 
Large and ponderous Dugs, do hinder Breathing, by burthening the Chest. So 
the swelled Breaths of Antient Virgins and married women, are liable to the Same
Diseases.For either by reason of a Flux of Humors or of some bruise, they are 
inflamed and impostumate: somtime they become Scirrhous and Knobbed as it 
were with the Kings-Evil, by reason of the Kernels; and then a Kernel or two, if 
they be movable, ought to be taken clean away, by cutting the Skin before they 
cleave to the Fat, the Disease encreasing and creeping on to infect other Kernels: 
Hence comes an incurable Cancer; Because the Dugs are ful of Kernels and spungy, 
and therefore ordained by Natnre to receive superfluous Humors. So that 
such Women as have them dried and shrunken up, are unhealthy and much troubled 
with spitting. 
Inflamation
of the Dugs.
Impostum.
Scirrhus.
Cancer.
The 

Chap. 3. Of the external Parts of the Chest. 97 
In a Woman
with child.
Distention by
blood.
The Dugs of a Woman with Child, some time after her Conception, do swel by 
little and little, by reason of the flowing back of the Menstrual blood, and they drop 
a milky Whey: but in Child bed women, they become yet bigger, by reason of a 
greater afflux of blood, than the Dugs are able to contain. From this distention 
springs a Feaver, on the third day after they are delivered, which lass a day or two, 
or longer; unless the Milk be forced back, or some Child suck the Dugs. 
This Milk is called in Latine, Colostrum, and many are afraid to nourish the 
Child therewith. Yet Spigeius has proved. That this first Milk is no bad milk, 
and that a Mother ought not to refuse to nourish her Child therewith. 
In a Woman
that lies in.
If in a Woman with Child, the Dugs are liable to Inflamation, Tumors, and Ul- 
cers; much more are they so in a Child-bed Woman, and one that gives suck, by 
reason of the curdling of her Milk. Dioscorides writes. That the swelling of the 
Dugs is brought down, by the application of bruised Hemlock, which Experience 
shews to be true. Howbeit, Dodoæus approves hot of this Medicine, by reason 
of the malignant, and venemous Nature of this Herb, which being applied unto the 
Dugs, may wrong the Heart. 
Hippocrates in his Epidemicks, has this Saying: If the Nipples of Womens 
Dugs, and that which is red in them, be pale, their Womb is diseased. 
Contents of the
womb & dugs
how caused?
There is a great League, and fellow-seeling, between the Dugs, and the Womb, 
by reason of two Veins, viz. The Vena a Mammaria, or Dug-Veins, and the
b Epigastrica: and also by the Vena c Thoracicæ, or Breast-Veins, which are 
Branches of the Vena d Cava, which in the bottom of the Belly, affords the Hypo- 
gastrick e Vein unto the Womb. 
The Ancient Chyrurgeons were wont to cut off Cancerous Dugs with the Inci- 
sion Knife; i but because it sucks not well, women are not willing to undergo so 
cruel a Remedy, neither do our Chyrurgeons practice it. 
a t. 2. f. 9. d. T. 12. f. I. CC.   b T. 2. f. 9. e T. 12. f. I. EE.  c f. I. ll oo. 
 d f. I. AB. &c.  c f. I. EE. 
Chap. 3. Of the External Tarts of the Chest.
Proper con-
taining parts. 
THe proper Containing Parts are boney, musculous, or membranous. The 
boney Parts are of four sorts, viz. Twelve f Ribs, two Claviculæ, or g Chan- 
nel-bones, the Sternum, or h Breast-bone, and the twelve Vertebræ, or i turning 
Joynts of the Back-bone, of which we have spoken in our Osteologia, or History of 
the Bones.
f T. 10. f. 2. 1, 2, 3, &c.  g f. I. f. T. 21. f. I. BB.  h T. 10. f. 2. AA.  i T.
10. f. 3.  
The Musculous parts, are either external, or internal, at least placed between the 
bones. The External musculous parts, are divided into Muscles proper to the 
Chest, or  such as are referred to other parts, such as the Musculus a Pectoralis,
or Breast-Muslce; Serratus b minor anticus, or the smaller fore-side Saw-Muscle; 
and the greater Saw c Muscle, or Serratus major; the rest belong unto the Chest, 
of which we shal speak in our Myologia, or History of the Muscles. 
The Internal musculous Parts are, the Inrercostal Muscles, both d internal, and 
e external; which are placed in the spaces between the Ribs, as their name im-
ports. 
a T, 10. f. I. AB.  b f. I. E.  c f. I. CD.  d f. I. HH.  e f. I. GG. 
Chap. 4. of the Pleura, Mediastinum, and Pericardium.
The Pleura,
What it is. 
That continued membranous Part which incloses al the internal parts of the 
Chest, and bestows Membranes upon every one of them, like the Peritoneum, 
T is 

98 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III. 
is termed f Pleura; which being every where g stretched out under al the Ribs, is 
firmly joyned to the bony Parts, and to the Midrif. 
Its thickness
Because of its thickness, it is 
accounted double; but it cannot be demonstrated to be so, without tearing. 
In Diseases of the Chest, when it swels, its doubleness is easily separated. 
The Media-
stinum, what
it is?
Being 
on either side reflexed unto the Back, and rising up unto the Breast-bone, it is h re- 
duplicated, and makes the i Mediastinum, and leaves within it self a certain void 
space, ful of threds, which also comprehends the Heart, and the pericardium: it 
is nothing else, save a Production, of a doubling and folding of the Mediasti- 
num. 
Its Cavity. 
This Cavity of the Mediastinum is diligently to be observed, as that which helps 
to form the voyce as an Eccho to beat back the sound: it does likewise separate the 
bulk of the Chest into two Cavities, and divide the Lungs one from another. 
f f. 5. AA.  g f. 5. CC.  h f. 4. BB. i f. 4. AA. 
The Mediastinum is fastened unto the Claves, and the Midrif, by reason of the 
Pericardium, which is circularly knit unto the a Circulus Nerveus and the Breast- 
bone; and by this Artifice, the Mediastinum, by help of the Pericardium, does 
hold the heart suspended, and becomes the band of the Midrif it self. 
Now the b Pericardium is the Bag, or Case of the Heart, which contains a watery Humor 
to moisten the Heart, from which it is round about so far distant, as is requisite that 
the Heart may freely move it self. If the Pericardium, or Heart-case has no pro- 
per Coat of its own, yet it does at least borrow one from the Mediastinum, which 
compasseth it about. By reason of the neer conjunction of the one unto the other, 
the membranous substance is no thicker, than the Membrane of the Mediastinum in 
other places.
The Pericar-
dium, what it
is?
a T. 10. f. 6. FF. f. 7. GG.   T. II. f. I. A. f. 2. A. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Diseases of the 
Costal muscles, 
is 
Because Contraries compared together, are the better understood, having seen 
the Natural Constituition of these Parts, let us now take a view of their Preternatu- 
ral Dispositions, or Diseases. 
The Muscles, as wel those that are spred upon the Ribs, as those which are placed 
between the said Ribs, which are subject: to divers Diseases, caused either by the 
Flux of Humors from other parts, or by Humors collected in, and about the said 
Muscles.
Pains of the
sides.
How known
from the pleu-
risie 
They undergo divers Tumors, Inflamations, Impostumes, Rheumatick pains in 
springing from a serous, or wheyish Humor; al which do produce sharp pains in 
the sides, with a Feaver, and somtimes with a dry Cough, which imitate the Pleur- 
sie; wherefore the difference must diligently be marked, left we apply the same 
Remedies to these pains of the sides, which are proper to a Pleurisie. 
Hippocrates has observed this Difference; and after him Duretus, the Ghost of 
Hippocrates, and his Faithful Interpreter: For every Pleurisie is a pain of the 
side; but every pain of the side, is not a Pleurisie, or at most, but a bastard Pleu- 
risie. 
But some wil say, both Diseases require the same Cure in respect of blood-let- 
ting, because the passage is easie for the Humors to go from the external parts, unto 
the internal. I do not deny that blood is to be taken away, but not so much, and 
so often, as in a true Pleurify.
How they dif-
fer in
And therefore Hippocrates in a pain of the side, was 
wont first to make use of Fomentations, that he might try whether the pain was in 
the side, or in the c Membrane called Pleura; for a simple pain of the side is eased by 
Fomentations, but the Pleurifie is thereby enraged the more, in which there is a 
continual Feaver, an Inflamation, a Cough, and a pricking pain of the side.
Scituation,  
And therefore the pains of the side differ in Scituation, and in matter;  because 
one is seated in the Membrane a  Pleura and the Intercostal Muscles; another its 
the greater Muscles, which are spred upon the Ribs, such as are the c Pectoral Mus-
cle 


Chap. 3. Of the external Parts of the Chhest. 99 
cle, the d Serratus major, and e minor, the f Latissimus, and the Muscles of the 
g Back.
Matter. 
They differ also in Matter, because wind, or wheyish Humors, or blood does 
insinuate it self into the greater external Musces, and is carried likewise, or slips 
down from the Brain, by the Veins termed h Thoracicæ, or Chest-Veins: but the 
Humor which does possess the Intercostal Muscles, is brought by the smal Branches 
of the Vena i  Azygos or Vein without a Fellow, and does produce the true Pleu- 
resie. 
aT.io.f. y.AA. bf.i.GG.HH.c T. Io.f.I.AB. -d f.j.CD. ~e 
T.io./. i.TL 3 fT. 14 /. 1. CC T) T>. *sX 14. /. i,2,&c. mhT. 12./. i.ll. 
°O. “i x. 12./. I.aaa &c. ~  
It is not necessary that the Humor be contained within the Membrane Pleura, 
because it is nor capable, nor apt to receive the Flux when the pain begins; but 
the Humor being shed abroad into the space which is between the Muscles, and the 
Pleura, it becomes partaker of the pain, which is more sharp in the Pleura it self, 
by reason of its Nervous, or Sinewy Nature, than it is in the Mulculous 
Flesh.
The Action of the Chest, is motion, ordained for Respiration;  which motion, 
is governed by Muscles and Nerves which are subject: to the Palsey and Convulsion. 
To the Convullion of the Muscles of the Chest, does belong the stoppage of the 
breath, difficult breathing, and Hippocrates his double-stroak’d fetching in of the 
Wind.
Whether there
may be a Peri-
Pneumonia, or
no? 
The Membrane Pleura being inflamed with a continual Feaver, a pricking pain in 
the side, and a Cough, makes a Pleurisie, which some late Physitians do think, ne- 
ver lasts long, without a transmission of the Humor into the Lungs, which Often 
cleave to the Pleura, yea, and that the Humor passes over by a Metastasis into the 
Lungs, and causes a peripneumonia, or Inflamation of the Lungs. 
Zecchius was the first that broached this Doctrine in his Counsels, building up- 
on the Authority of Hippocrates; others did in their writings, confirm it by rea- 
sons, as Vincentius Baronius, in his Book de pleuropneumonia. And this Com- 
bination of two Diseases of the Chest in one, they term Pleuropneumonia, that is, 
the Side-and-Lung-sickness; which thing I gave an hint of, before them, in my An
thropography, or Description of Mans Body, in the Chapter which treats of the 
Lungs. That place of Hippocrates, is worthy consideration, which many have un- 
dertaken tO explain: I for my part do thus interpret the same. 
How it is
caused, accor-
ding to our
Author.
Oft-times the Lungs in one, or both the sides, do cleave unto the Membrane which 
covers the Ribs: or it they do not cleave thereunto when the side is first inflamed; 
the Membrane Pleura being soaked, and made softer by the afflux of Humors, does 
sweat out a clammy wheyish Humor; to that the Lungs when breath is drawn in, 
filling the whol Chest, do at length stick unto the said membrane Pleura, and there 
cleaving is made the faster by the heat of the Feaver. Neither does the motion of 
Lungs hinder that same cleaving too aforesaid, because when the pain is en- 
creased, the Patient breaths short for fear of augmenting the same, and so the Lungs 
are moved very little: whereupon the Lungs are fastened to the part pained, and 
then the Pleurisy turns into a Peripneumonia, or Inflamation of the Lungs, or both 
these Diseases are joyned together; and therefore there follows an easy Expectora- 
tion first of a bloody Humor, by reason of a light Exulceration both of the Pleura, 
and of the membrane of the Lungs, and then of the rest of the matter, which comes 
partly out of the side, partly from the Excrement of the Lungs Nutriment, or from 
impurity of the mass of blood, passing by its circular motion through the Lungs: 
whence it is, that so great a quantity of a Cholerick and Flegmatick Humor flows, 
which is spit up with Coughing. 
But if the Lungs do not cleave to the side, the blood-watry Humor being shed 
into the Cavity of the Chest, and scarce ever drawn back again, there is bred an 
Empyema; which is it be not voided of it self, it must be let out by opening the side; 
which Operation somtimes lucks wel.
T 2 So 

100 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book lII. 
The difference 
of a Pleurisie, 
and Peripneu- 
monia. 
So that according to the Doctrine of Hippocrates, whom Heropbilus (as Cæ- 
lius Aurelianus relates) and Cornelius Celsus do follow, there is a true Pleurisie, 
if there be joyned thereunto, an Inflamation of one side of the Lungs; it both sides 
be pained, it is a true Peripneumonia, or Universal Inflamation of the Lungs, be- 
cause the whol Lungs are affected both in the right, and left side; and continually 
beating upon the Ribs, they are apt to infect them with the blood-watry Humor 
wherewith they abound. Wherefore the Pleurisy, and the Inflamation of the 
Lungs, are Diseases of a brotherly Kindred, which help one another to destroy the 
Patient, or to comfort him, according as the Constitution of the Lungs is weak or 
strong; and as they are assisted with Remedies, especially, liberal blood-let- 
ting- 
Neither can the matter causing the Pleurify, be transferred, or propagated by any 
other waies into the Lungs by any Metastasis, or Epigenesis. Howbeit, we see in 
dead bodies, the diseased Pleura ten times thicker than ordinary, which argues that 
the seat of the Disease was there. I deny not but that it may be communicated to 
the Lungs, and chat the Pleurisie may degenerate into a Peripneumonia, or Infla- 
mation of the Lungs, after the manner aforesaid.
On which side
the blood is to
be taken away
in a Pleurisie?
Touching blood-letting, there has been for an hundred and fifty yeers, an eager 
contention between the Modern Physicians of France, Italy, and Germany, from 
what part blood is to be drawn in a true Pleurisie, whether on the same side that is 
pained, or on the other side. At last, the Opinion of Hippocrates confirmed with 
the Authority of Galen, has prevailed, and got Victory over the Doctrine of the 
Arabian Physitians. The Physicians of Paris, and al true Artists, do follow Hip- 
pocrates; for they let blood on the Arm, of the same side which is pained. After 
three or four times letting blood in the Arm, for Revulsion sake, a Vein may be ope- 
ned in the Foot; but the diseased side must be first disburdened. 
Out of what
Vein?
In blood-letting, we chuse our Vein, because the Patient is sooner eased by ope- 
ning the a Basilica Vena, if we consider the Rectitude of the Vessels by the Fibres: 
for this Vein is a continuation of the b Axillary Trunk, which produces the c Chest- 
Vein, which glides through the external parts of the Chest, and is joyned to the 
Extremities of the Solitary Vein called Azygos, This was formerly declared by 
Gordonius, a Physitian of Montpelier. Ludovicus Duretus has confirmed the 
same with Histories, in his Commentaries upon the Practice of Hollerius.
Diseases of the
Mediastinum.
Inflamation,
Impostume, 
The Mediastinum is subject to divers Diseases. Its Membranes are inflamed as 
in the Pleurisie, because of the neer Neighbor-hood of the Heart, and the commu- 
nion of substance with the Pericardium. The Quittor therein collected, makes an 
Impottume, which is drawn out by perforation of the Breast-bone, or by an Instru- 
ment fitted for that purpose. 
Wind.
Winds also are somtimes shut up within the Cavity
of these parts,, which do vex, and torment the Chest, and pierce it through as it 
were. 
Pericardium 
Inflamed, 
The Pericardium may also be inflamed, with much pain, and no little danger be- 
cause it is neer the Heart; which therefore is subject to frequent Swounings; and 
then the pulse is quicker, the Feaver stronger, the thirst more vehement than in  the
Pleurisie, or in the Inflamation of the Lungs. 
Full of Humor
Oftentimes abundance of moisture is collected therein, which causes Suffocati- 
on, and over-whelms the Heart. If thou canst not draw away the said moisture 
with such Medicines as purge wheyish Humors; what if you should boar an hole in 
the breast-bone, a Thumbs breadth distant from the Sword-like Gristle? because 
the Pericardium is there fastened, that the heart may hang pendulous. A doubt- 
ful Cure, is better than certain Desperation: it is better to try a doubtful Remedy 
than none at all, where there it no hope of help, save in some extraordinary prov- 
dence of God.
Dificient of
Humor. 
If there be no water at al in the Pericardium, the Heart pines away by little and 
little, as it has been observed in many Patients.
Worms. 
Certain it is, that Worms are bred in the Pericardium, which feed upon the
Heart, and are destroyed by the use of Scordium, Petrus Salius Diversus has
treated


Chap. 8. Of the Midrif or Diaphragma. 101 
treared of this Dilease. Neither is it any absurdity, that worms should be found 
within the Ventricles of the Heart; howbeit they are bred in the Vena Cava and 
come from thence into the Heart. 
Seeing the Heart hangs upon the Breast-bone, it wil not be unprofitable to ap- 
ply Topick Medicaments, and Fomentations, whether hot or cold, made to streng- 
then the Heart, unto this part, according as the Disease wherewith the heart is trou- 
bled, shal require. 
a T. 24. f. I. CC.  b T. 12. f. I. BB.  c f. I. ll. oo.  d f. I. aaa. 
Chap. 5. Of the Midrif, or Diaphragma.
Midrifs 
Scituation.
THe Method of; Dissection has brought us to the a Midrif, the principal Instru- 
ment of free Breathing, which separates the Chest from the Belly like a Par- 
tition wall, being tied coal the bastard Ribs, to two of the true Ribs, and to the: 
Sword-like Gristle; and being on this manner oblickly stretched round about, it 
sends forth two b fleshy Productions somewhat longish, even to the utmost 
Vertebra's of the Loyns.
Substance. 
It is made up of Flesh, and a c Sinewy membrane, which Is placed in the Centre 
thereof, the rest of its compass being fleshy, and of the Nature of 2 muscle. On 
that part which is towards the belly, it is covered with a membrane of the Perito- 
neum: on the other side, towards the Chest, it is Compassed with the Pleura.
Shape. 
The Sinewy Circle is placed in the midft, to strengthen that part, that it may bear 
point of the Heart beating thereupon, and that it may bear up the Liver: for 
the Liver hangs fastened to the Diaphragma, which is drawn upwards within the 
Chest; by help of the Mediastimm: for the Figure of the Diaphragma, or midrif 
toWards the belly, is hollow, within the Chest, it is bunching out.
Vessels. 
It receives a Veins, and b Arteries, termed Phrenicæ, from the Cava, and Aorta. 
It has two notable e Nerves, which caking their Rise between the fourth and 
first Vertebra's of the Neck, are inferred into the Sinewy Centre of the Dia- 
phragma.
Motion. 
Seeing the midrif is a muscle of a peculiar Nature by it self, so that there is not 
such another in the whol Body, it has a perpetual motion like the Heart, if not so 
fast an one: for it is dilated and contracted; somtimes slowly, and softly; other 
Whiles swiftly and violently. Somtimes it is moved alone with slow and soft brea- 
thing, but more often with the Lungs when the body is stirred with exercise; but 
in violent Respiration, it is compelled to follow the motion of the Chest. 
Hippocrates cals che midrif the Fan of the Belly, because by its motion of di- 
latation and contraction, descending and ascending, it fans both those Cavities.
How it moves 
in Respiration.
Seeing therefore there are two parts of Respiration;  Inspiration, and Expirati- 
on, it is worth our Enquiry in which part the midris is moved. By motion I Uhder-  
stand contraction.  
ln the Inspiration or drawing in the wind, while it is brought unto a right line, 
that is to say, of hollow, is made streight, then the midrif is contracted. In the 
Expiration, or letting go of our breach, it is slackened, raiseth it self upwards, and 
streight or even, becomes hollow. When it is moved alone, it directs our free 
Respiration, which is done by an insensible, and invisible motion of the Chest, while 
the whol body does rest in peace; otherwise, in violent fetching the breach, it fol- 
lows the motion of the Chest, which is elevated, and depressed (as we see after run- 
ning) not only by the Intercostal muscles, but also by the greater muscles stret- 
ched out upon the Chest, and by the muscles of the Abdomen, In which case the 
midris is haled, and forced to follow the violent motion of the Chest.
a T. 10. f. 6. CC.  b T. 10. f. 6.BB.c T.10.f.7. AB. 
The  


102 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Its Diseases
are. 
The Midrife is somtimes Diseased of it self, somtimes by accident as Sympathing 
with the Diseases of other Parts.
Distemper. 
Of it self it is troubled with an hot or cold Distemper, also with Inflammations 
and Impostumes. And it communicates its disorders to other Parts neighbouring 
thereupon, and to the Brain, and upon this Account it is wont to cause a 
Phrenzy.
Tumors. 
Fernelius saw hard Tumors fixed in the Root of the Midrif, which wasted 
away the Patients by a slow Consumption, without any Phrenzy or other 
Dosage.
Inflamation. 
When the Midrife is Inflamed, an acute Feaver does begin to shew it self: under 
the short Ribs towards the Midrif a palpitation or panting is selt, the Hypochon- 
dria are drawn together by reason of the Membrane of the Peritoneum: the 
Breathing is unequal, somtimes swift, somtimes slow, somtimes great and som- 
times little, and at length Convulsions happen.
Wounds. 
The Midrif being wounded causes the Patient to die laughing, if we beleive Hip- 
pocrates, Pliny and other later Physitians. 
Wounds inflicted upon the fleshy Part of the Midrif are not so dangerous and 
deadly, as those in the sinewy or Nervous Part, and therefore ulisses (in Homer) 
intending to give the Cyclops a deadly wound, chose the place where the Liver is 
fastened unto the Midrif, as Galen has observed. 
In an universal Palsey of the whol Body the Midrif is affected, which is known 
by dificulty of breathing.
Chap. 6. Of the Lungs or Lights. 
Their 
Substance.
Vessels.
THe Lungs or Lights are the Instruments of breathing and framing the Voyce: 
to which end they are framed of a substance light, soft, Spungy, whitish 
without, and reddish within, interwoven with many Vessels which 
are spred through the whol substance thereof; such as are the Bronchia 
or a Pipes of the Wezand, and the Pipes of the Vena b Arteriosa and of the Arteria 
c Venosa, which go so in company, that the Bronchia or Wind-Pipes are Interposed 
between the Veins and Arteries.
Scituation.
Motion. 
The d Lungs are Scituate within the Chest, and do with the Heart fil up Both 
the Cavities thereof, while they are dilated to fetch in breath but they leave the 
Cheft Empty, while they are contracted to expel the sooty or superflous 
breath.
Division. 
These interchangable motions of the Lungs are perpetual and never cease from 
the beginning of our Life until we Breath our last.
Shape. 
Nature has Distinguished the Lungs into two Parts, placed in the several Cavi- 
ties of the Chest, and she has divided each Part into sundry Lobes, Laps, or Scollops, 
for the facility of motion and for their preservation, for by this means they do more
easily spread abroad (as it were) their wings; and one Lap or Scollop being hurt or 
corrupted, the other may remain whol and found. 
If you take a diligent view of the Lungs after they are taken out of the Chest, you 
shal see that each Part of each Cavity does in its shape represent the form of an Oxes 
Hoofe, for it is cloven and convex or bunching out in the external Part, and hollow 
in that Part on which it touches the Back.  
Membrane.
It is girt about with a very thin e Membrane, which is manifestly porous and ful 
of little holes, that being pressed and overburthened in suffocations, it may disbur- 
then it self into the Cavity of the Chest, and also suck in again such Excrementiti- 
ous moisture, as shal there at any time abound. 
This

Chap. 6. Of the Lungs or Lights. 103 
Peculiar man-
ner of nourish-
ment.
This Bowel alone is nourished after another fashion than the rest of the Body, 
for it borrows its blood from the Heart, from whence it has Vessels and not from 
Vena Cava. And therefore those Physitans are shamefully overseen who in 
Diseases of the Lungs, are wont to say that they are oppressed by an afflux of blood, 
shed thereinto by an innumerable company of Veins. 
They cannot receive Humors from the Head Unless with coughing, so that where 
there is no cough, the Lungs are affected only by that blood which comes from the 
Heart.
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Excellency of
the Lungs
The Lungs are excreamly necessary for the maintenance of Life, For we live 
so long as we Breath, and no longer: Nor is it enough meerly to breath we must, 
breath easily, or ic wil go ill with our Heart and our whol body. For in Diseases, 
difficult breathing is of great moment, and was more regarded by Hippocrates than 
the pulse: And Galen composed three admirable Bookes of Difficult Breathing, 
according to the Doctrin of Hippocrates, howbeit they are obscure and not to be 
understood save by skilful Physitians and Anatomists. 
I wil give you a little tast of them, after that I have laid open the Diseases of the 
Lungs.
Why the Lungs
are so subject
to Fluxions. 
Because the substance of the Lungs is soft and Spungy above that of the other 
Bowels, therefore it is more subject to Fluxions than the rest which flow either from  
the brain, or from the Bowels, by way of the Heart. 
They lie in the middle space between the Head and the Midrif, not only between 
the Hammer and the Anvil, as the Proverb is, but between two Hammers, where- 
with they are beat Upon and hurt on both tides: whil the Head distils upon the 
Lungs, and the Liver affords impure or over plentyful Blood unto the Heart, 
which the Heart spues and casts back into the Lungs, whereby they are infected and 
overwhelmed. 
Which infection of the Lungs springs not from the Heart, but from the distem- 
pered and ill disposed Bowels, which suggest unto the Heart very impure blood, 
Whose vitiousness the Heart is not able to correct, save after many Circu- 
lations. 
The chief dis
eaes of the 
Lungs.
In the mean whil the Lungs are greivously offended by the foresaid blood passing 
through the substance thereof, tor they are subservient unto the Heart as it were in  
the Nature of an Emunctory Emissary or Common-shore, whiles the filth of the 
Heart flowes unto the Lungs with the Blood, Whereupon the Lungs are subject 
to Sundry Diseases. 
Distemper.
Inflamation.
Consumtion.
For they are troubled with an hot or cold distemper, with a Cholerick and 
Flegantick Tumor, and a frequent Inflammation called Peripneumonia, or at least 
with an inflammatory disposition;  also with Impostumes and Ulcers, which bring 
the Consumption: for from Spitting of Blood comes spitting of quitter, and from
thence the Consumption.
Push.
Vomica. 
Also they are subject to a certain kind of Push or rising which in the end 
turnes into a secret mischievous Impostum termed Vomica, of which few 
escape.
If the Quarter be derived from the Lungs into the Heart, unless it pass readily into 
the Aorta, it suddainly choakes or stifles the Patient. If it be carried into 
the right Ventricle, it Causes the greater danger, because it cannot be to easily Pur-
ged out.
Asthma
Its kinds. 
Furthermore the Lungs are obstructed in the Asthma either perpetual or coming 
by fits, which causes difficulty of breathing, which as it is more or less, is distinguish- 
ed with different names. The lesser is termed Dyfpnea; the greater, 
when the Patient cannot breath save standing or fitting upright; is termed Or-
thopnæa.
Often 


104 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III.
Cough
Oftentimes the Patient is vexed also with a cough, which is somtimes moderate 
and somtimes vehement, with great wheezing and ready to choak the Patient, 
which Springs from a cruel feirce Catarrh or sudden and plentiful Defluxion. 
Whereupon by reason of the extreme troublesomness of the Cough which shakes 
the Lungs, there arises that disposition termed Spadon Vasorum, or
a dilatation of the Vessels, being a dangerous and formidable sort of Aneu- 
risma.
Whether Blood-
letting is good
in these Cases? 
In the Peripneumonia or Inflammation of the Lungs, there is no smal dis- 
pute about Blood letting, for it is written that Blood must be drawn from the com- 
mon Veins. Now there is none of those Veins which are usually opened, that 
communicates with the Veins of the Lungs; neither are there any branches distri- 
buted trom the Vena Cava into the Lungs: which has by Galen in many places 
been disputed against Erasistratus. 
The motion likewise of Nature shewes the same: for whereas in Diseases of the
Bowels and in burning Feavers the Crisis is wont to happen by bleeding at the Noise, 
in a Peripneumonia there is no such Crisis, because the Veins of the 
Nose from whence blood is wont to Issue, have no Communion with the 
Lungs.
Affirmed.  
If it be true that Blood naturally does pass from the right Ventricle of the Heart
unto the Lungs, that it may be brought into the left Ventricle, and from thence into 
the Aorta: and if the Circulation of the Blood be acknowledged, who sees not 
that in Diseases of the Lungs, the blood flowes thither in greater quantity than ordi' 
nary, and oppresses the Lungs, unless it be first liberally taken away, and after- 
wards at several times, a little at a time be let out, to ease the laid Lungs: which
was the advice of Hippocrates, who when the Lungs were swelled, did take blood 
from al Parts of the Body, from the Head, Nose, Tongue, Armes, Feet; that 
the quantity thereof might be diminished, and the Course thereof drawn from 
the Lungs. 
He himself in Diseases of the Lungs, bids us draw blood, til the Body were 
Blood-less, and in one that had a Consumption, when he saw that the corruption 
of the Blood infected and corrupted the Lungs, he took away blood in so great a 
quantity, that the Patients body remained quite empty of the same, in a
manner.  
Supposing that the Blood circulates, the Lungs are easily emptied by Phleboto- 
my. If the Circulation be denied, I cannot see how blood may be from thence drawn 
back; for if it should flow back by the Vena a Arteriosa into the b right Ventricle, the 
c Signia shaped Valves do hinder it, and the d three forked little Valves, do hinder 
the recourse thereof, from the right Ventricle of the Heart into the Vena Cava. 
And therefore when the Veins of the Armes and Feet are opened, blood is drawn 
from the Lungs by reason of the Circulation thereof; and consequently the Opini- 
on of Fernelius comes to nothing, namely that in Diseases of the Lungs, blood 
should be taken rather from the right Arm than the left; because the blood cannot 
return into the Vena Cava, save by breaking two doors and Bolts, placed in the 
Heart. 
a T. II. f. 2. EEG.  b T.II. f. 3. DD.  c T. II. f. 4. BBB. d T. II.
f.3.CCC.
Some Causes 
of Consumption 
of the Lungs. 
Ulcers of the Lungs do often happen by reason of a fierce cough, caused by very
sharpe Seroficies, or by Spitting of Blood: which if it come from an opening of the 
mouthes of the Veines by reason of Aboundance of blood, it is not so much to be
feared, as when it proceeds from eating asunder the Coats of the Veins, by the 
acrimony of Humors.
Nature 


Chap. 7. Of Respiration, Or fetching of Breath 105
Why the Lungs
are distinguish-
ed into Lobes or
Laps. 
Nature in this case out of Pitty, that our life might be preserved, has distinguish- 
ed the Lungs into divers pipes and sundry Lobes, Laps or Scollups that the infecti- 
on might not spread over the whol Body of the Lungs which is usual in al continued 
or evenly united bodies. And therefore we see many that have Ulcers 
in their Lungs do live long, if they have but an indifferent Care of them- 
selves. 
A twofold
Circulation of
the Blood.
If the Circulation of the blood be allowed, so that it passes often through the 
Lungs, &c not through the Septum Medium or Tartition-Wal of the Heart, we must 
maintain a twofold Circulation of the blood: the one is performed by the Heart 
and Lungs, whiles the blood spirting from the right Ventricle of the Heart is carried 
through the Lungs that it may come unto the left Ventricle of the Heart, 
(for it is squirted out of the Heart and returnes thither again) the other is a longer 
Circulation, by which the blood flowing from the left Ventricle of the Heart, com- 
passes the whole body by the Arteries and Veins, that it may return into the right 
Ventricle of the Heart. He that approves of One of these Circulations, cannot 
deny the other. 
The Lungs as it were do hang upon and are firmly fastned to the claves and the 
Brest-bone for they do not depend or hang by the Aspera Arteria, for so in a 
Violent Cough and when the Lungs are over burdened, the Wesand or Wind- 
PiPe and Parts fastened thereunto would be torn in peices. Howbeit the Lungs 
and Heart being inflamed (according to Hippocrates) if the Lungs fal to one side, 
Patient faints away, lies Cold and senceless and dies within the third or 
fourth day. If the Heart be not inflamed, the Patient lives longer, and some 
escape.
Why Old Peo-
ple are short 
Breathed.
Seeing the Substance of the Lungs ought to be light and soft to Facilitate respi- 
ration; and in old, People it becomes dry and hard, either through the dryness of 
their temper, or by being filled with Flegm: this is the reason of that shortness of 
Breath we see in Old Men, which ushers them to their Grave. 
Chap. 7. Of Respiration, or fetching of Breath.
Neccssity of
Respiration.
THe proper action of the Lungs is breathing: which we must consider how it 
ought to be in bodies that are in health, that we may discern faults thereof, 
it is depraved. In our whole Practice, especially if you regard acute Dis- 
eased their is no Disease or Symptom so usual as difficulty in breathing, it is wel 
for the Patient, if in al Diseaes, especiaily acute ones, he breath easily, because life 
is inseparable from Respiration, according to Galen in his 6. Book of the Parts Dis- 
eased And if with al the Patient Sleeps kindly and sweetly, and feels no pain in 
the noble Parts of his body, it is to be hoped the Disease wil end wel, be- 
cause Hippocrates never knew any one die, in whom these three conditions were
found.
Its twofold.
Free 
and
Forced.
Now Respiration or breathing is twofold, free,or forced, Free is that whereby the 
Air is gently drawn in and Issued out, without any remarkable motion of the Chest. 
And this depends only upon the Midrif, the Ribbs and whol Chest never moving: 
unless hapily the lower bastard Ribs are gently stirred and this kind of breathing is
truly natural. 
The second sort of breathing. Which is forced and violent: is partly natural, 
partly against Nature. Natural, when it depends upon our own power, so that 
we can make it quicker or slower, as when We pus out our wind with a long blast, 
and when we hold our breath. It is against Nature, when it depends not upon our 
wil but upon the violence of the Disease. In this kind of Respiration the whol 
Chest ls moved by al the Muscles. and the Midris, to avoid the oppression and suffo- 
cation of the Lungs and Heart, which desire Air to cool them, and that their 
smoaky Sooty vapours may be expelled.
V There 

106 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III. 
Parts of Na-
tural respira-
tion
Inspiration
Expiration 
There are two parts of Natural Respiration; Inspiration, and Expiration. 
Inspiraiton is caused by drawing in the Air, and the dilatation of the Chest by the 
Ascent thereof: Expiration, is a breathing out of fuliginous, or scoty Vapors, the 
Chest being drawn together by the descent thereof. Between these two motions, is 
interposed a two-fold Pause, or Rest, viz. The space between the drawing in, and 
blowing out of the breath; and the like space between the blowing out of the 
breath, and the drawing it in again as in the Pulse there is a two-fold Rest, ter- 
med Perisystole. 
Its three Or-
gans.
In Respiration, or breathing, Galen writes that three Organs are to be considered: 
The Principal Mover, viz. the Heart; The Secondary Movers, namely, the Muscles; 
and the Things moved, viz. the Chest and Lungs. The Organs by which the mo- 
tion is performed, are the Animal Spirits, and the Nerves.
Wherein natu-
ral Respiration
Consists 
Now that unnatural, and disordered breathing, may be discerned, we Must princi- 
pally learn to know, wherein the Natural manner of fetching breath, does consist, 
Viz. In the moderation, and equability of Inspiration, and Exspiration, and of 
those things whereby Respiration is performed. 
Now these are four; Motion, Rest, that which is moved, and that which by 
the motion, is drawn in, and carried forth. That Respiration wil therefore be mo- 
derate, wherein we shal observe a Mediocrity of motion and Rest, and or the di- 
stention of the Chest, and or the matter it self, which is drawn in, and breathed out, 
and wherein Persons in Health appear no waies changed from what they were wont 
to be.  
Differences of 
unnatural Re- 
spiration. 
And this Natural Respiration ought to be the Rule of the contrary, which is not 
natural, viz. of the hurt Relpiration, and of that which is in moderate. Now 
Respiration is hurt as many waies as there are parts which make up Natural Respi- 
ration, viz. Motion, Rest, Swiftness. So that the hurts of Respirati-
on, are these following, namely, Defections from Natural Motion; Rarity, and 
Frequency of the Rest; Greatness, and smalness of lnspiration and Expiration; 
Plenty, and penury of the matter drawn in, or breathed out, with cold, or 
heat. 
Wherefore al difficulty of breathing, consists in Magnitude, or Paucity; Fre- 
quence, or Rarity; Swiftness, or Slowness; and consequently, Respiration is said 
to be faulty, when it is too great, or too little; too slow, or two swift; too fre- 
quent, or too rare; too hot, or too cold. 
Also these Defections, as wel in excess, as defect, are to be considered, either in 
both parts of Relpiration, or in one alone; also some are little without, and great 
within; others great without, and little within: and some are great, swift, and fre-
quent; others contrarily, are little, seldom, and flow; and some are doubled, both 
in drawing, and rendring back the breath. These are the Compound Differences 
of Respiration hurt. 
Whether Per-spiration may
supply the use
of Respiration? 
If Respiration fail, the Question is. Whether Perspiration can supply the defect 
thereof? Galen saies it may, and he describes Perspiration, to be an evacuation of 
Spirit, or Air, by the Arteries which are disperse into the Habit of the Body, by
receiving in of Air, and expelling fuliginous Vapors. For Hippocrates has written 
that the whol body is perspirabie, within and without. And the Author of Trans-  
piration, or Perspiration, is counted to be the Heart, the Instruments are the Arte- 
ries; the Pores of the Skin, are the Passages by which the Transpiration is 
made. 
But I very much doubt, whether Perspiration can supply the Office of Respirati- 
on for a time, the Heart not being moved, because I cannot perswade my self, that
the Air can pass so far as the Heart, by the smal Arteries, unless they did gape very
wide, seeing it would meet with the Arterial blood, to stop its course. The Arte- 
ries may indeed expel the footy vapors of their blood, but it is hard for them to 
draw the Air in again.  
And if Perspiration be hindred by suppression of the smoaky vapors, then Putrid 
Feavers are wont to arise; as Galen has observed in Book II. of his Method. in
which

Chap. 8. Of the Heart. 107 
which case, blood-letting is good for Ventilation, and must be repeated, if need 
be.
Unnatural Re-
spiration som- 
times needful
in healthy per-
sons.
Unnatural Respiration, is somtmes necessary in those that have their Health, to 
expel smoaky vapors by forcible blowing out of the breath; or to expel the Excre- 
ments of the Belly, or to force out a Child by holding the breath. Exsufflation, or 
forcible puffing out of the breath, answers to Expiration and holding of the breath 
is a long Inspiration, as much as the party is able to endure, for some necessary me; 
and it is performed ( which is strange ) by one very smal muscle, which shuts the 
Arythenois, and the Glottis. 
Chap. 8. Of the Heart.
Nobility of the
Heart. 
THe Heart is the Principal and most Noble Bowel of the whol Body, the 
Fountain of Life-giving Nectar; by the Influx whereof, the vitality, or 
lively force of al the parts, is recreated, and cherished; it is the first that have and 
the last that dies: by the benefit whereof, al the parts of the body do live and 
subsist.
Its Substance 
And therefore it, is, thar Nature has framed this principal Part with admirable 
Workmanship both without and within, of a a fleshy substance, strong, and thick, 
inter woven with al sorts of Fibres, and because it is the Seat of Native Heat, left it 
should become dry, and patched up, she has. moistened it with fat placed round a- 
bout, and watered the same by circumfusion of a wheyish Liquor. 
a T. II. f.-- B. 
Its Scituation.
It is scituate in the middie of the Chest, hanging by the a Mediastinum, and b Pe- 
ricardium. For those two parts do joyn in this Office, as hath been said in our 
Chapter of the Mediastinum. 
Bigness
The Heart is alwaies of the same greatness; in some strong men it is more smal 
ahd solid, than ordinary: in feebler Persons it is greater, and of a looser subtsance, 
as in some men, and frequently in women.
Shape 
it is shaped like a Pine Apple: having a broad bottom, and growing pointed to- 
wards the top. 
Vessel;
The broad end is called the Basis or bottom, which receives four 
Vessels; the Vena c Cava, running through the Breast, and opened neer the Heart, 
fastened thereunto; the Vena d Artenosa; the e Aorta and the Arteria f Ve- 
nosa. 
Ears. 
In the Basis we find little Cases, or Covers placed by the Vessels, which carry 
into the Heart: They are called Auriculæ Cordis, the g Ears of the Heart, 
and are hollow. In grown persons, the right Ear is larger than the left: but in the 
child in the womb, and al Infants, the left Ear is larger than the right. 
The other end of the Heart is termed the Conus, or pointed end. There appear 
Veins and Arteries h creeping upon the surface of the Heart, which seem ordained to 
repair the Fat as it spends.
Action viz.
the pulse. 
Before we proceed to the inner Structure of the Heart, we are to consider how it 
is moved: For its Action is Motion, or Pulsation; because look what blood it re- 
ceives in, it drives the same out by pulsation.
Systole.
Diastole. 
There are therefore two parts of the Hearts motion; Systole, and Diastole; or 
Contraction, and Dilatation: when it takes in blood, it is dilated or widened; 
when it expels the same, it is contracted, or drawn together: between both which 
motions, there intercedes a pause, or resting time, which is termed Peri-Systole. 
How these motions are caused, is a doubtful Question. 
a T. II. f. 4. AA.  b T. II. f. I A.  T. II. f. I C.  d f. 2. EE. G.  e f. I.
M. f. 2. C.  f f. 2. HH.  gf. -- CC.  h f. 2. by B. 

Cause of the
pulse, according
to our Author.
Rejecting the various Opinions of others, I wil tel you how I conceive this moti- 
tion is performed. It is probable, that the Heart being widened, cannot receive the
V 2 blood, 



108 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III.
blood, unless its dilatation be made by drawing back the Basis thereof to the Cone, 
that the Vessels may shed their blood, and the heart draw the same to it self. In the 
Systole. the heart is contracted, and the blood received, is thrust: out; and then the 
Heart becomes narrower, and longer than it was before. And because it is shut up 
in the Pericardium or Heart-case, which is fastened circular-wise to the Sinewy 
Centre ot the Midrif, with its Cone, or pointed end, it smites the Nervy Centre of 
the Midrif, and with its Basis, or broad end, and the Aorta sticking out, it smites the 
Breast: at the same instant, when it is extended, and prolonged.
How necessary
the circulation
of the blood is 
to continue the
motions of the
Heart. 
This perpetual motion of the Heart, though it depend in respect of its produ- 
ction, upon the inbred faculty thereof, yet can it not alwaies continue, save by the 
coming in of blood, out of which, the Heart frames the vital Spirit: and in case at 
every pulse the Heart receive one drop of blood, or two, which it casts into the 
Aorta, and that in an hours space, the Heart pulses two thousand times, it must  
needs be, that a great quantity of blood, or al the blood in the Vessels, should pass 
through the Heart within the space of twelve or fifteen hours. 
Now this quantity may come to fifteen, or twenty pounds of blood, which is as 
much as is contained in the Vessels, and therefore it must needs be that in the space 
of twenty four hours, the whol mass of Blood is twice or thrice passed through, the 
Heart, according as the motion of the Heart is quicker, or slower.
Whether the
blood do pass
from the right
Ventricle of the
Heart unto the
Lungs.
And that this Circular Motion of the blood, might be performed with the grea- 
ter commodity, and facility, William Harvey, an English man, the kings Phy- 
sitian, the Author and Inventor of this motion of the blood; and Joannes Walæus,
a Professor of Leyden, and most eager Defender, and Protector thereof, wil have
the blood to be carried through the Lungs from the right, unto the left Ventricle  
of the Heart, not allowing thac it should pass through the Septum, or Partition 
wal between the Ventricles of the Heart; and that the whol mass of Blood, 
in an hour, or two hours space, is circulated through the Heart, and the whol Body: 
which I do not allow of, and I have els-where laid down my reasons of the impossi- 
bility, and inconveniency of such a motion. 
The Heart is
the Original of
Vena Cava.
The Liver of
Vena Porta
They have
different blood
in them.
When I had observed that the Trunk of the Vena Cava was separated from the 
Liver, running continually From the Jugulum, to the Os Sacrum, without any in- 
terruption, and that it passed not through the Liver, as we may see with our Eyes, 
and perceive also by thrusting a smal stick thereinto; I came to be of Opinion, that 
the Vena Cava did spring from the Heart, as the Vena Porta takes its rise from 
the Liver; and that two sorts of blood were contained in those Veins, though both 
of those sorts are labored, and wrought in the Liver: the one of these sorts of blood 
being sent into the Porta, the other by a branch rooted in the Liver, twice as smal 
as the Trunk of Vena Cava, carried unto the Heart.
What kind of
blood is circu-
lated? 
The blood which is contained in the Vena Porta, is not circulated, although it 
have a flux, and reflux within its own Channels, and communicate with the Cælia- 
cal Arteries, which are joyned one to another by mutual Anastomoses, 
Within thole Vesseis, the blood may pass to and fro reciprocally; but it does 
not run out according to the longitude to the body; neither is it in such a sense cir- 
culated.
In what Ves-
sels? 
And therefore the Circulation which is made in the Heart, does borrow its matter
from the Liver by the Vena Cava, The Circulatory Vessels, are the Aorta, and 
Cava; neither do their branches receive that Circulation, because the blood being 
shed into al the parts of the second and third Region, does remain there to nourish 
the said parts; neither does it flow back unto the greater Vessels, unlels it be revel- 
led by force, when there is great want of blood in the larger Vessels, or when it ls
stimulated into some violent motion, and so flows unto the greater Circulatory 
Vessels.
After what
manner? 
And so the blood which is brought from the Liver unto the right Ventricle of the 
Heart, does pass through the Partition wall of the two Ventricles, into the left 
Ventricle. 
I con- 

Chap. 8. Of the Heart. 109
How the cir-
culation is per-
formed.
I confess that in a violent Circulation the blood is carried through the Lungs un- 
to the left ventricle of the Heart, where it is forcibly ejected into the Aorta, that it 
may afterwards be carried into the greater Veins of the Limbs, which communicate 
by mutual An anastomoses with the Arteries; and then from the Veins it slows up in- 
to the right Ventricle of the Heart, and so there is made a perfect Circulation, by 
the continual flux and reflux of the blood. 
So that the blood in the Veins, does naturally, and perpetually ascend, or return 
unto the Heart, the blood ot the Arteries naturally, and continually descends, or de- 
parts from the Heart.
Howbeit, if the smaller Veins of the Arms and Legs, shal be emptied of blood, the 
blood ot the Veins may descend to succeed in the place of that which is taken away, 
as I have cleerly demonstrated against Harvey, and Walæus. 
No man can deny the mutual Anastomoses of the Veins and Arteries, seeing that 
Galen has said it, and demonstrated the same by Experiments, and our dayly Ex- 
perience confirms the same. 
Hippocrates himself, in his third Book of the Joynts, takes notice of this commu- 
nion of the Veins and Arteries, in a Discourse by it self.
How necessa-
ry the circula-
tion of the
blood is.
YoU See how necessary it is for the blood to circulate, that the motion of the 
Heart may not cease; and how this Circulation may be performed without confu- 
sion, and perturbation of the Humors, and without destroying the Ancient Art of 
Healing. 
And therefore the Circular motion of the blood is necessary, to continue the mo- 
tion of the heart; as in Mils, the Water must perpetually fal upon the Wheel to 
make it turn about; also to warm again, and restore the strength of the blood, 
which is decayed by the loss of Spirits: dispersed up and down the body; whereas in 
the Heart, it is refurnished with new Spirits: and that the Heart being the Foun- 
tain of Native Heat, may be moistened with a perpetual Dew, left by little and lit— 
tle, it should parch, and wither away, for want of that dewy moisture, or Life- 
giving Nectar. 
By the Circulation of the blood in the Heart, the Causes of Life and Death, are 
more easily declared,chan by the Humidum Perimigenium, or Original Moisture 
bred in the Heart when the Child is formed; which is so little chat it is soon consu- 
med, and the perpetual motion of the Heart continuing day and night without cea- 
sing, would at length wear away the Substance of the Heart, unless by a perpetual 
flowing in of the circulated blood, it were moistened, and repaired. 
Whether the
Heart and Ar-
teries are mo-
ved at the
same time?
Howbeit, we must hold that the Heart and Arteries do move by Course, one af- 
ter another not being moved at the same instant with the same kind of motion; but 
takiug their turns, and performing their work interchangably; for when the Heart 
sends out the blood, the Arteries receive it, and transmit it into the Veins; not that 
is expelled the same instant, but that which is neerest the Veins. 
This being granted, these parts must of necessity be moved one after another, and 
the swelling motion of the Artery when it rises under our Finger, is dilatation, or 
widening, and not contraction; although it seem very like the pulse which the 
Heart makes, when it contracts it self. 
The right Ven-
tricle of the
Heart.
Having explained the Circulation of the Blood, We must now open the Heart, 
which you shal see divided into two Ventricles by the Septum Medianum, or 
a Middle Partition: The one is termed the b Right Ventricle, being the wider and 
softer: The other the c Left, being harder, narrower, and compassed with a thicker 
wal, reaching as far as the Cone, or Point of the Heart, which the Right does not. 
The Right Ventricle receives the Vena d Carva and the Vena e Arteriosa. 
Carva pours blood into the Heart; the Vena Arteriosa carries back all, or a part 
thereof into the Lungs.
To the Orifices of the Cava, are adjoyned certain three-pointed f Valves, or 
Shutters which hinder the going back of the blood. The Orifice of the Vena Ar- 
teriosa,


110 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III.
teriosa, is compassed with three Valves, or Shutters, shaped like an old- fashioned 
g Greek Sigma, which hinder the reflux of the blood. 
a T II. f. -- DD.  b f. -- CC. f. 3. DD. f. 4. CC.  e f -- B. f. 5. CC.
f. 6. DD.  f. I. C. f. -- E.  e f. 2. EEG. f. 4. A. T. 12. f. 3. all  f T. II. 
f. 3. CCC.  gf 4. BBB 
The left Ven-
tricle of the
Heart.
Its Vessels.
The Left Ventricle receives two Arterial Vessels, the a Aorta and the Arteria 
b Venosa. Which latter, according to the Doctrine of some Anatomists, carries 
blood from the Lungs into the left Ventricle of the Heart, or  carries Air prepared 
in the Lungs, into the said Ventricle, and likewise carries back fuliginous Vapors; 
howbeit, many do not allow the said use.
Their Valves 
The Arteria Veno'a hath in its Orifice, only two c three-pointed Valves, or 
Shutters. The Aoarta carries back Arterial blood out of the left Ventricle of the 
Heart, and its Orifice is stopped by three d Sigma shaped Valves, or Shutters, 
which hinder the blood from returning back again. 
It is to be observed that these three-pointed Valves, or Shutters, are membranous 
neer their Vessel; but they depend upon fleshy Pillar, Which within the Heart 
are like unto Muscles, being fastened to the sides of the partition wall, or Septum of 
the Heart, which remains unmovable saving towards the basis, where it is softer, 
and gives way a lutle, when the Basis is drawn back, in the Diastole, or Dilatation 
of the Heart.  
The Septum
Medium of the 
Heart 
whether the 
blood pass 
through it or 
no? 
The Septum c medium, or Partition-wall of the Heart is porous, ful of little 
holes, which are somtmies manifestly dilcerned toward the Cone, or Point of the 
Heart. It is more probable, according to the Doctrine of Galen, that the blood 
does naturally pass through the said Septum or partition wail, than through the 
Lungs, Howbeit, I deny not, but that in the violent Agitation of the Heart and 
Lungs, the blood is carried through the midst of the said Lungs. 
a T. II. f. I. M. f. 2. C. f. 5. A.  b f. 2. HH. f. 6. A. T. I. e. f. 6. all  c t. II.
 f. 6. CC.  d f. 5. BBB.  e  f. ODD.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Usual Diseases
of the Heart,
are, 
Having finished these Observations, I proceed unto the Diseases of the Heart. 
The Heart (as Pliny saies ) cannot endure long Diseases, nor suffer lingring tor- 
ments. And Galen tels us, That Physitians have not been able to find cut or in- 
veit Medicines able to cure an evil, and malignant distemper which has taken hold of 
the substance of the Heart. Wherefore this part is diligently to be preserved,  
which suffers nor by irs own fault, but by the Impurities or other parts wherewith 
it is infected and corrupted.
Swouning 
Wherefore, if the Heart be supplied with pure, and good blood, and be not infe- 
cted by contagion of the neighboring parts, the Lungs, and the Liver, it flourishes 
most cheerfullv,and causes a very long lite. But by our intemperance we suffer it
nor to continue in Health for the good of the whol body. 
Fainting
And  therfore it is exer- 
cised with divers Diseases, by the lots of strength, that is to say, of Spirits or by 
their Disspation; such as zie Syncope and Leipothymia, or swouning and fainting 
away, which differ only in degrees: Syncope being greater than Leipothumia 
Oftentimes the Heart does counterfeit, and make shew of a kind of Apoplexy, 
but without snoring; neither does it leave a Palsey after it, or any feebleness or 
Body, or mind. 1: this Disease return often with violence, at length it over-whelms
and stifles the Heart, not only because the blood is stopped from going forth, by 
reason of the fulness of the Vessels, but by the Hearts being oppressed by some gross 
substance of the blood, forcibly crowded into the Ventricles of the Heart, stopping 
the pulsative motion of the Heart and Arteries, and causing somtime that the Pati-
ent cannot speak, and bringing him finally to his Grave.  
This Disease is as common among the Germans, as is the Apoplexty, 
by reason of their full, and Champion-like habit of body, contracted by
their dayly Feastings, and liberal drinking, especially at dinner, which lasts til
within  

Chap. 8. Of the Heart. 111. 
wichin Night, they in the mean time taking no care to abate their Plethorick habit 
by liberal blood-letting. Nor is it any wonder, if from so great plenty of blood, 
they fal into an Apoplexy, or the Heart-swoonings aforesaid. Hence depends the 
Explication of che 42. Aphorism of the Second Book.
Palpitation 
The motion of the Heart is depraved in the Palpitation, or Panting thereof, and 
lt is interrupted in Syncope, and Leipothymia.
The Circula
tion intercep-
ted by obstru-
ction of the
Ventricles,
Or of
The Ventricles, and Partition, are oftentimes obstructed, being filled with little 
bit of Flesh or Fat, wherewith the Heart is choaked, the Circular motion of the 
blood being stopped. Somtimes they stick in the right Ear of the Heart: whence  
follows Palpitation, or inequality, or Interception of the Pulse. 
Worms are also bred in che Heart, of which Salius treats. There is a memora- 
ble Story of a certain English man, whole Heart was eaten into by a Worm. You 
may read the Story in Aurelius Severinus.
The Veins. 
The Circulation of the blood is stopped, not only in the Heart, but also in the 
Veins, when they are stopped with very thick blood, or With blood congealed like 
the pith of an Elder stick, as I have often seen it after burning Feavers, and as it 
has been observed by Fernelius.
A Feaver. 
The most frequent Diseases of the Heart are Feavers, wherewith it is inflamed, 
and roasted as it were, so that the Original moisture thereof, becomes exhaust, and 
dried up: for as Ludovicus Duretus saies in his Commentary upon Hippocrates his 
Coick Discourses: We lose more of our strength by a feaver of seven daies continu- 
ance, than by the deprædation of our Natural Heat, in seventy yeers time: a yong 
man dies in feven daies, consumed by a Feaver, who might have Lived seventy 
under the sole Regiment of his Natural Heat. 
Differences of
Feavers
In respect of
the cause, a
Feaver is
Spirital
The History of Feavers belongs to this place, which I shal dispatch in few words. 
The Hot Distemper of the Heart, is termed a Feaver. The Differences of Feavers 
are taken from their conjunct Cause, which is three-fold The Spirits, the Hu- 
mors in the Vessels, and the Humors fixed in the solid parts of the body.  
From the Spirits, a Feaver is termed Spirituosa, or Spirital; from the Humors 
in the Vessels, it is termed Humoralis; and from the Humors fixed in the solid 
Parts, it is termed Hectica.
Humoral. 
Though there be three sorts of Spirits, Natural, Vital, Animal; yet is the Vi- 
tal Spirit alone, which being inflamed, causes the Spirital Feaver. There are four 
Humors contained in the Vessels, whence comes four sorts of Humoral Feavers; 
the Sanguine the Cholefick, the Flegmatick, and the Melanchollick. 
Hectick,
But the 
Hectick Feaver is distinguished by three degreee: For the simple Hectick arises 
fromm the fixed Humor, being only inflamed the middle Hectick is when the said 
Humor begins to wast; and the Hectica Marasmodes, when it is quite exhaust, 
and consumed. 
In respect of
the manner,
Continual,
Intermittent.
The Modi of Feavers, or their manner of afflicting, is two fold: tor either the 
Feaverv is continual, or it intermits; it is putrid, or not putrid; malignant, or
wel-affectd A continual Feaver never ceases burning, til it go wholly away. An 
intermitting Feaver, leaves the Patient some space of time free from burning. 
The Cause of the Continualness of a Feaver, is the plenty of Morbisick matter 
and its nearness to the Heart, and the distance and paucity of the said matter is the 
cause of its intermission. 
Putrid
Imputrid
A Putrid Feaver is caused by Putrefaction of the Hu- 
mors: An ImPuttrid Feaver is caused only by the servency of the Spirits and Hu- 
mors contained in the Vessels, or fixed in the solid Parts. 
Malignant,
Non- Malig-
nant.
A Malignant Feaver is 
caused by extream Putrefaction, or by divers Symptomes greivously afflicting the 
nobe Parts: a Well-affected Feaver, has none of al these. A great Feaver is the 
same with a  Malignant, and a little Feaver differs not from a Well-affected. 
Hence are al the differnces  of Feavers taken; a spirital Feaver is continual indeed, 
yet last but a Dry and is therefore termed Ephemera: a Sanguin Feaver is also 
continual and threefold, Enccreasing, standing at a stay, and decreasing; Putrid 
or Imputrid: It is by some termed continens to distinguish it from the rest of the 
Humoral Feavers. Cholerick, Melancholick and Flegmatick Feavers, are con-
tinual, 

112 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book III. 
tinual, when the Humors from whence they arise do Putrifie in the great Veins: 
when they Putrifie in the little Vein, or out of the Veins, they make Intermitting 
Feavers. An Hectick Feaver is also continual but slow and lingering.
The fit of a
Feaver.
Its Exacerba-
tion.
Circuit. 
The Return of intermitting Feavers is termed their fit; the more than ordinary 
violence of continual Feavers it called their Exacerbation, The beginning of a fit 
is called Invasio, the time of Remission and Exacerbation, of intermission and 
accession, is termed Periodus or Circuitus, the Period or Circuit.
Tertian Fea-
ver. 
Quartans
Quotidians
Now the Accessions or exacerbations of Feavers are various according to the 
various motion of the Humor. They come every third day, by reason of the pro- 
per motion of Choler, whence al bilious intermitting Feavers are called Tertians
or third day Agues; as the Quartans come every fourth day, becaule the Melan- 
cholick Humor is moved upon that day; as Flegm is moved every day, whence 
quotidian Agues are Flegmatick. 
Quintan, Septan, Nonan, or fift, seventh and ninth day Agues, as they 
are exceeding rare, so are they not comprehended under any Rules of Art. 
The Proper Symptomes of the beginnings of Ague-fits, do shew the sort of Ague 
what it is: so a shaking shewes a Tertian Ague, A grinding cold fit that makes a 
man think it would break his bones, argues a Quartan and for the fit to begin with a 
mere simple coldness, is the token of a Quotidian. 
A double tertian comes every day, as the Quotidian does, but with extream 
shaking; whereas the Quotidian comes only with a coldness.
Confused. 
Implicated
Confused and implicated Feavers, are made of those Feavers, which we have 
now explained. Confused or mixed Feavers, are made by mixture of the Humors,
as a Bastard Tertian is made by a mixture of Choler and Flegm. But Implicated 
Feavers are stirred up by Vicissitude of Humors put into Putrefaction or Commo- 
tion, where upon there is observed in them, distinct fits one following another, as 
in a double Tertian, and in a double and triple Quartan, and in a Semitertian, 
which is nothing else but a complication of a continual Quotidian and an Intermit- 
tent Tertian: and in the Feaver called Triteophyæa, which lasts thirty hours and 
longer.
Erratick 
Two Agues are observed to follow one another, so that the first being not quite  
finished, another which is worse succeeds and follows the same. But if these fits 
are inordinat keeping no certain Course, and returning upon severai daies, they 
make such Agues as are termed Erraticæ, wandring giddy Agues. 
In respect of
Symptomes.
There are other differences of Feavers taken from the Symptomes, yet so as they 
may reduced to these sorts I have spoken of: as the Feaver Epiala, Leipyria, 
Typhodis, Elodis, Pestilens, Causus, for they are al Humoral  and Distinguished
by some remarkable Symptomes. 
Epiala
Leipyria 
Typhodes. 
In the Feaver Epiala there is a sence of heat and cold by reason of the unequal 
motion of the Morbifick matter. In Leipyria, the outward Parts are cold, and the 
inner Parts burn wich Heat, because the Feavenish Heat is drawn inward. 
Typhodis and Eleodis are, in which the Patient sweats much, without any ease
thereby. A Pestilential Feaver is no other than a putrid, but it Springs from an 
extream and remarkable putrefaction, and so deadly, that more die than recover.
Burning Fea-
ver. 
Causus is a name signifying extream Heat and burnning, such as is in a continual 
Feaver arising from Choler, so that a Cholerick continual Feaver by way of Emi- 
nency is so termed. 
Sympotomati-
cal Feavers.
Cremnodes Febris the Feavet so called, is said to proceed from an Inflammation 
of the Lungs: but such Feavers as are caused by Inflammation of the Internal Parts, 
are Symptomatical, neither are they properly termed Feavers. For here we speaks 
of a Feaver only as it is an hot distemper of the Heart primarily affected. 
Chap.

Chap. 9. Of the Vessels, &c. 113 
Chap. 9. Of the Vessels viz. Veins, Arteries and Nerves 
conteined within the Chest.
In the Chest
are Veins. 
I Have a few things to speak of one Part of the Trunk of Vena Cava, for 
the whol Trunk has been sufficiently explained in our Chapter of the lower 
Belly.  
Hepatick a
You shal observe that the Trunk piercing through the Midrif, does receive that 
same a Hepatick branch which arises from the top of the Liver, and carries Blood 
into the Cava, and from that same Oblique insettion, unto the opening of the 
Trunk in che right Ventricle of the heart, there is the distance of two Fingers 
breadth.
a T. 12. f. I. r r. &c. 
From whence we may gather, that Blood is carried directly from the Liver to 
the Heart, although it is mixed with other blood ascending by Circulation. That 
same opening of the Vena Cava, and its cleaving to the right Ventricle of the heart, 
is contained and to be seen within the Pericardium: which when the Trunk has 
Passed through, it ascends unto the Claves. 
And therefore you may Know, that the biood afcending unto the heart by Cir- 
culation does also come as far as the Throat, and is derived into the upper Limbes, 
with that blood which descends from the Head by the Veins. 
Coronaria
You shal observe, that this Trunk does afford no branches to the heart except 
the a Coronaria: but only to other parts of the Chest, and how blood shed out of 
the left Ventricle of the heart into the Lungs, may be revelled by Blood-letting, 
seeing it has two Doors to be broken open in the heart, before it Can come to the 
Trunk of Vena Cava, which hinder the flowing back of the Blood from the 
Lungs. 
You shal consider if the b Anastomdsis of the Arteria Venosa with Vena Cava 
be remaining, by which the foresaid Reflux may be made: or whether the blood of 
the Lungs, ought not to return into the left Ventricle of the heart, that it may be 
made vital, and then speedily to be cast into the Aorta, from thence to be forth- 
with delivered over into the Veins.
Azygos 
Then you are to search for the Vena c Aygos or Vein without a fellow which 
nourishes the Ribs. 
Its Valves
In it you shal observe two or four valves or shutters, not 
Signed and imaginary, but true, interchangably disposed, which resist the blood 
flowing in abundantly. I have many times shewed those valves, and an inferior 
branch of this Vein, ending into the Trunk of the Vena Cava, below the Kidneys. 
For which cause it cannot drink up nor transmit purulent matter into the 
Kidneys. 
This branch serves to disburthen the Vena Cava above the Heart, if blood do 
any time there abound, or be contained in any great quantity, within the little 
branches or twigs of the Azygos, or solitary Vein.
Anastomoses. 
Furthermore you shal search out the mutual Anastomofes of the twigs of the 
zygos or solitary Vein, with the twigs of the Chest Vein, under the lesser saw- 
fashioned Muscle near the Arm-Pitts. Hence it comes that in the Pleurisie, the 
Pained side ls better disburthened and the pain sooner eased, by opening the Vena 
Basilica, than any other Vein. 
a T. 12. f. 2.  b T. II. f. 3. and 6. B.  c f. I. D. t. 12. f. I.aaa.  
Intercostal
After Azygos or solitary Vein, out of the Trunk of the Cava ascending, the 
Intercostals arise, on a each side one  if the branches of Vena Aygos, do not reach 
unto the upper Ribs. 
Mammaria
When the Trunk is come as far as the Claves it produces the Mammaria or 
Dug-Vein, which is twofold; b internal and external: they are both carried through
X the 

114 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III.
the Longitude of the breast-bone unto the Dugs. But the internal being the 
greater, having transmitted a branch through an hole in the Breast-bone, into the 
Dugs, Runs along unto the Right or streight Muscle, that it may Joyn it self to the 
Epigastrica. Hippocrates was wont to open the external, in Ihflamation and 
pains of Parts belonging to the Chest: But now because of the Obscurity of those 
Veins, that operation is not of use: instead whereof Hors-leeches may be applied, 
or Cupping-Glasses with Scarrification. 
a T. 12. f. 2. bb.  b T. 12. f. I. CC. 
Thymus a ker- 
nel so called. 
In the patting of the Vena Cava you shal under it observe a great Kernel, placed 
in the Throat under the Claves like a Pillow, that it may gently bear up and 
enfold the Subclavian branches. It is called Thymus. In yong Animals it is soft, 
as in Calves, and together with the great Kernel of the Pancreas or Sweet-bread, it 
is eaten as a dainty Dish. 
By the swelling of this Kernel, Strangulations or a sence of Choaking may hap- 
pen even to Men, but in Women subject to the Mother it is more frequently swel- 
led, and Choaks them if they be not releived by Blood-letting. Mediastina
Some do recken 
up three smal Veins which are termed Thymica, Capsularis and a Mediastina: 
whereas notwithstanding the Capsularin and Mediastina, are one and the same 
Vein.
Mediastina 
Cervicalis. 
From the b Ramus Subclavius, four notable branches do arise. The first is cal- 
Anterior c Cervicalis the foremost Neck-Vein, which being drawn out upon the 
Musculi Mastoides, ascends unto the Chin and Waters the fore Parts of the 
Neck.
Internal Ju-
gular. 
After this follows the d Internal Jugular, being larger than the external, which 
ascends unco the Neck under the Musculus Mastoides, and about the middle there- 
of, it is divided into three Branches, one of which being greatest and thickest, 
creeping along the Vertebra’s goes under the Scul, making its entrance at the hole 
which is near the Apophysis Styloidea, so as being applied to the lateral Channels 
of the Meninx Dura or Dura Mater, is poures out its blood and goes no
farther.
The second branch creeps through the sides of the Neck and is distributed under
the Jaw. 
The third goes into the Tongue and produces the Ranulæ or Veins under the 
Tongue, the opening of which does wonderfully help in Diseases of the 
Brain.
External Ju-
gular. 
A Finger-breadth distant from this Vein you have the Externa c Jugularis, 
which creeping aslant or sloaping under the Clavicula, it sends forth two twig’s, 
whereof the one passes Obliquely unto the The Delta-shaped Muscle under the Shoul- 
der-point and is united unto the Vena Cephalica; the other arises to the lateral 
Parts of the Head; where at the corners of the Jaw-bone it is divided into two,
and is distributed into the Jaws and al the Parts which are subjected unto the 
Jaw-bone. 
The Other Portion, being carryed behind the Eares, is distributed into the Fore- 
Head and hinder Part of the Head, and upon the Temples with manifold branches; 
and in these Parts, by reason of the Veins, Fernelius did conceive that a serous Hu- 
mor was heaped together, which slowing down upon the Parts beneath, does breed 
Fluxions in the Habit of the Body: he conceived likwise that an Issue made, or a 
caustick applied to the Cavity behind the Eare, did more good, than if it had been 
made in the hinder part of the Head, because of a branch of the Jugular Vein, rea- 
ching unto the Eye.  
whether and
in what Case it
may profitably
be opened.
This external Jugular Vein being opened by a skilful Surgeon in sleepy Diseases,  
is very good, as many Histories do testifie: but many wil not allow of it, who  
prefer two or three Hors- Leeches fastened according to the Longi- 
tude of the Vein, as far as the corner of the lower jaw, where it sticks out and is 
visible.
Howbeit 


Chap. 9. Of the Vessels, &c. 115 
Howbeit you must observe, that the internal Jugular does in the Neck commu- 
nicate with the external; and there this external Vein being opened, although it 
reach not unto the Brain, yet may it disburthen this Part, seeing the internal jugu- 
lar is hid, under the Musculus Mastoidius and cannot safely be opened. And 
therefore that same opening of the Jugulars which is so much spoken of, is to be 
understood of the external Jugular, and not of the internal.
Arteries. 
Coronariæ
And because the Arteries and Veins are alwaies contiguous and coupled together, 
in the same Line you shal look for the Trunk of the a Aorta ascending. Sprin- 
ging out of the left Ventricle of the Heart, it does presently even in its Rise pro- 
duce the two b Coronary or Crown Arteries, which do cbmpass the Heart like a 
Crown. 
These you wil not see exadtly, unless you cut the Aorta and look into it through 
the left Ventricle of the heart: if there be only one, you shal find a little Valve 
Placed ac the Orifice thereof, as in the Coronary Vein. 
The Trunk of the Aorta after a little progress, is without the Pericardium di- 
vided into Two Branches, the one whereof is termed e Ascendent, the other 
d Descendent. 
a T. 12. f. 4. C. &c.  b  T. 12. f. 5.  c T. 12. f. 4. A.  d T. 12. f. 4. C. 
Subclavia
Axillarus.
The ascendent is triparred, three Arteries being brought from the, same place; 
that on the right side ascending to the Claves, makes the a Subclavia dexira; the 
other two ascend unto the left side; the first whereof; is called Carotis Sinistra 
goingupwards; the second is named c Subclavia sinistra; and a while after d Ax-
illaris, when it is come as far as the Arm-pits, and sends forth the e Arteria Cervi- 
calis, need che Shoulder-point. 
The right Subclavian Artery having over-past the Claves; does produce that Ar- 
rery Which is termed Carolis f Dexira, which neer the corner of the lower Jaw- 
bone is like the internal jugular Vein, divided into two notable Branches, the 
g lnterna1, and h External. 
Caroltides.
They are termed Arteria Carotides. Sleepy Arteries; 
because they being compressed, do make a man fal into a deep sleep, and take away 
his Voyce. Which I have often demonstrated in Dogs, and how the same is done 
by tying a Nerve of the sixt Conjugation. 
Whether the
obstruction of
the Carotides
do cause deep
sleep?
Galen, in his book, ot the Utility of Respiration, does conceive, and proves by 
making experiment in Live Creatures, that Animalls are no way offended by tying  
or Straithing the Jugular Arteries; and therefore he refers the Sleepy-Evil to the 
Jugular Veins. 1 shal rather think, that in apoplexies and Dead-sleeps the Arte-  
ries are stopped,  than the Veins.  
Valverda does testifies that Columbus made publick demonstration in a youth, 
that deep sleep is caused by compression or constriction of the Carotick Arteries: 
but he does not tell us how he did it. 
That the ascent. of che Carosick Arteries and their penetration into the brain by 
the holes of the Skul may be plainly perceived, you shal put in a very smal Brass 
wire that wil bend, with a knob at the end, into the several divisions of this Ar- 
tery; which may be done and shewed, by the vulgar way of dissecting the brain, 
beginning from the upper Part, not from the lower Part after the manner of Varo- 
lius, ahd in the neck you shal put your Probe into the Carotick Artery. 
a T.12. f. 4. B.  b f. 4. a.  c f. 4. B.  d T. 24. f. 2. A.  e T. 12. f. 4. --
 f f. 4. a.  g f. 4. c.  h f. 4. b  
The Intercostals.
The Trunk of the Aorta being writhen towards the left side, and bent downwards 
again, is bornup by the Vertebraes of the Back, and in its progress as far as the Os 
Sacrum, out of each side produces as many Arteries as there are Vertebraes, nei- 
ther is there found any solitary artery to accompany the solitary Vein, but there are 
such like petty Arteries which supply its place.
X 2 Within

116 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book III. 
Lumbal. 
Within the Chest they may be termed a Intercostal Arteries: beneath in the 
lower belly, b the Lumbal or Loyn Arteries: they insinuate themselves into the 
spinal Marrow by the holes of the Vertebra's which may be proved by a memorable 
example in Galen, in his fourth Book of the Parts affected. 
One out of a vehement Inflamation of the Lungs, fel into a Palsie of his upper 
Limbs, and the upper intercostal Nerves being anointed, he was cured.
Communion
of the Arteries
& Spinal Mar-
row. 
I, and my most learned fellow Collegiate,Dr. Merlet, have seen a Palsie caused by 
translation of the matter of a Pleurisie into the Marrow of the back, which Palsie 
freed the Patient from the eminent danger he was in by reason of die Pleurisie. 
So Hippocrates, in his Coicks, observes, that a Convulsion takes away a Feaver, 
by tranflation of the Morbisick Matter into the Marrow of the Back. The hinder 
c Neck Artery may do as much, which waters the Marrow of the Neck. 
I know not how the Humor which causes an Apoplexy, falling through the 
fourth Ventricle of the Brain upon that Marrow of the Back, should bring the 
Palsie into one side more than another: by that way before mentioned, viz The 
Cervical and Intercostal Arteries, the serous Humor may be derived into either 
side.  
By the same Reason, the serous matter may through the Celiack Artery return 
back into the Aorta, and by the little Arteries penetrating the Marrow of the back, 
be derived into the Nerves of the inferior Limbs; and on the other side, the matter 
of a true or bastard Sciatica, by the continuation of the thickest Nerve, may return 
into the Marrow of the back, from whence it may be revelled by the Aorta into the 
Mesentery. 
Nerves.
In the Chest we are to take notice of eight remarkable Nerves or Sinnews. Two 
of which are called Diaphragmatici, two are termed Recur rentes, two Stoma- 
chici, and two Costales. 
Diaphragmatic
Diaphragmatici, the Midrif Nerves, taking their rise between the a fourth and 
fift Vertebra's of the Neck, from that same thick Nerve of the Neck which goes 
into the Arm; they descend between the foldings ot the Mediastinum unto the 
Nervous Centre of the Diaphragme, or Midrif 
Recurrent. 
The Recurrent b and Stomachic, are branches of a Nerve of the sixt Conjugation 
on or pair, whole Trunk you shal seek for in the Neck near the internal Jugular, 
by the Apopbysis Mastoides, where it is cleft into two branches, the one of which 
is didemmiated into the Superior Muscles of the Neck: the other being placed be- 
tween the internal Jugular and the Carotis descends unto the Claves, where it is 
parted into two branches, the Recurrent and the Stomachic. 
Their bending 
Back where to 
be found. 
The bending back of the left Recurrent Nerve is found about the place where the
Aorta is bowed in, and that easily, before the Pericardium is opened. 
You shal find the bending back of the right Nerve, about the right subclavian 
Artery. 
I have often seen Dogs live and run, after their Recurrent Nerves were cut and 
have my self made publick demonstration thereof, but they could not bark at all; 
and when these Nerves are tied they deprive the Animal of voyce, and being united 
the voyce returns: wherefore it is apparent, that these Nerves serve to make the 
voyce, because they return upwards, that they may be inferred into the Heads of 
the Muscles of the Larynx, Tongue, and Os Hyoides, which arise from the Inferior 
Parts.
Stomachic 
You shal search for the Stomachic c Nerves beneath the Heart, near the Verte- 
bra's, they lie hid within the folding of the Mediastinum, and from them you shal 
perceive ten or twelve twigs drawn into the a Lungs;  and of the smal branches of the 
two Stomachick Nerved folded and fettered together, is made that same Nervorum 
Mirabilis Plexus, wonderful contexture of Nerves in the upper Orifice of the 
stomach.  
a T. 10.f. 7. AB.  b T. 3. f. I. --  c T. 3. f. 3. III.&c.
Afterwards. 


Chap. 9. Of the Vessels &c. 
Afterwards the Stomachick Nerves creeping along the hinder Parts. of the Sto- 
mach, are near the Back-bone between the two Kidneys Joyned to the c Costals, so 
as to make that d Contexture of Nerves, out of which al those Nerves are derived, 
which are distributed into the Parts of the lower Belly.
Coastal Nerves 
All e Anatomists derive the Costal Nerve from die fixt pair, when as in the mean 
While, it arises from the same point of the Brain from which the fixt pair arises. 
The costal Nerve, being come without the Scul, is strengthened as it were with a 
Knot tied about it, and it descends undivided upon the Neck; and when it is come 
to the three last Vertebra’s of the Neck, it is defended by another Knot, and grows 
thicker by addition of three smal Nerves; and being flipped down within the Chest, 
in its progress near the Back-bone, under the Membrane Pleura, it is augmented by 
additions of other two smal Nerves proceeding trom the Marrow of the Back. 
Having peirced the Midrife, it is Joyned to the Stomachick Nerves, to make that 
same Contexture of Nerves, resembling a Net which is between the two Kidneys. 
a t. 3. f. 8. bb.  b T.3. f. 2. H.  c T. 3. f. 8. BB.  d T. 3. f. 8. Δ.  c T. 3.
f. 8. BBB. 
The End of the Third Book:
THE 

118.
THE 
FOURTH BOOK 
OF THE 
ANATOMY 
AND 
PATHOLOGY 
OF 
John RioLanus, 
THE 
KINGS PROFESSOR 
OF 
PHYSICK. 
Chap. 1. Of the Head. 
Why the head 
is placed in the
highest place?
THE Head being the Seat of the Soul, the Mansion- House of 
the Brain, is placed a lost in the highest part of the Body, as it 
were the Prime Castle, which commands, and bears Rule o- 
ver the whol City. Galen fares the Head was thus placed on, 
the top of the Body, because of the Eyes which are the scouts 
and Guides of the Body: Aristotle saies it was for to cool the
Heart, by chat coldness which the Brain would shed down 
thereupon. 
Its Size,
An Head that is wel framed, ought to be of an indifferent Size; for a great, and 
a little Head. are disallowed, and dispraised. 
Shape,
The Natural Figure of the Head is round, or spherical, somwhat longish bun- 
ching out before and behind, with two Eminences, and a little flat, or compressed 
towards the Temples.
Division.  
The Head is divided into the hairy Part, and the smooth Part, fo long as it is 
whol, and unparted: The smooth part is termed Face, and thereunto is the
Forehead 


Chap. 1. Of the Head. 119 
Forehead appertaining. The hairy part retains the Name of the Head. 
The Head is otherwise considered in the History of the ßones: for it is divided 
into thea Skul, and the two Jaws, the b upper, and the c lower;  and the Forehead 
appertains unto the Scull.
External parts
of the Head. 
Again, The whol Head is divided into two direct parts, and two side parts. The 
direct are the d sore part of the Head, which from the beginning of the Hair, arises 
four or live fingers breadth towards the top or Crown of the Head. 
After which, the space of two fingers, and as much after the Vertical point of the 
Crown, where the Hairs turn, is termed c Vertex: the hinder part is called f Occi- 
Put; the lateral parts are called Tempora a, g the Temples, or Times; because they 
discover the Times of a mans Age by their hollowness, hoariness, or baldness. 
The Head is compounded, and made up of many parts, of which, some are exter- 
nal others internal; or containing, or and contained. 
The constitu-
ting parts.
The Containing, or Membranous, or Bony; the contained, or internal, are the 
Brain, the Cerebellum, or petty brain, the four roots of the Spinal Marrow, and 
such Particles as are.included in their Cavities. 
The hairy skin.
The fleshy
Membrane.
The first containing part we meet with, is the h hairy Skin, which has also its E- 
pidermis,or Scarf-skin. Under the Skin, lies the Flefhy i Membrane, which is the 
Foundation, &c Seed-plot of the Hairs: which if it be Fleshy, it makes the hairy Skin 
Movable, because it sticks close hereunto without any fat coming between.
Pericranium. 
The Pericraneum follows, which does immediately compass the bony Skul. It 
is produced from the thick Meninx, which in Children, goes through the Sutures, 
at what time they are not firmly closed, nor joyned Tooth within Tooth.  
a T. 15. f. 3. ABC.  b f. 5. and 6.  c f. 3. LMN.  d f. 3. A.  e f. 3. BC.
 f f. 4. C. f. 6. AA.  g f. 3. U. f. 6. B.  h f. I. BB.  k f. I.
CC. 
Periostium. 
Its use,
Beides the Pericranium, there is scraped from the Skill, as from other bones, 
the Periostium being a thin Skin, which immediately covers them. Wherefore 
the Pericranium is not the Periosteon of the Skul, but is spread out upon the Skul 
by a  great Providence of Nature, chat it might hold fast the Muscles which arise 
from the Skul, such as are the temporal Muscle, the strongest in the whol Body, 
which with its companion, contracts, and lifts up the Jaw, and bears greater bur- 
dens in some bodies, than the other Muscles acting al together. 
Also it strengthens, and closely comprehends the Muscles of the hinder part of the 
Head. Descending to the Eyes, and stretched out under the Eye-lids, it makes 
Conjunctive Coat of the Eye.
The Skull, 
These Membranes being separated, and plucked off, and the a Skul having its 
Cap taken off, it presents it self to our fight, being framed together of many bones, 
which are joyned one to another, by looser,or faster Sutures, or Seams. 
Somtimes there are no Sutures, or Seams to be seen, when the Skul is one conti- 
ued bone. But the  History of the Skul appertains to that double Osteology, or 
Bone-story; the one of which has been premised unto this Work, and the other 
shal be demonstrated at the end hereof. 
a T. 15, f. I. DD. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
General Disea-
ses of the head.
The Head being the Fountain, and Original of almost al Diseases, according to 
Hipyocrates by reason of Fluxes of Rhewm, which flow from the Head into the 
inferior parts, even as low as the Feet, does condole, and has a fellow feeling with all 
Parts being placed on the top of the Trunk of the Body, like a Cupping-glass, it 
attracts and receives vapors which mount from the inferior parts, according to Hip- 
pocrates in his fourth Book of Diseases: which vapors, the brain being spongy like 
a kernel does drink, and sup in, according to the said Hippocrates, in his Book of 
Glandules,  or kernels. The Vapors being congealed into Water, do fal down,
and 

120 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book IV. 
and return up again like a River that ebbs and flows, according to Aristotle; which 
Hippocrates had taught before him, having in that respect, termed the Brain, the 
Metropolis of a cold, and moist, glutinous, and clammy Humor. 
Shape depra-
ved
If the Shape of the Head be depraved, so that it be sharp pointed, or the longi- 
tude thereof, be turned into latitude; such an Head cannot be sound and healthy: 
and therefore either it is diseased, or the principal Faculties are weakened. If in 
Children new born, such a Figure be observed, it may be corrected by Art, and 
with the Hand; as if it be great, and large, when the Child is a month or two old, 
drying Medicines being applied, and Fontanels, or Issues made in the Nape of the 
Neck, the over-great moisture of the Brain may be dried up; and consequently 
the Head wil become less; which cannot be effected when the Children are grown 
up. 
over lax, or
loose, &c.
A narrow Head, cannot be by Art enlarged, in any Age whatsoever. 
If the Sutures of the Skul are straiter than ordinary, or if there be no Sutures, 
or they be wider than is fit, the Head is subject to Diseases, because the smoaky 
Excrements of the Brain, have not a free passage. 
If the Head be more loose and open than is fit, ic is the more exposed to the Inju- 
ries of the ambient Air. 
These lnconveniencies maybe remedied by help of Physick, or by wearing a
Cap, or by going bare-head, as occasion requires. 
Particular
disease.
Ophiasis.
I proceed unto the Particular Diseases of the Parts containing. And first of the 
hairy Skin, whose Action is the breeding of Hairs, the efficient cause whereof is a 
temper moderately hot and dry, and an indifferent Constitution of the Skin; and 
the internal cause is a footy Excrement, which thrusting it fell forcibly by the smal 
Pores, gains the form of a thred. The hurting of this Action, is a Symptome of the 
hairy Skin. The hurt thereof is three-fold, ids diminished in the Disease termed 
Ophiasis, in which the Hairs fal off from the hinder part of the Head, along to the 
Fore-head, making bald wreaths like those of Serpents; or it is abolished in bald- 
ness, and the Alopecia, or Fox-fal of the hairs. 
The Cause of the falling off of the Hair of the Head, is the hot and dry distemper 
of the SKin, with a naughty and sharp Humor, eating away the roots of the Hairs. 
The Naughtiness of the Humor is known by the color of the Skin, and of the 
blood, which comes out of the Skin being pricked.
Baldness  
Baldness is a deprivation of the Hair or the Head, by reason of an Hectical dry 
distemper, and hard Constitution of the Skin. A defect of Nutriment, and profi- 
table Humor, or of the fuliginous Excrement, causes this distemper of the Skin 
Hence it is that Eunuchs, because very moist, do never wax bald. 
Gray Hairs 
Gray-hairedness is a Symptome of the Hairy Scalp or Skin of the Head, by which 
the Generation ot Hairs is depraved, so that they grow white before the time. The 
cause of both these kinds of baldness, as wel that which comes Symptomatically as 
that caused by Age, is the cold and moist distemper of the Skin, whereby the fuli- 
ginous Excrement of the Skin is allaied and tempered- VVhen I say a cold distem- 
per, I mean the weakness of the Natural Heat: whence it comes to pass that by 
sickness and sorrow, many become gray hair’d, because the Natural Heat it by both 
diminished. 
Daddruf 
Ulcers of the Head are either light, and posses the Scarf-skin only, which turns 
into little Scales, Scurf,or Dandruf, when the Head is combed: whence the Greeks 
term it Pituriasis, the Latins Porrigo: such like Ulcers are either dry and invisi- 
ble; or they are visible, and manifestly to be seen: their Cause is an hot and dry  
distemper of the Skin, with a sharp and thin Humor.
Sore Head 
Achor, is a Disease of the Skin of the Head, compounded of a tumor, and an Ul- 
cer; the tumor is known by the inequality, the Ulcer by little holes, out of which 
flows a clammy Humor; which made Pliny cal the flowing Ulcers of the Head, 
Ceiron, or the Honey-comb. But the Honey-comb. though a rumor, and Ulcer of
the Head, yet differs from the former, because it has greater holes, and the Humor 
that comes cut is mattery like Honey, or of the Consistency of Honey. Pliny cals
them Ulcers congealed together like an Honey-comb. The Cause of both these 
Disease, 
 

Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 121 
Diseases, is an hot and dry distemper of the Skin, with a sharp and biting Humor, 
which invites one to scratch: by scratching, the swelling is encreased, and at length 
Ulcerated, so that the holes break out: Vulgarly ’tis called Tinea, the Moath, be- 
cause the holes are like those of Moath-eaten Garments.
Head dropsie. 
Hydrocephalos, or the Water-head, is a swelling of the Head, caused by a 
wheyish Humor, collected and shed abroad between the Skul, and the Pericrant- 
um; or between the Skill, and Dura Mater, or within the Ventricles of the Brain 
filled with wheyish moisture, which runs over as it were on al sides. 
In Infants ’tis caused by squeezing of the Childs Head at the time of Birth. In 
those that are grown up, the cause hereof is a cold and moist distemper of the Head
and whol Body, or a translation of serous humors unto the Head, which generally 
is swelled, and raised to a vast compass, by the humor Under the Skin, or included 
Within die Head. 
Louzie Evil. 
Pthiriasis, or the Louzy Evil, is a Sympcome of the hairy Scalpe, when in- 
stead of the thicker Excrements, or together with them, Lice are bred in the top of 
the Skin, or deep in the same. 
The Cause hereof, is an hot and moist distemper of the Skin, with a putrified hu- 
mor not very sharp; which makes this Disease commonly subject to Children, and 
old Flegmatick Persons. 
The Temple-Mulcles are to be observed, which cover a great part of the Skul, 
whose wounds or bruises, do cause a Convulsion, and contract, and straiten the 
Jaw. 
Chap. 2. Of the Brain.
The Brains. 
THe Skul being duly sawed in sunder, and the covering removed, the a Brain 
appears, proportionated to the Skul which contained it; such as is the thing 
containing, such is the contained. Or suppose the Brain gives Figure to the bones 
when they are soft, then the Skill follows the quantity of the brain, be it great or 
little But in case the brain follow not the Natural figure and magnitude of the 
Head, its conformation is faulty; and consequently sickly and adverse to the inter- 
nal Sences both principal, and subservient, which it hurts in their Actions.
Substance. 
The Brain is compounded of a b Substance soft, waxy, or pliable, whitish: 
which because, like a Kernel, it drinks and sucks up humidities, it is therefore by 
Hippocrates, termed the great Kernel.
Division. 
Two Coats, 
viz.
1. Crassa-me
ninx.
2. The Tenuis
meninx.
It is divided into two parts. That which is three times as big as the other, re- 
tains the common name of the c Brain: the Lesser part placed in the hinder part of 
the Head, is termed d Cerebellum, or the Petty-brain. Both these parts are covered 
with common Coverings, termed Meninxes.The first Coat, or Covering, is cal-  
led e Crassa Meninx; the second f Tenuis Meninx. The Arabians termed these 
Membranes, Matres, or Mothers, because they were perswaded, that the other  
Membranes of the Body, were propagated from these. 
The first Meninx g hard and thick, being united to the Sutures of the Head, 
suspends whol bulk of the brain, these Connexions must be viewed when the 
skul is taken off. In the thick Meninx are observed innumerable h Vesssels, where- 
with it ls sprinkled and strewed: they are rather Arterial than Venal, being pro- 
duced from the Rete Mirabile, being drawn out from beneath upwards, as far as the 
Channels of the Meninx, where they unload their blood;  and therefore it is the 
Membrane which is seen to beat and pant, rather than the substance of the 
Brain.
a T. 16. f. I.  b f. 3. AA.  c f. 6. AA.  d f. 6. dd.  e f. I. AC. f. 2. B.
f. 3. H. &c.  f f. I. BB.  g f. I. AA. &c. h f. I. aa. 
The Pipes.
Now the Pipes belonging to this Coat, are four; whereof two are lateral, which 
run along the sides of the Sutura Lambdoides, that they may receive the blood
Y from 
Tbe Pipes* 

122 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV.
from the internal Jugulars, and from the Neck Veins; or by them, according to the 
Doctrine of Circulation, the blood may flow back unto the Heart. 
From the Union of these two Channels, is formed a third, longwise, drawn out 
directly as far as the Nostrils. 
Plexus Cho-
roides.
In the Concourse of the three beneath, there springs 
a fourth c Channel or Pipe, which goes into the Substance of the Brain, between the 
Brain, and the Petty-Brain: it is not shut up in the foldings of the Dura Mater, 
but there is a great Vein, so called by Galen, which descending into the d former 
Ventricles, makes the Plexus e Choroides, which is dispersed through al the Ven- 
tricles, unto the' Basis of the Brain.
Torcular 
The Channel which runs longwise deserves rather the name of Torcular, than the 
f fourth: because from thence, is the blood distributed into the lower parts, by innu- 
merable little Veins, through the turnings and windings of the Brain. 
These lateral Channels, neither do the Veins, nor the Arteries go into, and pass 
through with their Coats, but are terminated at the entrance; and therefore those 
Channels are rather Arterial, than Venal: for the Brain being of its own Nature 
cold and soft, ought rather to be nourished with hot, subtile, and Arterial blood, 
than with such as the Veins afford, being thick, and hard to penetrate. 
And in case the Vein, and Arterial blood were confused and mixed together in 
these Channels, they would not pant or beat and the Pulsation of the Channels 
demonstrates, that it depends not upon the Body of the Arteries; for there are none 
in that place, but upon the leaping of the blood, after the manner of Arteries. 
a T. 16. f. 5. a. & b.  b f. 2. aa. f. 5. cc.  c f. 5. ee. d f. 3. DE  e T. 17.
f. I. OO RR. T. 16. f. 3. FF. F. 5. ff.  f T. 17. f. 5. F.  
Now this Menbrane, namely, the Crassa Meninx, divides the Brain into two 
parts, as far as the middle thereof, by the Corpus Callosum.
Falx.
This Partition is ter- 
med a Falx, and being doubled on both sides, it severs the Brain from the Petty- 
Brain.
Tenuis Me
ninx
Why the Brain
is full of win-
dings and tur-
ning?
The Tenuis b Meninx follows, which immediately incloses the brain, being 
closely conveighed into the windings and turnings thereof; for the substance of the 
brain c without, after a wonderful manner, ful of deep turnings and windings 
for the lighter passage of the Arteries, which disperse the blood here and there; 
and therefore Pelops, the Maser of Galen, seeing those little Arteries dispersed 
Up and down the Brain, did beleeve that there was the beginning of the Veins. 
The Tetuis Meninx is three times so long as the Crassa c Meninx, because it passes 
into the inner Parts of the Brain, and as a Veil it covers and separates, and divides 
the whol Bulk of the Brain into three Parts. For near upon the upper half of the 
Brain, which covers the Ventricles being placed upon the Corpus Callosum, it is on 
both sides Circularly separated and lifted up as high as the Roots of the 
the Back, which do knit together that same upper portion. So that the Brain is 
divided into three Parts; on each side one over the Ventricles and the third which 
includes the Ventricles, being continued, and no waies disjoyned.
 The two for-
mer Ventricles.
A smal quantity of the d Corpus Callofum being cut of, the Two e former and 
upper Ventricles appear, which in their lower Part towards the Basis of the Brain
are larger, from whence they take their rise upward, being smaller at the 
top. 
Septum lucid--
They are separated by a Thin Membranous Partition, which is framed of the 
Tenuis Meninx doubled together, and is called Speculum Lucidum, or the Bright 
Mirror because it is transparent.  
a T. 16. f. 3. AA. f. 5. EE  b f. I. BB.  c f. I. bb.  d f. 2. BB. f. 3. BB.
 e f. 3. DD. EE. f. 4. CC. DD. 
a T. 16. f. 3. G. 
The 

Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 123 
The former Ventricles are perforated in the forepart towards Os Ethmoides, 
that the serosities may flow down from the superior Part to that place.
Fornix. 
Above the foremost Ventricles there is spred out a b Tripartite body, which is 
termed Corpus Psalloides, or the Welch Harp, sustained by three Pillars: whereof 
two are c Lateral: turned back about those d Eminencies which Galen calls the 
Chambers of the Optick Nerves: 
The other foreward e Colomne, is placed between the two Ventricles. If you 
shal follow those two lateral Columnes, you wil find them to be productions of the 
Optick Nerves, which within che Ventricles do Joyn themselves one to another, as 
in the Basis of the Brain behind the Choana, they are again united; whence I 
conjecture that the power of understanding and knowledg, is principally contained, 
in the former Part of the Brain, and that trom thence the Animal spirit is drawn, 
Which is administred unto the Eyes. 
The third
Ventricle.
By the Concourle of the two Ventricles Between the two large Hillocks afore- 
said, and other subsequent Eminencies, is formed a Guttur or Channel, which 
makes the third f Ventricle. In the Basis of which Channel there is seen an g hole, 
which penetrates into the Choana, to purge out Wheyish Flegm into the throat, 
near the Palate. 
Nates
Testes:
Anus.
In the files of this Channel, the Circumjacent Eminences do form, some the 
h Nates or Buttocks, others the Testes or i Stones. For so those Eminencies or 
bunchings out are termed, being interchangably disposed, and from that Channel, 
the Hole which goes into che fourth Ventricle, is termed Anus or the 
a Arse-hole.  
b T. 16. f. 3. bb. f. 4. B.  c T. 17. f. I. GG.  d T. 16. f. 4. bb. cc. &c.
 e T. 17. f. I. F.  f T. 16. f. 4. E.  g T. 17. f. I. below Q.  h T. 16. f. 4. bb.
 i T. 16.f.4.cc.T.17.f.I.MM.
a T. 17. f. I. above Q. f. 2. F. 
Conarlum.
In the upper Part of this Channel is superincumbent that same Kernel which is 
twrmed b Conarium the Vine-Apple kernel, because tis shaped like a Pine-Apple. 
And over this Channel and the fourth c Ventricle, is a thin Membrane stretched out, 
derived from the Tenuis Meninx, upon which runs the d Plexus Choreides, def- 
fused through the foremost Ventricles. 
Process us
Vermisformis.
In the entrance of the fourth Ventricle, there is placed a certain portion of the 
Brain more firm than ordinary which represents the taile of a River-Crab when the 
shel is peeled off. It is called Scolicoides and Vermiformis e Processus, the Worm- 
fashioned production: is opens and shuts the passage into the fourth Ventricle. 
This is placed in the Cerebellum or Petty Brain, which contained within it felt the 
two hinder most portions of the spinal Marrow, as the Brain contained the other 
two foremost, which I have named with Galen the beds of the Optick Nerves.
The fourth
Ventricle.
The fourth
Ventricle.
In that same f fourth Ventricle, there appeares g certain e think like a Writing- 
Pen, which is the Separation of the Marrow of the Back. 
The Petty-Brain being pulled asunder, you shal see how it conteins within it 
the fourth Ventricle, between the two aftermost Roots of the Marrow of the back;
and how being drier than the Brain, it gives Original to h seven or eight pair of Ner- 
ves’ saving the Optick Nerve. 
It is not ful of windings above but beneath, according to the external form of the 
brain it self. ln like manner#is divided beneath into i two Parts, being continued 
above. 
b T. 16. f. 4. a. T. 17. f. I. D.  c f. 2. NN.  d T. 16. f. 3. FF. T. 17. f. I.
OO. RR.  e T.16. f. 6. E. T. 17. f. 2. CC. f f. I NN. f. 2. DD. GG.
T. 18. f. 4. F.  g T. 17. f. 2. H. T. 18. f. 4. E.  h T. 18.f. 4.
AA.
Y 2 If

124 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
Pelvis. 
Glandula Pi- 
t uitaria. 
Tubusi.
Seven pair of
Nerves.
If you shal gently draw upwards the formost Part of the brain, as far as its basis, 
you shal observe the k Optick Nerves, and the Nerves, serving for a Motion, and 
then the b Choana or tunnel dropping Wheyish moisture upon the c Glandula 
Pituitaria or Flegm-Keernel, which fils up and possesses the Sella Equina or 
Horse-Saddle. In the Choana or Funnel you shal see Four pipes distilling 
Wheyish moisture into the Palate and throat. Then you shal consider the order of 
those seven pair of Nerves recorded in the following Verses. 
The d First Pair sees, thee e Second moves the Eyes; 
f Third and Fourth tast, h Fift hears and makes us Wise. 
The i Sixth is large and wanders all about: 
k Seventh Larynx moves a prating Tougue so stout. 
Rete mirabile.
Then you shal search under the Dura Merninx in the basis of the brain about the 
Compass of the Sella Sphenoider, for the Rete Mirabile or Wonderful l Net of Arte- 
ries interwoven one among another, being formed of the two m Carotides or sleep 
Arteries. 
You shal observe in the Basis of the brain, that Wheyish Humors or blood 
is powredforth, in extream pains of the Head coming with Inflammation, which 
while they seek to go forth by the Cavities of the Ears, they cause extream sharp 
pains, which bring the Patient into Madness and Sicknes. Whether or no in such a 
desperate Case, may we boar either side of the Hindermost Part of the Head, to 
let out the superfluous putrid Humor, which corrupts the substance of the 
Brain?  
The n Auditory Nerve is worthy of Consideration, which is inferred into the 
Cavity of the Eare, and by a little Channel Aides down into the Palate, and is 
distributed into the inner Part of the Larynx: from whence comes t hat same Con- 
cent that is between the Tongue and Teeth, the Larynx and the Lungs.  
k T. 17. f. I. S. T. V. T. 18. f. I. B. f. 3. BB.  a T. 18. f. I. CC. f. 3. GG. 
 b T. 18. f. 3. D.  d T. 18. f. I. BB. f. 3. BB.  e f. I. CC. f. 3. GG.  f. I.
DD. f. 3. HH.  g f. I. EE. f. 3. II.  h f. I. FF. f. 3. KK.  i f. I GG.
f. 3. LL. T. 3. f. 8. all  k f. 3. MM.  l f. 3. PP.  m f. 3. CC.  n T. 18. f. k.
FF. f. 3. KK. 
Observe Whether or no they be interfered Crose-wise, so as the right should
from its original be carry ed unto the left Part, and the lerft unto the right, which 
I have never seen. 
Whether the Nerves in their Rise have Arteries Joyned in company with them? 
Whether the Nerves are made up of many smal threds? Whether the other nerves
differ from the Optick Nerve 
I wil not wholly pass over those four notable Questions: Whether the brain  be
moved? Whether or no the brain does cool the Heart? Whether the Ventricle 
the brain are ordained only to contein Excrements? Whether or no the blood be 
there Circulated and how?
Whether the
Brain  have any
Motion?
As to, the first Question, I say that the substance of the Brain is not moved of it 
self, by Diastole and Sistole, after the manner of the Arteries, but only the Crassa 
Meninx, which is sprinkled al over with Arteries, arising from the wonderful
Contexture of Artenes, unto the upper Channels of the said Crassa Meninx: also 
the Channels do pant, and the brain is moved by elevation and depression 
of the substance thereof, according as it is driven by the Animal spirits.
Whether it
cools the heart? 
The brain does cool the Heart, in asmuch as by Circulation, it sends back the 
blood unto the Heart being cooled in the Brain. 
The use of the
fore Ventricles. 
The foremost and uppermost Ventricles are Receptacles for spirits: the whey may 
indeed defcend into the upper Ventricles, from the whole Mass of the brain, but it 
whether the 
Presently


Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 125 
presently fals down into he lower Ventricles, that from thence it may flow through 
Os Ethmoides into the Nostrls if the Of Ethmoides or Colander-bone be obstru- 
cted, it distils by the Choana or Funnel, or by the little holes over che Funnel, into 
the Palate and Jaws or Throat.
Whether or no
and how the
Blood is circu-
lated in the
Brain.
The Circulation of the blood is performed in the brain, with a slow pace. The 
blood rises out of the Netlike-Contexture, by the Arteries of Dura Meninx, unto 
the foure Channels; afterwards it descends by the Veins unto the Heart, having 
been plundred of its spirits, which the brain drank up. And so the blood being 
cooled, is said to coole the Heart. Of al which I shall treat more fully in my 
Anthropograhia,  or large Description of the body of Man.
What Blood
the Brain is
nourisht with? 
The Brain, being of its own Nature cold and moist, is nourished only with the 
purer and more spiritous arterial blood, which ascends by the Carotides and passes 
speedily forth. And though the Spirits are tempered, they loose none of their 
subtility, because they are noc mingled with the Air. From the Plexus Mirabilis 
blood ascends by the Arteries which spring from the said Plexus unto the Crown of 
the Head, where the blood Channels of the brain are Scituate. From whence it 
distils into the lower and side Parts of the brain, and also by that same great Vein 
Mentioned by Galen, which makes the Plexus Choroides, it is distributed into the 
inferior Parcs. 
What Blood
comes away in
the Nose blee-
ding.
And therefore in bleedings of the Nose, the most pure blood does alwaies come 
aWay? whereas that which is taken away by opening the Veins of the Arms or feet, 
seems alwaies most impure. 
Whereby you may know, that it is only the Arterial blood which nourishes the 
brain and which comes away by the bleeding at Nose: and it was not without 
cause that Fernelius would have it stopped, after it had bleed a pound, to coole 
the body and extinguish the Feaver. And therefore refrigerating and astringent 
Medicaments are to be applied, not only to the hinder Part of the Neck, but also 
before upon ch Carotick or sleepy Arteries.
Whether the
Air goes which
is drawn in at
the Nostrils?
Whether it is 
mingled with 
the Spirits?
You shal observe that the Air drawn in by the Nostrils, does not pass under, nor 
enter into the foremost Ventricles of the brain, because they are void of any inlets, 
 but being shed externally round about the Crassa Meninx, it cools the Surface of 
the brain. Nor is it mingled with the Spirits, because they ought to be most sub- 
tile other wise by permistion or mingling of the Air, they would become more 
thick and would not run so swiftly by the Nerves al the body over. 
The same I conceive touching the Air received, into the Lungs; that it is not mix- 
ed with the vital spirit but only cools the Lungs.
The Manner 
of Dissecting
the brain and
the History of 
its Parts.
Now that the brain may be demonstrated after that manner, which Varolius de- 
scribes in a particular Book: You shal law in sunder the Scul of a body newly 
dead, round about near the Eyes, and the hollow of the hinder part of the 
Head and with a pair of Pinsers you shal take of the upper portion 
of the Socket of the Eyes, that you may draw out the Eyes hanging at
their Opticks Nerves.  
Aftewards having pulled the Dura a Meninx from the Scul round about with
help of a Spatula leave at the Basis of the Scui, where it sticks exceeding fast to the 
Bones. Then you dial take out die Brain and as much of the Spinal Marrow as you 
can both at once, and let some body hold the Brain turned upside down in both his 
hands whiles you shal dissect it.  
But you shal first search within the Dura Mater for those four bendings or 
c Hollowness for the place of the d Press, the great Vein described by Galen 
which Plexus e Choroides, and that division of the brain which resem- 
bles f sickle: Afterwards returning to the Bans of the Brain, you shal observe the 
Tenuis Meninx to be more eaisly plucked and Separated in the lower than in the up- 
per Part: because the Petty-Brain in its Basis or Bottom is not so ful of turnings, 
away and windings, as on the top. And therefore the thick Meninx being first taken 
we meet with that same, Rete Mirabile or Miraculous g Net, made of Multitudes of 
smal

126 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
smai Arteries, springing from the h Carotick Arteries and two other i ascending 
through the holes of the Vertebraes of the Neck; but it will be torn, which cannot 
be prevented. Now each of the Carotick or Sleepy-Arteries enters within the 
Scul divided into two, to Weave that same wonderful Net, and creeping upwards, 
through the windings of the brain it is disseminated up and down every way even 
as far as the Longitudinal Cavity of the Dural Meninx. 
The Carotis is drawn obliquated and as it were crook backt, within that same 
winding hole at the Basis of the Scul, and within its Cavity, containes certain very 
smal Bones, like those which are called Sefamoidea. 
Neither has Nature placed these little bones only in these Arteries, but she has 
likewise inferred them into other Arteries, where it was requisite, that they should 
be kept open. 
a T. 16. f. I. AA. f. 2. DD. &c. T. 17. f. 2. II.  c T. 16.
f. 5. abcde.  d f. 5. F. ff.  f f. 2. AA. f. 5. EE.  g
T. 18. f. 3.
PPPP.  h f. 3. CC.  i f. 3. OO. 
Then you shal observe that the Processus a Mammllares or Teat-like Producti- 
ons do not run out so far as Varolius has described them. 
Then you shal see the growing together of the b Optick c Nerves near the Choana 
or Funnel. And therefore Masticatories may do good in the Diseases thereof. Also 
you shal observe that the Veins of the Plexus d Choroides defending to the Basis 
of the e  Brain, are interwoven with exceeding smal Kernels. 
In that place the Plexus Choroides is more easily discerned, than upon the fore- 
most Ventricles. 
Afterward, you shal contemplate four tuberous Eminencies: two f before, sci- 
tuate in the middle of the brain, and the other two g behind, which constitute the 
Cerebellum, or petty Brain. Those Eminencies, or Risings, do receive four white 
and hard Roots of the Spinal Marrow, whereof the foremost, longest, and hardest, 
are drawn along between the greater Eminences of the Brain. The other two short 
ones, are carried within the petty brain; which a thickened Portion of the Marrow 
of the said petry brain, placed athwart, as broad as a mans Thumb, does fasten to- 
gether like a Swath-band, and is by Varolius termed h f Ponticulus: or rather it is 
the pavement of the Channel from the third, into the fourth Ventricle. 
And the said Channel lies above chose foremost Roots of the Spinal Marrow, and 
is stretched out according to their longitude. Between the growing together of the 
Optick Nerves, and the foremost Roots of the Spinal Marrow, there appears a four- 
square hole, which is taken for the i Choana, or Funnel, serving to discharge the 
Excrements of the Ventricles of the Brain. 
a T. 18. f. 3. aa.  b T. 17. f. I. T.  c f. I. SS. VV.  d f. I. OORR.  e 
f. I. PP.  f T. 16. f. 4. cc.  g f. 4. bb.  h T. 18. f. 4. by CCC.  i f. 3. E   
When you have viewed al these things, you shal pass over unto the a Petty brain, 
where you shal separate from the Spinal Marrow the Processus b Vermiformis 
which lies between the two Tuberous Eminencies of the Petty-brain, by taking 
away the Membrana Choroides; that so you may see the c Chamber of the fourth  
Ventricle and the Cistern of the Animal Spirits. 
Then you shal cut a sunder d the little Bridg, or the Band of the Roots of the Spi- 
nal e Marrow, that the f foremost and Superior Ventricles of the brain may appear, 
which you shal see separated by a partition g as long as ones Finger, drawn from one
End towards the Fore-head, as far as the Petty-brain: it cleaves to the h Arched 
Roofe of the Ventricles, but beneath it is loose, and free from al ties, that the pas
sage of the Spirits might be free.  
But you (hal diligently noce, that the Extremities of the said partition are double 
forked: the hindermost bisurcation is longer than the foremost, and it cleaves unto 
that same transverse Ligament, which conncts the two Tuberosities or bunchings 
out of the brain, and so being spread out like a beam it bears up the Vaulted Arch
of 

Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 127 
of the Ventricles, the fore most bisurcation cleaves unto a little transverse cord, which 
resembles the Optick Nerve in thickness and in Color. 
The same partition which is termed Septum i Lucidum, being pulled bick, you shal 
manifestly descern the Vault of the Ventricles, which is called Corpus Pslloides or 
Harpe fashioned body; i also you shal see that the foremost Ventricles make but one 
continued Cavity.  
a T. 16. f. 6. DD. T, 17. f. 2. AA. T. 18. f. 4. AA.  b T. 16. f. 6. E. T. 17.
f. 2. CC.  c T. 17. f. 2. DD. &c. T. 18. f. 4. F d T. 18. f. 4. by CCC.
e T. 18. f. 4. DD.  f T. 16. f. 3. DD. EE. f. 4. CC. DD. g T. 16.
f. G. h. T. 16. f.3.bb. f. 4. B. T. 17. f. I. F. GG. i T. 16. f. 3. G  k T. 16.
f. 3. bb. f. 4. B. T. 17. f. I. GG. F.  
mean while you shal observe, that the inferior Ventricles placed at the Basis or 
bottom of the brain, are larger or at least equal unto the superior, and that the con- 
tinuity of the superior and inferior Ventricles is one and the same: or rather that 
there are but two Ventricles which contain the whole brain. For the a fourth Ven- 
tricle lies concealed in the Petty-Brain, and is manifestly seen to be wholly and 
only there. 
Further you shal observe that al the b Nerves even the Optick ones, do arise out of 
hose same Roots of the Spinal Marrow: and therefore al the Nerves in the body 
do arise out of the Spinal Marrow, within or without the brain. 
For if those Prominencies,  which are termed by Galen the beds of the Optick 
are productions of the Roots of the Spinal Marrow within the brain: we 
may With good reason aver, that the Optick nerves themselves do spring from the 
Spinal, MarroW. 
Finally, you shal see that the moving Nerves that give motion to the Eyes, are 
continued, and make one Cord as it were: and that the Optick Nerves, being bow- 
ed or turned back near the beds of the Optick Nerves, do ascend unto the foremost 
Ventricles.  
You shal likwise see that the Testes or Stones are c portions of the Roots of the 
Spinal Marrow, growing out of the brain: and the Nates or d buttocks are portions 
of those Roots which are derived from the Petty-brain. 
And if you shal compare this my description of the Parts which are to be seen in 
the brain turned upside down, beginning from the basis, with that of Varolius, you 
wil find it larger and different from his. And he that wil take pains to do as much, 
after he has once or twice seen me demonstrate these things, he wil acknowledg the 
truth of them with admiration. 
a T. 17. f. 2. DD. T. 18. f.4. F.b T. 18.f. 13. &c.  c T. 16. f. 4. cc.  
d T. 16. f. 4. bb.  
Now that in the brain the & Symptomes thereof, may be distinguished as 
 munch as may be by there proper place the whol bulk of the brain must be divided 
into three parts, viz. The c brain properly so called, the Petty-abrain and the 
b Marrow of the back.
The Parts of 
the Supreme Re-
gion.
But I divide the brain, as it is the subject of dissection into three Regions, the 
uppermost, the Middlemost, and the Lowest. In the uppermost you shal observe  
the Turnings and Windings of the brain, the d Sickle, and the Corpus e Cal-  
losum.
of the Mid-
dle Region. 
In the Middlernost: which is beneath the f Vault, you shal observe the Arched 
seeing of the said Vault, being the Roof which is placed over the Ventricles; the 
Partition- Wal, born up by g three Pillars; three h Ventricles with certain i Emi- 
nencies, which make up a Channel to the fourth Ventricle. 
And then you shal observe the Plexus k Choroides, the l Conarium, and the   
m Petty- brain and the  n fourth Ventricle therein concealed.
In

128 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book IV. 
Of the lowest 
Region. 
In the lowest Region, you shal mark the o Choana, or Funnel, the Glandula  
or p Kernel;  the Mammillary, or Teat-like q Productions; the seven r Pair of 
Nerves; the s Rete Mirable, or wonderful Net; and the Roots of the Spinal 
r Marrow. 
a T. 16. f. 6. DD. &c. T. 17. f. 2. AA. &c.  f. 2. II. T. 18. f. 4. DD.  
T. 16. f. I. bb.  d f. 2. AA. f. 5. EE.  e f. 2. BB. f. 3. BB  f f. 3. bb. f. 4.
B. T. 17. f. f. I. FGG. g T.10. f. 3. G.  h f. 3. DEf 4. CD. &c. f. 4. E.
 i f. 4. bb cc &c. k  f. 5. & 6. ff. T. 17. f. I. OO RR.  l T. 16. f. 4. a. T.
17. f. I. L.  m T. 16. f. 6. DD. t. 17. f. 2. AA. &c.  n f. 2. DD. GG. T. 18.
f. 4. F.  o T. 18. f. 3. E.  p T. 18. f. 3. D. &c.  q f. 3. aa.  r f. 3 BGH f
KLM. f. I. BCDEFG.  s f. 3. PPPP. t f. 4. DD. &c.  
And forasmuch as Casparus Hofmannws in his Book against Montarius, and in 
his Institutions, cals those Men Fools and Blockheads, who impose that the Ven-
tricles of the Brain are the Shops or Work-Houses where the Spirits are made;
and so confidently, and arrogantly avers it to be impossible, that he accounts it a 
great Crime or Madness to Think otherwise: I shal briefly examine his, by him sup- 
posed invincible Arguments, becaule no man has yet had the Courage co contradict 
them: only I dial in the first place demonstrate the contrary to be true.
The place
where the Ani-
mal Spirits are
made accor-
ding to our
Author. 
The Animal Spirit is made of the Vital, which is continually brought in great 
quantity, by the Carotick Arteries to the Basis of the Brain, where the branches 
meeting, and being woven together, do make the Rete Mirabile, from which in-
numerable branches are derived into the Crassa Meninx; that the blood may ascend
on every hand to those blood-channels of the Dura Mater, which I conceive does a- 
lone palpitate, or pantand I have seen in Fractures of the Skull, that when the 
Membrane is broken, the brain remains immovable. 
Seeing therefore the foremost Ventricles are opened in the Basis of  Brain, in and e- 
qual in their widness to the upper Cavities of the said Ventricles, and are close unto
the Rete Mirabile, from it the Ventricles draw their Spirits, or the Spirits exha-
ling from that Texture whose Arteries are exceeding tender and thin, they are 
brought along into the foremost Ventricles; and soon after, by the thin I Ventricle. 
which serves instead of a Channel or passage, they are forthwith carried by the  a streight
course into the fourth Ventricle, the Cistern, or Conduit Head of Spirits; that
from thence they may be distributed into the inferior Nerves, and into the Cavity of 
the Spinal Marrow.  
But the seven Pair of Nerves are propagated from those four Emiminecies, of 
which the two greater do form, and enclose the sides of the foremost Ventricle; the  
other two make the I sides of the fourth Ventricle, whose Root, and fore, and after
parts, are made up by the double Apophysis Scolicondes.  
Those four Eminencies are Spongy, and receive Spirits, which run directly into 
the Nerves of the Spinal Marrow by the fourth Ventricle, 
And no man can deny that the Nerves of the brain are the off-springs of those four 
Eminencies; and so this Proposition is to be interpreted. All
Nerves of the Body. 
and Brain, do spring from the Spinal Marrowy either within, or without the 
brain. 
I deny not that the Spirits are diffused through the whol substance of the brain,
and not wholly contained in the Ventricles: but I aver that the Ventricle; are the 
true Shops, or Work-Houses of the Animal Spirit, which is distributed unto the 
seven Couple of Nprves, and to the Spinal Marrow.
The Argu-
ments of Hof-
man to the
contrary an-swered.  
That this is absurd and impossible, Hofman does thus seek to prove: 1. Arg. 
There is the Spirit made, where the Action is performed. 
I Answer, many Actions are performed in parts, in which no Spirits are bred: 
and I deny that in the Body of the Brain, al Actions are performed. Against, there 
needs no ocher elaboration than their passage through the brain; for as the blood of
the Veins, passing through the Hearts Ventricles, is in a moment 
made Vital; so 
the Vital Spirits running through the middle of the. Brain, as far as the Ventricle do
become Animal. 


Chap. 2. Of the Brain, 129 
For if it were needful that the Animal Spirit should be elaborated in the Substance 
of the Brain, it would lose much of its subtilty, because the brain is cold and 
moist. 
2d Arg. of Hofman. If the Spirit be to act, it must need be under the command 
of the Soul in the Vessels; for after that it is entered into the Sea of the Ventricles, 
what is there to compel the same to return into the strait passages of the 
Nerves? 
I answer: If the Spirit be diffused into the whol substance of the brain being re- 
ally soft as Wax, how can it return into the Nerves, seeing there are no Vessels run- 
ning through the substance of the brain. Those bloody marks wherewith it is sprin- 
kled are points of blood dropping down from above, out of the Arteries which runs 
between the winding, substance of the brain. The great Providence of Nature, be- 
cause the blood could not pierce, nor pass through the midst of the Substance. of the 
brain hath carried the same through the Channels of the Dura Mater, as far as the 
blood-passages, whence it slides into the inferior parts, and by the Press, or that 
great Vein which Constitutes the Plexus Choroides, it flows into the Ven- 
tricles. 
More probable it were to assign the Seat, and Shop of the Animal Spirits in the 
Plexus Choroides,  which is diffused through al the Cavities of the brain, as far as 
the basis thereof. But shew me ( friend Hofman) the way by which the Animal 
Spirit made of the Vital, may be diffused into the substance of the brain, so as to 
flow into the Nerves. 
3d Arg. The Ventricles are surrounded within, with the Pia Mater, which 
binders the ingress and regress of the Spirits. 
1 Answer: If the Ventricles have for their Covering, the thin Meninx, the pas- 
sage is thereby the safer into the foremost Ventricles, without any loss at ail. I have 
already demonstrated in an Entrance in the basis of the brain, being the way into 
the fourth Ventricle; there is no need of a regress for Arterial blood, which ascends 
upward by the Crassa Meninx distilling into the brain, does on al sides afford 
spirits to the whol brain; neither can the blood penetrate without Spirits. 
4 Arg. Hofmans strongest Argument is this: Seeing the two superior Ventri- 
cles open into the third, and that into the Funnel, and it into the Pallate, who 
will be Surety, that the Spirits will not make their escape this way? 
I Answer: This danger is easily shunned by the continual flux and pulse, or dri- 
ving of the Spirits to the Cistern; and that same hole is exceeding smal, and so 
deep, even to the Os Sphenoides, that it can equal the length of a mans 
Finger. 
You Who beleeve chat the blood passes from the Right Ventricle of the Heart, 
through the Lungs, that it may return into the Left, are you not afraid lest we 
should lose our vital Spirks, when we blow our breach out in Respiration?  
5. Arg. The Ventricles are not continued with the Nerves, but with the whol Body. 
I Answer: If the Nerves proceed from those same Eminencies, which are Roots 
of the Spinal Marrow, between the Brain, and due Petry-brain, and they are prin- 
cipal Potions of the Brain; do not the Nerves arise from the brain it self? But you 
your self have often times written, that the Nerves arise within the brain, from the
Roots of the Spinal Marrow. 
6 Arg. The Spinal Marrow. 
oft The Ventricles have now another Office, which cannot stand with that 
of the Spirits. 
I Answer: That I deny any such Office. For the Choana, or Funnel, can 
purge away any wheyish. Excrements which shal be in the Ventricles, but the grea- 
test part, slowing down by the external Windings of the brain unto the basis, fals 
partly into the Os Ethmoides, or Colander-bone, partly it descends to the basis of 
the brain; and if not by the Choana, yet by other holes neer abouts, it is purged 
into the Pallate.
Z But

130 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
But because Hofmans Spirits fail him in handling this Question ( can you for- 
bear laughing ) for they are his own words, we shal also leave him to enjoy his 
self-love, with a great flock of  bleating Animals (so he saies) which follows his 
absurd Opinion, provided that he be the Bel-weather. Let him no more triumph 
before the Victory, nor let him be so secure and undaunted, as not to fear Hercules 
himself.
Hofmans Te-
nent disturbs
the practice of
Physick.  
That same new Tenent of the whol Doctrine of Diseases of the 
Brain: and that I may declare so much, I wil chuse out only two Diseases, which 
have their Seat in the Ventricles, viz. The Epilepsie, and  Apoplexy. 
The Apoplexy makes to be in the whol Substance of the brain, not in the 
Ventricles: The Epilepsie, he wil have to be caused only by vapors ascending into 
the Head, and distilled through the whol substance of the brain. He allows of no 
Epilepsie from a primary affection of the Head, but only by Sympathy from other
parts. 
He assigns the Seat of the Apoplexy to be in the whol substance of the brain ob- 
structed, and avers that it is caused only by blood shed forth of the Veins; and 
makes the Cause thereof to be the obstruction of the Press introduced by Nymma- 
nus. But if the Torcular, or Press is obstructed, which is the fourth Channel car- 
rying blood into the Plexus Choroides, the passage of the blood and Spirits is in- 
tercepted. But according to Hofman in an Apoplexy, only blood is found shed
out of the veins within the Ventricles, and therefore the Torcular was not obstu- 
sted. 
It is a certain, and undoubted thing, confirmed by many Experiments, that in the
Apoplexy, the Ventricles of the brain are obstructed, or there is an obstruction in
the Choana, or Funnel. But especially the hole of the fourth ventricle which is 
Shut with the Apophysis Scolicoides, is stopped by thick and clammy Flegm stic- 
king there; which it it be not discussed, of removed, being evacuated through the 
Funnel, it causes death.  
If the Matter be serous,and pass into the Spinal Marrow, it causes the Palsie in 
stead of the Apoplexy and so a greater Disease is cured by a lesser, the matter be-
ing translated from one place to another. But if blood happen to be shed into the 
ventricles, present death follows.  
But if so be the Apoplexy should be produced by blood alone, as Hofman will 
have it; how could blood which was shed into the ventricles, pals into the Nerves
without putrefaction, and how could it enter into the Cavities of the Nerves?  
In these two Diseases he hath betrayed his own Ignorance, although he could find 
no such difficulty in the falling sickness, as Crato acknowledged, whose Wish was
this: Would to God I could see before I die, the Essence of this Disease, together
with the Cure thereof rightly explained. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Principal dis- 
eases of the 
Brain. 
Distemper. 
The brain is exercised with many kinds of Diseases, with an hot, cold, moist Di- 
temper with divers Humors, Flegmatick, Cholerick, Melanchollick, Sanguine, 
and Wheyish; which either do molest the Membranes of the brain, especially the
Crassa Meninx, or are diffused into the Channels thereof, and being there stopped 
of their course, they cause most acute pains: or they slide into the exterior win- 
dings of the brain, and by little and little, they distil into the substance of the brain
and the ventricles thereof; or into the hinder part of the Head, or the Petty-brain 
or they descend into the lowest parts of the brain. 
If the Humor ascend by the Carotick Arteries unto the brain, it may produce the 
same Diseases; now al Diseases that are caused by content, or sympathy, without 
matter, only by evaporation, are not so dangerous, as if they were bred within the 
brain, so as that the morbifick Matter should be therein contained.
Obstruction of
the Cavities.  
The brain, besides similar Diseases in Distemper, and Laxity, suffers also Dis- 
eases in Conformation, when as, according to the motion of the Moon, its bulk is en-
creased. 

Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 131 
creased, or diminished; in the Disorder of its Passages, when the Channels of the 
Dura Meninx are obstructed, especially the fourth, which is called Torcular, or 
the Press: which being obstructed, is thought to cause the Apoplexy, the passage 
of the Spirits to and fro being intercepted. Which I do not beleeve, because the 
Spirits are shed abroad into the inferior Vessels. from that admirable Net of Arte- 
ries, called Rete mirabile, and that same Cavity being stopped, only the Plexus 
Choroides, being defrauded of its blood, is hurt.
Of the Ven-
tricles. 
The Ventricles are also obstructed, especially the fourth, which being stopped, 
present death follows, by reason of the stoppage ot that continual influx of Spirits,  
Which ought to be into the inferior parts, and the Marrow of the back.
Of the Choana,
or Funnel. 
The Choana may likewise be obstructed, which intercepts the Efflux of serous  
and Flegmatick Humors, whereby flowing back into the brain, they may cause the  
Epilepsie, or Apoplexy, and induce divers deadly Diseases. 
If the anterior, or foremost ventricles are perforated into the Nostrils, the ob- 
structions of those passages, wil be very hurtful to the brain. 
A fault of evil Conformation, cannot be amended exactly: by strengthening, 
and drying the brain, both the fore-mentioned may be helped.
Siriasis. 
The brain is Inflamed, not only the Meninges, or Coats, but somtimes also in the 
proper substance thereof; whence comes the Phrenzy, and Siriasis, or Dog-day 
madness; but not any Paraphrenitis.
Frenzy. 
Striasis is termed from the Dog-Star; for in the Dog-Daies chiefly, it afflicts 
both Boys, and elder persons and therfore it comes rather from an external Cause, 
as long abiding in the Sun, &c. than from any internal Cause: as a Phrenzy comes 
only from an internal Cause, whether it be Primary, or Secondary, by consent of o- 
ther parts in a burning Feaver.
Tumors. 
The brain may likewise swel, by reason of a Commotion thereof from some in- 
ternal Cause, it is called Ecplexis. Stupidity of the Head after a blow, is a bad 
sign according to Hippocrates. At length these Diseases bring a Sphacelism in the 
brain, causing putrefaction, corruption, and mortificacion. 
Again, it is subject to a watry Tumor, either in its Circumference, or within 
the Ventricles. If in its Circumference it is termed Hydrocephalos, or the Water- 
Head, and at length the wheyish Humor slipping by little and little, within the 
Ventricles, causes the sleepy Disease, and after it the Apoplexy. 
And these I take to be Diseases of the brainy however Fernelius has written, 
that the Disorders of the Head, which have been observed by Experience, are 
symptomes, and not Diseases.
Symptomes of 
the brain. 
Or 
Membranes. 
Or in the ca-
vities, and pas-
sages.
But he elegantly, according to his wonted fashion, does divide the Symptomes 
into three Ranks, with reference to the parts affected. Some possess the Mem-  
branes; some the Substance of the Brain; and some the hollow Passages. 
In the Pericranium, and Meninges, Pains are caused. In the Substance of the 
Brain, which is the Seat of the Animal chief Faculties, are contained the Symp- 
tomes of Fancy and Reason depraved, such as are, Dotage, Melancholly, Ecstasies, 
Lyncanthropy, Madness. Also the Symptomes of Memory abolished, such as are 
Forgetfulness, Foolishness, Doltishness and blockishness. Symptomes consisting 
in the Cavities, and passages, are very many, appertaining to Sence and Motion; and 
to sleeping and waking, as dead sleep, sleeping Trance. Symptomes of Motion  
are Walking in ones sleep; to be taken stiff, as it were blasted, or Planet-struck. 
the Night-Mare, Convulsion, Fasting-sickness, Unquietness, and tumbling, Shive- 
ring, Shaking, Trembling; Palsies, Feebleness of the Limbs, and Apoplexy.
Symptomes of
the Membranes 
Symptomes in the undue proportion of what should be voided forth, do belong 
to the passage and Cavities, as a Catarrh, Rheumatismus, Bleeding at Nose. All 
these Symptomes aforsaid, I wil now declare particularly.
Pain. 
The Head-ach, either occupies the Pericranium, or the Meninges; if the Pe- 
ricranium, the pain is outwards; if the Meninges, the pain is inward. Each of 
these pains reaches unto the Eyes; because the internal Membranes do produce the 
Coats of the Eye, called Cornea, and Uvea; and the Pericranium produces the 
Coat Conjunctiva
Z 2 The 


132. The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
The kind of the Pain shews the Nature of the Disease. A sharp and biting pain 
does argue a Cholerick Distemper of the Head: a heavy pressing pain, shews a 
Flegmatick Distemper: a panting, or pulsing pain, argues somwhat of an Inflama- 
tion: A pricking pain shews an Erosion, or gnawing, caused by a sharp Humor, or 
a Worm which is rare. A stretching pain, argues abundance of Humor, or of win- 
dy Spirits, which distend the Membranes. 
Now the Pain is either in the whol Head, or in the half, or in some one particle 
thereof. If it infest the whol Head, it is called Cephalalgia: if half the Head, 
Hemicrania, because the brain is divided into two parts; If the pain posseis one 
part, as if a Nail were driven in there, the Arabians call it Clavus, and Ovum; the 
Nail, or Egg. If the pain of the Head, be of long Continuance, it is termed Ce- 
phalæa; which together with the Hemicrania, is periodical; But the Cephalalgia 
is a continual universal Head-ach. 
A continual Pain of the Head joyned with a continual Feaver, and signs of ma- 
lignity, is exceeding dangerous, according to Hippocrates in the Second of his
Prognosticks.
Symptomes of
the Substance
of the brain. 
Pains of the Head are. Primary, and Proper; or Secundary, and by Sympathy 
from other parts: These are not so dangerous as the former. 
The Principal Actions of the Brain, Imagination, Ratiocination, and Memory, 
are diminished, depraved,and abolished. Depravation of the Fantasie and Rea-
son, is Raving; the Imminution thereof is Foolishness. 
There is a three-fold Hurt of the Memory; but the Abolition thereof has only 
found a name, being called Oblivion.
Foolishness. 
The Cause of Foolishneß, is every great distemper of the brain, which is known 
by its Causes, as by signs; or some ill shaping of the Head, which is easily dis- 
cerned. 
Dotage. 
Dotage, or Raving, consists in absurd Thoughts, Words, or Deeds. The Say- 
ings of such as rave, are estranged from Truth and Reason, or not to the point in 
hand; their Deeds are either unusual, or undecent;  their Thoughts are absurd, ri- 
diculous, and Chymerical.
Melancholy. 
The manner of Raving, ought to be distinguished to know the differences of the 
Melancholly which causes the same  for a Delirium, or raving with depravation of
the Fansie, is termed Melancholly, which consists in a false Opinion touching 
things past, present, and to come; which being manifold, it is defined by vain fear, 
anxiety, or sorrow. 
Again, Melancholly is either Primary, or Secondary: The Primary has its Ori-
ginal in the brain; the Secondary springs from the Hypochondriacal parts, whence
it is termed Hypochondriaca Melancholia, which is either Humoral, or Flatulent: 
the former is the worte of the two, and brings at last Madness, and Out-ragious- 
ness.
Ecstasie. 
The Melancholy Ecstasie, is an excess of Melancholy, which is three fold: An 
Ecstasie simply so called; an Ecstasie with silence; an Ecstasie with a Frenzy: 
they are caused by black Choler, according to the divers decrees of its Adu- 
ction. 
Foolishness with laughter is better and safer, than with seriousness and fierceness. 
Raving without a Feaver, is so much the better by how much the Parts under the 
short Ribs, or the Brain, are less heated. 
The Resting, and binding up of the Sences, is Natural Sleep: The breaking off, 
of hindrance of sleep, is Watching: Either of which being out of measure, is hurt-
ful. 
Coma, or
Dead sleep.
If Sleep be profound, 'Tis called Coma, or Carus, Dead-sleep. If this
Symptome be mixed of Sleep and Watching, so that the Patient seems to incline to
sleep, with his Eyes shut, but is not able to sleepv it is termed Coma-Vigilans 
Drowzy Watch. But if one that has a sleeping Disease upon him, every time he is 
awakened, does rave, and talk idlely, the Disease is called Typhomania.  
The Night-
Mare.
And if a man lie stiff with his Eyes open, and when he comes to himself, remem- 
bers what was done about him, it is termed Incubus, the Mare; which is wont to 
happen


Chap. 2. OF the Brain. 133 
happen in the night to such as lie upon their backs, or have glutted themselves 
with feasting; and it seems that they are choaked, by some Devil lying 
Upon them, or by some Theif that has laid hold upon them to Rob and Murther 
them.
Catalepsis. 
The abolition of al sence and motion saving Respiration, is called Catalepsis or 
Catoche: whereby a Man is Frozen as it were in that posture he was in when the 
fit seazed upon him. It springs from a Cold distemper of the Brain with 
Flegm.
Carus. 
Carus is a deep Sleep, which comes upon Feavers and wounds of the temporal 
Muscles, or from an hot and moist distemper, or from much evaporation with fero- 
sities, moistening the substance of the brain. 
A Lethargy.
A Lethargy is an Imminution of sence and Motion and also of the Memory of 
Necessary things. It Springs from a Primary hot and moist distemper of the brain, 
joyned with a putrid Humor which provoks a Feaver and cherishes and keepes it 
up a long rise. There is also Dotage adjoyned. Touching this Disease there is a 
saying of Hippocrates in his Coicks Page 75, Which explaines all the Symptomes 
thereof. The existence or particular Nature of the Lethargy and Coma, 
consists in a loosness, as that of the Catalepsis in a Tension or ben- 
ding. Those that are in a Lethargick Sleep, at last become Apople-
ctick 
An Apoplexy.
An Apoplexy does oft times primarily and unexpectedly invade a Man, and som-  
times it followes some other Sleepy Disease. It is an Abolition of sence and motion 
with respiration hurt, which at last brings snoring and suffocation, by reason of 
thick Flegm flowing out of the Funnel and obstructing the Larynx or  
Wesand.
It is Caused by a Repletion of the Ventricles of the brain, either with a pituito- 
us or Wheyish Humor, or with blood, some smal Artery of the Rete Mirabile be- 
ing broken in the Basis of the Brain, or blood being carried aloft in a Plethorick body 
by the fourth Channel, rushes into the Ventricles,  
If it be Simple and meer Whey, by strength of Nature out of the anterior 
Ventricles, it slips into the fourth Ventricle, and from thence into the Spinal Mar- 
row and so Causes a Palsie.  
If it be a Flegmatick Humor stopped in the fourth Ventricle, or in the third, it 
cannot be discussed, and the brain is overwhelmed thereby. 
If the blood be shed out of the vessels, it suddainly suffocates. 
In the Carus or other Sleepy Disease, only the foremost Ventricles of the brain, 
are overwhelmed with Serosities, so that there is yet freedom for the spirits to pass 
into all Parts of the body. 
But in an Apoplexy, all the ventricles of the brain, but especially the fourth, 
are obstructed: and unless the matter be discussed into the spinal Marrow Death fal- 
lows unavoidably. 
Fernelius avouches that ah Apoplexy is bred by an Obstructiou of that Rete 
Mirabile, the afflux of Arterial blood out of the Heart into the brain, being thereby 
intercepted. Therefore they are termed Carotides, because being obstructed 
they cause Carum or Sleepy-Evil.
Cure of the
Apoplexy, Ca-
rus and such
like Diseases.
In the Apoplexy and Sleepy Diseases, besides general Medicines, as blood-let- 
ting liberally twice or thrice repeted out of the Arm and foot; strong Purgation 
of watry Humors, Cupping-Glasses fixed unto the shoulders and the hinder Part of 
the head, Topical Remedies, are not be neglected, which draw and Evacuate 
near the part affected; such as is the opening of the Veins under the Tongue and of 
the external Jugular Vein, and likewise of the Temporal Artery: great Vesicatories 
applied towards the cop of the shoulders to che Cephalick Vein, strong Medicines 
to provoke sneezing, a Seton in the Neck, the string being often drawn about and 
anointed with Oyl of Vitriol that it may bite the more and attract: opening the 
Veins of the Nose after the manner used by the Ancients, with a split Toothed 
Quil thrust up as far as the bottom of the Colander: a sharp injection into the
Nostrils 


134 The Physical Confideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
Nostrils by a fyring, and within the furrows placed between the spaces of Os Vo-
mesis: drawing one of the Flegmatick clammy matter which sticks in the Throat 
and stops the Larynx, but thrusting a feather far into the throat: to which intent a 
strong vomit is good to cast forth any Humor that has flowed into the Wind-Pipe: 
neither must we omit extream hard rubbings with salt, and continual stirring of the 
body, if it be possible. 
All which remedies are to be applied with all possible speed one upon the Neck 
of another, in an Apoplexy, because there is danger in delay. In Sleepy Diseases 
which proceed slowly, and are caused by matter falling down from 
the Parts above, they are more slowly administred, and without Precipita- 
tion. 
You shal observe also, that a great Part of these Humors is gathered together in the 
turnings & windings which are outmost in the upper substance of the brain, which do 
either putrifie there, or flip into the ventricles of the brain: and yet these windings 
of the brain are not considered. 
The Palsie.
The Palsie is an Abolition of fence and motion, not in the whol body, as in the 
 Apoplexy, but only in the greatest Part of the body, or in half
thereof, which is termed Hemiplegia, or in one Part, which is called 
Paraplegia. 
Fernelius observes, that fence is taken away, the motion remaining unhurt: and 
somtimes motion is taken away and the fence remains, because of the difference of 
the Nerves of the brain and the Spinal Marrow. In the Palsie, the Nerves of the 
Spinal Marrow are obstructed, but chose of the brain, not; and therefore many 
Parts remain unhurt, especially the internal. 
Somtimes the Palsie happens without obstruction of the Nerves, because the 
softning and Humectation of the Nerves, brings a kind of Palsie.
Stupor. 
In an imperfect Palsie when motion and fence are only dulled, the Disease is 
termed Stupor or Nothrosis, which arises from a moist distemper of the brain. A 
Stupidity or dulness of sence and motion in a Feaver, is wont to foretel a sleepy 
Disease to follow. When it comes alone without a Feaver, it foretels a Palsie or 
an Apoplexy. 
Vertigo.
Vertigo, is a depravation of fence and motion, which makes the Patient think 
that al things turn round: it springs from a windy Humor, which being agitated 
within the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, causes the foresaid Apprehension of all 
things turning about. If it Causes a darkness before the Patients Eyes, it is cal- 
led Vertigo Tenebricosa or Scotodinos. It arises from the Brain or from vapours 
ascending from the inferior Parts. That is worst which arises primarily from the brain, 
and it is a fore-runner of the Falling- Sickness.
Convulsion. 
The Convulsion is a violent pulling back of the Muscles towards their Head or 
beginning. It is threefold, Emprosthotonos, when the body is bent foreward; 
Opisthotonos, when the body is drawn backward: and Tetanos when both sides 
remain stif, by reason of an equal bowing or stretching of the Muscles on both 
fides. 
The Cause of a Convulsion, is either an obstruction of the Nerves or their being 
pricked by a sharp Humor, or a dry distemper, which dries the Nerves, and so 
makes them stif as a dried Lurstring; this is incurable. In one word, all Convul- 
sions are said to arise either from too much emptyness, or over fulness.
Falling sick-
neß. 
An Epilepsie or Falling-sickness, is a Convulsion of the whol body, coming by
fits, and hurting-the Mind and fences. It is caused by an obstruction of the fore-
most Ventricles of the brain, caused by an Abundance of sharp Humors, either 
Cholerick or Flegmatick, Either it comes from the brain Primarily affected, or 
from some other Part sending Malignant Humors to the brain. If it proceed from 
the brain Primarily affected, it is the more dangerous: if by fault of the Spleen or 
some other Bowel venemously infected: the coming of the fits may
be

Chap. 2. Of the Brain. 135 
be foreseen and prevented. The former comes in a moment, the latter by 
degrees.
Fernelius, besides the Humor which is the common Cause, accounts the pecu- 
liar Cause to be a venemous Air or vapour, which is exceeding, hurtful to the brain; 
and therefore he conceives, it must be cured with specificks and appropriate Reme- 
dies, as wel as those vulgar ones. 
Trembling. 
Trembling is a depravation of Motion through weakness. It is caused by the 
Weakness of the motive faculty and the bodies heavyness. So that look how much 
the motive faculty endeavours to lift up the Member, so much does the heavyness of 
the said Member not sufficiently illustrated with spirits, press it down again. And 
therefore it arises, from obstruction of the Nerves, or from their being over-much 
softened, or from some external Cause, as by anointing with Quick silver, or 
other Application thereof. There is a certain mixture of the Convulsion and trem- 
blings, which is called Spasmo-Tromois. 
Shivering and
Shaking.
Shivering and shaking, are motions of the body, which happen in Feavers, and 
they are forerunners of the fits of Agues, or of the Exacerbations of Feavers. 
They happen also, to such as have ripe Impostumes, when the Impostum is ready 
to break. And therefore Hippocrates observes a threefold Shaking-fit; one fea- 
verish, the other Ulcerous, and the last Symptomatical.
Tumbling and
Tossing. 
Unquietness, Anxiety, tumbling and tossing of the body this way and that way, 
called by the Greekes Asse is a depravation of motion, which proceeds from a 
misaffection of the Stomach, by reason of a sharp Humor Nettling and Stinging the 
Nerves of the body, or the Membranes of the Back-bones Marrow. Which makes 
that the Sick cannot rest in one place or posture;  but are forced every foot to 
change place and tumble here and there, and to change the posture of their 
bodies. 
Walking in
ones sleep.
Night-walking, ought to be reckoned among the Symptomes of motion de- 
praved: because it is not preformed by Judgment and Reason, but by force of a 
disease, namely of sharp Fumes which compel the Sick person or the healthy to rise 
Up arid walk in their Sleep.
Symptomes of
things voided.
forth. 
I proceed to the Irregularity of the Excrements. The proper excretion of the 
brain, is either an Exhalation of a thin Vapour by the seames of the Scul or the 
Pores of the Skin, or it is an Efflux of a thick Humor by the Nostrils and Palate of 
the Mouth. The Disproportion of this Excretion consists either in excess or defect. 
That in defect has no Name, but it degenerates into a Cause of Diseases of the 
brain, of which we have already spoken.
Nose bleeding.
The disproportion in Excess is various, either when blood does immoderatly 
flow from the Nose, of by drops. Both which Symptomes are Malignant. The 
former decaies the bodies strength, by reason of the loss of blood and Spirits, the 
latter betokens a repletion of the Head, and a Vain endeavour of oppressed Nature, 
And therefore drops of Blood coming from the Nose, is bad in a Vaporous Feaver. 
both as a Cause, and as a Sign.
Catarrhs. 
The disproportion in Excretion of a serous and Phlegmatick Humor, is many- 
fold. Their general Name is a Catarrh, which is a distillation of Humor from the 
Head into the Inferior Parts, from which Parts it receives divers Appellations. 
If it fal into the Nostrils, it is called Coryza or Gravedo; if into the Throat 
Branchos Hoarsness; if into the Mouth and Palate Ptyelismos or the Spawle. 
And these three sorts of Catarrhs, are vulgarly comprehended under the Name of 
Rheum.
Rheumatismus
A Catarrh falling upon the outward Parts of the body is named Rheumatismus 
or Rheumaticus affectus, the Rheumatick Pains. If it fal upon the Joynts it re- 
sembles the Gout, save that it comes not by fits: wherefore an Eunuch may suffer 
the Rheumatick pains, but not the true Gout. See Galens Comment 
upon that Aphorisme. Boys and Eunuchs are not troubled with the
Gout.
Galen. 

136 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book IV. 
Galen makes freqitent mention of the Rheumatick Disease, which was common 
at Rome, as it is with us in Paris: in his Second Book to Glauco: in his Book 
of Bloodletting, against Erasistratus &c. This Disease he cured by liberal 
Bloodletting. It is described by Hippocrates, in his Book of the internal Diseases, 
under the Name of a Joynt-pain, which is wont to trouble young People more 
than Aged. 
The other differences of Catarhs with Reference to the diversity of Parts on 
which they fal, are Vain. It suffices to know, that al Fluxions upon internal 
Parts, are called likewise Rheums. 
The Cause of a Catarrh or Flux of Rheum, is a cold and moist distemper, or an 
hot distemper with an abundance of Humors working in the Vessels, or without. 
Galen acknowledges both these Causes, in his Comment upon the 24. Aphor. Of 
the third Book. 
The latter Physitians, following the Doctrin of the Arabians wil have the Humor 
which Causes the Catarrh, to be bred in the Head, only without the Vessels by 
reason of Vapours ascending.  
Fernelius contends that the Conjunct Cause of a Catarrh, is a serous matter, 
collected under the Skin of the Head, without the Vessels: and that the Ante- 
cedent Cause, is an Humor shut up in the Veins. If you desire to know 
more of this subject,  Read Fernelius, who wil give you abundant satisfaction. 
Chap. 3. Of the Eyes. 
The Eyes. 
BEcause the Eye and the Ear may be demonstrated without meddling to 
dissect the Face;  I wil dispatch these Parts, before I proceed unto the 
Countenance. 
Scituations.
Parts. 
The Eye-lids.
The Eye, the Instrument of the Sight, is the principal Part of the face, placed 
in the Fore-Part of the Head, to direct the Actions of the body, because al acti- 
ons are directed forwards, by reason of the Scituacion of the Hands. Seeing it is an 
Organical Part made up of many Similar Parts some of those Parts are external 
and some internal. The external are the Eye-lids, which are the Coverings of the 
Eyes, wherewith they are covered, shut and opened. And therefore each Eye- 
lid is movable, howbeit the motion is more evident in the upper Eye-lids, and is 
performed by help of Muscles, of which we shal treat in our fift book containing the 
History of Muscles. From whence the Reader may fetch what does appertain to the 
present occasion.
Its Membranes. 
The Eye-lid is made up, of the Skin, a Membrane and muscles. The Membrane 
stretched out under the Skin, is produced from the Pericranium, which descen- 
ding by the length of the Forehead unto the Eyes, is an underwose for the Eye-
brows, withal makes the conjunctive Coat of the Eye, which being 
fixed to the Brain of the Socket, detaines and binds the Eye in its Hole of 
Cavity.
Tarsus. 
The Extremities of al the Eye-lids are terminated with a Cartilaginous or
Gristle edging, which is called b Tarsus, whereupon one by one in a row are fasten- 
ed the c Hairs of the Eye-lids; which are born with us, and look how long they are 
at our Birth, the same length they keep, during our whol life. 
Cilia.
They seldom  fal of by reason of Sickness, unless in a Malignant Whores-Pocks, 
which mows down and makes wast of al the Hairs of the Body. These Hairs of the 
Eye-lids are termed Cilia. 
Corners.
The angular Extremities of the Eye-lids meeting together, are termed Anguli, 
the corners of the Eyes. The one is d greater, towards the Nose; the other is e les- 
ser, towards the Temples.
Tear-Spouts.
In the Eye-lids by the greater Corners are observed two little f holes, which are 
termed Puncta Lachry malia, or the because the superfluous Hu- 
midities of the Eyes, or tears, do flow thither and Issue out of those Holes; which
Humidites 


Chap. 3. Of the Eyes. 137 
Humidites to receive, the Gladula Lachrymalis or a  Tear-Kernel is ordained, 
being thrust into the little perforated bone, that the Humor might rather distil 
through this Hole into the Nostrils, than fal out upon the external 
Parts. 
Muscles.
The upper Eye-lid has a Muscle that lifts it up termed therefore b Levator or 
the Lifter, which arises from the bottom of the Orbita or Socket and being spred 
out upon the Muscle which lifts up the Eye, it is c widened into an Eye-lid, that 
when the Eye is lifts up the Eyelid may therewith be raised. 
The Musculus latus or broad Muscle is common to the two Eye-lids, which 
being Circularly derived from the bony brim of the of the Socket, is spred out 
through both the Eye-lids, that it may serve to shut them both: and because it 
reaches in the upper Part as far as the Eye-brow it draws that likewise down, in a 
strong and close shutting of the Eye-lids, unless any man wil contend, that there 
is a distinct Muscle for that use.
Eye-brow. 
Now the Eye-brow is a Fleshy Hillock, adorned with Hairs, which serves for a 
Penthouse to overshadow the Eyes; it is depressed by the Orbicular Muscle of the 
Eye-lids, and lifted up, by the frontal Muscle. 
Parts of the
Eye.
Fat.
These things being observed, the Eye-lids are cut away, and the Circular adhesion 
of the Conjunctive Coat unto the Eye; that the Eye may de viewed, which is
compact and made into a round bal or Globe of the fat which is placed d round 
about the same, to stop up the thinks and to make it more movable;  
and of six Muscles for motion and of Coats, Humors, Veins, Arteries and 
Nerves.
Kernels. 
Before the Fat be removed, the two Glandules or Kernels are to be considered in 
Scituation, of which one is of the greatest moment, Viz. The The Lachrymal or 
e  Tear-Kernel;  whose substance you shal observe to be Fleshy, soft and smal; and 
its Scituation to be within a little bone, beneath the same.  
a T. 19. f. I.  b f. I. CC.  c f. I. beneath B.  d f. I. by D.  e  f. I. E.
 f f. dd,
a T. 19. f. I. D.  b f. I. AA.  c f. I. B  d f. 2. AA.  e f. I. D.  
Then you shal look out the other Kernel which is wholly unlik the former, placed 
in the other f Corner; which is flat. White, and like other Kernels. 
The Fat being carefully taken away, the a six Muscles present themselves; in the 
investigation whereof, we must begin at the b Trochleator, or the greater Oblique 
Muscle, Scituate at the greater c Corner; and there we must be careful to preserve 
the d pulley, being a little strong Gristle fastened to the bone, beneath and close by 
the Caruncula Lachrymalis or e Tear-spout; through which Gristle (like a Rope 
through a Pulley) the round Tendon of the Trochleator is drawn, and inserted into 
the upper Part of the Eye. 
The other, Obliquus f Minor, must be sought for in the inferior Part of the 
Socket, being rould back under the Eye, it is terminated by the lesser g Corner. 
The other four, are right Muscles, whereof one h lifts up, and its opposite i draws 
down; the remaining two draw towards the k Sides. They al take their original 
from the Cavity of the Socket, by the hole of the Optick Nerve, and each one is 
produced right forewards to the Conjunctiva.
True Coast. 
These things being observed, the Eye must be pulled out, that the inward stru- 
cture thereof may be made to appear: and in the first place you shal observe two 
true Coates of the Eyes, which are orbicular as the Eye it self: the rest are imper- 
fect coates: and before you cut asunder the Cornea or Horny-Coat, you shal take 
away the Nervous productions of the Muscles of the Eye, which some would 
have to be m Coat, which is absurd. 
1. Cornea.
You shal observe that the Cornea or n Horny Coats is transparent before, to serve
the sight, but behind and on the side, it is dark.
A a Its 

138 The Physical Consideration and Anatomy Book IV. 
Its thick o Substance, is divided into little Skins, especially on the fore-side; 
when it is cut, presently the watery P Humor Runs out, which is also found 
Circumfused about the Uvea Tunica, or Grape-Skin q Coat, if the Cornea bedi- 
vided in the hinder Part: this Humor cannot be stopped, because if presently 
Occurs, fllowing out like Water. 
f f. I. E.  a T. 19. f. 2. BBB.  b f. 3. F. f. 4. F.  c f. I. by D.  d f. 3.
G.  e f. I. D.  f f. 3. and 4. E.  h f. 3. 4, 5. A.  i f. 3. 4. 5. B.
 K f. 3. 4, 5. C. D.  l f. 2. CC.  m f. 5. aaaa.  n f. 6. AA. BB.  o f. 8.
CCC.  P f. 9. DD. P f. 7. AA. CC. 
2. Uvea.
Pupilla.
Iris.
Afterwards you shal see the a Uvea or Grape-Skin Coat, and its open hole, 
which makes the b Pupilla or sight of the Eye; the external Face or Circle of the
Pupilla is termed c Iris, or the Rain-bow. The Circumference of the Pupilla is
adorned with smal threds or little Fibres extended upon the Chrystalline Humor,
which they retain in its Scituation. 
The Pupilla, in Catts, is manifestly moved, in Men it is unmovable, unless it
be somwhat slackened and straitned. by the Access and Recess of some extraodinary 
light.  
These things being observed, pour out the Humors, and you shal find the 
e Christallin Humor overwhelmed in the Vitreous f Humor, and then the interior 
g Superficies of the Uvea Tunica wil appear black, and cleane; in Brute Beasts it
is varigated, being tainted with Green Black and Sky-Color. Wherefore, when 
you are to demonstrate the Eye, you shal have an Ox and a Sheeps- Eye in ready- 
ness, that you may compare them with the Eyes of Man-kind. 
In the hinder Part of the Uvea you shal fee the Optick h Nerve fastened, and the 
Marrow thereof piercing within that Coate.
The three Hu-
mors of the 
Eyes.
The Watry.
Chrystallin. 
There are three Humors contained in the Eye the first is the i watry Humor, 
already run out, there remain two fastened together, the Chrystallin and the Vi- 
treous. The Christal is like a k Vetch, transparent, and being placed upon letters
in a Book, it makes them shew larger, as a spectacle is wont to do. There is a Mem-
brane-attributed thereunto, termed l Chrystalloides. Hippocrates saies that in
living Creatures it Runs like Water, or is more liquid at least.  
The Glassie.
The Christallin Humor being pulled out, there remaines the m  Vitreous Humor 
being compacted and not running about, by means Of the Reticularis Tunica, or
n Net-like Coat Interwoven: which being o cut asunder, by frequent chopping of 
the Pen-Knife thereupon, it becomes Liquid and runs about, the threddy Fibres 
being cut in sunder.  
Their Vessels.
The Veins and Arteries which accompany the Optick Nerve unto the Eye, are
more easily observed within the Brain, than in the Eye after it is pulled 
out. 
Neither is the motive Nerve so easily detected being dispersed among the Mus- 
cles, as it is within the Brain, while you observe its progress, even to the very 
Eye-hole.
a T. 19. f. 7. A. CC. f. BBB.  b f. 7. a.  c f. 5. bb.  d  f. 7. BB. f. 9.
BB.  e f. 9. A.  f f. 9. CC.  g f. 7. CC.  h f. 3. II. f. 4. K. f. 6. C. f. 8. D.
 i f. 9. DD.  k f. 9. A.  l f. 9. within A. B. a Circle  n f. 8. AA.  o T. 19
f. 8. aa.  
The Medicinal Consideration. 
There are di- 
vers Diseases 
of the Eyes. 
Although the Eye be but a final Part of the body, yet is there no Part aflicted 
and destroyed with more Diseases. And therefore the ancient Physitians, when 
they had diligently examined the structure thereof, they observed so many and so
divers 

Chap. 3. Of the Eyes. 139 
divers disorders in its Parts, as did amount to about one hundred and twenty, 
partly Diseases, and partly Symptomes, and distinguished them by their Proper 
Names; which in other Parts they did not do. And Rome and Alexandria had 
Physitians that attended only the Cure of the Eyes. In imitation of them I shall 
declare the disposition against Nature happening to the Eyes. And because most 
of the Names are Greek, few of them Latin, and our Chyrurgeons use them: after 
the example of Leonardus Fuchsius in his Medicinal Institutions, I wil retain and 
use them as Latin Names. 
Of which some
are general of
the whol Eye.
as
An Arabian Physition, Haly by Name, has writ a Book by it self of Diseases of 
the Eyes; and there is a considerable French Book of the same Argument written by 
Jacobus Gullemeau the Kings Chyrurgeon: unto which you may add if you please 
the Author of Medicinal Definitions: the Book of Galen touching the differen- 
ces and Causes of Symptomes; and a bastard Book de Oculis attributed to him. 
The Eye therefore is afflicted either by being encreased, or diminished in its 
quantity.
Diseases of
Magnitude. 
The Eye is diminished, when it consumes for want of nourishment: its Magni- 
tude is augmented when it swels without the Eye-hole or Socket.
Of Scituation. 
Its Scituation is changed, when it fals without the Eye-hole, which Disease is 
termed Ecpiesmos: or if it turn to one side or another, as in Squint-Eyed People, 
and in him that saw through his nostrils and was therefore called Rhinoptis.
Number. 
There ought to be two Eyes: and therefore he that wants one, is diseased in 
Number, and is called Monoculus. 
Distemper &c.
Furthermore the Eye is troubled by an hot and a cold Distemper and by infla- 
tion of the whol body, which by putrefaction of the Humors is turned into an 
Impostume. It is somtimes Ulcerated, whence the Eye becomes spoiled and the 
sight diminished. 
And in case an Inflamation of the whol Eye turn to Suppuration, which is called 
Hypopyon, and transparent matter be collected under the Cornea Tunica, shewing 
that the other Humors are not putrified, there is hopes the Patient may recover 
sight, the quittor being let out, by pricking the Cornea: which is happily practised 
at Paris and so with the Quittor a watery Humor is let out, as in the couching of 
a Cataract.
Special Dis-
ease of other
Parts.
Besides these general Diseases, al the Parts whereof the Eye is made up, have 
their Diseases and Symptomes, which I will particularly and breifly explain, 
beginning at the Eye-Lids. 
Eye-Lids Diseases. 
as
Emphysema.
Hydatis.
A moist distemper of the Eye-Lids with wind, or a flatulent Spirit, is called Em- 
physema. With much Wheyish Humors, its termed Hydatis, and by Celsus Vesica, and 
Aquula, which does so load and depress the upper Eye-Lid, that it cannot be 
lifted up. 
Sclerophthal-
mia
An hot distemper of the Eye-Lid, Joyned with a thick Humor, is cald Scler- 
ophthalmia, Hard-eyedness.
Xerophthal-
mia 
A dry distemper without Humors, is Xerophthalmia: if it cause Itching, Pso- 
rophthalmia Unto which may be referred the Phthiriasis, or Lowsie-Evil of 
the Eye lid.
Psorophthal-
ima
Ptilosis 
If the said said hot and dry distemper Joyned with a sharp Humor, do cause 
Redness pain, and falling of the Hairs, it is called Ptilosis, Milphosis, or Ma-
darrhosis.
Tracma
Sycosis
Tulosis 
If it make the Inside of the Eye-Lid rough its called, Tracoma: which if it be 
great, so as to resemble the smal Seeds chat are in Figs, its cald Sycosis; if it be hard 
and so long Continuance, its Name is Tulosis. 
Crithe
Chalasion.
a little Tumor upon the upper Eye-Lid springing from a thick Homor, is called 
Crithe the Barly-Corn. If it be greater and movable, because of its likeness to  
hail, it called Chalasion, the Hail-Stone. 
A a 2 A Disease 

140 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book IV. 
Anchiloble-
pharon.
A Disease of the Eye-Lids in Contiguity is, when the Eye-Lids stick unto the 
Coat of the Eye or to one anothery which Disease is called Anchiloblepharon: the 
cause whereof is an exulceration of the Coat or the Eyes, or the Eye Lids: the 
exulceration being caused by an hot and dry distemper, with a sharp 
Humor. 
Lagophthalmia
Ippos. 
Lagophthalmia is a Convulsion of the upper Eye-Lid, or a drawing back thereof 
by reason of a Cicatrice or some seam. Ippos is the trembling of the said Eye-Lid: 
both these Symptomes come by Consent of the Brain affected and therefore they 
are dangerous.
Ectropion. 
Ectropion, Inversion, is a Disease of the lower Eye-lid in Scituation of Figure:
it is caused by a Scar without, or by an excrescence of internal Flesh.
Chalasis.  
Chalasis, or the loosness of the Eye-Lid, is caused either by a Palsie, through 
consent with the Nerves of the Brain, or by a moist distemper of the Eye-Lid: in
both cases the Hairs are turned inwards.
Trishiasis.
Dystichiasis.
Phalangosis.
The generation of the Hairs of the Eye-Lids being depraved is called Trichiasis, &c 
it is twofold; when more are bred than ordinary, its called Dystichiasis, when there is 
a row of Hairs more than usual. 
But when the natural Hairs are only longer and 
inverted, tis caled Phalangosis: in both these, the Hairs prick the Eyes: tis caus- 
ed by a moist distemper of the EyeLids, with much Humor which is not sharp.
Tear-Kernels Diseases.
Euchantis.
Rhyas. 
The Caruncle of little bit of Flesh in the greater corner of the Eye, makes a Tu- 
mor against Nature, which is called Euchantis: the Diminution of the-said Ca- 
runcle is termed Rhyas, which causes a dropping of moisture from the 
Eye. 
Anchylops
Ægylops.
Near the said Caruncle and the Nose, there breeds an Impostum through Inflama- 
tion, which is called Anchylops: which being broken and turned into a Fistula is 
termed Ægylops. The Diseases of the Muscles of the Eyes, as distempers, Laxity and
solution of Continuity, are distinguished by the Names of the Respective Symptomes
Diseases of the Tunica Conjunctiva. 
Taraxis. 
The hot distemper of the Conjunctive Coat with Humor as blood or Choler, if 
it be light and proceeding from an external cause, as the wind or dust, or a blow is 
called Taraxis.
Ophthalmid.
Epiphora. 
But if it spring from an interna! cause as a Plethora or Cacochymia, it is, termed 
Opththulmia. When it is but beginning, it is called Epiphora;  which is a Name
common to an Inflamation and fluxion.
Chemosis. 
And if the Inflamation be very great, so that it hinders the coming together of 
the Eye-Lids, and spoiles their Evenness, so that the white of the Eye 
becomes higher than the iris and Pupilla, it is called Chemosis, as much as to say 
Hiatus.
Hyposphagma.
Hyposphagma is a collection of Blood under the Adnata Tunica, or an effuse 
on of blood out of the Capillary Veins into the Adnata, proceeding from a blow 
or bruise. There is a Disease of Number, in the Tunica Adnata, called Ptery- 
gium: and it is a certain Membranous Eminency reaching from the greater corner of 
the Eye to the Pupilla; or a certain hard knob of the adnata it self: both spring- 
ing from a moist distemper Joyned with a clammy Humor.  
Phlyctena, is a pustle or smal Tumor of the Adnata or the neighboring Cor- 
nea, proceeding from a thick, and sharp Tumor, so that it terminates in an 
Ulcer.
Botrion.
Epicauma.
And if it be hollow, it is called Botrion, or Fossula, if it be become crusty tis
named Epicauma. After the Ulcer follows a Scar, which is the Hardness and 
thickness of a Spermatick Part springing from a wound or Ulcer. 
Diseases


Chap. 3. Of the Eyes. 141
Diseases of the Cornea Tunica.
Cheloma.
The Ulcers and Scars of the Cornea Tunica, have a great resemblance with the
Diseases of the Adnata, in regard of neighborhood : yet are they distinguished,
because the Ulcers and Scars in the black of the Eye, that is, in the transparent Part
of the Cornea, belong only to the Cornea : such as is the Cheloma, which is a
broad Ulcer of the Cornea, about the Iris.
Argemon.
Argemon, is a round Whitish Ulcer of the Cornea towards the Circle of the
Iris.
Albugo.
Nebula.
Caligo.
Scars in the Black of the Eye, or in the Transparent Part of the Cornea, do dif-
fer in the degrees of more or less. The greater Scar of the Cornea, about the Iris
or Pupilla, because of its whiteness is called Leucoma aud Albugo : if it be smal
it is termed Nephelion or Nebula, the Cloud : if the Scar be thin, its called
Achlys, Caligo, a Mist or Darkness.
Diseases of the Uvea Tunica
Proptosis.
The rupture and Exulceration of the Cornea, is attended by a Disease of the
Uvea in Scituation, which is called Proptosis, Procidentia, when the Uvea
sticks out above the Cornea.
Myocephalon
Staphyloma
Melon
Clavus.
If the Extuberance of the Uvea be smal, its called Myocephalon or the Flie-
Head, because it resembles the Head of a Flie: if it be great, tis termed Staphy-
loma, because it resembles a Grap-Stone, or Melon as being like an Apple. If
their be an inveterate Ulcer of the Cornea through which the Uvea fals out, its
called Elos, Clavus, the Nail.
The Ulcers of the Cornea and Adnata, if they be Malignant are termed
Carcinomata.
Diseases of the Pupilla.
Zinifisis.
The hole of the Uvea is termed Pupilla the Apple of the Eye. Between the
Pupilla and Cornea there is a space, ful of Spirit and Watry Humor.
There is a double Disease of that space : Zinifisis, springing from a dry distem-
per, which consumes the Watry Humor and Dissipates the Spirit ; or from a
wound, which lets out the Watry Humor, and suffers the Spirit to vanish and
reek away.
Hypopium.
Suffusio.
The other Disease of the space, is an Obstruction from a corrupted Flegmatick or
purulent Humor. If it proceed of a purulent Humor or Quittor, it is called
Hypopium : if the Obstruction be caused by Flegm, its termed Hypochyma Suf-
fusio. But Hypopium followes an Inflamation, and Hypochyma is caused for the
most Part by a Congestion or Concretion of a thick Humor ; if the Disease be pro-
per or primary, and do not arise by consent from the Stomach, sending Vapors up
into the Eye.
Fernelius saw a thick and perfect Suffusion bred in one daies time ; for if a thick
Humor suddenly falling into the Optick Nerve do blind a man in a moment: why
may not the same Humor falling lower into the Pupilla, breed a sudden and per-
fect Suffusion?
Corrugatio.
The narrowness of the Pupilla, springs either from the first formation in the
Womb; or from a dry distemper, and then it is called Phthisis or Cor-
rugatio.
Galen writes that a smal Pupilla from from ones Birth is occasion of a very
sharp fight: but when it happnes a whil after, tis bad. In his first Book of the
Causes of Symptomes. Chap. 2.
Mydriasis.
The Dilatation of the Pupilla is called Mydriasis or Flatu-Corie. It springs
from a moist distemper, or from a Rupture, or by breach of Continuity caused by a
blow. Diseases


142 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK IV.
Diseases of the Chrystallin and Glassie Humor.
Distemper
Diseases of the Vitreous and Chrystallin Humors, are either a distemper sim-
ple or with Humors conjoyned ; or such as happen in the consistence of the said
Humors, viz. Thickness and hardness. The distemper of the Humors and
Coats of the Eye, if it happen without a Tumor or an Ulcer, is commonly attri-
buted to the weakness of the Faculty, and the quality and quantity of the spirits
being misaffected: but neither of these is a Disease ; they are rather effects of a
Disease: for what is the weakness of a faculty other than Actio læsa, the action
hurt.
Thinneß of
the Spirits.
Thickness of the Spirits is caused by a cold and moist distemperature, either pro-
per to the Eye, or by consent with the brain or some inferior Parts.
Their Paucity
Paucity of Spirits comes from a dry distemper, either of the Eye or the brain:
the Cause and fomenter of which distemper may be a Cholerick Humor not purged
out of the body, being the cause and Effect of a distempered Liver.
Glaucoma
The thickness and hardness of the Chrystallin Humor is properly termed Glau-
cosis or Glaucoma, because the color thereof resembles that of an Owles Eyes: it
proceeds from a cold and dry distemper, and is therefore familiar to aged
Persons.
The Disease of the Chrystalline Humor in respect of its Scituation, has no name,
but if it be somwhat higher and flatter than ordinary, it produces a Symptome,
whereby all things appear double.
Running out of
the watry Hu-
mor.
The watry Humor may run out, by a prick in the Eye, but it is bred again in
Children, as Galen saw by experience, and as we may observe in Chickens.
Thickneß of
the Visive spi-
rit.
The Visive or seeing Spirit implanted in the Eye, may become thick, and sur-
round the Chrystalline Humor with darkness and obscurity : as the implanted
Hearing-Spirit of the Ear, being rendred thick, does cause deafness or thickness of
Hearing.
Diseases of the Optick Nerve.
Obstruction
Amaurosis
The Optick Nerve may be troubled with any kind of distemper, and with soluti-
on of continuity ; but the proper and usual Disease thereof, is Obstruction, which
is known by a sudden blindness, the other Parts of the Eye being al sound: which
made the Neotericks cal this Disease Gutta Serena, and somtimes Amaurosis.
Diseases and Symptomes of the Sight.
Cæcitas
Amblyopia
Myopsis
Nyctalops
Sight abolished is called Cæcitas Blindness: when it is diminished only, tis
termed Amblyopia, thick sightedness : and it is accounted twofold Myopsis and
Nyctalops: In the former the Patient is Pore-blind, and is fain to look close to
what he would discern and to hold his Eye-Lids almost shut together. In the lat-
ter, the Patient can see only by day, but very little or nothing at al by night, or
very obscurly: the other differences of sight diminshed are comprehended under
the general name of Amblyopia.
Hallucination
Sight depraved, is a fals perception of things before the Eyes: its termed Paro-
rasis or Hallucination.
Causes of
blindneß.
of Anchylo-Ble-
pharon.
The Causes of these Symptomes, are no other than those Diseases of the Eyes,
which we have before recounted. For the Cause of blindness is, the Obstruction
of the Optick Nerve, Glaucoma, Leucoma, Hypopion, Hypochyma, Proptosis,
the larger Mydriasis, a Pterygium or Film covering the whol sight of the Eye,
Anchylo-Blepharon or Gluing together of the Eye-Lids.
Imminution or Impairing of the sight, is caused by the other Diseases of the Eye-
Lids. As by a thin Scar of the Cornea, called Nephelion and Achlys ; and by a
Leucoma


Chap. 4. Of the Ear. 191
Myopsis
Nyctaopsis
Leucoma and a smal Mydriasis, which touches but Part of the Sight.
Dry distemper of the Humors of the Eyes cause Myopsis : the over Humidity
and thickness of the said Humors, makes a Man that he cannot see in the Night.
The Causes of sight depraved is an Hypopion beginning ; or an Hypochyma,
Namely, when the Humor is not yet united and grown together, so that the visive
Spirit can pass too and fro between the Parts of the Humor through the empty spa-
ces : whence it is that some see flies as it were, and certain dark bodies,move before
their Eyes.
Hallucination
Amalops
When true objects presented to the Eyes, have a fals Appearance, the sight is
depraved, and termed Amalops; so al things appear Yellow, to such as have the
Jaundice.
But that kind of Symptome happens, when the Cornea which is spred out be-
fore the sight of the Eye, is infected with Blood or Choler.
Eyes pain
The Animal action of the Eye, is hurt somtimes, as Feeling and Motion : the
Feeling of the Eye is hurt by extream Pain thereof, which notwithstanding, ac-
cording to the Judgment of Celsus, remains within the Eyes, and draws not the
Brain into consent,as Pain of the Eares is wont to do. The Causes of al Pains in the
Eyes, is a distemper, or Solution of Unity.
Palsie
Convulsion
Trembling
The hurting of the Eyes Motion, is either a Palsie, Convulsion, or Trembling.
In the Palsie and Convulsion, the Eyes become stif and fixed : in
that sort of Convulsion called Tetanus, they are unstable, as in the Trem-
bling.
The Natural Action of the Eyes, is likewise hurt, as Nutrition.
Flowing out
of tears.
To the Jrregularity of the Excrements of the Eyes, does belong the Involuntary
shedding of Tears. Its caused by a moist or cold distemper of the Eyes, or from
pricking by a sharp Humor, or some external Cause ; or from the Erosion of that
same Caruncle, which is in the greater corner of the Eye.
Læimai
Hereunto likewise belongs the filth of the Eyes, which is by the Greeks called
Læimai : they are caused by an extream distemper of the Eye, which makes a
dissolution or melting down of matter.
Spots
The simple infirmities of the Eyes, are the spotts and Scars of the Conjunctive
and Horny Coates, which are both Diseases and Symptomes.
Obscurity
The Duskynes and obscurity of the Eyes, is when the Bal of the Eye, does not
represent any outward object to him that looks upon it ; which is a token of Death
in an Acute Feaver.
Chap. 4. Of the Ear.
The Ears Parts
THe Ear, being the Instrument of hearing, is divided , into the a External
Part , broad and gristly , and the b Internal , which lies hid in the Os
petrosum.
Windings
The external Part is termed c Auricula, made up of a d Gristle, which is co-
vered with a Skin ful of e Folds, and made hollow, with divers f windings ; with
an hole g through the same placed upon the side of the Head,just against the hole of
h Os Petrosum.
It is more beautyful, when smal : for a great pair of Asses Ears are un-
comly.
The Ear was placed as it is, for the Conveniency of hearing : and if the Scituation
of the Ear inverted would not have been deformed, it had been more commodious
for hearing, then placed as it is upright and Joyned to the Temporal Bone. For we
see such as are thick of hearing, put the hollow of their hand behind their Ear, that
they may hear the better.
Tragus
Antitragus
In the Ear you shal observe two Parts ; one is called i Tragus, and
the other k Antitragus the Names of the other Particles of the Ear, are
useless.
In


192 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
Hole of the Ear
Ear-Wax
In the Auricula is conteined the first passage, or Hole of the Ear, and reaches
as far as the m Tympanum or Drum : its entrance is fenced with Hairs, to keep out
dust and crawling Bugs, that might otherwise enter in. There is collected, the
Cholerick Excrement of the Ear, called Ear-Wax, which Bird-Limes and intan-
gles any Dust or creeping thing that would pass that way. Its termed Marmo-
ratum.
Concha
The Drum
The internal Ear Concluded in the Os Petrosum, is altogether boney, and di-
vided into three Cavities. The first Cavity is the b Concha : In the extremity of
the first c hole is the Membrane streched out, which terminates upon
the d Drum : it has a string that runs cross it, as we see the Military Drums have.
a T. 20. f. 1. and 2.  b f.3 4. &c.  c f. 1. and 2.  d f. 2. BB.c f. 2. AA.
f f. 1. AA.BB. g f. 1. GG.h f. 3. A.i f. 1. G.k f. 1. D.l f. 3. B. f. 4.
A. &c.m f. 4. BB. 
a T. 20. f. 3. C.h f. 6. B. C. f. 7. within A. B.c f. 4. BB. f. 5. B.d f. 3
B. f. 4. AA. &C.
Four little
Bones.
Furthermore, we observe three littel Bones, the e Maller,the f Anvil, and the g Stir-
rup : others ad a h fourth, which is a little Scal of a bone, such as is found in the
Carotick Artery near the Os Sphenoides. But this is vain and unuseful.
Fortunatus Plempius places another Membrane at the other extremity of the
Concha, but how or where it is extended, he does not explain : whether at the two
petty windores, whereof the one is the entrance of the labyrinth and the other of the
Cochlea, or elsewhere ? It is a most hard peice of Service to find out and demonstrate
the internal structure of the Ear.
In the Skuls of i Infants, and in a Calves-Head, it is more easily observed, by
lifting up with a Pen-Knifes Edge that same portion of k Os Petrosum, which
within the Scul reaches unto the Basis of the Brain.
In the Concha you shal observe on the left side an Hole, which
passes into the winding Cavity of the Apophysis Mastoides, or Teat-like Pro-
duction.
The Nerve
The Auditory l Nerve, being m drawn through the n Cochlea, when it is come to
the Concha,it slips through an hole or o Channel, which opens on the right side of the
Concha, into the Pallate, by the Process which is termed Apophysis Pterygoi-
dea.
And this is the natural structure of the internal Ear; for the finding out whereof
we are obliged to Fallopius, after Carpus, who discovered those little bones the
the Hammer and the Anvil. The third, namely, the Stirrup, Philippus Ingrassias
brags to have himself first observed.
Implanted Air
In living-Creatures, there is an inbred and implanted Air in the Cavities of the
Ears, as there is a visiveSpirit in the Eye, shut up within the Cornea Tunica.
e f. 4. G. f. 5. E. f. 7. A.f f. 7. B.g f. 7. C.h f. 7. D.i T. 8. f. 5. 6, 7,
8.k T. 20. f. 10. BB.l T. 8. f. 1. FF. f. 3. KK. F. 20. f. 12. AA. BB.
m f. 10. AA.n f. 7. DD. f. 9. A. f. 11. BD.o f. 8. A. BB.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of the
Ear.
The Gristle of the external Ear if troubled with Pustles or Pushes, is contused,
Swels, inflamed and exulcerated. By cold it contracts Sphacelation, is con-
tracted and dies do what a Man can: and its somtimes cut of both in sick and in sound
Persons. Whence the Greek phrazes Coloboma and Acrotiriasmenoi, for persons
that are Crop-Eard.
Parotis what
it is.
The greatness of the external Eare, though it be ill favourd, cannot be helped.
The Swelling and Inflamation of the Kernels which are beside the Ears, is termed
Parotis, which in regard or the narrowness of the place and nearness to the brain, is
not


Chap. 4. Of the Ear. 193
not very safe,happening upon an acute feaver,though it have the name of Dioscouros
or Castor and Pollux, because of its good token, for such it gives when it is critical,
proceeding from the strength of Nature, and attended with lightsomness of the Pa-
tient following the same. In Children and young People a Parotis does many times
break forth, void of danger, caused by the over great moisture of their brains.
In the hollow behind the Ear, according to the advice of Fernelius, a Caustick
must be applied, in Diseases of the Ears and of the Eyes.
Of the Audi-
tory passage.
The first Auditory passage of the Ear, because tis fleshy is obstructed by a Tu-
mor, by a Caruncle or bit of Flesh growing up, or by quittor issuing out, or by
Filth, or somwhat from without. It is inflamed, and impostumated, and Ex-
ulcerated either of it self, or by means of some eating Medicine poured into the Ear:
or by a Cholerick Humor : wherefore Hippocrates saies that when Deaf persons fal
into Cholerick Loosnesses, their deafness is lessened, or taken away : and when
their loosness is stopped, their deafness returnes.
This passage is terminated inwardly by the Drum, which either of it self and
primarily, or secondarily and by accident through consent of the Bowels, but espe-
cially through fault of the Head, is troubled with a very painful and dangerous In-
flamation, which draws the brain into Sympathy.
Of the inner
Cavities.
The internal Cavities, because they have no Periostium, are not pained, unless
the Auditory Nerve be affected , whole ofspring makes the Drum : from
its inflamation proceeds an Impostum and from that an Ulcer : which tears asunder
the Drum.
Of the Drum
It is broken, not only by an Ulcer, but also by a blow and a vehement sound ;
whence it is that those who dwel by the Fals of the River Nilus, are
al deafe, by reason of Lovd roaring and Headlong fal of the flowing Water.
Also the loosness and over great moisture of the Drum is to be considered, be-
cause it may Cause Deafness.
The proper Symptomes of the Ear,are those which belong to the hurts of hearing,
and the Irregularity of Excrements.
Symptoms of
the Action
hurt.
Deafneß.
The hearing is hurt in a threefold Manner. When it is abolished, it is called
Surditas, Deafneß : which if it come from the Womb and is born with the Pati-
ent, it is incurable : if it come by accident, it may be curable.
Thickneß of
Hearing.
Hearing diminished is called Barucoia, thickness of hearing.
Noise in the
Ears.
Hearing depraved consists in a noise and ringings or buzzings in the Ear ; tis called
Paracousis.
Their Cause
The Causes of Deafness and Thickness of Hearing are the same, save that they
differ in Intension and Remission : and therefore the foresaid Diseases of the Audi-
tory passage and of the Drum may cause these Symptomes.
Paracousis or Noise in the Ears springs from a distemper of the drum,being more
moist or more dry than is fitting : which,as it causes a more exquisite sence than or-
dinary, so also does it cause a ringing in the Ear, as being affected with the very
lightest motion of the internal implanted, or external Air, or while the spirits do
continually flow into the Ears ; which cannot be conteined in so close a Room ; or
some Spirit may stir it self within the Dug-like Cavity.
Several sounds are imagined in the Ears according to the various motion and
mode of the flatulent Spirit which causes the same. So that if it be thick, whi-
sperings are heard and Hummings : if thin, Hissings : and when it moves by fits and
starts, it presents a tinkling, as it were of bells.
Somtimes noises are imagined without any fault of the internal Eare, by consent
of the Head, whiles the internal and external Arteries being hotter than ordinary,
do beat more violently than they are wont to do, and do make a great sound in the
Ears, if the Patient do lie upon one of them.
The differences and Causes of this seeming Noise in the Ears, are neatly expressed
by Fernelius in his Pathologia.
Their Cure
In natural Deafness, springing from mis-formation in the Womb, and not from
any of the Causes aforesaid : whether may we experiment that which fel out unex-
Bb pectedly


194 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
pectedly wel to a certain Deafe man : who thrusting an Ear-Picker very far into
his Ear, rent the Drum and Break asunder the smal bones and afterwards, attained
hearing ?
Whether in a ringing of the Ear may the teat like Process be perforated, to let out
the Spirits which make a tumult in that Cavity ?
Whether does the thickness of the Tympanum hinder Transpiration ? so that
the flatulent Spirits cannot break out? whether or no wil it avail to rub the extremi-
ty of the Auditory Channel, behind the Grinding-Teeth, with Mustard or some
other opening Liquor ?
Symptomes
of the Excre-
ments.
The Irregulary of Excrements in the Ear, is not only of Cholerick and Wheyish
Humors, but also of quitter and blood, proceeding from the brain : neither
is so great a quantity of quittor as is avoided, bred in the Cavities, but in the
Brain.
Excretion of
blood Choler
serum, quittor
&c.
If an intollerable inflamatory and pulsatory pain does occupy the hinder parts of
the head, and the matter flows thither and there stops, the pain abiding : it wil be
safe to boar an hole in the hinder part of the Head, that Egress may be given to the
quittor ; when no great danger is like to follow from the said operation.
Worms.
The Ear-Worms termed Eblai, which are voided from the Ears, belong to the
Irregularity of things voided from these parts.
It is good in Children for the internal and external Parts of their Ears to run and
void much Humor , because it purges their Brain and prevents great Di-
eases.
There is in Diseases observed a great Sympathy between the Eares, Mouth,
Lungs and Wesand : and therefore when the Ears are hurt, the voyce is changed,
by reason of the Auditory Nerve, which being spread into the Throat, reaches as far
as the Wesand or Wind-Pipes Head.
And when Nature has been accustomed to Purge out the Excrements of the
Brain, by the Ears : the stoppage of that Purgation, has made many to die sud-
denly.
Chap. 5. Of the Face and outside of the Mouth.
The Face des-
cribed.
THe Face is the broad and fore part of the head,comprehending the Fore-Head
in a living and dead Man without dissection ; and therefore the a Fore-Head,
b Eyes, c Nose, and Mouth with its d Lips, as far as the Chin, do belong unto the
Face : which,as it is the subject of Anatomical dissection, is divided into the Parts
internal and external.
Its Parts.
The External Parts are the Scarf-Skin and the Skin, which are thin and very
smooth in Women. The internal Parts, are the Muscles of the e Nose, f Lips, and
interior jaw, whose empty Spaces are filled up with fat.
Moreover the Musculus Latissimus, does cover the side of the Face, as
far as the Fore-Head ; yea and it compasses the whol Neck, excepting the hinder
Part thereof.
The Muscles of the Lips, are the Extremities of the Mouth : the other Muscles
which belong to the lower Jaw, as the a Temperal Muscle, the Muscle called
b Masseter, possessing the sides of the Face, shal be explained in our History of the
Muscles.
The Mouth
described.
The Mouth therefore is a Slit in the Skin of the Face, necessary for breathing,
speech, and nourishment of the body : for by the Mouth we breath, speak and re-
ceive our Food.
The Lips.
The extremities of this Slit art termed c Lips which are moved by Muscles in their
opening and shutting.
The Chin.
The utmost bound of the Face is called the d Chin, as the upper extremi-
ty thereof from the Eye-Brows to the beginning of the Hairs is termed the e Fore-
Head.
The


Chap. 5. Of the Face and outside of the Mouth. 195
The Cheeks.
The sides of the Face are the f Cheeks. The internal Parts of the Mouth, as the
g Teeth, Gums, h Palate, i Throat, k Tongue, shal be described in order. The
l Larynx m Os Hyoides, n Pharynx, and the o Glandules , appertain unto the
Neck.
The Vessels
The Face, besides Veins and Arteries has a notable p Nerve from the third pair,
which is carryed along between two q boney plates, under the pavement of the
Orbita or Socket of the Eye, and is branched up and down like a Gooses Foot,
through the whol Face, by the Nose, as far as the Lips.
a T. 15 f. 3. Ab f. 1. between FF. T. 19. al.c T. 15. f. 1. GI.d f. 1.
NN.c f. 1. GHI. &c.f f. 1. KLMN.g f. 1. RST. &c. f. 2. ABC.
&c.h T. 10. f. 1. gg.
a T. 15. f. 1. PP.b f. 1. S.c f. 1. NN.d f. 1. n.e f. 3. A.f f. 1. O.
g f. 6. mno.h f. 6. LL.i T. 13. f. 15. A.k f 14. A &c.l f. 9. 10.
&c.m f.11, 12, 23.n T. 3. f. 2. 3.o f. 16, 17. &c.p T. 18. f. 2. A.q f. 3.
cc. &c.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of
the Face.
Sunburning.
The Rose.
The Skin of the Face, is the Looking-Glass wherein are seen the Diseases of the
Body, especially of the Liver, Spleen and Lungs : for look what Humor bears
sway in the bowels, the same shews it self forth in the Face. If there be a lasting
Ruddyness in the Cheeks, it is a Sign of an hot Liver : if the Redness be seated upon
upon the balls above the Cheeks, it argues an hot distemper of the Lungs. If
Choler stick in the pores of the Skin, it causes Freckles : if the Color proceed from
being in the Sun,it is termed Ephelis. If Redness remain setled on a great Part of the
Face, it is named Gutta Rosacea, and those who are spotted on that manner are
termed Antirhoei.
Green-Sickneß
Palenes is commonly seen in Virgins and such as are recovered out of some Sick-
ness.
The Green-Sickness, is a slow Feaver in Virgins and other young Women that
want their Courses.
In such as are sickly and crasie, the Color of the Face is without blood because
the whol Mass of blood is Wheyish, and therefore the blood of the Face being such,
must needs be of an Wheyish Color. Those that are so affected, are called Lip-
bæmoi, blood-les. A bad Color of the Face, both in Sick and sound persons, is
termed Cacochroia.
Furthermore, the Face is made rough and deformed by burning Pustles, Ionthi,
Vari, Fici, Nævi, and Spilloi.
Ionthos.
An hard Push is called Ionthos, because it represents a branch of the flowring
Violet.
Varus.
Varus is an harder knob, and not so red and fiery as the Ionthos, Ficus is a cer-
tain Wart.
Lichen.
Lichen, Impetigo or Darta, is a roughness or Scaly Eminence of the Skin, if it
be dry ; if it be moist, it Exulcerates and runs.
Warts.
Nævi, Warts , are smooth knobs white or blewish : which if they be of a
bad Color , they must not be tampered with, least some worse and can-
cerous disposition follow : and Seneca saies that a face without Warts or moles is
not pleasing.
It is a wonderful thing how these Warts of the Face do produce others in divers
Parts the body, which answer the measure of the Face as far as the Neck.
Of which subject Ludovicus Septalius has composed a most Elegant Book.
Hypopium.
Black and blew Color in the Skin of the Face, proceeding from a bruise, is cal-
led Hypopium.
Spilloi.
Spilloi are Sooty Excrements of the Skin, intruded into the pores thereof, which
Bb 2 are


196 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
are pulled out, either by a pin, or by squeesing the Skin, or by some emollient Me-
dicament or Pomatum, if they be hard and thick.
Pani
Pani, are scarrs in the Face.
Mentagra.
Mentagra,an Impetigo or Dry-Scab of the Chin, which troubled the Gentle-
men of Rome in Plinnies time, where it was a Popular Disease: is a Malignant
Scab, which remaines many years and is hardly curable, and so alters the Skin of
the Chin and Lips, that a Man continues Beard-les al his Life long.
Cynicus Spas-
mus.
The Action of the Skin of the Face being hurt is termed Cynicus Spasmus, The
Dog-like Convulsion, or torture of the Mouth expressing the snarling of a Dog:
for it is a depraved motion of the Muscles of the Face, belonging to a Palne or Con-
vulsion.
If it be Paralytick the Retraction is made in the sound Part, because of the disso-
lution of the opposite Parts : If it be convulsive, the Part affected is drawn back :
Those Nerves which are affected in this Symptome,do arise from the spinal Marrow
between the second and third Vertebra of the Neck.
Galen attributed this depraved motion of the Mouth to the Muscle termed Latis-
simus.
Besides the Cynicus Spasmus, there is another Convulsion very ordinary, of the
upper Lip towards the Eye, by the disorder of that same Nerve of the third pair
described above, which being cut a sunder, below the Socket of the Eye, the said
Convulsion is healed.
Painting
Beautifying
The particular medicining of the Face besides the universal, is twofold, the one
called Commotice painting and plastering with Fucuses &c. The other Cosmetice
beautyfing and adorning without any thing laid on : the latter Galen allowes to take
away the ill favouredness of Women : but the former, he disallows in a Physitian,
and leaves it to panders, bawds and Whores
The Use of those Fucuses, unless skilfully mannaged does quickly wrinkle the
Skin, such as are the Spanish-White,and Purpurissus or Lovly-Red.
The use of
the Lips.
The Diseases of the Lips are very many, distempers,Inflamation, Swelling, Ul-
cers, and others consisting in evil conformation, al which pervert the use and action
of the Lips which serve to shut the Mouth,form the speech and for the easie recepti-
on of meat and drink, to contein the Tongue within the Mouth, to cast forth the
Spittle out of the Mouth, for Trumpeters to make a strong blast, for Infants to
Suck with, and both in Men and Women to express their mutual Affection by Kis-
sing, and to beautifie their Faces : and therefore if a Mans Lips were cut of, he
would appear very deformed, just like a snarling Dog.
Diseases of
the Lips.
In their Shape
Such as have great Lips and sticking out, are called Labeones : such as are born
with imperfect or cloven Lips, are said to have an Hares Lip : this defect is
amended by Surgery. If the Lips be loose and hanging, it proceeds from a Palsie.
He that has the insides of his Lips turned outwards is termed Brochus : and he that
has swelling Lips is called Cheilo. Those are by Arnobius termed Mentones,
whose Chins stick out.
Chops
Tumors
Ulcers
The Chops of the Lips are called Rhagades. Somtimes Tumors and little blad-
ders break out upon the Lips, especially in Feavers, when Nature drives the virul-
ent Humor out of the Veins and Arteries into the Lips, which Avicen saies is a good
sign, that the Feaver wil quickly cease : and experience does many times confirm
the same. Yet somtimes Tumors and Ulcers in the Lips are in Diseases signes of
Death, as in the two Brothers Hermoptolemus and Andreas in Hippocrates.
Bad Color
Bad Color of the Lips in Diseases is no good sign : in such as are wel, it argues a
fault in the Lungs or in the blood.
Moles and
Warts.
&c.
Moles and Warts black and blew and Scirrhous sticking upon the Lips, are
things to be warily handled, and not to be tampered with by way of Incision.
Somtimes the Lips do naturally Swel, especially the lower Lip, when the Jaw
is drawn out, and then the lower Teeth before are higher than the upper, and
include them.
The


Chap. 6. Of the Nose. 197
Symptomes
The principal hurt of the action of the Lips, is depraved Speech. But this
Symptome wants a Name.
Trembling
The depraved trembling motion of the Lips, happens by consent of the Stomach
distempered, by reason of a Membrane common to the Lips and Stomach. Whence
it is that those who are ready to vomit, have a trembling in their nether Lip: which
trembling is called Seismos.
Shutting
The opening of the Mouth is hurt, when the Jaw is become stif and immovable :
its shutting is hurt when the Jaw is Palsied, as in Feavers, by reason of the Heat of
the bowels and Lungs, and difficulty of breathing.
Frequent spit-
ting.
Much spawling, and want of Spittle, do belong to the Diseases of the Mouth,
though they have other remote Causes : for Spittle is necessary for chewing of meat,
for speech and Tasting ; but immoderate Spittle is hurtful, and the voidance there-
of is accounted filthy and undecent. Touching the Cure of Lips cut of, Taliaco-
tius has written.
Chap. 6. Of the Nose.
The Noses Scit-
uation.
THe Nose, the Instrument of Smelling and of clensing the brain, is placed in the
middest of the Face ; dividing the Eyes and Face into two even Parts.
Magnitude
The length and breadth thereof is uncomly, if it exceed a Mans Thumb in length
and thickness.
Shape
The Figure of a Mans Nose contributes much to his healthy living : for an high
Nose is better than a flat Nose, and wide Nostrils are to be preferred before narrow
ones.
Cavities
It is divided into two a Cavities, which are called Nostrils severed by a partition,
and reaching as high as the Colander-bone.
The Depth and Widness of the Nose, are greater within than they appear out-
wardly : for that same space which lies between the two tables or boards of the Pa-
late and Os Sphenoides, divided into two Cavities by the Os Vomeris, reaching to
the partition of the Nostrils, belongs unto the Nose.
Spungy Bones
Spungy Car-
uncles.
That space is filled up with Spungy Bones, which are portions of the Colander-
bone. And those Spungy bones are filled with Spungy bits of Flesh, which drink
up the Flegm which flows from the Head, that Snevil might not be alwaies drop-
ping out of the Nose.
These bones and Caruncles or Spungy bits of flesh do likewise serve to Filtrate
and strain the Air, which, the Mouth being shut, is drawn in at the Nostrils, that it
may be imparted pure unto the Lungs and brain.
Bones
The Nose therefore is compounded of bones, Gristles, Membranes and Muscles.
Gristles
It consists of b Two Bones, which stick outwards and fashion the same. Five
Gristles are dependant upon those bones, two being lateral placed by turnes, and
movable through the help of Muscles. They are termed Pinnæ and Alæ Nasi the
Wings and Pinnacles of the Nose. There is a Gristle placed between them, which
is called Septum, the partition, and it depends upon that same boney a partition,
placed between the bones of the Nose, being a continuation of Os Vomeris.
Membrane
Muscles
The Nose is cloathed externally with the Cuticula and Cutis under which lie the
b Muscles. The inner Parts of the Nose are invested with a Membrane sprinkled
with fleshy Fibres, by the help of which,the Pinnacles of the Nose are contracted,
when the breath is strongly drawn in ; as the said Pinnacles are widened by other
external Muscles, the description whereof you shal find in my History of the Mus-
cles. Book the 5.
To the Nose do belong, the Seive like plate of the Colander bone, and the Ma-
millary or Teat-like Productions ending at these bones, and given out to be the
Organs or Instruments of Smelling.
Some would doubt whither those Caruncles or little bits of Flesh which are
thrust into the Spungy bones, are the proper Instruments of smelling, or only some
way


198 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK IV.
way subservient thereunto ; because when they are overmoistened, or by any Dis-
eases impaired, the smelling is depraved, or wholly lost.
a T. 15. f. 2.b T. 15. f. 3. K
a T. 15. f. 6. I.b T. 15. f. 1. GH. &c.c T. 15. f. 5. CC.d T. 18. f. 3.
aa.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of the
whol Nose.
The Gristly Parts of the Nose, are Inflamed, Bruised, and Ulcerated ; the
bony Parts are broken ; al of them are troubled with distempers, but especially with
organick Diseases springing from a bad Conformation, as when the Nose is crooked
inwards like a saddle ; which is oftimes caused by external Causes : but if a Child
be born with a Saddle-Nose, it may be then raised and rectified. For as Plato
reports in his Alcibiades, if the King of Persia had a Daughter so born ; they did
thrust Pipes into the Childs Nose, and reduce it by little and little to its right shape,
by widening the bones and Gristles, whiles they were yet Waxy and pliable.
An over great and high Nose, cannot be cut shorter without making the party
more deformed. If in persons grown up the Nose be Swelled with Tuberous Ex-
crescencies of Flesh ; that fault may be mended by cutting of the said luxuriating
Flesh.
Of the inside
Tubercula
Ozena
The inside of the Nose is apt to Swel, and is infested with Inflamatory bunches,
which come to suppuration: but far within in the Spungy bones and their Caruncles,
there is bred a filthy stinking Ulcer called Ozæna, which is offensive both to the Pa-
tients and al that come near them, and is very hard to cure. Somtimes the little
bones are corrupted and come out at the Nostrils. The Caruncles being swelled
with or without an Ulcer, cause the Polypus, which fals into the Nostrils, or it fils
the hollow places above the Palate, reaching as far as the Throat.
Polypus
The Polipus is neatly discribed by Celsus in his sixt Book, Chapter the eight.
Unless it be of a Malignant Color and painful, it may safely be cut away by the
Roots, if possible, which is the true Cure, for otherwise it wil grow again, if any
Part be left remaining after section.
A Malignant Cancerous Polypus must not be medled withal either by cutting,
burning, or caustick Medicaments, for if it be exasperated it eates and devours
the whol Face.
Symptomes of
the Nostrils.
Smelling lost
Diminished.
Symptomes of the Nose are either its action hurt, or simple affections thereof,
or the Irregulary of what is voided forth. The action of the Nose is Smelling,
which is abolished, diminished or depraved. The Causes of the smel diminished
or abolished, are the same, to wit, the obstruction of the inward passages of the
Colander-bones and the Mammillary productions,in which the smelling is exercised.
If the foremost Ventricles be stopped, other parts of the Nose remaining intire, it is
known by the perfection of speech, which shews that the Colander and Spungy
bones with the Mammillary Productions, are free.
depraved.
The Smelling is depraved, when al things seem to stink, and when the Patient
perceives a stink in his Nose, which is likewise discerned by the standers by. The
true Cause of this Symptome, is a putrified Humor congealed in those Cavities.
If the Putrefaction be within the Scul, the stink is not perceived by the Patient,
but is discerned by those which converse with him, as Fernelius judiciously ob-
serves.
Spots
Simple affections of the external Nose,are spots which are black and blew or red,
and deforme the same. They must be taken away, or corrected with some Fucus,
if there be no other Remedy.
Nose-bleeding
Coryza
The Irregularity of Excretions, consists in Bleeding at the Nose, and in a
Flux of Serosities therefrom, which causes the Coryza or Grauedo,
or a continual Nose-dropping. Hippocrates in h is sixt Book of Aphorismes saies,
Such as have running Noses, are unhealthy.
In


Chap. 7. Of the Neck. 199
Cause of Nose-
bleeding.
In bleeding at the Nose, the blood either comes from the Nostrils opened by
picking, or from that same long Cavity of the Dura Mater, which reaches unto
the Nostrils : if the Veins be opened by the sharpness of the blood or the abundance
thereof, after it has flowed a while, it must be stopped by opening a Vein in the
Arm, unless the blood flow critically.
Fernelius would have al bleedings at the Nose to be stopped, be they what they
wil, and would have a Vein opened to that end, contrary to the Doctrine of Hip-
pocrates. Blood coming from the inner Parts of the Nose may be stopped : but it
is very hard to stop the same when it comes from the Menings or Coates of the
Brain.
Its Cure.
Dropping of blood from the Nose in burning and Malignant Feavers, is bad, both
as a Cause and a signe : because it does not ease the Patient, and it shews a Plenitude
in the brain, and that nature being weak is not able to disburthen her self. In such
a case,great care is to be taken of the head by Revulsion,and Derivation of the blood,
and by cooling of the Head, for fear of Inflamation or some Sleepy Disease.
If bleeding at the Nose be stopped in young people accustomed thereunto, and
their brains Ake through fullness, they must be let blood.
The Ancients did open the inward Veins of the Nose, which Practice is left off,
because the way they did it, is to us unknown.
Fernelius writes that Wormes as long as ones Finger have been found in Saddle-
Noses, being there bred ; which at last made the Patients mad and killed them :
those Wormes were thought to have been cast out of the brain, where as indeed they
were born and bred in the Cavities of the Nose. For Wormes bred in the Ventri-
cles of the brain, cannot come out, unless they should eat a sunder of break the
Sieve-like table of the Colander-bone.
That which Fernelius has written, is worthy of consideration in reference to
Diseases of the Head. That in Nose-bleedings, the blood comes out not from the
brain, but out of the Veins of the Nostrils. The Veins (saith he) do run into the
Nose not from the inner Parts of the brain, but out of the Cavities of the Mouth
and Palate, which are wide and open enough, so as they seem to be the Emissaries of
superfluovs blood ; Even as the Hæmorrhoid Veins, and those which belong to
the Neck of the Womb. Wherefore the brain being burthened with blood is not
eased, if the blood flow not from the Cavities of Dura Mater. But I beleive it
flowes out of the brain. And Galen and Areteus do write,that the Veins within the
Nostrils, beneath the Colander-bone, may be opened by Art.
Sneezing
Sneezing may be said to belong unto the Nostrils, because they being vexed do
cause Sneezing. Also Sneezing is referred to Diseases of the Head, and especially
to the Epilepsie or Falling-Sickness, because it is a momentany Concussion or
Convulsion of the brain. So saies Hippocrates in the seventh Book of his Aphoris-
mes. It is caused by heating or moistning of what is contained in the Ventricles of
the brain.
Chap. 7. Of the Neck.
The Necks use
THat Part which is interposed between the Head and the Chest, is termed
Collum, and Neck: ordained for the Service of the Wind-Pipe and Lungs,
and as a Pillar to sustain the Head upon.
Its Length.
It ought to be of an indifferent length, that it may be healthy and useful for the
body : because a Neck too short consisting of but six Vertebraes, by reason of the
shorrness of those Vessels which are carryed into the Head, is liable to the Apoplexy
or Sleep Diseases; and a Neck too long containing eight Vertebraes, does at length
bring a Consumption : because the Lungs being shut up in so strait a place do by
little and little Wax overhot, and wither away by degrees.
Its Parts.
The Neck is made up of divers Parts, which are divided into Conteining and
Conteined. The Conteining are common or proper, the contained are manyfold.
There


200 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
There are reckoned two common containing Parts, the Scarf-Skin and the
Skin. The containing proper Membrane is its Coat viz. The Musculus Latus,
which seems to be a Propagation of the Membrana Carnosa.
The Parts contained are manyfold viz. The Muscles of the a Head, of the
b Neck of the c Os Hyoides, of the d Tongue, of the e Larynx and the f Pharynx ;
which being orderly dissected and taken away there comes in view the g Larynx,
the h Os Hyoides, the Pharynx, the i Tongue, the k Kernels, The l four Jugulars,
the two m Carotick Arteries, A Nerve of the n sixt Conjugation both descending
and Recurrent, the Cervical o Veins and p Arteries ; and the greater number of these
Parts, is placed in the foreside of the Neck : in the hinder Part
thereof are the q Vertebraes, and the hinder r Muscles ordained to move the Head
and Neck.
I wil reserve the Explication of the Muscles to my Myologia or History of Mus-
cles, where the Reader may look, if he desire to know the Muscles of every Part.
a T. 13. f. 18. T. 14. f. 4. &c.b T. 13. f. 18. T. 14. f. 2. 3. 4.c T. 13.
f. 13. &c.d T. 13. f. 14.e f. 8. 9, 10. &c.f T. 3. f. 2. 3.g f. 8. 9. &c.
h f. 11. 12. ABC.i f. 15. A.k f. 16. 17. &c.l T. 12. f. 1. ee. ff.
m f. 2. aa.n T. 3. f. 8.o T. 12. f. 1. gg.p f. 2. δδ.q T. 13. f. 19.r T. 14.
f. 2. 3, 4. &c. 
But you must diligently observe the Kernels placed upon the a Cartilago Thu-
roides or Door fashiond Gristle, which are larger in Women than in Men. In this
order therefore you shal search for the Parts of the Neck, and separate them if you
can one from another, or take them out.
Its Vessels.
And first of al, the Musculus Latissimus being taken away,you shal search diligent-
for the Nerve of the b Sixt pair, placed between the internal jugular Vein and the
Carotick Arteries. The c Internal Jugular has little values or shutters near the
Claves, but the d external Jugular has none.
The Carotick Artery at its entrance into the Skul, has two very smal thin bones,
which hinder and keep back the Arterial blood, when it would flow in too vio-
lently.
The Nerves of the sixt Pair being both of them tied in a living Dog, he cannot
bark having lost his voyce, if one only be tied, he barks but faintly and by halves:
which is diligently to be observed.
Os Hyoides.
Then you shal consider the Os f Hyoides, how it is suspended with strong bands
and firmly fastened to the Apophyses g Styloides ; how it sustaines the Larynx, the
Epiglottis and the Tongue. For the Cartilago h Thyroides, is by its Hornes an-
nexeded to the Os Hyoides.
And therefore the Os Hyoides is the Foundation of those Parts, and yet is it
moveable in swallowing : and Rondeletius saw one taken Speechles as in a Palsie,
by reason of the dissolution of the Reluctancy of the Muscles of Os Hyoides.
Which is a thing to be observed in that bone.
Kernels.
Besides those Kernels resting upon the Cartilago Thuroides, there are other lit-
tle ones, placed al along the internal jugular and orderly disposed, into which the
brain disburthens it self.
Under the lower Jaw, in the upper and foremer Part of the Neck, are seen two
other Kernels, which do often swel, and in them the Kings-Evil is bred.
At the Root of the Tongue are the a Tonsillæ, termed Antiades ; certain Kernels
so called. Whose pain and swelling are by Ulpian termed Antiagri.
Al these Kernels are diligently to be considered in Fluxions which happen in the
Neck, whether they be the Scrophulæ Kings Evil or Bronchocele.
a T. 13. f. 1,2. 8.b T. 3. f. 8. AB. &c.c T. 12. f. 1. ee.d f. 1. ff.e f. 2.
aa.f T. 13. f. 11. 12. ABC.g T. 15. f. 6. DD.h f. 1, 2, 8. A.a T. 15.
The


Chap. 7. Of the Neck. 201
The Medicinal Consideration.
Similar Dis-
eases of the
Neck.
The Neck is subject to Similar Diseases arising from distemper, and to Diseases
Organical, consisting in bad Conformation : if it be too long, or too short, or the
Vertebraes thereof be out of Joynt, especially the second ; in Magnitude, if it be
swelled, as in the Bronchocele, Kings-Evil and Squinsie.
The Organi-
cal Diseases.
as
Bronchocele
Bronchocele is a Swelling in the Neck, near the Larynx, arising from an humor
collected in that place, or from the Kernel of the Cartilago Thuroides being longer
than ordinary and producing superfluous flesh ; or it is an Impostum proceeding
from the Tumor Atheroma or Steatoma, or it is a Dropsie. Bronchocele does not
proceed, as many have imagined, from immoderate Clamors and Cryings out, or
by drinking of melted Snow, as the fashion is among the Inhabitants of the Alpes
or other high Mountaines ; but from thick and clammmy Flegm, which slides thi-
ther by bittle and little out of the Head and the external Parts thereof, down behind
the Eares. Which is the Judgment of Fernelius.
It may be questioned, whether the matter be contained between the Musculus
latus and the Skin, or whether it lie al concealed under the Musculus Latus. For
if the matter be collected there, it cannot be drawn out, because it is crept in be-
tween the spaces of the Muscles.
If it lie outward to the sight, it may be rooted out and cured. It is wont to
begin with a wind, which distends and separates the Skin from the Membrana
Carnosa : or the Musculus Latus it self, is separated from the Parts which he be-
neath the same.
Into the which space the matter flows by degrees, which differs according to the
various temperament and Constitution of the Patients.
It grows by little and little, and receives nourishment, not by the Veins, but by
certain little Pipes which Nature creates.
Kings-Evil
Bronchocele differs very much from the Kings-Evil-Swellings, which rise un-
der the Jaw and in the Neck, of a rounder shape, distinct one from another, or
clustered together. They spring from a Flegmatick clammy matter, which
drenches the Kernels and makes them swel ; and therefore look where there are
Kernels, there the swellings arise.
Scirrhous Tumors have in them somwhat of the Nature of the Kings-
Evil-Swellings , which makes them suspected. They happen under the
Jaws, in the Groins, behind the Ears, and in al Parts of the Body where there are
Glandules or Kernels. And somtimes in certain places of the Body , a portion
of Fat grows hard and makes a Scirrhous Tumor and somtime the Kings-
Evil.
Gongrone.
The Tumor Gongroni is mustered among the external swellings of
the Neck. It is caused by an Humor, not so thick as that in the Kings-Evil, or
Bronchocele.
Squinzie
Angina the squinsie, is a Tumor of the Neck either internal or external: or an
internal or external inflamation of the Neck.
The external is properly called Synanche, the Internal is termed Cynanche.
Galen conceives that this distinction of Names is vain and of no use in Practice.
But I account the same necessary. For although general Medicines do serve for both,
yet in Cynanche where the Patient can neither fetch breath nor speak, the danger is
greater : and therefore Medicines are to be speeded with al hast possible : yea and
the Wind-Pipe must be opened ere twenty four hours are past, that the Patient
may by that means receive breath, til such time as the upper Part of the Larynx
be unstopped. For in that kind of Squinsie, where no outward swelling appears,
the Larynx alone is inflamed and obstructed. In other Squinsies the Circumja-
cent Muscles of other Parts are affected : In the Cynanche, the Fluxion is in the
Arytænois and the Glottis, and in other Musculous Carnosities of the Larynx, by
which means the passage of the Larynx is stopped, and death follows unvoidably,
Cc for-


202 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK IV.
for though there is some little passage left for Liquors, yet no man can live without
fetching his breath.
A Leek thrust into the Throat, with some sharp biting Powder sprinkled upon
it may do good, as also some strong drawing Medicine or a Vesicatory applied to
the Larynx, and Scarifications made here and there about the Larynx. Touching
the Squinsie , read Hippocrates in the 27. and 34. Aphorismes of his
sixt Book. In the third Book of his Prognosticks, And in the 49. Aphorisme
of his seventh Book.
Chap. 8. Of the Teeth and Gums.
I Return now unto the inner Parts of the Mouth which are there conteined, and
may be seen with the Eyes, such as are the Teeth, Gums, Palate, Uvula and
Tongue, of which in order.
Use of the
Teeth.
I wil begin with the Teeth, the Instruments of Chewing and of speaking; for
those that are Tooth-les cannot wel chew and grind their Meat, neither can they
pronounce their words clear and plain as they ought to do.
There is a twofold consideration of the Teeth ; as they are in Infants til, they are
two or three years Old, and as they are in persons of uper years.
Condition of
the Teeth in
Infants.
In Infants they break out by Course, first the Cutters, then the Dog-Teeth, af-
them the Grinders, and they have but twenty til they are three years Old, at which
time the rest break forth.
These first Teeth are called Dentes Lactei, the milk Teeth, which have under
them another branch, which wil shoot forth another Tooth, if the first be pluckt
out, or come out of it self.
There are two seasons observed in which Children are most tormented with
Tooth-breeding : the one is when they first sprout within the Gum, the other is
when they break out of the Gum. And under the Term of Tooth-breeding Hip-
pocrates does in a manner comprehend al Childrens Diseases, because Children are
troubled with many Diseases upon that account, springing from the pain of Teeth-
breeding, and bringing them to their Graves.
In grown Per-
sons.
In Persons grown up the Teeth are distributed into two ranks or a rows, accor-
ding to the two Jaws in which they are fixed. In each Jaw are reckoned fifteen or
sixteen Teeth, and they are of three sorts. The first four placed in the forepart of
the Jaw, are called b Cutters : next them on either side, are the two c Dog-Teeth,
and after them on each side five Grinders. They are immovably fastened in their
Holes called Alveoli, by that kind of Articulation which is termed Gom-
phosis.
They are bound and fastened both by their proper Ligaments and by the
Gums.
Their Vessels.
They recive Nerves, Veins and Arteries within their Roots, which are hollow,
and therefore they are pained more than any other of the bones. The external and
bare Part of the Tooth, is termed its Basis, the internal which is covered, is called
the Root, which is double or triple.
a T. 14. f. 3.b T. 15. f. 6. m.c T. 15. f. 6. nn.d T. 15. f. 6. 0000. 
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of
the Teeth in
Infants.
Tooth-Sicknesses of Infants, have two times in which they are wont to torment
and kil. The first is when the Tooth first sprouts within the Gum, which is called
Odaxismos, which causes the Gums to Swel and be inflamed, brings Feavers, con-
tinual Vomiting and Loosness : the other is the time of the breaking forth of the
Tooth, which is called Odontophua, and then the poor Infants are most of al vexed
and tormented with pains.
The


Chap. 8. Of the Teeth and Gums. 203
In grown per-
sons.
The teeth of grown Persons are troubled with divers Diseases, as Distempers, Dry-
neß through Age, and Loosneß ; with Organick Diseases in Number Deficient, when
they fal out ; or in Number exceeding, when there are two or three rows of Teeth
or when there is but one Bone, in the place of so many Teeth.
In Magnitude exceeding or deficient, as when there be long gag Teeth, that go
out of their Rank, or when the Teeth are too little and worn away.
In Scituation, when they stand not close together, or when the lower Teeth are
not just against the upper, or when the upper Teeth fal within the lower, or when
Teeth grow in the Palate of the Mouth.
Symptomes of
the Teeth are.
Diseases common are, when the Teeth Scale and moulder away with rotteness,
or when they are broken.
Setting on edge
Tooth-ach.
Symptomes of the Teeth, are the hurting of the proper and peculiar feeling of
the Teeth, which is called Hæmodia, Setting of the Teeth on Edge ; or the hurting
of the common feeling of the Teeth, which causes the Tooth Ach, which is termed
Odontalgia or Odontagra for the likness it has to pains of the Gout. Pain of the
Teeth is reckoned among the greatest torments which are in the world, although a
Tooth be so smal a Part. Celsus Book the sixt Chap. 9.
Simple Affections of the Teeth are Blackness, Rustyness and a clammy gluish-
ness (which Hippocrates counts the sign of a strong Feaver) also a stony Crust
which grows upon them.
Stinking.
Excrescence.
Worms.
Bleeding.
Symptomes in the Irregularity of things voided, are, A Stinking Of the Teeth,
an excrescence and Worms, which are bred within the Cavities of the Teeth, or a
flux of blood immoderately flowing, after the drawing of a Tooth, which is som-
times a cause of Death. See Duretus in hisComments upon the Coicks of Hippo-
crates, where he explains what is the grinding of the Teeth in Diseases.
Dryness of the Teeth in Sick people, foretels a Convulsion or Madness.
Whether a
Tooth may be
fastened in the
place of one
drawn out?
It is worth the enquiry. Whether into the plaee of a Tooth drawn out, another
may be thrust in at the same moment, and fixed in the Room thereof, so as to stick
fast and be cloathed with the Gums flesh, and to abide and serve to chew the Meat
with the other Teeth ?
He that shal consider that the Teeth have Life, do receive Veins, Arteries and
Nerves ; do feel, are pained ; and firmly tied and fastened with certain bands into
the Gums: wil never say that a strang Tooth, thrust into the place of one pluckt
out, can be made so like to the other Teeth, as to perform the same Office with
them and stick there as long as they shal do. Yet some Physitians in favour of a
Norman Tooth-drawer, would perswade Men that it is possible to substi-
tute such a Tooth, and they have upbraided me with Incredulity and Ignorance,
because I am not of their mind.
You are to consider the holes in the upper and lower Jaw-bone, through which
are drawn the Nerves Veins and Arteries, which are inserted into the Roots of the
Teeth.
In the upper Jaw there creeps an Artery which running towards the Eare, is there
burnt, or seared up, and to that place and upon the Temples, an astringent plaster
is said to stop the Veins by which the Flux of Rheum does come.
There creeps an Artery in the Lower Jaw near the Corner, which is to be seared
where it beates, or topicks are to be laid thereupon, to ease the Tooth-Ach of the
lower Jaw.
How the Spun-
gy excrescence
is taken out of
the Tooth-hole.
Somtimes a bony Fungus or Spungy substance grows out of the hole of a Tooth,
and comes to be so big as to fil the Patients Mouth, and at length to choak him, if
prevention be not used, by cutting off the said excrescence and burning the Root
thereof.
You shal observe that the brain hurts the Teeth by Distillation of Rheum, the
Stomach hurts them by Fumigation or raising fumes and steems which annoy them:
and that the Lungs likewise do in some Measure dammage the Teeth.
Whether Teeth
do breed in al
Ages?
That there is a Regeneration of the Teeth, and that Teeth grow out in every Age
of Man, is most certain : yet must we not rely upon this Regeneration of Teeth,
Cc 2 so


204 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
so as certainly to make account thereof, and expect it after seven years
are over.
To Clense the Teeth you shal find an Admirable Water, in the 96. Counsel of
Fernelius
Chap. 9. Of the Gums.
The natural
Constitution of
the Gums.
Preternatural.
THe Gums are certain parcels of Flesh folded about the Teeth,which cover the
holes of the Teeth within and without:but without they are wider and more
swelling. When this Flesh of the Gums grows Proud and covers the Teeth more
than it should, it causes pain and hinders Chewing, also the Loosneß of
the said Flesh is troublesome, because it makes the Teeth to become loose.
Parulis.
Epulis.
Cancer.
Inflamation of the Gums is called Parulis : if the Flesh grow from an Ulcer, its
termed Epulis. Somtimes the Gums are Cancerated, and somtimes they bleed
immoderately.
Apthæ.
The Gums are Eaten up by Ulcers called Aphthæ : in the Scurvy (which the Old
Physitians called Stomachache and Oscedo) the Ulcers of the Gums are Ma-
lignant.
Somtimes these Aphthæ or Ulcers of the Gums are so Malignant, that they eate
into the Tongue, Uvula, and Tonsillæ, without suspition of the Venereal Pox.
such are described by Aretæus, and such appear in that strangling Spanish Diseases,
which the Spaniards cal Garotillo, and which is common to the inhabitants of Nap-
les (who cal it Ulcus Syrianum Faucium) perhaps by reason of their Commerce
with the Spaniards, who are much subject to the Kings-Evil : and therefore the
Malignant Humor of the Kings-Evil does Produce such Symptomes in the Mouth
and Jaws.
Chap. 10. Of the Palate.
The structure
of the Palate.
THe Palate is the a Vaulted Roofe of the Mouth, which is a very thin bone,
cloathed with a b Nervous Skin, which is wrinkled, by reason of the Crevesses
which are ingraven in the bone : and therefore it sticks very hard to the bone, which
has no Periostium.
Its Rottenneß.
This most tender bone does many times become rotten in the Whores-Pocks,
the Palate being boared through (if care be not taken in time) whether the infecti-
on be lodged in the Mouth, or within the Nose : which Hole so boared does much
hinder the Patient in chewing of Meat and in speaking unless it be stopped with a
plate, Cotton, or Spunge.
Chap. 11. Of the Uvula and Isthmus.
The Use of
the Uvula.
AT the inner part or further part of the c Palate hangs the d Gargareon or
Uvula, a Fleshy Particle, which is given to mankind to help his speech, and
to some birds which imitate the speech of Man : it hangs therefore at the farthest end
of the Palate, to help our speech, being that to the voyce, which the Quil is to the
Musical Instrument, whose strings are struck therewith. It is therefore called the
striker bp Paulus Ægineta in the 51. Chapter of his sixt Book.
It hinders liquid things from running back into the Nostrils, and it purifies the
Air which enters into the Wind-Pipe. Therefore such as have no Uvula, are
hoarse in speaking, part of what they drink runs into their Nose, and because of
the impurity of the Air which they draw into their Lungs, they fal into a Con-
sumption.
Its Muscles.
It has a Muscles for motion, though it be moved very obscurly of rather suspend-
ed


Chap. 12. Of the Tongue. 205
ed in Æquilibrio. Of these Muscles you may read in my History of the Muscles.
Lib. 5.
Ligaments.
To this Particle are adjoyned certain Lateral Ligaments, which being widened
and spred forth by a Defluxion of rheum,they resemble the wings of Bats or Flitter-
Mice,and are very troublesome to the Patient. Naturally they ought to be dry,and
drawn back toward the Palate bone: they are two, and do include the b Kernels
termed Tonsillæ.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Its Diseases.
Staphyle.
Columella.
Chalasis.
This Part, viz. The Uvula or Gargareon is Inflamed Swelled, Lengthened
and grows Lank. When it is inflamed it represents a Grape, and is termed Staphyle,
if it represent a Pillar, tis called Columella and Chion ; if it grow loose and slap
by reason of the Rheum, tis called Chalasis Gargareonis ; and then it is contracted
and drawn back, by sprinckling salt or Peper upon it, whereby the moisture thereof
is dried up.
Imantis.
If it hang down too much, part of it is cut away ; if the lateral Membranes are re-
laxed it is called Imantis by Aretæus ; who elegantly describes the Relaxation of
those Ligaments in his first Book de Causis Acutorum, Chap. 8. Of the Gargareon
read Hippocrates, in his third Progn, sent. 31.
a T. 15. f. 5. LL. &c.b T. 13. f. 15. D.c T. 13. f. 15. D.d T. 13.
f. 15. A. 
a T. 13. f. 15. BB. CC. &c.b T. 13. f. 17. and 18. 
Of the Isthmus.
Isthmus de-
fined.
Isthmus is a place or space between the Larynx and Pharynx, seated in the
Throat, like a Neck of land between two Seas, which is an Isthmus.
Diseases of
the Tonsillæ
The Kernels there placed are called a Antiades and Paristhmia. The swelling
of those Kernels is called by the same names by which the Tonsillæ
are called when they are inflamed. Somtimes they swel and grow to such a great-
ness, that they descend into the Throat like two Apples and hinder the Patient from
swallowing and fetching breach.
They are often inflamed and Impostumated, and then they must be pricked
deep in with a lancet, to let out the blood or quittor, otherwise they choak the
Patient. Somtimes they are inflected with Cancerous Tumors , which are
incurable.
Chap. 12. Of the Tongue.
The Tongues
Substance.
Number.
THe Tongue, which is the Instrument of tasting speaking and swallowing ; is
made up of a b Fleshy and Spungy substance, compassed about with a thin
Membrane. Although it seem one, yet is it divided into two Parts, which are so
separated, although closly connexed ; that one side may have the Palsie and the o-
ther be free, and the one side may be discoloured and the other not.
Scituation.
It is placed in the Mouth and throat, born up by the Basis of the c Os Hyoides,
and tied with a strong band. It was very conveniently thus seated, that it might
discover the Diseases which lie hid in the three Cavities of the Body viz. The bel-
ly Chest and Head. For it is soaked and tainted with the moist and fuliginous
Excrements of those Parts, and has the Color of that Humor which bears most
swey in the Body.
And therefore because it is the Instrument of Tast, of speech and of the Mind, it
was requisite that it should correspond and communicate with those principal Bo-
wels: and therefore as the Urin is in al Diseases lookt upon and examined, so ought
the Tongue to be diligently considered. Hippocrates Lib. 6. Epidem: Sect. 3.
Text 14. The


206 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
The Tongue shews what the Urin is : which Galen has confirmed in his Com-
mentary upon that place.
Magnitude.
The Magnitude of the Tongue is to be considered : for naturally it ought to be
as long as a mans middle Finger, but hardly so thick as the said Finger, and not
broader than the breath of two Fingers. Such is the natural greatness of the
Tongue, that it may be fit to speak with, otherwise a thick, over-long and over-
broad Tongue, doth much hinder a mans Speaking.
Proglossis
Frænum
The a pointed end of the Tongue, which smites against the Teeth, is termed Pro-
glossis : the broad end which lies hid in the Throat, is called Basis Linguæ, the
bottome of the Tongue. That it may not run out to far, or wander from its bounds,
it is retained by a band under neath, which is called Frænum Linguæ, the bridle
of the Tongue.
Its Vessels.
Kernels.
Muscles
It has Veins from the Jugular, Arteries from the Carotick. The Veins under
the Tongue are called Hypoglottides or Ranulæ : and two Kernels
placed there are likewise termed Ranulares, in which, grown round and hard,
the foundation of the Elephantiasis, a kind of Leprosie, is bred, as appeares
by the swelling of the Lips, Pushes of the Face, and thickness of the Tongue.
It has c Nerves for tasting and motion. For though it be of it self Voluble in speak-
ing, yet for the more strong motions of chewing, swallowing and spitting, it stands
in need of d Muscles, of which you may read in my History of Muscles Lib. 5.
a T. 13. f. 16. and 17.b T. 13. f. 14. A. &c.c T. 13. f. 11. and 12. A.
a T. 13. f. 14. A.b T. 13. f. 14. BB.c T. 13. f. 14 aa. bb.d T. 13.
f. 14. B C. D. E. 
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of the
Tongue.
Similar.
Organical.
Common.
The Tongue is subject to divers Diseases, Similar, Organick, and common.
For it is liable to al kinds of distempers ; to loosness or softness, hardness, Density
and Rarity of substance.
It is Organically Diseased, when it is swollen in al its dismensions and cannot be
conteined within the Hedg of the Teeth.
It is inflamed, when the Tumor called Batrachium rises under the Tongue, and
turnes to an Impostum : out of which being opened, there flowes a substance like
the white of an Egg and somtimes true quittor. If it be removed never so little
from its place, the Cause is in the Os Hyoides, or in its Muscles, being either
Palsied or Convulsed.
Whether its
substance wil
grow again.
It is also Ulcerated by those simple Ulcers termed Aphthæ, and somtimes with
Malignant Ulcers, which putrifie, Eat and consume the same.
That the substance of the Tongue may grow again is confirmed by
many Histories, and that the same being lost, a man is not wholly deprived of
speech.
There have been some seen who could speak distinctly enough, so as to be under-
stood, without a Tongue. But peradventure they had some Part of their Tongue
remaining far within, which with the Glottis and Uvula did frame the Speech.
Its Symptomes
Speech Abolish-
ed.
Traulotis.
Psallotis.
Stammering
Tonguetied.
Tast Vitiated
Symptomes of the Tongue, of the first kind, are two, the Marring of Speech
and Tasting. Speech is marred three waies, by Abolition, Imminution and De-
pravation. Abolition of Speech is termed Anaudia. Depravation of speech is of
two sorts, Traulotis, Psallotis or Balbuties. Traulotis is when the Patient can-
not pronounce some one letter, and Psallotis or Psellismos is, when he cannot pro-
nounce divers letters. Ischnophonia, Stammering, is a stoppage of the Tongue,
so that the Patient cannot proceed in his discourse, but repeats one and the same
letter often over before he can proceed. Anchyloglossos and Mogilalia are when the
Tongue is tied either too strait or too loose.
There is a threefold marring of the Tast, not distinguished by names: for it is
abolished, depraved and diminished.
The 


Chap. 13. Of the Larynx, or Head of the Wind-pipe. 207
Tast depraved
The depravation of tast happens when the Tongue is filled with some evil
Humor. So that what ever it tasts is infected with that Humor and tasts thereof.
Tast is abolished when the Tongue perceives no tast in any thing.
Palsie of the
Tongue.
The motion of the whole Tongue is abolished in the Palsie, diminished when the
half of the Tongue is Palsied, without any hurt to the Tast.
In a total Palsie of the Tongue, there is great fear that the Patient wil fal into an
Apoplexy, though Fernelius saw none to follow : but we must not be too confi-
dent, but meet the Disease when it is coming.
In a total Palsie of the Tongue the Patients are dumb : in a Palsie of half the
Tongue, they speak untowardly.
Tongue dis-
coloured.
A simple affection of the Tongue, is its Color changed, which comes not only
from the primary distempers thereof, but cheifly by Sympathy with the
Bowels.
There is a certain trembling or wavering of the Tongue observed in Diseases of
the Brain, which is a forerunner of the Phrensie, according to Hippocrates in his
Coicks.
Chap. 13. Of the Larynx, or Head of the Wind-pipe.
The Larynx.
its
Scituation
THe Larynx is the Head of the a Aspera Arteria or Wind-pipe, the instrument
of modulating our speech, and the Channel by which Air is breathed in and
out.
Tis seated in the Forepart of the Neck which is termed the Throat.
In Men it bunches out more than in Women, for the Women have two Kernels
placed thereby, which swel more than they do in men, and so make
the Neck even, taking away that same deformed Protuberancy , which is seen in
Men.
Gristles
Thuroides
Cricoides.
Arytænoides.
Glottis.
It consists of five Cartilages or Gristles, whereof the two greatest do make up
the Body of the Larynx : the first is called b Thuroides, the second a Cricoides,
and those are the two largest and hardest. The third is the b Arytænoides, which
is placed upon the Cricoides and shuts up the Larynx. Within there is observed a
fourth, which is called c Glottis, being the principal Instrument of framing the
Voyce, which is contracted and dilated with the Arytænoides : but the Arytæ-
nois with the Glottis, is so firmly shut, when we draw our Breath in, that it
strives against the Muscles of the Throat and Chest which resist the same, to
hinder Exspiration or the going out of the breath, by which al the Muscles are loos-
ned Expulsion ceases from the inferior Parts. Only the Glottis Acts, in the
Modulation of our Speech.
Epiglottis.
And that nothing either solid or Liquid might fal into the Larynx, it has a cover,
which is called d Epiglottis. It stands alwaies open for Respiration sake, nor is it
depressed save by the weight of what is eaten and drunk.
Its Motion.
The whol Larynx is Moveable by way of Ascent and Descent, through help of
Muscles, for to Facilitate our swallowing.
Its Muscles.
Again, two Cartilages or Gristles are moved by themselves viz. The Thyrois
and the Arytænois. The former is widened and contracted, the latter is shut and
opened. For those are contrary motions, which are performed by e separated
Muscles, which spring from the Cricois an immovable Gristle, which is placed to
fasten the Gristles and Muscles, as a foundation to make the Circle of the Larynx.
Touching the Muscles, I shal speak in my Doctrine of Muscles.
The Larynx though it be Gristly, yet in Old Men it becomes boney, and it has
been found to be so in some that were to be hanged, whom the Halter could not
choak : and not only the Larynx, but also the gristly Channel of the g Aspera
Arteria. Either those parts were boney or the Halter way too thick, so that it
could not sufficiently force and rend the same.
The


208 The Physical Consideration,and Anatomy BOOK IV.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of
the Larynx.
The Larynx is subject to a distemper, a Tumor and Inflamation, which when
it happens, it hinders Speech and Breathing and strangles the Patient without any
appearance of swelling, without.
Squinzie.
Within fifteen or twenty hours it kils a Man, his mind and sences remaining
sound and perfect. An Horrid Symptome it is, in which besides general Reme-
dies, if Scarrification of the Neck, wil do no good, we must proceed ad Broncho-
tomiam, viz. To open the Part by Section.
And this Disease is that most Pernicious Angina which Hippocrates makes men-
tion of: Liquid things penetrate into the Stomach, but al breathing is stopped, and
consequently sudden death must needs follow.
Privation of
Speech.
Hoarsness.
The Action of the Larynx is breathing, and the forming of speech and singing.
Privation of speech is termed Aphonia, the depravation thereof is Raucedo Hoars-
ness : the Imminution thereof is called Ischnophonia.
Want and dif-
ficulty of brea-
thing.
The Interception of Respiration is termed Apnoia, the Imminution thereof
Dyspnoia.
Both these Actions are hurt, either by a proper Disease of the Larynx, or of the
neighbouring Parts, or of the Parts remote, especially of the Lungs, from whence
the matter of speech is supplied and respiration proceeds. For the Larynx affect-
ed, does only stop the waies of breathing.
Diseases of the
Epiglottis.
The Epiglottis has its Diseases ; either it is relaxed, or it is too much contracted
and straitned, or it becomes hard, whence proceeds difficulty in swallowing.
Some there are who can more easily Swallow meat than drink, and in such the
Epiglottis is become hard and stif,so that it wil not be born down save by the weight
of solid meat, with which that which is liquid slips along.
When it is become loose and Flaggy by reason of a Catarrh, it cannot be conve-
niently raised up ; and when it is become straiter and narrower than it ought, it
does not exactly shut the Arytendoides:which causes that crumms of bread and some
portion of what is drunk, do slip into the Wind-pipe.
Nature has provided against this inconvenience, having by the sides of the Glottis,
which is almost alwaies shutting, framed and set certain Cavities, which receive,
such portions of meat or drink as slip beside, so that they are cast out again by
coughing.
a T. 13. f. 9. and 10. EE. | b T. 13. f. 1. and 2. f. 8. A. 
a T. 13. f. 3. and 4. f. 9. and 10. DD.b f. 5. and 6. f. 10. aa. c f. 10.
beneath A.d T. 13. f. 7. 9. and 10. AA.e f. 8. 9. 10. &c.f f. 9. and 10.
between A. and E.g f. 9. and 10. EE. 
Chap. 14. Of the Aspera Arteria or Wind. Pide.
Use of the we-
sand.
IN the Fore-part of the Neck is placed the a Channel of the Aspera Arteria, the
Instrument of speech and breathing, because it brings Air into the Lungs and
carries out sooty Vapours ; also there the Voice is formed and begins to be Arti-
culated.
Its Gristles.
It consists of many Semi-circular Gristles, which are severed one from another,
and are imperfect behind, not filling up the Circle, by reason of the Oesophagus
or Gullet which lies beneath it, being the Channel of Meat and Drink.
Its Membrane.
The Aspera Arteria or Wind-pipe is lined within by a Membrane,
which is drawn from the Mouth into the inner parts of the Wind-pipe and
Oesophagus.
The 


Chap. 15. Of the Oesophagus, or Gullet. 209
The Medicinal Consideration.
The Pipe of the Aspera Arteria is troubled with an hot or cold distemper, with
an Humor flowing from the Brain, whence comes Branchos, Raucedo or Hoars-
ness.
Whether the
wouds of the
wind-pipe are
Curable?
The Wind-pipe being wounded is curable and may securely be cut, under the
Larynx, between two Gristles, in a very choaking Squinsie.
May we not experiment this operation in a choaking stoppage and wheezing with
rattling in the Wind-pipe, seeing that it may be as safely practised in this case as
in the other? that sweet attenuating and cutting Liquors may be taken or forced
in, to cut the Flegm and bring it up, if it be possible, and pain, caused by Chough-
ing, hinder not ?
a T 13.f.9. and 10. EE. 
Chap 15. Of the Oesophagus, or Gullet.
What the Pha-
rynx is.
THe Oesophagus is the a way for the meat to pass into the Stomach. The be-
ginning thereof is termed Pharynx, which is moved by the help of Muscles,
b to thrust or swallow the meat.
Membrane of
Oesophagus.
It is made up of a proper Fleshy Membrane. Woven together with straight and
circular Fibres. It has another internal Tunicle which hath its original from the
c Mouth.
Within the Chest, that it may give way to ths Aorta Artery, leaving the Back-
bone, it inclines and is wreathed a little towards the right hand.
Its Kernels.
Two Kernels support that part which is so turned aside, and stay it on either
hand, which being drenched and swelled with some Humor, do bring a great Im-
pediment to the swallowing.
Obstruction of
the Oesophagus.
Oftentimes the end of the Oesophagus which is joyned to the Stomach, and is in
Latin termed d Stomachus, is obstructed by a Tumor either proceeding from
Flegm or Melancholy, which turnes at last unto an Ulcer and brings Death.
Which Disease is known by the hard descent of solid meat into the Stomach,
Which somtimes staies, and many times is vomited up again.
a T.3.f.2.EE.f.3. EF. &c.  b T.3.f.2. and 3. ABC. &c.  c T.3.
f.3. D.  d T.3.f.3.H.f.4. A. 
The End of the Fourth Book.
Dd THE 


210
THE
FIFTH BOOK
OF THE
ANATOMY
AND
PATHOLOGY
OF
John Riolanus,
The
KINGS PROFESSOR
OF
PHYSICK.
Chap. 1. Of the Limbs.
The Method
of handling.
Having gone over and finished the Trunk of the Body, I proceed
unto the Limbs, whose Muscles, Veins, Arteries and Nerves
with the Diseases of those Parts, I intend to explain, which
cannot be done without Anatomical dissection.
But before I proceed to that work: it wil do very wel to
contemplate the exteral Conformation of the Limbs, and
and withal to shew you what Veins are wont to be opened,
and in what places Issues may be made.
Parts of which
the Limbs are
compounded.
The Limbs are made up of the Scarf-Skin, the Skin, the fatty Membrane, the
Flesh of Muscles, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Bones, Ligaments, Gristles and
Kernels. These Parts I shal so divide in the Limbs, as I did in the Trunk of the bo-
dy viz. Into parts containing and Parts contained.
The Parts containing are the Scarf-Skin, the Skin, the fatty Membrane, and the
common Membrane of the Muscles. Al the other Parts are conteined, being com-
prehended by these. Touching the Scarf-Skin and the Skin, I shall repeat nothing,
because 


Chap. 2. Of the Superior Limbs 211
because they are the same and al a like in al Parts. The Membrana Adiposa or
fatty Membrane, is spred out in the Arm as far as the Wrist: and in the Leg, from
the Groin unto the Ankles.
After that, follows the common Membrane of the Muscles, which comprehends
the Muscles in their natural Scituation. In the Thigh the Fascia Lata supplies its
place.
The Medicinal Consideration.
Diseases of
the Skin.
The Universal Diseases of the Skin are divers distempers, simple,
or with Humors conjoyned. If the distemper be with Humor it makes
the Skin rough or swollen, whence springs the Scab, the Mange, the
Morphew, Scurfe, Leprosie, Tetters, Itch, Pustles, Blains, Water-Bladders,
Yellow-Blisters, Warts, Scalds, Moles, Biles, Night-Blains, Ring-worms,
Lowsie-Evil, Chops, Black and Blewness, Smal-Pocks, Meazles, Whores-Pox
and Elephantiasis or a Cancerous Tumor, over the whol body.
Of the Flesh.
The Flesh is infested with al kinds of Tumors, Inflamations, Carbuncles, Cho-
lerick Tumors, Phlegmatick Tumors, Melancholick Tumors, Cancers, Watry
Tumors, Windy Tumors, Impostums of al sorts, Steatoma the Fat impostum,
Atheroma the Pap impostum, Melicer is the Hony impostume, an Ulcer, a wound
and a Gangrene.
An Athletick or Champion-like constitution of body, high fed, and as we say,
lusty and ful of Beefe, is dangerous. Hippocrates shews the Reason in his
1. Book, Aphorisme the 3. and Celsus saies, that when a Man becomes Corpulent,
he ought to suspect least he be fatted to the slaughter. And in Hippocrates his A-
phorismes we are cold, that fat Men are not so Long-lived as lean Men are, and there
are some of cold Constitutions. who have hot Stomachs.
Of the Vessels.
Of the Bones.
Veins and Arteries ha ve Diseases proper to themselves, the Nervs have their
peculiar Diseases, and the Joints have theirs. And the bones are subject to fra-
ctures, Dryness, Disjoynting, Rottenness, &c. Which shal be explained when
we come co treat of the bones.
Chap. 2. Of the Superior Limbs.
The general
division of the
Limbs.
Special divi-
sion.
The Limbs both Superior and inferior are divided into three principal Parts: the
Arm into a Brachium from the Shoulder to the Elbow, b Cubitus from the Elbow
to the Hand, and the c Hand: The Leg into the d Thigh the e Shank, and the f Foot.
And forasmuch as the whol Arm hangs upon the g Shoulder bone, as the whol Leg
upon the h Huckle bone, and those bones are not reckoned to appertain unto the
Back-bone, the best way is to begin our description of the Limbs from them, viz.
Of the Arm from the Shoulder-blad, and of the Leg from the Huckle-bone.
Of the Shoulder-blade and the Arm from the Shoulder to the Elbow.
The Axillary
Kernels.
The Shoulder-blade i Joyned to the k Arm, makes a Joynt: in the bendihg of
which Joynt beneath, Kernels are placed, which are counted to be the Close stooles
of the Chest or Heart, as the Parotides or Kernels behind the Ears, are of the brain,
into which those Parts do empty their Excrements. The place of these Kernels is
called the Arm-Pit.
Diseases of
the Kernels.
These Kernels do frequently Swel, Impostumate, are infected with the Kings-
Evil, and subject to Buboes, yea such as accompany the Whores-Pox, as in the
Groin.
Of the whol
Joynt.
This Joynt is liable to be disjointed, but it is more often vexed with the Gout,
Rheumatisme, and other Fluxions. The strong smel of the Arm-Holes proceeeds
from these Kernels. Upon which Marcial has wittily and neatly played in one of
his Epigrams.
Dd 2 Lædit 


212 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
Lædit te quædam mala fabula, qua tibi fertur
Valle sub alarum trux habitare caper:
Hunc metuunt omnes, neque mirum, nam mala
valde est
Bestia.
That is,
An ill Report your Credit ( Sir.) does wound,
How that a stinking Goat has dwelling found
Within your hollow Arm-Pits shady Grove,
A beast which al Men fear, and none do love;
And good Cause why &c.
Of the Cubit or part of the Arm from the Elbow to the Hand.
The Diseases
of the Joynts
of these Parts.
The Articulation of the Brachium with the Cubit, is more hardly disjoynted;
admits Fluxions which do there breed divers Tumors hard to cure. In which case
unless diligent care be taken, the very bones are altered and the Cubit is made
crooked, and such as are on that manner crook’t, are by Hippocrates termed Galliag-
gones.
If such a croockedness be caused by a retraction of the Muscles, it is more easily
cured, than if it come from a repletion of the Cavities by a thick, clammy, con-
densed and dryed Humor.
The Articulation of the Cubit to the Wrist is subject to many Diseases, the
Gout, the Rheumatisme, the Tumor Ganglium which possesses the tendons of the
Muscles; Flegmatick Knobs and other Tumors.
Of the Hand.
Diseases of
the Hand.
The Hand is divided into the c Wrist the d After-Wrist and the e Fingers. To
these Parts the Diseases lately named are common. A Disease in number is here
usual in Children from the Womb, viz. A Sixt Finger growing to the Thumb or
little Finger. It is easily taken away, by the Incision Knife.
Of the Nailes
Diseases of
the Nails.
The Fingers are terminated and closed up by the Nailes, which are liable to
divers Diseases, in Figure, in Magnitude, whil they grow thick, wrinkled, un-
equal, rough, hooked as in leprous persons; they are also Cleft; and fal off in the
time of Sickness and afterwards breed again. The Color of the Nailes is changed in
time of Sickness. Also there is a sore Disease of the Nailes termed a White-Loafe
or Felon.
A Wheyish very sharp Humor is bred under the Naile near the bone, which
causes most bitter and intollerable pains, and brings an Inflamation first of the
Hand, and after of the Arm also, unless the Humor be let out, by cutting the
pappy flesh of the Finger to the very bone.
Of the Pappy
Ends of the
Fingers.
The Pappy Ends of the Fingers are aften corrupted, and putrifie, and somtimes
the last Joynt of a Finger must of necessity be cut off, by reason of a sphacelation of
the bone.
Paronychia Græcorum, viz. Opening of the Skin at the corners of the Nailes
and Issuing of blood thereat, is a sleight Disease, which does not affect the tendons
and Nerves of the Fingers Ends, as that Panaritium Arabum, a Disease of this
Part described by the Arabian Physitians.
The 


Chap. 3. Of the Inferior Limbs. 213
The Ancient Phylosophers, and Physitians, were wont to Divine and tel For-
tunes, by the Nails of Mens Fingers: touching which kind of Divination, Camil-
lus Baldus has lately written.
a T.21.f.1. C.  b f. 1. DE.  c f.1. FGHI.  d f.1.K.  e f.1. MN.
 f f.1.OPQ.  g f.1. A.  h f.4. A.  i f.1. A.  k f.1.C.  a T.21.f.1.
C.  b f.1. DE  c f.1.F.  d f.1. GH.  e f.1.l.
Chap. 3. Of the Inferior Limbs.
Diseases of the
Inferier Limbs.
The Inferior Limbs are commonly divided into three Parts; The Thighs, the
Shank, and the Foot. The Os Ilium is joyned to the Thigh, and from thence we
are to take measure of the length of the Leg. In the bending of the Os Ilii, and the
Thigh, are placed many Kernels, above and beneath; in which divers Buboes arise,
both Pestilential, Venereal, and springing from common Causes: of which we
have spoken in our Chapter of the Peritoneum.
These inferior Limbs are liable to the same Diseases with the superior, which I
wil not repeat. Proud Flesh is often bred in the hinder parts by contusion of the
Thighs, occasioned by long and hard sitting, or riding. Fernelius does elegantly
explain the material Cause hereof.
It is not caused by afflux of Humors, but only by the nourishment of the Part,
which being ulcerated within or without, if it be not stopped, it is by continual ac-
cess of Nutriment spread abroad, and swelled, and produces oftentimes as it were
certain Pipes of Veins and Arteries, by which it is nourished. So, when the Skin
remaining whol, the Flesh underneath is bruised and torn, a mighty Swelling does
arise by little and little, without any pain, but furnished with exquisite sence, and
Natural Heat.
The Sciatica.
In the Joynt of the Thigh, about the Cavity of the Huckle bone, is bred the Gout
called Sciatica. If the Humor flow into the Acetabulum, and cause the Head of
the Thigh-bone to slip out of its place, it breeds a Disease in Scituation hard to cure,
and which at last causes the Patient to hault.
The Hip-
Consumption.
The Bastard
Sciatica.
If a very sharp putrid Humor does corrode, and bring corruption into the Joynt,
it produces a Disease called Phthisis Coxaria, the Hip-Consumption, which
makes an end of the Patient by degrees. If an Humor flow into that part where the
great Nerve arises, which creeps up and down the hind parts of the Leg, Nosha Is-
chias, or a Bastard Sciatica is produced.
Swellings of
the Knee.
Swellings of the Knee, either springing from a Flegmatick Humor, or from Infla-
mation, are oftentimes very dangerous, or long-lasting; and at last do hasten the
Patients Death.
Kibes.
The Foot is divided into the a Tarsus, b Metatarsus, and the c Toes. The first
Bone of the Tarsus called d Pterna, is subject to a Disease springing from Cold or
Fluxion, which is called Pernio, a Kibe: And because this Bone receives a very
thick Tendon, if it be bruised and wounded, it causes inevitable death, by the very
Convulsions thereby raised.
Corns.
The Toes of the Feet, by compression, and straitness of Shoos or Boots, have
painful Corns breeding upon them, the unwary extirpation whereof has somtimes
brought a Gangrene into the Part.
a T.21.f.1.O.  b f.1.P.  c f.1.Q.  d f.5.B. 
The Legs.
Elephantiasis
of the Arabians
The whol Leg from the bending of the Groyn unto the Toes, is somtimes excee-
dingly swollen with an hard, and il-favored Tumor, which is called Elephantiasis,
Arabum: The Arabian Physitians, Elephants Leg, because it makes the Leg of the
Patient resemble that of an Elephant.
Swellings.
But the Shank and Foot are chiefly liable to defluxions which are caused either in
such as are newly recovered out of sickness, by the Humors falling down into those
parts; or primarily by the evil Disposition of the said parts.
The


214 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
The principal matter of these Tumors, is Wind or Water, or a clammy Fleg-
matick Humor, which produces the swelling called Oedema.
Somtimes the Toes of the Feet, as wel as the Fingers of the Hand, are deficient
or superfluous in their Number. There is a little knob grows somtimes under the
little Toe called Gemursa, because it makes the Patient groan.
Ill shape
Diseases consisting in the Evil-shaping of the Shank and Foot are frequent.
Hence arose those nick Names Varus, one that has crooked Legs bending inward;
Valgus, one that has Legs bending outward; Compernis, one narrow between
the Knees; Scauripeda, one that has hunching Ankles, that interfer and hinder
his going ; Pansus, one that has a broad or Splay foot; Atta, he that treads only
on the fore part of his Feet, as it were on Tip Toes; Plautus, he that is Splay-
footed or Broad-footed, al which Infirmities are seen in grown Persons and in
Children.
Some are borne with their Legs contracted, others become so by ill Swadling in
the time of their Infancy, and by untoward Carriage in their Nurses Arms. Som-
times one foot is longer than the Other which Causes halting.
Stink
Palsie
Knees pains.
Somtimes the Feet do stink intollerably, by reason of their much heat and
Sweat; which must be helped. Oftentimes there happens a Palsie of the lower
Limbs, by reason of a Defluxion of Humors out of the Mesentery, into the Lum-
bal Nerves. Many times a bastard Sciatica does possess the whol Thigh as low as to
the Ankle-bone, even as far as that most thick Nerve does reach, which comes from
the Os Sacrum. Pains of the Knees are extream bitter and make stout Men cry out.
Because of the consent the Knees had with the Veins in the Mothers Womb. And
Pliny saies that a Mans life lies in his very Knees.
Wounds of the
Ankle.
Fluxions of Rheum into this Joynt are long lasting, dangerous and hard to
Cure, in the Judgment of Pardus, which daily experience does confirm. And a
blow or wound in the Anckle, that same great Tendon being bruised or wounded, do
bring Death, not without great Convulsions, so saies Hippocrates.
Chap. 4. In what places Issues are commonly made.
Places of Is-
sues.
NOw I wil shew you in what places Issues are to be made to purge out Wheyish
Humors, which flow either through the Vessels or betwteen the Skin. I wil
begin at the Head.
in
The crown of
the Head.
And first of al an Issue may be made where the sagittary and coronal Sutures
meet. You may find the place by applying your Wrist to the Nose of the Patient,
and observing how far you can reach upon his head with your middle Finger, for
there the Issue must be made.
The Hind part
of the Head.
Also in the hollow part of the Occiput or hind part of the Head. But if you
find no fitting Cavity there, you may apply your Caustick on either side of the
Additions of the Sutura Lambidoides.
Fore part of
the Head.
Likewise in the hollow behind the Ears, when the Eyes or Ears are
Diseased.
The Neck
Somtimes on either side of the Neck, as far as the third or fourth Vertebra.
The Arm
In the middle of the Arm between the Muscles Deltois and Biceps.
The Brest
In the Brest, two or three may be made according to the Longitude thereof, in
Diseases of the Chest and Lungs.
The Thigh
At the bending of the Buttocks, at the Ends of the Muscles cald Gloutii, where
the Thigh is perceived to move upon the Joynt, an Issue may be made, in a perfect
Sciatica when the Humor possesses the Cavity of the Joynt.
The Leg
Issues are made within side the Thigh, two Fingers above the Knee; also on the
inside of the Leg, two Fingers beneath the Ham.
The Loins
Somtimes to turn away Fluxions into the Thigh, Issues are made upon the
Loins, near the Back-bone, on each side the said bone.
Chap. 


Chap. 5. Of Veins usually opened. 215
Chap. 5. Of Veins usually opened.
The Veins
which are wont
to be opened.
I Proceed unto such Veins of the whol body as are usually opened. Veins
which now adaies are opened in the Head, are in the Forehead, the hinder-
part of the Head, and in the Temples.
in
The Fore head
Hind part of
the Head.
The Forehead Vein is termed a Præparata or the ready Vein, because it is
evident, and there is no need to Shave the Hair to come at it, as must be done
in the Vein behind the Head, which is termed Vena Puppis, the Aftership-
Vein.
The ancients did open the Veins behind the Ears, but that operation is now out
of use : Hippocrates saies the cutting of those Veins made the Scythians barren ;
perhaps he meant the Arteries in those Parts. The manner of opening these Veins
Albucasis does teach us in his 2. Book Chap. 97.
Neither is it unprofitable to open the Veines of the Head, by reason of the ex-
ternal Veins, which through the holes of the Scul have communion with the Me-
ninges.
I know Hieronimus Fabricius ab Aqua Pendente disallowes the opening of
those Veins, because oftentimes they do not appear. But if the Head be rubbed,
and the Hair shaved off and then again rubbed, they wil be more evident, provided
you throatle the Neck a little with a Towel or Napkin.
In the Temples
The b temporal Vein is also cut as is the Artery, in great and continual pains of
the Head.
In the Nose
The Antients did open the inner Veins of the Nose, as appears out of Hippocrates
in divers places, and from Galen his 6. Book of Epidemicks. The later Greek
writers, Paulus Ægineta and Aretæus, mention the opening of inner Veins of the
Nose: and Areteus himself, declares the Instruments which the Ancients used, to
provoke those Veins to bleed. But if the blood, according to the Opinion of Fer-
nelius, do flow from the Veins of the Face, which creep into the inner Parts of the
Nostrils; the Head being oppressed with plenty of blood, cannot be eased, be-
cause that same Irritation and opening of the Veins, ought to be performed near
the Colander bone, that the Longitudinal passage creeping unto the Nostrils may be
opened; therefore I conceive those Parts are frequently to be fomented with Luke-
warm Water before we use those Instruments propounded by Aretæus.
The manner of opening those Veins propounded by Albucasis, may be admitted,
but it does not penetrate to the inmost Part of the Nostrils, as far as the Colander
bone.
In the Mouth
The Veins under the Tongue termed Ranulares are more frequently opened
with good success, in Diseases of the Throat and Head. Only Aurelianus against
Diocles has disallowed that Practice, alleadging that it fills the Head, and the
blood cannot be stopt. Lib. 1. Acut. c. 12.
True it is that in some the blood has Issued so plentifully, that it could very
hardly be stopped, as was observed in a Capuchin Friar, Father Joseph. le Clerc,
the great Polititian and familiar friend of the Cardinal Richelieu; as Simon Pim-
pernel a most expart Surgeon of Paris, himself told me, he having opened the said
Veins, in the Friar aforesaid.
In the Neck.
In the Neck the a external Jugular is opened. Trallianus in Cure of the Squinsie
opened the same with good success Lib. 4. Chap. 1. And Soranus Ephesuis, in
his Introduction Chap. 12. Commends the opening of this Vein. In like manner
Actuarius commends this Practice in dangerous Diseases of the Head. Cæsalpinus
Lib. 2. Quæst: Medic. Chap. 12. Commands the opening of this Vein in a
Squinzy, because the Jugular Veins are more filled, than the shut cover and Mouth
of the Larynx.
Prosper Alpinus in his 2. Book of the Ægyptian manner of healing Diseases
Chap. 9. Writes that this is a common Remedy in that Contrey.
a T.1.f.1.H.  b T.1.f.1.I.  a T.1.K.  Jacobus 


216 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Jacobus Corpus in his Anatomical Introductions, shews the way to open those
Veins. Read Paulus Magnus Lib. de Phlebotomia printed in the Italian
Tongue. And Rondeletius in his Me hodus Medendi ; Lud vicus Mercatus
Chap. 13. Method; Medend. And Abucasis Lib.2. Chap.97.
In the Back
Rondeletius tels us of a Vein in the Back Lib. 1. Methodi Melendi. Chap. 37.
Which he saies is to be found, in the first Vertebra of the Back; it is seen elevated
on the top of the Vertebraes, creeping down the back, as far as Os Sacrum. It
seems to flow from the brain according to the Longitude of the spinal Marrow. He
lets us know that this Vein is profitably opened, in the Tetanus and Falling-Sick-
ness, and if it be not so visible as to be opened, in that place must Cupping-Glasses
be fastened with Scarification.
Ludovicus Mercatus in Lib. 1. Practice Cap. 19. Commends this Remedy
against the Convulsion. Hippocrates in his Book de Visu, burnes and pricks the
Veins of the back: which Remedy is propounded by Alexander Benedictus
Lib. 1. de Morbis Curandis, c. 5. And Gatriuaria advises to open the same in
in his Comment upon the 9. Book of Rhasis.
In the Arm
In the Arm three Veins are opened, the Cephalick or Head Vein accompanyed
by an a Artery without any Nerve, and therefore it is opened without danger. The
Basilica and Mediana are opened, but the b Basilica must be opened with pru-
dent waryness, by reason of an Artery near the same and the Tendon of Musculus
Biceps, which lies beneath it: neither is the c Mediana void of the like
danger.
In the Hand between the Ring Finger and the little Finger the d Salvatella is
opened, the opening thereof many account superstition : howbeit Hippocrates
opened the Veins of the Hands : and this Remedy h is not been rejected by learned
Physitians, especially in long lasting Sicknesses, and in the Quartan Ague at the
Conjunction of the Sun and Moon : which I have known to have succeeded happily
both to other Physitians, and to my self, in old Quartans, after the use of drivers
Medicaments.
It is not our Custom to open the Veins in the lower part of the Thigh above the
Knee: yet Lazarus Sotus saies that they are opened in Portugal in his 1. Book
of Animadversions, Chap. 4. Sect. 61. To stop gouty Defluxions into the Legs,
and to diminish the deformity of the Varices or black swoln Veins of those Parts,
the Ancients were wont to open them. And Platerus commends this Remedy to
to diminish the Varices. Which may be confirmed out of Galen Lib. 2. Method:
ad Glauconem.
In the Foot.
In the foot is opened the a Saphena, which is above the Malleolus internus or
inner Ancle bone; or the continvation thereof in Tarso, or the swelling side of the
Foot between the Heel and the great Toe.
Somtimes the b Ischiadica Vena or Sciatica Vein, is opened, which is Scituate in
the external Ankle. But this Vein ought not to be opened without very great heed
to the place where the Orifice is made, because of an Artery near, and Tendons very
near the same.
'Twas usual with the Ancients to open the c Ham Vein, which is now a daies sel-
dom performed, and quite out of use: neverrheless the opening thereof would be at
beneficial as is the opening of the Arm Veins.
Whether the
Foot Veins may
be opened and
how?
It might be conveniently opened if the Leg be put into a Vessel of hot Water above
the Knee, and rubbed, as is usual in bleeding at the Arm; also a double Ligature
may be used, one above and the other below the Knee. It is easily found and safely
opened, below the hollow of the Ham, at the beginning of the Musculi Gemellt:
and a sick Woman as she lies in her bed, may as conveniently present her Leg as the
Arm, being covered with the sheet or other fitting covering.
Though the Sciatica Vein and the Saphena are branches of the Crural Vein:
yet, because the Sciatica Vein does answer the Basilica, as the Saphena does the
Cephalica of the Arm; certain it is, blood is drawn by a more direct way from
the 


Chap. 6. Of the Arteries which are opened. 217
the Sciatica Vein, then from the Saphena. Howbeit Galen in his second Book
Secundum Locos Chap.2. The Sciatica Vein not appearing admits the Saphena to
be opened, in stead thereof. And if it appear not in the outward Ankle,its branch must
he opened, on the Tarsus or pulp of the Foot beneath the Ankle, or above the
Ankle, if it be visible.
Its also possible to make it the more apparent by such a kind of Ligature as the
Author of the Book de Anatomia Vivorum has described, made with a long and
broad Swath-band brought from the top of the Hip as low as the Ankle.
a T.1.f.1.L.T.24.f.1.BB. b T.1.f.1.M.T.24.f.1.CC. c T.1.f.1.
N.T.24.f.1.ff. &c. d T.1.f.1.P. 
a T.1.f.1.Q.R. T.24.f.4. aaa. &c. b T.1.f.1.SS. T.24.f.4.m.
c T. 24.f.4.ff. 
Chap. 6. Of the Arteries which are opened.
Whether Ar-
teries may be
opened?
THe Ancient Physitians were wont to open Arteries as wel as Veins. Howbeit
Horatius Augenius in his Book of Blood-letting, disswades the opening of
Arteries, because he never saw any Artery opened, that could be stopped again.
Aurelianus, Favours his Opinion, in his 1. Book of Chronick Diseases Chap. 5.
Howbeit Galen in his Book de Venæ Sectione, commends the opening of the Smaller
Arteries in very bitter and old paines of the Head.
What Arteries
are to be open-
ed?
Heurnius did wish, that in some part or other it might be safe to open an Artery
in burning Feavers, because one Porringer of the Arterial blood drawn out, would
cool the Patient more, than to loose ten Porringers of the venal blood. And in his
Commentary upon the 23. Aphorisme of the 1. Book, he saies that in the Hunga-
rian Feaver, when very red blood drops out at the Nose, it would do the Patient
good to draw a little blood from an Artery. But who (saies he)
dares open an Artery? I desire that al learned Artists would think
of it.
In the Fore-
head.
In the Temples
I say therefore, and aver, That in Paris, the Arteries of the Forehead and
Temples, before and behind the Ears, are successfully opened in Ancient or very
acute pains of the Head, in the Phrensie, Inflamations and extream pains of the
Eyes and Ears.
As for the opening of the temporal Artery Thadæus Dunus, in the 12. Chap.
Of his Miscellanies, shews how profitable a Remedy, it is.
Lazarus Sotus aforementioned, in the same place, observes that the Arteries
behind the Ears are profitably opened in Portugal.
Ludovicus Mercatus a Spanish Physitian suspects this opening of these Arteries,
for fear it should make Men Barren. But daily experience has delivered us from
that fear.
In the hind
Part of the
Head.
An Artery seated in the hinder Part of the Head is opened, the Hair being first
Shaven of, and the Head and hand being fomented in hot water, or rubbed with
a Spunge, that it may appear. The manner of opening this Artery, is not unlike
that of the temporal Artery, and therefore that same way of Paulus Ægineta,
Aetius and Albucasis, is to be rejected, who did first cut the Skin before they open-
ed the Artery.
In the Hand
In the Foot
Galen in his Book of Blood-letting near the end, in an Inflamation of the Liver
opened the a Artery, which Runs out between the Thumb and Fore Finger.
Which, Prosper Alpinus observes to be very usual in Egypt, in his third
Book and 12. Chap. De Medicina Egypt. And Septalius in his 6. Book of
Animadversions, Article 122. Judges that in a Palpitation of the Heart, the
Arteries which Run along the Fingers may safely be opened. Which may likewise
be done in the Tarsus and Meta-Tarsus of the Foot, according to the Advice of
Galen in his 3. Book of Anatomical Administrations, and the last Chapter.
Ee In 


218 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
In other Parts Arteries may not in any wise be opened, unless they have a bone
under them, that they may be pressed close down to make the Orifice grow toge-
ther again: and therefore in a lean Body, an Artery being unawars opened in the
Arm, may be closed again, if it be timly and closely tied as is fitting, to avoid
Aneurisma.
An experiment
of Benedictus
for the Rheu-
matism.
Before we think of opening the Arteries of the Head to turne away Fluxions,
that experiment of Alexander Benedictus wil not be unprofitable, to apply unto
the Shorn Head, Medicines that are to stop Rheums falling into the Eyes, must be
applied from the Eye-brows unto the Crown of the Head: if the Eyes begin to
appear dry, it is manifest that the Rheum falls into them by those Veins which are
under the Skin : but if they continue moist, it is evident the Humor flows into
them from under the bone.
Now the foresaid Mixture of Alexander Benedictus which stops Rheums is this.
Make a Cataplasme of Course bran, fine Frankincense, the white of an Egg, a
little Vitriol and Stone Alum ; and apply it as a foresaid.
Chap. 7. Of the Muscles and first of the Forehead Muscles.
The Forehead
Muscles should
rather be called
the Eye-brow
Muscles.
INtending to explain al the Muscles of the Body, I wil begin at the Frontal or
a Forehead Muscles, which I conceive are ordained rather to move the Eye-
brows, than the Forehead it self.
They have their original from the upper Parts of the Forehead, and being spread
out upon the bone thereof, they end at the Eye-brows, that they might lift them up.
They are severed in the midst of the Forehead, right above the Nose. And be-
cause we do at our pleasure depress and draw together our Eye-Lids into wrinkles,
we must assigne to each of them its Muscle, and I can find no other save the Orbicu-
lar b Muscle of each Eye-Lid ; for the Eye-brows cannot be drawn down without
the Eye-Lids be closly shut.
a T.15.f.1.EE.b T.15.f.1.FF. 
Chap. 8. Muscles of the hinder Part of the Head.
IN the after Head are found Muscles, or rather fleshy Membranes, which draw
backwards the Skin of the Head in such persons as have the said Skin movable.
These Muscles, as also those of the Forehead, are portions of the Musculus Latus
or Broad Muscle; which Sylvius does neatly compare to a riding Hood, taking away
only as much as is covered with a little cap on the top of a Mans Head: and there-
fore the broad Muscle does cover the Neck, Face, Fore and side Parts of the Head.
a T.15.f.1.EEb T.15.f.1.FF. 
Chap 9. Muscles of the Eye-Lids.
The first.
THe two Eye-Lids are moved by four Muscles, of which three are orbicular,
and one is straight belonging to the upper Eye-Lid, which arises at the inter-
nal Cavity of the Eye, and being spred out upon the Muscles, which lifts up the
Eye, it reaches unto the Eye-Lid.
The second.
The first of the orbicular or round Muscles, is the Musculus Ciliaris, which
compasseth about each of the Eye-Lids. The other is drawn out under the Eye-
lid, arising from the Circumference of the Orbita or Socket of the Eye.
The Third.
The fourth
The b third round Muscle being of a Fingers breadth, compasses the Surface of the
Orbita or Socket, and being placed under each Eye-Lid, and reaching as far as
the Eye-brow, and closly shutting the two Eye-Lids, it lifts up the lower and
draws down the Eye-brow.
Chap.


Chap. 11. Muscles of the external Ear. 219
Chap. 10. Muscles of the Eyes.
The Attollens
The Deprimens
The Adducens
THere are reckoned six Muscles of the Eye, four Straight and two Oblique,
which are named from their Scituation and action. One is termed c Supernus
and Attollens Oculum, the upper, and the Eyes up lifter; another is called d In-
fernus and Deprimens Oculum, the lower Eye Depresser; of the two Lateral
or side Muscles, one at the greater corner of the Eye is termed e Lectorius, the
Readers or the Students Muscle; the other placed at the smaller corner is called
f Indignatorius, the Disdeigners Muscle.
The Abducens.
They al arise from the Cavity of the Socket of the Eye and the broad Nervous
production, and are inserted into the Cornea Tunica under the Con-
junctiva.
The Contranitency of these Muscles pulling one against another is necessary, that
the Eye might be movable to and fro, which being depraved, the Eye is drawn to
some one side, and so abides in that posture.
And that the Eye might be drawn back towards the greater Corner, and might be
fixed in continual reading or looking upon somwhat, Nature has framed two other
Muscles, which are termed Oblique, because they direct the Oblique motion of the
Eye, which is none at al, neither can the Muscles themselves perform
such a Motion in regard of their Original and Insertion, which ought to be contrary
and opposite.
The Obliquus
Major.
The Musculus Obliquus a Major, greater Oblique Muscle, or Trochleator, con-
teins in it a wonderful peice of Workmanship, which is found in Mankind, detect-
ed by Rondeletius and observed in some great Fishes: for taking its rise from the
Cavity of the Orbita, it produces a thin Tendon, which being drawn through a
Transverse b Gristle affixed unto the bone, by and beneath the Glandula Lachry-
malis or weeping Kernel, is after widened and spread out upon the Eye.
The Obliquus
Minor.
The Obliquus c Minor drawn out externally by the greater Corner, and rowled
athwart about the Globe of the Eye, comes as far as the Tendon of the greater Ob-
lique Muscle, that the Nervous productions of both the Oblique Muscles might meet
together to draw back and fix the Eye towards the Nose, that from both the Eyes
beholding, one Pyramid Line may pass unto the visible Object.
a T.19.f.1.AB. b T.15.f.1.FF. c T.19.f.3.A.4.5.A. d f.3.
4.5. e f.3,4,5.C. f f.3,4,5.D. 
a T.19.f.3. and 4.F. b f.3. and 4.G. c f.3. and 4.E. 
Chap. 11. Muscles of the external Ear.
Of the exter-
nal Ear.
THey are common and proper, which are Seldom moved, because the Ear it
self is rarely moved. They are therefore rather marks and signs of Muscles,
than true ones, such as are found in Brute Beasts which move their Ears.
The common.
And therefore a portion of the frontal Muscle reaching unto the Ear, a portion of
the Cutaneous or Skin Muscle drawn unto the Pulp of the Ear, and a Part of
the Occipital or after Head Muscle, stretched out behind the Ears, do make the
common Muscles.
One proper.
There is only one proper Muscle, which lurks under the Ligament
of the Ear, it arises from the Mammillary Process, and is inserted into the Root of
the Ear.
Internal Ears
First
Second
The later Anatomists do make reckoning of two Muscles appertaining to the in-
ternal Ear, one of which is a external in the auditory passage or hole of the Ear,
which draws back the Membrane of the Ear: the other is within the b Concba, fa-
stened to the Mallet or Hammer.
Ee 2 In 


220 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
In Bruts the Muscles of the internal Ear are more evident than in
Men.
a T.19.f.3. and 4.F. b f.3. and 4. G. c f.3. and 4.E. a T.20.f.5.A.
b T.20.f.5.CC. 
Chap. 12. Muscles of the Nose.
One Common.
THey are common and proper.
The common is only one, being the upper portion of that Orbicular Muscle
which compasses the c Lips, which draws the Nose downwards, when the upper Lip
is drawn down.
Six proper.
Two d Muscles do lift up the Nose, on each side one, drawn from the space be-
tween the Eye-brows and fastened to the bone of the Nose, and so carried to the
wings or battlements thereof; the motion of these Muscles, when they act
together is easily perceived in the drawing up and criping or wrinkling of the
Nose.
In Persons that are largly Nosed, two e little Muscles are scurd, spred upon the
extream Gristles of the Nose, which do widen the Laps of the Nose, without any
elevation or lifting up.
Within the Nostrils under the Succingent Coat, there lies lurking a little Muscle
of a Membranous Nature, which does stick to the internal Parts as far as the Laps
of the Nose, it is said to contract the Nostrils.
c T.15.f.1.NN. d T.15.f.1.G. e T.15.f.1.I.
Chap. 13. Muscles of the Lips.
SEeing there are two Lips, each has its Muscles, and there are two common to
both.
The first of
the proper ones.
The upper Lip is drawn upwards by a a Muscle which taking its rise from the hol-
low of the Jaw, beneath the Cheek bone, descends obliquely or slanting to the up-
per Lip.
The second.
It is moved downwards by a b Muscle brought from the middest of the lower Jaw,
into the said Lip.
The third.
The nether Lip is drawn upwards by a Muscle, which being drawn out of the
lower Parts of the Cheek bone, oces end side waies upon the nether Lip.
The fourth.
It is moved downwards by a c Muscle, which Springing out of the Chin, is insert-
ed into the middle Lip.
The common
ones.
The common Muscles are the lateral ones, which do draw the Lips to the right or
left side
1 Zygomaticus.
The first is called d Zygomaticus, being somwhat long and thin, and arising from
the bone Zygoma, it is terminated in the meeting of each Lip.
2 Buccinator.
The other common one, is vulgarly termed c Buccinator or the Trumpeter,
it were more rightly called the Bucco the Cheek driver, because it stirs the Cheeks,
whil it drives the meat this way and that way, in the action of chewing.
It arises from the top of the Gums or the bones in that place near the farthest
grinders, and ends in each Lip. It is loose and slack, that it may give way inwards,
and perform its Office of forcing, as the Muscles of the belly do; and that it may
give way, when the Mouth gapes wide.
Sphincter of
the Mouth
There is added a round f Muscle, which makes the proper substance of the Lips,
by the service whereof the Mouth, is drawn together , the Lips are opened,
go inwards, and swel. It might wel be called the Sphincter of the Mouth, or the
Pylorus.
a T.15.f.1.K. b f.1.M. c f.1.N. d f.1.I. e f.1.O. f f.1.
NN.
Chap. 


Chap. 15. Of the Muscles of the Os Hyoides. 221
Chap. 14. Muscles of the lower Jaw.
The Temporal
THey are on either side six. The g Temporal Muscle, being a very strong one
lifts up the Jaw. It arises from the whol Cavity of the Temples, and being
carried along under the Os Zygoma, it is by a very strong nervous Tendon inserted
into the sharp a process of the Jaw-bone.
Pterygoideus
Internus.
This Muscle is assisted by the Pterygoideus b Internus, arising from the Cavity of
the Apophysis Pterygoides, and terminated at the corner of the inferior Jaw. It is
called by Galen Masseter Internus.
Digastricus.
The Jaw is drawn down wards by the Digastricus or Twi-Belly'd Muscle, and
the Musculus Latus or Broad Muscle.
The Digastricus or Twi-Belly, being in the c middle Nervous and fleshy at the
End, springs from the Apophysis Styloides, and being in the Middle reflexed
about the Stylo-Ceratoides, it is inserted into the Chin, under the bending of the
Jaw.
The Latus.
The Musculus d Latus or Broad-Belly, arises from the upper Part of the Brest-
bone, the Clavicula and Shoulder point, and cleaves firmly to the Basis of the in-
ferior Jaw, muffling the Neck and whol Face ; and by reason of the afore-said Ad-
hesion, it is said to draw the Jaw downwards.
Pterygoideus
Externus.
Pterygoideus e Externus, the external wing fashiond Muscle forces the Jaw
forwards, which being swelled does lightly drive the Jaw-bone forewards: which
happens in the overshooting of the Jaw-bone, when the lower Teeth are above the
upper Teeth.
Masseter.
The Jaw is plucked about this way and that way by the Masseter or Chaw Mus-
cles being in its Original Twi-Headed, one of whose heads arises from the Os Zygo-
ma, the other beneath the said bone; each of which being furnished with divers Fibres
which Cross one another, is inserted into the Corner of the inferior Jaw. It may
easily be divided into two Parts.
Chap. 15. Of the Muscles of the Os Hyoides.
BEcause the bone termed g Hyoides, is placed in the Neck to a prop and founda-
tion for the Tongue and Larynx, it has obtained Muscles as wel as Ligaments, by
which it is held suspended, that it might be moved with the Tongue and
Larynx.
And therefore its Muscles are common to the Tongue and the Larynx.
The bone Hyoides has ten Muscles, on each side five, for I add the Muscle termed
Myloglossus (which is commonly attributed unto the Tongue) and I cal it Mylo-
hyoideus, because, it does not any waies touch the Tongue.
g T.15.f.1.PP.f.2.AA. b T.15.f.2.aa. b f.2.DD. c f.1.TT.
f.2.CC. | d T.10.f.1.JJ.T.15.f.2.F. e T.15.f.2.EEEE. f f.1.S.
f.2.BB. g T.13.f.11. and 12. ABC. &c. 
The Genio-
hyoideus.
The Os Hyoides is lifted up by the Muscle a Geniohyoideus, it arises from with-
in the Chin and is inserted into the Basis of the Hyoides.
Mylohyoideus
Assistant hereunto is the Muscle b Mylohyoideus, it arises from within the Jaw in
the Quarters of the Grinding Teeth, and reaches to the Basis of the Bone
Hyoides.
Sternohyoideus
The bone Hyoides is drawn downwards by the Muscle c Sternohyideus which
springs from the top of the Brest bone, and drawn out upon the Wesand is inserted
into the Basis or bottom, of the said bone Hyoides.
Stylocerathy-
oideus.
The Muscle c Stylocerathyoideus, from the Apophysis Styloides is carried
into the Horns of the Os Hyoides. CHAP. 


222 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Chap, 16, Muscles of the Tongue.
Genyoglossus.
THe Tongue is forced forward by the Muscle e Genyoglossus, which growing out
of the inner side of the Chin, is terminated to the Tongues Root.
Basiglossus.
It is drawn back by the Muscle f Basiglossus which takes its rise at the Basis of
Os Hyoides, and is carryed unto the Root of the Tongue.
Styloglossus.
It is forced sidewaies to the right and left, by the Muscle g Stylogossus, which
taking its beginning at the Apophysis Styloides, is extended into the middle, very
near of the Tongue.
a T.13.f.13.BB. b f.4.EE. c f.13.DD. d f.1.EE. e f.13.
CC. f f.14.BB. g f.14.DD.
Chap, 17, Muscles of the Larynx.
THe whol body of the Larynx consisting of five Gristles, is moved upwards and
downwards.
Hyothyroideus.
It is drawn upwards by the Muscle a Hyothyroideus, which arising from the
Basis of the Hyoides bone, is inserted into the external middlemost of the
Thyroides.
Bronchius.
The Muscle b Bronchius draws it downwards, which taking its rise, from the
inner side of the Brest bone, and stretched out upon the Channel of the Aspera
Arteria or Wesand, it ascends unto the the Basis of Thyroides.
Two only of the Gristles of the Larynx are movable, viz. The c Thyroides
and the d Arytænoides, and to procure their motion they have little Muscles, which
spring out of the immovable Gristle Cricoides.
Cricothyroi-
deus Anticus.
The Thyroides is dilated by the Muscle Cricothyroideus Anticus, which begins
at the outter forepart of Cricoides, and ends within the internal sides of
Thyroides.
Lateralis.
The said Thyroides is contracted by the Muscle f Cricothyroideus Lateralis,
which springing from the lateral part of Cricoides, is inserted externally into the
sides of Thyroides.
Thyroarytæ-
neideus.
The Arytænoides is opened by the Muscle g Thyroarytænoideus, which springing
from the inner and foremost part of the Thyroides, ends into the sides of the
Arytenoides: or rather it takes its rise from the Cricoides and Thyroides, being
placed between both.
Arytænoideus.
The Arytænoides is shut by one only Muscle called Arytænoideus, which
a compasses about and shuts the Arytæno des, like the Sphincter Muscle, and also
with its Basis it Streightens the Glottis, for to make the voyce sound the better.
The Epiglottis has i no Muscles to lift it up and shut it down in Mankind, as it
has in Brute Beasts.
a T.13.f.8.BB. b f.8.CC. c f.1, 2.8.A. d f.5. and 6. e f.3.
and 4. f.9. and 10. DD. f f.9.CC. g f.9.BB. h f.10.BB. i f.9.
and 10.A. 
Chap, 18, Muscles of the Pharynx.
THe Pharynx which is the beginnig of Oesophagus or the Gullet, has obtained
from Nature seven Muscles, of which three have fellows and the fourth is without
companion namely that which is termed Oesophagæus.
Spheno-Pha-
ringæus
The first is a Spheno-Pharingæus, which arises from a certain sharp
point of the Sphenoides near the Styloides, and bending a little down-
wards, it ends in the sides of the Jaws, that it may draw the Pharynx
upwards.
The 


Chap. 20. Muscles of the Head. 223
Cephalopha-
ryngæus.
The second is b Cephalo-Pharyngæus, which arises from that part where the
Head is Joyned to the Neck, and descending is spread out into the Pharynx, and
seemes to make the very coat thereof.
Stylopharyn-
gæus.
The third is c Stylo-Pharyngæus, which arises from the Apophysis Styloides,
and is implanted into the side of the Pharynx, to serve to widen the same.
Oesophagæus.
The Muscle Oesophageus, does draw together and close the d Pharynx, which
growing out of one side of Thyroides, and compassing round the hinder part of
Oesophagus, is implanted into the other side of Thyroides ; or being outwardly
fastened to both sides of Thyroides, it draws together the beginning of the Oeso-
phagus and purses the same like the Sphincter Muscle of Anus.
a T.3.f.2. and 3. BB. b f.2. and 3. AA. c f.2. and 3. CC. d f.2.
and 3. DD. 
Chap. 19. Muscles of the Gargareon, Uvula, or
Mouth Palat.
THe Uvula has two Muscles e on either side.
Pterystaphy-
linus externus.
The Muscle Ptery-Staphylinus f externus, taking its Rise from the upper
Jaw under the last grinding Tooth, ends in a smal Tendon g which passes through a
chink ingraven on the upper side of the Pterygoides: and there being turned back,
as it were through a pulley, it is inserted into the sides of the Uvula.
Internus.
The Ptery-Staphylinus h internus, cast out of the nether part of the inner Skirt
of the Pterygoides, it has a peculiar movable Gristle ordained for its original, and
ascending according to the Longitude of the internal Wing or Skirt of the Pterygoi-
des, it ends at the Uvula.
e T.13.f.15. A. f f.15. BB. g f.15. bb. h f.15.CC. 
Chap. 20. Muscles of the Head.
THe Muscles of the Head are proper or Common.
The Common are those which move the Neck and Head both ; such as are
the Muscles of the Neck: the proper are such as move the Head, the Neck remain-
ing unmoved.
Now the proper are fourteen, on each side seven, six of which are placed in the
hinder part.
Caput fleetens.
Mastoideus.
There is one only in the Fore part, which is called a Mastoideus, and
bows the Head ; it arises from the top of the Brest bone and middest
of the Clavicula, and is obliquely inserted into the Apophysis Ma-
stoides.
Somtimes in the forepart of the Neck, there is another Muscle next the Long
Muscle, which helps the Mostoideus to bend the Head: and I have many times
shewed this Muscle, and somtimes I have seen it wanting.
Extenders.
Six Muscles do extend the Head: of which two are large, the other
four smal.
Splenius.
The first of the larg ones is called b Splenius ; which arising from the sharp points
of the five uppermost Vertebra's of the back, and the four lowest of the Neck, it is
inserted into the hinder part of the Head.
Complexus
There comes the other large Muscle to assist the former, and is called c Complexus.
It springs from the transverse or overthwart Eminencies or Apophyses of the fore-
said Vertebra's, and is terminated in the after part of the Head.
Rectus major
The lesser Muscles are some straight, others crooked, and of both these, some
are greater, others less.
The 


The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
The greater d straight Muscles, arising from the Spine or point of the second
spondile, Vertebra or Knuckle, are inserted into the after side of the Head.
Rectus minor
Under them the e two lesser arising from the hinder part of the first Vertebra, are
terminated in the after side of the Head.
Obliquus mi-
jor.
Obliguus ma-
jor.
The greater a Oblique ones do arise from the spine or point of the second Vertebra
and reach unto the overthwart Eminence or Apophysis of the first Vertebra ; and
from the same place the Lesser b Oblique or crooked ones do arise and are termina-
ted in the Occiput, or after Part of the Head.
a T.14.f.2. KK. f.3. H.f.4. FF. b f.2. HH. c f.2.II. f.3. EE.
d f.3. and 4. II. e f.3.i.f.4. KK. a T.14.f.3.L.f.4. GG. b T.14.
f.3.K.f.4.HH. 
Chap. 21. Muscles of the Neck.
The Neck
benders.
THe Neck has eight, on each side four, being placed before and behind, to bend
the Neck and extend the same again.
The Longus.
It is bent by the Musculus Longus and the Muscle Scalenus or the uneven-
sided Muscle.
The c Long Muscle being situate under the Oesophagus, springs out of the
body of the third Vertebra or Knuckle bone of the back, and ascends laterally con-
nexed or knit unto al the bodies of the Vertebra’s, ending into the former part of
the first Vertebra.
The Scalenus.
The Scalenus arising from the d first Rib of the Chest, it is inwardly ingrafted
by oblique Fibres into al the overthwart or transverse Eminencies of the Neck-
bones : through it the Vessels are drawn, which are to be distributed into the
Arm.
The Extenders
Spinatus
The Neck is extended or stretched out by two Muscles.
The Spinatus Muscle e arises from the Roots of the seven uppermost Vertebra’s
of the Chest and five of the Neck; and is inserted into the Spina or point of the
second Vertebra of the Neck.
Transversa-
rius.
The Muscle Transversarius, arising from the f transverse Apophyses or Eminen-
cies of the six uppermost Vertebra’s of the back, is planted externally into al the
transverse Eminencies of the Neck.
c T.13.f.18. AA. d T.13.f.18. BB. e T.14.f.4.DD. f T.14.
f.4. EE. 
Chap. 22. Muscles of the Shoulder-blades.
Shoulder
blads lifter.
THey are four in Number. The Muscle Levator g Proprius, does lift up the
Shoulder blade. It arises from the transverse or overthwart Apophyses or E-
minencies of the second, third and fourth Vertebra of the upper part of the Neck,
and ends in the uppermost Corner of the Shoulder-blade.
Trapezius.
The Muscle Trapezius a arises from the hinder part of the Head, at the Points
of five Vertebra's of the Neck, and of eight or nine of the uppermost Vertebra’s of
the Chest, and is inserted into the Basis of the Shoulder blad and the
Spina, as far as the shoulder tip. It causes divers motions according to
the original and direction of the Fibres ; that is, according to their Rise and
insertion.
Serratus minor
The Shoulder-blad is drawn forwards by one only Muscle termed Serratus
b Minor, which arises out of the four upper most Ribs, and ends in the Cora-
coides.
Rhomboides
It is drawn backwards by the c Rhomboides or lozing fashioned, or diamand
fashond Muscle, which arises from the three points of the lower Vertebraes of the
Neck, 


Chap. 24. Muscles of the Cubit. 225
Neck, and the three points of the uppermost Vertebraes of the Chest, and is in-
serted into the external Basis of the Shoulder-blade.
Although by its own weight it return to the natural Scituation : yet a d portion
of Musculus Latissimus, running out unto the Arm, cleaves by a loop to the lower
Corner of the Shoulder-Blade, and is said to draw the Shoulder-Blade down-
wards.
Chap. 23. Muscles of the Arm.
Arm lifters.
THey are nine. The Muscle Deltoides and Supra Spinatus do move it up-
wards.
Deltoides
The Deltoides e does arise from the middest of the Clavicula, the Shoulder tip,
the whol spine of the Shoulder-blade, and is carried out unto the middle of the
Arm.
Supraspinatus
The Supraspinatus being thrust into the Cavity above the Spina or sharp point
of the Scapula, and being conveighed under the Shoulder tip, is inserted into the
Neck of the Arm.
The depressers
Latissimus.
The Latissimus and Rotundus Major, do move the Arm downwards: the Latis-
simus g springs from the sharp prominencies of the Os Sacrum, of the Vertebraes
of the Loins, and of nine Vertebraes of the Back: it is inserted into a part of the
Arm, not far below the Head.
Rotundus ma-
jor.
It is assisted by Rotundus a Major or the larger round Muscle, which arises from
the whol lower Rib of the Shoulder-blade, and ends very near in the middle of the
Arm.
The drawers
to.
The Pectoralis.
The Pectoralis and Coracoidæus draw it forward. The Pectoralis arises out
of the first sixt and seventh true Ribs, the Brest-bone and more than the middle
of the Clavis; and it is inserted by an acute Tendon into the middle of the Arm
between the Deltoides and the Biceps.
Coracoidæus.
The Muscle Coracoidæus c springs out of the Apophysis Coracoides, and ends
very near in the middle of the Arm; it draws the Arm towards the left Shoulder.
Drawers back.
The Arm is moved backwards by three Muscles, Infraspinatus, Rotundus
Minor, and Immersus.
Infraspinatus
The Infraspinatus arising in the middle between d the lesser round Muscle and
the Spina, ends into the Neck of the Arm which is muffles about.
Rotundus
minor.
The Rotundus e minor begins at that Cavity which appears under the lower Rib
of the Shoulder-blade, and ends in the Neck of the Arm.
Immersus
Immersus or the f Subscapularis does possess the hollow and inward Part of the
Omoplata or Shoulder-blade, and is carryed out unto the Neck.
The three last Muscles which act al at once, do carry about the Arm upwards
with a sudden motion slanting outwards, so that the motion seems to be doubled.
Chap. 24. Muscles of the Cubit.
THe Cubit consists of two Bones, which as they are Knit together by divers Ar-
ticulations, so do they perform divers motions.
The Cubitus guides the motions of the bending and extending. The Radius
directs the motions of Pronation and Supination, and therefore they have proper
Muscles for these motions.
Cubit benders
The Cubit is bended by two Muscles Scituate in the internal Part of the Arm viz.
The Biceps and Brachiæus internus.
Biceps
The Biceps arises from a a double beginning, the one of which from the extremity
of the Cavity of the Glenois is conveyghed through the cleft of the Arm, the other
taking its Rise from the Apophysis Coracoides, they are after united and make one
Ff Tendon, 


226 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Tendon, which is inserted into the inner Part of the Radius, there where it
bunches out.
Brachiæus in-
ternus.
The Brachiæus b Internus, being placed beneath the Biceps, takes its rise from
the middle of Os Brachij, unto which it firmly adheres, and is terminated between
the Radius and the Cubitus, in that Part where they are fastened together.
Cubit exten-
ders
The Cubit is extended by four Muscles, Viz. Longus, Brevis Brachiæus
externus, and Angoneus or Cubitalis.
Longus
Longus, the long Muscle c arises from the lower Rib of the Shoulder-blade near
the Neck, where it has a peculiar Cavity, and it is terminated into the Elbow.
Brevis
Brevis, the short Muscle, d springs from the hinder Neck of the Arm and ends
likewise at the Elbow. Both those Muscles do make up one strong and sinewy
Tendon.
Brachiæus
externus.
For the third Muscle Galen in the first Book and last chapter of his Anatomical
Administrations, reckons a lump of Flesh which is confounded with the two fore-
going Muscles, and inserted into the same place. I cal it Brachiæus externus, because
being spred upon the outside of the Arm, it is placed beneath the other two last
mentioned. In the same place Galen does acquaint us, that any man may accurate-
ly separate these three Muscles following the rectitude of the Fibres.
Angoneus.
The fourth Muscle called e Angoneus, is Scituate in the bending of the Cubit on
the hinder side, which is called Agcoon or Ancoon and answers to the Musculus
Poplitæus. It arises out of the lower and hinder Part of the Arme, being Scituate
between the Radius and Cubitus : and it is inserted by a sinewy Tendon into the
side of the Cubitus, a Thumbs length below. Somtimes it cleaves so fast to the
Fleshy end of Brachiæus Externus, that there is no apparent difference to be dis-
cerned between them; and then it is Judged to be a portion of the Brachiæus ex-
ternus, extended so far as to that place.
Chap. 25. Muscles of the Radius.
The Radius its
THe Radius is bowed downwards by the two internal Muscles, so called be-
cause they are placed in the inner Part of the Cubit; and one is called Infe-
rior Pronator, and the other Superior Pronator.
Pronator su-
perior.
The Superior being a a round Muscle, springs form the inner Part of the inner
knob of the Arm, and ends with a Membranous Tendon, obliquely carried unto
the Radius.
Pronator in-
ferior.
The Inferior Pronator b Quadratus, is carried overthwart from the lower Part
of the Cubit unto the lower Part of the Radius, and is thereinto inserted, be-
ing altogether Fleshy. Also it Knits the Ulna to the Radius, as if it were a Li-
gament.
The Radius is drawn down backwards by two external Muscles.
Supinator
Longus.
The Longus c Supinator, springs out of the top of the Arm, above the external
Knob, and being drawn out upon the Radius, it is inserted on the inside of the
lower Epiphysis thereof, being fleshy.
Supinator
Brevis.
Brevis Supinator, arising out of the d outside of the inner Knob, is carried obli-
quely very near to the middle of the Radius, and turning back does straitly com-
prehend the same.
a T.22.f.1. and 3. D. b T.10.f.1.A.B.T.12.f.1.E. c T.22.f.1.H.
d T.22.f.3.B. e T.22.f.2. and 3. C. f T.22.f.1.B. 
a T.22.f.1.G. d T.22.f.1.II.f.2.B. c T.22.f.3.E. d T.22.f.3.
F. e T.22.f.3.a.f.4.G. 
a T.22.f.2. C. b T.22.f.2.D. c T. 22.f.4.E. d T.22.f.4.F.
CHAP.


Chap. 27. Muscles of the Palme of the Hand. 227
Chap. 26. Muscles of the Wrist.
THe Wrist is bended, stretched forth and laterally moved by two Muscles, the
bender and extender of each side, acting both together.
Wrist-benders
It is bended by two inward Muscles, of which the one may be termed Cubiteus,
the other Radieus, by reason of their Scituation.
Cubiteus In-
ternus.
The Cubiteus a internus takes its rise from the inner part of the inner Knob of the
Arm, and being fastened unto the Cubit and to the fourth Wrist bone of the first
Rank, it is drawn out aloft.
Radieus In-
ternus.
The Radieus b Internus, having its original in the same place, and being stretch-
ed out upon the Radius, is inserted into that bone of the Metacarpium, which
sustaines the fore Finger.
Wrist extenders
The Wrist is extended by two external Muscles, which hold the same way with
the internal, and are therefore called by the same names.
Radieus Ex-
ternus.
The Radieus c externus or Bicornis, takes its rise from that bony point which is
in the Arm above the Knob thereof, and resting upon the Radius, it sends forth a
double Tendon, the one of which is inserted into the Wrist bone lying under the
Radius, the other into that bone of the Metacarpium which is seated under the
fore Finger.
Some wil have this Muscle to be a double one, because it appears wholly distinct
in its original and insertion. For that which is carryed to the Wrist grows out of
the bony point of the Arm : the other arises out of the external Knob of the Arm
and extends the Metacarpium with the Wrist.
It has its Tendons separated and inclosed in peculiar cases and sheaths, which
are of a sinewy Gristly substance, without the Ring fashiond Ligament of the
Wrist.
Cubiteus ex-
ternus.
The Cubiteus d externus, arising from the outward Apophysis of the Arm, and
being carryed along the Cubit, it inserts its Tendon into the fourth bone of the
Metacarpium, Scituate beneath the little Finger.
a T.22.f.1.N. b T.22.f.1.M. c T.22.f.3.H. d T.22.f.3.G. 
Chap. 27. Muscles of the Palme of the Hand.
IN the Palm or Hollow of the Hand are found two notable Muscles, which are
termed the Palmar Muscles, the one of which is short, the other long.
Long Palmar
Muscle.
The long Palmar Muscle growing out of the a inner side of the knob of the
Arm, is spred into the hollow of the Hand, as far as the first Articulation of the
Fingers.
In its original it is Fleshy and presently after lessens it self into a smal Tendon,
which passing above the Ring-shap'd Ligament of the Wrist, and not included with
the rest of the Tendons, it is widened into a sinewy Membrane, which is so firmly
fastened unto the Skin (to make the sence of feeling the more quick, and that
the Hand may hold things the faster) that it is a very hard thing to sever it from the
Skin.
Short Palmar
Muscle.
Besides the Palmar Muscle in the hollow of the Hand, a Certain peice of Flesh
four Square of a Thumbs breadth is found upon the Ring-shaped Ligament, which
is redder then the Flesh, between the Thumb and the middle Finger, and is somtimes
single and somtimes double, looking like two Muscles: and being carryed under
and implicated with the Palmar Muscle, it seems to take its rise from the Root of
the Fleshy part of the Hand called Thenar, and to be inserted into that same eigth
bone of the Wrist, which is placed out of order.
Ff 2 Its


228 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Its Office is to hollow the Hand and so to make Diogeneß his Dish to drink out
of, together with the Muscles of the Thumb and the Hypothenar. This Muscle
shal be named Palmaris brevis ; the short Palm Muscle.
a T.22.f.1.K. 
Chap. 28. Muscles of the Fingers.
Four Finger
benders.
THe Fingers are bended, stretched out, and moved sidewaies.
There are two Muscles which bend the four Fingers, viz. The Musculus
Sublimis, and the Musculus Profundus.
Sublimis
The Sublimis arises from the inner, b part of the inner knob of the Arm, and pro-
duces foure a Tendons about the Wrist, which are terminated at the second Articula-
tion of the Fingers, and have holes bored in them, to give passage to the Tendons of
the Musculus Profundus.
Profundus.
The Profundus springs out of the b upper parts of the Cubitus and Radius and
being c divided into four, it is carryed through the holes of the Tendons of the Sub-
limis, unto the third Articulation of the Fingers.
Do but observe the Industry of Nature, who to the end the Fingers might be
rightly bended, on the inside according to their length, she has framed a Channel of
most hard Membranes resembling Ligaments, which Channel does straitly infold
the Tendons of the Musculus Profundus and Sublimis, least in the bending of the
Fingers the Tendons being bowed should be drawn out of their place, and like
ropes rise up and lift up the Skin.
And although the Tendons be closely comprehended within the said Channel,
yet have they their free course and passage, because the Channel is smeared with a
fat aud Oyly Humor.
Lumbricales
Out of the very Tendons of Musculus profundus by the Wrist, do arise the
four d Lumbricales, being firmly fastened thereunto, and carried to the first Arti-
culation of every Finger, where they unite themselves to the Interosseans.
Extenders
The Muscles which extend the Fingers are Common and proper.
Extensor
Magnus.
I cal them common, which serve the four Fingers, such as the Extensor magnus
Digitorum [the great extender of the Fingers] or which beside ex-
tension, do cause other motions, as the Lumbracales and Interossei joyned to-
gether.
The proper are they which belong and are attributed only to certain Fingers, as
the Extensor Indicis [stretcher out of the fore Finger] and the Extensor Auri-
cularis [stretcher out of the little Finger.
Magnus Extensor Digitorum, the great a Finger stretcher arises out of the
outward Knob of the Arm, and by the b Wrist is cloven into four c Tendons, which
end into the two lower Joynts of each Finger.
Side way mo-
vers.
The Fingers are moved sidewaies, which motion is commonly termed adduction
and Abduction.
Interosseans
The Adduction or drawing to, is when they are drawn towards the Thumb;
Abduction or drawing from, is when they are moved sidewaies from the Thumb.
And this motion is performed by the Interossean Muscles: of which there are
three d External and as many c Internal, spred in the spaces between the Bones of
the Metacarpium.
They arise from the upper Parts of the said bones near the Wrist, and in the first
Internodeum or space between the Joynts, with a very smal Tendon, they creep
side longs over the three bones of the Fingers, until they come unto the Roots of the
Nailes; in the former and upper Part whereof, the Tendons, being first united are
terminated. And therefore the Interossean Muscles acting together, do keep the
Fingers both stretched out, and one close to another, just as we hold our hands when
we swim.
Moreover 


Chap. 29. Muscles of the Thumb. 229
Proper.
Moreover you shal observe two Muscles, which are as it were external interos-
seans, which are spred without, upon the first and fourth bone of the Metacarpi-
um, the one of which called f Hypothenar, is Peculiar to the little Finger, and
may be divided into two.
Abductor mi-
nimi.
It arises from the third and fourth Wrist bone of the second Rank, and is side-
waies inserted into the Joynts of the same Finger, to draw the same towards the
outside.
Abductor In-
dicis.
The other belongs unto the fore Fingers, and lying beneath the Antithenar, it
it grows out of the inner Part of the first bone of the Thumb and is inserted into the
Joints of the Fore Finger, to draw the same unto the Thumb. So that it may be
called Musculus Abductor Indicis.
Proper ex-
tenders.
Besides the Tendon of the common extender, it has a Peculiar extensive Mus-
cle, which may be termed Indicator the g Pointer, because this Muscle serves the
Finger to point withal.
Of the fore
Finger.
It arises from the middle and external Part of the Cubit, and is inserted by a
forked Tendon into the second Articulation: and the other Tendon grows together
with the Tendon of the greater extender.
Of the little
Finger.
There is a Proper extender ascribed to the little Finger. It arises out of the up-
per Part of the Radius being seated between the Cubitus and the Radius, and it
is with a double Tendon planted into the little Finger on the outside
thereof, but with another tendon it is mingled with the Tendon of the greate ex-
tender.
Mean while you shal observe the Lumbrical or worm Muscles, which are somtimes
three, other whils four, seldom five: which though they are implicated with the
Tendons of Musculus Profundus, and are constantly thought to arise there from;
yet I conceive, they are bred out of the sinewy and orbicular a Ligament of the
Wrist, that it might have a firm and stable Original.
b T.22.f.1.O.f.5.A. 
a T.22.f.5.aaaa. b T.22.f.1.P.f.5.B. c T.22.f.5.bbbb. d T.22
f.5.CCCC. 
a T.22.f.3.K. b f.3.e. c f.3.ffff. d f.4.IIII. e f.2.ffff. f f.2.
g.h.f.t.S. g f.3.I. 
a T.22.f.3.ζ. 
Chap. 29. Muscles of the Thumb.
Thumb Muscles
THe Thumb has peculiar Muscles, whereby it alone is bended, extended and
moved sidewaies.
Extenders
It is Extended by two long Muscles. One of which arising out of the b upper
and outward side of the Cubit, goes up upon the Radius, and being carried beyond
the Wrist, it is inserted into the first and second Joynt of the Thumb, by a double
and somtimes a triple Tendon.
The other arises from the c same Part of the Cubit, but lower, near the Wrist,
and is inserted into the third Joynt of the Thumb.
Bender.
The Thumb is bended by d one Muscle, which growing out of the Inside of the
Cubit, it carryed unto the second and third Joynt thereof.
Lateral mo-
vers.
It is moved sidewais by two Muscles.
b T.22.f.3.M. c T.22.f.3.L. d T.22f.2.D. 
The Thenar a arises from the inside of the Wrist, beneath the
Thumb, and is inserted into the second Joynt of the Thumb, to draw it from the
Fingers.
The other Muscle termed b Antithenar, draws the Thumb towards the fore
Finger. 


230 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Finger. It grows out of the external side of the first bone of the Metacarpi-
um which sustains the Thumb, and is inserted into the first Joynt of the said
Thumb.
It is drawn to the four other Fingers by a c Muscle, which being Joyned unto,
and seated beneath the Thenar, grows out of the three lower bones of the Metacar-
pium, and is inserted into the second Joynt of the Thumb. It may be called Hy-
pothenar Pollicis, because it is spread out under the Thenar.
a T.22.f.4.K. b T.22.f.1.Q.f.2.F. c T.22.f.1.R f.2.G. 
Chap. 30. Muscles of the Chest
THe Muscles of the Chest are Proper or Common.
Those are said to be Proper, which particularly and properly belong unto
the Chest; the Common are such as being destinated to some certain Part, yet do
assist the Brest with their help, as Auxliaries, such as are the upper Muscles of the
Shoulder blade.
Which widen.
The Chest.
The Chest is widened or lifted up by five Muscles. Three of which are before
viz. Subclavius, Serratus major, and the Triangularis or Pectoralis internus.
One is hinderly Scituate viz. Posticus Serratus superior: and the fist is the
External Intercostal.
Subclavius
The Subclavius arises from the d inner part of the Clavicula, near the Shoulder
tip, being of a Fleshy substance, and is inserted into the first Rib, near the Brest
bone. d T.10.f.1.F. 
Serratus major
The Serratus a Major, reaches from the inner Basis of the Shoulder blade, unto
six, and somtimes seven Ribs, of which the five lowest are true Ribs, and the two
uppermore are bastard ones.
Serratus Po-
sticus Superior
The Serratus b Posticus Superior, being Scituate beneath the Romboides,
grows out of the sharp points or spines of the three lower Vertebras of the Neck,
and the first spine of the Back; and ends into the three upper Ribs,and somtime the
fourth.
External In-
tercostals.
The eleven c External Intercostals, hold the place of one Muscle, which is car-
ried Obliquely forward from the lower side of the upper Rib, into the upper side of
the lower Rib. Unto those Muscles which widen the Chest, we must add the Di-
aphragme or Midrif.
Triangular
Muscle.
The Triangular Muscle, growing out of the middle and inner Part of the Brest-
bone, is inserted into the Gristles of the lower Ribs, as far as the third or fourth
bastard Ribbs.
Contracters.
Three Muscles there are which Contract the Brest, the Sacro-Lumbus, Inter-
costalis internus, and Serratus Posticus inferior.
Sacrolumbus.
The Sacro-Lumbus, takes its original from the Os d Sacrum and the Spiny pro-
ductions of the Loins, and is terminated into the upper Ribs, near unto their Roots;
bestowing upon each Rib a double Tendon or Tendinous handle or claspe, an in-
ternal and an external; and therefore it serves both to depress the Ribs and to raise
the Back-bone, when it is bowed and bended forward.
Internal In-
tercostals.
The Eleven internal Intercostals, which fil up the spaces between the Ribs, are
reckoned to be but one Muscle. It is carryed obliquely from the nether Rib to the
upper more. It has Fibres contrary to those of the external, cross wise inter-
sected.
Serratus po-
sticus inferior.
The Serratus Posticus f inferior, growing out of the spines of the three lowest
Vertebraes of the Back, and the first of the Loins, is Terminated into three or fower
of the lower Ribs.
This same Serraticus Posticus inferior, is just, opposite to the Serraticus Posti-
cus superior, and both of them by a broad and Membranous Aponeurosis, do so
grow together, that they serve instead of a band to bind and keep together the
hinder Muscles of the Back-bone.
Others 


Chap. 32. Muscles of the Back and Loyns, &c. 231
Others do ad eight Muscles of the Belly, because more Muscles are requisite to
cause violent Exspiration.
a T.10.f.1.CD. b T.14.f.2.E. c T.10.f.1.GG. d T.14.f.1.LL.
f.3.BB. e T.10.f.1.HH. f T.14.f.2.FG. 
Chap. 31. Of the Midrif.
Use of the
Midrif.
THe Diaphragme or Midrif is an a admirable kind of Muscle, both in regard of
its composition and continual Action, whiles it does night and day incessantly
fan the Natural and Vital Parts, serving nevertheles as a Wal of partition to sever
the one from the other.
Its Original.
It arises from the Circumference of the bastard Ribs, through which it is oblique-
ly drawn about, as far as to the Vertebraes of the Loins: the end or Sinewy Part
thereof, is in the Nervous Centre.
Its Motion.
When we draw in the Air, it is contracted and bent, and when it draws the lower
Ribs downwards and of convex becomes straight and even. When we blow the
Air out, it is by help of the Mediastinum drawn upwards, and of straight is made
Convex or bunching like the surface of a Bucklar.
a T.10.f.1.II.f.6. and 7. the whol.
Chap. 32. Muscles of the Back and Loyns, wherewith the
Back-bone is moved.
The Back pro-
perly is not mo-
ved.
THe Back is not moved, because of the Ribs interposed, and the Penury of Muscles
both internal and external; it has indeed Muscles spred upon the outside thereof,
but they are for another use. So that between the Neck and the Loyns it remaines
immovable, whiles the extream Parts are moved.
Now the motion is made in the last Vertebra of the Back which is received on all
hands by its neighbouring Vertebraes, and receives none ; and because it is Con-
tiguous with the Loins, the Motion is attributed to the Loyns rather than to the
Back: although it belong to the whol Back-bon.
the Back-bone therefore, as the Loyns, are bowed and extended and drawn to
the sides.
Back is bowed
by
the Quadratus.
They are bowed by two Muscles, on each side one. The Musculus a Quadratus
tales its rise from the hinder Part of the Os Ilij and from the inner side of the Os
Sacrum, being inserted into the transverse Apophyses of the Loins as far as the last
Rib, and of a Fleshy substance.
I for my Part would rather say it arises from the transverse Productions or Apo-
physes of the two lower Vertebraes of the Back and the last Rib, that it might toge-
ther with the oblique descending Muscles and the straight ones, stir and move for-
wards the whol frame of the Ossa Ilium.
The Muscles of the Abdomen which serve for Inspiration or drawing in of the
Air, do also further the bending of the Loyns and of the whol Back-bone; for
whiles they bear down the Chest, they do withal bow the Back-bone: if lying
along upon your Breech, you would lift up the Trunk of your Body; or would
leap up upon your Feet, without the Assistance of your Hands.
Extenders.
The Loins are distended by four Muscles, on either side two, which are so in-
folded al along the Back-bone, that either we must make so many pares, as there
are Vertebraes, or we must say there is only one Pare of Muscles distributing Ten-
dons to al the Vertebraes, according to the Opinion of Galen.
Semispinatus.
The Semi-Spinatus Muscle, takes a b sinewy beginning, from al the Spines of
the Os Sacrum, and ends into the transverse Apophyses of the Loyns and whol
back.
The 


232 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
The Musculus Sacer with a c pointed Fleshy beginning grows out of the hinder
Part of Os Sacrum and terminates into the Roots of the Spiny points of the Verte-
braes of the Back.
The Spina or Loins are laterally moved, when the Muscles on the contrary side
do act by themselves, both the benders and extenders.
It the Muscles which extend the Spina or Back-bone, are opposite to the oblique
Muscles of the Belly descendent and the straight ones, which move the frame of Ossa
Ilii, they must needs grow out of the upper Parts of the Spine, that they may be
inserted into the Ossa Ilium and Os Sacrum. And although they arise from the
upper Parts of the Spina, they wil nevertheless serve to erect the Spina ; and they
wil be ever more Antagonists against the Muscles which bend the Spina, viz. The
Quadratus, and the Musculus Obliquus ascendens.
For they receive Nerves, as wel in their upper as middle Parts.
a T.14.f.2.OO.f.4.CC.f.1.NN. b T.14.f.3.DD.f.4.AA. c T.14.
f.4.BB. 
Chap. 33. Muscles of the Belly.
BEcause those a ten Muscles, which are found displayed upon the Belly, were
accuratly discribed, At the beginning of the first Book, I wil not here repeat
them, because they are excepted from this Discourse.
Chap. 34. Of the Motion of the Ilium Bones and Os
Sacrum Joyned together.
By what Mus-
cles its moved
forwards.
THe frame of the Ilian Bones and Os Sacrum Joyned together, is moved back-
ward and forward in the Genial Embracements tending to Procreation.
The said Conjunction of bones is moved forwards by the b Right and Oblique c de-
scending Muscles of the Belly, the Chest resting and the Thighs remaining unmoved,
unless they follow the Motion of the Ilium Bones.
By what mo-
ved backwards
It is moved backwards by the Musculus a Sacer and the b Semispinatus, which
arise from the upper Parts of the Back: which I have demonstrated by many reasons
and experiments in my Anthropographia.
Chap, 35. Muscles of the Testicles.
Proper Muscle
of the Stones.
Cremaster.
THey are Proper or Common.
The Proper is that which is peculiar to each Testicle called c Cremaster. It
grows out of the lower a fore Part of the spine of Os Ilium: or rather it is the fag-end
of the Oblique ascending Muscle, bordering upon the Os Pubis, whose Flesh is
redder, thinner and as it were severed from the Flesh of the said oblique ascendent
Muscle. It infolds extrinsecally the production of the Peritonæum, and is carried
together with the Seminary Vessels unto the Testicle.
It draws the Testicle upwards and retains it suspended in that Posture.
The Common.
Da tos.
The Common Muscle is the Membrane of the Scrotum or Cod termed d Dartos,
being a Continuation of the Fleshy Membrane. And this Musculous Membrane
suspends both the Testicles.
Women have likewise their Cremaster, shorter than that of Men, Scituate upon
the production of the Peritonæum.
Chap, 36, The Bladders Muscle.
Office of the
Sphincter of
the Bladder. 
LEst the Urin collected in the Bladder should run out of it self against ones wil;
their is a e round fleshy Muscle which being rould back over the Prostatæ, does
shut


Chap. 39. Muscles of the Thigh. 233
shut the bladders Neck; and being made broad it expels the Urin; and by wring-
ing or squeezing the Prostatas or Auxiliary Testicles, it squirts out the Seed in
Venereal Conflicts. Now the Neck of the Bladder being Fleshy, performes the
office of an internal Sphincter Muscle, and exactly closes the Bladder.
a T.2.f.8.AB.f.9.ABD. b T.2.f.9.BC. c T.2.f.8.A. &c. 
a T.14.f.4.BB b T.14.f.3.DD.f.4.AA. c T.6.f.2.DD.
d T.6.f.2.BB. e T.6.f.5.FF. 
Chap. 37. Muscles of the Yard.
THe Yard has four Muscles, two on each side.
Yards Erectors
Accelerators.
Musculus a Erector is bred out of the innermore bunching out of the Ischium,
and being knit unto the Ligament of the Yard, it reaches sidewaies as far as the
middle of the Body thereof. The Accelerator takes his Rise not only from the
sphincter of the Anus or Fundament, but also from the internal Tuberosity of the
Ischium or Huckle-bone, and being with his Mate spred out under the Vertebra or
Piss-pipe, it is drawn out as far as to the middle of the Yard.
It hastens the squirting out of the Seed, and forces out the drops of Urin, in the
conclusion of Pissing. And because it is in its Original twofold, it may therefore
be accounted a double Muscle; but because I attribute that portion which arises
from the Tuberosity of the Huckle-bone, unto the Fundament, and cal it Levator
externus Ani [the external Arse-heaver] therefore the true Accelerator, according
to mine, and other Anatomists Opinion, must arise only from the external Sphin-
cter of the Fundament.
Chap. 38. Muscles of the Clitoris.
THe Clitoris in Women represents the Mans Yard, and therefore is furnished with
Muscles alike, though not serving for the same of Office. Of which I have
treated in my first Book, in the Chapter which describes the Womb.
a T.6.f.1.aa.f.5.HH. b T.6.f.1.bb.f.5.II. 
Chap. 39. Muscles of the Fundament.
I Have descrided the Muscles of the Fundament very sufficiently in the 33. Chap.
of my second Book.
Chap. 40. Muscles of the Thigh.
THe Thigh is extended, bended, drawn to a man, and from a Man, and oblick-
ly wheeled about.
Extenders of
the Thigh.
It is extended when we stand, our Thigh being Perpendicular to our Huckle-
bone, which posture is caused by three Muscles which constitute the Buttocks, and
are therefore by Authors termed Musculi Gloutii; that is the Buttock Mus-
cles.
Gloutius max-
imus.
Maximus and extimus a Gloutius, the greatest and outmost buttock Muscle, is
bred out of the spines of Os Sacrum and more than half of the Ilium Rib; and is
inserted four Fingers beneath the great Trochanter, where a certain Eminence of
the bone is discerned.
Medius
Secundus and medius b Gloutius, the second and middle buttock Muscle, springs
out of the external Part of the Os Ilium, and is inserted into the great and external
Trochanter. Gg Tertius


234 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy BOOK V.
Minimus
Tertius and intimus c Gloutius, the third and innermost buttock Muscle, arising
from the outward and lower side of Os Ilium, is implanted into the Top of the
great Trochanter.
Benders.
The Thigh is bended by three Muscles.
Psoas.
Primus Lumbaris. The first Loyn Muscle called d Psoas, spred over the bodies
of the Lumbal Vertebraes, in the Cavity of the belly; is bred out of the transverse
Apophyses of the lower Vertebraes of the back, and being carryed along upon the
inner surface of Os Ilium, it is inserted into the smal Trochanter.
I have in Men, oftimes found a little Muscle spred over this, which in its original,
being of the length and thickness of a Mans little Finger and fleshy, with a smal and
flat Tendon is carried above the Psoas, and when it is come to the Illiac, it looses it
self into a broad and very strong Aponeurosis, which firmly combiness the Iliac and
Psoas Muscles. And therefore I conceive it is added, in strong Men, that it might
straitly embrace the Psoas and hold it firmly in its seat.
It is called Parvus Psoas, and is more rarely found in Women than in Men:
Howbeit in the year 1631. In a very stout Virago or kind of Mol Cut-Purse, it
was my hap to see one of these Muscles, she having been hangd for Robberies and
Murthers by her committed.
a T.23.f.2.B.f.3.A. b T.23.f.3.B.f.4.C. c T.23.f.4.B. d T.10.
f.1.OO.T.23.f.1.A. 
Iliacus.
Iliacus Musculus, the Iliac Muscle, takes its rise out of the a internal Cavity of
Os Ilium, and being by its Tendon Joyned with the lumbal Muscle, it is termina-
ted between the great and little Trochanter,
Pectinæus.
b Pectineus Musculus, The Combe Muscle shootes out of the upper Part of Os
Pubis, and is inserted a little below the Neck of the Thigh, on the foreside.
Drawer to.
The Thigh is drawn to the inside by the Musculus Triceps or c three headed
Muscle, which has three originals and as many distinct Insertions.
Triceps.
One of its Heads arises from the upper Part of the share bones or Ossa Pubis; the
other arises from the middle of the said bones, and the third from the lowest Part of
the said bones; and they are inserted into the hinder line of the Thigh, being dis-
posed by course.
The Action of this Muscle is strong and Prævalent, drawing the Thighs inward,
when we Climbe Trees, ascend to the Main mast and Ride on Hors-back.
This trebble headed Muscle is the first that receives the Excrementitious Humors
of the body which fal into Legs, because of the Vessels which pass that way.
Withdrawrs.
The Thigh is drawn to the outside by very smal Muscles, because the drawing of
the Thigh outwards is not very necessary.
a T.23.f.1.B. b T.23.f.1.C. below b. c T.23.f.1 and 2.CC. 
The Quadri-
geminals.
The Musculi Quadrigemimi, are four little Muscles, interchangably placed up-
on the Articulation of the Thigh in the hinder Part thereof.
First
The first and a uppermost of the Quadrigemini being longer than the rest and as
it were pear fashiond, is by others termed Iliacus externus. It arises from the
lower and external Part of Os Sacrum.
Second
The b second of the Quadrigemini, arises from the Tuberosity or bunchy Part
of the Huckle-bone.
Third
The b third which is contiguous unto the former, arises from the same Part, and
these three are inserted into the Cavity of the great Trochanter.
These three of the Quadrigeminal Muscles, being included in the Cavity of the
great Trochanter, do serve likewise to thrust downwards or lengthen out the Thigh
When it is stretched a little beyond its natural length, which you may observe in a
Man that lies upon his Back, with his body and Leg stretched out.
They perform this Action in the same manner as the Pterygoideus internus, in-
terposed between the two Jaws, does drive the lower Jaw forwards.
The Fourth.
The Quartus Quadrigeminorum c Quadratus, is broader and more fleshy than
the other three, being distant from the third of the Quadrigemini two Fingers
breadths;


Chap. 41. Of the Muscles of the Leg. 235
breadths; and is propagated from the inner Part of the Protuberance of the 
Huckle-bone, and fastened into the external Part of the great Trochanter.
Oblique 
wheelers.
The Thigh is obliquely wheeled about by the two Obturators, the external and 
the internal.
Obturator in-
ternus.
The Internal d grows out of the inner Circumference of that hole which is in the 
Os Pubis or share bone; and being carryed along thorough that hollowness which 
is between the Knob of the Huckle-bone and its Acetabulum or Socket, it is by a 
tripartite Tendon inserted into the Cavity of the great Trochanter. 
Its Tendon is folded up and inclosed by the second and third Quadrigeminal 
Muscles, which resemble a purse. Its action is to direct the external wheeling mo- 
tion of the Thighs. 
a T. 23. f. 3. C. f. 4. D. b b T. 23. f. 3. b. f. 4. G. c T. 23. f. 3. D. f. 4. E.
d T. 23. f. E. and 4. F.
Obturator ex-
ternus
The Externus a Obturator, taking its revolution from the external Circum- 
ference of that hole, which is in the share, and being Circumducted through the 
Neck of the Thigh as through a pulley, it is carryed unto the Cavity of the great 
Trochanter under the fourth Quadrigeminal Muscle. 
It governs the internal wheeling motion of the Thigh. 
When the Quadrigeminal Muscles and the Obturators, are soaked in Wheyish 
Humors, they cause most bitter pains, which counterfeit the true Sciatica, and 
lengthen the Thigh, as if it were half out of Joynt, which is diligently to be noted 
and distinguished.
Chap. 41. Muscles of the Leg.
The Motion 
of the Leg.   
THe Leg is Joyned with the Thigh, by that kind of Articulation which is called 
Gynglymus, and therefore it is only moved by bending and extending; but 
because the Articulation is loose, it suffers a man to draw his Leg sidewaies: for 
which Cause Laurentius and other latter Anatomists, will have the Leg to be turned 
inwards and outwards by certain Muscles ordained to that end. 
It is drawn outwards or from the other Leg, by the Sutorius, a very long Muscle, 
is drawn outwards or from the other Leg, by a Membranous Muscle, or broad 
swath. I leave it free for any Man thus to divided the Muscles, which I distinguish 
into benders and extenders. 
The Leg ben-
ders.
The Leg is bent by four binder Muscles. 
The Semi Ner-
vosus.
The first of those four, is called b Semi-Nervosus, the Half sinnew Muscle.
It arises from the Tuberosity or bunching Part of the Huckle, and ends in the hinder 
and inner Part of the Leg. 
The Semi-
Membranosus.
The other is termed c Semi-Membranosus Musculus, the Half Membranary 
Muscle, which proceeds from the same bunching Part of the Hip or Huckle-bone, 
with a beginning which is Nervous and Membranous; and with a larger Tendon, is 
inserted into the inner and hinder Part of the Leg. 
a T. 23. f. 4. e. b T. 23. f. 3. G G. c T. 23. f. 3. H H.
The Biceps 
The Muscle a Biceps springs from the foresaid Tuberosity of the Hip or Huckle- 
bone, and being carryed along the outward Part of the Thigh, about the middle 
thereof it becomes fleshy, which fleshyness I have seen separated as a second Muscle, 
as far as the Head. It is by one only Tendon inserted, into the outward Part of the 
Leg.
The Gracilis. 
The fourth being commonly termed Posticus b Gracilis, arises from that line 
which shews where the Hip-bone and the Share-bone grow together, and descen- 
ding along the Inside of the Thigh, it is inserted into the inner Part of the Leg.
The Popliteus.
The Muscle called c Poplitæus, is to be reckoned among the benders, it lies lurk- 
ing in the Cavity of the Ham, above the Head of the Soleum. It arises out of the 
external swelling or bunching out of the Thigh, and is Obliquely inserted into the 
hinder and upper Part of the Leg, which it closely embraces. 
Gg2 The 

236 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
Extenders.
The Mem-
branosus.
The Sutorius. 
The Leg is extended by six Muscles. The first we meet with is the d Membra- 
nosus, which is drawn out of the upper spine or sharp point of the Ilian bone and 
carryed into the fore part of the Leg, or rather of the Thigh, and girts in the 
Muscles of the Leg it self, like a e Membranous swath, al save the Musculus 
sutorius. 
This Muscle taking its rise from the upper f Spine and fore Rib of the Ilium, and 
sliding down Obliquely by the inner Parts of the Thigh, ends into the inside of the 
Leg, which it is said to bring to and place over the other, as Tailors are wont to do 
when they would sit Cross-Leg’d. 
Rectus gracilis.
The Rectus g Gracilis, Springing out of the lower Spine of Os Ilium, and be- 
ing carryed right out all along the Thigh, ends on the fore Part of the Leg, beneath 
the Epigonatis.
Vastus exter-
nus. 
The two Muscles called Vasti do on either side border upon the Rectus Gracilis;
the one of which being h External, arises out of the Root of the great Trochanter, 
and is inserted into the Leg, a little below the Patella, on the out-side. 
a T. 23. f. 3. III. b T. 23. f. 3. FF. c T. 23. f. 4. H. d T. 23. f. 2. 
FF. h T. 23. f. I. GG.
Vastus internus
The ocher which is a internal, arises from the Root of the small Trochanter, and 
falls into the inside of the Leg, a little below the Patella. 
Crureus
The Muscle termed b Crureus placed under the two Musculi Vasti, springs out of 
the fore bone of the Thigh, between the two Trochanters, and cleaving to the whol
body of the Thigh, it produces its Tendon over the Epigonatis, unto the fore part 
of the Leg. 
These live Muscles, the Rectus, the Gracilis, Duo Vasti and the Crural Muscle, 
being united al together about the Knee, the produce one only Tendon, very 
broad and strong, wherewith the Patella is infolded. 
Chap. 42. Muscles of the Feet.
Motion of the
Foot. 
AS the Hand is divided into three Parts, so is the Foot into the Tarsus, Me-
tatarsus and Phalanx or Row of Toes. And as in the Hand, the Wrist is 
moved while the Parts after the Wrist remain unmoved: so in the Foot, the Tar- 
sus is moved, the Metatarsus remaining unmoved. And therefore the Tarsus 
is bowed, when it is moved forward, and it is extended, when it is forced back-
wards. 
In the meane while you shal observe that the bowings of the Members in the 
whole Leg and Foot are contrary; in the hand they are like one another, for the 
conveniency of taking up of any thing; in the Leg and Foot they are contrary, to
make us stand firme, and for the performance of different actions. For the flexi- 
on or bowing of the Thigh is performed forwards, the bowing of the Leg is perfor-
med backwards: the bowing of the Foot is done forwards, the bowing of the Toes
of the Foot, backwards. 
Foot-benders.
The Foot is bowed by two Muscles seated before, which are called Tibiæus 
Peronæus..
Tibiæus an-
ticus.
The Tibiæus c anticus, taking its rise from the upper Epiphysis of the Leg neare
the Fibula, and cleaving to the Tibia all along, about the middle of the bone, it 
degenerates into a Tendon, which beneath the d Ring-Fashion'd Ligament of the 
Foot, is slit into two Tendons, the one of which is inserted into the Os primum
innominatum or first nameless bone, and the other is lengthened out as far as to the
Bone of the Metatarsus which is placed under the Great Toe. 
a T. 23. f. I. HH. b T. 23. f. I. &c. T. 23. I. K. d T. 23. I. ξ. 
Peronæus an-
ticus.
The Peronæus a Anticus is in its Original joyned to the Peronæus Posticus, al- 
though both the Tendons are drawn through the cleft of the external Ankle, yet in
their end and infection they are separated. The Anticus has its rise from the middle
and

Chap. 42. Muscles of the Feet. 237 
and external part of the Perone, and being led through the cleft of Malleolus ex- 
ternus, it is inserted on the foreside into the bone of the Metatarsus, which su- 
steines the little Toe. 
Extenders.
The Foot is extended by the after-Muscles. The first and outmost are the 
b Gemelli or twins, so called because they are equal in Bulke, Strength and Action, 
They are also termed Gastrocnemij, because they make the Belly or swelling of the 
Calf of the Leg: and the one of them is internal, placed in the inner side of the 
Tibia or shank, the other is external, and possesses the outside thereof. 
Gemellus in-
ternus.
externus
The internal Twin-Muscle, arises from the inner knob of the Thighs; the external 
Twin-Muscle arises from the external knob of the said Thigh. They are severed in 
their beginning, but grow together at last into one Belly, which by a strong Tendon 
is lengthened out unto the hinder part of the Heel. Vesalius was the first that ob- 
served that. To several beginnings of every one of them, there are several little c Bones 
placed like unto Selamine Seeds or like Tares or Vetches, to the end that with 
their smooth and slippery surface, being placed between the Muscles and the Bones, 
they may hinder the Muscles from being hurt, when the leg is turned this way or that 
way. 
Plantaris.
Plantaris d Musculus, which lurks between the Twins and the Soleus, arises 
from the external knob of the thigh, being fleshie on the upper part, and quickly 
ending into a very small and longish tendon, it is drawn under the Heel, by the in- 
ner Ankle-bone, and diffused into the sole of the Foot. 
It performers the same office in the Foot as in the hand; that the Foot might an- 
swer to the hand, and that whilest the Foot is hollowed, the Skin, by the Tendons 
lieing under, might be firmly fastened. 
a T. 23. f. I. LL. b T. 23. f. I. dd. f. 2. DD. f. 3. KK. c T. 23. f. 3. θ O.
d. T. 23. f. 3. M. 
Soleus. 
The a soleus, a broad and thick Muscle, takes its original from the upper part of 
the Leg, or from the upper and hinder closure of the Tibia and Perone; and is in- 
serted by a tendon mixed with the Gemelli or Twins, into the hinder part of the 
Heel.
Under the Muscle Soleus remarkable vessels have their passage, both Veins, and 
Arteries and Nerves: whence it comes to pass that the pains of the Calf of the Leg 
are deep and lasting. 
The Chorda of
Hippocrates
Of the Twins and the Soleus mingled together in their inferior parts, is made that 
same common Tendon, which is so exceeding thick and strong, which Hippocrates
terms the Chorda magna, the Hurts, Bruises and wounds whereof, do cause 
death. 
Tibiæus posti-
cus.
The foot is extended by two hinder Muscles, the Tibiæus posticus and the Pero-
næus posticus.
The Tibiæus posticus does arise from the upper part of the Tibia, and being 
affixed to the whole bodie thereof, through the cleft of the inner Ankle bone, it 
produces two Tendons, the one of which ends at the Scaphoidean Bone, and the 
other is carried as far as to the primum Os innominatum.
Peronæus
posticus.
The Peronæus c posticus, does arise from the upper and hinder part of the 
Perone, And being carried with the Peronæus anticus through the cleft of the ex- 
ternal ankle bone into the bone of the Metatarsus, which sustained the great toe, 
under the sole of the Foot, it transmits its broad, hard and gristly kind of Tendon, 
under the Tendinous head, of that Mass of flesh, which does produce its internal 
inter-offeans. 
The Muscles Peronæus anticus and Posticus, as they are distinct in their origi- 
nal, so are they also distinct in their insertion, although they are drawn through 
the pulley of the external ankle: but the Tendon of the other Peronæus Flexor, is 
inserted into the outside of the Os metatarsi which susteines the little Finger. 
The Tendon of the other Peronæan Muscle, whose office is to extend the part, 
begin 

238 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
being scituate behind, is carryed further and more inwardly under the Muscle called 
Pediæus. These two tendons are separated one from another, being inclosed in 
two distinct sheaths or scabbards, of a nerve-gristly substance. 
a T. 23. f. 3. f. 3. LL. b f. 2. EE. e f. 23. f. 2. F F. 
Chap. 43. Muscles of the toes. 
The Annular 
Ligament. 
THe Toes have their proper Muscles, fitted to procure their bending, extending, 
and lateral motion from one side to another: also their tendons are compre- 
hended within a Ring-fashioned or circular and transverse a ligament, which does 
incompass them beneath the Ankles, just as we see in the Wrist. 
Toe-stretchers.
They are extended by the Musculus longus and Brevis. 
cnimodacrylius
The longus, or b long-Toe-stretcher called in Greek Cnimodactylius, takes its 
rise from the fore and inner side of the Tibia, there where it is joined to the Fibula, 
lurking close under the Tibieus anticus, and goes down-right all along the Fibula, 
till haveing passed the Ring-fashioned ligament, it ends into the three Articulations 
of the c foure Toes that it might at once and by one motion, move the three joyntings 
of the foure Toes aforesaid. 
Pediaus.
Brevis Digitum tensor, or the d short Toe-stretcher, or Pediæan Muscle, springs 
out of the Heel and the external and upper part of the neighboring Astragalus or 
bone so called, and being spread under the Superior, it is with its tendons inserted 
into all the Joynts of the Articulation. 
The Tendons of these Muscles, as well the long as short, do pass cross-wise one 
over another, above the Metatarsus. 
The Toe-ben-
ders.
The Toes are bowed by two Muscles the Brevis and Longus, which answer to 
these Muscles of the hand which are called Profundus and Sublimis. 
Perodactyleus.
Longus e Digitum flexor the Long Toe-stretcher called also Pero-dactyleus, 
arises out of the hinder and upper part of the Perone or Fibula, and being carryed 
along under the inner ankle, through a peculiar cavety of the Heel, it is divided into 
foure tendons, which are drawne through the slits of the short Toe-bending Ten- 
don (as we see likewise in the Hand) and then inserted into the third Joynt of foure 
Toes.
a T. 23. f. I. g. b T. 23. f. I. M M. c T. 23. f. I. f f. d T. 23. f. 2. G. e T. 
23. f. 4. I I. f. 6. C.
Pediæus
internus.
Brevis a Digitum flexor, or the Pediæus internus, or short Toe-Bender, springs 
from the inner and nether part of the Heel, and being parted into foure, it is termi- 
nated into the second Articulation of the Toes. 
The Tendons of this Muscle have holes bored in them for the Long Toe-benders 
Tendon to pass through. 
The oblique
movers.
Moreover, the Toes are drawn sidewaies by the Interossean Muscles. They are 
eight in number, foure internal and as many external, which are otherwise disposed 
in the foote than they are in the hand. 
The Inter-
osseans.
The b external arise from the spaces of the Bones of Metatarsus: the internal,
being scituate in the c Hollow of the foote, and knit unto the bones, and seeme to
take their original from that lump of d Flesh, which possesses and fils up that same 
Cavity of the Bones of the Metatarsus: but the membrane being taken away, they 
are seene to arise from one nervous pointed or acuminated Original, fixed on the in- 
side neare the Heel, and divided into four tendons, and to end into the second Arti- 
culation, whereunto the worme-fashioned or lumbrical Muscles do cleave. 
And therefore, the external inter-ossean Muscles, doe fill up the empty spaces of 
the Bones of Metatarsus.
The Lumbrical or worm-fashion'd e Muscles, do not arise from the tendons of 
the long Toe-bender, as in the Hand, but from a fleshy lumped, which lies hid under- 
neath the short Toe-bender; and that has its original from the Heel. 
Chap.

Chap. 44. of the Muscles of the great Toe. 239 
Chap. 44. Muscles of the Great Toe. 
The great toe-
bender.
THe great Toe f Bender, being scituate neare the long Toe stretcher, and of a 
fleshy substance, arises out of the upper Part of the fibula, where it is joyned 
with the Tibia, and passing along under the inner Ankle bone and the Sole of the 
Foote, it is inserted into the first bone of the Great Toe: and before it comes unto 
the second bone a little Sesamoidean Bone is proposed; and the Tendon for secu- 
rities sake is intercepted, with two greater Sesamoidean Bones. 
a T. 23. f. 4. L. f. 6. A. b T. 23. f 2. a a a a. c T. 23. f. s. d d d d. f. 6. f f f f. 
d T. 23. f..6. DD. e T. 23. f. 6. e e e e. f T. 23. f. 4. K. f. 6. B.
Sometimes under the sole of the Foot it is divided into two Tendons, the one of 
which is transmitted to the great Toe, the other to the second of the little Toes; and 
then the great Toe-bender is divided only into three. 
The Stretcher.
Extensor a Pollicis the great Toe-stretcher, arises from the external side of the 
Tibia, where it is separate from the Fibula and creeping along the surface of the 
Foote, it is inserted into the whole great Toe, in its upper side. The other ends in- 
to the Bone of Metatarsus, which is spred beneath the great Toe. 
The Abductor,
The great Toe and the little Toe, have two notable Muscles, externally scituate, 
which draw these Toes outwards from the rest; so that one of them, being exter- 
nally fastened unto the bone of the Metatarsus, which is placed under the great Toe, 
is termed Abductor b Policis, the Drawer a side of the great Toe. 
The little Toes
Abductor.
The other being externally spread upon the first Bone of Metatarsus, may be 
called Abductor c minimi digiti, the drawer aside of the little Finger. It answers to 
the Thenar and Hypothenar of the Hand. 
The great toes
drawer to.
Furthermore the Great Toe has in the sole of the Foot another Transverse 
d Muscle, like the Anti-thenar, which arising out of the Ligament of that Bone of 
the Metatarsus which is placed under the least or next Toe, and going obliquely 
upon the other Bones, it ends with a strong Tendon into the first Joynt of the great 
Toe, beneath the same.
This Muscle is opposed to to the Abductor, that it might draw the great Toe back 
againe.
The flesh being taken away, we find a threefold or fourfold Membrane, I suppose
it is that Mass of flesh which fills the Cavitie of the sole of the foot. 
a T. 23. f. i. N. b T. 23. f. 3. O. f. 5. b b c T. 23. f. 3. P. f. 5. c. d T. 23. f. 5.
e.
The Massd
carnea.
In the lowest part of the Foote which is termed Vestigium, there is contained a
a Lump of flesh which fils up the Cavity and empty space of the first Joynts; from 
whence writers say Tendons are drawn to the several Toes. 
Its Vse:
I conceive the use of this flesh is rather to strengthen the Toes and to combine their 
first Articulations, than to move the same, also like a soft Cushion, it is spread under 
the Tendons of other Muscles. 
Chap. 45. An Introduction to the Art of Muscular-Dissection, 
shewing an Accurate Method to cut up the Muscles of the 
whole Body.
The Method.
Whosoever has perfectly learned the History of the Muscles, will easily under- 
stand the Art of their Dissection, and be able of himself without any help, to 
administer this part of Anatomical section, which many account the hardest of all,
provided he diligently observe the Method which I here deliver. And therefore ha- 
ving finished our Myologia or History of Muscles, Myotome, or the Art of their Dis- 
section, will seasonably follow. 
The

240 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
The Frontal Muscle.
The frontal 
Muscle. 
The Skin of the forehead, being circularly cut off above the Eye-brows and drawn 
away as far as to the Coronal Suture, or to the beginning of the Hairs, you meet 
with the two frontal Muscles, which are most exactly to be separated from the 
frontal or forehead bone which lies beneath, beginning from above and cutting all 
away into the very Eye-browes. They are in the middle of the Forehead distinct
one from another. 
a T. 23. f. 6. D D. b T. 15. f. 1. E.
The Orbicular Muscle of the Eye-Lids.
The Orbicu-
laris.
The Cilia-
vis.
The Skin of the Eye-Browes and of the whole face being industriously dissected, 
there appears a double a orbicular Muscle, which does circularly cover the socket of 
the Eye a Fingers-breadth on al sides, and is spred under each Eye-lid. Also, you 
shal find the Musculus Ciliaris, stretched out orbicularly under the Tarsus. 
Muscles of the Lips.
Zeugomati-
cus.
Afterwards, the whole Face being made bare and the Skin stead off, a little be- 
low the Eye-hole, we meet with a little lean longish Muscle, placed athwart and 
called c Zygomaticus. For it is produced from the Zygoma unto the opening of the 
Lips. This Muscle must be separated from the Fat; for much Fat (which is also 
crowded into the Muscles) does cover the whole face, which you shal pluck away 
with your nails or with a pair of pincers, or with a very sharp pen-knife that the 
Musculous flesh may more evidently be distinguished. 
Lip-heavers.
Buccinator.
From the Zygoma towards the Lips, you shal search for five Muscles besides 
the Zygomatick muscle: and you shal find two above the upper Lip; each of which 
is exactly to be separated from the other. That Muscle which is nearest the 
Zygoma, belongs unto the neather Lip, which is lifted up thereby. The other be- 
ing very neare to the e Nostrils, is reckoned to belong to the upper Lip. The 
lateral f Muscle broad and Fleshy which opens and forms the Cheeks, and there- 
fore is called Bucco, must not be stirred out of its place. 
Lip-depressors.
In the neather jaw, as far as to the middle of the lower Lip, you shal search for 
two Muscles, having first taken away the skin. 
a T 15. f. I. F F. b T 19. f. I. C C. c T. 15. f. I. L. d T. 15. f. I. K.
e. T 15. f. I. H. f T. 15. f. I. O.
That a which is nearest the Chin, does depress the lower Lip. That which lies 
b beyond next the Masseter or fastened to the Corner of the mouth, draws the up- 
per Lip downwards. These two Muscles, though most exactly united, are yet di-
stinguished one from another by the various posture of their fibres; namely, in as- 
much as the Fibres of the former Muscle, do seeme to go upwards from the Chin to 
the Lip, and do as it were constitute a pyramidal Muscle, whose Basis rests be- 
neath and its top reaches to the Lip: the Fibres of the other Muscles do ascend unto 
the Meeting of the Lips. 
Muscles of the Nose.
Nose-lifters.
The Skin of the Nose being curiously taken away, two Muscles discover them- 
selves being fastened unto the bones and laps of the Nostrils, which arising out of 
the space between the Eye-Browes, are carried into the laps of the Nostrills. 
Nostril-wide-
ners.
Other Anatomists ad (but only in such as have great Noses) two little d Muscles 
spred athwart upon the ends of the Nose laps, which widen the Nostrils, as the 
former do lift them up. 
In

Chap. 45. Of the Muscles of the Eye. 241
Nostril wideners 
Other Anatomists ad (but only in such as have great Noses) two little d Muscles 
spred athwart upon the Ends of the Nose-Laps, which widen the Nostrils, as the 
former do lift them up. 
In the Interim you shal observe, that all these Muscles are so strictly conjoined, that 
one of the Lips, or the Nose cannot be moved without the motion of the Neighbo- 
ring parts. 
The internal Muscles of the Nostrils are seldom found, and only in such as 
have jolly coating Noses. 
The Temporal Muscle. 
Temporalis.
That same thick and fibrous Flesh which is situate between the smaller Corner 
of the Eye and the Ear, is called the e Temporal Muscle; whose tendon being drawn 
along under the Zygoma, is f terminated into the Top of the lower Jaw. 
a T. 15. f. 1. n. b T. 15. f. 1. M. c T. 15. f. 1. G. d T. 15. f. 1. e T.
15. f. 1. P P. f. 2. A A. f T. 15. f. 2. a a.
The Masseter Muscle.
Maßeter 
From the lower part of the Zygoma, arises the Muscle a Masseter, which makes 
up the fleshy sides of the Face. It is inserted into the Corner of the Lower Jaw; 
and it may be divided into two, the internal and external fibres being cross-waies 
intersected. 
The Parotick Kernels.
Constitution of
the Parotis. 
Above the Joynt of the lower Jaw, behind the Ears, there are scattered certain 
Kernels, of which one great, kernel is made, called Parotis. This cannot be seen 
unless the broad Muscle, which reaches unto the Eare, be torn away. This Kernel
being plucked out, you may proceed to the Muscles of the Eares. 
The Muscles of the Eares. 
Although the Eares in Man-kind remain firm and immoveable, yet have they 
their b proper muscle placed behind them. The first is a very little one, divided into 
two or three fleshy fibres, very friendly imbraceing the ligament of the Earth, you 
must search for it at the root of the Ear. 
The other Muscles of the Eare, are only portions of the frontal muscle, the broad 
Muscle, and the Hinder-Head Muscle; all which are bred out of the fleshy pan- 
nicle. 
The Muscles of the Eye. 
The Eye-lid-
lifter
Within the Eye-hole are contained seven Muscles, such as are the Attollens Pal-
pebram the Eye-lid lifter, Four straight ones and two oblique. Six of these arise
out of the deepest part of the Eje-hole;
a T. 15. f. 1. S. f. 2. B B. b T. 15. f. 1. Q. R. T. 20. f. 1. H I. &c.
Four right mu-
scles of the
Eye.
You shall find two above the globe of the Eye, of which the one being first in si-
tuation, is the a Lifter-up of the upper Eye-lid; and the other is called Attollens
b Oculi the Eye-Lifter. You shal search for three other c streight Muscles, every one
in its sitvation suitable to the action which it is to perform. 
Obliquus major
But you shall diligently observe the sixth d large oblique Muscle, which at the 
great corner of the Eye, or by the space between the Eye-browes above the Tear- 
pipe or foramen lachrymal, runs back about the Cartilage or Gristle, as about a
pulley, or as a bridle about the Annularly or ring-fashioned ligament. 
Be very careful that you do not break this Conjunction. For which cause you 
shall begin your Anatomical administration of the Eye, in that place, that is to say 
from the greater corner of the Eye, that you may preserve entire the e Pully and the 
Hh Insertion

242 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
Insertion of the Tendon, which is inclosed within a small nervous Ligament which 
receives the Tendon it self, and accompanies the same unto the Eye. The flesh of 
that muscle is fixed to the boney sides of the Eye-Hole at the greater corner. 
Obliquus mi-
nor.
The septimus Musculus Obliquus f minor, seventh Muscle, being the lesser of the 
crooked ones, is bred out of the inside of the lower part of the Eye hole, near the 
Tear g Kernel, and taking its revolution above the Muscle Humilis, but below 
the i Indignatorius: it is terminated aloft upon the Globe of the Eye by the Muscle
called k superbus. 
In the Anatomical Dissection of the Eye, this Muscle is to he look after in the 
second Place, and to be warily preserved, least we teare it in pieces, while we 
seek for the rest. 
If with the point of your Pen-knife you pluck back the Coat of the Eye called 
Conjunctiva, you shall see that all the Muscles of the Eye, do Terminate by a fine
Membranous Aponeurosis (conjunction or Contexture of many Nerves) into the 
Tunica Cornea. But they do not make a peculiar Membrane, as Columbus imagined,
because the Aponeurosis (nervy contexture) of every Muscle, is distinct by it self.
a T. 19. f. 1. A A. b f, 3. 4. 5. A. c f. 3. 4. 5. B. C. D. d f. 3. and 4.
F. e f. 3. and 4. G. f f. 3. and 4. E. g f. 1. D. h f. 3. 4. and B. i f.
E. 4. and D. k f. 3. 4. &c. A.
But you cannot see or demons trace the Muscles of the Eye, unless with a pair of 
Scissers you take away the fat placed about them; and after that you have shewn 
the Muscle which is the Up-lifter of the upper Eye-lid, with the four streight Mus-
cles and the little crooked one. 
That you may plainly discover the Obliquus Major or greater Crooked Mus- 
cle, with its revolution to the pulley, you shall take out the Eye, leaving that greater 
oblick Muscle, but cutting the rest away with your scissers. 
Muscles seated in the Neck. 
The Neck, which we make account reaches from the Basis of the Head unto the 
shoulder-blades, comprehending seven spondyls or Vertebra’s, has divers Muscles
in its fore side; of which some appertain unto the Head, to the Os hyoides, some to
the Larynx, others to the tongue, and others to the Pharynx. 
Latus.
And first we met with the Musculus a latus, the broad Muscle, which infolds the
whole Neck. It breeds out of the Clavicula and Brest-bone, and being fastened to 
the Basis or the neather Jaw, it is laterally carryed forth unto the Eare; it must be
very exactly separated from the Fleshy parts which lie beneath it, because it is an 
exceeding thin Muscle.
The Musculus Latus being revelled or drawn back, in the fore part of the Neck 
under the Chin you shal find nine as far as to the Larynx, and beneath the Larynx
six.
Mastoideus.
Towards the outward part of the Neck, there appears the thick and round
Muscle Mastoideus, which ascends slanting from the Clavicula to the Mastoides.
This Muscle ought to be separated at its original, that the others may be seen. But 
observe, by the way, that this Muscle is very often broken asunder by the Halter in
such as have been hanged.
Coracohyoideus 
Vnder the Mastoideus there lies lurkeing the Coraco-hyo-ideus, a lean and lon- 
gish Muscle, oblickly stretched out from the Scapula, to the Os Hyoides, for the
retraction whereof, it is ordained.
a T. 15. f. 2. F. T. 15. f. f. 1. g g. b T. 14. f. K K. f. 3. G. c T. 13. f. 13. F
F.
Then you shall see afterwards the Carotick Arterie, and the internal Jugular 
Veine, and the Nerve of the sixth Conjugation, interposed betweene the said two 
Vessels. And then you shal pass unto the Muscles seated beneath the Larynx. 
The first which presents it self is the a Sternohyo-ideus, which is bred out of the
top of the sternum or Brest-bone. Under this lies the d Bronchius which belongs to 
the Larynx. 
Then

Chap. 41. Of the Muscles of the Larynx, &c. 243 
Then you shal dissect and shew the Muscles placed above the Larynx and under 
the Chin.
Digastricus.
The first is Digastricus maxillæ internæ, or the Twi-bellyed Muscle of the lower 
Jaw, which is small and nervie in the middest thereof, that it might be turned back 
about the Stylo-cerato-ides, and ends into the Chin, inwardly. 
There are two Glandules or kernells under the Chin neare neighbors to this 
Muscle, which in rheumatick defluxions do often swel. They are termed by Vesa- 
lius, I know not why, Animellæ. You must remove these Glandules that the rest 
of the Muscles may be discovered, also you must separate the Digastric of Twi-
belly from the Chin. 
Mylohyoideus.
Vnder it lies the Muscle d Mylohyo-ideus with his Mate most straightly tyed and 
united, but a line drawn from the notch of the Chin as far as to the middle of Os
Hyoideus within, will shew you how to dissect.
Geniohyoideus. 
Under this Mylo-hyo-ideus are found two remarkable Nerves, Branches of the 
Seventh Pair, and the Muscle c Genio-Hyo-ideus, rising from the inside of the 
Chin and ending into the Os Hyodes, but so closely linkt with his Mate, that it is di- 
stinguished no otherwise, than by a white line which is manifest within. 
Genio-glossus.
Basigloßus.
Under these lurks the f Genio-Glossus, by the outer side whereof lies the Melo-
glossus: under which lies the g Cerato-glossus, or rather Basiglossus. 
a T. 13. f. 13. D D. b T. 13. f. 5. C C. c T. 15. f. 1. T T. f. 2. C C. d T.
13. f. 14. E E. c T. 13. f. 13. B B. f T. 23. f. 13. C C. g T. 13. f. 14. C C. 
Styloglossus. 
Afterward you shall come unto the hollow of the Neck under the lower corner 
of the Jaw, where the Kernel was scituate, which was formerly taken out. In this 
place is found the a Stylo-glossus, which is inserted into the Ceratoglossus. 
Stylohyoideus
Beneath there appear two Muscles, the one of which being lean and altogether fle- 
shy, is called Stylo-hyo-ideus, the other which is next unto it and touches it, being 
fleshy in its original at the Stylodes Proceß, and small as a firing in its middle, is 
called b Digastricus or Twi-belly. The first was observed in the Neck under the 
Chin.
Stylopharyn-
gæus.
Pterygoideus
internus.
Under the Stylo-glossus, lies skulking the Stylo-Pharingæus. Under the corner 
of the lower Jaw-bone, there is internally and immediately fastened the Pterygo- 
ideus d internus; which taking its rise from the Cavity of the Pterygoideus, ends 
into the Corner of the lower jaw, on the inside. You must not remove it from its 
posture.
Hyothyroideus. 
From the Basis of Os Hyo-ides on the outside, presents it self the short Muscle 
e Hyo-thyro-ideus, which is inserted into the middle of the Thyroides. This whole 
Muscle, is commonly found broken by the Haltar, in such as have been hanged. 
Oesophageus.
Al these Muscles having been shewed and taken away, there appears the f Oeso-
phagæus, a broad and Membranous Muscle spread under the Oesophageus, which it 
embraces, and is externally terminated in the Wings or Skirts of the Cartilago Ty- 
roides, or Gristle so called.
Muscles of the Larynx, Pharynx and Gargareon. 
The Oesophageus being shewed and separated, take away the whole Larynx 
that you may see those little Muscles which are proper to it. You shal observe 
eight or ten of them, of which some are ordained to move the Thyroids, and others 
pertaine to the Arytænoides.
Cricoaryte-
noidæi
In the formost and lowest part of the Thyroides, are placed the two Muscles 
called Crico-arytæno-idei antici.
a T. 13. f. 14. D D. b T. 15. f. 1. T T. c T. 3. f. 2. and 3. C C. d T. 15. f. 2.
D D. c T. 13. f. 8. B B. f. T. 3. f. 2. and 3. D D. g T. 13. f. 8. D D.
By the sides and lower Corners of Thyroides are situate the Muscles called 
s Crico-arytæno-idei Laterales. In the hinder more and outward side of the Cri-
Hh2 coides

244 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V. 
Thyroary-
tenoideus
Aritenoideus.
coides, you shal find the two Muscles called Cricoarytænoidei. Having separa- 
ted the Tyroides, inwardly and towards one side, you shal see the Muscle Tyroa- 
rytænoideus. To these is added the d circular Muscle infolding the whole Arytæ-
noides. 
But al these Muscles cannot be seen unless the Osephageus be taken away, and the 
c Paristhmian Kernels pluckt of, with which the Cartilage Thyroides or Gristle so
called, is covered. 
The Epiglottis f in Mankind, has no Muscle; in Brutes, two pretty ones are 
found, which you may see in the Larynx of an Ox. But in Mankind, we find on- 
ly a sinewy Ligament, which keeps the Epiglottis continually erected, unless it be 
depressed with the weight of the Nutriment passing by. 
The Pharyn-
gei
Afterwards you shal search for two other Muscles of the Pharynx, viz. the g Spheno- 
pharyngeus and h Cephalopharyngeus.
And then you may easily find the other two i Muscles of the Gargarreon, if you 
have learned their Originals and Insertions out of the History of the Muscles. 
The Muscles of the hinder-part of the Head and Neck. 
Trapezius.
The Skin being removed, and the Fat of the hinder part of the Neck and of the 
whole back as far as Os sacrum being pluckt away, you shal observer many Muscles;
the first of which is called Trapezius or Scapularis, which with the Latissimus does 
cover the Neck, Back and Loynes, at it were a cloak. 
Now the scapular k Muscle, which belongs unto the shoulder, its broad end rea- 
ching out as far as the Occiput or Hind-part of the Head, does compass al the Mus- 
cles of the Neck, and must in the lower part thereof be separated from the i La- 
tissimus Musculus, and wholly plucked up from the roots of the Spines or pointed 
Bones of the whole Back-bone as far as to the hinder part of the Head, from which
it must be separated, and only left of sticking to the shoulder-blade. 
T. 13. f. 9. C C b f. 10. C C. c f. 9. BB. d f. 10. BB. e f. 16. & 17. f.
f. 7. 9. & 10. A. g. T. 3. f. 2. & 3. BB. h f. 2. & 3. AA. 1. T. 13. f. 15. BB.
C C. k. T. 14. f. 1. & 2. AA. f. 2. AA. l. f. 1. CC.
Rhomboides.
Scrumus
minor.
This Muscle being taken away, the a Rhomboides a Muscle of the Shoulder- 
blade, must be cut from the spines of the Backbone. Under these lies the b Seratus 
Supsrnus minor posticus, the upper and smaller Saw-Muscle situate behind. 
The Splenius.
These Muscles being plucked a way as far as to their Insertion, the Muscles of the 
Head do shew themselves. And the first that occurs is the c Splenius. 
Levator
Scapulæ.
Neare unto which is placed on the side of the Neck, Levator d proprius Scapulæ 
or the Muscle appropriated to pluck up the shoulder; whose original cannot be 
discovered, unless the Mastoideus having been shewed, be taken out of the way. 
Complexus.
The Splenius Musculus, towards the Roots of the spines of the Neck, being ta-
ken away, there lies under it the c Complexus, neare unto which at the side of the
Neck, lie certain portions of Musculus Spinatus, and the Sacrolumbus ariseing as 
high-as the second Vertebra of the Neck. 
Transversarius.
The Complexus being taken away, below the second Vertebra of the Neck, are 
seen two Muscles which ow their service to the Neck. The first of these is f Trans- 
versarius, inter-posed between the transverse and Spinie Apophyses of the
Neck and Back. 
Semispinatus.
Under this is spread the g Semispinatus immediately covering the Bodies of the 
Vertebra’s. 
Obliquus
major.
Rectus major.
Upon the first and second Vertebras of the Neck, are seen eight small Muscles, 
in each side four, of which the two Greater h Oblique Muscles, are carried from the
transverse Apophysis of the second Vertebra, to the transverse one of the first. The 
two i Recti Majores, do begin at the Spina of the second Vertebra, and end into
the Occiput. 
Rectus minor.
Under their upper ends are situate the two Musculi minores, or lesser Muscles;
the

Chap. 45. Of the Muscles on the Back and Loyns. 245
the Streight and the Crooked, or the Rectus and Obliquus. The k Minor Rectus 
lies hid under the Major Rectus, winch you shal unloose at the Head and pluck it a 
side, that the minor Rectus may appeare. 
a T. 14. f. 1. B B. f. 2. B. C. b. f. 2. E. c f. 2. H H. d f. 2. DD. e f. 2.
11. f. 3. E F. f f. 4. E E. g f. 4. D D. h f. 2. L. f. 4. G G. i f. 3. & 4. 11.
k f. 3. 1. f. 4. K K.
Obliquus
minor.
The Muscle called Obliquus a minor, is carryed from the Hinder part of the Head 
by the Minor Rectus, into the Transverse Apophysis of the first Vertebra: But you 
must free and lay bare of fat these Muscles, as well the straight as the Oblique or 
crooked ones, that they may be the more apparently seen. And you shal begin 
your Section of the Muscles of the Head and Neck at the respective Spines or poin- 
ted Eminencies of the Back bone. 
When you have viewed the Muscles aforesaid you shal then make diligent search 
after one that lies closely sculking, above the Articulation of the inferior jaw and 
under the Zygoma; it is situate upon the external wing or Lap of the Pterygoides, 
and being altogether fleshy and round in a manner, it is inserted into that same flit 
which is interposed between the Coronis and the knob of the Lower Jaw bone. 
Pterygoideus
externus.
It may be termed the Pterygoideus Externus to difference it from the Internus
described before. 
Muscles of the Arme.
The pectoral
muscle.
These Muscles being administered, you may proceed to others. And first you 
shal separate the c Pectoral Muscle either from the Brest-bone, or from its lowest 
part, by which it is joined to the Serratus Major. 
Serratus minor
Meane while observe that the Serratus Minor or d Smaller Saw-Muscle, lies 
under the Pectoral or Ribs: least you should teare the same, whiles you dissect 
the pectoral Muscle, which you must cut up, as far as to the middle of Claviculæ. 
To which place being come, you shal separate it from the Deltoides or Delta-sha- 
ped Muscle, unto which it is fastened by a firme, but obscure band. Then you 
shal separate the Delto-ides from its original. 
Insraspinatus.
From thence you shal proceed to the Muscles which are spred out upon the shoul- 
der-blade. One lies upon the Spina or Back-Bone, three are seated beneath the 
same. That which is Next the Spina, is called e Infra-Spinatus. 
Next thereunto, is the Rotundus f Minor.
a T. 14. f. 3. K. f. 4. H H. b T. 15. f. 2. E E E E. c T. 10. f. 1. A. B. T.
22. f. 1. E. d T. 10. f. 1. E. e T. 22. f. 3. BB. f. T. 22. f. 1. & 3. C.
Rotundus
major.
Beneath that, you find the a Rotundus major, stretched out beneath the lower 
Rib of Omo-platæ or shoulder-blade. 
Rotundus
Immersus.
Under the scapula you shal find the Muscle called Immersus or b Subscapularis: 
it fills the Hollow of the Shoulder-Blade. 
You shal leave the Original and Insertions of those Muscles untouched, only 
you must separate the sides of one Muscle from another, that they may be distin- 
guished asunder, one from another. 
Muscles situate upon the Back and Loines.
Latissimus.
From the Omoplata or shoulder-blade, descend unto the Back & loins; which parts 
are covered with a Muscle called Amplissimus and Latissimus, or the c Largest and 
broadest Muscle. This Muscle must be separated from the Os Sacrum and the exter- 
nal Rib of Os Ilium, as far as to the lower Angle or Corner of the shoulder-blade, 
and its insertion at the Os Brachij a little beneath the Neck. 
Serratus posti-
cus.
You must while you cut it up at the Spines of the Vertebra's, take heed of spoile- 
ing a Muscle which lies beneath it, and is termed Serratus d posticus infernus, the 
Hinder and lower Saw-Muscle, being a little one. 
Which

246 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
Which after you have pluckt off, from its original by the Os sacrum, as far as its 
Insertion, you shall shew three other Muscles, stretched out from the Os sacrum, 
all along the Spina or Back-bone. 
Sacrolumbus.
Quadratus.
Of which the first being lateral and seated towards the Ribs, is called e Sacro- 
Lumbus. You shall begin your dissection of this Muscle at the upper part by the 
Root of the Ribs. A white line of fat will guide you from the top to the bottome, 
where you may separate it from the f Musculus quadratus which belongs unto the 
Loins, but in its original it is exceeding hardly separated from the Spinatus. 
Note by the way that the Sacro-lumbus does reach as far as the Hinder part of the 
Head, and that it does bestow a double Tendon upon every Rib. 
a T. 22. f. 1. and 3. D. b T. 22. f. 1. B. c T. 14. f. 1. C C. D D. T. 22. f. 1.
F. d T. 14. f. 2. F. G. e T. 14. f. 1. L L. f. 3. B B. f T. 14. f. 2. O O. 
Spinatus.
Sacer.
Now you shal separate the a Spinatus from Os sacrum, by easily and gingerly ta- 
king away the hard Aponeurosis which is spred out over the Musculus sacer, which 
being taken off, if you lengthen out your section above, you will discerned the diffe- 
rence between the Spinatus and the b Sacer. 
Which when you have attained, thrusting your pen-knife streight in, as far as to 
the transverse Apophysis, you will easily separate those Muscles. 
The Spinatus, goes as high as the second Vertebra of the Neck, being in the 
middest between the Transversarius and the Complexus. 
The Spinatus being fastened to the transverse Apophysis, does also arise as far as 
the Neck. 
Muscles of the Breast.
Serratus major.
Subclavius.
The Bodie being turned and laid with the face upwards, you shall sever the c Ser- 
ratus Major laterally, and putting in your hand underneath, you shal find it stret- 
ched out under the Omoplata or shoulder-blade as far as to the Clavicula. And then 
you shall see the d Muscle subclavius placed between the Clavis and the first Rib.
Triangularis.
Intercostalis. 
You shall look for the Pectoral Muscle internal or the Triangular Muscle, in 
the inner part of the Breast-bone pluckt off. Afterwards you shal carefully and gin- 
gerly separate the external intercostal Muscle form the internal. The fibres 
Cross-waies interposed, will distinguish the one from the other. 
a T. 14. f. 3. D D. f. 4. A. b T. 14. f. 4. B B. c T. 10. f. 1. C D. d T. 10. f.
1. F. e T. 10. f, G G. f T. 10. f. 1. H H.
Muscles of the Cubit.
When this is done, you shall returned unto the Arme to make observation of the 
Muscles of the Cubit, which are seated in the Arme. 
Five Muscles do infold the whole Arm, two in the fore parts, and three behind 
You shall separate the two Benders of the Cubit, on the former and inner part. 
Biceps.
Coracoideus.
The first which presents it self is the a Biceps or Twi-headed Muscle, which 
from its Original to its Insertion, may very easily be divided into two. But you 
must mark, that one Head of the Biceps, which grows one of the Coracoides, has 
a certain flesh adjoyned to it, which creep along the side of the Pectoral Muscle, 
as far as to the middle of the Arme, unto which it is fastened most firmly; and this 
Portion of Flesh makes a Muscle, which is ordained to draw the Arm forwards, 
which from its original I call b Coraco-ideum, the Coraco-idean Muscle. 
I have observed the Biceps or Twi-Head in a very strong and brawnie Man to be 
a Triceps or Tri-Head, being exquisitely separated into three parts, both in the O-
riginal and end thereof. The third Head sprang out of the tendon of the pectoral
Muscle. 
Brachiæus-
internus.
Under the Biceps is placed the e Brachieus internus or Inner Arme-Muscle, 
whole original is at the end of the Muscle d Deltoides. This Muscle must be sepa- 
rated sidelongs from such as border upon it.
In

Chap. 45. Of the Muscles of the Wrists, &c. 247 
In the outer part of the Arme three Muscles are placed, viz. the Longus, Brevis 
and Brachieus externus, and beneath the Elbow, the Angoneus is seated. 
Longus Brevis.
Brachiæus- 
externus.
The external are the e Longus and f Brevis which embrace that Mass of flesh 
which makes the Brachieus externus. In their original they g are distinguished by 
the tendon of Musculus latissimus which comes between them: but at their Insertion 
they grow together by a firme and sinewy tendon. And therefore they are easily, in 
their upper-part, separated from the Brachieus externus; but in their lower parts 
towards the Elbow, they are very hardly divided from the Brachieus. 
Now thus you shal proceed: you shall curiously take away the nervous tendon, 
neare the Elbow, and goeing upwards by little and little, you shal gently cut on the 
one side and the other, also inwardly: diligently observing the line which separates 
the long Muscle from the short, until you have separated the Brachieus externus,
from the Muscles which are placed above it. Then you shall see it arise from the 
Bone of the Arme, a little beneath the Neck thereof, with a fleshy substance. 
a T. 22. f 1. G. b T. 22. f 1. H. c T. 22. f 1. L L. f 2. B. d T. 22. f. 1.
A. e T. 22. f. 3. E. f T. 22. f. 3. F. g T. 22. f. 3. above E
The Muscle Angoneus a cannot be seen til you have pulled away the sinewy mem- 
brane wherewith it is covered. It arises at the lower part of the Arme neare the 
Elbow, lying hid between the Radius and the cubitus, and it is inserted into the 
Cubit. It is of the Length and thickness of a Mans fore-finger. 
Muscles of the Radius, the Wrists, the Fingers, and the Thumb.
In the Cubit you shal find the Muscles of the Radius, the wrists, the Fingers, and 
the Thumbe. And in the Inside of the Cubit as far as to the wrist, you shal find 
Nine Muscles; on the outside you shal meet with seven. 
Longus- 
Supinator radij
In the Inside you shal find them disposed in this Situation and order following
The first that presents it selfe is the Longus b Supinator Radij, which arises from 
external apophysis of the Arme, and is stretched out upon the Radius. 
Wrist-benders.
Next to that, is the Radieus c Flexor Carpi, after which follows the d Palmaris
Remarkable by a very small and very long Tendon. 
By the Palmaris is seated the e sublimis Digitorum Flexor, and next to it, so as 
to touch the same, you have the f Cubiteus Flexor Carpi. 
Pronatoacs-
Radij.
On the upper part of the Cubit, near the Joint, between the Longus Supinator 
and the Radieus flexor, the round Head of the Pronator & Radij shewes it selfe; 
which is a very short Muscle, ariseing from the internal Apophysis of the Arm and 
obliquely carried to its insertion into the Radius. 
Vnder the Radeus, lies the Flexor b Pollicis. 
Finger-benders.
Beneath the Sublimis, lies the Profundus i Flexor Digitorum, and in the lower 
part of the Cubit, by the wrists, lies the k Quadratus spred under the Tendons of 
the Muscles, being three Fingers broad, and immediately fastened Cross-waies, into 
the Radius and Cubitus. 
a T. 22. f. 3. a f. 4. G. b T. 22. f. 4. E. c T. 22. f. 1. M. d T. 22. f. 1.
K. c T. 22. f 1. O. f 5. A. f T. 22. f 1. M. g T. 22. f 2. C. h T. 22. f.
2. D. i T. 22. f. 1. P. f. 5. B. k T. 22. f. 2. D.
Extenders
of the wrist.
On the outside of the Cubitus above the Radius, the Extensor a Carpi is stretched 
out.
Next to it, is the Alter b Extensor, which is carried obliquely to the Cubit, and 
being fastened thereunto, takes its course downwards. 
Of the fingers.
Between the Radius and the Middle-part of the Cubitus, the Extensor c Digito-
rum is placed, which has a parcel of flesh annext unto it, spread under the Muscle of
the Extensor Pollicis. 
Vnder it, near the Cubit, lies the Extensor parvi Digiti, by the Wrist. 
Under the Tendons of the Extensor Digitorum you shal find two other small Mus-
cles, the one of which is the Extensor d Policis, the other is the e Indicator ordained 
to wait upon the index or Forefinger; whose Tendon is united by certain Fibres 
with the Tendon of the Extensor Digitorum. The

248 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V. 
The best way 
to dissect these
muscles.  
The division of all these Muscles is easie on the upper part of the Cubit, both on the 
inside, and on the outside, and in the said upper part, you must begin your section. 
For if you should begin at the Tendons you would multiply Muscles, and make as 
many Muscles as you find Tendons. Thus therefore, neare the Wrist, on the inner 
side of the Cubit, you shal distinguish the Tendons of the sublimis and the Profun- 
dus, allotting four Tendons to each Muscle, and then take your course upwards. 
Radieus Externus extensor Carpi, is termed also Bicoruis twi-horned, by 
reason of its double Tendon. You may divide this Muscle into two, Muscles, distinct
in their original and insertion, but you shall do better to make but one of it. 
In the Hand, you shall find Seventeen Muscles. 
Muscles of the
Hand.
In the Palm or Inside of the Hand there are Thirteen; viz. the four f Lumbri- 
cales, the g Hippothenar, the h Thenar, the i Anti-thenar, the Abductor Indicis, 
the Massa Carnea, and the four Interossei a interni. 
a T. 22. f. 3. H. b T. 22. f. 3. G. c T. 22. f. 3. K. d T. 22. f 3. M. e T.
12. f 3. L f T. 22. f. 5. C C C C. f. 2. f f f f. g. T.22 f. 1. S. f. 2. b. h T.
22. f. 4. K. i T. 22. f 1. R. f. 2. G. a T. 22. f. 2. f f f f.
In the outside of the Hand you shal find only the four Interossei b externi; with 
the Tendons, of the Finger-stretchers, or of the Thumb-stretcher, and of the little 
Finger-stretcher.
Muscles of the Abdomen or Belly.
Obliquus de-
scendens.
In your anatomical Administration of the Muscles of the Belly you shal thus pro- 
ceed. The first you meet with, which must be plucked out, is the Musculus c Obli- 
quus descendens, which you shal see conjoyned with the e serratus major, d tooth 
within tooth, as if the Edges of two Sawes were Put together, and Joyned one with- 
in another, or as some parts of the Scull are coupled by the sutures. You shal know
the difference of the Serratus and Obliquus one from another, by certain white lines 
and by the different posture of the Fibres. You shal separate the Musculus Obli- 
quus from its intanglements with the Teeth of the serratus major, with help of a ve- 
ry smal and sharp Pen-knife. 
The first tooth is interposed between the Musculus rectus and a portion of the 
Serratus: the second and the e third are very hardly separated. The other four lie 
lurking under a portion of the Latissimus, not receiving the fleshy Productions of 
the Serratus. 
To bring them therfore into sight, it will be convenient to pluck up a portion of the 
Latissimus, as far as to the hinder spine of the Os Ilium; and then you shal take 
those four Teeth off from the Ribs, and in conclusion you shal cut off the Muscle, 
from the whole Rib which appertains to the Os Ilium. 
If you be industrious and can endure to take pains, you shal observe that the second, 
thud, and fourth Tooth [or Finger] of this Muscle, doe creep higher up under the 
Serratus, than vulgar Anatomists imagine, and that this Muscle does there attain a 
sinewy tendinous Head, which cleaves fast to the lower side of the Rib. 
A tendinous Head receives a portion of the intercostal nerve. 
b f. 2. I I I I c T. 1. f. 2. H H. T. 2. f. 8. A. d T. 2. f. 8. a a. e T. 1. f. 2.
F F. T. 10. f. 1. C. D.
For the nerve, when it is come thither, it is divided into two parts, the one of which 
does insinuate it self into the sinewy Head of the Tooth of the Muscle; the other
sticking fast unto the Rib, does make the a nervous intersections of the Musculus 
Rectus. The Muscle being thus cut up, must be turned back upon one side of the 
Belly. 
You shal in the meane while observe, that the b Aponeurosis of this Muscle, is 
bored through near the Os pubis, as the c Aponeurosis of the Obliquus c ascendens,
and of the Transversus are perforated, near the foremost and lowest Spine of the Os 
Ilium; and therfore the Holes of the two oblique Muscles are not set just one against 
another, but at a distance one after another, that the Gut might not be so apt to fall 
down into the Groine or Cod.
These

Chap. 45. of the Muscles of the Abdomen or Belly. 249  
These Holes are broken in Ruptures into the Cod, or else dilated, which are 
diligently to be observed, in reducing of the Gut when it is strangled in the 
Groine. 
And if at any time an Incision be made in the Groine, to reduce the Gut, that 
bole ought to be made wider by Incision, that the Gut may more easily returne 
into the Bellie. 
Above the Obliquus ascendens towards the Hypogastrium, you shal find a little 
Nerve which insinuates and winds it selfe into the Apophysis of the Peritonæum 
that it may be carried to the Testicle, because it penetrates the transverse Muscle. It 
arises from the Nerves of the Loines, and is a portion of those nerves which are dis- 
seminated into the Oblique Ascendent and the Transverse Muscles. 
When you have cut the f Oblique Ascendent from the Rib of Os Ilium to which it 
cleaves very fast, you shal bring it to the Loines, where it may be separated from 
the Transverse. Then you shal separate it from the Ribs themselves as it returnes 
upwards. And it will be convenient to turner back this Muscle to the contrary side, 
after the manner of the primus Obliquus; and when you shal come unto the Muscu- 
lus Rectus, you shal observe that this same Oblique Muscle does embrace the Mus- 
culus Rectus or straight Muscle above the Navel, and below the Navel it transmits a 
single Tendon under the Rectus, which notwithstanding by the Edge of the Rectus 
does cleave so obstinately to the Aponeurosis of the Oblique Descendent, that it is 
not possible by any Art to separate or pull them asunder, without rending them. 
a T. 2. f. 9. d d d. b T. 2. f. 8. b b. c T. 2. f. 8. B. d T. 2. f. 9. A. c T. 2. f.
8. d d. f. 9. bb. f. T. 2. f. 8. B. c c.
While you cut the Tendons of the oblique Muscles from the share Bones, be very 
careful least you mangle the Apophysis of the a Peritonæum which is carryed 
through those Tendons, and teare the b Muscle Cremaster placed upon the said Apo- 
physis, and also least you teare the Tendon of the Transverse Muscle lieing be- 
neath. 
How the cre-
master is
knowen.
You shal know the Muscle Cremaster by its colour and Consistence. For it is 
a peice of red flesh, thin, sprinckled with streight fibres, severed some space from, 
the flesh of the Oblique Descendent, and according to the Length of the Groine, in- 
closeing the Apophysis of the Peritonæum. You shal find such a parcel of flesh in 
women, but shorter and narrower, placed upon the production of the Perito-
næum. 
Between the Oblique ascendent and the transverse Muscle towards the Loins, 
many veins are seen, which are the offspring of the Lumbal and the Hypo-gastrick 
Veins. But you shal take precise notice of two remarkable nerves or sinnewes, 
which besides the little intercostal twigs inserted into the Teeth of the Oblique Des- 
cendent Muscle, do arise out of the two inner Vertebra’s of the Back, and creeping 
obliquely upon the bastard Ribs, are by the last Rib dispersed into the flesh of this 
Oblique and the Transverse Muscles. 
Musculus
rectus.
You may conveniently separate the c Musculus Rectus following the white 
Line, but not medling with the ends thereof. If you shal diligently and leisure-
ly pare off the extremities thereof opposite unto the Linea Candida or white Line, 
you will find the intercostal Nerves which bore their way through the peritonæum, 
that they might come unto and constitute the nervous a intersections of the Muscle, 
which now and then are wanting, as I have observed in some Bodies. I have often 
found two imperfect ones above the Navel; if a third be found, it is alwaies directly 
opposite unto the Navel; you shal very rarely find a fourth Intersection. 
a T. 2. f. 9. E E. b T. 6. f. 2. D D. c T. 2. f. 8. e e. f. 9. C. a T. 2. f. 9. dd.
Which is the
true Linea can-
dida.
Towards the end of Rectus Musculus, on the inside you shal observe the Epiga-
strica b ascendens and the Mammaria c descendens to d meet together about the mid- 
dle of the Muscle, where they grow into one by a close Anastomosis. 
That which separates the right Muscles is a real e white Line stretched out from 
Ii the

250 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book V.
the xiphioides as far as to the Conjunction of the Share-Bone; and it is simply done 
of them, who call the growing together of the nervous conjunctions or Aponeuro-
ses of the Obliquus descendens, the White-Line, seeing the Aponeuroses them- 
selves are united continually and not disjoyned by any apparent Line. 
In big-belly'd women when their Bellies are very much distended, in the last 
months of their going with Child, by reason of the Drawing of the Musculi Rectus
asunder, a certaine black-blewish Line remaines for two or three months after the
woman is delivered, which begins at the xiphoides and reaches unto the place where
the share-bones grow together, which vanishes away by little and little, the Right 
Muscles being reunited and growing together againe. 
Pyramidalis.
Over the lower end of the Right Muscles lies a smal Muscle called f Pyramidalis 
which you must curiously part into two, and having taken away one, you shal see 
a most strong sinewy Tendon of the Musculus Rectus, fastened to the Os pubis of 
Share-bone. 
Transversus.
The Left Pyramidal Muscle is oft times shorter and narrower than the right. 
The transverses Muscle which cleaves to the Peritonæum, is not easily drawne off 
yet if you are desirous to take it away, you must cut it from the Loines, and then 
gently separate it from the Peritonæum with your fingers alone. 
b T. 2. f. 8. e c T. 2. f. 8. d. d T. f. 8. f. r T. 1. f. 2. K K. f T. 2. f. 9. D D.
g T. 2. f. 9. A f. a a & c.
Muscles of the Yard. 
The Yard.
Erector.
In a Mans Yard on either side in the Groine and the peritonæum you shal search for 
two Muscles, haveing first removed a great deal of fat wherewith they are covered. 
The one of these Muscles is a Erector Penis the Raiser of the Yard, which arises
from the Sphincter Ani or Arse-muscle so called, and is inserted into the hollow and 
spungy Ligament of the Yard. 
The Accelera-
tor.
The other being placed upon the Urethra or Piss-pipe is called b Accelerator or 
the Speeder, it arises out of the same Tuberosity beneath the spungy c ligament of 
the Yard, although it be fastened by a bit of flesh to the foresaid sphincter or Arse-
Muscle, that it may bearer up the fundament, which fleshy portion or bit of flesh 
forementioned I am wont to shew for the Levatores extend ani, or external Arse- 
Heavers.  
Muscles of the Fundament.
The sphin- 
cters of Anus. 
The Levato- 
res ani. 
The Fundament has six external Muscles belonging unto it. The Sphincters,
and foure external Lifters, for the Levatores interni or inner-lifters do lie cut 
of sight. In women there is a fift Muscle which belongs to the Coccyx or Crupper- 
Bone.
In the first place you shal anatomies and shew the Sphincter d Cutaneus, then
another larger red Muscle, and then the side-muscles before and behind, the e Le-
vatores which arise out of the tuberosity of the Huckle-bone, you shal seek for 
them behind the Crupper-bone and above the acceleratores on the foreside, putting 
your hand in beneath, or putting in a little knife made of box-wood. But you 
shal more evidently discerned the largeness of the Levator Ani, if you shal take away
the Bladder, the Intestinum Rectum or Arse-Gut and the womb of a woman, and
withal shal sever the Conjunction of the share-Bones. 
For then you shal see a broad but thin piece of flesh, drawn out from the Os 
Sacrum as far as to the Spine of the Os Ischij, underproped with a firme ligament,
which is in that space, and produced as far as to the Os Ischij it self: which fleshy
Membrane ought to be taken for the Levator: for under it the Obturator Internus
is situate.
The Muscle
peculiar to the
Coccyx in wo-
men.
Besides those Levatores there is another found to arise from the farthest extre- 
mity of the Os sacrum and the Crupperbone, viz. a thin and sharp pointed piece of 
flesh strewed with right fibres, enclosing the lateral parts of the Crupper-bone or
Coccyx

Chap. 45. Of the Muscles of the Clytoris. 251
Coccyx on either side, which holds up the Sphincter, and so the external Orifice 
or the Privy Parts in Women are widened, this Muscle drawing the Crupper-bone 
backwards, that in Child-birth the passage may be more free for the Infant. 
I have seldom seen such a Muscle in the Bodies of men, and the use of it when it 
is extant in men, is, to render the voidance of Dung more easie, by drawing back 
the Crupper-bone when men are at stool. 
a T. 6. f 1. a a. f. 5. H H. b T. 6. f 1. b b. f 5. I I. c T. 6. f 5. K K.
d T. 3. f 4. O. c T. 6. f 3. N N. 
The internal
Sphincter.
The internal Sphincter (if we must needs admit, and allow of a third) is no o- 
ther than a Membranous parcel of flesh, somwhat black and blue, which comprehends 
the Rectum Intestinum, or Arse-Gut, like a Sheath or Scabberd, being adorned with 
straight Fibres, and interwoven with a few circular ones j which if the Coat of the 
Guts is fleshy, it differs from that common Coat of the Guts, which covers their 
in-side. So the Rectum Intestinum is distinguished from the rest, neither is the 
Scituation of the Membranes, or Coats, varied. 
The Bladder-Muscle. 
The Bladder-
muscle in men.
The Bladder-Muscle b Sphincter, is placed in a Man above the Prostatæ, 
which it imbraces for the Space of two fingers breadth, and is easily found without 
the Channel of the Piss-pipe: If you shal cut up the Pipe with a pair of Scissors 
from the Nut of the Yard, as far as to the Prostatæ. 
You shal examine if you can find two Sphincters of the Bladder, one beneath, 
and the other above the Prostatæ, which I never observed. 
a T. 2. f 5. Q. b T. 6. f 5. F F.
Demonstration
of the Double
Sphincter.
Now that part of the Neck of the Bladder, which respects the Bones of the Share, 
is manifestly fleshy, between the two Kernels called Prostatæ: and there a two- 
fold Sphincter may be allowed; one fleshy, placed upon the Prostatæ, and in that 
fence above them; but under the Prostatæ, is the Membranous Muscle of the Neck 
the Bladder: the other broad Muscle above the Prostatæ, and turned back under 
the same, wil be the Second Sphincter Muscle, because it does circularly imbrace the 
Prostatæ above and beneath. 
The Bladder-
Muscle in Wo-
men.
The Neck of the Bladder in women, is very neer as long as ones Thumb, being 
Nervous, Spongy, and black within, like the Piss-pipe, or Urethra in Men, and 
compassed about with reddish flesh, which is taken to be the sphincter: and while 
the Neck of the Bladder in women swells, if you put your finger within the water- 
gate, you shall perceive an hard and long tumor or swelling. and the uppermore 
carnositie of the Privie Part, which closes and stops the end of the Bladder, is both 
in Girles and women allwaies found larger than the rest, and the other glandules be- 
ing by frequent child-bearing torne and defaced, this allwaies remaines to the End 
of their lives. 
Muscles of the Clitoris. 
Latus.
Gracilis.
You shall seek the Muscles of the Clitoris, after this manner; having leisurely 
taken away much fat till such times as ruddi flesh appeares, you shall sever the La- 
tissimus Musculus which lies very low, growing out of the sphincter of the Funda- 
ment, and inserted into the very Lips of the Water-Gate or female Privity, for the 
moveing of straitening whereof, I conceive this Muscles ordained. The other is 
the Gracilis Musculus fastened to the Ligament of the Clitoris. 
Musclus of the Thigh.
Psoas.
In the Cavity of the Belly, when the Entralls are removed, you shall observe above 
the Loyns the Musculus longus and rotundus, the long and round Muscle which is 
termed a Psoas, which you shal separate from its original to its insertion which is 
in the small Trochanter 
a T. 10. f. 1. O. O. T. 23. f. 1. A.
Ii2 I have

252 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V.
I have oftentimes in Men, and somtimes in Virago’s, or manly Women, observed a- 
nother lank Muscle placed over the Psoas aforesaid. It seems for this Cause added, 
that as a Ligament or Band it might strengthen, and as it were gird in the soft and 
loose flesh of the Muscle Psoas. 
Iliacus.
The Cavity of os Ilium is filled by the Musculus latus a Iliacus or broad iliak 
muscle, which together with the Psoas being conveighed along upon the Os Pubis 
and by its tendon united to the Psoas, is terminated in the small Trochanter. 
Having turned the Body, you shal proceed to the Muscles which make the But- 
tocks, called Gloutii that is Buttock Muscles. There are three of them resting one 
upon another. 
Gloutius major 
The first and greatest b Buttocks Muscle, you shal separate towards its tendon, 
both before and behind, having first made it cleaned and freed it from the fat. 
Then you shal proceed in your section upwards til the whole is on all sides cut of, 
til you come to its insertion, which is in the great Trochanter, and there you shall 
leave it, or having first taken away the broad band, you shal cut off the said Muscle 
in the fore part. 
Medius.
Minimus.
Under this lies the Gloutius c Medius or middlemost Buttock muscle, which may 
easily be separated in its upper and lateral part towards the Os sacrum. But beneath 
the middle part of the Gloutius Secundus the d third is placed, immediately fasten- 
ed to the Os Ilium: this Muscle you must not cut off. 
Between the middle and the lesser Buttock Muscles there are two remarkable 
veins, which from the Hypogastrica doe creep over the Obturator Internus c with an 
Arterie, Hand in Hand, and a portion of the Nervus major posticus, they spread 
themselves into numerous branches: and there arise most cruel pains in the inmost 
parts of the Buttocks, which counterfeit the sciatica or Hip-gout. Would not 
drawing blood from the Hæmorrhoid Veins, serve well to disburthen these parts? 
a T. 23. f. 1. B. b T. 23. f. 2. B. f. 3. A. c T. 23, f. 3. B- f. 4. C. d T.
23. f. 4. B.
Quadrigemini
In the next place you shal proceed to the Quadrigemini and the Obturators, 
which are seen beneath, the greater Buttock Muscle being taken away. The upper 
most being the first and longest of all, is called the a Pyriformis unto which the two b 
Parvi or little ones doe follow in order, coupled together, that between them and 
in their Bosome as it were, they might contein the Tendon of the Obturator inter-
nus. 
To these two there is orderly adjoyned the c Quratus Quadrigeminus being broa- 
der and more fleshy than the rest, 
Obturator in-
ternus.
The Obturatores are two, the d internall and the e external, the Internal has its 
original out of the Circumference of the Oval hole; and its Tendon being carried 
along between two Ligaments, and being hid in the bosome or holownesse of the se- 
cond and third Quadrigeminal Muscles, it is carried into the Cavity of the great 
Trochanter. And therefore you must pul asunder the second and and third Qua- 
drigeminals, before this Muscle can come in sight. 
Now the Ligaments through which the Tendon of the Obturator Internus is car- 
ried, are two; the one being external is carried from the Os sacrum to the Tube- 
rosity of the Os Ischij: the other being internal and placed beneath the external, 
is carried from the same Os sacrum, into the spina of the Os Ischij. 
Externus.
The Obturator externus cannot be discovered unless the fourth broad Quadri- 
gemminal Muscle be plucked back, and that the Propagation thereof may more e- 
vidently appeare, you shal take away the Musculus Triceps or Three-Headed 
Muscle. 
Sometimes I have observed above the Primus Quadrigeminus, the Iliacus exter- 
nus Gracilis, which from the lower and transverse spines of the Os sacrum, did 
end into the top of the great Trochanter. You shal therefore anatomies and shew 
eleven Muscles of the Thigh, placed above the Os Ilium. 
In the hinder part are nine, Three Gloutij or Buttock Muscles, which being 
drawn aside, there appeare four Quadrigemini and two Obturatores. In the fore
part

Chap. 45. Of the Muscles of the Leg. 253 
part and hollowness of the Os Ilium are found two Muscles, the Psoas which indeed 
has us original higher than from the Os Ilium, and the Iliacus. 
a T. 23. f. 3. C. f. 4. D. b T. 23. f. 3. b f. 4. G. c T. 23. f. 3. D. f. 4. E. d T.
23. f. 3. E. f. 4. F. c T. 23. f. 4. g.
Muscles of the Leg. 
In the Thigh from the Haunch to the knee and Ham you shal observe and shew 
eleven Muscles. 
Sutorius.
Membranosus.
Rectus.
Vasti.
Crureus.
In the fore part you shal find seven, the Longus, the Fascia lata, the Rectus 
gracilis, the Duo Vasti, the Crureus and the Triceps; which are so situate, 
that in the first place you meet with the longus or sutorius, then the Membranosus 
or Fascia lata. According to the streightness and length of the thigh the Rectus
Gracilis is drawne out. Neare and bordering upon this are the Vasti duo, under 
which lies the Crureus which immediately covers the Os femoris, or Thigh-Bone, 
Adjoyning to the vastus internus is the Triceps, which lies sculkeing within the 
Thigh.
In the hinder-part of the thighs you shal find four, disposed after this manner. 
Unto the Triceps on the Inside is fastened the Gracilis Posticus; bordering 
upon it, is the seminervosus, with the Semimembranosus, and between this and 
the vastus externus is the Musculus Biceps placed. 
In the forepart of the thigh, you must begin at the a Long Muscle; which be- 
ing cut of you shal cleverly take away the Fascia b lata, either all of it or as much 
as you can, and you shal bring it as far as to the knee. 
Then you shal cut of the Gracilis c Rectus. 
Afterwards you shal proceed unto the two vasti, which that you may more easily 
separate from the Crureus, they are distinguished one from another by a line run- 
ning between them, which you shal cut up. 
Then you shal dissect the Vastus d Externus by the latus externum; but it is 
harder to separate the Vastus e internus. 
a T. 23. f. 1. I I. b f. 1. E. c c c. c f. 1. F F. d f. 1. G G. e f. 1. H H.
And you shal begin to separate the same at the lower part neare the Patella, and 
thrusting in your hand, and neatly mannageing your penknife, you shal cut it tow- 
ards the upper parts: and so the two Vasti shal be severed from the a Crureus. 
Triceps.
From these you shal come unto the b Triceps, which may more truly be termed 
quadriceps or rather quadrigeminus, because of foure Heads and as many distinct 
Insertions.
Pectineus.
It is placed in the inner part of the Thigh, and its first and upmost portion grow- 
ing out of Os Pubis, seems to be a Distinct Muscle, which in regard of its situation 
may be termed Pectineus. 
I have sometimes found four other portions perfectly distinct one from another, 
besides the Pectineus, and the last portion was verie long, like a semi-nervous Mus- 
cle, and was carried on with a sinewy tendon as far as to the Leg. 
I conceive this is the Muscle, which has been in women observed distinct from 
the rest, in the hinder part of the thigh, and is wont to be joyned as a fift, unto the 
four Postici. For it arose from the Tuberosity of the Ischium and was inserted 
into the Hinder Part of the Tibia. 
It is found in Women, because they were to have broader Buttocks and larger 
Thighs than Men. 
Seminervosus. 
Semimembra-
nosus.
Biceps.
Gracilis.
It is an easie separate those four Muscles placed in the hinder part of 
the thigh, viz. the c Seminervosus, the d Semimembranosus, the e Biceps, & the Graci- 
lis f internus. I have often found the Biceps distinct both in its Original and Inser- 
tion.
a T. 23. f. 1. &c. b T. 23. f. 1. &c. C C. c T. 23. f. 3. G G. d T. 23. f. 3.
H H. e T. 23. f. 3. L L L. f. T. 23. f. 3 F F. Muscles

254 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V. 
Muscles of the Tarsus.
Gemelli.
Popliteus.
Plantaris.
Soleus.
In the Leg from the knee unto the Tarsus are found 13. Muscles; in the hinder 
part you shal find five placed after this manner. 
The first are the a Gemelli; under their Heads lies the b Popliteus hidden; be- 
tween the Gemelli and the Soleus, the c Plantaris hides it selfe. 
The Soleus lieing beneath the Gemelli, does immediately cover the shin-bone. 
Foot-benders
In the lateral and external Part of the Tibia, by the Spine, there appeares the 
Peroneus e Flexor pedis, Neighbour to which is the Longus f Extensor Digito- 
rum. 
Extenders.
After which followes the Extensor Pedis, tibieus g posticus. Under the Exten- 
sor longus Digitorum, lies the Extensor h pollicis; and beneath the Flexor pedis 
Peroneus, lies the Extensor i Peroneus. 
The Flexor k pollicis does take up the internal and lateral part of the Tibia. 
In the lower part of the Tibia, between the flexor pollicis and the Tibieus posticus, 
the Flexor i digitorum medius holds its place. 
The separa-
teon of these
Muscles.
It is easie to separate the Muscles which infold the Tibia on all sides, provided 
you do first pluck off the fascia m lata, which is carried out as far as to the foot. 
Having divided the Heads of the Gemelli, you shal diligently search for the Popli- 
teus or Ham-Muscle, situate obliquely over the Head of the Soleus. Then you 
shal observe the fleshy Head of the Musculus Plantaris, which lies lurkeing be- 
tween the Gemelli and the Soleus. The Plantaris is like the Palmaris. 
In the fore part of the Tibia the Peroneus externus and Peroneus internus 
seem to make one Muscle, because they arise from one and the same part, and are 
carried through the Cleft of the external Ankle-bone. 
But the one is internally inserted into the Os meta-tarsi, which sustaines the lit- 
tle Toe: The other being drawen under the sole of the feet, is carried into the Os 
metatarsie which sustaines the Great Toe. 
a T. 23. f. I, d d, f. 3. K K. b f, 4. H. c f. 3. M. d f. 3. L L. e f. I. L L.
f. f. I. M M. g f. 2. E E. h f. I. N. i f. 2. F F. k f. 4. K. F. 6. B. I. f. 4. l l
f. 5. C. m f. I. E. c c c.
In the Foote you shall take notice of seventeene Muscles. In the out side of 
the Foote there are five, viz. the a Pedieus and the foure interossei d externi. 
In the sole of the Foote you shall observe twelve, viz. the Brevis Digiti c FLexor
or little-Toe bender, the three d Lumbricales, those which are made out of the 
Massa e Carnea, the foure external Interosseans and as many f internal. 
Upon each side of the Foote is placed one Muscl, viz. the Abductor g Pollicis;
and Minimi Digiti abductor. 
In the hollow of the foote, there is placed another Massa carnea, spread under 
the first, and cleaving immediately to the Bones, it may be perfectly divided into 
foure or five portions, although in the middle spaces of the Bones of Metatarsus the
Musculi Interossei are conteined. 
Furthermore in the Sole of the Foote you shal find that same Internal Muscle 
which is opposed to the Abductor Pollicis or Great-Toe withdrawer, like unto the
Antethenar in the Hand. It may be called i Musculus Transversalis. 
Chap. 46. Of the Veines, Arteries and Nerves belonging 
to the Limbes. 
The Veines of
the upper 
Limbes.
Thee Veines of the Limbes begin in the Arme at the Arm-pit, and in the Feet they 
take their Original from the Groines. 
Axillaris.
The Vena k Axillaris neare the Arme-pits does produce the Humeralis, which is 
called the l Cephalica or Head-Veine. It has no Arterie to accompanie the same, 
and it holds its Course through the whole Radius.
A little

Chap. 46. Of the Veines, Arteries, &c. 255 
Thoracica.
A little after it sendes forth the m Thoracica which is expanded into external parts 
of the Chest, and meets with smal twigs of the Vena n azygos. 
Basilica.
It is afterward termed o Basilica and by the Bending of the Arme, it is divided 
into two branches. The p one of which creeps all along the inside of the Cubitus;
the other being a external descends beneath the Skin unto the Hand. 
a T. 23. f. 2. G. b f. 2. a a a a. c f. 4. L. f. 6. A. d f. 6. e e e. e f. 6. D D. f.
f. 5. d d d d. g 1. f. 3. O. f. 5. b b. h f. 3. P. f. 5. c. i f. 5. b b. e k T. 24. f. 1
A. l. f. 1. B B B. m f. 1. l. m m. n T. 12. f. 1. a a a a. o T. 24. f. 1. C C.
P f. 1. e e. &C. a T. 24. f. 1. x. y. &c.
Mediana. 
The Ramus internus or inner branch is called Mediana b Vena, and it receives 
a branch of the c Cephalica below the bending of the Arme, where it is called the 
Cephalica or Basilica. These three Veines are opened beneath the Bending of the 
Arme. 
But the Basilica has an d Artery under it or very neare it, and e Nerve and the 
Tendon of Musculus f Biceps, which bends the Arme: which parts must (in the 
opening of a veine) be avoided, for if they happen to be cut, they bring great In- 
conveniencies to the Arme. 
The Cephalica being stretched out upon the g Radius neare the wrist, diverts to 
that part of the hand termed Metacarpium, that it might with its twigs water the 
Hollow of the Hand. 
Salvatelie.
Between the Ring-finger and the little finger, they place the h Salvatella veine, 
which is wont to be opened; between the thumb and the fore finger, there is another 
opened, which is called Vena i pollicis of the thumbe veine. 
The Mediana k vena is totally external and runs under the Skin, into the palme 
of the Hand. 
The Basilica creepers through the l internal and external parts of the Cubit, with 
a two-headed branch. 
Anastomosis of
the Veines and
Arteries.
Now the Veines have one thing peculiar to them in the Limbes viz. that they 
manifestly do communicate with the Arteries. This Galen proves in his third 
Book of Natural faculties, the last Chapter, And up and down in other parts of 
his works. Which thing is so manifest that it ought not to be called into question. 
The Valves of
the Veins.
Moreover the veines in the m Limbes and internal Jugulars have Valves. In the 
greater channells and in the division of the lesser ones there are n two on each side, 
one opposed to the other and placed interchangeably. 
b 1. t t. &C. c f. f. f f. d f. 2. A. by L. e f. 3. I. I. &C. f T. 22. f. I. G. g
T. 24. f. 1. i i. &c. h f. I a   i. f. b k f. I. g l f. I. o o x. y. &c. m f. 7. the
whol n f. 8. the whole.
Their Use.
Now we may doubt or their use since the circulation of the blood has been found 
out, for the common opinion was that they were placed in the Limbes and in the 
internal jugular to stop the exceeding flux of blood into those outmost parts which 
are in continual motion. But those that hold the Circulation of the Blood, do say 
their use is to hinder the flowing back of the Blood which ascends upwards unto the 
Heart, according to the opinion of Dr. Harvy, unto which I willingly give my 
Assent.
The Arteries.
Axillaris.
Let Us Pass on from the Veines to the Arteries of the Arme. The Ramus super-
clavius proceeding to the Arme-pits, is termed a Axillaris. It accompanies the 
Vena Basilica, whereas there is no Arteria Cephalica.
Thoracica.
Neare the Arme-pits it produces the b Thoracica and in its progress bestowes 
certaine twigs upon the bordering Parts, and being lengthened out as far as to the 
bending of the Arme, it is divided into two c branches, which are carryed on, to the 
Inside of the Hands.
For the outside of the Hand above the Metarcarpium, is void both of Muscles 
and Arteries.
The

256 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book V
Rami minores.
The other d Branch being drawn out upon the Inside of the Radius, is felt to beat 
in the wrist. 
The other running streight along the Ulna is with its Cosin spread out into the 
hand according to the length of the Thumbe and of the little Finger, so as to bestow 
of their twigs upon every Finger. 
The Nerves.
I shall in the same Method dispatch the Nerves of the whole Hand. 
Out of the Holes of the foure lower Vertebra’s of the f Neck, and the two first
Vertebras, of the g Back, h five or sixe Nerves take their Original, which being over- 
whelmed under the Muscle scalenus, they are brought under the Clavicula, as far as 
to the Arm-hole, where they are i twisted one within another, like the strings of a 
Cardinals Hat. 
a T. 24. f. 2. A. b f. 2. c. d. c f. 2 C. B. d f. 2. B. e f. 2. C. f f. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
g f. 3. I. h f. 3. a. b. c. d. e. i f. 3. X X.
Afterwards the foure superior ones are under the Deltoides scattered over the in- 
ternal part, accompanying the Vena basilica and the Artery of the Arm, and creep- 
ing betweene the Muscles Biceps and the Brachieus externus. 
The a fift and sixt b Nerve, being bowed back under the scapulary Muscle Ro- 
tundus major, they are disseminated into the hinder Muscles of the Head. 
There remaine then the Quatuor Prime alreadie described, which being carryed 
through the Arme and Cubit; they are dispersed into the said Cubit and the Hand 
Primus.
The Primus e Nervus beneath the head of the shoulder is over-whelmed in the 
Coracoidæus and drawne along under the inner side of the Biceps, and lurking under 
the Tendon of the said Muscle, it joines it self to the Vena Cephalica, where it growes
small: also it is placed beneath that Veine, below the bending of the Arme. 
Secundus.
The Second d Nerve being undivided and thicker, does descend to the bending of 
the Arme, being covered only with fat, and at the bending of the Arme it is placed 
beneath the Arteria and Vena Basilica.
Howbeit the Vena Basilica a little below the Cubit does, towardes the interior 
part, recede a little from that Nerve, that it may be united to the Vena Cephalica. 
But foure fingers beneath the bending of the Arme, being alwaies superintendent
to the Basilica, it passes undivided along, unto the wrist, the veine appeares above. 
At the Wrist tis cleft into ten small branches affording two little twigs to every 
finger, which crepe along the sides of the said fingers. 
You shall observe by the way, that three fingers breadth beneath the bending of
the Cubit, it is covered by the Muscles which bend the wrist and Cubit, which arise 
out of the internal Tuberositie of the Arme.
Tertius.
The third e Nerve is carryed along undivided unto the Angona, where being 
conveighed through a Cleft which is betweene the Elbow and the inner Condylum
or Tuberosite of the Arme, according to the length of the Cubit, and being drawne
out over the Cubitæus externus, it is carryed unto the wrist, towards the little finger. 
And therefore by leaneing on the elbow, the whole Arme is benumbed. Being di- 
vided neare the Hand into foure branches, it is spred into the out-side, of the Hand 
or Back of the Hand. 
a T. 24. f. 3. f f. b T. 24. f. 3. I I. c T. 24. f. 3. g g. d T. 24. f. 3. K K. e T.
24. f. 3. b b.
Quartus.
The fourth Nerve is the thickest of all interwoven with Veines and Arteries, and 
sunk deep in the Brachiæus externus; it is carryed from the forepart of the Arme
into the Hinderpart, and descending there through unto the Radius, and being carri- 
ed all along the same, it is joyned to the vena Cephalica, and loses it selfe at last
into the wrist.
The veines of
the lower
Limbes.
Poplitea.
I proceed unto the vessels of the Inferiour Limbes. The Crural b veine, does in
the groine produce a remarkable branch viz. The c saphena, which according to the 
longitude of the sutorius Musculus descends unto the Ham. Beneath which, in
the Anckle it constitutes the vena poplitea, which was opened in Times past. There
it transmits the branch which is in the upper part recurrent, above the Ham, unto
the crural veines, or the saphena receives that same branch, from those cruralls.
Afterward

Chap. 46. Of the Veines, Arteries &c. 257 
Afterward being divided into two parts it slips down unto the two external An- 
kles, but the greater portion takes its course unto the internal Ankle, where it 
formes the true e Saphena which is usually opened. 
Saphena.
It is termed corruptly Saphena, as if one would say Saphaia because of the Ap- 
parencie, which is a new name brought into use by the lace Greekes, unknowen to 
Galen. 
When the crural veine has produced the Saphena, it is soon after divided into 
four branches, of which, the two f external and lateral ones which are the shortest are 
disseminated into the superior Muscles of the Thigh, both the internal, namely the 
Biceps, and the external viz. the vasti and the Musculus Cruræus. 
a T. 24. f. 3. i i. b T. 24. f. 4. A. c T. 24. f. 4. a a a. d T. 24. f. 4. f f f. e T. 
24. f. 4. a. beneath f. T. 24. f. 4. b. &c.
Ischiadicus.
The Ramus tertius which penetrates into the a inner parts, is termed Ischiadi- 
cus. 
Muscularis. 
The fourth is called b Muscularis. 
The lesser
branches.
These branches being propagated, the Trunke of the Vena cruralis being split 
into two, descends unto the knee, being attended with the crural Artery branshched 
into two: But one of the c branches is aloft and waters the external parts, the other 
is more d deep: both of them do afford twigs to the neighbouring parts, and when 
they have reached unto the Ham, being spread along between the Soleus and the 
Gemelli, they descend to the two Ankles. 
But the external Ankle is princspally watered from the low-laid crural veine, 
yet so that in the compass of the Ankle two notable veines are observed. 
That which quarters upon the Malleolus internus or inner Ankle-bone, is the 
branch of the Saphena. That which takes its course beneath the malleolus, being 
spread out above the Tarsus, is a branch of the crurall Veine. 
Neither of these Veines can be safely opened unless they swel, by reason of the 
neighbouring arteries, which the Vena Saphena placed in the inner Ankle is free from. 
And this Veine is opened in all diseases aswel of Men as of Women. Yet neverthe- 
less in the Sciatica, the Veine beneath the Malleolus externus, is more advanta- 
geously opened, because it has greater Communion with the Part affected, namely 
the Coxendix or Hip. 
The Arteries. 
Cruralis.
The Distribution of e Arteria Cruralis, is not equal to the Vena Cruralis, be- 
cause it produces no Saphena. For a little lower than the Groine, it transmits two 
f within the Musculus triceps, which are lengthened out as far as to the Gloutij. 
Afterwards it sends forth g two, into the former parts of the Thigh. 
a T. 24. f. 4. c c. &c. b T. 24. f. 4 d d. c T. 24. f. 4. b b. b T. 24. f. 4. g g. 
d T. 24. f. 4. g g. e T. 24. f. 5. A A. f T 24. f. 5. &c. g T. 24 f. 5. d d.
&c.
Its branches.
And then the Cruralis descends undivided as far as to the Ham, where it is di- 
vided into two Branches; the a one of which does laterally creeper all along the out- 
side of the Leg upon the Musculus Peroneus. The other being thrust into the Mus- 
cle soleus, and sliding downe unto the Heele, is disseminated into the sole of the 
Foot, and the other is branched forth into the outside of the Foot.
The Vena Saphena has no Artery to attend it, and there is not any nerve near it, 
and therefore it may safely be opened. 
The Nerves of
the fore part.
The first. 
The Nerves of the foreside of the Thigh are two, distinguished in their original, 
but so as they soon grow together and become one cord, which is carried entire 
without any division, unto the Groin. Where it is distributed into five c branches, 
commonly wrapped up in a Membrane, which being dispersed on every hand into 
the Muscles of the fore part of the Thigh, they are branched out as far as to the whirl 
bone of the Knee.
Now the Rise of these Nerves is in the d three lowest Vertebra’s of the Loyns, nei-
ther is it visible, unlesse the Muscle Psoa be torn asunder, within which they lie hid. 
Kk Then

258 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book V. 
esecond. 
Then besides those fore-mentioned, you shal see another smal Nerve, drawn 
through the oval hole of the Os Pubis and spent upon the neighbouring Muscles viz. 
the Triceps. 
Of the Hind-
part.
The first.
A great and very thick Nerve does glide along the hinder part of the Thigh, which 
1in its Original is made up somtimes of three, oftener of four portions, which are bred 
out of three or four of the upper holes of Os sacrum, and being carried along 
through the cavity of Os Ischii, which is seated between the spines of the said Os Ili-
um through the internal and hindermost Muscles of the Thigh, undivided, sometimes 
doubled and solitary without the society of a vein and Artery, as is ordinary in other 
Nerves of the Body, it is carried into the Ham; where being divided into two, som- 
times into g four, it bestows little smal twigs (considering its bulk) upon the 
Neighbouring Parts. 
a T. 24. f. 5. i i b T. 24. f. 5. l l. c T. 24. f. 6. B C D. &c. d T. 24. f. 6.
3. 4. 5. e T. 24. f. 6. E E. f T. 24. f. 6. 6. g T. 24. f. 6. i. k. l. &c.
Its Branches.
The other a Branch descends through the Calf of the Leg to the Heel, dealing out 
little Nerves in its passage, and being drawn through the Cleft of the inner Ankle- 
bone, it is distributed into the sole of the Foot in as many Branches as there are
Fingers. 
Another is carryed into the b fore part of the Foot, fastened unto the Perone,
and so slipping downe along unto the external ankle, and when it is come thither, it is 
spread abroad into the upper side of the Foot, as was said of the former. 
A Bastard Sci-
atica what?
This exceeding great and thick Nerve being ill disposed or disease, a Bastard 
Sciatica is thereby caused, which consists wholly therein; there is a grievous paine, 
which afflicts not only the Hip, but reaches into the Thigh, the ankle and Foot, name-
ly to all places whether the Nerve which comes from the diseased Hip does reach 
Fernelius in the 18. Chap. of the 6. Book of his Pathology, and therefore in this
bastard sciatica Causticks are to be applied, and Issues made at the bending of the
Buttocs, also those parts must be anoynetd and smeared with an Epispastick or
drawing Plaster. 
You shal observe by the way in a bastard sciatica, that those nerves are watered 
by the Hypogastrick veines and the Arteries above the same, and therefore the nerves 
cannot be dried unless the Hypogastrick veines are emptied, by many times letting 
blood in the Armes and Feet, and by Hori-leeches often applied to the Veines of 
the Fundament. 
Now Galen in the 8 Chap. of his 16. Book of the use of the parts of our Body, 
shewes the reason why this same Nerve is not mixed with other fore nerves as it is
in the Nerves of the Arme, but is carried behind the thigh; viz. Because the joynt
of the Arme stands farther from the Vertebra’s of the Neck, than the joynt of the 
Thigh does from the Vertebra’s of the Loines and Os sacrum. 
The second.
About the Beginning of this great Nerve, there is another adjoined, which rise- 
ing out of the third hole of the Os sacrum, and being carried along above the spine
of Os sacrum, it is branched out into the Musculi Gloutij and the Flexores Tibiæ, 
as far as to the Ham. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Varices
what they bee?
Their Cure.
Whether a 
veine cut off
will grow
againe?
Diseases of the Veines belonging to the Limbes, especially to the Leg and Thigh,
are the Varices which are knottie dilatations, in which the Blood is collected, as it 
were into Certaine Satchels. Now they are cured with astringents with a close and 
convenient ligature. Or the veines are pricked and the blood let out, or at the be- 
ginning of the varix the largest vein which gives nourishment to the rest, or the be- 
ginning it selfe, is tied up and cut off. Many conceive that the veines cut off are bred 
againe; they bring for an example the veines which are seen in a very great Sarco-
ma or fleshy Excrescence; but Fernelius has rightly observed, that they are not 
veines, but channels between the Skin which nature has framed as gutters to water
and nourish the Sarcoma or fleshy Excrescence. 
Many

Chap. 46. Of the Veins and Arteries, &c. 259 
Many thinke that the veines which are cut, being tied together with a string do 
grow againe, which I do not believe. 
Hippocrates cals the veines Spiracula Corporis, the vents of the body or the brea- 
thing holes thereof, which being opened, the Body is aired: and he saies chat when the 
Veines are dried, they draw sharp and cholerick humors in burning fevers. Also 
the same Author saies, that the veines do draw more than the flesh Lib. I. de Mor- 
bis. Especially if they be more hot and dry than ordinary. 
Bloody sweats
whence they
proceed?
When the Veines being debilitated through Sickness of the Liver, become nau- 
seant and enclined as it were to vomit, they suffer the Blood to run out, not only 
through the mouthes of the upper and lower veines, but also through the Skin of 
the whole Body, in manner or a bloody sweat, which I have observed two or three 
times.
The motion of
the vessels how
abolished? 
A stoppage of the Veines and Arteries, does often happen in Plethorick bodies, 
so that in all places in which the pulse is wont to be felt, the motion of the Arteries 
is abolished; in which case Hippocrates commends blood-letting, as a meanes to 
put the vesselles into motion againe. 
Somtimes the Pulse of all the Arteries is intercepted, not excepting the Groine 
or crurall Arteries, the Motion of the Heart stil remaining, which disposition if it 
continue long it kills the Patient. But if the motion of the Heart be perished like- 
wise, the Patient dies suddenly. I have seen two that had no pulse at all, only 
their Heart continued beating, who lived sixteen yeares, but in extreme weakness. 
Balduinus Ronsæus saw one in the same condition, as he affirms in his medicinal 
Epistles.
How the moti-
on of the pulse
in the Arteries
can be stopped,
while the Heart
moves. 
Hereupon, a question may be raised, how the pulsation of the Arteries can be 
stopped whiles the Heart beates after its wonted manner, though slowly; whether 
it be not necessary in such a Case that the Aorta be obstructed neare the Heart, and 
that the irradiation and influx of the arterial blood be by that meanes intercepted. 
And then the Blood of the veines approaches the Heart, being drawne thither in the 
diastole or dilatation thereof, that it may receive the sealed of Vitality in the right 
ventricle; and being afterwards driven forth by the Systole or Contraction into 
the vena cava, the vital spirits are forcibly carried into the length of the channel, 
and by the mutual anastomoses of the veines and Arteries, they are communicated 
to the said Arteries with the blood. I have in some persons observed that the moti- 
on of their Arteries hath been frequently intercepted or became very unequal for 
some daies together, afterwards the impediment being removed which was near the 
Heart, I found the same inequality in the Cæliac Arterie, which did beat vehe- 
mently, although the pulse appeared equal and wel ordered in the rest of the body. 
This, I conceive happened by reason of a little bit of flesh or fat, which ascending 
to the Gates of the Heart did cause such a pulse so inordinate, and being repelled or 
drawen back unto the Cæliac Arterie which is a branch of the Aorta, it did produce 
such an irregularity as aforesaid. 
The Pulse is
last felt in the
crural Arterie
The Crural Arterie, seeing that it is evident in the Groine, and subject to our fee- 
ling, the pulse thereof is easily discerned, being vehement in regard of the great- 
ness of the Arterie, and the last which remaines after the pulse is extinguished in 
other extreme parts of the Body, wherein it is usually felt to beaten. And there- 
fore when no pulse can be felt in the other usual places, it must be sought for, c ex 
amined in this crural Artery, not only in Men but in women also, provided the 
Rules of Honesty be not broken. And if when a disease is at the Height, we can 
feel no pulse in this part, death is neare at hand. 
Aneurisma,
what it is?
The Dilation or Section of an Arterie happens chiefly in the external parts, 
where the lesser Arteries reside which are branches of the great Trunk. And this 
disease is termed Aneurisma. It is seldome seen in the trunk of the Aorta because 
of its thickness. 
The End of the Fift Book.
Kk2

260 
THE 
SIXTH BOOK 
OF THE 
ANATOMY 
AND 
PATHOLOGY 
OF 
John Riolanus, 
THE 
KINGS PROFESSOR 
OF 
PHYSICK.
A new Osteologia or History 
of the Bones. 
Wherein be treates of the Bones, Ligaments and Gristles of the whole Body,
by which the frame of the Body is compacted together, the Muscles being re- 
moved, handling al the Diseases and symptomes which happen unto the
Bones. 
CHAP. 1. 
The Method.
THe Scope of Nature and of the Physitian about the Body of Man its 
Fabrick, are contrary, the one unto the others Nature intending
to make up the Body of Man, begins at the most simple parts, and so 
proceeds by little and little to the more compounded ones, until she
finish her work. But the Physitian, that he may attaine unto the 
knowledg of this workmanship of Nature, proceeds gradually from
the more compound unto the most simple parts; so that in his Analysis or Resolu- 
tion, these parts are last which were first in the Composition. So when we pull
down

Chap. 2. Of the Profit of the Doctrine of Bones. 261 
down an house, first we throw off the Ceiling, then we demolish the walles, and 
lastly we dig up the foundation. Wee in like manner in our takeing asunder this 
House of Mans body by Anatomical Administration, do now in the last place treat 
of the Bones which are the foundation of the whole Body, and placed before al o- 
ther parts, we shal consider of them in the way of a new kind of Osteologia. or Hi- 
story of the Bones, which is no less, c necessary than the doctrine of the Skelleton 
of the Bones.
Why we treats
of the Bones in
the last place? 
Having therefore explained and demonstrated the softer parts of the Body by 
way of Analysis, I proceed to the last and more solid parts thereof, which accord- 
ing to the Synthetick method, or order of composition, are the first, such as are 
the Bones, which are now otherwise considered than when they are boiled and dried 
and so demonstrated. 
Chap. 2. Of the great Profit of this new Osteologie, or
Doctrine of the Bones. 
The Doctrine
of Bones de-
monstrated in a
dead body, is
better, & more
necessary.
THere is a two-fold Doctrine of the Bones; one is demonstrated in dried Bones, 
which have been prepared by boyling; the other is shewed in the Bones of the 
Body, whiles they remain naturally fastened one unto another. Both these Do- 
ctrines are useful in the Art of Healing, and for such as would have a perfect know- 
ledg in the Body of Man. 
For the per-
fect knowledg
of Mans Body.
And
For in the dried Bones, in which commonly this Doctrine is taught, nothing is 
learned, saving the external shape, posture, and composition or frame of one with 
another: But a diligent observation of the Bones, while they are knit and fastened 
one unto another, is more conducing to practice. Because the fastenings of the 
Bones one unto another by Gristles and Ligaments, also by the several sorts of Arti- 
culation, or joynting, are in some dried Bones quite different from what they are 
in such as be moist; for in dried Bodies you would think that some Cavities are 
hollow, and Cup-fashioned, the Cavities being empty, and bereaved of their Car- 
tilages; which notwithstanding appear shallow in a fresh Body, the Cavities being 
full of Gristles; and contrary-wise, you would in a Skeleton say, that some Ca- 
vities are shallow, which are deep in a fresh Body, the hollowness being encreased 
by a Gristle brim. 
Moreover, The external Conformation and Quality of the Bones, is more evi- 
dently discerned in the Bones of a Carkass, which loses much in Bones that are pre- 
pared by boyling: as for example, the Gristly incrustations of the extremities, 
the Membrane which is about the Bones, and the Mucous, or slimy substance lod- 
ged between the Bones; also the internal substance, or Marrow, or Marrowish
Juyce, are manifestly discovered in the Bones of a fresh Body, which are not at all in 
dry and withered Bones. 
For the Pra-
ctice of Physick
Than the
Vulgar.
And therefore in respect to the Practice of Physick, and the Cure of vitiated 
bones, and such as are broken, or out of Joynt, it is necessary, diligently to look 
into, and carefully to axamine in a dead Body, the Natural Conformation of the 
Bones, and their conjunction one with another. I do not dislike the use of dried 
Bones, to teach and demonstrate the vulgar Osteology, or Doctrine of bones, at 
which we must begin, as we have done in this Treatise; provided the Demonstra- 
tion of the bones in a dead Body be afterward added to the former. 
Where not-
withstanding
we ought to
begin.
For by this Repetition, and Representation of the bones, we shal imitate the Or- 
der and Design of Nature, which in the Generation of the Parts of our Body, is 
wont in the first place to form the bones; but she finishes, and perfects them after 
al other parts, for they grow as long as the body encreases, according to Aristotle. 
And if we beleeve Hippocrates in the Sixt Book of his Epidemicks; Women have 
their Courses, til their bones have attained their utmost perfection. 
Chap.

262 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
Chap. 3. What is to be observed in the Bones of a dead Body
not boyled.  
The Natural 
Constitution 
of a Bone in 
what it consists? 
In what the
preternatural.
IN the first place, you shal observe the Natural Constitution of the Bone, that 
you may discern the fault of a bone which is out of Order. 
A bone in a living Body naturally disposed, ought to be, 1. Hard, to procure 
the bodies stability. 2. It ought to be Oyly without, because it is nourished. 3 It
must be covered with the Periostean Membrane, that it may have sence; for if it
lose the Periosteum, it becomes senceless. 4. It must be white tinctured with a 
moderate redness, because it is a Spermatick part, and is nourished with the dewy 
vapor of the blood. 5. It must be hollow, or spongy, that it may continue the sub- 
stance of Marrow, or a Marrowy Liquor to nourish it self withal. 6. It must be at 
the ends crusted with Gristles 7. It must be anointed as it were with an oyly moi- 
sture to facilitate its motion. 8. It must have a continued and even substance.
And therefore you shal know that a Bone is misaffected, if it be soft, as Ruellius,
Fernelius and Hollerius have observed, that in some persons the Bones of their Bo- 
dies were by sickness become so soft and flexible, that you might bend them which
way you pleased, like wax. Aristotle in the third book of his History of Animals, 
saies that bones are not flexible, neither are they apt to split, but only subject to
break. Scaliger in his commentary adds: I have seen the thigh bone by reason of
the venerious disease, or by use of I know not what medicaments, bowed like an 
horne. Geographers write that in a Country of Ethiopia, the inhabitants have na-
turally from their birth bodies so flexible, that they can turne and wind them into
any posture. I have red in Hippocrates of a boy that was borne without bones, have- 
ing the Principal parts of his body otherwise distinct. Foresius saw a boy made 
after the same manner in some of his members. 
Wherefore if a bone shal be dried without, it declares a distemperature of the
part: if it be white it argues want of heat, if red, inflammation; if black, rotten-
ness and blasting. If a bone be sensible, there is some secret fault in its substance,
or in its periostean membrane. If it be solid and concrete without cavities or parts, 
it renders the body heavie and sluggish, and can containe no marrow. Plinie relates 
that there are some that lived having solid bones and without marrow, which are 
very rare and are termed Cornei. The signe of such a Constitution is never to thirst
and never to sweat. They are called Cornei from the Cornel or Dog-tree; because 
the male Cornel has no pith or marrow. See Rhodiginus. Such a one the Syra- 
cusian Lygdamus is reported to have been, who in the three and thirteth Olympiade 
was the first who at the Olympick Games, became Victor at all Exercises and won 
the Paneratian Crowne: his bones were found to have no marrow in them, as So- 
linus relates in his 4 Chapter. Antigonus in his Book of wonders Chap. 8 
Writes that the bones of a Lion are so solid that you may strike fire out of them as 
out of a flint; Howbeit Columbus denies that such bones are void of marrow. Which
Epicurus, contradicting aristotle maintaines, as possible in the 8. Booke of Athenæus
his Deipnosophists. Aldrovondus has observed that among Fowles the Estrich 
has solid bones, void of marrow. But in case a bone should be deprived of its Gri-
stly Crust and of its periostean Membrane, it is moved with difficulty, and has no 
feeling at all. If a bone become uneven and prominent so as to have bunches upon 
it, it is termed Exostosis, which is an effect and concomitant of the venereous pocks 
when it is of long standing and confirmed, howbeit it may spring from some other 
cause. Finally being depraved and mishapen, or disjointed, it hinders and mars 
the Action of the whole body or its parts; and being divided in its substance, it argues
solution of Continuity by some cleft or fracture, and although a broken bone by 
the mediation of a Callus becomes soddered together one the outside: Yet does it
still remaine divided within. 
CHAP.

Chap. 5. Of Articulations or Joyntings of the Bones. 263 
Chap. 4. Of the Nourishment, Sence, and Marrow of the 
Bones.
The remote
matter that
nourishes the
Bones.
The Immedi-
ate matter.
Whether the
Bones have
Veines?
Whether they
have Arteries?
Or Nerves? 
While the Bone did live and was nourished, it had a twofold sustenance, the one 
remote, the other conjunct or immediate according to Aristotle, in his Book of the 
parts of live-wights. The remote Sustenance of the Bones, is the thicker and more ear- 
thy part of the blood. The next or immediate is the marrow, or marrowy liquor, 
which is contained in the hollowness and porositie of the bones. Hippocrates in his 
Book de Alimento, saies that the marrow is the Nutriment of the bones, and there- 
fore it is that they are Joined together or soddered up by a callus. How can it be 
(may some man say) that the blood should nourish the bones, seeing they have no 
veines, which are the channels to conveigh blood to all parts? Hippocrates saies in his 
book de Ossium Natura, that of all the bones, the lower Jaw-bone alone has veines. 
Galen indeed in his 8. Booke de Placitis, attributes unto every bone a Veine greater 
or Lesser according to the Proportion of the Bones: and in his Comment upon the 
first Booke of Humors, he saies that there is a Vessel distributing blood allowed to 
every bone. But he confesses in the last chapter of his 16. Booke de Usu Par-
tium, that the veines of the Bones are so small and fine, that they are not so much as 
visible in the larger sort of Animals or Live-wights, because nature according to the 
Necessity and Indigence of the Parts, best owes upon some greater, upon other lesser 
Veines, moreover the little holes which are found about the extremities of the bones, 
do manifestly declare that somwhat there is which goes into the said Bones 
now their is nothing goes into the bones but little Veines. If we believe Platerus,
the Arteries doe no where enter into the bones, seeing the spirits can easily penetrate 
into any of the bones without the service of the Arteries to carry them. Neither do 
I conceive that there are little nerves diffused through the substance of the Bones to 
give them the sense of feeling, because all the feeling they are capable of, is by 
means of the periostean Membrane which does incompass them. Nevertheless Nico-
las Massa call’s God to witness that he saw a Man, who had an ulcer in his thigh, so 
that the bone was bare, in which bone there was a sence of paine, so that he could not 
endure to have it touched with a rough instrument in regard of the paines it caused, 
and it was freed from the periostean Membrane. Yea and he bored the bone, and 
found that it had the sense of feeling within the same, which he therefore thought 
good to declare, that Anatomists might be moved to consider, whether some branches 
of nerves do not Penetrate into the substance of the bones. 
Threefold
Marrow of the
Bones.
We canot looke into the Cavities and Marrowes of the Bones; unless they be first 
broken. I observe a threefold Cavity of the bones and a threefold marrow. 
In the greater Cavities of the larger Bones, the Marrow is reddish; in the lesser 
Cavities of the smaller bones the marrow is whites; In the spungy bones there is 
contained a marrowy Liquor. 
Whether the
Marrow of the
Bones be com-
past with a
Membrane.
In the meane while you shall observe, that the marrow within the Cavity of the 
Bones is compassed with no membrane, neither is it made sensible by any little 
nerves penetrating the substance of the bone, as Paræus does imagine. Hippocrates 
himselfe, in his Booke de Principiis was the first that noted this. The Marrow 
of the  Back-bone is not like that marrow which is in other Bones, for it alone has 
membranes, which no other marrow has besides it. 
Chap. 5. Of Articulations or Jointings of the Bones. 
To the Arti-
culations of the 
Bones there
concurs.
LET us proceed to the Joinings-together of the Bones. 
There does concur to the Articulations of the Bones, the Head, the Cavitie, the 
Gristle, the Flegmatic moisture, and the Ligament. 
an Head.
Every Head is in its owne nature and original an Epiphysis, but in process of time 
it degenerates into an apophysis. The

264 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
The Head is within of a Light spungie and porous substance, being filled with 
blood or with a marrowy Juyce, on the outside it is covered with a very hard shell or 
bark, very thin and compact, which is crusted over with a smooth and polished 
Gristle. 
Now the Head of a Bone is a great and long, or short and flat, which is termed 
b Candysos 
A cavity. 
The Cavity of the Bone which receives the Head, is also crusted over with a Gri- 
stle, which if it be deep, it is called in Greek a Cotyle, if shallow, ’tis called b Glene. 
A Gristle.
It is somtimes encreased with a Gristlie brim, left the bones should too easily slip
aside, and fall out of their places. 
A flegmatick
Humor.
And in the Cavities themselves, there is contained a clammy, thick, and Oyly 
Pituitous Humor, to procure a more easie, and expeditious motion of the Bones, 
so we grease the Axle-trees of Coaches and Carts, that the wheels may turn more 
easily and quickly. Through want of the foresaid Humor in such as have the con- 
sumption, and are extreamly dried, while they go and stir their Limbs, one may 
hear as it were their bones knock one against another, and rattle in their Skins: As 
is proved by a memorable History, recorded by Symphorianus Campegius, in the 
Medicinal Histories of Galen; and as I my self have often times seen. 
A Ligament.
Now that the bones might be so knit together, as to make a Joynt, there is need 
of a Ligament or Band, whose substance is broad and round, its color white or bloo- 
dy, such as is the round Ligament which fastens the c Leg, and the d Thigh, and 
that which unites the e Astragalus with the f Pterna, and that of the Astragalus
with the three Bones of the Tarsus, which are termed g Æneiformia. For these 
bloody, or bloodyish Ligaments, are alwaies interposed between the bones, and are 
very hard; but those which are drawn about the Articulations, do alwaies appear 
white. So the Nerve-Gristly Ligaments, which are interposed between the Os Sa- 
crum, and Os Ilium, are observed to be bloody in a Woman newly delivered of her 
Child. 
Why the bones
are articulated.
Now every Conjunction of the Bones is made by Nature, either for Motions 
sake, or for Perspiration, or for the Passage of some certain Substance, or for the 
differencing of Parts, or for Security, and to preserve from violence. 
a T. 21. f 1. d d. f 4. a. b T 21. f 1. & 2. I I.
a T 21. f 4. B. b T 21. f 4. F. c T 21. f 7. a a. d T 21. f 8. a e T
21. f 5. A. f T 21. f 5. B. g T 21. f 5. E E E.
Conjunctions of the bones for Motions sake, are seen in the Fingers, Wrists, El- 
bows, Shoulders, Hips, Shanks, Ankles, Ribs, Spondyls; in a word, in al movable
Articulations. 
For Perspirations sake, we see bones joyned together in the Sutures of the Skul. 
For to give passage to some substance or other; we see the like conjunction at the 
production of the Pericranium, and at the through-fare of some certain Vessels, 
which go partly out, and partly in; to which intent the Sutures of the Skull were 
contrived. 
For Securities sake, and to avoid the violence of breaking, &c. we see the said 
Conjunction, in al such bones as are compounded of divers smaller ones. 
For the differing of parts, certain conjunctions of bones seem to have been contri-
ved in the Bones of the upper Jaw. 
Having laid this Foundation out of Galens II. Book, de Usu Partium, chap. 18. 
it is an easie matter to prove the sorts and differences of Articulations, out of the 
Doctrine of Galen himself. 
Two-fold con-
junction of
bones.
The Bones are joyned one with another, some by Articulation, or joynting; o-
thers by Symphysis, or cleaving together. 
What a joynt is.
A Joynt termed Articulus, is a Connexion of Bones, ordained either for motion, 
or for some other Cause. 
Sorts of joynts.
In respect of motion, there are two sorts of Joynts. The one is contrived for
manifest and strong motion, which is called Diarthrosis: The other is ordained for 
an

Chap. 5. Of the Articulations, &c. 265 
an obscure and difficult motion, or for none at all, and it is called Synarthrosis.
Particulars
of each sort. 
Of the former kind of conjunction of bones, viz. Diarthrosis, there are three 
three sorts, Enarthrosis, Arthrodia,and Gynglymos. 
Of the second kind of Articulation, viz. Synarthrosis, there are in like manner 
three sorts, Enarthrosis, Arthrodia,and Gynglymos; because Synarthrosis, and 
diarthrosis, do differ only in the quantity of the motion, as Galen does teach in 
his Book de Ossibus, which also he manifestly declares in his Book de Dissect. Mu- 
scul. Chap. 22. neare the end. and in the 13. Book de Ossibus. 
But because a Synarthrosis is ordained not only for motion, but for some other 
cause, as namely for perspiration, the transmission of some substance, the diffe- 
rencing of Parts, and to save from harm by stress and violence; it comprehends 
three other sorts under it, viz. Sutura, Harmonia, and Gomphosis. 
Examples of
the sorts. 
These six differences of Synarthrosis or joynting may be proved by sense and by 
Example. The a Ribs are joyned to the b Brest-bone by an Arthrodia, which in 
regard of motion may be referred to a synarthrosis. The c Bones of the wrist are 
coarticulate with the bones of the d Metacarpum (Galen de usu partium Lib. 2. 
Chap. 8.) but that synarthrosis is made by the way of Arthrodial. The e Astraga-
lus is joyned to the f Scaphoideus with an obscure motion, which is Enarthrosis. Lib. 
de Ossibus, Chap. 24. Gynglymos is found in the Vertebras of the g Back, which 
is to be counted as a kind of Synarthrosis; the Gynglimos of the other Vertebras, is 
a kind of Diarthrosis. Galen in his 26. Book de Compos. Med. secundum locos, 
and in his 12. Book de usu Partium, calls the sutures h of the Head synarthrosis. 

Also he cals the harmonia of the i inferior Jaw-bone, synarthrosis, in his Comment 
upon the Ninth part of the second book de Fracturis. The bones of the Sternon 
or Brest-blade k being immovable, are joined together by a synarthrosis. From Galen 
in his book de Ossibus and other places of his Writings, I could prove, that the Jaw- 
bone and the bones of the Brest-blade are Joined together by symphysis, because they 
grow together as the Perion comes to yeares, so that no markes are remaining of 
their former distinction. So Galen in his Book de Ossibus, calls the Conjunction 
of the inferior Jaw-bone with the Chin, Symphysis. 
Symphysis,
what it is?
Symphysis is an immovable union of the Bones, which is performed either with
somwhat intermediate or without. 
Its Differen-
ces.
In regard of the threefold Medium, some Symphysis is called Synchondrodis, from 
the Cartilage Gristle which is the Medium of the Union, a second is termed syneu- t 
rodis, from the nerve which is the medium, a third is called Syssarcodis from the 
fleshy Medium. To which we may add a fourth termed Neurochondrodis, because 
the Union is made by a Medium which is of a mixt nature, being partly nervy, and 
partly gristly. But more may be seen of this, in Galen his Doctrine of Bones.
a T. 10. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. &c. b f. 2. A A. c T. 21. f. 1. &2. F. d f. 1. H H. f.
2. G. e f. 5. A. f f. 5. C. g T. 10. f. 3. h T. 15. f. 1. a a. &c. i T. 8. f. 4. D.
k T. 10. f. 2. A A.
Its differen-
ces exemplified
The differences of symphysis, do appeare in the bones of the a lower Jaw, in the 
Bodies of the b Vertebras, in the bones of the c share one with another, and in the con- 
junctions of the d Ilian bones with the e Os sacrum, in the growing together of the 
vertebras of Os sacrum one to another, and of the epiphysis; and in the conjunction 
of the Os g Sphenoides with the Occiputs bones, and in the conjunction of other 
bones, which in children were divided, but in persons come to years, they are found 
growing together by Symphsis, sine Medio, such as are described by Galen in his 
Book de Ossibus.
The Ligaments which knit the bones together and that flegmatick humor where- 
with the bones are smeared, and the Gristles, both such as are common to divers 
bones articulated together, and likewise such as are proper to the particular bones 
to crust the ends of each of them; al these shal be treated of in our particular Muster
and Surveigh of the Bones. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
General dis-
eases of the
Bones.
Caries
The General Diseases of the Bones are, Caries or Rottenness, and putrefaction, 
LI which

266 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
which proceeds from a common, or extraordinary Cause, such as is the Venereal 
Pox.
Exostosis.
Exostosis, or a swelled knot upon a bone, which arises from the foresaid Cau- 
ses.
Kedmata. 
Kedmata, mentioned by Hippocrates, which are Chronical Diseases, proceeding 
from defluxions, common to al Joynts, but especially infesting the Hip-bone. Of 
these kind of Diseases, read the Medicinal Definitions of Gorræus, and Foesius
in his Oeconomia Hippocratis.
Hydrarthrosis.
Of kin to this, is Paracelsus his Synovia, or Hydrarthrosis, which is a continu- 
al Flux of wheyish or blood-watry Humor, out of exulcerated Joynts, especially
if the Nerves or Ligaments be Diseased. Hildanus in a peculiar Book on this Sub- 
ject, proves that this Disease Synovia (which was first so called by Paracelsus)
is the same with that Disease which is termed Meliceria, by Cornelius Celsus, 
Lib. 5. Cap. 26. 
A sure thing it is, that the bones being diseased, do drop blood, and Galen ob- 
served as much. 
Fracture.
The bones are likewise subject to Fracture, or breaking, and Luxation, Dislo-
cation, or disjoynting. Now a Fracture of a bone, is a Division made in a bone by 
some external Cause, cutting, or bruising the same. 
Its kinds.
There are two sorts of Fractures, a straight one, and an oblique, or crooked 
one. The former is according to the length of the bone, or overthwart.
The latter, or oblique is (if we believe Galen) too curiously differenced by 
the latter Physitians which have succeeded Hippocrates; for it is said to be Nail- 
fashioned, when the Fracture is partly straight, and partly circular; another sort 
is called Alphithedon, when the bone is broken all to shivers. 
Another sort there is, which is called Apotrausis, or Detractio whereby a 
Fragment of the bone is so taken away, that there remains a mark in the surface of 
the Bone. 
Another sort of Fracture, Hippocrates mentions, which he cals Apoclasma, and 
Galen terms Hapagma, when a bone is broken there where it is joyned with ano- 
ther bone.
Luxation 
Luxation, or Disjoynting, is a Disease of the bone in Scituation, when it is re- 
moved out of its place. 
There is a two-fold Luxation, or disjoynting of a bone, the one complete, when 
the Head of the bone is slipt out of its socket, and this is called Exarthrema, a 
being out of Joynt. 
Its sorts,
The other is Incomplete, and termed Pararthrema, when the bone is in some
measure only removed, and lengthened as it were, which is mostly seen in the sub-
luxation of the Thigh. In an Exarthrema, the Leg seems shorter than it was 
wont to be; in a Pararthrema it seems longer than usual. 
Causes,
The Causes of Luxation and Subluxation, that is to say, of perfect and im- 
perfect disjoynting of any Member, are external, or internal: The External are, a 
blow, a violent distorsion, or wrenching, a fall, and extension of a Member. The 
Internal causes are, a thin Humor, which does relax the Ligaments, or a thick Hu- 
mor which by little and little, fils the Cavity of the Joynt, and at last thrusts out 
the bone, by reason of an Anchylosis, which is bred. 
Anchylosis
Now Anchylosis, is a fault in the Articulation of bones, whereby the Cavity of
a bone, which ought to receive the Head of another bone, is filled up; be it what 
kind of Articulation it may be, either Enarthrosis, Arthrodia, or Gynglymos.
Hereupon the bone thus diseased, either is held bowed in, or remains stretched out, 
and stiff. And in case without the foresaid Anchylosis, the Tendons of the one 
side shal in the Limbs be cut in sunder, the straight or crooked bones do no longer
serve to bend or stretch out the said Limbs. 
Chap.

Chap. 6. Of the Bones of the Skull. 267
Chap. 6. Of the Bones of the Skull. 
Things to be
observed prin-
cipally.
HAving diligently considered the Articulations, or joyntings of the Bones one 
unto another, let us now take notice what is observable in every particular 
hone being fresh, which is not to be seen in the Skeleton, or in dried bones. I will 
proceed from Head to Foot, according as I am wont to do in my Dissection, and 
Demonstration of these parts. Now my Demonstration of the bones is two-fold;
the one I call Osteotome, or Bone-Dissection, in which the bones ate separated 
each from other; the other I term Ossifragium, in which the bones are broken, 
that their inner structure may be discerned. 
Two-fold
plate.
And in the first place, let us contemplate the two-fold Table of the Skull, or 
the double Skul-board which is thinner in Women, than in is in Men. 
The upper more is thicker, and harder, and more smoothly polished than the 
neather: but the lower is rough and furrowed as it were, that it might afford place 
for those Vessels which creep along the Dura Mater, from which some notable 
Vessels arise, which by the Ears do insinuate themselves between those two plates, 
or boards of the Skull, for to irrigate the intermediate space. 
Intermediate 
space. 
Why the Skull
is double?
Now that same intermediate space, is a certain spongy Substance, which receives 
and contains a Marrowy Juyce, serving for the nutriment of those bones. The 
which Marrowy Juyce is reddish, by reason of blood flowing out of the smal Veins 
scituate in those parts; which is wont then to flow out when the Skul of a living 
man is boared through with a Wimble, or other boaring Instrument. Now the 
Skull, according to Hippocrates in his Book de Vulneribus Capitis, is double in the 
middle of the Head, that is to say, hollow between two plates and boards, that it 
might contain a Marrowy Juyce to nourish the bones. Hippocrates adds. The 
whol Head, a smal part excepted, resembles a spunge ful of smal Caruncles, or lit- 
tle bits of flesh, which if you press, and squeeze with your finger, you shal perceive 
blood to drop out of them: also you shal see smal Veins running up and down, 
which abound with blood. 
Out of the foresaid Caruncles, being bruised with a vehement blow, the blood is 
squeezed, which putrefying, does corrupt the bone, which in the mean while ap- 
pears sound on the out side: but the Sanies sweating out from the inner plate or 
Skul-board, does corrupt and putrefied the very brain it self. And if so be when 
the Skul is razed, you see blood come forth, do not therefore conclude that the 
Fracture penetrates the inner plate; because that blood flows out of the space 
which is between the two places, or boards of the Skul. 
Proud flesh in
Head-wounds,
whence it pro-
ceeds?
That same spungy Hypersarcosis, or breeding of proud flesh, which grows up in 
wounds of the Head, is bred out of the foresaid Duplicature of the Skul-bone, as 
Hippocrates has observed. Touching the Fungous Excrescences of the brain, 
whether they are bred from the broken bone, or from the Dura Mater, see Sen- 
nertus in the first Book of his Practice. 
But Hippocrates his Caruncles, are vainly sought for in this intermediate space, 
whatever Fallopius pleads to the contrary in his Book of the Wounds of the Head, 
unless a man would call the spungy substance of the bones Sarcia, or Caruncles, in 
regard of their Function. 
The space be-
tween the skul-
plates, how
called.
This intermediate space interposed between the two plates of the Skul, is called 
by Hippocrates, Diploe. Howbeit, Galen contrary to the Opinion of the Ancient 
Physitians, cals the second, and inmost plate of the Skul, Diploe, in the sixt Book 
of his Method of Healing. 
The use there-
of.
The Use of this Diploe, Duplicature, or spungy substance, is three-fold: First 
to receive blood for the nourishment of the Skul: Secondly, That the Fleshy Ex- 
crescence in the Fractures of the Skul, might grow out of it: Thirdly, That the 
Fumes of the Brain might more easily be exhaled. 
Why there are
two plates.
Somtimes an Humor is collected between the two plates by way of translocation,
Ll2 which

268 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
which being in process of time corrupted, does cause most excessive pains, which 
often happens in an inveterate Venereal Pox, when the Skull is knobbed, and bun- 
ched with a certain Exostosis. 
This double plate or board, of the Skul has been made by a wonderful contri- 
vance of Nature, left in al blows upon the Head, the wound should penetrate the 
whol substance of the bone. Hence it comes to pass, that somtimes one plate is cleft 
while the other remains unhurt. 
The Whore-masters Pox does often-times eat through the external place, and 
somtimes through both the plates, without killing the Patient, who lives a long 
time after; as Palmarius avouches in Chap. 4. of his Book de Lue Venerea. The 
like Example you may read in the 18. Chapter of Benivenius his Book de Abditis 
Morborum Causis. And I my self have often observed the same. 
The Sutures,
The Sutures, although they are a very closely united in living Persons, yet are 
they somtimes very ape to gape, and to move pain, as Galen reports, towards the 
end of his third Commentary in Officinam Hippocrasis. 
a T 15. f 3. a a. b b. f 4. b b. &c.
Whether an
Issue may be
made in the
Crown of the
Head?
But they seem not at al inclined to any looseness, or gaping about the meeting to- 
gether of the Sagittal and Coronal Sutures in Persons come to ripeness of Age, 
where a Fontanel is a made; and therefore I have often found by Experience, that 
this part may without any detriment have a Caustick applied thereunto. Which 
kind of Practice, Fabricius commends in his Chyrurgery; others dislike it as dan- 
gerous, viz. Mathæus de Grandis, Vesalius, Lib. 1, Cap. 6. of his Anatomy. 
Baptista Montænus in his 36. Counsel. Zechius in his Counsels. And Bapti- 
sta Carcanus in his Book of Head-wounds. See Claudinus his Counsels. I 
confess, that somtimes in Children, this part being soft and gristly, is long ere it grow 
hard over that it is in grown persons; and Galen has seen it in such Younglings to 
move and pant, Gal. Lib. 13. Method. Cap, 22. And in such a case to apply a 
Cautery, were dangerous. The Africans did burn an Issue in the Crowns of their 
Childrens Heads; as Mercurialis shews from Herodotus. They did burn the 
Veins of the Crown of their Heads, with scalding Oesypus, or Sheeps Grease; and 
in case any Convulsion happened they did Remedy the same by the sprinkling of 
Goats piss thereon. 
Whether Black
moors have Su-
tures in their
skuls?
It is written by Herodotus, Aratus, and Arrianus in the Life of Alexander the 
great, that the Heads of the Æthiopians, and Egyptian had no Sutures, which 
gave Pareus occasion to write, That the Æthiopians  and Moors, and those which 
inhabit hot Regions towards the South, and the Æquinoctial Line, have Skuls 
harder than ordinary, having none, or very few Sutures in them. The falsity 
whereof did plainly appear, when I dissected a very swarthy Black-moor publick-
ly in the Medicinal Schools, whose Skul was in al things like one of ours. 
Cavities of
the Head.
In the Head there are many remarkable Cavities, which the Anatomists call 
Sinus. These you shal diligently search for, that you may know whether they are 
void and empty, covered with a thin Membrane, and what communion they have 
one with another. 
Now the Cavities are, on each side four. The Maxillary Cavity, which lies 
concealed within the upper Jaws. The Frontal Cavity, seated in the Forehead, 
by the Eye-brows. The Spbenoidean Cavity, which lies hidden under the Seat
or Saddle of the Sphenoides. The Mastoidean, which is contained within the
Mastoides. They are al empty, and covered over with a thin Membrane, only the 
Mastoidean, is hollow indeed; but has no Membrane, but is distinguished into se-
ven, eight, or nine little Cels, as we see in a Bee-hive. 
The Entrance of the Maxillary Cavity within the cavity of the Nostrils, is to 
be seen on the side of Os Spongiosum. 
The Entrance of the Frontal Cavity is seen in the highest and in most parts of 
the Nostrills. 
The Entrance of the Sphenoidean Cavity we find to be deep. Within the nostrils
the spongy bones being taken away. 
The

Chap. 6. Of the Bones of the Skull. 269 
The Ingress of the Maxillary Cavity, is evident without cutting the Bones. The 
Ingress of the Frontal Cavity is evidently perceived, the Frontal bone being cut in 
sunder above the Eye-brows: The Ingress of the Sphenoidean Cavity, is discer- 
ned, as soon as the inner place of the Sphenoides is taken away. The entrance of 
the Mastoidean Cavity, is contained in the left side of the Concha, neer the Apo- 
physis Mastoides, and cannot be seen unless the arched Vault of the Concha be bro- 
ken, or the porous auditorius pulled in pieces. 
Whether flegus
may be collect-
ed within the
Cavity of the
Sphenoides.
Sylvius conceives and demonstrates from Galen that flegm being transmitted 
through the little holes of the upper plate, is collected and heaped up within the 
Sphenoidean cavity, and thence conveighed into the Palate: which way of the 
passage of Excrements, is by Vesalius, Columbus, Fallopius, and Valverda rejected: 
who contradict Galen in this point, and maintain that this excrement is voided 
through the neighbouring holes which rest upon the Sella Sphenoidea. 
The use of
the sinus Sphe-
noides.
The reason of Gallen and Sylvius is, that it is better the excrements should be 
strained, and kept up for a season in those Cavities, than that a man should be 
continually spitting, and holding his mouth evermore open. For although the 
Sphenoidean Cavities, are in the dissections of dead bodies empty, and appear 
not to be ful either of flegm or serosities: probable notwithstanding it is, that the 
serous humor which flowers and distils out of the Choana, through the sive-like 
plate of the Sella equina, is translocated into the Cavities which are beneath, and 
from them powered back by certaine oval and sufficiently wide Holder, and voided 
forth into the spungy bones of the Nostrils: neither do they deny, that a part of 
the serosities, does sweat through the porosities of the inferior table or place, into 
the palate. But the serous humor received in the spungy bones of the Nostrils, does 
by little and little swear out and pass away, when by its quantity or quality, it 
provokes nature to an excretion. For to what purpose think you has Nature fra- 
med those cavities? Has the done it to make the scul so much the lighter? or that 
they might be conduit heads or storehouses of aire, which is of necessity breathed in, 
for the Generation of animal spirits? But they cannot be storehouses, because 
they are a finger breadth distant from the frontal Cavities, nor have they any conti- 
nuation or conjunction with them. Againe the Aire which is required to be ex- 
ceeding pure, would be defiled by passing to and fro through the spungy bones, 
Furthermore in the many dead bodies which I have dissected, some of which might 
be snotty and flegmatick, I never found the mammillary Processes any larger than 
usuall. But by those passages flegm ought to be derived unto the Os Eth- 
moides or Colander Bone; or fluctuating unto the Basis of the Brain, it ought of 
its own accord to flow unto that place, because the foremost Ventricles of the 
Braine, are seldom perforated before, so as to have a through fare into the No- 
strils.
By what waies
the flegm of
the nose passes?
Wherefore I conceive that al the snot and flegm of the nostrils is not strained 
through the Colander Bone, but that it flows down into the Palate through the 
four pipes or channels of the Choana, or that being collected in the Cavities of Os-
Sphenoides, if it pass through the little holes of the Plate of Os Sphenoides, it may
be derived into the Spungy bones of the Nostrils. 
The said spungy Bone is ful of holes being distinguished, with bony Cells, in 
which smal Caruncles or bits of flesh are contained, which being swelled, the dis- 
ease Polypus is bred.
The passages
from the No-
strils to the Pa-
late
From the Hare
to the Palate. 
Afterward you shal consider the Passage of the Nostrils into the Palate, by these 
cavities which are distinguished by the Os Vomer. At the roote of the pterygoi-
dean Apophysis, there appeares an hole compassed with a Gristle, which is the ex- 
tremity of that passage, which reaches from the Ear to the Palate, by helpe where- 
of Deafe persons heare, if a man speak into their mouth when it is wide open. Also 
by help hereof the Ear is most easily purged with masticatories. 
The

270 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
The Medicinal Consideration. 
Primary dise-
ases of the 
Skul.
Tumors 
In the Skul, by reason of the space contained between the two plates thereof, hard 
tumors are bred, and almost of a bony nature; yea and some are truly bony, such 
as are hornes. An hard, ful and oblong tumor is called Testudo, of kin to which is 
the Tumor Talpa, which also is called Topinaria. 
There is another tumor which is termed Natta, and growes sometimes chiefly 
in the Back, which hangs by a smal root. This threefold tumor, if timely care 
prevent not, is wont to grow to a greater Bulke. Hornes are wont to grow out 
in the Skul, the forehead, and else where; yea and upon other bones. I have seen 
an horne a finger long, which grew out of the lower part of the Leg, like a spur. 
Of these kind of Hornes Sennertus has neatly treated, in the fift Book of his 
Practice.
Fracture
Besides these Tumors the Fracture of the scul is frequent, which proceeds from 
a Violent and external Cause. And it is either without or with Contusion. 
There is a threefold fracture without Contusion, the first is termed diacope, 
when an Arrow or dart falls upon the Head and pierces deep, the second is called 
Aposcheiparnismos, which is a kind of planning or shaving as it were, when a piece 
of the bone is pared away: the third is termed Hedra which is a gap or rase made 
by the cut of a weapon.
Kinds of fra-
ctures. 
A fracture with Contusion, if it be strait and in the bone smitten, and immovable, 
it is termed Fissura or Rima, by the Greeks Rogme: if it be in another bone besides 
that which was smit, it is termed apeichema, that is to say, a resulting cleft, like 
the Rebounding of an Echo. If the bone be moved and broken, there is a threefold 
fracture reckoned; viz. engeisoma, which is a depression of the skul to the Mem- 
brane or Meninx of the Braine; Ecpiesma which is a depression of the said Scul di- 
vided into thinner and smaller bits: camaroosis which is a vaulted Elevation of the 
broken Skul. Enthlasis so called, is indeed a contusion but without fracture, be- 
ing as it were a flexure or bowing of the soft scul. Which kind of contusion is seen 
in brasen vessels, as pans and kettles &c. when they are battered only and not 
broken.
Caries
Exostosis
In the Bones of the scul we often find a Caries and Exostoosis proceeding from a 
common Cause, but more often from the Whores Pox. 
a T. 15. f. 6. 1.
Chap. 7. Of the Inferior JawBone. 
Its substance. 
The inferior a Jaw-bone is in such as are of yeares one continued bone, without 
any shew of division, as far as to the Chin.
Articulation. 
Its Articulation is very loose, being fastened with an orbicular Ligament. 
A movable Gristle is spread over the knob thereof, to procure the freeer motion. 
Within the Jaw-bone there is a crease or Channel cut out, ordained to containe 
the Vessels, which is separated from the cavity which containes the marrow, that 
it might afford a smal portion of the vessels to every tooth. 
Channell.
This Channell of the Vessels is situate in the middle of the Jaw-bone, and is mani-
fest; and therefore Hyppocaates write in his book of the Nature of the Bones, that 
of all bones only the lower jaw-bone has veines. 
a T. 15. f. 3. L.
Cahp. 8. Of the Teeth. 
Afterwards you shal with an Instrument made for that purpose, draw out by 
the roots one tooth of every sort, that you may contemplate the Roots and Liga- 
ments of the Teeth, and the forme of their holes or sockets. 
When

Chap. 9. Of the Bone Hyoides, and of the Ligaments. 271
When the Teeth are broke, you shal find them stuffed with a slimy substance 
and with threads, which are the vessels. 
The Cavities are more evident in teeth which are withered and dried; it is the 
best way to compare the fresh teeth and the dried ones together, and to observe the 
difference. 
The way to
shew the vessel
appertaining
unto the Teeth.
But that you may discerne your selfe and demonstrate unto others the distribu- 
tion of vessels, viz. of little veines, arteries and nerves into the Teeth: you shal
take this course. You shal take an Oxes or a Rams neither jaw (in which these 
vessels are more apparent) and cut it on the inside, and open it until the marrow and
Nerve appeare. The marrow being taken away, And the Membrane of the nerve 
being torne, the Nerve comes in sight, being composed of many little strings, 
from which certaine fine threads and other things resembling veines and Arteries, be- 
ing wove together, do enter beneath into the Cavities or the Teeth roots. 
To the a Dog-teeth and the b Cutters a nerve is carried which is more thick than 
ordinary. To the c Grinders according to the quality of their Roots, there is a 
triple or quadruple very smal and exceeding fine nerve distributed. 
Then drawing a Grinder or Cutter leisurely out of its hole, you shal see very smal 
fibres inserted into the roots of the Teeth, which you shal reckon to be nerves.
What must be
observed in a
Tooth that is
drawn out?
The teeth being pulled up cleaned by the Roots, in the lowest part of the said 
roots, there appeares a matter which is partly fibrous, bred of the vessels, and partly 
clammie, which fastens the tooth into its hole as it were with Glew, by the way of 
Syssarcosis. An Oxe or Sheepes-tooth being cut asunder in the middest, the inter- 
nal substance being clammie, is manifestly interwoven with vessels. 
All these things may be evidently demonstrated in the teeth of an Oxes, Calves, 
or Sheeps Jaw; they are not so clearly discernable in Man; nevertheless you may 
perceive the roots of the teeth to be bloody and that a nerve creeps closely into the 
Roots. But in dried teeth the roots are hollow. 
a T. 15. f. 6. n n. b T. 15. f. 6. m. c T. 15. f. 6. o o.
Chap. 9. Of the Bone Hyoides, and of the Ligaments. 
There is a Ligament placed under the Beginning of the Musculus Digastricus or 
twibellie, which is produced from the Apophysis styloideus as far as to the Angle of 
the nether jaw. 
The Situation
of the Os Hyo-
ides.
The situation, colligation and structure of the a Os Hyoides ought diligently to 
be observed in a dead Body, because they cannot be seen in a skeleton. 
It is placed in the Throat under the lower jaw-bone, hanging upon the Apophy- 
sis of the Styloideus by the helpe and assistance of Ligaments. 
Its structure.
Its fastening.
It is made up of five bones, the middlemost of which being the greatest and the 
broadest, is termed Basis b linguæ, from which on either side there shootes forth a 
little c horn, which is for the most part gristly, seldom bony, being fastened to the 
upper sides of the Cartilago Thuroides, which two little hornes are accounted for 
the sixt and seventh bones. 
Why it has
many Liga-
ments?
It is worth our consideration which Galen observes in his seventh book of the use 
of the Parts Chap. 19. How that this same bone is knit and fastened not only by 
Muscles; but it fastened by Ligaments and membranes unto the Apophyses of the 
Styloideus, and to the upper Hornes of the Thyroides; least one Muscle being pal- 
sied, that same counterpoise and equability in the motion of the Muscles should be 
dissolved, whereby it should come to be drawen on one side more than the other, or 
slip downwards, which would bring great detriment, and discommodity not only 
to the voice, but also to the swallow. 
Nature providing against this Inconvenience, hath tied and fastened it by four 
Ligaments to the Stoyloidean Apophyses, and to the Cartilage or Gristle which is 
called Thyroides.
Howbeit

272 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
Howbeit, the Hyoidean Bone does in women appear smaller and thinner, and 
consists of fewer little Bones, whose use is supplied by the suspensory Ligaments, 
which in them are longer than in Men. 
You shal likewise observe that only the Epiglottis is received in the Cavity of 
Hyoides, the Tongue resting it self upon the upper side of the basis. 
a T 15. f 11, 12, 13. b T. 13. f 11, & 12. A A. c T 13. f 11, & 12.
B B.
Chap. 10. Of the Heads Motion, and Ligaments. 
Which Verte- 
bra the Head 
is moved upon. 
THe Head is moved by a straight, or oblique motion upon the a second Vertebra,
which in its hinder part is a singers breadth distant from the first b Vertebra. 
And the first Vertebra is so closely and firmly fastened to the hind-part of the Head, 
that it cannot be stirred, or agitated so much as with ones Hand. 
Also the Tooth-fashioned c Apophysis is so fastly united to the Body of the se- 
cond Vertebra, that in the bending, and oblique motion of your Head, you may not 
hurt the Spinal Marrow.  
Hence you may be assured of the verity of that Opinion of Vesalius, and other 
Anatomists, touching the motion of the Head, how it is moved upon the second 
Vertebra, both in its right, and oblique motions. 
For seeing the Head cannot be moved with a circular motion upon the first Ver-
tebra, because such things as are moved with a circular motion, ought to rest upon 
one single Basis. Yet the Opinion of Galen might be confirmed, by that Natural
growing together of the two first Vertebra’s of the Neck, which were joyned and 
fastened together in a certain Soldier, who having in the year 1611. killed a Man 
in a Tavern, was hanged, and his body brought into the Anatomical Theatre of the 
University: where while his bones were boyling to make a Skeleton, it was obser-
ved that the two first and uppermost Vertebra’s of the Neck, did Naturally grow to- 
gether; yet did he in his life time freely move his head every way, as I have been in-
formed by others. Celsus, before Vesalius and Columbus, described the motions 
of the Head, in these words: 
The upmost Vertebra does altogether sustain the Head, receiving the smal pro- 
cesses thereof through two a Cavities: whence it comes to pass that the head is
bunched above, beneath, on every side. The second is inserted into the first, for as
much as concerns the circuit thereof. The upmost part is terminated with a smaller 
circle, and therefore the upmost incompassing the second, gives way to the Head to 
be moved side-longs also. 
The Ligaments
of the Head.
In the Articulation of the Head, three Ligaments are observed; the one is cir-
cular, which compasses the first and second Vertebra within, as far as to the hind- 
part of the Head. 
The other two do appertain unto the Tooth-fashion’d Apophysis: the one fa- 
stens the said Apophysis unto the body of the first Vertebra; the other arising from 
the top of the Apophysis Odontoides, is inserted into the Hind-part of the Head. 
Chap. 11. Of the Inside of the Ear. 
Three Cavities 
of the Ears. 
LEt us now approach unto the internal Cave of the Ear, which has been inaccessi-
ble to the ancient Physicians, and let us diligently surveigh the admirable Ar- 
chitecture thereof. 
There are contained three Cavities within the same, disposed in the situation 
and order following. The first is the a Concha, the second b Labyrinthus, and 
the third is the c Cochlea.
Why the Drum
is placed ob-
liquely.
In the Porch of the Concha, is placed the d Tympanum, which is not green as
Pauvius imagines, neither is it directly opposed to the external hole of the Ear, but 
stretched

Chap. 12. Of the Breast-Bone. 273 
stretched out slantwaies before the same, left any smal matters should fall, or fly 
into the Ear, and finding the passage clear and open, should hurt the Drum. Whe- 
ther anything be fallen into the Ears, may in such as are living, and have wide Ears, 
be seen in the Sun, or by holding a Candle neer the same.
The Parts of
the Concha. 
Now the whol structure of the c Concha wherein three little Bones, the Tym- 
panum; the string annexed to the Tympanum, and a Muscle are contained, are to 
be seen at one cast of the Eye in young Children and Infants: The Auricular Apo- 
physis, which is then an Epiphysis, being pluckt away with the point of a Pen- 
knife; which must be done within the Skul. 
The way to
shew the parts
of the Ear.
But in grown Men, which are come to maturity, all these cannot so well be seen 
and demonstrated, because whiles the Os Lithoides, is cut up towards the hind- 
part of the head, it is impossible but that somwhat appertaining to the internal 
structure of the Ear, should be pulled in pieces. 
And thus you shal break the Os Petrosum, the Marrow of the Brain being taken 
away, and the Ear pluck’t up by the Roots, and the circumjacent flesh being re- 
moved. 
The Os Lithoides, comprehending the Ædifice of the Ear, you shal cut asunder 
with very wel-steeled, and extreme sharp Knives, beginning at the external passage. 
The Mallet,
Anvil, and
Stirrup.
Then having pulled back the vaulted roof of the Ear, that is to say, having ta- 
ken off the upper part of the Os Lithoides, you shal see the three little Ear-bones, 
viz. The Malleolus, or Mallet; the Incus, or Anvil; and the Stapes, or Stir- 
rup.  
a T 20. f 7. B. &c. b f 9. B B. c f 9. A A. d f 4, 5. B. c T. 8. f 6,
7, 8, &c. f T 20. f. 7. A. g f 7. B. h f. 7. C.
Then you shal see the a Drum with its string, and smal Muscles fastened to the 
little bones, both within and without the Drum; which are indeed more plainly 
to be seen in other living Creatures, than in Men.
The Muscles. 
For in Men you can discern only one Muscle, which is seated on the left side of the 
internal Eare towards the hind-part of the head, being fastened to the little head of 
the Mallet or hammer. 
The Ligaments.
But there are found two Tendons, or rather Ligaments; one which staies the tail 
or handle of the Mallet; and a second which is fastened to the upper corner of the 
Stirrup.
The Drum-
string. 
A string, or little Nerve, is stretched out upon the Mallet, that it may hold and 
Stay the Mallet upon the Drum. 
Moreover, in a Skul newly boyled or dried, you may discern the three little Ear- 
bones within the Concha. If you shal peep in fore-right into the external passage, 
and hold your Eye close, with benefit of a clear day-light, or of a Candle, you 
may draw the said little bones every one of them out with a pin. 
Chap. 12. Of the Clavicula. 
The Gristle
of the Clavi-
cula.
THe Clavicula in its d Articulation to the Sternum, has a soft Cartilage, or 
Gristle interposed, that it might more easily give way, in motions of the Arm 
and Shoulder-blade.
Its Ligament.
You shal observe why it is formed after the manner of an Italian S. The Cla- 
viculæ are tied and fastened together, by the Mediation of a strong Ligament. 
Chap. 13. Of the Breastbone. 
THe Sternum, or Breast-bone, is in persons come to yeers, of a bony c substance, 
but different in Nature from the rest of the bones, because it is of a reddish 
color.
a T 20. f 4, & 5. B. b T 21. f 1. B B. f 2. a. c T 10. f 1. A A. T. 8.
f. 2. A. Mm Galen 

274 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book VI.
Of how many 
particular bones 
the Brest-bone
is made up. 
Galen wil have it compounded of seven Bones, so as that the several bones of the 
Brest do by way of mutual articulation, answer to the several true Ribs, which
Hippocrates seems to confirme. The Brest bone a growing together in it selfe, 
has oblique discriminations, there where the Ribs are fastened unto it. Howbeit
in persons growne up, there are three, seldom four divisions remaining in the Brest 
bone. 
Valverda saies that the Brest-bone is compounded for the most part of six or 
seven bones, which in elderly persons, do so grow together, that it seems compo- 
sed, only of two or three Bones. 
Sometimes also, though very seldom, is consists of eleven bones, as I saw at 
Rome in the yeare 1554. in a girle about seven years old, this bone divided into 
sixe bones, of which the five last, were cut from the bottome to the top, through 
the length of the Bone. 
Bartholomew Eustachius ads, how that it many times fals out, which none has 
yet observed, that the Bones of the Brest-bone, the first and last excepted, viz.
al the middle ones, or at least some of them, are divided by a most evident line, 
somtimes straight and somtimes crooked, through the midle longwayes: by which 
meanes it comes to pass, that the Brest bone is reckoned to consist frequently often 
nine, seven, or eight bones. 
The Hole of
the Brest bone.
Somtimes the Brest-bone is pierced through the middle with a large Hole, which 
was observed by Sylvius and Eustachius, being ordained for the transmitting of 
Vessels. I have my selfe often observed the same, especially in women. 
In one woman the hole was so large, on the inside of the Brestbone, as that a 
man might put his little finger into it, and her Chest did consist of thirteen ribbs on 
each side. 
a T. 10. f. 2. A A. T. 8. f. 2. A.
Nicolas Massa brags that he was the first observer of that Hole in the Brestbone, 
that somwhat might thereby breath forth of the Mediastinum and the neighbour- 
ing parts of the Brest, or rather to give passage to the Vena Mammaria which is 
spred and branched forth into the Duggs.
In large-dugd and corpulent women, their large dugs being removed, I have ob- 
served the Brest-bone to be sharpe and the Brest narrow, which was the Cause of 
shortness of Breath in such women, the which narrowness of Brest was caused, by the 
weight of their Duggs. 
The Natural
shape of the
Brest-Bone. 
That representation of the Breastbone as branched or jagged, is not true nor na-
tural: for the Brest-bone according to Galen resembles a Dagger or sword, where- 
upon the whole Bone, is by some termed Xyphoides or sword-like bone.
The Gristly a Branches being taken away from either side, which are parts of the 
Ribs, the Hast of the Dagger or sword Handle, wil be in the upper part, and its 
point in the Cartilago b Xiphoides.
Of the Carti-
lago Xiphoides
The figure of which Swordlike Gristle or Cartilago Xiphoides, by such as are 
diligent observers, is found to be various: for somtimes it is single and triangular,
somtimes it is double, and like the Herb Hippoglossum, Horsetongue or Tongue wort 
it has the larger part resting upon the smaller: somtimes it is tripartite and resem- 
bles a Trident; and other whiles it is bipartite resembling a fork or Rake.
Nicolaus Massa saies that the Barbarous writers call it malum Granatum, the
Pomgranate, as resembling the flower of that Apple. 
Its Use.
Galen conceives that it is placed there to defend the stomach and the Septum 
Transversum. But because the stomach is far distant there from, it seemes to be 
framed only for the midriffs sake, or rather to hold up the Liver, fastened thereto 
by a ligament.
Its Hole.
Amatus Lusitanus, in the 95. Cure of is fift Centure, observes that the Carti- 
lago Xiphoides is bored through for perspirations sake, that the filthy vapors of the
the stomach might by that hole breath out; which is a simple Conceit. 
a T. 8. f. 2. C C. b. T. 8. f. 2. B.
For

Chap. 16. Of the Back-Bone. 275 
For unless the Cartilage is bipartite, it is perforated to give passage for the vena 
mammaria interna, and in wounds if there be no hole in the Brest-bone, it is found 
in the Cartilago Xyphoides. 
Its crooking
This Cartilage being pressed down and crooked in, does so hurt the Liver being 
seated beneath it, that infants are by that means killed with an Atrophy or Con- 
sumption, and in growen persons it causes perpetual vomiting, until it is reduced to 
a natural posture.
Chap. 15. Of the Ribbs.
Twofold sub-
stance of the
Ribbs.
Every Rib does consist of a twofold substance, the one of which is a bony, which 
makes up the greatest part of the Rib; the other is b gristlie, of unequal length, 
which is joined to the Brest-bone, by that sort of Articulation which is called Ar- 
throdia, that in the riseing and falling of the Chest, it may yeild more easily. But 
they have another articulation with the vertebras of the Back-bone which is two- 
fold in every Rib. 
The true Ribs
Now there are seven, which are called true and perfect Ribs, because they are 
joyned to the Brest-bone by way of Arthrodia; unto which sometimes an eighth 
is added, which has been found more than once in the dissection of some bodies, be- 
ing fastened to the Roote of the Cartilago mucronata. 
And this is the Cause why Aristotle, whom Plinie thought it no disparagement to 
imitate, has reckoned up sixteen true Ribs. 
The Bastard
Ribs.
The five lower are called d Bastard and Imperfect Ribs, because they do not 
reach unto the Brest-bone, but are terminated in a long Cartilage which is reversed 
upwards, and so grow one unto another. 
a T. 8. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. &c. b. T. 8. f. 2 C C. c T. 8. f. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. d T. 
8. f. 2. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Chap. 16. Of the BackBone. 
The shape of
the Back-bone.
The Musculous flesh wherewith the Back-bone is covered being removed, its ad- 
mirable figure is easily discerned, which is partly streight and partly oblique, som- 
times bending inward and sometimes outward, which Hippocrates first discovered, 
and Duretus, Hippocrates his Ghost has described in Coacis. 
The Gristles of
the Vertebras
Ever, where between two vertebras, a thick cartilage is placed in the middle 
like glue. Galen in his Booke de Ossibus, writes that it is an hard and in some 
sort Gristlie Ligament. 
Their Mem-
branes.
All the ventebræ or turning Joynts of the Back, are covered on the outside with 
an hard membrane; and within they have a strong membranous ligament, drawen 
a long from the highest vertebra as low as to the Os sacrum, which is there placed 
and wrapped about (besides two other membranes) to defend and preserve the 
spinal Marrow. 
A fable of the
Cabalists tou-
ching a bone
which they cal
Luz.
I have often found in bodies that were hanged and burnt, and have been informed 
by the Executioner, that it is a ridiculous fable, which the Cabalists relate of a  
certaine Vertebra, viz. that in the Back is found a certaine Vertebra which they have 
termed Luz out of which as from a seed, the Bones shal be regenerated and spring 
up at the General Resurrection. This Bone Luz so called, Cornelius Agrippa and 
Vesalius wil have to be in the foote.
Howbeit Hieronymus Magtus in his fift Book de Exustione Mundi, relates 
that Adrianus learned experimentally of Rabbi Joshua Ben Anime, that the 
foresaid Bone is one of the Vertebra’s of the Back.
For he found in the Back bone, one bone that a milstone turning upon it would 
not breake, the fire could not burne it, the water would not dissolve it, and at last 
being layed upon an Anvil and smitten with a sledge or smiths-hammer, it was so 
Mm2 far

276 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI
far from being broken in the least, that the Anvil was crackt and the sledge broken 
the Bone receiving in the meane while no detriment. Which is as false as false can 
be. For all the Vertebræ, may be broken in pieces, burnt and reduced to ashes. 
Whence we may judge what credit is to be given to the Cabalists, who in things 
manifest, do so impudently mock and abuse us. 
The structure
of the Loines
If Aristotle had observed the structure of the eleventh or twelfth vertebras, he 
would not have written in his third Book de part Anima, That the Back is fleshy, 
but the Loines without flesh, because the Bending-places of al parts are voided of flesh. 
But the Loines are more fleshy than the Back. But the Articulation of the 
twelfth vertebra is different from al the rest, being the Cause of all Motion which 
is performed thereupon, for both above and beneath, it receives, and is not received, 
as is observed, in other Articulations of the Vertebræ. 
Crupper bone.
From the Loines you shal descend to the Coccyx or Crupper-Bone, and you 
shal observe its structure consisting of three bones, its spungy reddish substance and 
triangular shape. 
Which Part we read does in some Nations sprout out like a taile. Pliny re- 
cords in the 22. the Chapter of his seventh Book, that in India there is a race of 
Men that have hairie tailes, and are incredible swift. And Paulus venetus, in the 
28 Chap, of the fift Book of his Travells, does avouch that in the Kingdom of 
Lambri, there are men that have tailes like doggs a span long: who dwell not in 
Cities but in the Mountaines. 
The Nubiensian Arabick Geographie mentions a tailed Nation, in an Island of 
the Eastern seas which is called Namaneg. Page 70. I suppose that it is but a fable 
which Historians relate touching the Kentish-long-tailes in England, how that 
God to revenge the Injury done to Tho. Becket the Archbishop of Canterbury,
caused Tailes to sprout out of the Kentish Crupperbones. 
When the Crupper-bone suffers a Luxation inwards, a man cannot (according 
to Avicen) draw his Ankles, towards his buttocks, neither can he bend his Hams 
which is confirmed by the Experience of Ambrosius Pareus. This Impediment is 
caused by compression of a very thick nerve seated on the hind-side of the Leg, 
which creeps along neare the Crupper-bone. The said bone is easily reduced, by a 
mans finger put into the fundament. 
The way to
dissect the ver-
bra's of the
Back.
In the next place you shal fal to dissect the Vertebras of the back, that you may 
contemplate the admirable fabrick of the spinal Marrow, viz. how in the extreem 
parts thereof the nerves are parted, ending in the shape of an Horse-taile; by rea- 
son of millions of little nerves woven together, which being agitated in water and 
dishevelled, do express the shape of an horses taile. 
Now you shal dissect the Vertebrae in this manner; Haveing taken away all the 
ribs at their joynts, you shal fasten the Back-bone to the table with two iron hooks 
above and beneath your section, as joiners are wont to fasten their boards. Then 
with your incision knives you shal forcibly cut on every side about the conjuncti-
on of each Vertebra, in order cutting off every vertebra, with their oblique apo- 
physis which helpe their articulation, til you come unto the Os sacrum. This is a 
painful work; but he that would eate the kernel, must of necessity crack the shell. 
Before the fistula ossea be cut off to discover the spinal marrow: a few things are 
to be premised touching the natural constitution of the spinal marrow, and the Ori- 
gination of the Nerves. 
The Natural
constitution of
the spinal mar-
row.
The Spinal Marrow springs from the Braine and pettie-braine, and though it 
appeare like the marrow of the Braine, yet is it in some things unlike, because softer 
and besides its two membranes propagated from the Menings, wherewith it is infol- 
ded, it is incompassed with a third membrane strong and nervous, which hinders 
the spinal marrow from bruiseing or breaking, when we stoop or any waies bend 
our Backs. I am not certaine whether or not, that same membrane which is propagated 
from the Crassa Meninx have any pulsation: nor whether the spinal marrow be 
divided into two cavities according to the length of the back-bone as far as the loines. 
Certaine it is, that the spinal a marrow descending by the b fistula ossea, grows 
continually

Chap. 16. Of the Back-Bones. 277 
continually harder, and smaller, til it come unto the Loines, where it spends it self 
into little c cords, and springs resembling an horse-taile; that in that part where it 
suffers violent motions, it might be out of danger of breaking.
The Nerves of the spinal Marrow are made up of divers little threads, fastened d 
one to another, and contained in the tenuis Meninx: which little filaments or thred- 
dy substances, do rise so much the higher, by how much more the spinal marrow des- 
cends. 
Its Original.
And that nature might by all meanes possible provide for the security of the Ner- 
ves; when they come torch of the holes of the vertebras, she has compassed them
about with a thick substance, which does so closely and firmely knit and bind to- 
gether the fibres of the nerve, that they cannot be drawen asunder one from an- 
other.
Progress.
After which knot and egress, they are easily separated. But I beseech you ob- 
serve the cunning Industry of Nature in the going forth of a nerve. Which that it 
might be less subject to rupture, seeing that it is as yet cloathed only with the tenuis 
Meninx, she has not drawen it through that hole which is nearest its original, but 
through a lower, which when the nerve has passed, it does not go unto the next rib, 
but descends to a lower, which when it has reached, it is divided into two, and turnes 
back the lesser branch towards the spina, and carries the greater to the fore parts. 
a T. 18. f. 5. A. b T. 2. f. 2. a. &c. c T. 18. f. 2. o. d. T. 24. f. 9. &c. 10
&c.
How the ani-
mal spirit is
carried through
the Nerves?
It is a Question amongst Anatomists how the Animal faculty can with the spirit 
be carried through the Nerves into the whole Body; because in none of the Nerves 
except the optick, there is found any hole or pore or spungy substance; but we 
find them all solid, woven together of many smal threads according as the Bulke and 
magnitude of every one requires. 
Cæsalpinus in his 5 Book of Peripatetick Questions, supposes that those little  
threads are a multitude of smal veines and Arteries, which make up one body as it 
were a fagot, being continuations of the Branches of the Rete mirable, which may 
be imagined, but cannot be demonstrated: or at least that between the little mem- 
branes of every nerve, a very thin animal spirit is diffused which runs swiftly to the 
utmost parts of the limbs.
But I see not how Cæsalpinus can demonstrate such a continuation of the Rete 
mirabile with the Nerves of the spinal marrow. 
How many
Nerves proceed
from the spinal
marrow.
Out of the spinal marrow a 28 pair of nerves do take their Rise, seven out of the 
Neck; twelve out of the Back; five out of the loines; foure from the Os sacrum, 
the branches whereof to search out, is a weary some piece of worke, and must be 
done in a dead body provided for that intent alone, and with diligent Inspection. 
a T. 18. f. 1. D. I. K. &c.
The medicinal Consideration. 
The Dignity
of the spinal
marrow.
The dignity of the spinal marrow with reference to the necessity of Life, is equal 
to that of the Brain, and therefore Hyppocrates termed it Aion, because be belie- 
ved that the vitality of the animal was placed therein: as Erotianus proves in his 
Onomasticon and after him Foesius in his Oeconomia Hippocratis. 
Plato in his Timaeus does acknowledge the spinal marrow to be the foundation of 
Life Beneath the Head.and Hippocrates himselfe teaches that men have most grie- 
vous sicknesses and hard to cure ariseing from the marrow of their Back: for a fluxion
there into causes a consumption, and its drying up and withering is a greivous disease, 
and a Man dies if the marrow of his Back be wounded. In a word, Hippocrates in 
the 2d of his Predictions saies that if the spinal marrow be diseased, either by rea- 
son of a fall or upon any other occasion, or its owne accord, the Patient becomes 
both lame in his Thighs, so that he feels not when he is touched; and also in his Belly 
and

278 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
and bladder impotent, so that at first he voids neither Urine nor dung, save upon 
meet necessity: but when the disease growes older, both dung and Urine come a way 
of themselves, without any forcing of the Patient, and a short while after he dies 
the death. 
The natural fi-
gure of the
Back-bone.
From a flux into the Back-marrow an hidden and undiscernible Consumption 
arises: but when it flows back into the Vertebra’s and the flesh, a Dropsie is ingen- 
dered; so saies Hippocrates in his Book de Locis in Homine. How the consump- 
tion of the Back proceeds from the Marrow, the dame Hippocrates does accurately 
teach us in his 20 Book De Morbis. 
Diseasses of
the Back-bone.
Before we declare the Diseases of the Ossea fistula, I must shew you the natural 
figure of the spina or Back-bone; which is Ithuscolios streight.bow’d through the 
whole length of it: but in the Neck and Loyns it is Ithu-lordos straight bowed 
inward, in the back it is Ithu-cuphis streight bowed outward, and therefore it is easie
to declare the disease which vitiate the Backbone, such as are Lordosis, Cuphosis, Sco- 
liasis, and, Seifis.
Lordosis. 
Lordosis, is a disease of the Backbone, when the vertebras thereof, are out of their 
place, and turned inward or forward. 
Cuphosis
Cuphosis, is a disease of the Backbone, when its Vertebra’s are dispointed and 
turned outwards or backwards. 
Lordosis happens in the Back, as Cuphosis in the Neck and Loins. 
Scoliosis.
Scoliosis is a crooking or wreathing the Backbone to one side. 
Seisis
Seisis is such a Commotion of the Vertebra’s of the Backbone, as that they re-
maine indeed in their places, but so as their frame and fashion is disordered. 
The cause of
Scoliosis.
Scoliosis is the Inclination of the Back-bone to one side or another, when we goe, 
depends upon some fault in the twelft Vertebra of the Back, where the motion of the
Back-bone, is performed. 
This Vertebra is received by its Neighbours above and beneath, and does not re- 
ceive, as all other Vertebra’s doe beside. 
For it is Joynted not by way of Gynglimus but by way of Arthrodia; and 
therefore if its Apophyses either upper or nether shal be depressed; it cannot sustaine 
the Trunke of the body bolt upright in motion, but it must of necessity leane to one
side or another: and this fault comes to People when they are Children, either be- 
ing brought into the world with them, or caused by ill carrying, or by reason of the
softness of those Vertebra’s while the Child is forced to use its Legs, sooner than is
fitting.
I have shewed another Cause of halting according to Galens doctrine in my 
Chapter of the Thighs. Those two Causes of halting are irreparable and incurable. 
The Luxation of the second Vertebra of the Neck, causes a squinzie, which in few 
hours does choak the Patient, because it cannot be restored into its place. 
The diseases of Os sacrum are of great Moment, whether they be tumors or ulcers, 
by reason of its natural constitution, the whole Bone being in a manner spungie, fi-
stulous, and perforated within and without: and therefore when this Bone is Dis- 
eased, the Patien is in danger of his Life, as Hippocrates observes in his Book de
Glandulis.
In his third book De Fracturis he gives us to understand, that the Os sacrum be-
ing exulcerated, is not cured without very great difficulty, which Galen also con- 
firms in his Comments. Laugius in his Epistles, relates, that he saw two gallant 
Gentlemen worne away with incredible raging pain, their Os sacrum being purifi- 
ed: so that in conclusion they consumed away and dyed. 
Chap. 16. Of the Scapula. 
Its Articulation 
with the Bra-  
chium. 
Having diligently Viewed the trunk of the Body, you shal proceed unto the 
Limbs; and you must principally observe the Articulation of the a Scapula or 
Shoulder-blade with the b Arme, which is made by the way of Arthrodia, by the
coming

Chap. 16. Of the Scapula. 279 
coming between a most thick and nervous Ligament, which does round about em- 
brace the whol Joynt. 
Its Muscles.
Also four muscles viz. the c Supraspinatus, d infraspinatus the e Rotundus minor, 
and f Subscapularis, doe with their broad tendons incompass the said joynt. 
Its Cavitie.
The Cavity of the g Head Omucopole, being not sufficiently proportioned to re- 
ceive the Shoulder: which was so contrived to make the motion more easie and 
free, but it is augmented with a Gristle which crowns the Lips of its Cavity. 
Its Ligament.
Then you shal discover under the h Deltoides a broad and remarkable Ligament, 
which reaches from the Shoulder-tip as far as to the Coracoides Apophysis, that it 
may hold in the Arms aloft, to prevent Luxation upwards.
Its Articulati-
on with the
Clavicula. 
Afterwards you shal observe the extremity of the i Clavicula articulated with 
the Shoulder-tip or Acromium, which is therefore termed Catapleis, although Ga-
len in the 12. Chapter of his Book of the dissection of Muscles, does call the first up- 
per Rib by that name, because its placed beneath the Clavis. Ruffus Ephesius
eels the Acromium, the coupling-band of the Clavis and Scapula: but Eudemus 
saies that it is a very little Bone, which in children is a most exact gristle, which 
though in process of time it degenerate into a Bone, yet until they be 18. years old, it 
retains much of the substance of a gristle contrary to the nature of al the other bones. 
Some whiles it grows so highly together with the spine of the Scapula, that in a per- 
son of middle age wrestling or exercising, it may easily be separated, which hap- 
pened to Galen, as himself tels us in first Book de Articulis. 
The like accident he observed in another, as he relates in Comment, ad Part. I. 
Sect. I. de Officina. Hippocrates himself takes notice of the Luxation of this Bone, 
in his Articulis: where he saies that the Acromium or shoulder-point is of a diffe- 
rent nature in mankind, from that which it is in other Creatures. 
T. 21. f. 1. A. b T. 21. f. 1. C. c T. 22. f. 3. A. d T. 22. f. 3. B. e.
T. 22. f. 1. & 3. C. f T. 22. f. 1. D. g T. 21. f. 2. c. h T. 22. f. 1. A.
T. 21. f. 2. b
The use of the
Apophysis cora-
coides.
Upon the Neck of the scapula rests an a Apophysis which in children is an Epi- 
physis: from the likeness to a Crowes bil or an anchor, it is termed coracoides and 
ancuroides. It prohibits the shoulder from slipping out on that side, according to 
Galen in Com. in part I. Sect. de Art; and therefore it was framed for the se- 
curity and strength of the Articulation. 
For when the Actions of the Hand and arme are forwards, the shoulder would 
easily be unjointed, unless it were retained by the coracoides: and therefore the 
laxation of the shoulder is seldome towards the fore part; Hippocrates did observe 
it once, and Galen saw it five times at Roome, as himself relates in his comment: ad 
Part. 4. Lib. 7. de Articulis. 
The parts of
Scapula how
named by Ga-
len.
Now the pars of the Scapula he thus distinguished: as much of the whol Com- 
missure or Joynting, as is subject to the sight he caled Omos; & that part which is un- 
der the knitting of the shoulder, he called Epome, which we terme Acromion: and 
that broad part of the Scapula which is scituate behind, and is covered with muscles,
is by Galen termed Omoplatæ.
By Celsus.
From this place we may gather & fish out the Interpretation of an obscure passage 
in Cornelius Celsus, in his eighth Book Againe from the Neck two broad bones on ei- 
ther band doe goe unto the Scapulæ, our Countrymen call them Scoptula operate, the 
Greeks terme them omoplatas, Celsus cals them Scopula operta, because they stick out 
like boughs of Trees, and are scituate in the upper part of the Chest. For the tops of 
Mountains were by the ancient Latins termed Scopula, which Tertullian in his Book
de Pallio, cals Montium Scapulas. Also the smal branches of trees were called 
Scopi, hence the phrase Vuarum scopi vine branches used by Varro in his first Book 
de Re Rustica. Cato speaks of Scopulæ myrti Myrtle branches. 
Whether broad
shoulder'd Men
beget large 
children.
It is worth observation which Women by long experience have learned viz. that 
broad shouldered Men doe for the most part beget great Children, because they are 
very hot hearted. And Galen sais in his Ars parva, that by how much the Heart is 
hotter

280 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
ter, by so much the Chest is larger. And therefore Forestus his wives Mother, 
would not marry her daughters to broad breasted and broad shouldered Men: for she 
was afraid least they should die in their travel by reason of the largeness of their Chil- 
dren, which Forestus saies he had often seen come to pass in the 70 Observation of 
his 28. Booke.
Why french 
maidens have 
their right 
shoulder higher 
than the left?
The Cause of this is as hard to assigne as of another inconvenience, with which 
the young maides of France, especially the Gentry are infested: Whose right shoul- 
der is frequently higher and fuller than their left: so that among an hundred virgins 
you shal hardly find ten that have wel proportioned shoulders. 
Whether it is caused by the more frequent and stronger motion of the right arme, 
whereby the shoulder blade in widened, and raised up, by meanes of the interjacent 
muscles lifting themselves up. Ad thereunto that in persons that are growen up;
their right shoulder is more heavy than there left, if we believe Amatus Lusitanus
in the last Cure of hit 4 Centure. 
Why so few 
that can use 
both hands a- 
like? 
Why is the right Hand stronger than the left? and why are there so few Ambo- 
dexters that can use both hands alike? Is it because the Lungs and Liver doe incline
more to the right side than to the left? Or is it because Nurses when they teach chil- 
dren to go, do draw them on by their right hand. 
Is it because Mothers would make theire daughters low shouldered while they
study to make them smal and waspe-wasted? For as Terence long since said, if a
Girle have a good habit of Body and burnish a little, they say she is a champion or 
wrestler, and therefore they pinch their bellies and withdraw their food, and 
though naturally of good constitutions, they never leave tampering til they make 
them like Bull-rushes; mere waspe-wasted Rush-Candles. Which is done, not 
without manifest detriment to their Health; whiles by the over great pinching in of 
the lower part of their Chest, the upper parts thereof are inlarged, whence pro- 
ceedes that same sticking out of their shoulders, or from contortion of the Back-
Bone, its natural shape is vitiated and depraved. 
Chap. 17. Of the Humerus, Cubitus and Radius. 
The shoulder- 
hole. 
In all shoulders about the middle and inward part towards the Ribs, there is a 
manifest open hole tending downwards, and evidently piercing into the substance
of the Bone, through the which a remarkable veine does insinuate it selfe into the
Cavity of the Bone, that it may nourish the inner Marrow; whence it comes to pass,
that the whole marrow of this Bone appeares bloody when the Bone is broake. 
Its Ligament. 
The Articulation of the a Brachium with the b Cubit, is fastened and incom-
passed with a membranous and nervie Ligament.
Why the Ra- 
dius is joined 
to the Cubitus? 
The c Radius is adjoined to the Cubit, that it might direct the oblique motions of 
the Arme, which are performed downwards and upwards, which motions, haveing 
taken away the Muscles, you may observe, by turning the Radius to and fro back- 
wards and forwards. 
Why they part
one from ano-
ther?
The d Cubitus and the e Radius, do in the middle way part one from another, 
that the Radius in a semicircular motion, might be more freely moved, and that a 
larger seat might be afforded for the muscles, which in that part are many. 
a T. 21. f. 1. C. b T. 21. f. 1. D. c T. 21. f. 1. E. d T. 21. f. 2. c. c T. 21.
f. 2. d.
Why a Liga-
ment is inter-
posed?
Between this space there is interposed a membranous a Ligament, by helpe of 
which the Cubitus and Radius are more nearely and straightly combined, and the 
interior muscles are separated from the external. It helpes also the equality of their 
motion, that both might be bent, or stretched outright at one and the same 
time.
Their Arti-
culation with
other Bones.
These two Bones, are in their extremities fastened together, by a very different 
joint; above, the Cubitus receives the Radius, but beneath, the Cubitus is recei- 
ved

Chap. 19. Of the Wrist and Fingers, &c. 281 
ved by the Radius, the Bulke and thickness of the substance being changed. For the 
Radius is at the wrist thicker, that receiveing the greater part of the wrist, it might 
more conveniently move the same by an oblique motion. But the Cubitus at the 
Brachium is broader, because that bone alone is articulated with the brachium; the 
Articulation of the Radius with the knob of the Brachium, is thin. 
Lastly you shal observe, whether or not the styloides b apophysis of the Cubit do 
touch the wrist, being fastened thereunto by way of a joint. Hippocrates observed 
the external part of the Cubit to be dislocated, in Lib de Artick. Which kind of 
Luxation Dalechampius observed, as himself avers in his Comments upon the Sur- 
gery of Paulus Ægineta.  
They who deny that the Cubit in a Man does touch the wrist, do allege that 
there comes between them a thick and moveable Gristle, which fills that space; and 
in very deed that same Cartilage or Gristle, seemes to be adjoyned by way of a 
supplement. 
Chap 18. Of the Wrist.  
The c wrist and d Radius, are joyned one to another by a nervous Ligament, 
which in folds the Articulation. 
Moreover another e Nervous ligament, is observed, being shap’d like a Ring, which 
compasses the wrist round about, which conteines within it the tendons which are 
carried through the cavity of the wrist, and which lie upon the back of the wrist, 
saveing some particular ones: howbeit on the outside it seems smal.
a T. 22. f. 2. e e.  T. 21. f. 1. c T. 21. f. 1. F F. d T. 21. f. 1. D. E.
Number of the
wrist bones.  
The Wrist a bones are eight, disposed into two orders or rankes. 
The first order consists of three bones. 
The second is made up of foure bones. The fourth bone is over and above, out 
of ranke and order; but we may with Sylvius refer it to the first order. Seeing it 
rests upon the third bone of the first order. Howbeit Vesalius accounts it a sesa- 
moidean bone, because in this place it fills an empty space. But how can it have the 
use of sesamoidean, seeing it is not interposed between Bone and Bone? It hangs 
over another, that it might forme that cavity, which is in the inner part of the wrist, 
to this bone the Muscle Cubiteus flexor carpi does adhere. 
Their Articu-
lation.
The three wrist bones of the first order, being joyned together, do make a cavi- 
ty, which receives two Bones of the second order, which being joyned one with an- 
other, do make the joints Head: whence you may know that the first order is ob- 
scurely moved with the second, and that c the articulation is by way of Arthrodia, 
in a dead body, having taken away the tendons, you may discover this mo-
tion. 
The rest of the wrist bones, being articulated with the Metacarpium, do cause 
no motion at al, or a very obscure one. It is very rare to find nine bones in the wrist; 
howbeit some have found so many. 
Chap. 19. Of the Metacarpium, Fingers and Sesamoidean 
Bones. 
After the wrist followes the b Metacarpium which is framed of five bones, if we 
believe Celsus and Rufftus, whom Plinie does favour, when he attributes only two 
joints unto the thumb; Lib. II. Cap. 43.
a T. 21. f. 3. b T. 21. f. 1. H H. f. 2. G. 
Of how many
Bones the Me-
tacarpium.
consists?
Galen does better, who separates the first bone of the a Thumbe, from the Me- 
tacarpium, because it is joined to the wrist by an Arthrodial diarthrosis, with evi- 
Nn dent

282 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
dent motion. But the bones of the metacarpium are articulated to the wrist by way 
of synarthrosis, without motion. Ad hereunto, that this bone is shorter than the 
bones of Metacarpium, is not conterminous to them; has a contrary situation and 
a different motion. 
The Bones of 
the Thumb. 
For the Thumb is termed pollex a pollen do, because it alone is equivalent to the 
other four fingers. That it might be strong and substantial, it was requisite that 
it should have three bones; & that it might performe manifest and strong motions, it 
has peculiar muscles and they are affixed unto the first Bone. When the Atheni- 
ans would render the Æginetæ, their emulators, wholly unfit for warfare and Naviga- 
tion, they cut their Thumbs of. And we cal such as are cashiered for their cowar- 
dize Pollerunci, thumb-les companions. They were by the ancients in way of
merriment termed Murci. 
The Metacarpium therefore is compounded, only of four bones, two of which 
are immoveable, the other two which are under the ring finger, are manifestly
moved. 
In that same space where the Thumb is joyned to the Brachialis, there is a cer- 
taine cavity, in which the Arabian Cautery was usually celebrated, which is largely 
and elegantly described by Generous in his Appendix to the Art of Chirurgery. 
And it is no wonder if some at this day undertake to cure the venereal pox, by ap-
plying mercurial water to this part, which eases, through the skin, and patches so 
deep as to flux the patient. 
The Liga-
ments of the
Hand.
In the hollow of the hand, a transverse ligament is observed, which connects the 
row of fingers to the bones of the Metacarpium. 
a T. 21. f. 1. G G. f. 2. H.
The Sesamoi-
dean Bones.
Within the palme of the Hand you shal find divers Sinewy-Ligaments. 
There are a few sesamoidean bones found in the inside of the Hand. There are 
none in the outside. They are found hidden among the first jointings of the
fingers.
The Thumb in its second and third joint has some sesamoidean bones; in the first 
joint it has none. 
The way to
find those
Bones.
Now to find the sesamoidean Bones either in the hand or foot, you shal this do. 
You shal so cut out the tendons that stretch out the finger, that you be careful not 
to take away the cartilages of the joints which are under them, which may seeme to 
be the sesamoidean bones. 
Under these tendons, most frequently in the hand, especially in hard bodies,
you shal perceive a certaine hardness sometimes gristlie, sometimes bony. Then 
you shal cut crosswise the Ligaments of al the joints, until you make them appeare, 
their inside in the hand, their outside in the foote; in which side, you shal find 
the sesamoidean bones; haveing first cut asunder the ligaments wherewith they are 
infolded, or drawing them a little back, upwards towards the roots of the fin- 
gers. 
Chap. 20. Of the Os a Ilium and b Thighbone. 
From the Armes you shal proceed unto the Inferior Limbs. 
Their Liga- 
ments. 
Between the Os sacrum and the Tuberous bunching out of the Ischium, there 
intercedes a Great and strong Ligament. 
Beneath the seame or growing together of the share-bone there is another Liga- 
ment stretched out. 
And a c circular Ligament comprehends the Articulation of the Thigh with the 
socket of Os Ischij, which being cut away, another d Ligament somwhat long and 
bloody appeares. 
a T. 2. f. 3. & 4. A. &c. T. 21. f. 2. A. b T. 21. f. 1. K. f. C. c T. 21. f.
7. a a. T. 21. f. 7. b.
The said bloodyness is caused by reason of Certaine little veines which creepe 
through

Chap. 20. Of the Os Ilium arid thigh-bone. 283 
through the Acetabulum of the Huckle-bone. 
That same Ligament which is brought out of the top of the thigh-bone, is fasten- 
ed and strongly driven into a cleft which is in the foreside of the Acetabulum: 
which being relaxed, and drawn from its place, there fals out such an halting as is in- 
curable: in which the Thigh, though perfectly put in Joint, will still slip out a- 
gain. 
Consumpti-
on of the Hip.
That same tabes Coxaria, Ptbisis ischiadica, mentioned by Hippocrates in his 
Book De morbo Sacro, and elsewhere, it is worth youre observation: when by rea- 
son of an Impostume or a fluxion into the Hip-bones Cavity or Acetabulum, the 
Ligaments corrupt and purify, and the Hip grows lank and leane. It was an inge- 
nious observation of Hippocrates: all Bones vitiated, cease to grow; if the part 
containing be corrupted, it infects the part contained, wherefore if the Huckle- 
bone be corrupted, the Thigh-bone cannot remain untainted; which disease I have 
often observed.
The ovall
hole of the Huc-
kle bone
The oval hole of the a Huckle-bone called thyroides, from its resemblance of a 
door, is ascribed unto the share. It was contrived for lightness sake, and is exactly 
covered with an hard membrane, which does fever the Musculos obturadores, which 
rest on either side thereupon. 
That is false which Aristotle has written in his fourth Book of the Live-wights 
Chap. 10. that no four footed Beast has Huckle-Bones. 
The natu-
ral shape of the
hip.
In the Thigh-bone you shall observe the b shape thereof, bunching out on the 
foreside, and saddle-fashioned behind, for the convenience of sitting and firme walk- 
ing. Which figure Hippocrates observes in his Book of fractures, and advises when 
this bone is broken, that care be taken to preserve the same. 
For such whose Thigh-bone is straighter than it ought to be, are crook-legs, and 
are lame in their knee; and they cannot stand nor goes with-out trembling. 
a T. 2. f 3. & 4. B. b T 21. f 1. K. f 3. G.
But they whose Thigh-bones are very crooked, they stand more firmly either 
on one Leg or on both, than they who have straight thigh-bones. 
The Neck
of the Thigh-
bone why long-
fashioned.
The Neck of the Thigh-bone, is somwhat long-fashioned and oblique, that it 
may pass along the tendon of the Rotator Infernus. But Galen supposes it was 
made for that end, viz. to leave space for muscles, which were to be placed in the 
lower part, and for great Veins, Arteries, nerves and kernels, which are quartered 
neare the divisions of the Vessels. 
They whose Thigh-bone is shorter-necked than Ordinary, have their groins 
narrow and compressed, and when they walk are constrained to halt on one side, 
and are termed Vatii. so sais is Galen in his third Book de Usu Partium.
For the Thigh-bone does contribute much to the rectitude and stability of the 
Body, by that same oblique Longitude of its Neck; whence the cause may be given 
why men naturally halt to the one side or the other, or to both sides, their Feet and 
Legs being of equal length; which no man yet assigned, nor observed. 
Ligaments of
the Knee.
The lower end of the Thigh-bone Joind to the Leg is termed the Knee, which is 
fastened by a two-fold ligament. One of them is b circular, and compasses both the 
Bones round about.
The other being c placed between the two bones, is somwhat Long-fashioned and 
bloodyish, through neighbourhood of such veins, as descend through the Ham into 
the Leg: it arises, from the middle-space of the knobs of the Thigh-bone, and is in- 
serted into the middle Eminency of the Knobs of the shank. Sick people often 
speak of this Ligament when they talk of a burning heat in their Knees. 
Upon the Knobs of the shank-bone two semicircular Gristles are fastened, which 
hold the same Knobs more stable, that they may not swerve, in violent motions 
and contorsions of the thigh. See Galen touching the of the shank-bone, 
in its Articulation with the Thigh-bone. Lib. 2. de fracturis. 
The void
space in the
Ham
That Part which is opposite to the knee behind, is termed Poples the Ham, being
empty and void. The Vessels which pass that way being removed, an empty space 
is observed, interposed between the two knobs, which Pliny seems to have under- 
Nn2 stood

284 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI.  
stood in the 45. Chapt. of the. II. Book of his Natural History. In the knee it self, 
the conjunction of both, as well the right as the left, is on the foreside double (it 
should be on the hinder side) there is a certain emptiness like cheeks, which being 
perched, the spirit flies out as from a Cut Throat. 
Why wounds
in the Ham are
deadly?
Wherefore I have alwaies observed the wounds of the Ham to be deadly, not on- 
ly for the dissipation of the spirit, but also by reason of cutting asunder such re- 
markable vessels, viz. Veines, Arteries and nerves, which creepe through that 
hinder part of the thigh, which being cut, inevitable death follows. 
Whence pro-
eds that sym-
pathy which
is between the
knees and the
cheeks?
The society and sympathy between the knees and Cheeks is wonderful, which is 
described by the Author of that book De Ordine Membrorum, which is falsely 
ascribed to Galen: How that the knees being affected and afflicted, the eyes con- 
dole and weepe, by reason of that old acquaintance of the knees and eyes, or Eye 
lids in the womb, where the child touches its Eyes and Sustaines them with its 
knees. 
Chap. 21. Of the Patella. 
Its connexion. 
Upon the Articulation of the thigh and leg a smal bone is placed, which they 
call a Mola or Patella, the whirled bone of the Knee. 
a T. 21. f. 1. LL.
It growes unto the knee, not fastened by any Ligaments: but only being a glewed 
to the tendons of the muscles of the shanke, it is so held close upon the knee. 
a T. 21. f. 8. d.
Its use.
If you take a diligent view, you shal observe a Ligament somewhat at bloody, which 
does firmly knit and bind the Patella to the hard fat which is placed beneath. 
The office of this bone, is to defend the joint to guard the bowing and bending 
of the Part, and to render the motion more facil: for it hinders the extension of the 
leg from passing out of a right line; and when we fit with our knees bent, it keepes 
the thigh from luxation forward. And because the whole Body inclines forward, 
it hinders us from falling when we go downe a steepe Hil. 
This Galen found by experience, in a certaine young man that was a wrestler, 
an whom, as he was wrestling, the Patella was disjointed, and did ascend towards the 
thighbone, whereupon two inconveniences followed, viz. a dangerous bending in his 
knee, and a trouble in going down Hil: and therefore he could not go down hil 
without a staff. Paræus observes in the 22. Chapter of his 14 Book, that he never 
saw anie that had the Patella broken, but they halted. I have seen such whose Pa-
tella was luxated and drawn upwards, who could not so easily go up hil and down- 
hill as formerly. 
Vesalius his 
opinion touch- 
ing the use of 
the Patella. 
Notwithstanding Vesalius in his Surgery denies that the Patella confers any thing 
to the firmnes of the joint, and that a man does halt, when it is broken or taken out, 
as he avers he had found by many examples, only he saies it is placed upon the knee 
for to defend and secure the joint. 
And he goes not much from the same opinion in his Anatomy, where he saies it 
performers the same office in the knee, which the Sesemoidean bones do in other 
joints. 
Hippocrates in his book de locis in Homine, assignes another use of this Bone, name- 
ly to prohibit moisture from descending out of the flesh into such a loose joint as the 
knee is.
Seeing therefore the Necessity of the Patella is so graeat, I conceive it is but a fable 
which is reported of the Thebans, who, that they might be able to run more swiftly,
took certaine Bones out of their knees. 
Yet there have bin found about Nova Zembla certaine Pigmies or little Men, 
who could bend their knees backward and forward, and were so swift of foot that 
none 

Chap. 25. Of the Breaking the Bones. 285 
none could overtake them, if we give credit to the relations of seafaring from. 
Chap. 22. Of the Tibia and Fibula.
The rason of
these names. 
The Tibia two Bones, the one a larger and more inward, which beares the 
name of the whole; the other is smaller and more external, called b Fibula. But 
Perone (which is rendered fibula) does signifie two things in Hippocrates, the whole 
Fibula, and appendix of chat bone, as Galen expounds it, in his Interpretation of 
the words of Hippocrates. 
It is termed Perone from peiro, which signifies to boare or thrust through. Tis 
called Fibula in Latine from the Greek word phible, which signifies smal and lank;
howbeit in Latine writers of Architecture, certaine beames or joices of wood placed 
to give strength to other parts of the building, are termed Fibula. For this Bone 
fibula does sustaine the outer knob of the shanke-bone unto which it is fixed, be- 
cause the weight of the Thigh and of the whole Body, does most of all beare upon 
that part. 
What the
Malleoli are?
The lower ends of the Tibia and Fibula are termed c Malleoli Ankle-bones, both 
being fattened together by a strong circular Ligament, through which the ten- 
dons of the Muscles are drawn, as was said of the wrists. 
a R. 21. f. 1. M. f. 4. D. b T. 21. f. 1. N. f. 4. E. c T. 21. f. 1. I. K. f. 4. g h.
Chap. 23. Of the Foot. 
The Articulation of the a Astragalus with the b Scaphoides is very close, so that 
it seems altogether immoveable, so that any man would thinke, that the foot is not 
moved laterally by that Articulation. 
The Sesamoi-
dean Bones be-
longing to the
Foote.
Two Sesamoidean Bones are fastened behind the great toe, that they might give 
a secure passage to the tendon of that Muscle which bends the Great toe. 
The Liga-
ments of the
Foot.
In the Sole of the foot, you shal find very many Ligaments, by which the Bones 
are straightly united, that the foot might become hollow. You shal therefore ob- 
serve the Transverse Ligament which binds up the Bones of the Metatarsus, with 
the first ranke of Toe-joints, like that which we find in the Hand. 
Chap. 24. The number of Bones for a Sceleton. 
Two hundred thirty and two Bones are required to make a sceleton, fifteen being 
taken from the number, two hundred forty seven. Because the brestbone is reck- 
oned but for one, as also the Os sacrum and the Coccyx or Crupper bone, because 
in the boiling and clenseing of the Bones, they do not separate Neither wil the d 
Coccyx, e Larynx, f Hyoides, nor g Sternum endure boileing. 
I omit the sixe little Eare-bones, the Os hyoides and the Larynx, because they 
are not joined by way of Articulation with other bones. 
a T. 21. f. 5. A. b T. 21. f, 5. C. c T. 23. f. 3. N. &c. d T. 2. f. 5. & 6, b, 
e T. 13. f. 9. 10. &c. f T. 13. f. 11. ii. &c. g T. 10. f. 2. A A, h T. 20. f. 7. A
B C.
Chap. 25. Of Breaking the Bones. 
When you are sufficiently instructed in the number of the Bones, you shal break 
in pieces every particular bone, that you may enquire into the inner structure
thereof.
The

286 Physical Consideration, and Anatomy Book VI. 
The Mofit of this knowledge is evident in fractures. For hereby may be col- 
lected in how long time a broken Bone may be soddered together again. Hippocra- 
tes writes in his Book de Alimentis: that the nourishment of a Bone may be known 
by the breaking thereof. The Nose bone requires ten daies to grow together, the 
Jaw-bones and the claviculæ and ribs twenty; the Cubit requires thirty, the Tibia 
and Brachium forty, and the thigh-bone fifty, little more or less as occasien servs. 
Inasmuch therefore as the Quantity of a Bones nourishment, and the space of time 
requisite thereunto, does alwaies hold proportion to the Bones thickness: to that if 
the Nose bone, that is to say the Bone of the upper Cheek which reaches to the 
Nose, doe require ten degrees of nutriment; the nutriment of the other Jaw-bone 
of the Ribs and Jugular, which are twice as thick as the Nose-bone, must be double in 
proportion to the nutriment of the other, and will require twice as long time to grow 
together which is known by their breaking, or by the Cure of their respective 
fractures. 
And therefore by how much thicker the Bones are, by so much the more nourish- 
ment, and the longer time they require to be soldered together; to that suppose 
die Nose-bone require ten parts of nutriment, and the Nose being broken shall need 
ten daies time to grow together: the Aliment of the ribs, Jawbone and Jugular, 
(which are twice as thick) must be double in quantity, and they shall require twice 
the time (being broken) ere they can grow together again. 
And the Cubit-bone, because it is thrice as thick as the Nose-bone, therefore it 
will need thrice as much nutriment, and thrice as long time to grow together. 
The Tibia and Brachium because they are four times as thick as the Nose-bone, 
will require four times as much nutriment and four times longer space to grow to-
gether. 
Finally, the Thigh-bone being five times as thick, will require five times as much
nutriment, and five times as much space to grow together, after they have bin bro-
ken. 
Celsus writes in his seventh Book out of Hippocrates, that between the four 
teenth and twentieth day the a jaw-bone, b Cheek-bones, the c Jugular, d Brest bone 
the e Shoulder-blades, the f Ribs, the g Back-bone, the h Hip-bones, i the ankle- 
bones, the k Heel-bones, the l Hand, and the m Foot-sole are healed, between 
the twentieth and thirtieth daies the n Thighes and o Arms: between the seventh 
and twentieth and fortieth the p Arm bones and q Thigh-bones are healed. The 
sence of which place cannot be understood, but by consideration of the threefold ca- 
vity and marrow of the bones. 
A Threefold
Cavity in
Bones.
A Threefold
Marrow.
For I find a threefold marrow contained in the Bones in three different Cavities. 
The marrow of the greater bones as of the Arme and Thigh, is reddish: the mar-
row of the middlesiz’d bones which are hollow in some good measure, is white. 
The rest of the bones being of a spungy substance, or full of little Cavities, are reple- 
nished with marrowy Juice, but not with red marrow. 
a T 15. f 3. L. b T 15. f 1 E. c T 21. f 1. B B. f 2. A. d T 10. f 2. A
A. d&c. e T 21. f 2. B. f T 10. f 2. & 3. g T 13 f 19. T 10. f 2. & 3. T
2. f 1. h T 2. f 3. & 4. & c. i T 21. f 5. A. k T 21. f 5. B. l T 21. f 2. G
l. m T 21. f 4. G H. n T 21 f 1. M N. o T 21. f 2. D E. p T 21. f 1.
C C. q T 21. f 1. K K.
Howbeit the inferior jaw-bone is hollowed in the base, and in the Chin it is of a 
stony hardness, it contains red marrow, which does not fluctuate from one end of 
the Jaw-bone to the other, because of the hardness and solidity of the jaw-bone in 
the Chin. Whence it is easie to be demonstrated that the Maxilla is a double 
bone
The Clavicula, which Galen writes is fistulous, we find to be every where of a 
spungy substance. The Ribs, the Vertebræ, the shoulder-blades, the Hip-bones,
the Tarsian and Metatarsian bones, also the wrist and after wrist-bones, are spungy 
and like Pumice-stones. The bones of the fingers are hollow and contain a whitish 
marrow. In the Feet, only the great Toe is fistulous or hollow-bon'd.
Chap.

Chap. 26. Of the Collection and ordering of Bones &c. 287
Chap. 26. The Collection and ordering of Bones  
for a Sceleton.
Two parts of 
this worke.
But if you are not minded to breake the bones, but desire to preserve and pre- 
pare them for a sceleton. You shal observe that there are two things required there- 
unto; first the purifieing and clensing of the bones, secondly their apt uniting and 
fastening together, which may be termed Sceleco-pæia. 
The Clens-
ing of the
Bones.
As for what concerns the clensing of Bones, Scaliger in his Exercitations observes, 
that the stone termed Sarcophagus does in a short space eat off and consume the 
flesh from the Bones. And so the bones remaine bare and naked. 
Pausanias in Eliacis relates that the Divel Euronymous eates off the flesh of 
dead People, so as nothing but the bones remaine. 
The Jewes imagine that there is an internal Devil named Azazel; who in Levi- 
ticus is named Princeps desertorum, and eates and devoures the flesh of the dead, 
leaveing only the bones behind. 
But we are not wont to use the stone sarcophagus, because we have it not;
neither are we acquainted with its operations. Neither do we use the assistance of 
the Divel Eurynomus, because we defie and execrate those wicked spirits. 
Wherefore haveing cut the Bones one from another and taken their flesh off, you 
shal cast them into a large Kettle or Caldron, except the Brest-bone, the Hyoides, 
and Coccyx. Then fil the Caldron with scalding water, so as to cover all the Bones 
and set them on the fire and boile them foure or five houres. 
You shal be careful while they are boiling that no bone stick out, so as to be 
fainted by the smoak.
Also you shal ever and anon take off the scum and fat which swims aloft, that the 
Bones may be the more neat and cleane. 
Which that it may be more effectually performed, you shal perce the larger 
bones that are ful of Marrow, in the Head with an Awle that all the superfluous 
marrow may flow and soake out. 
You may throw away the first water and boile them in a second, that all the mar- 
row may be drawn forth. 
Then take them out while the water is hot (for if it be cold they wil be greasie) 
and scrape and clense them with a smal knife. 
Some, while they are boyling, throw in a pound of Lime or Chalke, to make 
them the whiter, but this eates off the Epiphysies and the Gristles which do crust 
the extremities of the Bones; which you must take heed you pul not away, when 
you scrape the Bones. 
Then you shal put the Bones againe into most pure water boiling hot, and boile 
them for an houre, that all the marrow and fat may be separate and exhausted. After
that cast them into cold water, and take them out and wipe and rub them wel with 
course linen cloaths.
When the Bones are thus prepared, many lay them two or three months in the 
open aire to bleach and grow white. Others put them into a wooden case, bored 
ful of holes and hang them in a running brooke, or in the streames of a swift River, 
that the rubbing of the streame may whiten them. 
I had rather lay them under the falling of a Mil-stream for the space of ten or 
twelve daies. 
Bellonius in his Book de Admirandis, relates that he saw in the shore of 
Bononia in Picardy, an innumerable company of exceeding white bones of Bodies 
which had been drowned and cast out upon the shore haveing been buried in the Sea 
sand. He saw the like by the Red-sea, so that the bones so prepared, and sticking 
and growing together by their nerves and Ligaments, are exceeding neate, and cleane 
and whiter then Snow. Such as were those two Skeletons which Galen had to serve 
him in Anatomy. Bellonius observes in the same place, that dead bodies are pre- 
served

288 The Physical Consideration, and Anatomy. Book VI.
served from corruption if they be anointed with the Balme that drops out of Cedar 
trees; also that bones moistened with the same juice remaine uncorrupted. 
The Bones accurately cleansed and dried, you shal preserve in a Chest, or you may 
fasten them together with brass-wire, and so keep them standing in a Case. It is 
needful that you have bones both waies, viz. single and united. And the truth is, as 
Vesalius has tightly observed, the Bones united serve more for ostentation than In-
struction. 
The manner 
of fastening the 
Bones to make 
a Skeleton. 
Moreover by long boileing, first in water, and then in oile, al the Bones of the 
Head and of the upper jawbone are easily separated, as I have often observed: and 
by this meanes you may have them severed one from another, that you may view 
and measure the size and dimensions of every one. The manner of fastening the 
bones together, depends either upon the Industry of the Artist; or it is done by 
imitation of another Sceleton neatly composed. You may read more of this sub-
ject in Vesalius and Columbus. Also Carolus Stephanus, has noted some things 
upon those Authors, worthy of Consideration. 
FINIS. 

An Alphabetical Table. 
A Page
ABdomen, Its Medicinal conside-
ration, the swelling thereof,
and its constitution what it
should be. 33
Abdomen, The diseases thereof 34
Its Muscles 248
Absurd Longings, whence they proceed,
55
Accelerator, What Muscle so termed. 250
Amaurosis, What we are to understand
thereby 142
Anastomosis, Of the Veins and Arteries
what it is, 255
Anatomy, The consideration thereof two-
fold, towit, Phylosophical and Physi-
cal, both which necessary 1
Anatomy, How far forth useful and pro-
fitable in Physick 2
The Authors intent and method in trea-
ting thereof, ibid &c.
The Method of teaching it twofold 3
Anatomist, General Precepts for him to be
first acquainted with 26
Anchylosis, What to be understood there-
by 266
Aneurisma, What it is 259
Angina, or Squinsy, What kind of tumor
201
The wounds thereof 214
Annular Ligament of the Toes, what it is
238
Animal Spirits, The place where they are
made, according to our Author, 128
Hofmans arguments to the contrary,
answered 129, 130
How they are carried through the Ner-
ves 277
Anxiety, Whence it proceeds 55
Aorta Vein, Descending, its distribution,
its great Artery called Lienalis, its Use,
Thickneß of its Membrane, and its
Vessels 67
Aphthæ Ulcers of the Gums, their ma-
lignancy 204
Page
Appetite, Want thereof whence it pro-
ceeds, and likewise Dog-appetite 55
Apophysis, What it is 279
Apophysis Coracoides, Its Use ibid
Apoplexy, What,and whence it proceeds
133
Apoplexy, And such like diseases, their
cure ibid
Arm, The nine Muscles thereof, 225
Arteria aspera. Or Wind-pipe, its Use
&c. And whether the wounds thereof
are curable 208 209
Artery, Its definition 27
Arteries, What they are, whence they
have their original, a large discourse
hereof by the Author, 115 116
Arteries, Whether they may and which of
them may be opened 217
Arteries, Of the Head before they be open-
ed a profitable experiment of Alxander
Benedictus to be put in practise 218
How the motion of their Pulse can be
stopped while the Heart moves 259
Ateries Crural. The Pulse is last felt in
them 259
Arteries Carotides, Or sleepy Arteries,
whether or no the obstruction of them
do cause deep sleep,Communion of them
and the spinal Marrow 115 116
Articulation Of the bones, what con-
curs thereto 263 &c.
Asthma, What it is, its kinds 103
Atrophy, What it is, and whence it pro-
ceds 59
Auditory Passages of the ear 193
Axillary Kernells, their diseases 211
B
Back and Breastbones, Their Vertebræ,
Fallopius his observation touching
them 23
Back, Properly is not moved 231
How it is bowed by the Quadratus ibid
Its various Muscles, 231 232
Back-bone, Its shape gristles, Mem-
AAA branes,


THE TABLE.
Page
branes and the way to diffect the Verte-
bras thereof 275 276
Baldness, Whence it proceeds, 120
Belchings and Hiccupings, Whence they
proceed 55
Belly, The Muscles thereof, their number,
figure, largness, original; the white-
line, connexion, action, use, &c.
40 41
their medicinal consideration 42
Belly, The division of its parts 44
the two notable veins thereof, and what
is to be considered in them, 50 51 52
the Cæliacal Artery thereof 52
the Nerves thereof, and what diseases
rise therefrom 67
Its Muscles ten 232
Benedictus, His experiment, before the
Arteries of the head may be opened 218
Blackmoors, Whether they have any sutu-
ers in thir Sculls 268
Blindness, Whence it proceeds, and the
causes thereof. 142
Bladder, Its Muscles and the office there-
of 232 251
Blood, Where and how made, and how
distributed from the liver, a double cir-
culation thereof 57 58 105
how necessary the circulation of it is to
continue the motion of the hart, and
whether the blood do paß from the right
ventricle of the heart unto the Lungs,
108
Blood, what kind of it is circulated, in
what vessels, after what manner,
and how necessary the circulation is,
109
difference of blood in Vena Cava and
Porta 108
whether the blood paß through the Sep-
tum Medium of the heart or no 110
the circulation thereof intercepted by
obstruction of the ventricles, or of the
veins, 111
The conditions of that which is good,
and how the Fibres, are bred therein,
the natural temper thereof, the quantity
sometimes congealled 66
Whether it may be lessend otherwise
than by blood-letting 66
Body Of man, how to be considered by
Anatomists, its Parts, its solid parts,
how manyfold, its similar parts, what
and how many. 26
Page
Its natural and legitimate conformati-
on, and the necessariness of it, 29
Body Of man, its division, 31
Bone, its definition, 27
Bones, the history of them,otherwise term-
ed Ostology 4
Four considerations of them ibid
Bones, Doctrine of them double 5
Why there are many of them in man. 6
Bones Of men, in what particulars they
differ from those of Women 18
Ihe number of them in a Mans Body
19
Bones Of Infants, the history of them,
ibid
Which is both Ancient and profitable 2O
The number of them in Infants, 25
Bones, A new history of them, 260, &c
Why they are last treated of 261.
The Doctrine of them demonstrated in
a dead body very necessay for the perfect
knowledg of Mans body, for the practice
of Physick, ibid
Bones, Their general diseases, 265 &c.
Bone, Called Luz the fable of the Caba-
lists concerning it 275
A threefold cavity in them, and a three-
fould marrow 286
Bones, The remote matter that nourisheth
them 263
The immediate matter of them, and
whether they have Veins, Arteries, and
Nerves ibid
Bones, the collection and ordering of them
for a Sceleton 287
The manner of fastening them to make
a Sceleton 288
Brains, Their substance, division, their
Coats, Pipes, and principal diseases
121, 130
Brain, Ful of windings and turnings, 122
Brain, Whether it hath any motion, and
whether it cooleth the heart 124
Whether or no and how the blood is
circulated therein, and what blood it is
nourished with 124 125
Brain, The manner of dessecting of it,and
history of it's parts.
Breast, or Chest, What it is, fourfold
14
Its form what it ought to be 30
Breasts, What to be chosen in Nurses,
ibid
Breast-bone, Of how many particular
bones


THE TABLE.
Page
bones it is made up, the hole thereof,
and the Natural shap thereof. 274
Bronchocele, what it it 201
Buboes, where they arise 76
Buccinator, what muscle so called. 220
C
Cabalists, their fable touching the Bone
Luz, 275
Cachexy, what it is, and whence it pro-
ceeds, 59
Cacochimie, what it is, and whence it
proceeds 65
Call, what it is, its scituation, original,
diseases thereof, similar, organical and
common 45 46
Cancer in the gums, what it is,and whence
204
Caries of the Skul, what it is 270
Cartilage, its definition 27
Cartilage xiphoides its figure. 274
Its use and hole ibid
Its crooking 275
Carunculæ Myrtiformes, what, and where
they are 81
Catalepsis and Carus, what diseases they
are 133
Catarrhs, what they are and whence. 135
Cheeks, their description 195
Cheeks, whence that sympathy between
them and the knees proceeds 284
Chest its bounds, shape, parts, and medi-
cinal consideration, and diseases, 94,
95, 96, 97
Its muscles proper and common. 230
Child, its conception 87
its posture and accommodation in the
Womb, its natural birth: Somtimes
drawn out with a hook. 88, 89
Child-bed purgations, what they are, re-
tained how to be evacuated. 89 90
Chin, described 194
Choler, what it is, the paßages thereof,
two sorts thereof in the Liver 59, 60
Choler, diversity of it proved by the dif-
ferent sorts of Jaundice. 60
Chorda of Hippocrates, what it is, 237
Choroides plexus, the cause thereof. 122
Circocele, what kind of tumor,and where
bred 78
Clavicula, what it is, its gristle and Liga-
ment 273
Clitoris in women, what meant thereby
82
Page
The Muscles thereof 233
Coccix or crupper bone, what it is, and
the Muscles peculiar thereunto in a Wo-
man 250
Cods, their coats, cavities, veßels. 77
Columella or Uvula, inflamed. 205
Coma or dead sleep, whence it proceeds
132
Concha, what it is, and its parts. 273
Conorium, what it is, 123
Convulsion, what it is, and whence. 134
Corus, their original 213
Cough, whence it proceeds 104
Courses, in letting blood to move them
what to be observed 86
Cremaster Muscle, what it is 76
How it is known 249
Crupperbone, what it is, and the Muscle
peculiar thereunto in man and woman,
250
Its structure, &c. 276
Cubitus, what it is, and why the Radius
is joyned thereunto, 280
Cubit, the Muscles thereof 225
Cuphosis, a disease, and where
Cynicus spasmus, what, and whence. 196
D
Dandrif what it is,and whence it proceeds
120
Deafness, whence it proceeds. 193
Diabetes, what it is, and whence it pro-
ceeds 68
Diaphragme, its originall, motion, and use
231
see midrif
Diastole, what it is, and wher. 107
Digestion, how it is caused 53
Dropsie, how defined, and whence it pro-
ceeds 59
Drum of the Ear, what it is 193
Dugs of Women,their substance, scituati-
od, magnitude, shape, the teats, and the
circle about them, their diseases. 95 96
Dugs and Womb, their consent how caus-
ed 97
E
Ears, the paßage of them, and the Bony
Circle, 21. Their parts, windings,
Nervs, and diseases 191 192
Ear external, its Muscles common and
proper 219
Inside thereof ; its three Cavities, and
why the drum thereof is placed oblique-
ly A a a 2 272, 273.


THE TABLE.
Page
Its Mallet, anvil, and stirrup, Muscles,
Ligaments, and drumstring. ibid
Ears, Noises in them, their cause and cure,
193
The passages from them to the palate,
269
Egyptians, their operation in cutting out
the stone not to be approved 72
Eyes, their Scituation, Parts, Membrane,
Muscles, Kernels &c. 136. 137
Eyes, their divers Diseases, and their
names 138, &c.
Eye, the Orbitary bones thereof how many
12
Picolominus, his error touching their
number ibid
Their Muscles are six 219
Eye-holes, the bones thereof 22
Eye-lids, their Muscles four 218
Elephantiasis of the Arabians what it is
213
Empyema, what we are to understand
thereby 96
Emphysema, what distemper of the eye
139
Epididymis, what it is, 78
Epiglottis, what is meant thereby 207
Its diseases 208
Excretion of Blood, Choler, Serum, Quit-
tor, &c. 194
Exostosis, what it signifieth 266
Exostosis of the Skul, what it is 270
F
Face, what it is. And its Parts 11
Its description and diseases. 194, 195
Fallingsickness, whence it proceeds, 134
Falx, a partition so termed. 122
Fat, its definition and division 27
Feavers, continual and intermittent sea-
ted in the trunk of the Vena Cava 64
Feavers different either in respect of their
Cause, matter, or manner, &c. 111
Fibre, its definition and description. 27
Fingers, their Muscles. 228, 229
Their pappy ends 212
The best way of dissecting them 247
Flegm, whether or no it may be collected
within the Cavity of the Sphenoides
269
By what waies the flegm of the nose
passeth 269
Flesh, its definition and description. 27
Proud Flesh in head-wounds whence it
Page
proceeds 267
Foot, its dvision into Tarsus, Metatar-
sus, and Toes 18, &c.
Its Muscles and Motion. 236, 237, &c.
The Sesamoidean bones belonging
thereto, and its ligaments. 285
Forehead Muscles, should rather be they
called the Eyebrow Muscles 218
Forinx, what meant thereby 123
French Maidens, why they have their right
shoulder higher than the left 280
Frontal Muscles, two of them 228
Fundament, in what order to be dissected,
Its Name, Muscles, and their use
76, 77
Its diseases, sometimes closed up ibid
G
Gall, The Bladder thereof, its name,
substances scituation, bottom, neck
sinews, bigneß shape, communion, vessels,
diseases, 59 60
Gargareon, Uvula, or mouth-palat Its Mus-
cles 223
Gelding, How it may be made insensible
76
Genitalls, Of a man, and first of the yrad,
its parts, skin, foreskin, bridle, membrane
vessels, muscles, the hollow ligaments,
their internal substance, the Nut there
of, and its diseases
73. 74
see Yard
Gongroni, What kind of Tumor, 201
Gonorrhea, Virulent, the seat thereof, 79
What vein to be opened in the cure
thereof 80
Greensickness, What it is, and the cause
thereof, 195
Groyns, What to be observed therein, 76
Gullet, Its membrane, kernels, and ob-
struction 209
Gums, Their natural and preternatural
constitution, 204
Their Ulcers, or Aphthæ, 204
Guts, Their substance, scituation, longi-
tude, general division, and specialy
their cavity and use, 46
Their names, ligaments, fat, shutters,
connexion, and Medicinal considera-
tion 46 47 48
Gut Duodenum, The Biliar pore thereof
46
Gut Ileum Its descent, 76
Page 


THE TABLE. 
Page
H
Ham, Why the wounds therein are dead-
ly 284
Hairs gray what kind of Symptom 120
Hallucination, What meant thereby
142
Hand, Its division into three parts 16
The two muscles thereof 227 228
The Void space therein, 283
Head, What it is, and its division, 8
The sutures thereof 21
The form thereof, 30
Why placed in the highest Place, its size
Shape, division, and the general diseases
thereof 118 119
Its Muscles proper and common 218
223
Whether an issue may be made in the
crown 268
Its motion and ligaments 272
Head Dropsie, What it is, and whence it
proceeds, 121
Head, Which Vertebra it it moved upon
272
Heart, Whether it be the original of vena
cava, and whether it and the Arteries
are moved at the same time 108 109
Heart, The Nobility thereof, its substance
scituation, bigneß, shape, vessels, Ears,
pulse, and the cause thereof according
to our Author. 107
How necessary the circulation of the
blood is to continue the motion of the
heart 108
Whether the blood do pass from the
right ventricle of the heart unto the
Lungs, and what kind of blood is circu-
lated 108
Its right and left ventricle, their vessels
valves 109, 110
Heart, Its usual diseases, 110
Heart, the Septum medium of it what it
is 110
Heartburning, Whence it proceeds 55
Heart, Eaten by worms bred in the blood
66
Heart, The original of Vena Cava 108
Hemorrhoids, What they are, and where,
77
Hermaphrodites, Who so to be termed
75
Hildanus, His way of taking out the stone
not to be approved of 72
Page
Hip, The consumption thereof, 283
Its natural shape ibid
Hippocrates, Certain places in him ex-
pounded 92
Hoarsness Whence it proceeds 208
Hofmans Arguments touching the breed-
ing of the Animal spirits answered,
128 &c.
His tenent disturbs the practice of Phy-
sick 130
Hucklebone, The Oval hole thereof, 283
Hydrocele, What kind of rupture it is 78
Hymen In Virgins what it is 81
I
Jaws Two; the bones thereof 11 12 22
The lower Jaw, its Muscles on either
side six 221
Iliacus Muscle its original, 234
Ilium, The bones thereof; its parts 17
How its motion is performed 42
Ilium and os sacrum, Joyned together,
their motion, and by what Muscles
they are moved forwards and back-
wards 232 282
Indigestion, Ill digestion, and Slow di-
gestion, from whence they al proceed,
55,
Infants, What diseases are proper to them
90
Intercostals internal what they are, 230
Interosseans, what Muscles they are 238
Joints, Gallens doctrine concerning them
8
Ischuria, What it is, and whence it proceeds
68
Issues, in what places they are commonly
made 214
Isthmus defined, its diseases. 205
K
Kibes where bred, and whence they arise
213
Kidneyes, The substance of them, their
temper, Scituation, greatness, number,
shape, colour, and vessels 67 68
Kidneyes, How shaped in children 68
Their internal structure admirable, its
Basin, teats, sieve, and infirmities ibid
The falling down of them, their swelling
stoppage, ulcer, vein opened, action hurt
&c. 69
Stones bred therein, when cureable by
incision ibid
Kidneyes, Their consumption, and who
most subject thereunto, &c ibid
B b b Kidnies


THE TABLE. 
Page
Kidnies Weakness, when a dropsie proceeds
therefrom, how it is to be cured, ibid
Kings-Evil What it is, and how its swell-
ings differ from Bronchocele, 201
Knees, Whence that sympathy between them
and the Cheeks proceeds 284
Its ligaments 283
L
Labor hard in Child-hearing, helps to fur-
ther it 89
Larynx, Or head of the Wind-pipe, its
scituation, Gristiles, motion, muscles,
and diseases 207 208 222
Leg, The two bones thereof 17
Its several Muscles, and motion 235 &c.
Lethargy, What it is, and whence, 133
Ligament, its definition, 27
Ligament Why it is interposed between
the Radius and the Cubitus 280
Limbs (being the third part of the Scele-
ton) how to be considered 15
their division ibid, &c. and 211
Limbs, upper and inferior, 24
Method of handling them, and parts
of which they are compounded, and
their several diseases 212 &c.
Veins, Arteries, and Nerves, belong-
ing to them 254 &c.
Linea Candida, which is the true one, 249
Lips, Their description 194
Lips, Their Muscles are two, common
to both 220
Their use and diseases, 196, 197
Liver, Its substance, colour, scituation,
bigness, lobes or laps, regions, vessells,
and diseases 57 58
Its communion with other parts 58
Its action, and symptoms, 58 59
Liver, whether the roots of Cava and
Porta are united therein 58
Liver, Not the original of Vena Cava, 64
It is the original of Vena Porta 108
Lordosis, A disease, and where 278
Lousie Evil, what kind of Symptom it is
121
Loynes, The parts thereof, name, with
its etymology, parts bordering upon
them 90 91
Loyns, Their pains, the speciall causes
thereof, the Authors method in treat-
ing thereof, 91 92
Loynes, their structure &c. 276
Lungs or Lights, Their Substance, Ves-
sels, Scituation, Motion, Division,
shape, Membrane, Peculiar manner
Page
of nourishment, and diseases 102 103
Lungs, their excellency, and why they
are so subject to fluxions, in the disea-
ses thereof whether blood-letting be ap-
proveable 104
Lungs, their consumption,and some causes
thereof ibid
Lungs, why distinguished into lobes or
laps 105
Luxation or Disjoynting, what kind of
disease it is 266
Luz, a bone so called, and a fable of the
Cabalists touching the same, 275
M
Maidens French, why they have their right
shoulder higher then the left 280
Maleoli, what they are 285
Man wel formed, how many things to be
consideerd in him 29, 30
Massa carnea what it is, and its use, 239
Masseter or Chaw Muscles, what they are
221, 241
Men broad shouldered whether they beget
large children 279
Men, why so few that can use both hands
alike 280
Marrow of the Bones threefold, and whe-
ther it be compast with a membrane.
263
Marrow spinal, its natural constitution,
original, progreß, and dignity, &c.
276, 277,
Meatus Hepaticus and Cysticus, what they
are 59, 60
Meazles and smal Pox, whence they pro-
ceed 90
Mediastinum, what it is, its Cavity and
diseases 98, 100
Melancholy, its definition 132
Membrane, what it is, its Names, Sub-
stance, Original, Temper, Scituation,
Number, Figure, Colour, Connexion,
Communion, Action, Use. 27, 36, 37
Membrane, its Medicinal consideration,
37, 38
Membrane common of the Muscles. 38
Meninges, what they are 121 
Mesenterium, what it is, its scituation,
Structure, Vessels, Use, Diseases. 48, 49
How the milkie Veins thereof are af-
fected 49, 50
Metacarpium, what it is, and of how ma-
ny Bones it consists 281
Midrif, or Diaphragme, its Scituation
Substanc


THE TABLE 
Page
Substance, Shape, Vessels, Motion, how
it moves in respiration, and its diseases,
101, 192
Its Original from the Circumference of
the bastard Ribs, and its Use. 231
The Muscles thereof 231
Mouth-palate, the Muscles thereof. 223
Muscle in the general, what it is, its defi-
nition, Substance, Temperature, Origi-
nal and insertion, Quantity, Number,
Figure, Belly, Head, Tendon, Color,
Connexion, Communion, Action, Di-
versity, how it is known 38, 39
Muscles particular of several parts. 218
219, &c.
Muscular dissection, an Introduction there-
unto, shewing an accurate Method to
cut up the Muscles of the whole Body.
219, 240, &c.
Muscles of the Radius, Wrists, Fingers,
and Thumb ; the best way to dissect them
248
N
Nailes, their diseases 212
Navil what it is, Its vessels, use, and
consideration 44 45
Neck. Its use, length, parts, vessels
kernels, and medicinal consideration
200 201
The Muscles thereof eight 224
Nerve, its definition 27
Nerves, or sinews, contained within the
Chest, eight remarkable ones, their
names 116 117
Nerves, how many of them proceed from
the spinal marrow 277
Night-mare, what Affect so called, 132
Nose, Its scituation, magnitude, shape,
cavities, bones, gristles, membrane,
Muscles, and diseases 197 198
Its muscles common and proper 220
Its diseases 198
Nose-bleeding, the causes thereof, and
cure 198 199
Nostrills, The passages from them to the
palate 269
Nympha in young women, what it is 81
O
Oesophagus, or Gullet, its membrane, ker-
nells, and obstruction 289
Omentum what it is, it's scituation, ori-
original, diseases 45 46 see Cal.
Ophiasis, what kind of disease it is 120
Osteologia nova, or a new history of the
Page
bones, 260 &c.
Os Hyoides, Its scituation, structure,
fastening, and why it hath many liga-
ments 271
Os Hyois, What it is, its parts, Basis, and
Horn, Error of Anatomists concern-
ing it, and its Muscles 12 13 221
Os Sacrum, and Os Coccyx, what they
are 23
How the motion of the Os Sacrum is
performed 42
Oscheocele, What kind of rupture, 78
P
Palate, Its structure, and rotteness 204
Its Muscles two 223
Palsy, what it is, and whence it proceeds,
134
Pancreas, What it is, its substance, scitua-
tion, vessels, new channel, use, 50, see
Sweet-bread.
Parotis, what it is 192
Its constitution 241
Parts of the Body sollid how many fold,
similar what and how many 26 &c.
Parts, Organical what, how many, what
to be observed in each of them 28
Patella, What its connection, use, & Vesali-
us his opinion touching the same 284
Pectorall Muscle described 245
Pelvis and glandula pituitaria, what they
be 124
Pericardium, What it is, how inflamed,
ful of humor, deficient of hmnor, worms
bred therein 100
Pericranium and Periostium, What they
be. 119
Perineum opened, and in what manner
72
Peritoneum, what it is ; its temperature,
substance, original, scituation, quantity,
figure, color, connexion, communion,
use, and Medicinal consideration 42
43
The proceß thereof 76
Peripneumonia, Whether there may be any
or no, how it is caused according to our
Author; it's difference from a Pleurisy
99 10O
Pharinx, What it is, and its Muscles
209 222
Phymosis, and Paraphymosis, what dis-
eases 74 75
Piss-bladder, Its substance, coates, mag-
nitude, shape, holes, Muscles, vessels
B b b 2 and


THE TABLE 
Page
diseases 70 71
Its key, an instrument so called 72
Piss-bladder perforated, its ulcers cleans-
ed ibid
Plethory, What it is, and whence it pro-
ceeds 65
Pleura, What it is, Its thickneß 97 98
Pleurity, How the pains of the sides are
knowen from it, and how they differ in
their scituation and matter 98 99
Difference of it from a Peripneamunia
100
On which side the blood is to be taken
away in a plerisie ibid
And out of what vein ibid
Pneumatocele, What kind of rupture it is,
78
Polypus in the Nose, the cause thereof
198
Priapismus What disease it is 74
Processus vermiformis, Where it is placed
123
Psoas Muscls, what, and where it is 234
R
Radius, what it is, and its Muscles. 226
The best way of dissecting its Muscles 247
Why it is joyned to the Cubitus. 280
Respiration, or fetching of breath, the ne-
cessity thereof, it is either free or forced,
its Organs, wherein natural respirati-
on consists, whether perspiration may
supply its use 105, 106
Respiration unnatural, the differences there-
of, it is somtimes needful in healthy persons
107
Rete Mirabile, what it is 124
Rhagosis, what kind of laxity it is. 78
Rheumatism, an experiment of Alexan-
der Benedictus, for it. 218
Rheumatismus, what Catarrh so called.
135
Ribs, the true and bastard ones, their
twofold substance 275
Rhomboides, what kind of Muscle it is
244
Rumination, what kind of disease it is
and from whence it procceds 56
S
Saphena vein, what and where it is 257
Sarcocele, what it is, and why so termed
78
Scapula or shoulder blade, its articulati-
on with the Arm, its Muscles, Cavity,
Page
Ligament, &c. 278, 279
The parts of it how named by Galen.
and how by Celsus ibid
Sciatica, the bastard one what it is, 258
Sciatica gout, where it is bred. 213
Seed, the matter of it threefold, how it is
voided 79
Seed suppressed, whether hurtful to Wo-
men 86
Seed vessels and Seed bladders, why wrink-
led, from whence the texture of veins a-
mong them, they are the seat of a viru-
lent Gonorrhea 79
Scoliosis, what it is, and the cause thereof
278
Sceleton, what it is, and its division, 8
Septum or Speculum Lucidum, what so 
called, and why 122
Sesamoidean Bones, which they are. 282
The way to find them ibid & 285
Shoulder blades, The Muscles thereof four
224
Shoulder, the extremities thereof. 15
Shoulder, why the french Maidens have
the right higher then the left 280
Siriasis or dog day madneß, what it is. 131
Smelling Lost, Diminished, depraved,
the Causes thereof 198
Sneezing, whence it is 199
Sphenoides Sinus, its use. 269
Sphincter of the mouth, what Muscle it is
220
Skin, its division, Scarf skin its substance,
Original, Figure, Color, Connexion,
Use, and how beautified 34, 35
Its diseases 211
Skin called Derma, or the true skin, its
Substance, Temperature, &c. whether
lost can be regained 35, 36
Skul, what it is, its natural Figure. 8
The number of the Bones thereof 9
The holes and pits thereof 10, 11
What is principally to be observed there-
in, and why it is double 267
The Primary diseases thereof 270
Spawling, or Salivation, whence it pro-
ceeds 56
Spinal Marrow, the natural constitution
thereof, its Original and Progreß, and
how many Nerves proceed from it, to-
gether with its dignity. 276, 277
Speech abolished, the cause thereof .206
Spirits Animal, how they are carried
through


THE TABLE. 
Page
through the Nerves 277
Squinsie, what kind of tumor it is. 201
Squinzie, an horrid Symptome, somtimes
killing a man within fifteen or twenty
hours 208
Spleen described, its Substance, Color,
greatneß, Parts, Scituation, Temper,
Shape, Connexion 61 and 62
Its Actions controverted, and divers
opinions thereof 61, 62
Sternum, what it it, Fallopius his obser-
vations concerning it 23
Sterility, whence it proceeds 87
Stammering, whence it proceeds. 286
Stisis, what disease it is, & where 278
Stomach, the Membranes thereof, its Sci-
tuation, Size, Figure, Orifices, its
Bottom, inner Surface, Action, diges-
tion. Communion with other Parts,
great sympathy with the Kidneys, com-
munion with the whol body, and me- |
dicinal consideration 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57
Stone, ease for old men that have it 72
Stone suckt out, and cut out of the bladder
ibid
The french and Italian way the best. 73
Stones, their Coats, Substance, Scituati-
on, Figure, Action, Diseases. 77,78
Their several Muscles 232
Suffusion, what we are to understand
thereby 141
Sutures, what they are, and how manifold
9
Whether Blackmoors have any in their
Skuls 268
Sweetbread or Pancreas, what it is, its
Substance, Scituation, Vessels, Use. 50
Systole, what to be understood thereby
107
Sweats bloody, whence they proceed. 259
Symphysis, what it is, and its differences
265
T
Tast Vitiated and depraved, the cause
thereof 206, 207
Temples, the bones thereof 21
Teeth and Gums, their Nature, Parts,
Page
Basis, and root 13
Their Number and Order. 13, 202
At what time they appear 22
Where the hinder Teeth lie, & when they
first break out, their generation ibid
Teeth-sickness 90
Whether they breed in all ages and whe-
ther they may be fastened in the place of
those drawn out 203
Teeth, the way to shew the Vessel appertai-
ning unto them, what must be observed
in a Tooth that is drawn out 271
Tooth-ach, the cause thereof 203
How the spungy Excrescence is taken out
of the Tooth-hole
Tendon, what it, and its Original 40
Tenesmus, what disease so called 77
Testicles, or Stones, their Muscles. 232
Thigh, and the bone thereof, Knee, Ham,
Knee-pan &c. 17, 282
Its motion, and various Muscles,
233 &c.
Thigh-bone, the Neck thereof why long
fashioned 283
Thumb, its Muscles 229
The best way of dissecting its Muscles
247
The bones thereof 282
Tibia and Fibula, the reason of their
names 285
Tonsils, their diseases 205
Tongue, its Substance, Scituation, Mag-
nitude, Vessels, Muscles, and
diseases 205, 206
Whether its Substance wil grow again
206
Tongue-tyed, who they are. 206
Toes, their proper Muscles. 238, 239
Trunk, being the second part of the Scele-
ton, of what it consists 13
V
Varices, what they be 258
Their cure ibid
Vena Axilaris, Thoracica, Basilica, Merdi-
ana, Salvatella, what and where they
are 254, 255
Vena Cava inflamed, Cure of the diseases
thereof twofold, a valve therein, its use,
66
C c c Heart


THE TABLE. 
Heart the Original thereof 108
Vena Cava and Aorta, within the lower
Belly 64
Vena Cava, Divided into trunks, it is the
Seat of Feavers continual and inter-
miting ibid
The Liver is not the Original thereof
ibid
Why it hath a thick coat 65
Vein, its and definition description. 27
Veins conteined within the Chest, at large
discoursed of by the Author. 113, 114,
115
Vein Jugular, in what case it may be ope-
ned 114
Veins, which of them are most usually o-
pened 215
Whether the Foot vein may be opened,
& how 216
Veins, whether they have fibres, and why
they are called the bodys wind-doors. 65
The retentive faculty of them being lost,
what follows 66
Vena Porta, the Liver, the original there-
of 108
Veins, their valves, with the Use of them.
55
Vein cut off, whether it wil grow again.
258
Ventricles, what meant thereby. 33
Why the dissection begins at the lower,
its Substance, Temperature, Original,
Scituation, Quantity; Parts containing,
Common, Proper, Diverse; Parts
contained, Figure, Color, Connexion,
Use, Action 32,33
Vertebræ, What they are, and the parts
thereof 13
Vertebræ of the Neck, Back, Loynes,
Os Sacrum, or holy bone, and the Crup-
per bone 14
Vertebræ, their Gristles, and Membranes
275
Vertigo What it is, and whence it proceeds
134
Vesalius his opinion touching the use of
the Patella, 284
Vessels their motion how abolished 259
Vomits warily to be used, not to be given
to persons very weak 56 57
Vomiting of choler and blood, whence it 
proceeds
Vomica, What kind of Impostume it is
1O3
Page
Ureters, their description, substance,length
scituation, wideneß, original, Nerves,
Obstruction, stone 70
Urethra, or piß-pipe, 73
Its obliquation in the Perineum, impo-
stumated hard to cure 74
Urine let out with a knife 72
Uvula, Its use, Muscles, ligaments, and
diseases &c. 204, 223
W
Warts, From whence they arise, 195
Wesand, or Windpipe, Its use, gristles,
Membrane, and diseases 208 209
Whether the wounds thereof are cura-
ble 209
Woman, Her Genital parts, which are
either external, or internal, their disea-
ses 81 82
Parts, internal which serve for genera-
tion, two fold, the way of shewing these
parts 83
Woman childing, Why some sickly, others
not 87
Woman big-bllyed whether she may be let
blood 88
Whether in the disease Cholera she may
bleed ibid
Women beg-bellied, whether in them the
womb grows thinner ibid
Women never changed into a Man 75
Womb, Its substance, coats, temper, sctiu-
ation, greatness, shape, cavity, action,
infirmities, 84 85
Worms, how they breed in the blood, 66
Heart eaten by them ibid
VVorms bred in the Pericardium, which
feed on the heart 100
Worms, in the Ears termed Eblai, 194
Wrist, The two Muscles thereof 227
The best way of dissecting its Muscles
247
VVrist bones their number, and articula-
tion 281
Y
Yard of a man, Its parts, Skin, foreskin
It's bridle, membrane, vessels, muscles,
Its


THE TABLE. 
Page
Its hollow ligaments, their internal sub-
stance, Its obliquation in the Perineum,
the Nut thereof, impostumated hard to
cure, 73 74
Yard, the medicinal consideration, and
diseases thereof 74
Page
Its muscles are four 233
Z
Zecchius, His vain brag 72
Zygomaticus, What Muscle so called 220
The Names of several Books printed by Peter Cole at the sign of the
Printing-preß in Cornhil neer the Royal Exchange.
Eleven several Books by Nich. Cul-
peper, Gent. Student in Physick
and Astrologie.
I The Practice of Physick, contai-
ning seventeeu several Books. Wherein
plainly set forth, The Nature, Cause,
Differences, and several sorts of Signs ;
Together with the Cure of al Diseases
in the Body of Man. Being a Transla-
tion of the Works of that Learned and
Renowned Doctor, Lazarus Riverius,
now living; Councellor and Physitian
to the present King of France. Above
fifteen thousand of the said Books in
Latin have been sold in a very few
Yeers,having been eight times printed,
though al the former Impressions wan-
ted the Nature,Causes,Signs,and Dif-
ferences of the Diseases, and had only
the Medicines for the cure for them; as
plainly appears bythe Authors Epistle.
2 Riolanus six Books of Anatomy and
Physick containing the Foundation of
Physick and Chyrurgery ; wherein all
the Body of Man is in such sort Ana-
tomically dissected, as that the Causes
and Natures of al Diseases are demon-
strated from the Fabrick and use of
the Parts affected.
3 Veslingus Anatomy of the Body of
Man,Wherein is exactly described,the
several Parts of the Body of Man, illu-
strated with very many larger Brass
Plates than ever was in English before.
4 A Translation of the New dispen-
satory,made by the Colledg of Physiti-
ans of London. Whereunto is added
The Key to Galens Method of Physick,
5 The English Physitian enlarged .
being an Astrologo-Physical Discourse
of the vulgar Herbs of this Nation ;
wherein is stewed how to cure a mans
self of most Diseases incident to Mans
Body, with such things as grow in
England, and for three pence charge.
Also in the same Book is shewed,
1 The time of gathering al Herbs,
both Vulgarly and Astrologically.
2 The way of drying, and keeping
them and their Juyces. 3 The way
of making and keeping al manner of
useful Compounds, made of those
Herbs. The way of mixing the Me-
dicines according to the Cause, and
Mixture of the Disease, and the part
of the Body afflicted.
6 A Directory for Midwives, or a
Guide for Women. Newly enlarged
by the Author in every sheet, and illu-
strated with divers new Plates.
7 Galeus Art of Physick, with a
large Comment.
8 A New Method both of studying
and practising Physick.
9 A T r eatise of the Rickets, being
a Disease common to Children ;
wherein is shewed, 1 The Essence,
2 The Causes, 3 The Signs, 4 The
Remedies of the Disease : Published
in Latin by Dr. Glisson, Dr. Bates
and Dr. Regemorter, translated into
English, And corrected by N. Cul-
peper.
10 Medicaments for the Poor, Or
Physick for the Common People.
11 Health for the Rich and Poor,
by Dyet without Physick.
Twenty one several Books of Mr. Wil-
liam Bridge, Collected into two
Volumns. Viz.
1 Scripture Light the most sure Light:
compared with, 1 Revelations & Visi-
ons 2. Natural & Supernatual Dreams.
3 Impressions with, and without
Word 4.Light and Law within. 5. Di-
vine Providence. 6. Christian Experi-
ence. 7. Human Reason. 8. Judicial
Astrology. Delivered in Sermons, on
2 Pet. 1. 19.
2 Christ in Travel:Wherein, 1. The
Travel of his soul. 2. The first and
after effects of his Death, 3. His Assu-
rance of Issue. 4. And his satisfaction
therein. Are opened and cleered in Ser-
mons, on Isa. 53 11.
3 A Lifting up for the Cast-down,in
case of, 1. Great sin. 2. Weakness of
Grace. 3. Miscarriage of Duties.
4. Want of Assurance, 5. Affliction.
6 Temptation. 7. Dissertion. 8. Un-
serviceableness. 9, Discourage ments
from the Condition it self. Delivered
in thirteen Sermons,on Psalm,42. 11.
His Four Sermons concerning,
4 Sin against the Holy Ghost.
5 Sins of Infirmitie.
6 The false Apostle tried and disco-
vered
7 The good and means of Establish-
ment
8 The great things Faith can do.
9 The great things Fath can suffer.
10 The Great Gospel Mystery of the
Saints Comfort and Holiness, opened
and applied from Christs Priestly
Office.
11 Satans power to Tempt, and
Christs Love to, and Care of his
People under Temptation
12 Thankfulness required in every 
Condition.
13 Grace for Grace.
14 The Spiritual Actings of Faith
through Natural Impossibilities.
15 Evangelical Repentance
16 The Spiritual Life &c.
17 The Woman of Canaan.
18 The Saints Hiding place, &c.
19 Christs Coming is at our Mid-
night.
20 A Vindication of Gospel Ordi-
nances
21 Grace and Love beyond Gifts
The Cause of our Divisions disco-
vered, and the Cure propounded.
Twelve Books of Mr. Jeremiah Bur-
roughs lately published ; also the
Texts of Scripture upon which
they are grounded.
1 Gospel Reconciliation,Or Christs
Trumpet of Peace to the World.
Wherein is Opened Gods exceeding
willingness to be Reconciled to Man ;
And Gods sending his Embassadors to,
that


Books printed by Peter Cole. 
that End from. 2 Cor. 5 19, 20, 21.
2 The Rare Jewel of Christian Con
tentment, on Phil. 4. 11. Wherein is
shewed,1 What Contentment is. 2| It
is an Holy art and Mystery.3 The Ex
cellencies of it.4 The Evil of the con-
trary sin of Murmuring, and the Ag-
gravations of it.
3 Gospel-Worship, on Levit. 10. 3.
Wherein is shewed, 1 The right man-
ner of theWorship of God in General;
And particularly,In hearing the Word,
Receiving the Lords supper, & prayer.
4 Gospel-Conversation, on Phil. 1
17 Wherein is shewed, 1 That the
Conversations of Beleevers must be a-
bove what could be by the Light of
Nature.2 Beyond those that lived un-
der the Law. 3 And sutable to what
Truths the Gospel holds forth. The
which is added, The Misery of those
Men that have their Portion in this
Life only, on Psal. 17. 14.
5 A Treatise of Earthly-minded-
neß:Wherein is shewed, 1What Earth-
ly-mindedness is, 2. The great Evil
thereof,on Phil. 3. part of the 19.verse.
Also to the same Book is joyned, A
Treatise of Heavenly-mindedneß, and
walking with God,on Gen. 5. 24. and
on Phk.3. 20.
6 An Exposition on the fourth, fifth,
sixth, and seventh Chapters of the
Prophesie of Hosea.
7 An Exposition on the eighth,ninth,
and tenth Chapter of Hosea.
8 An Exposition on the eleventh,
twelfth, and thirteenth Chapters of
Hosea, being now compleat.
9 whe Evil of Evils, or the excee-
ding sinfulness of sin, on Job 16. 21.
10 Precious Faith, on 2 Pet. 1. 1.
11 Of Hope, on 1 John 3. 3.
12 Of Walking by Faith, on 2
Cor. 5. 7.
Eleven Books made in New-Eng-
land,by Mr. Thomas Hooker,and print-
ed from his Papers, written with his
own hand ; are now published in three
Volumns, two in Quarto, and one in
Octavo, viz. The Application of Re-
demption by the effectual work of the
Word, and Spirit of Christ, for the
bringing home of lost sinners unto
God. The first Book on 1 Pet. 1. 18,
19, The second on Matth. 1. 21. The
third on Luke, 1. 17. The fourthon
2 Cor. 6. 2 The Fift on Matth. 20. 5,
67 The sixt on Revel. 3. 17. The
seventh. on Rom. 8. 7. The eighth on
John,6.44. The Ninth on Isa. 57. 15.
The Tenth on Acts,2. 37. The Last,
viz. Christs Prayer for Beleevers. On
John V7.
A Godly andFruit-
ful Exposition, on the
first Epistle of Peter.
By Mr. John Rogers,
Minister of the Word
of God at Dedham in
Essex.
The Wonders of the Loadstone.
By Samuel Ward of Ipswich.
An Exposition on the
Gospel of the Evange-
list St. Matthew. By
Mr. VVard.
Clows Chyrurgery.
Marks of Salvation.
Christians Engagement for the Go-
spel, by John Goodwin.
Great Church Ordinance of Baptism
Mr. Loves Case, containing his Pe-
titions, Narrative, and Speech.
Vox Pacifica, or a Perswasive to
Peace.
Dr. Prestons Saints submission, and
Satans Overthrow.
Pious Mans Practice in Parliament
time.
Mr. Sympsons Sermon at Westminster
Mr. Feaks Sermon before the Lord
Major.
Mr. Phillips Treatise of Hell.
-of Christs Genealogy.
Eaton on the Oath of Allegiance
and Covenant, shewing that they ob-
lige not.
A Congregational Church is a Ca-
tholick Visible Church. By Samuel
Stout in New-England.
A Treatise of Politick Powers,
wherein seven Questions are answered,
1 Whereof seven Questions are answered,
1 Whereof Power is made, and for
what ordained. 2 Whether Kings
and Governors have an Absolute Po-
wer over the People. 3 Whther
Kings and Governors be subject to the
Laws of God, or the Laws of their
Country. 4 How far the People are
to obey their Governors. 5 Whether
al the People have,be their Governors.
6 Whether it be Lawful to depose an
evil Governor. 7 What Confidence
is to be given to Princes.
The Compassionate Samaritan.
Dr. Sibbs on teh Philippians.
The Best and Worst Magistrate. By
Obadiah Sedgwick.
The Craft and Cruelty of the
Churches Adversaries. By Matthew
Newcomin.
A Sacred Penegrick. By Stephen
Martial.
Barriffs Military Discipline.
The Immortality of Mans Soul
The Anatomist Anatomized
King Charls his Case, or an Appeal
to al Rational men concerning his
tryal.
Mr. Owens stedfastness of the Pro-
mises.
A Vindication of Free Grace : En-
deavoring to prove, 1. That we are
not elected as holy, but that we should
be holy ; and that Election is not of
kinds, but persons. 2. that Christ did
not by his death intend to save all
men, and touching those whom
he intended to save, that he did
not die for them only, if they
would beleeve, but that they might be-
leeve. 3. that we are not justified pro-
perly by our beleeving in Christ, but
by our Christ, beleeving in him. 4.
that which differenceth one man from
another, is not the improvement of a
common ability restored through
Christ to al men in general, but a
principle of Grace wrought by
the Spirit of God in the Elect. By
John Pawson.
Six Sermons preached by Doctor
Hill. Viz.
1 The Beauty and Sweetness of an
Olive Brance of Peace, and Brotherly
Accommodation budding.
2 Truth and Love happily married
in the Church of Christ.
3 The Spring of strengthening
Grace in the Rock of Ages Christ
Jesus.
4 The strength of the Saints to
make Jesus Christ their strength.
5 The Best and Worst of Paul.
6 Gods Eternal preparation for his
Dying Saints.
The Bishop of Canterbury's Speech
on the Scaffold.
The King's Speech on the Scaf-
fold.
The Magistrates Support and Bur-
den. By Mr. John Cordel
The Discipline of the Church in
New-England : By the Churches and
Synod there.
A Relation of the Barbadoes.
A Relation of the Repentance and
Conversion of the Indians in New-
England : by Mr. Eliot, and Mr.
Mayhew.
The Institutes of the Laws of Eng-
land, by John Cowel Octavo.
A Description of the Grand Signiors
Scraglio ; or the Turkish Emperors
Court. By John Greaves. Octavo.
The reigning Error arraigned at the
Bar of Scripture, and Reason. By
Francus Fulwood. Octavo.
The state of future Life. By Tho-
mas White. twelves.
FINIS.


The Use of the Letters and Figures, directing to the 
twenty four Tables, or Brass Cuts ; and the hundred eighty
four Figures in those Tables, representing the Parts of the
Body.
EVery Braß Cut, or Print, is called a Table ; and the said Prints or Ta-
bles,are twenty four, and have their respective Numbers set at the Foot
of the Table, or Print, on the corner that is outmost, and against the
Readers right hand. Each particular Figure is also numbred, and the Num-
ber set over its Head, and the several parts of each Figure, are distinguished
by Letters of the Alphabet, for the easier finding. To compare therefore, the
Discourse with the Tables, I shall teach you by an Example or two. In
Chap 8. page 9. line 21. The word Coronalis, is marked with the Let-
ter a ; to which Letter, looking at the end of the said Chapter, you find
a T. 15. F. 3. a a a.= intimating that you must turn to Table 15. Figure 3.
and that part of the Figure which is marked a a a. which represents the Coro-
nal Suture of the Skull : The Mark = shews that the former Citation is en-
ded. Again, in the next line of page 9 by the word Lambdoides, you find
Letter b , to which looking at the end of the said Chapter,you find b f. 4. b b.
to teach you that in the 15 Table foregoing, Figure 4. and on that part of the
Figure marked b b. you shall find the Suture of the Skull called Lambdoi-
des : and this mark = after b b. shews again that the Citation is ended.
Again, in the same line, by the word Sagittalis, you find Letter c, to which
turning at the end of the Chapter, you shall there find c f. 3. b b. f. 4. a a.
intimating that in Figure 3. of the forenamed Table 15. and in that part of
the Figure which is marked b b. Also in Figure 4. of the same Table, on that
part which is marked a a you shall find the Sagittal Suture described. The
mark = shews the Citation is ended.
Note that where you find not among the Directory Letters, T. for Table,
that Figure belongs to the fore=mentioned Table. Also you are to take notice
that between two Citations, you shall find this mark =.
Finally : He that would make his most advantage by the use of this Book,
should, having been present at some Anatomical Dissections of the whol Body ;
study the Tables first, with their Explanations on the opposite Pages ; and then
read the Discourse of Riolanus, and compare it all along with the Tables,
which may be best done, if the Tables be bound up by themselves, so as to lie o-
pen alwaies while he is reading the respective Chapters, referring to each
Table.






AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF 
THE FIRST BRASSE PLATE
IN THIS BOOK.
The first Figure shews the Effigies of a living Man, in which, not only
the external parts of the Abdomen, but also the Veins under
the Skin which are conspicuous are represented.
A The right Hypochondria.
B The left Hypochondria.
CC The Epigastrium.
DD The Bowels.
EE The Hypogastrium.
FF The Groyns.
G The Region above the Privities.
H The Vein of the Forehead.
I The Vein of the Temples,
K The external Jugular Vein.
L The Cephalick vein of the right
Arm.
M The Basilick Vein of the right
Arm.
N The middle or common Vein,
which is not in the same place
in all Bodies,
O The cephalick vein of the left hand
P The Vein of the left Hand,called
Salvatella,
QQ The Vein Saphæna descending.
RR. The Vein Saphæna in the Foot
it self,
SS The Sciatick Vein.
The Second Figure expresseth the common coverings of the
Body of Man, and the Muscles under
them laid open.
AA The Scarf-skin.
BBBB The Skin.
CCCC The Fat.
DDDD The fleshy Membrane.
EE Part of the pectoral Muscles
laid open.
FFF Certain beginnings of the
Muscles called Serrati an-
tici majores.
GGHHII The Muscles of the Abdo-
men obliquely descending.
GHH Their toothed beginnings.
IIII The tendon of the oblique
discending Muscles, under
which the right Muscles of
the Abdomen with their Ner-
vous inscriptions appear.
KK The white line of the abdomen.








THE TABLE OF THE SECOND
BRASSE PLATE IN THIS BOOK,
OPENED AND EXPLAINED.
This Table laies open the Bones of the Abdomen in seven Figures : two others, to wit, the eighth
and ninth shews the Muscles of the Abdomen : The tenth gives you a cleer
fight of the Parts, the Peritonæum being removed.
FIG. I.
Expresseth the five Vertebræ of the Loyns, as
they are observed on the fore part.
a a a a The Transverse Proceß.
FIG. II.
Laies open to your view, the Vertebræ of the
Loyns, as are presented on the back Part.
a The hole for the Marrow of the Back.
b b The transverse Proceß.
c c c c The oblique Proceß.
d The acute Proceß
FIG. III.
Represents the internal face of the Os Coxæ, as it
is united in such as are grown up.
A Os Ilium.
B B Os Coxendix.
C Os Pubis.
FIG. IV.
Demonstrates the external face of the Os Coxæ.
A Os Ilium.
a a The Spine of the Os Ilium.
B Os Coxendix.
C C Os Pubis.
FIG. V.
Gives the internal view of the Os Sacrum
divided into six parts.
a a a a The holes which give passage to the Nerves.
b The three parts of the Coccyx.
FIG VI.
The same Bone externally to be seen.
a The hole for the Marrow of the Back.
b b b Lesser holes for Nerves.
c Os Coccyx.
FIG. VII.
The Figure which deciphers the Os Coxa, as it is
observed to be distinct in Children.
A Os Ilium a little taken from the rest.
B B Os Coxendix.
C C Os Pubis.
a a The cleft distinguishing the Os Coxendix and
Os Pubis.
The connexure of all the Bones of the Abdomen,
see in the Table to Chapter 17.
FIG. VIII.
A The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely descen-
ding, in which
a a Are the toothed beginnings.
b b The Tendon sticking to the white Line.
B The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely ascen-
ding, in which
c c c Its beginning.
d d A portion of its tendon which covers the right
Muscle.
e e The right Muscle of the Abdomen.
FIG. IX.
A The transverse Muscle loosed about the be-
ginning, in which
a a a The beginning.
b b A portion of the Tendon.
B The right Muscle of the Abdomen, in which
c The Beginning.
d d d The Nervous inscriptions.
e The end.
C The back part of the other right Muscle, in
which
d Shews the Vein and mammary Artery descen-
ding.
e The Epigastrick vein and artery ascending.
f The Anastomosis of the veins.
g g The Peritonæum laid bare from the muscles.
D D The Pyramidal Muscles.
E E The Proceß of the Peritonæum descending to
the Cods.
FIG. X.
A Part of the Pectoral Muscle detected.
B The Sternum.
C The Stomach being something hid by the Li-
ver.
D The Liver.
E The Omentum in its Scituation.
b A portion which sticketh to the Liver.
c c A portion which is knit to the bottom of the
Stomach.
d d d The remainder of the Omentum as it lies up-
on the Bowels.
F F The Bowels in their scituation.
G The Navil Vein.
H The Ligament of the Bladder composed of the
Urachos, and the two Navil arteries.
I The bottom of the Bladder.
a a a a The Peritonæum divided.








AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE THIRD BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
The Omentum and Mesenterium figure I. The Gula with its Muscles, figure II. and III. The
Stomach and Bowels under it, figure IV. The Tunicles of the Bowels, figure V. and VI.
The Muscles of the right Gut, figure VII. The Nerve of the sixt pair, figure VIII.
FIG. I.
AAAA. The Mesenterium with the Guts adjoyned.
aaaa. The Glandulæ of the Mesenterium.
BBB. The Vessels of the Mesenterium diffused to
the Guts.
CC. Part of the Colon stretched out.
DD. Part of the Omentum drawn abroad up-
wards.
FIG. II.
AA. The first pair of the Muscles of the Gula,
called Cephalopharyngæus.
BB. The second pair of the Muscles of the Gula,
or Sphenopharingæus.
CC. The third pair, Stylopharingæus.
DD. The Sphincter of the Throat.
EEE. A backward view of the Gula.
F The left external Nerve of the sixt pair.
G. The right external Nerve of the sixt pair.
H. The superior Orifice of the Stomach.
III. The bottom of the Stomach.
K. The inferior Orifice of the Stomach with a
portion of the Duodenum annexed to it.
FIG. III.
AA. The Muscles Cæphalopharyngæus conspi-
cuous on the fore part.
BB. The Muscles Sphenopharyngæus.
CC. The Muscles Stylopharingæus.
DD. The Sphincter of the throat dilated.
E. The internal face of the Gula.
F. The descending Part of the Gula.
FIG. IV.
A. The superior Orifice of the Stomach knit to-
gether within a threed.
B. The inferior Orifice, or Pylorus.
CC. The common tunicle of the Stomach separated.
D. The middle tunicle of the Stomach.
E. The inner tunicle of the Stomach.
F. A portion of the Duodenum.
GG. The gut called Jejunum.
HHH. The gut Ileum as it lies in its foldings.
I. The Gut Cæcum.
KKK. The Gut Colon.
L. The shut, being opened in the beginning of the
Colon.
M. The beginning of the right Gut, knit with a
threed.
FIG. V.
PP. The common tunicle of the guts separated.
Q. The middle tunicle of the Guts, which is the
first proper one.
FIG. VI.
R. The rugged tunicle of the Guts which is the
second proper.
FIG. VII.
M. The right Gut cut off.
NN. The two muscles called Levatores.
O. The Sphincter of the Fundament.
FIG VIII.
♃. The Nerve of the sixt pair on the right side,
in which
AA The external and greater Branch.
a The branch which is carried to the Neck.
b A branch of the seventh pair, joyned to this
sixt pair which is carried to the Neck.
c A Nerve of the seventh pair joyned to the sixt
under the skull.
d A branch of the seventh passing to the muscle
of the Os Hyois.
e A branch from the seventh to the tongue.
ff A Nerve from the external branch of the sixt
pair, which is carried to the internal muscles
of the Larynx.
gg The right Nerve called Recurrens.
hh Many Nerves distributed to the Lungues and
windpipe.
iii The branches of the right Stomachical, stret-
ched out.
BBB The internal, or costal branch, laid open
with its bunches.
? The Nervous plexure of the Mesenterium
guarded with certain callous Bodies.
ll The branch which is carried to the Omen-
tum, Duodenum, and Liver.
mm The branch which is carried to the right
Kidney.
nnnn The branches distributed in the Mesenterium
and Guts.
o The branch which goes to the Os Sacrum.
pp The extremity of the internal right branch,
which is distributed to the Womb and Blad-
der.
qr The branches from the internal right side,
which make the plexure on that side.
⚳ The Nerve of the sixt pair on the left side
in which, the signification of the Letters is
the same, save only
G Is the Nerve from the left Recurrens, which
is distributed to the Pericardium, and Hears
it self.
** The Nerve which from the external left sto-
machical is carried to the Liver.
ll The Nerve which is carried to the Spleen
and Gut Colon.
mm The Nerve of the left Kidney. The remain-
der are the same with the former.








AN UNFOLDING OF THE TABLE OF
THE FOURTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK. 
The fourth Table laies down the Scituation of the Sweet-bread, Liver,
and Spleen, and the Delineation of the Vena Porta.
FIG. I.
A The hollow part of the Liver. 
B The round convex, or bowing part of the Li-
ver.
a The umbilicar Vein drawn upwards-
C The Gall in its Scituation.
D The Spleen in its natural place.
EE The Sweet-bread in its proper place.
FF The Vena Porta descending by the Sweet-
bread under the Liver.
G The superior Mesenterical Artery. 
aaaa The branches of the Vena Porta, extended by
the Mesenterium.
bbbb The branches of the artery distributed by the
Mesenterium.
HH The Mesenterium it self dismantled of its su-
perior Membrane.
II The Splenical Vessels laid open, the Pancreas
being cut.
FIG. II.
AA The Body of the Sweet-bread deciphered in its
Natural form.
FIG. III.
The back part of the Sweet-bread, together with
the Spleen turned downwards.
AA The substance of the Sweet-bread, its Mem-
brane being taken off.
BBB The channel of the Sweet-bread newly found
out.
C The biliar pore joyned to the channel.
DDD A portion of the Guts Duodenum and Jeju-
num, cut off.
E The common Orifice, by which the biliar pore
and channel of the Sweet-bread, open them-
selves into the Duodenum.
FFF The internal face of the Spleen.
GGG The veins and arteries distributed in the
Spleen.
FIG. IV.
AA The convex or bowing part of the Liver.
B The skin of the Liver separated from it.
CC The Ligament of the Liver called Septale.
DD The large branches of the Vena Cava within
the Liver.
FIG. V.
AA The hollow part of the Liver turned up-
wards.
B The Lobe of the Liver by which it joyns it
self to the Omentum.
G The cleft of the Liver, out of which the um-
bilicar vein descends.
E The Umbilicar vein turned upwards.
F The Gall placed under the Liver.
G The channel of the Gall.
HH The biliar pore, with the channel stretched
outwards, together with a part of the Duo-
denum, noted by M.
I The trunk of the Vena Porta descending from
the Liver.
K The right Cæliacal artery.
L A Nerve arising from the plexure of the co-
stals.
FIG. VI.
The Vena Porta whol, distinguished into bran
ches, as it is publiquely shewed.
AAA The trunk of the Vena Porta ; A the inferior
portion, descending from the Liver. AA the
deduction of it to the right and left with an
infinite number of smal branches.
B The Splenical branch, divided first into great,
afterwards into very many smal branches,
and distributed like strings about the Spleen.
C The right Mesenterical branch.
D The left Mesenterical branch.
aa The umbilicar vein,
b The vein of the Gall.
c The vein of the Sweet-bread.
dd The vein called Gastrica dextra.
eee The greater Gastrica sinistra.
f g The lesser veins called Gastricæ sinistræ.
h The vein called Vas breve.
ii The vein called Gastroepiploica sinistra.
KK The vein called Gastroepiploica dextra.
ll The Hemorrhoidal veins produced here from
the right Mesenterical branch of the Vena
Porta.
m The vein of the Duodenum.
FIG. VII.
A The convex part of the Spleen laid open.
BB The Membrane of the Spleen separated.
CC The black substance of the Spleen.
FIG VIII.
AAA The hollow part of the Spleen which rectives
the Vessels.
B The Splenical vein with its three branches.
C The Splenical artery divided in like manner be-
fore it enter the Spleen.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE FIFT BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
The present Table laies open the Reins with their Glandulæ, the Emulgent Ves-
sels, Bladder and Ureters. Also the rise and progress of the
Spermatick Vessels.
FIG. I.
AA The Glandulæ of the Reins, or the Capsula of
Melancholly.
B The right Kidney uncovered of the Membrane.
C The left Kidney.
D The descending trunk of the Vena Cava.
E The descending trunk of the great artery.
FF The right Ureter.
GG The left Ureter.
HH The right Vessels preparing the Seed.
II The left Vessels preparing the Seed.
K Part of the Bladder, besides which, the Vessels
carrying the Seed are turned in the Abdo-
men.
L Part of the right Gut cut off.
FIG. II.
AA The common Membrane of the Reins which is
bespread with fat.
BB The Glandulæ of the Kidneys.
C The right Kidney.
D The left Kidney.
E The proper skin of the Kidneys partly separa-
ted.
F The trunk of the Vena Cava descending.
G The trunk of the great artery descending.
H The left Emulgent Vein.
II The right Emulgent Vein.
aa The right Emulgent arteries.
bb The left Emulgent arteries.
c The left Spermatick artery.
d The left Spermatick Vein.
e The right Spermatick Vein.
f The right Spermatick artery.
g The Fatty Vein arising from the Emulgent.
h The fatty artery.
KKKK The Ureters on both sides.
LLLL The Vessels preparing the Seed.
MM The Scrotum with the testicles in it.
NN The Vessels carrying the Seed.
O The Bladder stripped of his external tunicle.
FIG. III.
A The Capsula, or right Glandula Renalis.
BB A Vein from the trunk of the Vena Cava co-
ming into it.
FIG. IV.
A The Capsula dissected.
BB The hollowneß of the Capsula somewhat laid
open.
FIG. V.
AA The internal face of the dissected Kidney.
BB The Emulgent Vein with his branches distri-
buted in the Kidney.
C The Emulgent artery in like manner distribu-
ted.
FIG. VI.
AA The Kidney dissected.
B The Sinus of the Ureter about the Kidney.
C The round form of the ureters descending from
the Kidneys.
DD The narrow passages of the ureters.
EEE The fleshy Knobs called Papillares.
FIG. VII.
AA The common tunicle of the Bladder drawn
back.
BB The middle tunicle and bottom of the Bladder.
C The inner tunicle which appears when the
Bladder is cut.
D The Orifice of the bladder by which the u-
rine passeth out.
EE The Neck of the Bladder which seems swelled
by reason of the Prostatæ joyned to it.
FF Part of the Ureters that come to the Bladder.








AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE SIXT BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table shews the Spermatick Vessels, the Testicles, the Membranes of the
Scrotum, the Yard, the Reins and Bladder.
FIG. I.
A The right Glandula renalis.
B The left Glandula renalis.
CC The Reins on each side. 
D The left emulgent Vein.
E The right emulgent Vein.
FF The right and left emulgent Arteries.
G The right Spermatical Vein.
HH The trunk of the Vena Cava descending.
I The left Iliack branch of the Vena Cava.
K The right Iliack branch.
L The right Spermatical Artery.
MM The trunk of the great artery descending.
N The right Iliack branch of the great Artery.
O The left Iliack branch of the same.
P The left Spermatical artery.
Q The left Spermatical vein.
RR The left Ureter.
SS The right Ureter.
TT The Vessels preparing the Seed.
s t The same Vessels, in what place the Pampini-
formia begin.
VV The Vasa deferentia passing behind the Blad-
der.
XX The Scrotum with the Testicles in it.
Y The Bladder.
Z The neck of the Bladder.
aa The two Muscles erecting the Yard.
bb The two Muscles dilating the Urethra.
c The Body of the Yard.
d Præputium.
FIG. II.
AA The skin of the Scrotum separated.
BBB The Membrane called Dartus.
CC The external part of the membrane Elytroides.
DD The Cremaster arising under the transverse
Muscles of the Abdomen.
EE The internal or membranous part of the Ely-
troides.
FF The proper white tunicle of the testicle sepa-
rated.
f The same joyned to the testicle.
G The Glandulous substance of the testicle.
H The Vessel called Pampiniforme or Pyrami-
dale.
II Epididymis.
K The Parastare.
FIG. III.
œ A portion for the preparing Vessels.
AA The Pyramidal Vessels.
BB Epididymis.
CCC Parastates.
D The testicle covered with its proper Membrane
E A portion of the Vasa deferentia.
FIG. IV.
AA The contexture of the veins and arteries in
the Pyramidal Vessel.
BB Epydidymis.
CC Parastate.
DD A portion of the Vasa deferentia.
FIG. V.
A The Bladder laid bare from its outward tuni-
cle.
BB A portion of the Ureters.
CC A portion of the Vasa deferentia
DD The Capsulæ
dd The end of the Capsulæ.
EE The Seminal Bladders.
FF The Glandulæ Prostatæ.
GG The Urethra.
HH The Muscles which erect the Yard.
II The Muscles which dilate the Urethra.
KK The two Nervous bodies of the Yard.
L The Preputium drawn back.
M The Glans with its Bridle.
FIG. VI.
A The internal tunicle of the Bladder being open.
BB Part of the Ureters.
CC The Orifice of the Ureters as they are diducted
into the Bladder.
DD The beginning of the Capsulæ.
EE The Seminal Bladders.
GG The Glandulæ Prostatæ divided.
L The hole in the Capsulæ passing into the begin-
ning of the Urethra, which is covered with a
shutter.
FIG. VII.
A The Membrane of the nervous body of the
Yard separated.
B The blackish marrow of the same body.
C The Glans laid naked.








AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE SEVENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table shews the Genitals of Women : First of all in their Natural
Scituation ; then their several Parts out of their Scituation ;
Lastly, the Hymen and Zone.
FIG. I.
a The right preparing Vessels.
b The left preparing Vessels.
c A portion of the right Gut.
d The bottom of the Womb sticking up above the
Bladder.
e The Bladder.
FIG. II.
A The right Glandulæ renalis.
B The left Glandulæ renalis.
CC The Kindneys on both sides.
DD The right emulgent veins.
EEE The right emulgent arteries.
FF The trunk of the Vena Cava, divided in-
to the right and left Iliack branches.
G The left emulgent vein.
H The left emulgent arteries.
II The right Spermatical vein.
K The right Spermatical artery.
L The left Spermatical artery.
M The left Spermatical vein.
NN The trunk of the great artery divided into
the right and left Iliack.
OO Womens Testicles.
PP A portion of the broad Ligament.
QQQQ The Tubæ of the Womb, depressed on both
sides with the Ligament, that so the Testi-
cles may appear.
R The bottom of the Womb.
SS The round Ligaments of the Womb cut off
below.
T The neck of the womb.
distributed in
the Womb
V In the right side, the
Hypogastrick vein
V In the left side, the
Hypogastrick artery 
X In the right side, the
Hypogastrick artery
X In the left side, the
Hypogastrick vein
Y The passage of the Womb.
Z The Bladder depressed above the Privities.
aa A portion of the Ureters cut off about the
Bladder.
bb A portion of the Ureters descendings cut off
about the veins.
cc The preparing Vessels dilated about the Te-
sticles.
dd The Vasa deferentia.
FIG. III.
AA The bottom of the Womb dissected croß.
BB The cavity of the bottom.
C The neck of the womb.
D The hole in the neck of the womb of a Woman
which hath brought forth.
EE The wrinkled face of the passage of the
womb.
FF The round Ligaments of the womb cut off
underneath.
FIG. IV.
A The right testicle.
BB The right Tubæ depressed.
C The left testicle.
bb The passages of the testicles of the womb.
DD The left Tubæ of the womb.
E The bottom of the womb.
FF The round Ligaments of the womb cut off
below.
G The Bladder inserted to the passage of the
womb and stretched upwards.
HH Portions of the Ureters.
II The two musculous parts of the Clytoris.
K The body it self of the Clytoris.
FIG. V.
A The head of the Clytoris sticking out under
the skin.
BB The external Lips of the Privities drawn
aside.
CC The Alæ or Nymphæ drawn aside.
D The Caruncle of the passage of Urine besides (a)
EE The two fleshy productions like Myrtle
Leaves.
FF The Membranous containing of the chink.
FIG. VI.
A The Membrane drawn croß the Privities
vulgarly taken for the Hymen.
FIG. VII.
A The Privities of a yong Girl, in which the
signification is the same as in the fift figure.








AM EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE EIGHT BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
The Fruit in the Womb being often helped by Physical Remedies, requires no less diligent observation than
the Body it self of Man : therefore we have given you the representation of it in two Tables according to
the Method of Dissections. The first of which, laies open to your view the Umbilicar Vessels, and
the Sceleton : The other the Deliniament of the Bowels.
FIG. I.
Shews the Child ready to be born, as it lies in a fit
posture for extramission.
AAAA The parts of the Abdomen dissected and di-
stracted.
BBBB The body of the womb divided into four parts
CCCC The Chorion and Amnios joyned together,
and dissected into four parts.
D The Child turning its head downwards,
which is the natural way of Birth.
FIG. II.
Shews the Child taken out of the Womb, the Um-
bilicar Vessels, and Membranes separated
about the beginning.
A The Umbilicar vein distended from the liver.
BB The two Umbilicar Arteries rising to the Na-
vil.
C The Urachus knit to the Navil.
DDD The Navil produced even to the Placentum.
EE The Amnios separated from the Chorion,
under which a portion of the Navil appears.
FF The Chorion divided into four parts.
GGG The Umbilicar veins and arteries, distributed
in the Placenta which are extended above
the Chorion, but very lucidly appear under
it.
FIG. III.
Explains the Secundines, in what part they cleave
to the womb.
AA The convex pan of the Placenta.
BBBB The Chorion under the Placenta.
FIG. IV.
Shews the Bones pertaining to the Head.
AA The bone of the Fore-head distinct from the
Suture.
BB The two bones of the fore part of the head.
C The Crown as yet Membranous by reason of the
distance of the Bones.
D The inferior cheek divided into two parts.
FIG. V.
Shews the ring-like bone of the Infant, to which
the Membrane of the Ear called
Timpanum is knit.
FIG. VI.
The bones of the Ears, removed a little from
their Natural Scituation.
A The Malleus.
B The Incus.
C The Stapes.
D The little bone annexed to the Ligament of the
Stapes, first found out by D. Sylvius.
FIG. VII.
Exactly represents the Labyrinth and Cochlea of
the Ears perfect in all parts.
A The Oval hole in the Tympanum, which looks
toward the Labyrinth.
B The round hole in the Tympanum between the
Labyrinth and the Cochlea.
CCC The three bony Cavities of the Labyrinth.
DD The Cochlea.
FIG. VIII.
Shews the internal face of the Cochlea with
the Labyrinth.
A The oval hole.
B The round hole.
CCC The three circles of the Labyrinth something o-
pened.
DD The Cochlea broken, shewing the little inward
porous circle.
FIG. IX.
The Vertebra of the Infant in three distinct
parts.
A The first back part.
B The second back part.
C The third fore part.
FIG. X.
Shews the Vertebræ of the Neck, the bones of the
Breast as they are seen on the fore part.
A Denotes only the upper part of the Sternum,
the rest are under it.
FIG. XI.
Shews the back, and its Vertebræ, wanting
their Processes.
FIG. XII.
Shews the Vertebræ of the Loyns with the
bones that make the Pelvis.
A The five Vertebræ of the Loyns, whose Proces-
ses are yet cartilaginous.
B The Os Sacrum composed of six parts.
CC The bones called Ilium.
DD The bones of the Pubis.
EE The bones of the Coxendix.
FIG. XIII.
Expresseth the bones of the whol hand.
abd The Appendices of the bones, yet cartilaginous.
c The bones of the wrest all cartilaginous.
FIG. XIV.
Represents the bones of the whol Foot.
abd The Appendices of the bones which are carti-
laginous.
c Certain Cartilaginous bones of the Instep.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE NINTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table comprehends all the Bowels which are found in the
Abdomen, and Breast of the Infant.
FIG. I.
Singularly expresseth the Lacteal Veins, as they
are represented at a single view.
AAA The hollow part of the Liver.
B The Gall.
CC The umbilicar vein bowed upward.
DD The Stomach turned upwards.
E Its lower Orifice tyed with a string.
F A portion of the Jejunum cut off neer the
Pylorus.
GGG The Pancreas of a famous bigneß.
H The Spleen.
II The right Kidney covered with the common
Membrane.
K The left Kidney in like manner covered.
LLL The Mesenterium stretched abroad.
MM &c. The Guts knit to the Mesenterium.
aaaa Certain Lecteal veins stretched from the
Sweet-bread to the Liver , whereof few, and
those the least of them are here expressed.
bbb &c. Lacteal veins distributed from the Sweet-
bread to the Guts, and those bigger.
ccc &c. The Meseraick branches of the Vena porta.
dd &c. Branches of the Meseraick arteries.
FIG. II.
A The right Renal Glandula.
B The right Kidney.
C The left Glandula of the Reins.
D The left Kidney.
E The Vena Cava descending.
FF Its internal Iliack branches.
GG The external Iliack branches of the Vena Ca-
va.
HHH The great artery with its external Iliack bran-
ches.
II The internal branches of the great artery.
KK &c. Both Umbilicar arteries bent downwards.
L The bottom of the womb compressed.
M The neck of the womb.
N The bladder turned downwards.
O The Urachos.
P The node of the Navil cut off.
a The vein of the right Renal Glandula.
b The artery of the right Renal Glandula.
c The right emulgent artery.
d The right emulgent vein.
e The right spermatical vein.
f The right spermatical artery.
g The left artery of the Renal Glandula.
h The left vein of the Renal Glandula.
i The left emulgent vein.
k The left emulgent artery.
l The left spermatical vein.
m The left spermatical artery.
nn The Vessels preparing the Seed.
oo The testicles of a great magnitude.
pp The broad Ligaments of the womb.
qq &c. The Tubæ of the womb bowed down.
rr The round Ligaments of the womb cut off
below.
ss Portions of the Ureters cut off.
FIG. III.
AA The Lungues diducted on both sides.
B The Heart whol.
C The trunk of the great artery coming from the
Heart.
D A portion of the same artery passing down-
wards.
E The Vena Arteriosa stretched from the Heart.
aa The channel between the Vena Arteriosa and
the great Artery.
b The beginning of the right subclavian artery.
c The beginning of the right Carotides.
d The beginning of the left Artery Carotides.
FIG. IV.
AA The Lungnes diducted.
B The Heart cut towards the right Ventricle.
C The Vena Cava opened neer the Heart.
D Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and Ar-
teria Venosa.
E The shutter in the Anastomosis.
FIG. V.
A The Corpus Thymium separated from the
Vessels of the Heart.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE TENTH BRASSE
PLATE in this book.
This represents the Muscles and bones of the Bread,
its Membranes and Diaphragma.
FIG. I.
A The Pectoral Muscle in his scituation.
B The same Muscle out of his scituation.
C Serratus major anticus in its scituation.
D The same a little removed out of it.
E Serratus anticus minor totally in its scitua-
tion.
F The subclavian Muscle in its scituation.
f The Clavicula bowed back under the pectoral
Muscle.
gg Platysma myodes in the neck with their right
strings.
GG &c. The external intercostal muscles without
their scituation.
HH&c. The internal intercostal muscles in their sci-
tuation.
II A portion of the Diaphragma in its scitua-
tion.
K Part of the great artery descending.
L The hole for the Gula passing the Diaphrag-
ma.
M The hole for the Vena Cava descending.
NN The square muscles of the loyns in their sci-
tuation, of which Chap. 12.
OO The muscles called Psoas in their scituation,
of which Chap. 19.
FIG. II.
Shew the bones of the breast as they are to
be seen forwards.
AA The Sternum.
B The Mucronata, or sword-like Cartilage.
CC &c. The cartilaginous part of the Ribs.
1.2.3.4.5.6.7. The true Ribs.
8.9.10.11.12. The bastard Ribs.
FIG. III.
Shews the Ribs, Vertebræ and processes
on the back part.
FIG. IV.
The Breast opened, in which
AA The Mediastinum drawn to the side.
BB The tunicle of the Mediastinum diducted un-
der the Sternum.
C The right lobe of the Lungues.
FIG. V.
AA Part of the Pleura drawn at one side from the
Ribs.
BB The Ribs laid bare from the Pleura.
CC The Ribs cloathed with the Pleura.
FIG. VI.
Shews the Diaphragma separated from the
Ribs and Vertebræ.
AAA The fleshy part of the Diaphragma covered
with its Membrane.
BB The Phrenical arteries.
CC The Phrenical veins.
D The passage of the Vena Cava.
E The passage of the Gula.
FFF The membranous part of the Diaphragma.
G The hole between the fleshy portions of the des-
cending of the great artery.
FIG. VII.
A The left nerve of the Diaphragma.
B The right nerve of the same.
C The superior membrane of the Diaphragma
separated.
D The fleshy substance of the Diaphragma.
E The hole for the Gula.
F The hole for the Vena Cava.
GGG The Membranous part.
HHH The fleshy parts between with the great arte-
ry descends.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE ELEVENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table chiefly represents the Heart, its Membranes, Vessels, Ventricles
and shutters, then the Lungues and the Aspera Arteria
separated from them.
FIG. I.
A The Pericardium compassing the Heart.
BB The Lungues embracing the Heart in their Na-
tural Scituation.
C The Vena Cava ascending above the Heart.
D The beginning of the vein without a fellow.
E The right subclavian vein.
F The right Jugular vein.
G The left Jugular vein.
H The lefi subclavian vein.
II The right and left Carotis Artery.
KK The right and left subclavian Artery.
LL The Nerves of the sixt pair descending to the
Lungues.
M The beginning of the great Artery descending.
FIG. II.
Shews particularly the vessels passing from the Heart
to the Lungs ; which are shewed you separated
in the third and sixt figure of the 
following Chapter.
A The Pericardium taken from the Heart.
B The Heart with the Coronal veins and arteries.
C The trunk of the great Artery passing out of the Heart.
D Its descending part turned upwards.
EE The left branch of the Arterial vein distributed
to the Lungues. 
F A channel between the arterial vein, and the
great artery.
G The right branch of the arterial vein.
HH The right and left branch of the venal artery.
I The Ear of the Heart.
KK The Lungues about the Heart.
L The proper tunicle of the Lungues separated.
FIG. ♃.
The Heart of an Infant whol.
A The proper Membrane of the Heart separated.
B The substance of the Heart bare.
CC The right and left Ears of the Heart.
D The great Artery sticking out of the Heart.
E A portion of the Vena Cava.
FIG. *
A Part of the Heart transversly cut.
B The left ventricle.
CC The right ventricle conspicuous.
DD The Septum of the Heart.
FIG. III.
Shews the Vena Cava dissected with the right
Ventricle.
A The Orifice of the coronal Vein.
B The Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and 
the venal artery.
CCC The shutters called Tricuspides.
DDD The right Ventricle of the Heart opened.
aa The passages between the Membranes ending
in the Septum.
FIG. IV.
A The arterious vein dissected in the right ven-
tricle.
BBB The shutters called Sigmoides in the arterious
vein.
CCC The right Ventricle of the Heart opened.
FIG. V.
A The great Artery dissected neer the Heart.
BBB The semilunar shutters of the great artery.
CC The left Ventricle of the heart. 
D Part of the left Ventricle turned back.
FIG. VI.
A The Venal artery dissected.
B The beginning of the Anastomosis between the
venal artery and the Vena Cava.
bb The passages between the Membranes ending in
the Septum.
CC The two mitral shutters.
DD The left Ventricle of the Heart opened.
FIG. VII.
Shews the backward part of the Lungues and wind-
pipe, as they are joyned to the Heart.
A The right Nerve of the sixt pair which comes
to the Lungues.
B The left Nerve of the same.
C The middle branch between each Nerve.
D The branch which is carried to the Pericardium.
EE The two greater branches of the windpipe
which are Membranous behind.
FF The hinder part of the Lungues.
G The proper Membrane of the Lungues.
HH A portion of the Pericardium left.
I The heart left in his Scituation.
FIG. VIII.
A The wind-pipe cut off under the Larynx.
B The right branch thereof divided first into two
parts.
C The left branch thereof divided into greater
and lesser branches.
ddd &c. The extremity of the branches ending in
membranous channels.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE TWELFTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
FIG. I.
Shews the Vena Cava.
A The beginning of the Vena Cava, with his
large orifice about the Heart.
BB The rise of the subclavian branches.
C The beginning of the descending trunk.
DD The right and left Iliack branches.
aaa &c. The branches of the Axygus distributed to
the Ribs.
bb The superior intercostal.
cc The internal mammary.
* The Mediastina.
dd The Vertebral Vein.
ee The internal Jugular cut off under the skul.
ff The external Jugular, from which the in-
ferior branch riseth to the Organ of speech,
and the Subcutaneus by the face and Tem-
ples, and backwards by another branch to
the Ears.
gg The Cervical Vein.
hh The progreß of the subclavian branches.
ii The internal scapular vein.
KK The external scapulars.
3.3. The vein carried to the Muscle Deltois.
ll The superior Breast-vein.
mm The Cephalick vein cut off.
nn The basilick vein cut off.
oo The inferior Breast-vein.
p The left phrenical vein.
q The right phrenical vein.
rr A famous branch distributed in the Liver.
ss tt &c. The sprigs thereof distributed in the right
and left side thereof.
uu The Venæ musculæ, or superior Lumbals.
yy The veins of the Renal Glandulæ
xx The right and left emulgent.
zz The right and left spermatical.
aa The beginning of the Lumbals.
ßß The Vena muscula of the inferior Lumbal.
γγ The Vena sacra.
ΔΔ The external Iliack branch.
EE The Epigastrick vein.
δδ The internal Iliack branch.
εε Vena Glutea.
ζζ The Hypogastrick veins.
ηη The veins of the Privities.
θθ The inguinal veins.
KK &c. The branch of the crural vein.
iii The Saphena.
λ The vein Ischias.
FIG. II.
Particularly describes the coronal vein of the heart.
FIG. III.
Shew the Arterial Vein of the Heart.
A The beginning by which it passeth out of the
right ventricle.
BB Its branches which paß to the right part of
the Lungues.
CC Its branches which paß to the left.
FIG. IV.
Shews the great Artery.
A Its beginning rising out of the heart.
BB The beginning and progreß of the subclavian
branches.
C The trunk descending.
DD The right and left Iliack branches.
aa The artery Carotis.
bb Its external branch distributed to the Jaws,
Face, and backwards to the Ears.
cc The internal Carotis cut off under the skull.
dd The vertebral artery in like manner cut off.
δδ The cervical muscula.
ee The internal Mammary.
ff The branches of the superior intercostal artery.
gg The internal scapular artery.
hh The external scapular artery.
ii The superior breast-artery.
kk The inferior breast-artery.
l m The arteries distributed to the muscles of the
Shoulder.
nn The inferior intercostals.
oo The phrenical arteries.
p The famous artery called Cœliaca.
q Its right branch divided into three parts ; of
which, the superior and inferior is distributed
to the Liver, and the middle to the Gall.
r The left branch of the Cœliacal.
s The right Gastrical artery.
t The splenical artery divided in smal branches
to the spleen.
u The artery called Epiploica.
u r The Gastroepiploica.
x The artery carried to the Renal Glandula.
yyy &c. The superior Mesenterical artery distributed
into branches.
zz The emulgent arteries.
aa The rise of the Lumbal arteries.
ßß The spermatical arteries.
γγ The inferior Mesenterical artery derived into
many branches.
ó The Arteria sacra.
Δ The external Iliack artery.
δδ The internal Iliack.
ηη Arteria Glutæa.
ζζ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the right
Gut and Privities.
♀♀ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the
womb distinguished from the former.
εε The umbilicar artery.
EE The Epigastrick artery.
θθ The Arteria Pudenda.
ii The Ischias.
kk The inferior Arteria Muscula.
λλ The artery which goes to the internal Iliack
muscle.
FIG. V.
Shews the Coronal Artery of the Heart.
FIG. VI.
Shews the Venal Artery arising from the left
Ventricle of the Heart.
A Its Orifice.
BB Its branches distributed to the right side of the
Lungues.
CC Its branches distributed to the left.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE THIRTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
In this Table is laid open to view, the Cartilages of the Larynx, with their Muscles ;
the Os Hyois with its Muscles ; the Tongue, its Nerves and Muscles ; the
Uvula with its Muscles ; the Tonsils, the Vertebræ of the
Neck and its bowing Muscles.
FIG. I.
The external face of the Buckler-like Cartilage.
FIG. II.
The internal face of the Buckler-like Cartilage.
FIG. III.
The hinder view of the Ring-like Cartilage.
FIG. IV.
A view of the foremost part of the same Cartilage.
FIG. V. VI.
The Cartilages called Arytænoides.
FIG. VII.
The Epiglottis.
FIG. VIII.
A The Buckler-like Cartilage.
BB The pair of Muscles Hyothyroides.
CCCC The pair of Muscles Sternothyroides.
DD The small Muscles called Cricothiroides.
FIG. IX.
A The external part of the Epiglottis joyned to the
Larynx.
BB The Muscles Thyroarytænoides.
CC The lateral Muscles Cricoarytænoides.
D The Ring-like Cartilage.
EE The fore part of the wind-pipe.
FIG. X.
A The internal face of the Epiglottis.
aa The sticking out of the cartilages Arytænoides.
BB The Muscles Arytænoides every where loosed.
CC The Muscles Cricoaritænoides postici.
D The broad part of the Ring-like cartilage.
EE The binder and membranous part of the wind-
pipe.
FIG. XI.
A The Basis of the Os Hyois.
BB The horns of the Os Hyois.
CC The two cartilaginous Appendices.
FIG. XII.
A The internal face of the Basis of the Os Hyois.
BB The internal face of the horns.
CC The two cartilaginous Appendices.
FIG. XIII.
A The sides of the Os Hyois.
BB The muscles Geniohyoides turned downwards.
CC The internal Geniohyoides commonly called
Genioglossi.
DDDD The muscles Sternohyoides.
EE The muscles Sylocertohyoides.
FFF The Muscles Coracohyoides.
ff The middle tendinous part.
FIG. XIV.
A The inferior part of the top of the Tongue.
BBBB The muscles Basioglossi.
ßß The nervous substance between the muscles.
CC The muscles Ceratoglossi.
DD The muscles Styloglossi.
EE The muscles Myloglossi.
aa The Nerves of the Tongue from the fourth
conjugation.
bb The Nerves of the Tongue from the seventh
conjugation.
FIG. XV.
A The Gargareon or Uvula.
BB The external pair of Muscles.
bb Its tendon which passeth the chink.
CC The internal pair of muscles something compres-
sed.
D Part of the Pallat from which the Uvula hangs.
FIG. XVI, and XVII.
Shews the Glandulæ called Tonsillæ.
FIG. XVIII.
AA The long muscles bowing the neck.
BB The muscles bowing the neck called Scaleni.
aa Part of the Nerves tending to the arms.
CC The muscles bowing the Head with the Ma-
stoides.
FIG. XIX.
Shews the seven joynts of the neck.
FIG. XX.
The first joynt of the Neck, in which
aa The two holes holding the hinder part of the
Head.
bb The holes on the sides which gives passage to the
arteries to ascend.
FIG. XXI.
The second Vertebra of the Neck.
a The tooth-like proceß.
b The Spina Bifidia.
FIG XXII.
a The Spine : the rest as like the other joynts.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE FOURTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
It contains the Muscles which are conspicuous about the Shoulders, Back, Loyns, and
Neck, the Carkass being turned over upon the Belly.
FIG. I.
AA The muscles Trapeaii in their scituation.
BB The Rhomboides laid a little to view.
CC DD The broadest muscle of the back, in which
CC Shews its fleshy part.
DD Its membranous beginning.
FIG. II.
AA Trapezius pulled out of its scituation.
BB The Rhomboides laid open in its scituation.
C The same drawn out of bis scituation, as yet
joyned to the basis of the Scapula.
DD Both the Levators of the Scapula.
E Serratus posticus minor in his scituation.
F Serratus posticus major in his scituation.
G The same muscle out of his scituation.
HH The greatest part of the Musculi Splenii con-
spicuous in their scituation.
II A portion of the Musculi complexi.
KK The Mastoides somewhat separated above.
LL The Sacrolumbi not removed out of their
place.
MM The longest muscles of the back not separated.
NN The beginnings of the Sacrolumbi and longest
muscles united.
OO The muscles Quadrati somewhat laid open.
FIG. III.
AA The beginnings of the muscles Sacrolumbi
and the longest united.
BBBB The Sacrolumbi something moved out of their
place and distinguished in their tendons.
CCCC The longest muscles of the back somewhat re-
moved, and distinguished into their tendons.
DD The Musculi Spinati not separated.
E The Muscle Complexus in its scituation.
F The same separated from the Head, that so
the rest may come to view.
GG The Muscles extending the neck in their sci-
tuation.
H The fore part of the Mastoides loosed.
I The greater right muscle of the Head,drawn
a little out of his place, that so the lesser right
muscle may appear.
K The superior oblique muscle of the Head.
L The inferior oblique Muscle.
FIG. IV.
AA &c. The Musculus Spinatus pulled out of his
place, that so the tendons may be beheld in
their order ; they are described at the big-
gest.
BB The muscles of the Loyns called Sacer in his
place.
CC A porrion of the muscles Quadrati in their
place.
DD The muscles Spinati in their place.
EE The transverse muscles of the neck decipho-
red greater and longer than they should be,
that so the tendons may be the better seen.
FF The Mastoides separated from the Sternum,
and turned back.
GG The inferior oblique muscles of the Head.
HH The superior oblique muscles of the head.
II The greater right muscles of the head some-
thing drawn aside.
KK The lesser right muscles of the head in their
place.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE FIFTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table contains the Muscles of the Face and inferior Jaw ; also the bones
of the Skull, and of both Jaws.
FIG. I.
AA The skin of the Head detracted.
BB The fleshy Pannicle separated.
CC The Pericranium detracted.
DD The Skull bare.
E The muscle of the Forehead.
FF The muscle that shuts the Eye-lids.
G The first muscle of the Nose.
H The second muscle of the Nose.
I The muscle dilating the wings.
K The muscle of the first pair lifting up the Lips.
L The muscle drawing the Lip upwards.
M The muscle drawing the Lip downwards.
NN The muscle shutting the Lips.
O The Buccinator.
PP The temporal muscle in his place.
Q The muscle lifting up the Ear.
R The muscle drawing the Ear obliquely.
S The muscle Masseter in his place.
TT The muscle Digastricus moved from his be-
ginning.
FIG. II.
AAA The temporal muscle out of his place, the
Jaw being dissected.
aa Its acute insertion into the proceß of the Jaw.
BB The Masseter separated.
CC The Digastricus loosed at the end, and drawn
aside.
DD The internal Pterygoides.
EEEE The external Pterygoides.
F The Musculus Quadratus, or musculous Ex-
pansion separated.
FIG. III.
A The bone of the forehead.
aaa The Coronal Suture.
α The hole of the bone of the forehead for the
Nerve of the third pair.
B The right bone of the fore part of the Head.
bb The Sagittal Suture.
C The left bone of the fore part of the Head.
D The bone of the Temples.
cc The false Suture.
d The Duglike proceß.
e The proceß of the Os Jugalis.
E The first bone of the upper Jaw.
F The Jugal proceß.
G The second bone of the Jaw hid with the sha-
dow of the former.
H The third bone.
I The fourth bone of the Jaw.
i The hole in it for the Nerve of the third pair.
K The fift bone.
L The lower Jaw.
l The hole in it for the Nerve of the fourth pair
to paß out.
M The sharp proceß of the inferior Jaw.
N The blunt proceß of the inferior Jaw.
FIG. IV.
A The left bone of the fore part of the Head.
aa The sagittal Suture.
B The right bone of the fore part of the Head.
bb The Suture Lambdois.
C The bone of the hinder part of the Head.
D The triangular bone.
ϕ A portion of the bone of the Temples with the
Duglike proceß.
FIG. V.
AA The cavity of the bone of the hinder part of the
Head within the Skull, in which the Cere-
bellum lies.
B The internal face of the Os Sphenois.
CC The Os Ethmois.
D The cavity of the bone of the forehead above
the Nose.
aa The first hole in the wedglike bone.
αα The second hole.
bb The third hole.
cc The sixt hole.
* The seventh hole.
dd The fift hole.
ee The first hole of the bone of the Temples.
ff The rocky proceß of the bones of the Temples.
gg The third hole of the bones of the Temples.
hh The fourth and fift hole of the hinder part of
the Head.
FIG. VI.
AA The lower part of the bone of the hinder part
of the Head conspicuous.
aa The proceß by which the hinder part of the
Head is joyned to the first Vertebra of the
Neck.
BB Part of the bone of the Temples.
CC The duglike proceß.
DD The bodkinlike appendix.
EE The jugal proceß.
F Teh External face of the Wedglike bone.
G H G H The winglike processes.
I The bone which distinguisheth the Nostrils.
KK The sixt bone of the upper Jaw.
kk The hole which passeth the Nerve of the fourth
pair to the Pallat.
LL Part of the fourth bone of the superior Jaw.
m The four Teeth called Cutters.
nn The two dog teeth.
oo The rest of the Teeth called Grinders.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE SIXTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table shews, the Brain laid bare from the Skull, with the Dura and
Pia Mater ; also its Cavities and Processes.
FIG. I.
AA The Dura Mater covering the Brain.
aa The Veins and Arteries distributed on it.
B The Brain covered only with the Pia Mater.
bb The circumvolutions of the Brain.
ccc The Vessels distributed to the Pia Mater from
the third Cavity.
C The Dura Mater drawn backwards.
FIG. II. 
AA The longer Proceß of the Dura Mater called
Falx, turned out of its Scituation.
aa The third cavity of the Dura Mater open.
bb The lesser inferior cavity of the same.
BB A portion of the callous body laid to view.
CCCC The brain deduced a little to the sides.
cccc The vessels in the fourth cavity, stretched o-
ver the callous body.
DD The Dura Mater hanging down on each side.
FIG. III.
AA The substance of the Brain.
BB The callous body drawn a little outwards.
bb The two Legs of the Vault something unco-
vered.
c The hooklike proceß drawn backwards.
DD The right fore ventricle opened on the upper
part.
EE The left fore Ventricle opened on the upper
part.
FF The Plexus Choroides.
G Part of the Speculum Lucidum.
HH The Dura Meninx detracted on each side.
FIG. IV.
AA The brain explained by equal Section.
B The Fornix taken up and bowed down-
wards.
CC The superior part of the right fore ventricle
deducted.
DD The superior part of the left fore ventricle
in like manner explained.
E The chink designing the third Ventricle.
FF The Dura Mater.
a The Glandula Pinealis.
bb The Protuberances, called Buttocks.
cc The Protuberances called Testicles
d The Protuberance likned to a womans Pri-
vities. These are better expressed in the
first Figure of the following Table.
FIG. V.
AA. BB. CC. The brain and foremost ventricles ex-
plained in their upper part.
f A portion of the Plexus Choroides stret-
ched upwards by the foremost ventricles
D The shorter proceß of the Dura Mater.
EEE The longer proceß thereof.
F The Torcular of Herophilus.
G The Dura Mater detracted.
a The first cavity of the Dura Mater.
b The second cavity of the Dura Mater.
ccc The third cavity of the Dura Mater.
ddd The lesser cavity in the hooklike proceß.
e The fourth cavity of the Dura Mater.
FIG. VI.
AA BB CC ff signifie the same they did in the fift
Figure.
DD The Cerebellum conspicuous in his natural place.
E The wormlike proceß of the Cerebellum.
FF The Dura Mater hanging down.
GG The same with the cavities rowled down-
wards.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE SEVENTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table presents in larger Figures the Cavities both of the Brain and Cerebellum, as
they are shewed by the Dissections of the Ancients.
FIG. I
Shews the inferior Cavity of the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, the original of the optick Nerves, the
fourth Ventricle with its Protuberances, the Legs of the Vault, and whatsoever Arantius
compared by the Sea-horse, or Silk-worm.
AAAA The Dura Mater detracted.
B The Proceß of the sieve-like Bone like a
crist.
CC Part of the Os Sphenois, shewing it self
under the membrane, the Brain being ta-
ken away.
DD The foremost proceß of the Os Sphenois,
making the Cavity of the Saddle.
EEEE A portion of the Brain left.
F The foremost leg of the Vault bowed fore-
wards.
GG The hinder legs of the Vault.
HH The Sea-horse, or Silk-worms of Arantius.
IIII The inferior Cavity of the foremost ven-
tricles.
K The extremity of the callous body sticking
out like Buttocks.
L The Glandula Pinealis.
MM The Protuberances called Testicles.
NN The cavity between the Brain and Cere-
bellum commonly called the fourth ven-
tricle.
OOOO Part of the Plexus Chorois bowed back-
wards, which is carried by the superior
cavity of the ventricles.
PP The foremost portion of the Basis of the
Brain.
Q The bottom of the third ventricle in which
behind is the hole likned to the Funda-
ment ; it tends to the beginning of the
marrow of the back ; before is the hole
compared to the womb, and is carried
to the Funnel.
RRRR A portion of the Plexus Chorois turned
backwards, which is extended to the
fourth inferior cavity.
SS The roots of the optick Nerves.
T . The uniting of the optick Nerves.
VV The optick Nerves again severed and pas-
sing towards the Eyes.
FIG. II.
This Figure shews the proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum, which the best
Anatomists call the fourth Ventricle.
AAAA Each lobe of the Cerebellum whol.
BBBB The internal face of the Cerebellum laid
open by incision.
CC The worm-like Proceß of the Cerebellum
whose superior and round part is taken a-
way.
DD The proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum,
with its two cavities.
E The prominence conspicuous between the
two cavities.
F The passage from the third ventricle to the
marrow of the back.
G The Cavity of the marrow of the back like
a pen.
H The chink in the said cavity.
II The descending trunk of the marrow of the
back cut off. 








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
OF THE EIGHTEENTH BRASSE
PLATE IN THIS BOOK.
This Table shews the rise of the Nerves within the Skull, also the principal branches
of the third and fourth pairs, the Glandula Pituitaria with the Funnel, the
Rete Mirable, the fourth Ventricle and the most special
Veins arising from the marrow of the Back.
FIG. I.
Shews the Brain a great portion of it being taken
away above with the Cerebellum diducted
to the side.
A The Nerve of smelling.
a Its proceß called Mamillaris.
B The Optick Nerve or first pair.
CC The Nerve of the second pair.
DD The Nerve of the third pair.
EE The Nerve of the fourth pair.
FF The Nerve of the fift pair.
GG The Nerve of the sixt pair. The Nerve of
the seventh pair by reason of its deep rise
appears not.
FIG. II.
The side of the skull being broken off, together
with the Eye whol, and the cheek
divided, is shewed.
A The Nerve of the third pair.
B Its branch which goes out at the hole of the
bone of the forehead.
C A branch of the same pair which goes out by the
hole of the fourth bone of the upper Jaw.
D The Nerve of the fourth pair.
E Its branch which goes to the teeth and gums of
the upper Jaw.
F Its branch which is carried to the Tongue.
G Its branch which enters the lower Jaw.
H The same branch which passeth out at the hole
of the lower Jaw.
FIG. III.
The Brain with the Marrow of the back being tur-
ned, these things come to view.
AA The Nerves of swelling.
aa Their Dug-like processes.
BB The two legs of the Nerves of the first pair.
CC The greater branch of the Artery Carotis,
the interior being joyned to the Vertebral
Artery OO
D The Glandula Pituataria.
E The Funnel.
F The Protuberances of the Brain, set before
the passage which carries the flegm to the
Funnel.
GG The Nerves of the second pair cut off.
HH The beginnings of the Nervs of the third pair.
II The beginning of the Nervs of the fourth
pair.
KK The beginning of the Nerves of the fift
pair.
LL The beginning of the Nervs of the sixt pair.
MM The beginning of the Nervs of the seventh pair
NNN The beginning of the marrow of the back,
between the skull and the first Vertebra.
OO The common branch of the Vertebral artery,
which being divided after its union with
the Carotis artery CC makes up the Rete
mirabile with it, about the seat of the
Wedg-like bone.
PPPP Smal branches of Arteries called the Rete mi-
rabile.
FIG. IV.
AA The Cerebellum and his globes.
B The wormlike proceß of the Cerebellum.
CCCC The proceß of the Cerebellum, called the
bridg.
DD The beginning of the marrow of the back.
E The cavity of the marrow of the back,called
the pen.
F The fourth Ventricle laid open.
FIG. V.
A The trunk of the marrow of the back descen-
ding as it may be publickly shewed being
taken out of the body.
BB The branches arising from the three pairs of
Nerves of the Neck, and two of the Breast,
to be distributed to the hands.
bb The small branches running to the muscles of
the shoulder.
CC The first pair of Nerves of the hands.
DD The second pair.
EE The third pair.
FF The fourth pair.
GG The fift pair.
HH The sixt pair called Subcutaneus.
IIII The pairs of intercostal Nerves, the two lo-
wermost of which pertain to the Loyns.
K The first pair which is carried to the Foot.
LL The second pair.
MM The third pair.
NN The fourth and greatest pair.
O The smal Nervs of the marrow of the back,
which are carried to the bladder and muscles
of the Fun dament, and to the Genitals of
both Sexes.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
of the ninteenth Brass Plate in this Book.
This Table comprehends the Eye-lids with the Muscle called Levator; also the
proper Muscles of the Eyes ; the Membranes and the Humors
included in the Membranes.
FIG. I.
AA The Levator muscle of the superior Eye-lid.
B Its tendon thinly opened.
CC The Cartilages of the Eye-lids.
DD The Caruncle in the internal angle.
dd The Puncta Lacrymalia.
E The external angle of the Eye-lid.
FIG. II.
AA The Fat behind the Eyes.
BBB The muscles of the Eyes not separated.
CC Part of the Eye covered with the tendons of 
the muscles.
FIG. III
A The right muscle lifting up the Eye.
aaa&c. Small Nerves carrying motion, sence, and
spirit.
B The right muscle depressing Eye.
C The right muscle drawing to the Eye.
D The right muscle drawing the Eye from.
E The inferior oblique muscle, whose tendon is but
only separated from the part of that which fol-
lows.
F The superior oblick muscle.
G The Trochlea of the same muscle.
H The Sclerotes covering the hinder part of the Eye.
II A portion of the Optick Nerve inserted into the
Eye.
FIG. IV.
Shews a Sheeps Eye, and in it the seventh muscle
which Man needs not.
A B C D The four right muscles.
E The inferior oblick muscle, which here is large.
F The superior oblick muscle which is slender.
G The Trochlea of the superior oblick muscle.
H The seventh muscle of Brutes drawing the Eye to.
I The hinder part of the Eye covered with the ten-
don of the seventh muscle.
K A part of the optick Nerve included in the se-
ventrhmuscle.
FIG. V.
A B C D Shew the ame with the former, the oblick
muscles being removed.
aaaa The common membrane called Innominata.
bb The Iris transparent through the Cornea.
FIG. VI.
AAA The Membrane Sclerotes dissected.
B The Membrana Cornea.
C A part of the optick Nerve.
FIG. VII.
A The Membrana Uvea.
a The hole in the Uvea or Pupilla.
BB The Ciliar Ligament with its strings.
CC The Membrana Choroides looking black.
FIG VIII.
AA The Net-like Membrane.
aa A Rupture in it upon the Vitrial, which by
reason of its softneß is unavoidable in a
Dissection.
BBB The Membrana Choroides not yet separated.
CCC The thinkneß of the Membrane Sclerotes.
D Part of the optick Nerve.
FIG. IX.
The three humors of the Eyes received
in a Vessel.
A The Crystalline Humor posited in the Cavity of
the Vitrial.
BB Some appearance of the Ciliar strings.
CC The Vitrial humor.
DD The aqueal humor, being but little, and placed
round about the Vitrial.








AN EXPLANATION of the TABLE
of the twenteth brass Plate in this Book.
This Table represents the external Ear with his Muscles and Cartilages, as also the inter-
nal or chief Organ of Hearing, its Cavities, Bones, Passages and Nerves, as they
are found out by Dissection of such Bodies as are grown up.
FIG. I.
Shews the external Ear whol, with
its muscles and Cavities.
AA The Helix of the Ear.
BB The Anthelix.
C The Tragus, or beard of the Ear.
D The Antitragus.
E The external lobe of the Ear.
FF The external Concha of the Ear.
GG The cavity between the Helices
called Innominata.
H The muscle moving the Ear right
upwards.
III The three-fold muscle with his
tendon moving the Ear oblickly
upwards , divided into so many
parts.
FIG. II.
Shew the external Ear conspi-
cuous behind.
AA The skin with the Membrane
stretched upwards and down-
wards.
BB The Cartilage which makes the
Ear.
C The hole for the passage of hea-
ring.
D A portion of the Ligament of the
external Ear.
E Part of the Lobus of the Ear.
FIG. III.
Shews the fore part of the
internal Ear.
A Part of the bone of the Temples
containing the rocky proceß.
B The passage of hearing.
C The beginning of the passage or
hive.
D The duglike proceß.
E The bodkinlike proceß broken off.
FIG. IV.
The bone of the fore-going Figure
is shewed, in which the passage of
hearing is cut off, that so the mem-
brane of the Timpanum
may be seen.
AA The beginning of the passage of
hearing.
BB The membrane of the Timpa-
num.
C The little foot of the Malleus
transparent by the membrane.
D The duglike proceß.
E The bodkinlike appendix.
FIG. V.
Shews the Muscles of the in-
ternal Ear.
A The muscle moving the mem-
brane and Maleolus outwards.
B The membrane of the Timpanum.
CC The muscle moving the Malleo-
lus and membrane inwards.
E The head of the Malleolus.
FIG. VI.
A Part of the passage of Hearing
passing to the Timpanum.
B C The cavity of the Timpanum,
in which
B The oval hole.
C The round hole.
FIG. VII
Shews the rocky process with the
smal bones of the Timpanum
in their scituation.
A The Malleolus.
B The Anvil.
C The superior part of the stirrop
conspicuous.
DD The bowing of the Cochlea.
FIG. 7.
Shews the three small bones out
of their scituation.
A The Malleolus with its two pro-
cesses, its short and long.
B The Anvil applied to the Mal-
leolus.
C The Stirrop.
D The small bone joyned to the Li-
gament of the stirrop.
FIG. VIII.
Shews the inferior face of the
bone of the Temples.
AA The extremity of a quil thrust
through that passage of Hearing
which is carried to the pallat.
BB Shews the same passage broke off
from the next part.
FIG. IX.
AA The cavity of the Cochlea,
whose broader part goes to the La-
byrinth.
BB The cavity of the Labyrinth, in
which the oval hole is conspicuous:
also four other holes which open
themselves in the circles are obum-
brated by a black colour : the fift
in the extremity of the circle of the
Cochlea, is broken off. If you
would see how they are in Infants,
look the eighth Table, and the
seventh figure.
FIG. X.
AA The beginning of the passage of
the first hole of the bone of the Tem-
ples, into which the Nerve of Hea-
ring passeth.
BB The rocky proceß of the bone of
the Temples, in which the cavities
are contained.
FIG. XI.
A B C D The end of the passage in-
to which the Nerve of Hearing
proceeds laid open, the bone being
taken away.
B The cavity in which the softer
portion of the Nerve of Hearing
lies in the Centre of the Cochlea.
C The proceß between each portion
of the Nerve standing up like a
bridg.
D Another cavity called Cæcum by
the Ancients, Aquæductus by Fal-
lopius, by which the harder portion
of the nerve of hearing obliquely
descends.
EE Two footsteps of the circles in
the Labyrinth, which you may see
whol, Table 8. figure 7,8.
FIG. XII.
Contains a portion of the bone of
the Temples, in which the Timpa-
num being taken away, and the
passage which contains the
Nerve of Hearing there 
appears.
AA The softer portion of the nerve
of Hearing.
BB The harder portion of the nerve
of Hearing, obliquely descending
under the Timpanum, being thic-
ker about the place it goes out.
CC A small Nerve from the fourth
pair joyning it self to the harder
nerve of Hearing.








An EXPLANATION of the TABLE of the one
and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book.
This Table exactly presents the Bones of Man to your view, so that the Composition
of the Bones we mentioned before in the Abdomen, Breast, and Head are here
seen, especially the Bones of the Hands and Feet are seen both
before and behind ; also the Ligaments of the Thigh and
Tibia ; lastly, the Bones called Sesamoides
are curiously represented.
FIG. I.
Shews the Sceleton of a Body
grown up.
AA The internal side of each Sca-
pula.
BB Both the Claviculæ.
CC The bone of the shoulder, other-
wise called the bone of the arm.
aa The head of the shoulder produ-
duced from the appendix.
bb The external bunch of each
shoulder.
cc The internal bunch of the shoul-
der.
DD The bone of the Cubit called
Radius.
EE The bone of the Cubit called
Ulna.
FF The eight bones of the Carpus.
GG The thumb composed of three
bones.
HH The Metacarpus composed of
four bones.
II The four fingers composed of
three bones.
KK The thigh which some call
Crus.
LL The Mola, or Knee-pan.
dd The head of the bone of the
thigh, or superior appendix.
ee The neck of the bone of the
thigh.
ff Trochanter, or Rotator major.
gg Trochanter, or Rotator minor.
hh The appendix, or inferior head
of the thigh.
MM The Tibia.
NN The Fibula.
ii The internal ancle.
kk The external ancle.
OO The seven bones of the Tarsus
conspicuous before.
PP The five bones of the Metatar-
sus.
QQ The bones of the toes, of which
the great toe hath two, and the rest
three apiece.
** &c. The appendices of the shoul-
der, Radius, Thigh, Tibia, distin-
guished by a small line from the rest
of the bone.
FIG. II.
Contains the Scapula with the Cla-
vicula, to which the bones of
the Shoulder, Cubit, and
Hand are joyned.
A The left Clavicula, in which
a The head which is lightly sinewous
where it is committed to the Ster-
num.
b The other extremity of the Clavi-
cula, whereby it is joyned to the
proceß of the Scapula.
B The Scapula.
c The short proceß of the Scapula
receiving the shoulder.
d The proceß of the Scapula called
Coracois.
e The proceß of the Scapula called
Spina.
f The superior angle.
g The inferior angle.
hh The basis of the Scapula.
C The notable hinder bone of the
shoulder.
f The greater or backward cavity of
the bone of the shoulder.
g The crooked proceß of the bone of
the Ulna.
D The bone Ulna.
E The Radius.
F The external face of the Wrest.
G The Metacarpus consisting of four
bones.
H The Thumb consisting of three
bones.
II The orders of the fingers.
FIG. III.
Contains the eight bones of the
Wrest expressed largely, that so
they might be the better
distinguished.
FIG. IV.
Shews the Os Ischium, Illium, and
Pubis, and under them, the thigh
leg, and Foot.
A The external face of the Os Ilium
B The Acetabulum which receives
the head of the thigh.
C The thigh conspicuius behind, in
which
a The superior appendix.
b Trochanter major.
? The rought line of the thigh.
c Trochanter minor.
d The posterior cavity of the infe-
rior appendix.
ee The heads of the inferior appen-
dix.
f The protuberances distinguishing
the cavities of the Tibia.
D The Tibia conspicuous behind.
g The internal ancle.
E The Fibula.
h The external ancle.
** The appendices of the Tibia.
F The Tarsus.
G The Metatarsus.
H The great toe consisting of two
bones.
FIG. V.
Propounds the bones of the Tarsus
distinctly, in which
A Os Astragali.
B Os Calcanei.
C Os Cymbiforme.
D Os Cubiforme.
EEE The three other Wedlike bones.
FIG. VI.
Shew the four greater and four lesser
bones called Sesamoides.
FIG. VII.
Shews the superior part of the thigh
with the Acetabulum.
aa A broad Ligament compassing the
joynt of the thigh dissected.
b A round Ligament arising out of
the Acetabulum.
FIG. VIII.
The inferior part of the Thigh and
superior part of the Leg
is shewed.
a A broad Ligament compassing the
Joynt.
b A Ligament produced out of the
Sepiment.
cc The cavities of the Tibia re-
ceiving the thigh.
d The knee-pan with a portion of
the tendon joyned to it. 








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
of the two and twentieth Brass Plate in
this Book.
This Table comprehends the Muscles which move the Shoulder, Cubit, and Hand :
of which the greater part stick to their beginnings and ends.
FIG. I.
A Musculus Deltoides separated from the beginning
B Infrascapularis separated.
C Rotundus minor.
D Rotundus major.
E The pectoral muscle separated from the breast,
vide Chap. IX.
F The fleshy portion of the broadest muscle of the
back, vide Chap. XII.
G Musculus Biceps.
H The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder in his
Scituation.
II The Brachiæus under the Biceps.
K The muscle Palmaris hanging from its original.
L A portion of the Supinator.
M The external bower of the Wrest.
N The internal bower of the Wrest.
O The bower of the second Internodium of the fin-
gers.
P The bower of the third Internodium of the fin-
ders.
Q The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb
in their first scituation.
R The bowers of the second Internodium of the
thumb in their scituation.
S The Abductor of the little finger.
aa The internal face of the Scapula.
b The tendon of the muscle Palmaris.
c A portion of the tendon which bows the third
Internodium of the thumb.
d The Ligament of the Wrest in its scituation.
FIG. II.
A The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder.
B The muscle Brachiæus whol.
C The round Pronator of the Radius.
D The bower of the third Internodium of the
thumb out of his scituation.
E The square Pronator of the Radius.
F The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb
out of their scituation.
G The bowers of the second Internodium of the
thumb out of their scituation.
aa The internal side of the Scapula.
b Os Humeri.
c Os Radii.
d Os Ulnæ.
ee The membranous Ligament of the Ulna and
Radius.
ffff The muscles commonly called Adductors.
b The Abductor of the little finger.
FIG. III.
A The first Suprascapularis removed out of his
place.
B The second Suprascapularis.
C Rotundus minor.
D Rotundus major.
E The long muscle extending the Cubit.
F The short extender of the Cubit.
G The internal extender of the wrest.
H The external extender of the wrest, having here
but one tendon.
K The extendors of the second and third Interno-
dij of the fingers united.
L The extendor of the third Internodium of the
thumb.
M The extendor of the first Internodium of the
thumb, having here but one single body and
tendon.
aa The proceß of the Scapula called Spiniformis.
æ The muscle Anconeus.
bb The bone of the shoulder.
c The external knob of the shoulder.
d The internal knob of the shoulder.
e The tendines which extend the second and third
Internodium gathered together.
ff &c. The tendons of the same muscles applying to
the Internodij
g The annular Ligament of the wrest loosed.
FIG. IV.
A The external face of the Scapula.
B The bone of the shoulder covered with the Pe-
riostium.
C Os Radij.
D Os Ulnæ.
E The muscle of the Radius called Supinator lon-
gus.
F The muscle of the Radius called Supinator bre-
vis.
G The muscle Anconeus.
H The membranous Ligament of the Radius and
Ulna.
IIII The three interosseal muscles with their Auxi-
liary.
K The Abductor of the thumb.
FIG. V.
A The muscle bowing the second Internodium of
the fingers called Perforatus.
aa &c. Their tendons.
B The muscle bowing the third internodium of the
fingers called Perforans.
bb Its tendines passing through the clefts of the ten-
dines of the former.
cccc The muscles bowing the first Internodium, or
Lumbricals.
DD The bowers of the thumb in their scitua-
tion.
cc A portion of the tendon bowing the third in-
ternodium of the thumb.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
of the three and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book.
This Table shews the Muscles produced by Nature for the various motions of
the Thighs, Legs, and Feet.
FIG. I.
A The greater part of the muscle called Psoas,
which you may see in Table x. figure 1.
in its Natural scituation, here it is separated
from its beginning, and joyned to the internal
Iliack muscle, and descends to the thigh.
B The internal Iliack muscle.
CC The muscle Triceps something uncovered : you
may see it whol in the next Figure.
D Musculus Lividus.
E The membranous muscle conspicuous with a fle-
shy body about his beginning, whose broad ten-
don is separated from the parts under it.
FF The right muscle.
GG Musculus vastus externus.
HH Musculus vastus internus.
II Musculus facialis.
K Musculus Tibialis anticus.
LL The Musculus Peroneus secundus.
MM The Extendor of the third internodium of the
toes.
N The extender of the third internodium of the
great toe.
aa The appendix of the Os Ilium laid open before.
b The extremity of the Os Pubis.
cccc The tendon of the membranous Muscle.
dd A portion of the muscle Gasterocnemius han-
ging out, the leg being depressed : the third Fi-
gure shews it hanging out of its scituation un-
der the character KK.
e The membranous Ligament of the Tibia and
Fibula.
ffff The tendines of the muscles extending the third
Internodium.
g The transverse Ligament of the foot separated.
FIG. II.
A The internrl face of the Os Ilium.
B A portion of the great muscle Glutæus, which
the following figure represents separated from
the middle Glutæus.
CCC Musculus Triceps.
DD A portion of the Gasterocnemius and Soleus
as yet joyned.
EE Tibialis posticus.
FF Peroneus primus.
G The extender of the second internodium of the
toes in its scituation.
aaaa The interosseal muscles.
FIG. III.
A Glutæus major separated and depressed to the
side.
B Glutæus medius in his scituation.
C Musculus Pyriformis.
D The fourth muscle moving the thigh about.
E Obturator internus entring the fleshy purse.
FF Musculus gracilis.
GG Musculus Seminervosus.
HH Musculus Semimembranosus elegantly expres-
sed.
III Musculus Biceps.
KK The Gasterocnemius turned backwards , to
whose beginnings two small bones called Sa-
samoides stick.
LL Musculus soleus in his scituation.
M The little muscle called Plantaris.
N The tendon spread abroad from the heel under
the soal of the foot.
O The Abductor of the great toe.
P The Abductor of the little toe.
Q The interosseal muscle pertaining to the little
toe.
aa The brim of the Os Ilium.
b The fleshy purse.
FIG. IV.
A The internal face of the Os Ilium.
B Musculus Glutæus minor in his scituation.
C Musculus Glutæus medius out of his scitua-
tion.
D Musculus Pyriformis.
E The fourth muscle moving the thigh about.
e The exterual Obturator.
F The internal Obturator.
G The fleshy purse.
H Musculus Popliteus.
II Musculus perforans.
K The muscle bowing the third internodium of
the great toe.
L Musculus perforatus in his scituation.
M The Abductor of the little toe.
N The Abductor of the great toe in his scitua-
tion.
FIG. V.
a The greater Adductor of the great toe.
bb The Abdcutor of the great toe.
c The Abductor of the little toe.
dddd The internal interosseal Muscles.
e The lesser Adductor of the great toe.
FIG. VI.
A The muscle Perforatus which bows the second in-
ternodium.
B The bower of the third internodium of the great
toe.
C Musculus perforans, or the bower of the third in-
ternodium.
DD A portion of the musculous flesh joyned to the be-
ginnings of the lumbrical muscles.
eeee The lumbrical muscles.
ffff The interosseal muscles with the Abductors of
the great and little toe.








AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE
of the four and twentieth Brass Plate in this Book.
This last Table shews the Veins, Arteries,and Nerves of the extream Parts, being not care-
full of the smallest branches, the huge multitude of which would obscure the greater,
and dull the Brain of the Learner: The most famous are delineated, such as
are shewed publickly in the Theater in Dissection of Men of perfect age.
FIG. I.
Shews the Veins distributed to the
Hand.
A The axillar branch of the Vena
Cava.
BBB Vena Cephalica.
CCC Vena Basilica.
a The external Scapular.
b The branch of the Cephalica,
which is carried to the Deltois.
c d Branches of the Cephalica di-
stributed to the bowers of the arm.
e The deep branch of the Cephalica.
ff The internal branch of the Cepha-
lica making the Median.
g The Median vein descending.
h The Cephalica of the Hand.
ii The external branch of the Ce-
phalica.
æ The Salvatella of the Hand.
k The internal Scapular.
l The superior breast-vein.
m The inferior breast-vein.
nnn The Basilick branches carried to
the Extendors of the Cubit.
oo The deep branch of the Basilica.
p A singular branch of the deep
branch, which is carried out to the
cubit, with the fourth pair of
Nerves.
q The external branch of the deep
basilical.
r The internal branch of the same,
s The Subcutaneus branch of the ba-
silica.
tt The internal branch of the Subcu-
taneus branch, which with the ce-
phalical, procureth the median.
u Its branch joyning it self to the
common vein.
x The external vein of the Subcu-
taneus branch of the Basilica.
yy The greater branch of the external
Subcutaneus.
z The lesser branch of the same.
FIG. II.
The Arteries distributed to the
Arm.
A The axillar branch of the artery.
a The internal scapular.
b The external scapular.
c The superior Breast-artery.
d The inferior breast-artery.
e f g Branches of the artery distri-
buted to the muscles of the shoulder.
hhh Branches of the artery distribu-
ted to the joynt of the Elbow.
B The external branch of the artery
in the cubit.
C The internal branch.
ii The branch which is carried to the
muscles of the Radius.
k The branch carried to the muscles
of the Ulna.
l m n o Branches carried from the in-
ternal branch to the wrest, little,
ring and middle finger.
pp Branches carried to the hands
from the external branch.
qq r s Branches pertaining to the
thumb, fore, and middle finger.
FIG. III.
Designs the Nerves distributed to
the hand.
4 5 6 7. The four Vertebræ of the
Neck.
1. The first Verbra of the breast.
a b c d The five Nerves proceeding
out of the holes of the Vertebræ.
ff The first pair of Nerves descending
from the plexure ††.
gg The second pair.
hh The third pair.
ii The fourth pair bigger than the
rest.
kk The fift pair.
ll The sixt pair which is subcutaneus.
FIG. IV.
Contains the veins of the foot.
A The crural branch of the Vena
Cava.
aaaa The Vein Saphena.
bbb The branches of the Saphena
distributed by the interior part of the
thigh.
cc The Vein Ischias.
dd The internal Musculæ.
ee The external Muscula.
fff The vein Poplitea consisting of
a double beginning.
gg The internal branch of the crural
vein.
hh The external branch of the same.
i The first branch of the external
crural.
kk The second branch of the same.
ll The remainder of the same.
m The vein of the foot called Ischias.
FIG. V.
Contains the Arteries of the Foot.
AAA The crural Artery produced
from the external Iliack branch of
the great Artery.
a The artery Pudenda.
b The artery carried to the internal
Iliack muscle.
c The artery Ischias.
dd The external Muscula.
e The internal Muscula.
ffff The arteries distributed to the
membrane and fat.
gg The artery Poplitea.
hh The arteries called Surals.
ii The foremost branch of the crural
artery.
kk The first hindmost branch of the
same.
ll The second hindermost branch of
the same.
FIG. VI.
Represents of the Nerves of the Foot.
2.3.4.5. The four Vertebræ of the
Loyns.
66 The Os Sacrum.
A A pair of Nerves pertaining to 
the transverse muscles of the Abdo-
men.
BB The first pair of Nerves of the 
foot.
CC The second pair.
aaa A branch of the same which ac-
companies the Saphena.
bb The remainder of the same
branch.
DD The third pair of of the Nerves
of the foot.
EEE The fourth pair, which is the
greatest.
c Its Branch which turns back to the
Buttocks and skin of the thigh.
ddd Branches sent to the bowers of
the leg.
eeee Branches sent to the bowers of 
the Thigh.
f A branch sent to the muscle Plan-
taris and the extenders of the Tar-
sus.
g.h Two external branches sent to
the toes and the muscles of the Fi-
bula.
i The internal branch carried to the
great and second toe.
k.l The internal branches sent to the
sural muscles.
m The remainder of the Nerve of
the sixt pair, dispersed by a double
branch under the foot to the toes.
FIG. VII
Shews the Basilica vein open, in
which three shutters appear.
FIG. VIII.
Shews a branch of the crural vein o-
pen, and three double, and
one single shutter.
FIG. IX. and X.
Shew a portion of the Nerve of the
fourth pair divided into smal Nerves
like threeds, in gathering together
of which, the wonderful po-
wer of Nature appears.